Rules for Classification and Construction

I Ship Technology
3 Special Craft

1 High Speed Craft

Edition 2012
 The following Rules come into force on 1 March 2012.

Alterations to the preceding Edition are marked by beams at the text margin.

Germanischer Lloyd SE

Head Office
Brooktorkai 18, 20457 Hamburg, Germany
Phone: +49 40 36149-0
Fax: +49 40 36149-200
headoffice@gl-group.com

www.gl-group.com

"General Terms and Conditions" of the respective latest edition will be applicable
(see Rules for Classification and Construction, I - Ship Technology, Part 0 - Classification and Surveys).

Reproduction by printing or photostatic means is only permissible with the consent of

Germanischer Lloyd SE.

Published by: Germanischer Lloyd SE, Hamburg

I - Part 3 Table of Contents Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 3

Table of Contents

Premise

Preamble

Section 1 General Comments and Requirements

1.1 General Comments …………………………………………………………………... 1-1
1.2 General Requirements ……………………………………………………………….. 1-1
1.3 Application …………………………………………………………………………... 1-1
1.4 Definitions …………………………………………………………………………… 1-2
1.5 Surveys ………………………………………………………………………………. 1-5
1.6 Approvals ……………………………………………………………………………. 1-6
1.7 Maintenance of Conditions after Survey ..................................................................... 1-6
1.8 High-Speed Craft Safety Certificate ............................................................................ 1-7
1.9 Permit to Operate High-Speed Craft …………………………………………………. 1-8
1.10 Control ........................................................................................................................ 1-9
1.11 Equivalents …………………………………………………………………………... 1-9
1.12 Information to be made available ................................................................................ 1-9
1.13 Further Developments ................................................................................................. 1-9
1.14 Circulation of Safety Information ................................................................................ 1-9
1.15 Review of the Code ..................................................................................................... 1-9

Section 2 Buoyancy, Stability and Subdivision

C2.0 Documents to be submitted ......................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 General ........................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2 Intact Buoyancy and Watertight and Weathertight Integrity ....................................... 2-2
2.3 Intact Stability in the Displacement Mode …………………………………………... 2-7
2.4 Intact Stability in the Non-Displacement Mode .......................................................... 2-8
2.5 Intact Stability in the Transitional Mode .................................................................... 2-8
2.6 Buoyancy and Stability in the Displacement Mode following Damage ……………... 2-8
2.7 Inclining and Stability Information ………………………………………………….. 2-12
2.8 Loading and Stability Assessment …………………………………………………... 2-13
2.9 Marking and Recording of the Design Waterline …………………………………… 2-13
2.10 General ………………………………………………………………………………. 2-13
2.11 Intact Stability in the Displacement Mode …………………………………………... 2-14
2.12 Intact Stability in the Non-Displacement Mode ……………………………………... 2-14
2.13 Buoyancy and Stability in the Displacement Mode following Damage ……………... 2-14
2.14 Inclining and Stability Information ………………………………………………….. 2-14
2.15 Buoyancy and Stability in the Displacement Mode following Damage ……………... 2-15
2.16 Inclining ……………………………………………………………………………… 2-15
Chapter 1 Table of Contents I - Part 3
Page 4 GL 2012

Section 3 Structures
C3.0 Documents to be submitted ………………………………………………………….. 3-1
3.1 General ………………………………………………………………………………. 3-1
3.2 Materials ……………………………………………………………………………... 3-1
3.3 Structural Strength …………………………………………………………………… 3-1
3.4 Cyclic Loads …………………………………………………………………………. 3-1
3.5 Design Criteria ………………………………………………………………………. 3-1
3.6 Trials …………………………………………………………………………………. 3-1
C3.1 General ………………………………………………………………………………. 3-1
C3.2 Materials and Connections …………………………………………………………... 3-6
C3.3 Design Acceleration …………………………………………………………………. 3-10
C3.4 Overall Loads ………………………………………………………………………... 3-13
C3.5 Local Loads ………………………………………………………………………….. 3-17
C3.6 Direct Calculations for Monohulls and Catamarans ………………………………… 3-24
C3.7 Steel and Aluminium Alloy Craft ……………………………………………………. 3-37
C3.8 Fibre-reinforced Plastic Craft ………………………………………………………... 3-50
C3.9 Hull Appendages …………………………………………………………………….. 3-63
C3.10 Rudder ……………………………………………………………………………….. 3-65
C3.11 Stabilizers ……………………………………………………………………………. 3-72

Appendix C3A1 Special Requirements for Scantlings of Hydrofoil Hull Structures

C3A1.1 Foreword …………………………………………………………………………….. A1-1
C3A1.2 General ………………………………………………………………………………. A1-1
C3A1.3 Definitions and Symbols …………………………………………………………….. A1-1
C3A1.4 Documents to be submitted ………………………………………………………….. A1-1
C3A1.5 Longitudinal Strength ………………………………………………………………... A1-2
C3A1.6 Local Strength ……………………………………………………………………….. A1-2
C3A1.7 Foils ………………………………………………………………………………….. A1-5

Appendix C3A2 Requirements for Scantlings of Air-cushion Vehicle Hull Structures

C3A2.1 Foreword …………………………………………………………………………….. A2-1
C3A2.2 General ………………………………………………………………………………. A2-1
C3A2.3 Documents to be submitted ………………………………………………………….. A2-1
C3A2.4 Overall Loads ………………………………………………………………………... A2-2
C3A2.5 Local Loads ………………………………………………………………………….. A2-4
C3A2.6 Load Factors …………………………………………………………………………. A2-5
C3A2.7 Allowable Stresses …………………………………………………………………... A2-6

Section 4 Accommodation and Escape Measures

C4.0 Documents to be submitted ......................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 General ………………………………………………………………………………. 4-1
I - Part 3 Table of Contents Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 5

4.2 Public Address and Information System …………………………………………….. 4-1

4.3 Design Acceleration Levels ………………………………………………………….. 4-1
4.4 Accommodation Design ……………………………………………………………... 4-2
4.5 Seating Construction ………………………………………………………………… 4-4
4.6 Safety Belts …………………………………………………………………………... 4-4
4.7 Exits and Means of Escape …………………………………………………………... 4-4
4.8 Evacuation Time ……………………………………………………………………... 4-5
4.9 Baggage, Stores, Shops and Cargo Compartments ………………………………….. 4-7
4.10 Noise Levels …………………………………………………………………………. 4-7
4.11 Protection of the Crew and Passengers ……………………………………………… 4-7

Section 5 Direction Control Systems

C5.0 Documents to be submitted ………………………………………………………….. 5-1
5.1 General ………………………………………………………………………………. 5-1
5.2 Reliability ……………………………………………………………………………. 5-1
5.3 Demonstrations ………………………………………………………………………. 5-2
5.4 Control Position ……………………………………………………………………… 5-3

Section 6 Anchoring, Towing and Berthing

C6.0 Documents to be submitted ………………………………………………………….. 6-1
6.1 General ………………………………………………………………………………. 6-1
6.2 Anchoring ……………………………………………………………………………. 6-1
6.3 Towing ……………………………………………………………………………….. 6-2
6.4 Berthing ………………………………………………………………………………. 6-2
C6.5 Equipment ……………………………………………………………………………. 6-4
C6.6 Shipboard fittings for towing …………………………………………………………. 6-6
C6.7 Mooring Equipment …………………………………………………………………… 6-7

Section 7 Fire Safety

C7.0 Documents to be submitted ………………………………………………………….. 7-1
7.1 General Requirements ……………………………………………………………….. 7-1
7.2 Definitions …………………………………………………………………………… 7-2
7.3 Classification of Space Use ………………………………………………………….. 7-2
7.4 Structural Fire Protection ……………………………………………………………. 7-4
7.5 Fuel and Other Flammable Fluid Tanks and Systems ……………………………….. 7-7
7.6 Ventilation …………………………………………………………………………… 7-9
7.7 Fire Detection and Extinguishing Systems …………………………………………... 7-10
7.8 Protection of Special Category Spaces and Ro-Ro Spaces ………………………….. 7-16
7.9 Miscellaneous ………………………………………………………………………... 7-18
7.10 Firefighter’s Outfits ………………………………………………………………….. 7-19
7.11 Arrangement …………………………………………………………………………. 7-20
Chapter 1 Table of Contents I - Part 3
Page 6 GL 2012

7.12 Ventilation …………………………………………………………………………… 7-20

7.13 Fixed Sprinkler System ……………………………………………………………… 7-20
7.14 Control Stations ……………………………………………………………………… 7-21
7.15 Cargo Spaces ………………………………………………………………………… 7-21
7.16 Fixed Sprinkler System ……………………………………………………………… 7-21
7.17 General ………………………………………………………………………………. 7-21

Section 8 Life-Saving Appliances and Arrangements

8.1 General and Definitions ……………………………………………………………… 8-1
8.2 Communications ……………………………………………………………………... 8-2
8.3 Personal Life-Saving Appliances ……………………………………………………. 8-2
8.4 Muster List, Emergency Instructions and Manuals ………………………………….. 8-3
8.5 Operating Instructions ……………………………………………………………….. 8-3
8.6 Survival Craft Stowage ………………………………………………………………. 8-4
8.7 Survival Craft and Rescue Boat Embarkation and Recovery Arrangements ………... 8-4
8.8 Line-throwing Appliance …………………………………………………………….. 8-5
8.9 Operational Readiness, Maintenance and Inspections ………………………………. 8-5
8.10 Survival Craft and Rescue Boats …………………………………………………….. 8-6
8.11 Helicopter Pick-up Areas ……………………………………………………………. 8-7

Section 9 Machinery
9.1 General ………………………………………………………………………………. 9-1
9.2 Engine (general) ……………………………………………………………………... 9-4
9.3 Gas Turbines ………………………………………………………………………… 9-4
9.4 Diesel Engines for Main Propulsion and Essential Auxiliaries ……………………... 9-5
9.5 Transmissions ………………………………………………………………………... 9-6
9.6 Propulsion and Lift Devices …………………………………………………………. 9-8
9.7 Independent Means of Propulsion for Category B Craft ……………………………. 9-8
9.8 Means for Return to a Port of Refuge for Category B Craft ………………………… 9-9
9.9 Essential Machinery and Control ……………………………………………………. 9-9

Section 10 Auxiliary Systems

C10.0 Documents to be submitted ………………………………………………………….. 10-1
10.1 General ………………………………………………………………………………. 10-1
10.2 Arrangement of Oil Fuel, Lubricating Oil and Other Flammable Oil ……………….. 10-10
10.3 Bilge Pumping and Drainage Systems ………………………………………………. 10-12
10.4 Ballast Systems ………………………………………………………………………. 10-14
10.5 Cooling Systems ……………………………………………………………………... 10-14
10.6 Engine Air Intake Systems …………………………………………………………... 10-15
10.7 Ventilation Systems ………………………………………………………………….. 10-15
10.8 Exhaust Systems ……………………………………………………………………... 10-16
I - Part 3 Table of Contents Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 7

C10.A.1 Compressed Air Systems …………………………………………………………….. 10-16

C10.A.2 Steam Heating, Feedwater and Condensate Systems ………………………………... 10-16
C10.A.3 Air, Overflow and Sounding Pipes …………………………………………………... 10-17
C10.A.4 Drinking Water Systems ……………………………………………………………... 10-18
C10.A.5 Sanitary Systems …………………………………………………………………….. 10-18
C10.A.6 Hydraulic Systems for Hatch Covers, Shell Closing Appliances,
Watertight Doors and Hoists ………………………………………………………… 10-18
10.9 Bilge Pumping and Drainage Systems ………………………………………………. 10-20
C10.B.1 Operating Systems for Watertight Doors …………………………………………….. 10-20
10.10 Bilge Pumping Systems ……………………………………………………………… 10-21
C10.C.1 Hydraulic Operating Systems for Watertight Doors ………………………………… 10-21

Section 11 Remote Control, Alarm and Safety Systems

C11.0 Documents to be submitted ………………………………………………………….. 11-1
11.1 Definitions …………………………………………………………………………… 11-1
11.2 General ………………………………………………………………………………. 11-1
11.3 Emergency Controls …………………………………………………………………. 11-2
11.4 Alarm System ………………………………………………………………………... 11-2
11.5 Safety System ………………………………………………………………………... 11-4
C11.6 Stand-by Systems ……………………………………………………………………. 11-4

Section 12 Electrical Installations

C12.0 Documents to be submitted ………………………………………………………….. 12-1
12.1 General ………………………………………………………………………………. 12-1
12.2 Main Source of Electrical Power ……………………………………………………. 12-2
12.3 Emergency Source of Electrical Power ……………………………………………… 12-4
12.4 Starting Arrangements for Emergency Generating Sets ……………………………... 12-5
12.5 Steering and Stabilization ……………………………………………………………. 12-5
12.6 Precautions against Shock, Fire and Other Hazards of Electrical Origin …………… 12-6
12.7 General ………………………………………………………………………………. 12-8
12.8 General ………………………………………………………………………………. 12-11

Section 13 Shipborne Navigational System and Equipment and Voyage Data Recorders
13.1 General ………………………………………………………………………………. 13-1
13.2 Compasses …………………………………………………………………………… 13-1
13.3 Speed and Distance Measurement …………………………………………………… 13-1
13.4 Echo-sounding Device ………………………………………………………………. 13-1
13.5 Radar Installations …………………………………………………………………… 13-1
13.6 Electronic Positioning Systems ……………………………………………………… 13-2
13.7 Rate-of-turn Indicator and Rudder Angle Indicator …………………………………. 13-2
13.8 Navigational Charts and Nautical Publications ……………………………………… 13-2
Chapter 1 Table of Contents I - Part 3
Page 8 GL 2012

13.9 Searchlight and Daylight Signalling Lamp ………………………………………….. 13-2

13.10 Night Vision Equipment ……………………………………………………………... 13-2
13.11 Steering Arrangement and Propulsion Indicator(s) ………………………………….. 13-2
13.12 Automatic Steering Aid (automatic pilot) …………………………………………… 13-2
13.13 Radar Reflector ……………………………………………………………………… 13-2
13.14 Sound Reception System …………………………………………………………….. 13-2
13.15 Automatic Identification System …………………………………………………….. 13-2
13.16 Voyage Data Recorder ………………………………………………………………. 13-3
13.17 Approval of Systems and Equipment, and Performance Standards …………………. 13-3
C13.18 Electric Power Supply-distribution Panels …………………………………………... 13-3

Section 14 Radiocommunication
14.1 Application …………………………………………………………………………... 14-1
14.2 Terms and Definitions ……………………………………………………………….. 14-1
14.3 Exemptions …………………………………………………………………………... 14-2
14.4 Global Maritime Distress and Safety System Identities ……………………………... 14-2
14.5 Functional Requirements …………………………………………………………….. 14-2
14.6 Radio Installations …………………………………………………………………… 14-2
14.7 Radio Equipment: General …………………………………………………………... 14-3
14.8 Radio Equipment: Sea Area A1 ……………………………………………………... 14-4
14.9 Radio Equipment: Sea Areas A1 and A2 ……………………………………………. 14-4
14.10 Radio Equipment: Sea Areas A1, A2, A3 …………………………………………… 14-5
14.11 Radio Equipment: Sea Areas A1, A2, A3 and A4 ………………………………….. 14-6
14.12 Watches ……………………………………………………………………………… 14-6
14.13 Sources of Energy …………………………………………………………………… 14-6
14.14 Performance Standards ………………………………………………………………. 14-7
14.15 Maintenance Requirements ………………………………………………………….. 14-7
14.16 Radio Personnel ……………………………………………………………………… 14-8
14.17 Radio Records ……………………………………………………………………….. 14-8
14.18 Position-updating ……………………………………………………………………. 14-8

Section 15 Operating Compartment Layout

15.1 Definitions …………………………………………………………………………… 15-1
15.2 General ………………………………………………………………………………. 15-1
15.3 Field of Vision from the Operating Compartment …………………………………... 15-1
15.4 Operating Compartment ……………………………………………………………... 15-1
15.5 Instruments and Chart Table ………………………………………………………… 15-2
15.6 Lighting ……………………………………………………………………………… 15-2
15.7 Windows ……………………………………………………………………………... 15-3
15.8 Communications Facilities …………………………………………………………... 15-3
15.9 Temperature and Ventilation ………………………………………………………… 15-3
I - Part 3 Table of Contents Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 9

15.10 Colours ………………………………………………………………………………. 15-3

15.11 Safety Measures …………………………………………………………………….. 15-3

Section 16 Stabilization Systems

16.1 Definitions ………………………………………………………………………........ 16-1
16.2 General Requirements ……………………………………………………………….. 16-1
16.3 Lateral and Height Control Systems …………………………………………………. 16-1
16.4 Demonstrations ………………………………………………………………………. 16-1

Section 17 Handling, Controllability and Performance

17.1 General ………………………………………………………………………………. 17-1
17.2 Proof of Compliance ………………………………………………………………… 17-1
17.3 Weight and Centre of Gravity ……………………………………………………….. 17-1
17.4 Effect of Failures …………………………………………………………………….. 17-1
17.5 Controllability and Manoeuvrability …………………………………………............ 17-1
17.6 Change of Operating Surface and Mode …………………………………………….. 17-2
17.7 Surface Irregularities ……………………………………………………………........ 17-2
17.8 Acceleration and Deceleration ………………………………………………………. 17-2
17.9 Speeds ………………………………………………………………………………... 17-2
17.10 Minimum Depth of Water ………………………………………………………........ 17-2
17.11 Hard Structure Clearance ……………………………………………………………. 17-2
17.12 Night Operation …………………………………………………………………........ 17-2

Section 18 Operational Requirements

18.1 Craft Operational Control ……………………………………………………………. 18-1
18.2 Craft Documentation ……………………………………………………………….... 18-2
18.3 Training and Qualifications ………………………………………………………….. 18-4
18.4 Manning of Survival Craft and Supervision …………………………………………. 18-5
18.5 Emergency Instructions and Drills …………………………………………………... 18-5
18.6 Type Rating Training ………………………………………………………………... 18-7
18.7 Emergency Instructions and Drills …………………………………………………... 18-7
18.8 Type Rating Training ………………………………………………………………... 18-7

Section 19 Inspection and Maintenance Requirements

Annex 1 Form of High-Speed Craft Safety Certificate and Record of Equipment

Annex 2 Form of Permit to Operate High-Speed Craft

Annex 3 Use of Probability Concept

1. General ………………………………………………………………………………. 3-1
2. Terms associated with Probabilities …………………………………………………. 3-1
3. Numerical Values ……………………………………………………………………. 3-2
Chapter 1 Table of Contents I - Part 3
Page 10 GL 2012

Annex 4 Procedures for Failure Mode and Effects Analysis

C0 Document to be submitted ………………………………………………………........ 4-1
1. Introduction ………………………………………………………………………….. 4-1
2. Objectives ……………………………………………………………………………. 4-1
3. Scope of Application ……………………………………………………………........ 4-1
4. System Failure Mode and Effects Analysis ………………………………………….. 4-1
5. Equipment Failure Mode and Effects Analysis …………………………………….... 4-2
6. Procedures ………………………………………………………………………….... 4-2
7. System Definition ……………………………………………………………………. 4-2
8. Development of System Block Diagrams ………………………………………….... 4-3
9. Identification of Failure Modes, Causes and Effects ………………………………... 4-3
10. Failure Effects ……………………………………………………………………….. 4-4
11. Failure Detection …………………………………………………………………….. 4-4
12. Corrective Measures …………………………………………………………………. 4-4
13. Use of Probability Concept ………………………………………………………….. 4-4
14. Documentation ………………………………………………………………………. 4-5
15. Test Programme ……………………………………………………………………... 4-5
16. FMEA Report ………………………………………………………………………... 4-5

Annex 5 Ice Accretion Applicable to all Types of Craft

1. Icing Allowances …………………………………………………………………….. 5-1
2. Areas of Icing Conditions ……………………………………………………………. 5-1
3. Special Requirements ………………………………………………………………... 5-1

Annex 6 Stability of Hydrofoil Craft

1. Surface-piercing Hydrofoils …………………………………………………………. 6-1
2. Fully submerged Hydrofoils …………………………………………………………. 6-3

Annex 7 Stability of Multihull Craft

1. Stability Criteria in the Intact Condition …………………………………………….. 7-1
2. Criteria for Residual Stability after Damage ……………………………………….... 7-2
3. Application of Heeling Levers ………………………………………………………. 7-2

Annex 8 Stability of Monohull Craft

1. Stability Criteria in the Intact Condition …………………………………………….. 8-1
2. Criteria for Residual Stability after Damage ……………………………………….... 8-1

Annex 9 Definitions, Requirements and Compliance Criteria related to Operational and

Safety Performance
1. Performance …………………………………………………………………………. 9-1
2. Stopping ……………………………………………………………………………... 9-1
3. Cruise Performance ………………………………………………………………….. 9-2
4. Effects of Failures or Malfunction …………………………………………………... 9-3
I - Part 3 Table of Contents Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 11

Annex 10 Criteria for Testing and Evaluation of Seats

1. Purpose and Scope …………………………………………………………………... 10-1
2. Static Seat Tests ……………………………………………………………………... 10-1
3. Dynamic Seat Tests ………………………………………………………………….. 10-1

Annex 11 Open Reversible Liferafts Craft

1. General ………………………………………………………………………………. 11-1
2. Construction …………………………………………………………………………. 11-1
3. Open Reversible Liferaft Fittings ……………………………………………………. 11-2
4. Containers for Open Reversible Inflatable Liferafts ……………………………….... 11-3
5. Markings on Open Reversible Liferafts ……………………………………………... 11-3
6. Instructions and Information ……………………………………………………….... 11-3
7. Testing of Open Reversible Inflatable Liferafts ……………………………………... 11-3

Annex 12 Factors to be Considered in Determining Craft Operating Limitations

1. Purpose and Scope …………………………………………………………………... 12-1
2. Factors to be considered ……………………………………………………………... 12-1
I - Part 3 Premise
GL 2012
Premise
1. General
1.1
1.1.1 These Rules incorporate the text in full of the
“International Code of Safety for High Speed Craft”
(“HSC Code”) adopted by the IMO Maritime Safety
Committee, at its 73rd session, in December 2000,
through Resolution MSC. 97(73) including the
amendments adopted at its 79th session in December
2004, through Resolution MSC.175(79) and at its 82nd
session in December 2006, through Resolution
MSC.222(82). This text is printed in italics.
1.1.2 Classification requirements additional to the
provisions of the HSC Code are printed in the Roman
characters used for this item .2 and the relevant num-
ber is prefixed by the letter C.
In Section 10, which is subdivided into Parts, addi-
tional Classification requirements not directly related
to a particular HSC Code item are numbered as fol-
lows: prefix C, Section number, letter indicating the
Part concerned and an incremental figure starting from
1. These additional requirements are inserted at the
end of the relevant part of the Section.
Where necessary, additional explanatory notes are
given at the beginning of each Section.
1.1.3 Parts of the HSC Code not applicable for the
purpose of Classification are identified by a vertical
line placed in the margin of the text.
1.1.4 Equipment and arrangements dealt with in
the parts of the Code mentioned in item 1.1.3, such as
those concerning life-saving appliances and radio-
communications, which are not subject to control by
GL, are intended to be covered by the relevant certifi-
cation.
1.2 In those provisions of the HSC Code that are
being used for Classification purposes the words “Ad-
ministration” and “Code”, wherever mentioned, are to
be understood as equivalent to the words “GL” and
“Rules”, respectively.
The Rules for the Construction and Classification of
ships are referred to below simply as “GL Rules”.
Chapter 1
Page 0–1
2. Application
2.1 Craft for which Classification only is re-
quested
These craft are to comply in full with the requirements
of these Rules, except for those identified by a vertical
line placed in the margin of the text (see P.1.1.3).
2.2 Craft for which both Classification and the
IMO Certification are requested
These craft are to comply in full with the requirements
of these Rules.
3. Class Notation
Craft complying with the Classification requirements
of these Rules are assigned the Notation HSC-
CARGO, HSC-PASSENGER A or HSC-PAS-
SENGER B.
4. Compliance with other Rules
For any items not expressly stipulated or modified for
Classification purposes by these Rules, the require-
ments of the GL Rules are to apply wherever relevant.
Classification of a craft with GL, or more generally
any GL actions and decisions, do not absolve the in-
terested parties from compliance with additional
and/or more stringent requirements and provisions for
their application, issued by the Administration of the
State whose flag the craft is entitled to fly and/or of
the State where the base port from which the craft is
intended to operate is situated.
5. Novel or unusual features
Craft presenting novel or unusual arrangements for
items such as systems, apparatuses and devices, de-
scribed in these Rules, to which the requirements of
these rules do not apply directly, either in whole or on
part, may be classed on an individual basis, at the
discretion of GL.
I - Part 3 Preamble
GL 2012
Preamble
1. The international conventions ratified in
respect of conventional ships and the regulations
applied as a consequence of such conventions have
largely been developed having in mind the manner in
which conventional ships are constructed and oper-
ated. Traditionally, ships have been built of steel and
with the minimum of operational controls. The re-
quirements for ships engaged on long international
voyages are therefore framed in such away that,
providing the ship is presented for survey and a Ship
Safety Certificate is issued, the ship may go anywhere
in the world without any operational restrictions
being imposed. Providing the ship is not involved in a
casualty, all that is needed is that it is made available
to the Administration for the purpose of a satisfactory
resurvey before the Ship Safety Certificate expires
and the Certificate will be reissued.
2. The traditional method of regulating ships
should not be accepted as being the only possible
way of providing an appropriate level of safety. Nor
should it be assumed that another approach, using
different criteria, could not be applied. Over a long
period of time, numerous new designs of marine
vehicles have been developed and hzave been in
service. While these do not fully comply with the
provisions of the international conventions relating to
conventional ships built of steel, they have demon-
strated an ability to operate at an equivalent level of
safety when engaged on restricted voyages under
restricted operational weather conditions and with
approved maintenance and supervision schedules.
3. The High Speed Craft Code 1994(1994 HSC
Code) was derived from the previous Code of Safety
for Dynamically Supported Craft (DSC Code)
adopted by IMO in 1977, recognizing that safety
levels can be significantly enhanced by the infra-
structure associated with regular service on a par-
ticular route, whereas the conventional ship safety
philosophy relies on the ship being self-sustaining
with all necessary emergency equipment being car-
ried on board.
4. The safety philosophy of this Code is based
on the management and reduction of risk as well as
the traditional philosophy of passive protection in the
event of an accident. Management of risk through
accommodation arrangement, active safety systems,
restricted operation, quality management and human
factors engineering should be considered in evaluat-
ing safety equivalent to current conventions. Applica-
tion of mathematical analysis should be encouraged
to assess risk and determine the validity of safety
measures.
Chapter 1
Page P–1
5. The Code takes into account that a high-
speed craft is of a light displacement compared with
a conventional ship. This displacement aspect is the
essential parameter to obtain fast and competitive
sea transportation and consequently this Code allows
for use of non-conventional shipbuilding materials,
provided that a safety standard at least equivalent to
conventional ships is achieved.
6. To clearly distinguish such craft, criteria
based on speed and volumetric Froude number have
been used to delineate those craft to which this Code
applies from other, more conventional, craft.
7. The Code requirements also reflect the addi-
tional hazards which may be caused by the high
speed compared with conventional ship transporta-
tion. Thus, in addition to the normal requirements
(including life-saving appliances, evacuation facili-
ties, etc.) provided in case of an accident occurring,
further emphasis is placed on reducing the risk of
hazardous situations arising. Some advantages result
from the high-speed craft concept, i.e. the light dis-
placement provides a large reserve buoyancy in rela-
tion to displacement, reducing the hazards addressed
by the International Load Line Convention 1966. The
consequences of other hazards, such as of collision at
high speed, are balanced by more stringent naviga-
tional and operational requirements and specially
developed accommodation provisions.
8. The above-mentioned safety concepts were
originally reflected in the DSC Code and in the 1994
HSC Code. The development of novel types and sizes
of craft has led to the development of pressures
within the maritime industry for craft which are not
dynamically supported cargo craft or passenger craft
carrying larger numbers of passenger or operating
further a field than permitted by that 1994 HSC Code
to be certified according to those concepts. Addition-
ally, improvements of maritime safety standards since
1994 were required to be reflected in the revisions of
the Code to maintain safety equivalence with conven-
tional ships.
9. Accordingly, two differing principles of
protection and rescue were embodied in the Code.
10. The first of these recognizes the craft which
were originally foreseen at the time of development of
the DSC Code. Where rescue assistance is readily
available and the total number of passengers is lim-
ited, a reduction in passive and active protection may
be permitted. Such craft are called "assisted craft"
and form the basis for "category A passenger craft"
of this Code.
Chapter 1 Preamble
Page P–2
11. The second concept recognizes the further
development of high-speed craft into larger craft.
Where rescue assistance is not readily available or
the number of passengers is unlimited, additional
passive and active safety precautions are required.
These additional requirements provide for an area of
safe refuge on board, redundancy of vital systems,
increased watertight and structural integrity and full
fire-extinguishing capability. Such craft are called
"unassisted craft" and form the basis for "cargo
craft" and "category B passenger craft" of this Code.
12. These two concepts of the Code have been
developed as a unified document on the basis that an
equivalent level of safety to that normally expected on
ships complying with the International Convention
for the Safety of Life at Sea 1974 as amended is
achieved. Where the application of new technology or
design indicates an equivalent safety level to the
strict application of the Code, the Administration is
permitted to formally recognize such equivalence.
13. It is important that an Administration, in
considering the suitability of a high-speed craft under
this Code, should apply all sections of the Code be-
cause non-compliance with any part of the Code
could result in an imbalance which would adversely
affect the safety of the craft, passengers and crew.
For a similar reason, modifications to existing craft,
I - Part 3
GL 2012
which may have an effect on safety, should be ap-
proved by the Administration.
14. In developing the Code, it has been consid-
ered desirable to ensure that high-speed craft do not
impose unreasonable demands on existing users of
the environment or conversely suffer unnecessarily
through lack of reasonable accommodation by exist-
ing users. Whatever burden of compatibility there is,
it should not necessarily be laid wholly on the high-
speed craft.
15. Paragraph 1.15.1 of the 1994 HSC Code
states that it should be reviewed by the Organization
at intervals preferably not exceeding 4 years to con-
sider revision of existing requirements to take ac-
count of new developments in design and technology.
Experience gained with the application of the Code
since it entered into force in 1996, has led to the
recognition that it needed to be revised and updated.
Subsequent work in Organization has resulted in the
development of the present Code to ensure that safety
is not compromised as a result of continuous intro-
duction of state-of-the-art technology and innovative
developments into the new and generally much larger
and faster high-speed craft.
I - Part 3 Section 1 General Comments and Requirements
GL 2012
Section 1
General Comments and Requirements
1.1 General Comments
This Code shall be applied as a complete set of com-
prehensive requirements. It contains requirements for
the design and construction of high-speed craft en-
gaged on international voyages, the equipment which
shall be provided and the conditions for their opera-
tion and maintenance. The basic aim of the Code is to
set levels of safety which are equivalent to those of
conventional ships required by the International Con-
vention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974, as
amended, (SOLAS Convention) and the International
Convention on Load Lines, 1966, (Load Line Conven-
tion) by the application of constructional and equip-
ment standards in conjunction with strict operational
controls.1
1.2 General Requirements
1.2.1 The application of the provisions of this Code
is subject to the following general requirements that:
.1 the Code will be applied in its entirety;
.2 the management of the company operating the
craft exercises strict control over its operation
and maintenance by a quality-management sys-
tem 2;
.3 the management ensures that only persons
qualified to operate the specific type of craft
used on the intended route are employed;
.4 the distances covered and the worst intended
conditions in which high-speed craft operations
are permitted will be restricted by the imposi-
tion of operational limits;
.5 the craft will at all times be in reasonable prox-
imity to a place of refuge, having due regard to
the provisions of 1.3.4;
.6 adequate communications facilities, weather
forecasts and maintenance facilities are avail-
able within the area of craft operation;
.7 in the intended area of operation suitable res-
cue facilities will be readily available;
––––––––––––––
1 Refer to MSC/Circ.652 on Application of the 1966 LL Conven-
tion to high-speed craft (subject to final consideration by SLF
43).
2 Refer to the International Safety Management (ISM) Code
adopted by the Organization by resolution A.741(18), as may be
amended.
Chapter 1
Page 1–1
.8 areas of high fire risk, such as machinery
spaces and special category spaces, are pro-
tected with fire-resistant materials and fire-
extinguishing systems to ensure, as far as is
practicable, containment and rapid extinguish-
ing of fire;
.9 efficient facilities are provided for the rapid
and safe evacuation of all persons into survival
craft;
.10 all passengers and crew are provided with
seats;
.11 no enclosed sleeping berths for passengers are
provided.
C1.2.1.4 Restrictions for the operation of the craft
will be specified in the Class Certificate.
1.2.2 On all craft, new installation of materials
containing asbestos used for the structure, machinery,
electrical installations and equipment of a craft to
which this Code applies shall be prohibited except for:
.1 vanes used in rotary vane compressors and
rotary vane vacuum pumps;
.2 watertight joints and linings used for the circu-
lation of fluids when, at high temperature (in
excess of 350 °C) or pressure (in excess of 7 x
106 Pa), there is a risk of fire, corrosion or tox-
icity; and
.3 supple and flexible thermal insulation assem-
blies used for temperatures above 1000 °C.
1.3 Application
1.3.1 This Code applies to high speed craft as
specified in 1.3.4 engaged in international voyages the
keels of which are laid or which are at a similar stage
of construction on or after 1 July 2002.
C1.3.1 In addition to the craft specified in 1.3.1, these
Rules also apply to high speed craft engaged in na-
tional voyages. Exemptions from some of the re-
quirements of the Rules may be granted when particu-
lar circumstances (e.g. restricted services) warrant
this, in the opinion of the GL Head Office.
1.3.2 For the purpose of this Code, the term "a
similar stage of construction" means the stage at
which:
Chapter 1 Section 1 General Comments and Requirements
Page 1–2
.1 construction identifiable with a specific craft
begins; and
.2 assembly of that craft has commenced compris-
ing at least 50 tonnes or three per cent of the
estimated mass of all material used in the
structure, including superstructure and deck-
house, whichever is less.
1.3.3 For the purpose of this Code :
.1 the expression "craft constructed" means craft
the keels of which are laid or which are at a
similar stage of construction; and
.2 a cargo craft, whenever built, which is con-
verted to a passenger craft shall be treated as a
passenger craft constructed on the date on
which such a conversion commences.
1.3.4 This Code applies to:
.1 passenger craft which do not proceed in the
course of their voyage more than four hours at
90 % of maximum speed from a place of ref-
uge; and
.2 cargo craft of 500 gross tonnage and upwards
which do not proceed in the course of their
voyage more than 8 h at 90 % of maximum
speed from a place of refuge when fully laden.
C1.3.4 In addition to the cargo craft specified in
1.3.4.2, these Rules also apply as far as appropriate to
cargo craft of less than 500 tons gross tonnage.
1.3.5 This Code, unless expressly provided other-
wise, does not apply to:
.1 craft of war and troopcraft;
.2 craft not propelled by mechanical means;
.3 wooden craft of primitive build;
.4 pleasure craft not engaged in trade; and
.5 fishing craft.
1.3.6 This Code does not apply to craft solely navi-
gating the Great Lakes of North America and the
River St. Lawrence as far east as a straight line drawn
from Cap des Rosiers to West Point, Anticosti Island
and, on the north side of Anticosti Island, the 63rd
meridian.
1.3.7 The application of this Code shall be verified
by the Administration and be acceptable to the Gov-
ernments of the States to which the craft will be oper-
ating.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
1.4 Definitions
For the purpose of this Code, unless expressly pro-
vided otherwise, the terms used therein have the
meanings defined in the following paragraphs. Addi-
tional definitions are given in the general parts of the
various Sections.
1.4.1 "Administration" means the Government of
the State whose flag the craft is entitled to fly.
1.4.2 "Air-cushion vehicle (ACV)" is a craft such
that the whole or a significant part of its weight can be
supported, whether at rest or in motion, by a continu-
ously generated cushion of air dependent for its effec-
tiveness on the proximity of the surface over which the
craft operates.
1.4.3 "Anniversary date" means the day and the
month of each year which will correspond to the date
of expiry of the relevant certificate.
1.4.4 "Assembly station" is an area where passen-
gers can be gathered in the event of an emergency,
given instructions and prepared to abandon the craft,
if necessary. The passenger spaces may serve as as-
sembly stations if all passengers can be instructed
there and prepared to abandon the craft.
1.4.5 "Auxiliary machinery spaces" are spaces
containing internal combustion engines of power
output up to and including 110 kW driving generators,
sprinkler, drencher or fire pumps, bilge pumps, etc.,
oil filling stations, switchboards of aggregate capacity
exceeding 800 kW, similar spaces and trunks to such
spaces.
1.4.6 "Auxiliary machinery spaces having little or
no fire risk" are spaces such as refrigerating, stabiliz-
ing, ventilation and air conditioning machinery,
switchboards of aggregate capacity 800 kW or less,
similar spaces and trunks to such spaces.
1.4.7 "Base port" is a specific port identified in the
route operational manual and provided with:
.1 appropriate facilities providing continuous
radio communications with the craft at all
times while in ports and at sea;
.2 means for obtaining a reliable weather forecast
for the corresponding region and its due trans-
mission to all craft in operation;
.3 for a category A craft, access to facilities pro-
vided with appropriate rescue and survival
equipment; and
.4 access to craft maintenance services with ap-
propriate equipment.
C1.4.7 It is the owner's responsibility to propose a
base port to the Administration for approval.
I - Part 3 Section 1 General Comments and Requirements
GL 2012
1.4.8 "Base port State" means the State in which
the base port is located.
1.4.9 "Breadth (B)" means breath of the broadest
part of the moulded watertight envelope of the rigid
hull, excluding appendages, at or below the design
waterline in the displacement mode with no lift or
propulsion machinery active.
1.4.10 "Cargo craft" is any high-speed craft other
than passenger craft, and which is capable of main-
taining the main functions and safety systems of unaf-
fected spaces, after damage in any one compartment
on board.
1.4.11 "Cargo spaces" are all spaces other than
special category spaces and ro-ro spaces used for
cargo and trunks to such spaces. For the purposes of
Section 7, part D, "cargo spaces" include ro-ro
spaces, special category spaces and open deck spaces.
1.4.12 "Category A craft" is any high-speed passen-
ger craft:
.1 operating on a route where it has been demon-
strated to the satisfaction of the flag and port
States that there is a high probability that in
the event of an evacuation at any point of the
route, all passengers and crew can be rescued
safely within the least of:
− the time to prevent persons in survival craft
from exposure causing hypothermia in the
worst intended conditions,
− the time appropriate with respect to envi-
ronmental conditions and geographical
features of the route, or
− 4 hours; and
.2 carrying not more than 450 passengers.
1.4.13 "Category B craft" is any high-speed passen-
ger craft other than a category A craft, with machin-
ery and safety systems arranged such that, in the event
of any essential machinery and safety systems in any
one compartment being disabled, the craft retains the
capability to navigate safely. The damage scenarios
considered in Section 2 should not be inferred in this
respect.
C1.4.13 With reference to 1.4.13, the term “navigate
safely” means that the craft can reach the port of ref-
uge within the period of weather forecast validity.
1.4.14 "Company" means the company as defined in
chapter IX of the Convention.
1.4.15 "Continuously manned control station" is a
control station which is continuously manned by a
responsible member of the crew while the craft is in
normal service.
Chapter 1
Page 1–3
1.4.16 "Control stations" are those spaces in which
the craft's radio or navigating equipment (main dis-
plays and controls for equipment specified in 13.2 to
13.7) or the emergency source of power and emer-
gency switchboard are located, or where the fire re-
cording or fire control equipment is centralized, or
where other functions essential to the safe operation
of the craft such as propulsion control, public address,
stabilization systems, etc., are located.
1.4.17 "Convention" means the International Con-
vention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974, as
amended.
1.4.18 "Crew accommodation" are those spaces
allocated for the use of the crew, and include cabins,
sick bays, offices, lavatories, lounges and similar
spaces.
1.4.19 "Critical design conditions" means the limit-
ing specified conditions, chosen for design purposes,
which the craft shall keep in displacement mode. Such
conditions shall be more severe than the "worst in-
tended conditions" by a suitable margin to provide for
adequate safety in the survival condition.
1.4.20 "Datum" means a watertight deck or equiva-
lent structure of a non-watertight deck covered by a
weathertight structure of adequate strength to main-
tain the weathertight integrity and fitted with weather-
tight closing appliances.
1.4.21 "Design waterline" means the waterline cor-
responding to the maximum operational weight of the
craft with no lift or propulsion machinery active and is
limited by the requirements of Sections 2 and 3.
1.4.22 "Displacement mode" means the regime,
whether at rest or in motion, where the weight of the
craft is fully or predominantly supported by hydro-
static forces.
1.4.23 "Failure Mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA)"
is an examination, in accordance with annex 4, of the
craft's system and equipment to determine whether
any reasonably probable failure or improper opera-
tion can result in a hazardous or catastrophic effect.
1.4.24 "Fire Test Procedures Code (FTP Code)"
means the International Code for Application of Fire
Test Procedures, as defined in chapter II-2 of the
Convention.
1.4.25 "Flap" means an element formed as inte-
grated part of, or an extension of, a foil, used to adjust
the hydrodynamic or aerodynamic lift of the foil.
1.4.26 "Flashpoint" means a flashpoint determined
by a test using the closed-cup apparatus referenced in
the International Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG)
Code.
Chapter 1 Section 1 General Comments and Requirements
Page 1–4
1.4.27 "Foil" means a profiled plate or three dimen-
sional construction at which hydrodynamic lift is gen-
erated when the craft is under way.
1.4.28 "Fully submerged foil" means a foil having
no lift components piercing the surface of the water in
the foil-borne mode.
1.4.29 "Galleys" are those enclosed spaces contain-
ing cooking facilities with exposed heating surfaces,
or which have any cooking or food heating appli-
ances each having a power of more than 5 kW.
1.4.30 "High-speed craft" is a craft capable of
maximum speed, in metres per second (m/s), equal to
or exceeding:
3.7∇ 0.1667
where:
∇ = volume of displacement corresponding to the
design waterline (m3)
excluding craft the hull of which is supported com-
pletely clear above the water surface in non-
displacement mode by aerodynamic forces generated
by ground effect.
1.4.31 "Hydrofoil craft" is a craft the hull of which
is supported completely clear above the water surface
in non-displacement mode by hydrodynamic forces
generated on foils.
1.4.32 “IMDG Code” means the International
Maritime Dangerous Goods (IMDG) Code as defined
in chapter VII of the Convention.
1.4.33 "Length (L)" means the overall length of the
underwater watertight envelope of the rigid hull, ex-
cluding appendages, at or below the design waterline
in the displacement mode with no lift or propulsion
machinery active.
1.4.34 "Lightweight" is the displacement of the craft
in tonnes without cargo, fuel, lubricating oil, ballast
water, fresh water and feedwater in tanks, consumable
stores, passengers and crew and their effects.
1.4.35 "Life-Saving Appliances Code (LSA Code)"
means the International Life-Saving Appliance Code
as defined in chapter III of the Convention.
1.4.36 “Machinery spaces” are spaces containing
internal combustion engines either used for main
propulsion or having an aggregate total power output
of more than 110 kW, generators, oil fuel units, major
electrical machinery and similar spaces and trunks to
such spaces.
1.4.37 "Maximum operational weight" means the
overall weight up to which operation in the intended
mode is permitted by the Administration.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
1.4.38 "Maximum speed" is the speed achieved at
the maximum continuous propulsion power for which
the craft is certified at maximum operational weight
and in smooth water.
1.4.39 "Non-displacement mode" means the normal
operational regime of a craft when non-hydrostatic
forces substantially or predominantly support the
weight of the craft.
1.4.40 "Oil fuel unit" includes any equipment for the
preparation of oil fuel and delivery of oil fuel, heated
or not, to boilers and engines (including gas turbines)
at a pressure of more than 0,18 N/mm2.
1.4.41 "Open ro-ro spaces" are those ro-ro spaces:
.1 to which any passengers carried have access;
and
.2 either:
.2.1 are open at both ends; or
.2.2 have an opening at one end and are provided
with permanent openings distributed in the side
plating or deckhead or from above, having a
total area of at least 10 % of the total area of
the space sides.
1.4.42 "Operating limitations" means the craft limi-
tations in respect of handling, controllability and
performance and the craft operational procedures
within which the craft is to operate.
1.4.43 "Operating compartment" means the en-
closed area from which the navigation and control of
the craft is exercised.
1.4.44 "Operating station" means a confined area of
the operating compartment equipped with necessary
means for navigation, manoeuvring and communica-
tion, and from where the functions of navigating, ma-
noeuvring, communication, commanding, conning and
lookout are carried out.
1.4.45 "Organization" means the International
Maritime Organization.
1.4.46 "Passenger" is every person other than:
.1 the master and members of the crew or other
persons employed or engaged in any capacity
on board a craft on the business of that craft;
and
.2 a child under one year of age.
1.4.47 "Passenger craft" is a craft which carries
more than twelve passengers.
1.4.48 "Place of refuge" is any naturally or artifi-
cially sheltered area which may be used as a shelter
I - Part 3 Section 1 General Comments and Requirements
GL 2012
by a craft under conditions likely to endanger its
safety.
1.4.49 "Public spaces" are those spaces allocated
for the passengers and include bars, refreshment ki-
osks, smoke rooms, main seating areas, lounges, din-
ing rooms, recreation rooms, lobbies, lavatories and
similar spaces, and may include sales shops.
1.4.50 "Refreshment kiosks" are those spaces which
are not enclosed, serving refreshments and containing
food warming equipment having a total power of 5 kW
or less and with an exposed heating surface tempera-
ture not above 150 ºC.
1.4.51 "Ro-ro craft" is a craft fitted with one or
more ro-ro spaces.
1.4.52 "Ro-ro spaces" are spaces not normally sub-
divided in any way and normally extending to either a
substantial length or the entire length of the craft in
which motor vehicles with fuel in their tanks for their
own propulsion and/or goods (packaged or in bulk, in
or on rail or road cars, vehicles (including road or
rail tankers), trailers, containers, pallets, demountable
tanks or in or on similar stowage units or other recep-
tacles) can be loaded and unloaded, normally in a
horizontal direction.
1.4.53 "Service spaces" are those enclosed spaces
used for pantries containing food warming equipment
but no cooking facilities with exposed heating sur-
faces, lockers, sales shops, store-rooms and enclosed
baggage rooms. Such spaces containing no cooking
appliances may contain:
.1 coffee automats, toasters, dish washers, mi-
crowave ovens, water boilers and similar ap-
pliances, each of them with a maximum power
of 5 kW; and
.2 electrically heated cooking plates and hot
plates for keeping food warm, each of them
with a maximum power of 2 kW and a surface
temperature not above 150 °C.
1.4.54 "Significant wave height" is the average
crest-to-trough height of the highest one third of the
zero-upcrossing waves in a specified period.
1.4.55 "Special category spaces" are those enclosed
ro-ro spaces to which passengers have access. Special
category spaces may be accommodated on more than
one deck provided that the total overall clear height
for vehicles does not exceed 10 m.
1.4.56 "Surface-effect ship" (SES) is an air-cushion
vehicle whose cushion is totally or partially retained
by permanently immersed hard structures.
1.4.57 "Transitional mode" means the regime be-
tween displacement and non-displacement modes.
Chapter 1
Page 1–5
1.4.58 "Watertight" in relation to a structure means
capable of preventing the passage of water through
the structure in any direction under the head of water
likely to occur in the intact or damaged condition.
1.4.59 "Weather deck" is a deck which is completely
exposed to the weather from above and from at least
two sides.
1.4.60 "Weathertight" means that water will not
penetrate into the craft in any wind and wave condi-
tions up to those specified as critical design condi-
tions.
1.4.61 "Worst intended conditions" means the speci-
fied environmental conditions within which the inten-
tional operation of the craft is provided for in the
certification of the craft. This shall take into account
parameters such as the worst conditions of wind force
allowable, significant wave height (including unfa-
vourable combinations of length and direction of
waves), minimum air temperature, visibility and depth
of water for safe operation and such other parameters
as the Administration may require in considering the
type of craft in the area of operation.
C1.4.62 “Approved type” means the status conferred
by GL on a particular and clearly identified material,
item of equipment or process, shown by design as-
sessment to meet all the stipulations of GL Rules for
the specified application(s).
C1.4.63 “Small waterplane area twin hull” (SWATH)
is a craft for which the weight is substantially sup-
ported by a submerged twin hull connected to the
emerging part of the craft by struts with a small wa-
terplane area.
1.5 Surveys
C1.5 In respect of Classification the survey require-
ments in accordance with the GL Rules Classification
and Surveys (I-0-0) apply.
1.5.1 Each craft shall be subject to the surveys
specified below:
.1 an initial survey before the craft is put in ser-
vice or before the Certificate is issued for the
first time;
.2 a renewal survey at intervals specified by the
Administration but not exceeding 5 years ex-
cept where 1.8.5 or 1.8.10 is applicable;
.3 a periodical survey within three months before
or after each anniversary date of the Certifi-
cate; and
.4 an additional survey as the occasion arises.
Chapter 1 Section 1 General Comments and Requirements
Page 1–6
1.5.2 The surveys referred to in 1.5.1 shall be car-
ried out as follows:
.1 the initial survey shall include:
.1.1 an appraisal of the assumptions made and
limitations proposed in relation to loadings,
environment, speed and maneuverability;
.1.2 an appraisal of the data supporting the safety
of the design, obtained, as appropriate, from
calculations, tests and trials;
.1.3 a failure mode and effect analysis as required
by this Code;
.1.4 an investigation into the adequacy of the vari-
ous manuals to be supplied with the craft; and
.1.5 a complete inspection of the structure, safety
equipment, radio installations and other
equipment, fittings, arrangements and mate-
rials to ensure that they comply with the
requirements of the Code, are in satisfactory
condition and are fit for the service for which
the craft is intended;
.2 the renewal and periodical surveys shall
include a complete inspection of the struc-
ture, including the outside of the craft's bot-
tom and related items, safety equipment,
radio installations and other equipment as
referred to in 1.5.2.1 to ensure that they com-
ply with the requirements of the Code, are in
satisfactory condition and are fit for the ser-
vice for which the craft is intended. The in-
spection of the craft's bottom shall be con-
ducted with the craft out of the water under
suitable conditions for close-up examination
of any damaged or problem areas; and
.3 an additional survey, either general or par--
tial according to the circumstances, shall be
made after a repair resulting from investiga-
tions prescribed in 1.7.3, or wherever any
important repairs or renewals are made. The
survey shall be such as to ensure that the
necessary repairs or renewals have been
effectively made, that the material and work
manship of such repairs or renewals are in
all respects satisfactory, and that the craft
complies in all respects with the requirements
of the Code.
1.5.3 The periodical surveys referred to in 1.5.1.3
shall be endorsed on the High-Speed Craft Safety
Certificate.
1.5.4 The inspection and survey of the craft, so far
as regards the enforcement of the provisions of the
Code, shall be carried out by officers of the Admini-
stration. The Administration may, however, entrust the
inspections and surveys either to surveyors nominated
for the purpose or to organizations recognized by it.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
1.5.5 An Administration nominating surveyors or
recognizing organizations to conduct inspections and
surveys as set forth in 1.5.4 shall, as a minimum, em-
power any nominated surveyor or recognized organi-
zation to:
.1 require repairs to a craft; and
.2 carry out inspections and surveys if requested
by the appropriate authorities of a port State.
The Administration shall notify the Organization of
the specific responsibilities and conditions of the au-
thority delegated to nominated surveyors or recog-
nized organizations.
1.5.6 When an nominated surveyor or recognized
organization determines that the condition of the craft
or its equipment does not correspond substantially
with the particulars of the Certificate or is such that
the craft is not fit to operate without danger to the
craft or persons on board, such surveyor or organiza-
tion shall immediately ensure that corrective action is
taken and shall, in due course, notify the Administra-
tion. If such corrective action is not taken the Certifi-
cate shall be withdrawn and the Administration shall
be notified immediately; and, if the craft is in an area
under the jurisdiction of another Government, the
appropriate authorities of the port State shall be noti-
fied immediately.
When an officer of the Administration, a nominated
surveyor or a recognized organization has notified the
appropriate authorities of the port State, the Govern-
ment of the port Sate concerned shall give such offi-
cer, surveyor or organization any necessary assis-
tance to carry out their obligations under this section.
When applicable, the Government of the port State
concerned shall ensure that the craft shall not con-
tinue to operate until it can do so without danger to
the craft or the persons on board.
1.5.7 In every case, the Administration shall fully
guarantee the completeness and efficiency of the in-
spection and survey, and shall undertake to ensure the
necessary arrangements to satisfy this obligation.
1.6 Approvals
The owner of a craft shall accept the obligation to
supply sufficient information to enable the Administra-
tion to fully assess the features of the design. It is
strongly recommended that the Company and the
Administration and, where appropriate, the port State
or States shall commence discussions at the earliest
possible stage so that the Administration may fully
evaluate the design in determining what additional or
alternative requirements shall be applied to the craft,
to achieve the required level of safety.
1.7 Maintenance of Conditions after Survey
1.7.1 The condition of the craft and its equipment
shall be maintained to conform with the provisions of
this Code to ensure that the craft in all respects will
I - Part 3 Section 1 General Comments and Requirements
GL 2012
remain fit to operate without danger to the craft or the
persons on board.
C1.7.1 With reference to 1.7.1, the above responsibil-
ity lies with the Owner of the craft (or his representa-
tive).
1.7.2 After any survey of the craft corresponding to
1.5 has been completed, no change shall be made to
structure, equipment, fittings, arrangements and mate-
rials covered by the survey, without the sanction of the
Administration.
1.7.3 Whenever an accident occurs to a craft or a
defect is discovered, either of which affects the safety
of the craft or the efficiency or completeness of struc-
ture, equipment, fittings, arrangements and materials,
the person in charge or owner of the craft shall report
at the earliest opportunity to the Administration, the
nominated surveyor or recognized organization re-
sponsible, who shall cause investigations to be initi-
ated to determine whether a survey, as required by
1.5, is necessary. If the craft is in an area under the
jurisdiction of another Government, the person in
charge or the owner shall also report immediately to
the appropriate authorities of the port State and the
nominated surveyor or recognized organization shall
ascertain that such a report has been made.
C1.7.3 With reference to 1.7.2 and 1.7.3, it is the
Owner's responsibility to inform GL of any modifica-
tion, damage or repair affecting the class of the craft.
1.8 High-Speed Craft Safety Certificate
1.8.1 A Certificate called a High-Speed Craft
Safety Certificate is issued after completion of an
initial or renewal survey to a craft which complies
with the requirements of the Code. The Certificate
shall be issued or endorsed either by the Administra-
tion or by any person or organization recognized by it.
In every case, that Administration assumes full re-
sponsibility for the Certificate. On all craft, all Cer-
tificates issued under this Section, or certified copies
thereof, shall be carried on the craft. Except where the
flag State is a Party to the 1988 SOLAS Protocol, a
copy of each of these Certificates shall be posted up in
a prominent and accessible place in the craft.
1.8.2 A Contracting Government to the Convention
may, at the request of the Administration, cause a
craft to be surveyed and, if satisfied that the require-
ments of the Code are compiled with, shall issue or
authorize the issue of a Certificate to the craft and,
where appropriate, endorse or authorize the endorse-
ment of a Certificate on the craft in accordance with
the Code. Any Certificate so issued shall contain a
statement to the effect that it has been issued at the
request of the Government of the State the flag of
which the craft is entitled to fly, and it shall have the
same force and receive the same recognition as a
Certificate issued under 1.8.1.
1.8.3 The Certificate shall be that of the model
given in the annex 1 to the Code. If the language used
Chapter 1
Page 1–7
is not English, French or Spanish, the text shall in-
clude a translation into one of these languages.
1.8.4 The High-Speed Craft Safety Certificate shall
be issued for a period specified by the Administration
which shall not exceed 5 years.
1.8.5 Notwithstanding the requirements of 1.8.4,
when the renewal survey is completed within three
months before the expiry date of the existing Certifi-
cate, the new Certificate shall be valid from the date
of completion of the renewal survey to a date not ex-
ceeding 5 years from the date of expiry of the existing
Certificate.
1.8.6 When the renewal survey is completed after
the expiry date of the existing Certificate, the new
Certificate shall be valid from the date of completion
of the renewal survey to a date not exceeding 5 years
from the date of expiry of the existing Certificate.
1.8.7 When the renewal survey is completed more
than 3 months before the expiry date of the existing
Certificate, the new Certificate shall be valid from the
date of completion of the renewal survey to a date not
exceeding 5 years from the date of completion of the
renewal survey.
1.8.8 If a Certificate is issued for a period of less
than 5 years, the Administration may extend the valid-
ity of the Certificate beyond the expiry date to the
maximum period specified in 1.8.4, provided that the
surveys when a Certificate is issued for a period of 5
years are carried out.
1.8.9 If a renewal survey has been completed and a
new Certificate cannot be issued or placed on board
the craft before the expiry date of the existing Certifi-
cate, the person or organization authorized by the
Administration may endorse the existing Certificate
and such a Certificate shall be accepted as valid for a
further period which shall not exceed 5 months from
the expiry date.
1.8.10 If a craft, at the time when a Certificate ex-
pires, is not in the place in which it is to be surveyed,
the Administration may extend the period of validity of
the Certificate but this extension shall be granted only
for the purpose of allowing the craft to proceed to the
place in which it is to be surveyed, and then only in
cases where it appears proper and reasonable to do
so. No Certificate shall be extended for a period
longer than one month, and a craft to which an exten-
sion is granted shall not, on its arrival in the place in
which it is to be surveyed, be entitled by virtue of such
extension to leave that place without having a new
Certificate. When the renewal survey is completed, the
new Certificate shall be valid to a date not exceeding
5 years from the date of expiry of the existing Certifi-
cate before the extension was granted.
1.8.11 In special circumstances, as determined by
the Administration, a new Certificate need not be
dated from the date of expiry of the existing Certificate
Chapter 1 Section 1 General Comments and Requirements
Page 1–8
as required by 1.8.6 or 1.8.10. In these circumstances,
the new Certificate shall be valid to a date not exceed-
ing 5 years from the date of completion of the renewal
survey.
1.8.12 If a periodical survey is completed before the
period specified in 1.5 then:
.1 the anniversary date shown on the relevant
Certificate shall be amended by endorsement
to a date which shall not be more than 3
months later than the date on which the sur-
vey was completed;
.2 the subsequent periodical survey required by
1.5 shall be completed at the intervals pre-
scribed by 1.5 using the new anniversary
date; and
.3 the expiry date may remain unchanged pro-
vided one or more periodical surveys are
carried out so that the maximum intervals
between the surveys prescribed by 1.5.1.3 are
not exceeded;
1.8.13 A Certificate issued under 1.8.1 or 1.8.2 shall
cease to be valid in any of the following cases:
.1 if the relevant surveys are not completed with
the periods specified in 1.5.1;
.2 if the Certificate is not endorsed in accordance
with 1.5.3;
.3 upon transfer of the craft to the flag of an-
other State. A new Certificate shall only be
issued when the Government issuing the new
Certificate is fully satisfied that the craft is in
compliance with the requirements of 1.7.1
and 1.7.2. In the case of a transfer between
Governments that are Contracting Govern-
ments to the Convention if requested within 3
months after the transfer has taken place, the
Government of the State whose flag the craft
was formerly entitled to fly shall, as soon as
possible, transmit to the Administration a
copy of the Certificate carried by the craft
before the transfer and, if available, copies of
the relevant survey reports.
1.8.14 The privileges of the Code may not be
claimed in favour of any craft unless it holds a valid
Certificate.
1.9 Permit to Operate High-Speed Craft
1.9.1 The craft shall not operate commercially
unless a Permit to Operate High-Speed Craft is issued
and valid in addition to the High-Speed Craft Safety
Certificate.
1.9.1.1 On all craft, transit voyages may be under-
taken without a valid Permit to Operate High-Speed
Craft provided the craft is not operating commercially
with passengers or cargo onboard. For the purpose of
this provision, these transit voyages include delivery
I - Part 3
GL 2012
voyages, i.e., builder’s port to base port, and voyages
for repositioning purposes, i.e., change of base port
and/or route. Such transit voyages in excess of the
limits set out in this Code may be undertaken provided
that:
.1 the craft has a valid High-Speed Craft Safety
Certificate or similar before the start of such a
voyage;
.2 the operator has developed a safety plan for
the voyage including any temporary accommo-
dation and all relevant matters listed in 18.1.3
to ensure that the craft is capable of safely
completing the transit voyage;
.3 the master of the craft is provided with the
materials and information necessary to operate
the craft safely during the transit voyage; and
.4 the Administration is satisfied that arrange-
ments have been made for the safe conduct of
the voyage.
1.9.2 The Permit to Operate High-Speed Craft
shall be issued by the Administration to certify com-
pliance with 1.2.2 to 1.2.7 and stipulate conditions of
the operation of the craft and drawn up on the basis of
the information contained in the route operational
manual specified in Section 18 of this Code.
1.9.3 Before issuing the Permit to Operate, the
Administration shall consult with each port State to
obtain details of any operational conditions associ-
ated with operation of the craft in that State. Any such
conditions imposed shall be shown by the Administra-
tion on the Permit to Operate and included in the
route operational manual.
1.9.4 A port State may inspect the craft and audit
its documentation for the sole purpose of verifying its
compliance with the matters certified by and condi-
tions associated with the Permit to Operate. Where
deficiencies are shown by such an audit, the Permit to
Operate ceases to be valid until such deficiencies are
corrected or otherwise resolved.
1.9.5 The provisions of 1.8 shall apply to the issue
and the period of validity of the Permit to Operate
High-Speed Craft.
1.9.6 The Permit to Operate High-Speed Craft
shall be that of the model given in annex 2 to this
Code. If the language used is not English, French or
Spanish, the text shall include a translation into one of
these languages.
1.9.7 In determining the worst intended conditions
and the operational limitations on all craft for inser-
tion in the Permit to Operate, the Administration shall
give consideration to all the parameters listed in an-
nex 12. The limitations assigned shall be those that
enable compliance with all of these factors.
I - Part 3 Section 1 General Comments and Requirements
GL 2012
1.10 Control
The provisions of regulation I/19 of the Convention
shall be applied to include the Permit to Operate
High-Speed Craft in addition to the Certificate issued
under 1.8.
1.11 Equivalents
1.11.1 Where this Code requires that a particular
fitting, material, appliance or apparatus, or type
thereof, shall be fitted or carried in a craft, or that any
particular provision shall be made, the Administration
may allow any other fitting, material, appliance or
apparatus, or type thereof, to be fitted or carried, or
any other provision to be made in the craft, if it is
satisfied by trial thereof or otherwise that such fitting,
material, appliance or apparatus, or type thereof, or
provision, is at least as effective as that required by
this Code.
1.11.2 Where compliance with any of the require-
ments of this Code would be impractical for the par-
ticular designs of the craft, the Administration may
substitute those with alternative requirements pro-
vided that equivalent safety is achieved. The Admini-
stration which allows any such substitution shall
communicate to the Organization Particulars of these
substitutions and the reasons therefor, which the Or-
ganization shall circulate to its Member Governments
for their information.
C1.11 For classification purposes equivalent arrange-
ments may be approved on a case-by-case basis.
1.12 Information to be made available
1.12.1 The Administration shall ensure that the
management of the company operating the craft has
provided the craft with adequate information and
guidance in the form of manuals to enable the craft to
be operated and maintained safely. These manuals
shall include a route operational manual, craft oper-
ating manual, maintenance manual and servicing
schedule. Such information shall be updated as neces-
sary.
1.12.2 The manuals shall contain at least the infor-
mation specified in Section 18, and shall be in a lan-
guage understood by the crew. Where this language is
not English, a translation into English shall be pro-
vided of at least the route operational manual and the
craft operating manual.
Chapter 1
Page 1–9
1.13 Further Developments
1.13.1 It is recognized that there is much ongoing
research and development in the design of high-speed
craft and that new types may emerge which have dif-
ferent geometry to that envisaged during the formula-
tion of this Code. It is important that this Code does
not restrict this progress and the development of new
designs.
1.13.2 A design may be produced which cannot
comply with the provisions of this Code. In such a
case the Administration shall determine the extent to
which the provisions of the Code are applicable to the
design and, if necessary, develop additional or alter-
native requirements to provide an equivalent level of
safety for the craft.
1.13.3 The foregoing shall be considered by the
Administration when assessing the granting of equiva-
lents under the Code.
1.14 Circulation of Safety Information
1.14.1 In the event that an Administration has cause
to investigate an accident involving a craft to which
this Code applies, that Administration shall provide a
copy of the official report to the Organization, which
will invite Member States to note the existence of the
report and to obtain a copy.
1.14.2 In the event that operational experience re-
veals structural or equipment failures affecting the
safety of a design, craft owners shall inform the Ad-
ministration.
1.15 Review of the Code
1.15.1 The Code shall be reviewed by the Organiza-
tion at intervals preferably not exceeding six years to
consider revision of existing requirements to take
account of new developments in design and technol-
ogy.
1.15.2 Where a new development in design and
technology has been found acceptable to an Admini-
stration, that Administration may submit particulars of
such development to the Organization for considera-
tion for incorporation into the Code during periodical
review.
I - Part 3 Section 2 Buoyancy, Stability and Subdivision Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 2–1

Section 2

Buoyancy, Stability and Subdivision

Part A - General to transfer the craft safely to displacement

mode in case of any system malfunction.
C2.0 Documents to be submitted
2.1.2 Account shall be taken of the effect of icing
C2.0.1 The following drawings and documents are to in the stability calculations. An example of estab-
be submitted. To facilitate a smooth and efficient lished practice for ice accretion allowances is given
approval process they shall be submitted electroni- in annex 5 for the guidance of the Administration.
cally via GLOBE 1. In specific cases and following
prior agreement with GL they can also be submitted 2.1.3 For the purpose of this and other Sections,
in paper form in triplicate. unless expressly defined otherwise, the following
definitions apply:
.1 Hull, plotted and numerically;
.1 "Downflooding point" means any opening,
.2 Side contour, plotted and numerically; irrespective of size, that would permit passage
.3 Coordinates of non-watertight and non- of water through a water/weathertight struc-
weathertight openings; ture (e.g., opening windows), but excludes any
opening kept closed to an appropriate stan-
.4 Hydrostatic tables; dard of water/weathertightness at all times
other than when required for access or for op-
.5 Cross curve tables; eration of portable submersible bilge pumps in
.6 Data of boundaries of all subcompartments an emergency (e.g., non-opening windows of
and a plan in which these compartments are similar strength and weathertight integrity to
stated; the structure in which they are installed).

.7 Damage stability investigation, complete input .2 "Elsewhere" when applied to sill and coaming
and output data including initial loading con- heights in 2.2.7 and 2.2.8 is taken as applying
ditions; to all weathertight and watertight closures lo-
cated on or below the datum.
.8 Damage control plan;
.3 "Fully submerged foil" means a foil having no
.9 Inclining test report; lift components piercing the surface of the wa-
ter in the foil-borne mode.
.10 Intact stability booklet.
.4 "Monohull craft" means any craft which is not
C2.0.2 Further documentation may be required if a multihull craft.
deemed necessary by GL.
.5 "Multihull craft" means a craft which in any
2.1 General normally achievable operating trim or heel
angle, has a rigid hull structure which pene-
2.1.1 A craft shall be provided with: trates the surface of the sea over more than
one discrete area.
.1 stability characteristics and stabilization sys-
tems adequate for safety when the craft is op- .6 "Permeability" of a space means the percent-
erated in the non-displacement mode and dur- age of the volume of that space which can be
ing the transitional mode; occupied by water.
.7 "Skirt" means a downwardly extending, flexi-
.2 buoyancy and stability characteristics ade-
ble structure used to contain or divide an air
quate for safety where the craft is operated in cushion.
the displacement mode, both in the intact con-
dition and the damaged condition; and 2.1.4 Other means of demonstrating compliance
.3 stability characteristics in the non- with the requirements of any part of this Section may
displacement and transitional modes adequate be accepted, provided that the method chosen can be
shown to provide an equivalent level of safety. Such
methods may include:
––––––––––––––
1 Detailed information about the secured GL system GLOBE .1 mathematical simulation of dynamic behav-
can be found on GL’s website www.gl-group.com/globe. iour;
Chapter 1 Section 2 Buoyancy, Stability and Subdivision
Page 2–2
.2 scale model testing; and
.3 full-scale trials.
2.1.5 The adequacy of mathematical simulations
must first be demonstrated by correlation with full-
scale or model tests for the appropriate type of craft.
It may be appropriate to use mathematical simula-
tions to help to identify the more critical scenarios
for subsequent physical testing.2
2.1.6 Model or full-scale tests and/or calculations
(as appropriate) shall also include consideration of
the following known stability hazards to which high-
speed craft are known to be liable, according to craft
type:
.1 directional instability, which is often coupled
to roll and pitch instabilities;
.2 broaching and bow diving in following seas at
speeds near to wave speed, applicable to most
types;
.3 bow diving of planing monohulls and catama-
rans due to dynamic loss of longitudinal sta-
bility in relatively calm seas;
.4 reduction in transverse stability with increas-
ing speed of monohulls;
.5 porpoising of planing monohulls, being cou-
pled pitch and heave oscillations, which can
become violent;
.6 chine tripping, being a phenomenon of plan-
ing monohulls occurring when the immersion
of a chine generates a strong capsizing mo-
ment;
.7 plough-in of air-cushion vehicles, either longi-
tudinal or transverse, as a result of bow or
side skirt tuck-under or sudden collapse of
skirt geometry, which, in extreme cases, can
result in capsize;
.8 pitch instability of SWATH (small waterplane
area twin hull) craft due to the hydrodynamic
moment developed as a result of the water
flow over the submerged lower hulls;
.9 reduction in effective metacentric height (roll
stiffness) of surface effect ship (SES) in high
speed turns compared to that on a straight
course, which can result in sudden increases
in heel angle and/or coupled roll and pitch os-
cillations; and
.10 resonant rolling of SES in beam seas, which,
in extreme cases, can result in capsize.
––––––––––––––
2 Some mathematical simulation methods are not well suited to
accurate modelling of extreme events. For safety level 3 or 4, it
may be appropriate to use model testing as a precursor to, or
instead of, full-scale testing
I - Part 3
GL 2012
2.1.7 Suitable calculations shall be carried out
and/or tests conducted to demonstrate that, when
operating within approved operational limitations,
the craft will, after a disturbance causing roll, pitch,
heave or heel due to turning or any combination
thereof, return to the original attitude. Where calcu-
lations are employed, it shall first be shown that they
correctly represent dynamic behaviour within the
operational limitations of the craft.
C2.1.8 Arrangement of watertight bulkheads
.1 At least the following watertight bulkheads
are to be fitted in all craft:
− one collision bulkhead,
− one afterpeak bulkhead,
− one bulkhead at each end of the machinery space.
.2 The distance [m] of the collision bulkhead
from the forward perpendicular is to be between 0,05
L and 0,05 L + 3 m. The collision bulkhead is to be
fitted at least in places used for providing the reserve
of buoyancy used for proving compliance with the
intact and damage stability requirements of the pre-
sent HSC Rules.
.3 The collision bulkhead is to extend water-
tight up to the datum (bulkhead deck). Steps or re-
cesses may be permitted provided C2.1.7.2 are ob-
served.
.4 The remaining watertight bulkheads are, in
general, to extend to the datum. Wherever practica-
ble, they shall be situated in one frame plane, other-
wise those portions of decks situated between parts of
transverse bulkheads are to be watertight.
2.2 Intact Buoyancy and Watertight and
Weathertight Integrity
2.2.1 Buoyant spaces
2.2.1.1 All craft shall have a sufficient reserve of
buoyancy at the design waterline to meet the intact
and damage stability requirements of this Section.
The Administration may require a larger reserve of
buoyancy to permit the craft to operate in any of its
intended modes. This reserve of buoyancy shall be
calculated by including only those compartments that
are:
.1 watertight and situated below the datum, or
.2 watertight or weathertight and situated above
the datum.
I - Part 3 Section 2 Buoyancy, Stability and Subdivision
GL 2012
In considering the stability after damage, flooding
shall be assumed to occur until limited by watertight
boundaries in the equilibrium condition, and
weathertight boundaries in intermediate stages of
flooding and within the range of positive righting
lever required to satisfy the residual stability re-
quirements. Where a buoyant space may be subjected
to increased fluid pressure in the equilibrium position
after damage, the boundaries and associated open-
ings and penetrations of that space shall be designed
and constructed to prevent the passage of fluid under
that pressure.
Craft built in conformity with the requirements of
organizations recognised by the Administration, in
accordance with regulation XI/1 of the Convention
may be considered to possess adequate strength and
integrity.
2.2.1.2 Arrangements shall be provided for check-
ing the watertight or weathertight integrity of those
compartments taken into account in 2.2.1.1, and the
details incorporated in the Craft Operating Manual
required by 18.2.1.
2.2.2 Openings in watertight divisions
2.2.2.1 The number of openings in watertight bulk-
heads shall be reduced to the minimum compatible
with the design and proper working of the craft, and
all such doors shall be closed prior to departure of
the craft from the berth.
2.2.2.2 Doors in watertight bulkheads may be
hinged or sliding. They shall be shown by suitable
testing to be capable of maintaining the watertight
integrity of the bulkhead. Such testing shall be car-
ried out for both sides of the door and shall apply a
pressure head 10 % greater than that determined
from the minimum permissible height of a downflood-
ing opening. Testing may be carried out either before
or after the door is fitted into the craft but, where
shore testing is adopted, satisfactory installation in
the craft shall be verified by inspection and hose
testing.
2.2.2.3 Type approval may be accepted in lieu of
testing individual doors, provided the approval proc-
ess includes pressure testing to a head equal to, or
greater, than the required head (refer to 2.2.2.2).
2.2.2.4 All watertight doors shall be capable of
being operated when the craft is inclined up to 15°
and shall be fitted with means of indication in the
operating compartment showing whether they are
open or closed. All such doors shall be capable of
being opened and closed locally from each side of the
bulkhead.
2.2.2.5 Watertight doors shall remain closed when
the craft is at sea, except that they may be opened for
access. A notice shall be attached to each door to the
effect that it is not to be left open.
Chapter 1
Page 2–3
2.2.2.6 Watertight doors shall be capable of being
closed by remote control from the operating com-
partment in not less than 20 s and not more than 40s,
and shall be provided with an audible alarm, distinct
from other alarms in the area, which will sound for at
least 5 s but no more than 10 s before the doors begin
to move whenever the door is closed remotely by
power, and continue sounding until the door is com-
pletely closed. The power, control and indicators
shall be operable in the event of main power failure,
as required by regulation II-1/15.7.3 of the Conven-
tion. In passenger areas and areas where the ambient
noise exceeds 85 dB(A) the audible alarm shall be
supplemented by an intermittent visual signal at the
door. If the Administration is satisfied that such
doors are essential for the safe work of the craft,
hinged watertight doors having only local control
may be permitted for areas to which crew only have
access, provided they are fitted with remote indica-
tors as required by 2.2.2.4.
2.2.2.7 Where pipes, scuppers, electric cables, etc.
are carried through watertight divisions, the ar-
rangements for creating a watertight penetration
shall be of a type which has been prototype tested
under hydrostatic pressure equal to or greater than
that required to be withstood for the actual location
in the craft in which they are to be installed. The test
pressure shall be maintained for at least 30min and
there must be no leakage through the penetration
arrangement during this period.
The test pressure head shall be 10 % greater than
that determined from the minimum permissible height
of a downflooding opening. Watertight bulkhead
penetrations which are effected by continuous weld-
ing do not require prototype testing. Valves on scup-
pers from weathertight compartments, included in the
stability calculations, shall have arrangements for
remote closing from the operating station.
2.2.2.8 Where a ventilation trunk forms part of a
watertight boundary, the trunk shall be capable of
withstanding the water pressure that may be present
taking into account the maximum inclination angle
allowable during all stages of flooding.
C2.2.2.9 No doors, manholes, or access openings are
generally permitted in the collision bulkhead below
the datum. GL may authorize a single manhole in the
collision bulkhead, in each hull for catamaran, if
deemed necessary.
2.2.3 Inner bow doors
2.2.3.1 Where ro-ro craft are fitted with bow load-
ing openings, an inner bow door shall be fitted abaft
such openings, to restrict the extent of flooding in the
event of failure of the outer closure. This inner bow
door, where fitted, shall be:
.1 weathertight to the deck above, which deck
shall itself be weathertight forward to the bow
loading opening;
Chapter 1 Section 2 Buoyancy, Stability and Subdivision
Page 2–4
.2 so arranged as to preclude the possibility of a
bow loading door causing damage to it in the
case of damage to, or detachment of, the bow
loading door;
.3 forward of all positions on the vehicle deck in
which vehicles are intended to be carried; and
.4 part of a boundary designed to prevent flood-
ing into the remainder of the craft.
2.2.3.2 A craft may be exempted from the require-
ment for such an inner bow door where one of the
following applies:
.1 the vehicle loading deck at the inner bow door
position is above the design waterline by a
height more than the significant wave height
corresponding to the worst intended condi-
tions;
.2 it can be demonstrated using model tests or
mathematical simulations that when the craft
is proceeding at a range of speeds up to the
maximum attainable speed in the loaded con-
dition at all headings in long crested seas of
the greatest significant wave height corre-
sponding to the worst intended conditions, ei-
ther:
.2.1 the bow loading door is not reached by waves;
or
.2.2 having been tested with the bow loading door
open to determine the maximum steady state
volume of water which accumulates, it can be
shown by static analysis that, with the same
volume of water on the vehicle deck(s) the re-
sidual stability requirements of 2.6.11 and
2.13 or 2.15 are satisfied. If the model tests or
mathematical simulations are unable to show
that the volume of water accumulated reaches
a steady state, the craft shall be considered
not to have satisfied the conditions of this ex-
emption.
Where mathematical simulations are em-
ployed they shall already have been verified
against full-scale or model testing;
.3 bow loading openings lead to open ro-ro
spaces provided with guard-rails or having
freeing ports complying with 2.2.3.2.4 ;
.4 the deck of the lowest ro-ro space above the
design waterline is fitted on each side of the
deck with freeing ports evenly distributed
along the sides of the compartment. These
shall either be proven to be acceptable using
tests according to 2.2.3.2.2 above or comply
with the following:
.4.1 A ≥ 0.3 l
where :
I - Part 3
GL 2012
A = the total area of freeing ports on each
side of the deck in m² ; and
l = the length of the compartment in m;
.4.2 the craft shall maintain a residual freeboard
to the deck of the ro-ro space of at least 1 m in
the worst condition;
.4.3 such freeing ports shall be located within the
height of 0.6 m above the deck of the ro-ro
space, and the lower edge of the ports shall be
within 0.02 m above the deck of the ro-ro
space; and
.4.4 such freeing ports shall be fitted with closing
devices or flaps to prevent water entering the
deck of the ro-ro space whilst allowing water
which may accumulate on the deck of the ro-
ro space to drain.
2.2.4 Other provisions for ro-ro craft
2.2.4.1 All accesses in the ro-ro space that lead to
spaces below the deck shall have a lowest point
which is not less than the height required from the
tests conducted according to 2.2.3.2.2 or 3 m above
the design waterline.
2.2.4.2 Where vehicle ramps are installed to give
access to spaces below the deck of the ro-ro space,
their openings shall be capable of being closed
weathertight to prevent ingress of water below.
2.2.4.3 Accesses in the ro-ro space that lead to
spaces below the ro-ro deck and having a lowest
point which is less than the height required from the
tests conducted according to 2.2.3.2.2 or 3 m above
the design waterline may be permitted provided they
are watertight and are closed before the craft leaves
the berth on any voyage and remain closed until the
craft is at its next berth.
2.2.4.4 The accesses referred to in 2.2.4.2 and
2.2.4.3 above shall be fitted with alarm indicators in
the operating compartment.
2.2.4.5 Special category spaces and ro-ro spaces
shall be patrolled or monitored by effective means,
such as television surveillance, so that any movement
of vehicles in adverse weather conditions and unau-
thorised access by passengers thereto can be detected
whilst the craft is underway (refer to 7.8.3.1).
2.2.5 Indicators and surveillance
2.2.5.1 Indicators
Indicators shall be provided in the operating com-
partment for all shell doors, loading doors and other
closing appliances which, if left open or not properly
secured, could lead to major flooding in the intact
and damage conditions. The indicator system shall be
designed on the fail-safe principle and shall show by
visual alarms if the door is not fully closed or if any
of the securing arrangements are not in place and
I - Part 3 Section 2 Buoyancy, Stability and Subdivision
GL 2012
fully locked, and by audible alarms if such door or
closing appliance becomes open or the securing
arrangements become unsecured. The indicator panel
in the operating compartment shall be equipped with
a mode selection function 'harbour/sea voyage' so
arranged that an audible alarm is given in the oper-
ating compartment if the craft leaves harbour with
the bow doors, inner doors, stern ramp or any other
side shell doors not closed or any closing device not
in the correct position. The power supply for the
indicator systems shall be independent of the power
supply for operating and securing the doors.
2.2.5.2 Television surveillance
Television surveillance and a water leakage detection
system shall be arranged to provide an indication to
the operating compartment and to the engine control
station of any leakage through inner and outer bow
doors, stern doors or any other shell doors which
could lead to major flooding.
2.2.6 Integrity of superstructure
2.2.6.1 Where entry of water into structures above
the datum would significantly influence the stability
and buoyancy of the craft, such structures shall be:
.1 of adequate strength to maintain the weather-
tight integrity and fitted with weathertight
closing appliances; or
.2 provided with adequate drainage arrange-
ments; or
.3 an equivalent combination of both measures.
2.2.6.2 Weathertight superstructures and deck-
houses located above the datum shall in the outside
boundaries have means of closing openings with
sufficient strength such as to maintain weathertight
integrity in all damage conditions where the space in
question is not damaged. Furthermore, the means of
closing shall be such as to maintain weathertight
integrity in all operational conditions.
2.2.7 Doors, windows, etc., in boundaries of
weathertight spaces
2.2.7.1 Doors, windows, etc., and any associated
frames and mullions in weathertight superstructures
and deckhouses shall be weathertight and shall not
leak or fail at a uniformly applied pressure less than
that at which adjacent structure would experience
permanent set or fail. Conformity with the require-
ments of organizations recognized by the Administra-
tion in accordance with regulation XI/1 of the Con-
vention may be considered to possess adequate
strength.
2.2.7.2 For doors in weathertight superstructures,
hose tests shall be carried out with a water pressure
from the outside in accordance with specifications at
Chapter 1
Page 2–5
least equivalent to those acceptable to the Organiza-
tion 3 .
2.2.7.3 The height above the deck of sills to door-
ways leading to exposed decks shall be as high above
the deck as is reasonable and practicable, particu-
larly those located in exposed positions. Such sill
heights shall in general not be less than 100 mm for
doors to weathertight spaces on decks above the
datum, and 250 mm elsewhere. For craft of 30 m in
length and under, sill heights may be reduced to the
maximum which is consistent with the safe working of
the craft.
2.2.7.4 Windows shall not be permitted in the
boundaries of special category spaces or ro-ro
spaces or below the datum. If required by restrictions
in the Permit to Operate, forward facing windows, or
windows which may be submerged at any stage of
flooding shall be fitted with hinged or sliding storm
shutters ready for immediate use.
2.2.7.5 Side scuttles to spaces below the datum shall
be fitted with efficient hinged deadlights arranged
inside so that they can be effectively closed and se-
cured watertight.
2.2.7.6 No side scuttle shall be fitted in a position so
that its sill is below a line drawn parallel to and one
metre above the design waterline.
2.2.8 Hatchways and other openings
2.2.8.1 Hatchways closed by weathertight covers
The construction and the means for securing the
weathertightness of cargo and other hatchways shall
comply with the following:
.1 coaming heights shall in general not be less
than 100 mm for hatches to weathertight
spaces on decks above the datum, and 250 mm
elsewhere. For craft of 30 m in length and un-
der, coaming heights may be reduced to the
maximum which is consistent with the safe
working of the craft;
.2 the height of these coamings may be reduced,
or the coamings omitted entirely, on condition
that the Administration is satisfied that the
safety of the ship is not thereby impaired in
any sea conditions up to the worst intended
conditions. Where coamings are provided,
they shall be of substantial construction; and
.3 the arrangements for securing and maintain-
ing weathertightness shall ensure that the
tightness can be maintained in any sea condi-
tions up to the worst intended conditions.
––––––––––––––
3 Refer to ISO 6042 - Ships and Marine Technology – Weather-
tight single-leaf steel doors, or a similar standard.
Chapter 1 Section 2 Buoyancy, Stability and Subdivision
Page 2–6
2.2.8.2 Machinery space openings
2.2.8.2.1 Machinery space openings shall be properly
framed and efficiently enclosed by casings of ample
strength and, where the casings are not protected by
other structures, their strength shall be specially
considered. Access openings in such casings shall be
fitted with weathertight doors.
2.2.8.2.2 Heights of sills and coaming shall, in gen-
eral, not be less than 100 mm for openings to
weathertight spaces on decks above the datum, and
380 mm elsewhere. For craft of 30 m in length and
under, these heights may be reduced to the maximum
which is consistent with the safe working of the craft.
2.2.8.2.3 Machinery space ventilator openings shall
comply with the requirements of 2.2.8.4.2.
2.2.8.3 Miscellaneous openings in exposed decks
2.2.8.3.1 Manholes and flush scuttles on the datum
or within superstructures other than enclosed super-
structures shall be closed by substantial covers capa-
ble of being made watertight. Unless secured by
closely spaced bolts, the covers shall be permanently
attached.
2.2.8.3.2 Service hatches to machinery, etc. may be
arranged as flush hatches provided that the covers
are secured by closely spaced bolts, are kept closed
at sea, and are equipped with arrangements for port-
able guardrails.
2.2.8.3.3 Openings in exposed decks leading to
spaces below the datum or enclosed superstructures
other than hatchways, machinery space openings,
manholes and flush scuttles shall be protected by an
enclosed superstructure, or by a deckhouse or com-
panionway of equivalent strength and weathertight-
ness.
2.2.8.3.4 The height above the deck of sills to the
doorways in companionways shall, in general, not be
less than 100 mm for doors to weathertight spaces on
decks above the datum, and 250 mm elsewhere. For
craft of 30 m in length and under sill heights may be
reduced to the maximum which is consistent with the
safe working of the craft.
2.2.8.4 Ventilators
2.2.8.4.1 Ventilators to spaces below the datum or
decks of enclosed superstructures shall have substan-
tially constructed coamings efficiently connected to
the deck. Coaming heights shall in general not be less
than 100 mm for ventilators to weathertight spaces
on decks above the datum, and 380 mm elsewhere.
For craft of 30 m in length and under, coaming
heights may be reduced to the maximum which is
consistent with the safe working of the craft.
2.2.8.4.2 Ventilators the coamings of which extend
to more than one metre above the deck or which are
fitted to decks above the datum need not be fitted with
I - Part 3
GL 2012
closing arrangements unless they face forward or are
specifically required by the Administration.
2.2.8.4.3 Except as provided in 2.2.8.4.2, ventilator
openings shall be provided with efficient weathertight
closing appliances.
2.2.8.4.4 Ventilator openings shall face aft or ath-
wartships wherever practicable.
2.2.9 Scuppers, inlets and discharges
2.2.9.1 Discharges led through the shell either from
spaces below the datum or from within superstruc-
tures and deckhouses fitted above the datum shall be
fitted with efficient and accessible means for prevent-
ing water from passing inboard. Normally each sepa-
rate discharge shall have one automatic non-return
valve with a positive means of closing it from a posi-
tion above the datum. Where, however, the vertical
distance from the design waterline to the inboard end
of the discharge pipe exceeds 0.01L, the discharge
may have two automatic non-return valves without
positive means of closing, provided that the inboard
valve is always accessible for examination under
service conditions. Where that vertical distance ex-
ceeds 0.02L, a single automatic non-return valve
without positive means of closing may be accepted.
The means for operating the positive action valve
shall be readily accessible and provided with an
indicator showing whether the valve is open or
closed.
2.2.9.2 Valves on scuppers from weathertight com-
partments included in the stability calculations shall
be operable from the operating compartment.
2.2.9.3 In manned machinery spaces, main and
auxiliary sea inlets and discharges in connection with
the operation of machinery may be controlled locally.
Such controls shall be readily accessible and shall be
provided with indicators showing whether the valves
are open or closed. In unmanned machinery spaces,
main and auxiliary sea inlet and discharge controls
in connection with the operation of machinery shall
either:
.1 be located at least 50 % of the significant
wave height corresponding to the worst in-
tended conditions above the deepest flooded
waterline following damage specified in 2.6.6
to 2.6.10; or
.2 be operable from the operating compartment.
2.2.9.4 Scuppers leading from superstructures or
deckhouses not fitted with weathertight doors shall be
led overboard.
2.2.9.5 All shell fittings and the valves required by
this Code shall be of a suitable ductile material.
Valves of ordinary cast iron or similar material shall
not be acceptable.
I - Part 3 Section 2 Buoyancy, Stability and Subdivision
GL 2012
2.2.10 Air pipes
2.2.10.1 Main storage tanks containing flammable
liquids or tanks which can be pumped or filled from
the sea shall have air pipes which do not terminate in
enclosed spaces.
2.2.10.2 All air pipes extending to exposed decks
shall have a height from the deck to the point where
water may have access below of at least 300 mm
where the deck is less than 0.05L above the design
waterline, and 150 mm on all other decks.
2.2.10.3 Air pipes may discharge through the side of
the superstructure provided that this is at a height of
at least 0.02L above any waterline when the intact
craft is heeled to an angle of 15° or 0.02L above the
highest waterline at all stages of flooding as deter-
mined by the damaged stability calculations, which-
ever is higher.
2.2.10.4 All air pipes shall be equipped with weather-
tight closing devices that close automatically.
2.2.11 Freeing ports
2.2.11.1 Where bulwarks on weather decks form
wells, ample provision shall be made for rapidly
freeing the decks of water and for draining them. The
minimum freeing port area (A) on each side of the
craft for each well on the weather deck of the main
hull(s) shall be:
.1 where the length of bulwark (l) in the well is
20 m or less:
A = 0.7 + 0.035 l (m2); and
.2 where l exceeds 20 m:
A = 0.07l (m2),
and, in no case, l need be taken as greater than 0.7L.
If the bulwark is more than 1.2 m in average height,
the required area shall be increased by 0.004 m2 per
metre of length of well for each 0.1 m difference in
height. If the bulwark is less than 0.9 m in average
height, the required area shall be decreased by 0.004
m2 per metre of length of well for each 0.1 m differ-
ence in height.
2.2.11.2 Such freeing ports shall be located within
the height of 0.6 m above the deck and the lower edge
shall be within 0.02 m above the deck.
2.2.11.3 All such openings in the bulwarks shall be
protected by rails or bars spaced approximately 230
mm apart. If shutters are fitted to freeing ports, am-
ple clearance shall be provided to prevent jamming.
Hinges shall have pins or bearings of non-corrodible
material. If shutters are fitted with securing appli-
ances, these appliances shall be of approved con-
struction.
Chapter 1
Page 2–7
2.2.11.4 Craft, having superstructures which are
open in front or both ends, shall comply with the
provisions of 2.2.11.1.
2.2.11.5 In craft, having superstructures which are
open at the aft end, the minimum freeing port area
shall be:
A = 0.3b (m2)
where:
b = the breadth of the craft at the exposed
deck (m).
2.2.11.6 Ro-ro craft fitted with bow loading openings
leading to open vehicle spaces shall comply with the
provisions of 2.2.3.
2.3 Intact Stability in the Displacement Mode
2.3.1 Hydrofoil craft fitted with surface-piercing
foils and/or fully submerged foils shall have sufficient
stability under all permitted cases of loading to com-
ply with the relevant provisions of annex 6 and spe-
cifically maintain a heel angle of less than 10º when
subjected to the greater of the heeling moments in
1.1.2 and 1.1.4 of that annex.
2.3.2 Subject to 2.3.4, multihull craft other than
hydrofoil craft shall meet the relevant requirements
of annex 7 in all permitted cases of loading.
2.3.3 Subject to 2.3.4, monohull craft other than
hydrofoil craft shall meet the relevant requirements
of annex 8 in all permitted conditions of loading.
2.3.4 Where the characteristics of multihull craft
are inappropriate for application of annex 7 or the
characteristics of monohull craft are inappropriate
for application of annex 8, the Administration may
accept alternative criteria equivalent to those stipu-
lated, as appropriate to the type of craft and area of
operation. The requirements of annexes 7 and 8 may
be applied as indicated in the table below.
Table 2.3.4 Application of annexes 7 and 8 to
monohull and multihull craft
Angle of maximum GZ
GMT
≤ 25° > 25°
≤3m annex 7 or annex 8 annex 8
>3m annex 7 annex 7 or annex 8
where:
GMT = transverse metacentric height in the
loading condition corresponding to
the design waterline, corrected for
free surface effects (m)
GZ = righting lever
Chapter 1 Section 2 Buoyancy, Stability and Subdivision I - Part 3
Page 2–8 GL 2012

2.4 Intact Stability in the Non-Displacement Spaces Permeability

Mode
Appropriated to cargo or
60
stores
2.4.1 The requirements of this section and of 2.12 Occupied by
shall be applied on the assumption that any stabiliza- 95
accommodation
tion systems fitted are fully operational.
Occupied by machinery 85
Intended for liquids 0 or 95 4
2.4.2 The roll and pitch stability on the first
and/or any other craft of a series shall be qualita- Appropriated for cargo
90
tively assessed during operational safety trials as vehicles
required by Sections 17 and 18 and annex 9. The Void spaces 95
results of such trials may indicate the need to impose
operational limitations.
2.6.3 Notwithstanding 2.6.2, permeability deter-
mined by direct calculation shall be used where a
2.4.3 Where craft are fitted with surface-piercing more onerous condition results, and may be used
structure or appendages, precautions shall be taken where a less onerous condition results from that
against dangerous attitudes or inclinations and loss provided according to 2.6.2.
of stability subsequent to a collision with a sub-
merged or floating object. 2.6.4 The Administration may permit the use of
low-density foam or other media to provide buoyancy
in void spaces, provided that satisfactory evidence is
2.4.4 In designs where periodic use of cushion provided that any such proposed medium is the most
deformation is employed as a means of assisting craft suitable alternative and is:
control, or periodic use of cushion air exhausting to
atmosphere for purposes of craft manoeuvring, the .1 of closed-cell form if foam, or otherwise im-
effects upon cushion-borne stability shall be deter- pervious to water absorption;
mined, and the limitations on the use by virtue of
.2 structurally stable under service conditions;
craft speed or attitude shall be established.
.3 chemically inert in relation to structural mate-
rials with which it is in contact or other sub-
2.4.5 In the case of an air cushion vehicle fitted stances with which the medium is likely to be
with flexible skirts, it shall be demonstrated that the in contact (reference is made to 7.4.3.7); and
skirts remain stable under operational conditions.
.4 properly secured in place and easily remov-
able for inspection of the void spaces.
2.5 Intact Stability in the Transitional Mode
2.6.5 The Administration may permit void bottom
spaces to be fitted within the watertight envelope of
2.5.1 Under weather conditions up to the worst the hull without the provision of a bilge system or air
intended conditions, the time to pass from the dis- pipes provided that:
placement mode to the non-displacement mode and
vice versa shall be minimised unless it is demon- .1 the structure is capable of withstanding the
strated that no substantial reduction of stability oc- pressure head after any of the damages re-
curs during this transition. quired by this section;
.2 when carrying out a damage stability calcula-
tion in accordance with the requirements of
2.5.2 Hydrofoil craft shall comply with the rele-
this section, any void space adjacent to the
vant provisions of annex 6.
damaged zone shall be included in the calcu-
lation and the criteria in 2.6, 2.13 and 2.15
complied with;
2.6 Buoyancy and Stability in the Displacement
Mode following Damage .3 the means by which water which has leaked
into the void space is to be remove d shall be
included in the craft operating manual re-
2.6.1 The requirements of this Section apply to all quired by Section 18; and
permitted conditions of loading.

2.6.2 For the purpose of making damage stability

calculations, the volume and surface permeabilities ––––––––––––––
shall be, in general, as follows: 4 whichever results in the more severe requirements
I - Part 3 Section 2 Buoyancy, Stability and Subdivision
GL 2012
.4 adequate ventilation is provided for inspection
of the space under consideration as required
by 2.2.1.2.
.5 void spaces filled with foam or modular buoy-
ancy elements or any space without a venting
system are considered to be void spaces for
the purposes of this paragraph, provided such
foam or elements fully comply with 2.6.4.
2.6.6 Any damage of a lesser extent than that
postulated in 2.6.7 to 2.6.10, as applicable, which
would result in a more severe condition shall also be
investigated.
2.6.7 Extent of side damage
The following side damage shall be assumed any-
where on the periphery of the craft:
.1 the longitudinal extent of damage shall be
0.75 ∇ 1/3, or (3 m + 0.225 ∇ 1/3), or 11 m,
whichever is the least;
.2 the transverse extent of penetration into the
craft shall be 0.2 ∇ 1/3. However, where the
craft is fitted with inflated skirts or with non-
buoyant side structures, the transverse extent
of penetration shall be at least 0.12 ∇ 1/3 into
the main buoyancy hull or tank structure; and
.3 the vertical extent of damage shall be taken
for the full vertical extent of the craft,
where:
∇ = volume of displacement corresponding
to the design waterline (m3).
The damage described in this paragraph shall be
assumed to have the shape of a parallelepiped. 5
Applying this to figure 2.6.7 a, the inboard face at its
mid-length shall be tangential to, or otherwise touch-
ing in a least 2 places, the surface corresponding to
the specified transverse extent of penetration, as
illustrated in figure 2.6.7 a.
Side damage shall not transversely penetrate a
greater distance than the extent of 0.2∇ 1/3 at the
design waterline, except where a lesser extent is
provided for in 2.6.7.2. Refer to figures 2.6.7b and c.
If considering a multihull, the periphery of the craft is
considered to only be the surface of the shell encom-
passed by the outboard surface of the outermost hull
at any given section.
2.6.8 Extent of bow and stern damage
2.6.8.1 The following extents of damage are to be
applied to bow and stern, as illustrated in figure
2.6.8:
––––––––––––––
5 A parallelepiped is defined as “a solid contained by parallelo-
grams” and a parallelogram is defined as “a four-sided recti-
linear figure whose opposite sides are parallel”.
Chapter 1
Page 2–9
.1 at the fore end, damage to the area defined as
Abow in 4.4.1, the aft limit of which being a
transverse vertical plane, provided that this
area need not extend further aft from the for-
ward extremity of the craft’s watertight enve-
lope than the distance defined in 2.6.7.1; and
.2 at the aft end, damage to the area aft of a
transverse vertical plane at a distance 0.2∇ 1/3
forward of the aft extremity of the watertight
envelope of the hull.
2.6.8.2 The provisions of 2.6.6 in relation to dam-
age of lesser extent remain applicable to such dam-
age.
2.6.9 Extent of bottom damage in areas vulnerable
to raking damage
2.6.9.1 Application
.1 Any part of the surface of the hull(s) is consid-
ered to be vulnerable to raking damage if:
.1 it is in contact with the water at 90 % of
maximum speed in smooth water, and
.2 it also lies below two planes which are
perpendicular to the craft centreline plane
and at heights as shown in figure 2.6.8.1.
For multihulls, individual hulls shall be
considered separately.
.2 Raking damage shall be assumed to occur
along any fore-and-aft line on the surface of
the hull(s) between the keel and the upper
limit defined in the figure below:
.3 Damage shall not be applied at the same time
as that defined in 2.6.7 or 2.6.9.
where:
T = maximum draught of the hull (each hull
considered individually in the case of
multihulls) to the design waterline, ex-
cluding any no buoyant structure, pro-
vided that structures such as single plate
skegs or solid metal appendages shall be
considered to be non-buoyant and thus
exluded.
2.6.9.2 Extent
2.6.9.2.1 Two different longitudinal extents shall be
considered separately:
.1 55 % of the length L, measured from the
most forward point of the underwater
buoyant volume of each hull; and
.2 a percentage of the length L, applied any-
where in the length of the craft, equal to
35 % for craft where L = 50 m and over
and equal to ( L/2 + 10) % for craft where
L is less than 50 m.
Chapter 1 Section 2 Buoyancy, Stability and Subdivision I - Part 3
Page 2–10 GL 2012

Transverse extent
of penetration CL
Transverse extent
of penetration

Longitudinal
extent of damage

Figure 2.6.7 a

Transverse extent
of penetration

Design
waterline Damage of less than maximum
vertical extent
Damage penetration limited below
design waterline by a vertical line

CL

Figure 2.6.7 b

Transverse extent
of penetration Damage of less than
maximum vertical
extent

Design
waterline

Damage penetration limited

below design waterline by a
vertical line

CL

Figure 2.6.7 c
I - Part 3 Section 2 Buoyancy, Stability and Subdivision Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 2–11

Deck area = Abow

0.2 Ñ1/3 Transverse vertical planes

Figure 2.6.8

This line is parallel to

the design waterline
0.3 T T Design waterline

This area is
vulnerable to 0.5 L
raking damage
L

Figure 2.6.8.1

2.6.9.2.2 Except as provided below, the penetration
normal to the shell shall be 0.04∇ 1/3 or
0.5 m, whichever is the lesser, in association with a
girth along the shell equal to 0.1∇ 1/3, where ∇ is the
volume of displacement corresponding to the design
waterline (m3). However this penetration or girth
shall under no circumstances extend above the verti-
cal extent of the vulnerable area as specified in
2.6.8.1.1.
2.6.9.2.3 The shape of damage shall be as-
sumed to be rectangular in the transverse plane as
illustrated in figure 2.6.9.2 below. Damage is to be
assumed at a series of sections within the defined
longitudinal extent in accordance with figure 2.6.9.2,
the mid-point of the damaged girth being maintained
at a constant distance from the centreline throughout
that longitudinal extent.
Penetration normal
to the shell
Limit of penetration
Girth along
the shell
Figure 2.6.9.2
2.6.10 Extent of bottom damage in areas not vul-
nerable to raking damage
2.6.10.1 Application
This applies to all parts of the hull(s) below the de-
sign waterline which are not defined as vulnerable to
raking damage in 2.6.8.1. Damage shall not be ap-
plied at the same time as that defined in 2.6.7 or
2.6.8.
2.6.10.2 Extent
The following extent of damage shall be assumed:
.1 the length of damage in the fore-and-aft direc-
tion shall be 0.75 ∇ 1/3, or (3 m + 0.225 ∇ 1/3),
or 11 m whichever is the least;
.2 the athwartships girth of damage shall be
0.2 ∇ 1/3; and
.3 the depth of penetration normal to the shell
shall be 0.02 ∇ 1/3, where:
∇ = volume of displacement corresponding to
the design waterline (m3).
.4 the shape of damage shall be assumed to be
rectangular in the plane of the shell of the
craft, and rectangular in the transverse plane
as illustrated in figure 2.6.9.2.
2.6.11 In applying 2.6.8 and 2.6.9 to multihull
craft, an obstruction at or below the design waterline
of up to 7 m width shall be considered in determining
Chapter 1 Section 2 Buoyancy, Stability and Subdivision
Page 2–12
the number of hulls damaged at any one time. The
requirement of 2.6.6 shall also be applied.
2.6.12 Following any of the postulated damages
detailed in 2.6.6 to 2.6.10, the craft in still water
shall have sufficient buoyancy and positive stability
to simultaneously ensure that:
.1 for all craft other than amphibious air-cushion
vehicles, after flooding has ceased and a state
of equilibrium has been reached, the final wa-
terline is below the level of any opening
through which further flooding could take
place by at least 50 % of the significant wave
height corresponding to the worst intended
conditions;
.2 for amphibious air-cushio n vehicles, after
flooding has ceased and a state of equilibrium
has been reached, the final waterline is below
the level of any opening through which further
flooding could take place by at least 25 % of
the significant wave height corresponding to
the worst intended conditions;
.3 there is a positive freeboard from the damage
waterline to survival craft embarkation posi-
tions;
.4 essential emergency equipment, emergency
radios, power supplies and public address sys-
tems needed for organizing the evacuation
remain accessible and operational;
.5 the residual stability of craft meets the appro-
priate criteria as laid out in annexes 7 and 8
according to table 2.3.4. Within the range of
positive stability governed by the criteria of
annexes 7 or 8, no unprotected opening shall
be submerged.
2.6.13 Downflooding openings referred to in
2.6.11.1 and 2.6.11.2 shall include doors and hatches
which are used for damage control or evacuation
procedures, but may exclude those which are closed
by means of weathertight doors and hatch covers and
not used for damage control or evacuation proce-
dures.
2.7 Inclining and Stability Information
2.7.1 Every craft, on completion of build, shall be
inclined and the elements of its stability determined.
When an accurate inclining is not practical, the
lightweight displacement and centre of gravity shall
be determined by a lightweight survey and accurate
calculation.
2.7.2 On all craft, where an accurate inclining
experiment is impractical owing to the height of the
centre of gravity (VCG or KG) being less than one
third of the transverse metacentric height (GMT), the
Administration may accept estimation of KG by de-
tailed calculation in place of an inclining experiment.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
In such cases, a displacement check shall be under-
taken to confirm the calculated lightship characteris-
tics, including LCG, which may be accepted if the
measured lightship displacement and LCG are re-
spectively within 2 % and 1 % L relative to the esti-
mate.
2.7.3 The master shall be supplied by the owner
with reliable information relating to the stability of
the craft in accordance with the following provisions
of this paragraph. The information relating to stabil-
ity shall , before issued to the master, be submitted to
the Administration for approval, together with a copy
thereof for their retention, and shall incorporate such
additions and amendments as the Administration may
in any particular case require.
2.7.4 Where any alterations are made to a craft so
as significantly to affect the stability information
supplied to the master, amended stability information
shall be provided. If necessary the craft shall be re-
inclined.
2.7.5 A report of each inclining or lightweight
survey carried out in accordance with this Section
and of the calculation therefrom of the lightweight
condition particulars shall be submitted to the Ad-
ministration for approval, together with a copy for
their retention. The approved report shall be placed
on board the craft by the owner in the custody of the
master and shall incorporate such additions and
amendments as the Administration may in any par-
ticular case require. The amended lightweight condi-
tion particulars so obtained from time to time shall
be used by the master in substitution for such previ-
ously approved particulars when calculating the
craft's stability.
2.7.6 Following any inclining or lightweight sur-
vey, the master shall be supplied with amended sta-
bility information if the Administration so requires.
The information so supplied shall be submitted to the
Administration for approval, together with a copy
thereof for their retention, and shall incorporate such
additions and amendments as the Administration may
in any particular case require.
2.7.7 Stability information demonstrating compli-
ance with this Section shall be furnished in the form
of a stability information book which shall be kept on
board the craft at all times in the custody of the mas-
ter. The information shall include particulars appro-
priate to the craft and shall reflect the craft loading
conditions and mode of operation. Any enclosed
superstructures or deck-houses included in the cross
curves of stability and the critical downflooding
points and angles shall be identified. At the operating
station there shall be plans showing clearly for each
deck and hold the boundaries of the watertight com-
partments, the openings therein with their means of
closure and position of any controls thereof. For
amphibious air-cushion vehicles this may be achieved
I - Part 3 Section 2 Buoyancy, Stability and Subdivision
GL 2012
by the use of draught gauges in conjunction with deck
datum plates.
2.7.8 Every craft shall have scales of draughts
marked clearly at the bow and stern. In the case
where the draught marks are not located where they
are easily readable, or operational constraints for a
particular trade make it difficult to read the draught
marks, then the craft shall also be fitted with a reli-
able draught-indicating system by which the bow and
stern draughts can be determined.
2.7.9 The owner or builder, as appropr iate, shall
ensure that the positions of the draught marks are
accurately determined and that the marks are located
on the hull in a permanent manner. Accuracy of the
draught marks shall be demonstrated to the Admini-
stration prior to the inclining experiment.
2.8 Loading and Stability Assessment
On completion of loading of the craft and prior to its
departure on a voyage, the master shall determine
the trim and stability of the craft and also ascertain
and record that the craft is in compliance with stabil-
ity criteria of the relevant requirements. The Admini-
stration may accept the use of an electronic loading
and stability computer or equivalent means for this
purpose.
2.9 Marking and Recording of the Design
Waterline
2.9.1 The design waterline shall be clearly and
permanently marked on the crafts outer sides by the
load line mark described below. This and the refer-
ence line described in 2.9.2.2 below shall be re-
corded in the High-Speed Craft Safety Certificate.
For craft where this is not practical, e.g. amphibious
air-cushion vehicles fitted with peripheral skirts,
defined deck reference points shall be provided, from
which the freeboard can be measured, and hence the
draughts obtained.
2.9.2 Load line mark
2.9.2.1 The load line mark shall consist of a ring
with an outside diameter of 300 mm and width of 25
mm which is intersected by a horizontal line of length
450 mm and having a breadth of 25 mm, the upper
edge of which passes through the centre of the ring.
The centre of the ring shall be placed at the longitu-
dinal centre of flotation in the displacement mode
and at a height corresponding to the design water-
line.
2.9.2.2 To assist in verifying the position of the load
line mark, a reference line shall be marked on the
hull at the longitudinal centre of flotation by a hori-
zontal bar having a length of 300 mm and a breadth
of 25 mm and having the upper edge corresponding
to the reference line.
Chapter 1
Page 2–13
2.9.2.3 Where practicable, the reference line should
be related to the uppermost deck at side. Where it is
not possible, the position of the reference line should
be defined from the underside of keel at the longitu-
dinal centre of flotation.
2.9.2.4 The mark of the Authority by whom the load
lines are assigned may be indicated alongside the
load line ring above the horizontal line which passes
through the centre of the ring, or above and below it.
This mark shall consist of not more than four initials
to identify the Authority's name, each measuring
approximately 115 mm in height, and 75 mm in
width.
2.9.2.5 The ring, lines and letters shall be painted in
white or yellow on a dark ground or in black on a
light ground, and permanently marked. The marks
shall be plainly visible.
2.9.3 Verification
The High-Speed Craft Safety Certificate shall not be
delivered until the Administration has verified that
the marks are correctly and permanently indicated on
the sides of the craft.
Part B - Requirements for Passenger Craft
2.10 General
2.10.1 Where compliance with this Section requires
consideration of the effects of passenger weight, the
following information shall be used:
.1 The distribution of passengers is 4 persons per
square metre.
.2 Each passenger has a mass of 75 kg.
.3 Vertical centre of gravity of seated passengers
is 0.3 m above seat.
.4 Vertical centre of gravity of standing passen-
gers is 1.0 m above deck.
.5 Passengers and luggage shall be considered
to be in the space normally at their disposal.
.6 Passengers shall be distributed on available
deck areas towards one side of the craft on the
decks where assembly stations are located and
in such a way that they produce the most ad-
verse heeling moment.
.7 Passengers assumed to be occupying seats
shall be taken as having a vertical centre of
gravity corresponding to being seated, with all
others standing.
.8 On the decks where assembly stations are
located, the number of passengers on each
deck shall be that which generates the maxi-
mum heeling moment. Any remaining passen-
gers shall be assumed to occupy decks adja-
Chapter 1 Section 2 Buoyancy, Stability and Subdivision
Page 2–14
cent to those on which the assembly stations
are located, and positioned such that the com-
bination of number on each deck and total
heeling moment generate the maximum static
heel angle.
.9 Passengers shall not be assumed to gain ac-
cess to the weather deck nor be assumed to
crowd abnormally towards either end of the
craft unless this is a necessary part of the
planned evacuation procedure.
.10 Where there are seats in areas occupied by
passengers, one passenger per seat shall be
assumed, passengers being assigned to the
remaining free areas of the deck (including
stairways, if appropriate) at the rate of four
per square metre.
2.11 Intact Stability in the Displacement Mode
The craft shall have sufficient intact stability that,
when in still water conditions, the inclination of the
craft from the horizontal would not exceed 10° (un-
der all permitted cases of loading and uncontrolled
passenger movements as may occur).
2.12 Intact Stability in the Non-Displacement
Mode
2.12.1 The total heel angle in still water due to the
effect of passenger movements or due to beam wind
pressure as per 1.1.4 of annex 6 shall not to exceed
10°. Passenger movement need not be considered
where passengers are required to be seated whenever
the craft is operating in the non-displacement mode.
2.12.2 In all loading conditions, the outward heel
due to turning shall not exceed 8° and the total heel
due to beam wind pressure as per 1.14 of annex 6
and due to turning shall not exceed 12°.
2.12.3 Demonstrating the effect of the passenger
heeling moment calculated as given by 2.10 above, or
a defined beam wind pressure when at speed, shall be
established by conducting a trial or model test with
an equivalent heeling moment applied by test
weights. Passenger movement may only be neglected
on craft where the safety announcement (refer to
8.4.1 and 18.7) expressly requires passengers to
remain seated throughout the voyage.
2.13 Buoyancy and Stability in the Displacement
Mode following Damage
2.13.1 Following any of the postulated damages
detailed in 2.6.6 to 2.6.10, in addition to satisfying
the requirements of 2.6.11 and 2.6.12, the craft in
still water shall have sufficient buoyancy and positive
stability to simultaneously ensure that:
I - Part 3
GL 2012
.1 the angle of inclination of the craft from the
horizontal does not normally exceed 10° in
any direction. However, where this is clearly
impractical, angles of inclination up to 15°
immediately after damage but reducing to 10°
within 15 min shall be permitted provided that
efficient non-slip deck surfaces and suitable
holding points, e.g., holes, bars, etc., are pro-
vided; and
.2 any flooding of passenger compartments or
escape routes which might occur will not sig-
nificantly impede the evacuation of passen-
gers.
2.13.2 In addition to the requirements in 2.13.1,
Category B craft shall also satisfy the following crite-
ria after sustaining raking damage of 100 % of length
L, having the girth and penetration given in 2.6.8.2.2,
to any part of the surface of the hull(s) defined in
2.6.8.1:
.1 The angle of inclination of the craft from the
horizontal shall not exceed 20° in the equilib-
rium condition;
.2 the range of positive righting lever shall be at
least 15° in the equilibrium condition;
.3 the positive area under the righting lever
curve shall be at least 0.015 m-rad in the equi-
librium condition;
.4 the requirements of 2.6.11.3 and 2.13.1.2 are
satisfied; and
.5 in intermediate stages of flooding, the maxi-
mum righting lever shall be at least 0.05 m
and the range of positive righting lever shall
be at least 7°
In complying with the above, the righting lever curve
shall be terminated at the angle of downflooding, and
only one free surface need be assumed.
2.14 Inclining and Stability Information
2.14.1 At periodical intervals not exceeding 5
years, a lightweight survey shall be carried out on all
passenger craft to verify any changes in lightweight
displacement and longitudinal centre of gravity. The
passenger craft shall be re-inclined whenever, in
comparison with the approved stability information,
a deviation from the lightweight displacement ex-
ceeding 2 %, or a deviation of the longitudinal centre
of gravity exceeding 1 % of L is found or anticipated.
2.14.2 A report of each inclining or lightweight
survey carried out in accordance with 2.7.1 and of
the calculation therefrom of the lightweight condition
particulars shall be submitted to the Administration
for approval, together with a copy for their retention.
The approved report shall be placed on board the
craft by the owner in the custody of the master and
shall incorporate such additions and amendments as
I - Part 3 Section 2 Buoyancy, Stability and Subdivision
GL 2012
the Administration may in any particular case re-
quire. The amended lightweight condition particulars
so obtained from time to time shall be used by the
master in substitution for such previously approved
particulars when calculating the craft's stability.
2.14.3 Following any inclining or lightweight sur-
vey, the master shall be supplied with amended sta-
bility information if the Administration so requires.
The information so supplied shall be submitted to the
Administration for approval, together with a copy
thereof for their retention, and shall incorporate such
additions and amendments as the Administration may
in any particular case require.
Part C - Requirements for Cargo Craft
2.15 Buoyancy and Stability in the Displacement
Mode following Damage
Following any of the postulated damages detailed in
2.6.6 to 2.6.10, in addition to satisfying the require-
Chapter 1
Page 2–15
ments of 2.6.11 and 2.6.12, the craft in still water
shall have sufficient buoyancy and positive stability
to simultaneously ensure that the angle of inclination
of the craft from the horizontal does not normally
exceed 15° in any direction. However, where this is
clearly impractical, angles of inclination up to 20°
immediately after damage but reducing to 15° within
15 minutes may be permitted provided that efficient
non-slip deck surfaces and suitable holding points
are provided.
2.16 Inclining
Where it is satisfied by lightweight survey, weighing
or other demonstration that the lightweight of a craft
is closely similar to that of another craft of the series
to which 2.7.1 has been applied, the Administration
may waive the requirement of 2.7.1 for craft to be
inclined. In this regard, a craft which lies within the
parameters of 2.14.1, when compared with a craft of
the series which has been inclined, shall be regarded
as being closely similar to that craft.
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures
GL 2012
Section 3
Structures
3.1 General
This Section covers those elements of hull and super-
structure which provide longitudinal and other pri-
mary and local strength of the craft as a whole and
also important components such as foils and skirts
which are directly associated with the hull and super-
structure.
3.2 Materials
Materials used for the hull and superstructure and
the other features referred to in 3.1 shall be adequate
for the intended use of the craft.
3.3 Structural Strength
The structure shall be capable of withstanding the
static and dynamic loads which can act on the craft
under all operating conditions in which the craft is
permitted to operate, without such loading resulting
in inadmissible deformation and loss of watertight-
ness or interfering with the safe operation of the
craft.
3.4 Cyclic Loads
Cyclic loads, including those from vibrations which
can occur on the craft, shall not:
.1 impair the integrity of structure during the
anticipated service life of the craft or the ser-
vice life agreed with the Administration;
.2 hinder normal functioning of machinery and
equipment; and
.3 impair the ability of the crew to carry out its
duties.
Note
In scope of Classification, the structural strength
against vibrations is not checked.
The vibration check shall be performed during the
sea trials of the craft. Where deemed necessary, the
Society may require vibration measurements to be
carried out using suitable instruments; where appro-
priate, remedial measures may be required to ade-
quately eliminate situations deemed unacceptable.
Chapter 1
Page 3–1
3.5 Design Criteria
The Administration shall be satisfied that the choice
of design conditions, design loads and accepted
safety factors corresponds to the intended operating
conditions for which certification is sought.
3.6 Trials
If the Administration consider it necessary, it shall
require full-scale trials to be undertaken in which
loadings are determined. Cognisance shall be taken
of the results where these indicate that loading as-
sumptions of structural calculations have been in-
adequate.
C3.1 General
C3.1.1 Introductory comments
.1 This Section contains the requirements for
structural scantlings of the craft to which these Rules
apply, i.e. to craft for which V ≥ 7,16 Δ1/6. Craft for
which V/ L ≥ 10 shall be individually considered by
GL (V in knots, Δ in tonnes, L in metre).
For what concerns multihull craft, this Section pro-
vides the requirements for scantlings of catamarans
and trimarans. Other craft will be considered in each
separate case by GL.
.2 The requirements for scantlings of hydro-
foils and air-cushion vehicles are contained in Ap-
pendices C3A1 and C3A2. Unless otherwise speci-
fied, the requirements of this Section apply to such
craft only as far as the provisions regarding limit
operating conditions, materials and construction
criteria are concerned.
.3 The scantlings indicated in the following
paragraphs apply to craft constructed of steel, alumin-
ium alloy or fibre reinforced plastic, as specified in
C3.2.
C3.1.2 Direct calculations
C3.1.2.1 General
.1 GL may require direct calculations to be
carried out, if deemed necessary.
Such calculations are to be carried out based on struc-
tural modelling, loading and checking criteria de-
scribed below. Calculations based on other criteria
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures
Page 3–2
may be accepted if deemed equivalent to those laid
down by GL.
.2 In order to increase the flexibility in the
structural design of ships GL also accepts direct cal-
culations with computer programs. The aim of such
analyses should be the proof of equivalence of a
design with the rule requirements.
.3 Direct calculations may also be used in order
to optimise a design; in this case only the final results
are to be submitted for review.
C3.1.2.2 General programs
.1 The choice of computer programs according
to "State of the Art" is free. The programs may be
checked by GL through comparative calculations
with predefined test examples. A generally valid
approval for a computer program is, however, not
given by GL.
.2 Direct calculations may be used in the fol-
lowing fields
– global strength
– longitudinal strength
– beams and grillages
– detailed strength
.3 For such calculation the computer model,
the boundary condition and load cases are to be
agreed upon with GL. The calculation documents are
to be submitted including input and output. During
the examination it may prove necessary that GL per-
form independent comparative calculations.
.4 GL is prepared to carry out the following
calculations of this kind within the marine advisory
services:
.4.1 Strength
Linear and/or non-linear strength calculations with
the FE-method:
For an automated performance of these calculations,
a number of effective pre- and post processing pro-
grammes is at disposal:
– calculation of seaway loads as per modified strip
method or by 3 D-panel method
– calculation of resultant accelerations to ensure
quasi-static equilibrium
– calculation of composite structures
– evaluation of deformations, stresses, buckling
behaviour, ultimate strength and local stresses,
assessment of fatigue strength
.4.2 Vibrations
Calculation of free vibrations with the FE-method as
well as forced vibrations due to harmonic or shock
excitation:
I - Part 3
GL 2012
– global vibrations of hull, aft ship, deckhouse, etc.
– vibrations of major local components, such as
rudders, radar masts, etc.
– local vibrations of plate fields, stiffeners and
panels
– vibrations of simply or double-elastically moun-
ted aggregates
A number of pre- and post processing programs is
available here as well for effective analyses:
– calculation of engine excitation forces/moments
– calculation of propeller excitation forces (pres-
sure fluctuations and shaft bearing reactions)
– calculation of hydrodynamic masses
– graphic evaluation of amplitude level as per
ISO 6954 recommendations or as per any other
standard
– noise predictions
C3.1.2.3 Specific programs related to Rules
GLRP (GL RULES and Programs) is available on
CD-ROM. It includes the wording of GL-Rules and
an elementary program for dimensioning the struc-
tural members of the hull.
C3.1.3 Units
.1 Unless otherwise specified, the following
units are used in the Rules:
− thickness of plating [mm]
− section modulus of stiffeners [cm3]
− shear area of stiffeners [cm2]
− span and spacing of stiffeners [m]
− stresses [MPa]
− concentrated loads [kN]
− distributed loads [kN/m] or [kPa]
C3.1.4 Documents for Approval
The following documents are to be submitted. To
facilitate a smooth and efficient approval process
they shall be submitted electronically via GLOBE 1.
In specific cases and following prior agreement with
GL they can also be submitted in paper form in tripli-
cate.
.1 Midship section
The cross sectional plans (midship section, other
typical sections) shall contain all necessary data on
the scantlings of the longitudinal and transverse hull
structure as well as details of anchor and mooring
equipment.
––––––––––––––
1 Detailed information about the secured GL system GLOBE
can be found on GL’s website www.gl-group.com/globe.
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures
GL 2012
.2 Longitudinal section
The plan of longitudinal sections shall contain all
necessary details on the scantlings of the longitudinal
hull structure and on the location of the watertight
bulkheads and the deck supporting structures, the
arrangement of superstructures and deck houses.
.3 Decks
Plans of the decks showing the scantlings of the deck
structures, length and breadth of cargo hatches, open-
ings above the engine and boiler room, and other
deck openings. On each deck, deck load caused by
cargo is to be defined as assumed in determining the
scantlings of the decks and their supports.
.4 Shell
Drawings of shell expansion, containing full details
on the location and size of the openings and drawings
of the sea chests.
.5 Bulkheads
Drawings of the transverse, longitudinal and wash
bulkheads and of all tank boundaries, with details on
densities of liquids, heights of overflow pipes and set
pressures of the pressure or vacuum relief valves (if
any).
.6 Bottom structure
Drawings of single and double bottom showing the
arrangement of the transverse and longitudinal gird-
ers as well as the water and oil tight subdivision of
the double bottom.
.7 Engine and boiler seatings
Drawings of the engine and boiler seatings, the bot-
tom structure under the seatings and of the transverse
structures in the engine room, with details on fasten-
ing of the engine foundation plate to the seating, as
well as type and output of engine.
.8 Appendages
Drawings of rudder, shaft brackets, stabilizers includ-
ing supports, bearing materials and propeller details.
.9 Longitudinal strength
Maximum and minimum still water bending mo-
ments, shear forces and, if necessary, torsional mo-
ments. This includes the mass distribution for the
envisaged loading conditions and the distribution of
section moduli and moduli of inertia over the ship's
length.
.10 Materials
The drawings mentioned in 1 – 8 and 13 shall contain
details on the hull materials (e.g. hull structural steel
grades, standards, material numbers). Where higher
tensile steels or materials other than ordinary hull
structural steels are used, drawings for possible re-
pairs have to be placed on board.
Chapter 1
Page 3–3
.11 Weld joints
The drawings listed in 1 – 8 and 13 shall contain
details on the welded joints e.g. weld shapes and
dimensions and weld quality. For the relevant data
for manufacturing and testing of welded joints see
Rules for Welding.
.12 Lashing and stowage devices
Drawings containing details on stowage and lashing
of cargo (e.g. containers, car decks). In the drawings
the location of the connections and the appropriate
substructures at the ship shall be shown in detail.
.13 Substructures
Drawings of substructures below steering gears,
windlasses and chain stoppers as well as masts and
boat davits, supporting structure of cargo masts,
cranes, etc. together with details on loads to be trans-
mitted into structural elements.
.14 Additional information for fibre rein-
forced plastic (FRP) craft
For FRP craft, the drawing and documents to be
submitted for examination and listed in C3.1.4 are to
contain the following additional information:
− arrangement of laminate for the various structural
elements: thickness, definition of successive lay-
ers of reinforcement, areal weight of reinforce-
ment layers, mass or volume fraction of rein-
forcement layers, directions of roving layers and
unidirectional reinforcements, decreasing in
thickness between layers
− direction of laminate in relation to craft structure
− structure of oil tanks or other liquid tanks which
are integrated into the hull
− details of connection among various structural
elements and details of attachment to the hull of
supplementary reinforcing elements
− pillars
Suppliers’ technical specifications with indication of
types, trademarks and references of resins and gel-
coats, reinforcements and core materials are to be
supplied.
These specifications are to give the following infor-
mation:
− resins: type (orthophthalic or isophthalic), spe-
cific gravity, Young’s modulus, Poisson’s ratio,
breaking strength and elongation at break
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures
Page 3–4
− reinforcements (mats, woven rovings, unidirec-
tional reinforcements): quality (glass or other ma-
terial, with specific gravity, breaking strength of
the elementary fibre, Young’s modulus and Pois-
son’s ratio), mass per square metre, thickness and
possibly weft-warp distribution
− core materials: type and quality; specific gravity;
tensile, compressive and shear strength and elas-
ticity moduli
C3.1.5 Definitions and symbols
The definitions of the following terms and symbols
are applicable throughout this Section and its Appen-
dices and are not, as a rule, repeated in the different
paragraphs. Definitions applicable only to certain
paragraphs are specified therein.
− “Moulded base line”: The line parallel to the
summer load waterline, crossing the upper side of
keel plate or the top of skeg at the middle of
length L.
− “Hull”: The hull is the outer boundary of the
enclosed spaces of the craft, except for the deck-
houses, as defined below.
− “Chine”: For hulls that do not have a clearly iden-
tified chine, the chine is the hull point at which
the tangent to the hull is inclined 50° to the hori-
zontal.
− “Bottom”: The bottom is the part of the hull be-
tween the keel and the chines.
− “Main deck”: The main deck is the uppermost
complete deck of the hull. It may be stepped.
− “Side”: The side is the part of the hull between
the chine and the main deck.
− “Deckhouse”: The deckhouse is a decked struc-
ture located above the main deck, with lateral
walls inboard of the side of more than 4 per cent
of the local breadth. Structure located on the main
deck and whose walls are not in the same longi-
tudinal plane as the under side shell may be re-
garded as a deckhouse.
− “Wet deck”: For multihull craft, the wet deck is
the bottom structure connecting the hulls which is
defined as cross-deck.
− “Deadrise angle αd”: For hulls that do not have a
clearly identified deadrise angle, αd is the angle
between the horizontal and a straight line joining
the keel and the chine. For catamarans with non-
symmetrical hulls (where inner and outer deadrise
angles are different), αd is the lesser angle.
− “Fore end”: Hull region forward of 0,9 L from the
aft perpendicular.
− “Aft end”: Hull region abaft of 0,1 L from the aft
perpendicular.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
− “Midship area”: Hull region between 0,3 L and
0,7 L from the aft perpendicular.
L = Rule length [m], equal to LWL which is the
waterline measured with the craft at rest in
calm water and, for SESs, in the off-cushion
condition, for trimarans L will be defined in
each separate case at the discretion of GL.
FP = forward perpendicular, i.e. the perpendicular
at the intersection of the waterline at draught
T and the foreside of the stem
AP = aft perpendicular, i.e. the perpendicular lo-
cated at a distance L abaft of the forward per-
pendicular
B = the greatest moulded breadth [m], of the craft
Bw = the greatest moulded breadth [m], measured
on the waterline at draught T; for catamarans,
Bw is the breadth of each hull; for trimarans,
Bw will be defined in each separate case at the
discretion of GL.
D = depth [m], measured vertically in the trans-
verse section at the middle of length L from
the moulded base line of the hull(s) to the top
of the deck beam at one side of the main deck
(if the main deck is stepped, D will be defined
in each separate case at the discretion of GL)
T = draught of the craft [m], measured vertically
on the transverse section at the middle of
length L, from the moulded base line of the
hull(s) to the full load waterline, with the craft
at rest in calm water and, for SESs, in the off-
cushion condition
Δ = moulded displacement at draught T, in sea
water (mass density = 1,025 t/m3) [t]
CB = total block coefficient, defined as follows:
Δ
CB =
1, 025 ⋅ L ⋅ BW ⋅ T
For catamarans, CB is to be calculated for a single
hull, assuming Δ equal to one half of the craft’s dis-
placement; for trimarans the calculation of CB de-
pends on the distribution of displacement of each
hull. It will be defined in each separate case at the
discretion of GL.
V = maximum service speed [kn]
g = acceleration of gravity, equal to 9,81 m/s2
LCG = longitudinal centre of gravity of the craft.
C3.1.6 Rounding-Off Tolerances
Where in determining plate thicknesses in accordance
with the provisions of this Section the figures differ
from full or half mm, they may be rounded off to full
or half millimeters up to 0,2 or 0,7; above 0,2 or 0,7
mm they are to be rounded up.
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures
GL 2012
If plate thicknesses are not rounded the calculated
required thicknesses shall be shown in the drawings.
The section moduli of profiles usual in the trade and
including the effective width according to C3.7.4
may be 3 % less than the required values according to
the following rules for dimensioning.
C.3.1.7 Workmanship
C3.1.7.1 General
.1 Requirements to be complied with by the
manufacturer
.1.1 The manufacturing plant shall be provided
with suitable equipment and facilities to enable
proper handling of the materials, manufacturing
processes, structural components, etc. GL reserve the
right to inspect the plant accordingly or to restrict the
scope of manufacture to the potential available at the
plant.
.1.2 The manufacturing plant shall have at its
disposal sufficiently qualified personnel. GL is to be
advised of the names and areas of responsibility of all
supervisory and control personnel. GL reserve the
right to require proof of qualification.
.2 Quality control
.2.1 As far as required and expedient, the manu-
facturer's personnel has to examine all structural
components both during manufacture and on comple-
tion, to ensure that they are complete, that the dimen-
sions are correct and that workmanship is satisfactory
and meets the standard of good shipbuilding practice.
.2.2 Upon inspection and corrections by the
manufacturing plant, the structural components are to
be shown to the GL Surveyor for inspection, in suit-
able sections, normally in unpainted condition and
enabling proper access for inspection.
.2.3 The Surveyor may reject components that
have not been adequately checked by the plant and
may demand their re-submission upon successful
completion of such checks and corrections by the
plant.
C3.1.7.2 Structural details
.1 Details in manufacturing documents
.1.1 All significant details concerning quality and
functional ability of the component concerned shall
be entered in the manufacturing documents (work-
shop drawings, etc.). This includes not only scant-
lings but - where relevant - such items as surface
conditions (e.g. finishing of flame cut edges and weld
seams), and special methods of manufacture involved
as well as inspection and acceptance requirements
and where relevant permissible tolerances. So far as
for this aim a standard shall be used (works or na-
tional standard, etc.) it shall be harmonized with GL.
This standard shall be based on the IACS Recom-
Chapter 1
Page 3–5
mendation 47 Shipbuilding and Repair Quality Stan-
dard for New Construction. For weld joint details, see
Section C.3.2.4.1
.1.2 If, due to missing or insufficient details in
the manufacturing documents, the quality or func-
tional ability of the component cannot be guaranteed
or is doubtful, GL may require appropriate improve-
ments. This includes the provision of supplementary
or additional parts (for example reinforcements) even
if these were not required at the time of plan approval
or if - as a result of insufficient detailing - such re-
quirement was not obvious.
.2 Cut-outs, plate edges
.2.1 The free edges (cut surfaces) of cut-outs,
hatch corners, etc. are to be properly prepared and are
to be free from notches. As a general rule, cutting
drag lines, etc. shall not be welded out, but are to be
smoothly ground. All edges should be broken or in
cases of highly stressed parts, should be rounded off.
.2.2 Free edges of flame or machine cut plates or
flanges are not to be sharp cornered and are to be
finished off as laid down in 2.2.1. This also applies to
cutting drag lines, etc., in particular to the upper edge
of shear strake and analogously to weld joints,
changes in sectional areas or similar discontinuities.
.3 Cold forming
.3.1 For cold forming (bending, flanging, bead-
ing) of plates the minimum average bending radius
shall not fall short of 3 t (t = plate thickness) and
shall be at least 2 t. Regarding the welding of cold
formed areas, see C3.6.1.2.6.
.3.2 In order to prevent cracking, flame cutting
flash or sheering burrs shall be removed before cold
forming. After cold forming all structural compo-
nents and, in particular, the ends of bends (plate
edges) are to be examined for cracks. Except in cases
where edge cracks are negligible, all cracked compo-
nents are to be rejected. Repair welding is not per-
missible.
.4 Assembly, alignment
.4.1 The use of excessive force is to be avoided
during the assembly of individual structural compo-
nents or during the erection of sections. As far as
possible major distortions of individual structural
components should be corrected before further as-
sembly.
.4.2 Girders, beams, stiffeners, frames, etc. that
are interrupted by bulkheads, decks, etc. shall be
accurately aligned. In the case of critical components,
control drillings are to be made where necessary,
which are then to be welded up again on completion.
.4.3 After completion of welding, straightening
and aligning shall be carried out in such a manner
that the material properties will not be influenced
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures
Page 3–6
significantly. In case of doubt, GL may require a
procedure test or a working test to be carried out.
C3.1.8 Protection against corrosion
.1 Scantlings stipulated in C3.7 assume that the
materials used are chosen and protected in such a
way that the strength lost by corrosion is negligible.
.2 The Shipyard is to give GL a document
specifying all the arrangements made to protect the
material against corrosion at the construction stage:
coating types, number and thickness of layers, sur-
face preparation, application conditions, control after
completion, anodic protection, etc. The GL Guide-
lines for Corrosion Protection and Coating Systems
(VI-10-2) are to be observed.
.3 This document shall also include mainte-
nance arrangements to be made in service to restore
and maintain the efficiency of this protection, what-
ever the reasons of its weakening, whether incidental
or not.
.4 All such maintenance operations are to be
listed in a book shown to GL surveyor at each visit.
C3.2 Materials and Connections
C3.2.1 General requirements
All materials to be used for the structural members
indicated in the Construction Rules are to be in ac-
cordance with the GL Rules II – Materials and Weld-
ing, Part 1 – Metallic Materials or Part 2 – Non-
metallic Materials, as applicable. Materials the prop-
erties of which deviate from these Rule requirements
may only be used upon special approval.
C3.2.2 Steel Structures
C3.2.2.1 Normal strength hull structural steel
.1 Normal strength hull structural steel is a hull
structural steel with a minimum nominal upper yield
point ReH of 235 MPa and a tensile strength Rm of
400 – 520 MPa.
.2 The material factor k in the formulae of this
Section is to be taken 1,0 for normal strength hull
structural steel.
.3 Normal strength hull structural steel is
grouped into the grades GL–A, GL–B, GL–D, GL–E,
which differ from each other in their toughness prop-
erties.
.4 If for special structures the use of steels with
yield properties less than 235 MPa has been accepted,
the material factor k is to be determined by:
k = 235/ReH
I - Part 3
GL 2012
C3.2.2.2 Higher strength hull structural steels
.1 Higher strength hull structural steel is a hull
structural steel, the yield and tensile properties of
which exceed those of normal strength hull structural
steel. According to the GL Rules II – Materials and
Welding, Part 1 – Metallic Materials, for three groups
of higher strength hull structural steels the nominal
upper yield stress ReH has been fixed at 315, 355 and
390 MPa respectively. Where higher strength hull
structural steel is used, for scantling purposes the
values in Table C3.2.1 are to be used for the material
factor k.
Table C3.2.1 Material factor k
ReH [MPa] k
315 0,78
355 0,72
390 0,68
For higher strength hull structural steel with other
nominal yield stresses up to 390 MPa, the material
factor k may be determined by the following formula:
k = (235/ReH)0,75
Note
Especially when higher strength hull structural steels
are used, limitation of permissible stresses due to
buckling and fatigue strength criteria may be re-
quired.
.2 Higher strength hull structural steel is
grouped into the following grades, which differ from
each other in their toughness properties:
GL–A 32/36/40
GL–D 32/36/40
GL–E 32/36/40
GL–F 32/36/40
.3 Where structural members are completely or
partly made from higher strength hull structural steel,
a suitable Notation will be entered into the ship's
certificate.
.4 Regarding welding of higher strength hull
structural steel, see Rules II – Materials and Welding,
Part 3 – Welding.
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 3–7

Table C3.2.1 Aluminium alloys for welded construction

Guaranteed mechanical characteristics 1

Aluminium alloy Unwelded condition Welded condition
Thickness Rp0,2 Rm Rp0,2' Rm'
Alloy 2 Products Temper 2
[mm] [MPa] 4 [MPa] 5 [MPa] 4 [MPa] 5
0 / H111 / H112 125 275
5083 rolled H116 t ≤ 50 125 275
215 305
H32 / H321
0 / H111 110
5083 extruded t ≤ 50 270 110 270
H112 125
0 / H111 / H112 100 240
5086 rolled H116 t ≤ 50 195 100 240
270
H32 / H321 185
5086 extruded 0 / H111 / H112 t ≤ 50 95 240 95 240
0 / H111 145 290
5383 rolled t ≤ 40 145 290
H116 / H321 220 305
0 / H111 145 209
5383 extruded t ≤ 50 145 290
H112 190 310
0 / H111 t ≤ 50 160 330
5059 rolled t ≤ 20 270 370 155 300
H116 / H321
20 < t ≤ 40 260 360
5059 extruded H112 t ≤ 50 200 330 155 300
0 / H111 85 215
5454 rolled t ≤ 40 85 215
H32 180 260
0 / H111 / H112 t ≤ 50 80 190
5754 rolled 80 190
H32 t ≤ 40 165 240
6005A extruded T5 / T6 t ≤ 50 215 260 115 165
t≤5 120 160
6060 3 extruded T5 65 95
5 < t ≤ 25 100 140
6061 extruded T5 / T6 t ≤ 50 240 260 115 165
6082 extruded T5 / T6 t ≤ 50 260 310 115 170
6106 extruded T6 t ≤ 10 200 250 65 130
1 The guaranteed mechanical characteristics in this Table correspond to general standard values. For more information, refer to the mini-
mum values guaranteed by the product supplier. Higher values may be accepted on the basis of welding tests including recurrent work-
manship test at the shipyard only.
2 Other grades or tempers may be considered, subject to the Society’s agreement.
3 6060 alloy is not to be for structural members sustaining impact loads (e.g. bottom longitudinals). The use of alloy 6106 is recommended
in that case.
4 R
p0,2 and Rp0,2' are the minimum guaranteed yield stresses at 0,2 % in unwelded and welded condition respectively.
5 R and R ' are the minimum guaranteed tensile strengths in unwelded and welded condition respectively.
m m
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures
Page 3–8
C3.2.2.3 Structural members which are
stressed in direction of their thickness
In case of high local stresses in the thickness direc-
tion, e.g. due to shrinkage stresses in single bevel or
double bevel T-joints with a large volume of weld
metal, steels with guaranteed material properties in
the thickness direction according to the Rules Steel
and Iron Materials (II-1-2), Section 1, I. are to be
used.
C3.2.2.4 Forged Steel and Cast Steel
Forged steel and cast steel for stem, stern frame,
rudder post as well as other structural components,
which are subject of this Rule, are to comply with the
Rules II – Materials and Welding, Part 1 – Metallic
Materials. The tensile strength of forged steel and of
cast steel is not to be less than 400 MPa. In this re-
spect beside strength properties also toughness re-
quirements and weldability shall be observed.
C3.2.2.5 Austenitic Steels
Where austenitic steels are applied having a ratio
Rp0,2/Rm ≤ 0,5, after special approval the 1 % proof
stress Rp1,0 may be used for scantling purposes in-
stead of the 0,2 % proof stress Rp0,2.
C3.2.3 Aluminium alloy structures
C3.2.3.1 General
All aluminium materials to be used for the structural
members indicated in the Construction Rules are to
be in accordance with the Rules Non-Ferrous Metals
(II-1-3), Section 1. Materials the properties of which
deviate from these Rule requirements may only be
used upon special approval.
The strength properties for some typical aluminium
alloys are given in Table C3.2.1.
C3.2.3.2 Influence of welding on mechanical
characteristics
.1 Welding heat input lowers locally the me-
chanical strength of aluminium alloys hardened by
work hardening (series 5000 other than condition 0 or
H111) or by heat treatment (series 6000).
.2 Consequently, where necessary, a drop in
mechanical characteristics of welded structures is to
be considered in the heat-affected zone, with respect
to the mechanical characteristics of the parent mate-
rial.
.3 The heat-affected zone may be taken to
extend 25 mm on each side of the weld axis.
.4 Aluminium alloys of series 5000 in 0 condi-
tion (annealed) or in H111 condition (annealed flat-
tened) are not subject to a drop in mechanical
strength in the welded areas.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
.5 Aluminium alloys of series 5000 other than
condition 0 or H111 are subjected to a drop in me-
chanical strength in the welded areas. The mechanical
characteristics to consider in welded condition are,
normally, those of condition 0 or H111, except oth-
erwise indicated in Table C3.2.1. Higher mechanical
characteristics may be taken into account, provided
they are duly justified.
.6 Aluminium alloys of series 6000 are subject
to a drop in mechanical strength in the vicinity of the
welded areas. The mechanical characteristics to be
considered in welded condition are, normally, to be
indicated by the supplier, if not indicated in Table
C3.2.1.
C3.2.3.3 Material factor k for scantlings of
structural members made of alumin-
ium alloy
.1 The value of the material factor k to be in-
troduced into formulae for checking scantlings of
structural members, given in this Section and the
various Appendices, is determined by the following
equation:
100
k=
R p0,2 '
Rp0,2' = minimum guaranteed yield stress of the par-
ent metal in welded condition [MPa], but not to be
taken greater than 70 % of the minimum guaranteed
tensile strength of the parent metal in welded condi-
tion R'm [MPa] (see Table C3.2.1).
.2 For welded constructions in hardened alu-
minium alloys (series 5000 other than condition 0 or
H111 and series 6000), greater characteristics than
those in welded condition may be considered, pro-
vided that welded connections are located in areas
where stress levels are acceptable for the alloy con-
sidered in annealed or welded condition.
.3 In case of welding of two different alumin-
ium alloys, the material factor k to be considered for
the scantlings of welds is to be the greater material
factor of the aluminium alloys of the assembly.
C3.2.3.4 Riveted connections for aluminium
alloy hulls
.1 Use of rivets for connecting structures is
limited, in principle, only to members which do not
contribute to the overall strength of the hull. Excep-
tions are to be supported by experimental evidence or
good in-service performance.
.2 The conditions for riveted connection ac-
ceptability are to be individually stated in each par-
ticular case, depending on the type of member to be
connected and the rivet material.
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures
GL 2012
.3 Whenever riveted connections are to be
employed, a detailed plan, illustrating the process, as
well as the dimensions and location of rivets and
holes, together with the mechanical and metallurgical
properties of the rivets, is to be submitted for ap-
proval.
.4 GL may, at its discretion, require tension,
compression and shear tests to be carried out on
specimens of riveted connections constructed under
the same conditions as during actual hull construc-
tion, to be witnessed by a GL surveyor.
.5 GL reserves the right to accept the results of
tests performed by recognized bodies or other Socie-
ties.
C3.2.4 General Welding Requirements
Preface
The content of C3.2.4 and C3.6 is to a large extent
identical to that of the Rules Welding in the Various
Fields of Application (II-3-3), Section 1, G. Because
of the re-issues of II-3-3 referred to and this Chapter
1 at different times, some temporary divergences may
arise and in such circumstances the more recent
Rules shall take precedence.
C3.2.4.1 Information contained in manufactur-
ing documents
.1 The shapes and dimensions of welds and,
where proof by calculation is supplied, the require-
ments applicable to welded joints (the weld quality
grade, detail category) are to be stated in drawings
and other manufacturing documents (parts lists, weld-
ing and inspection schedules). In special cases, e.g.
where special materials are concerned, the documents
shall also state the welding method, the welding con-
sumables used, heat input and control, the weld build-
up and any post-weld treatment which may be re-
quired.
.2 Symbols and signs used to identify welded
joints shall be explained if they depart from the sym-
bols and definitions contained in the relevant stan-
dards (e.g. DIN standards). Where the weld prepara-
tion (together with approved methods of welding)
conforms both to normal shipbuilding practice and to
these Rules and recognized standards, where applica-
ble, no special description is needed.
C3.2.4.2 Materials, weldability
.1 Only base materials of proven weldability
may be used for welded structures. Any approval
conditions of the steel or of the procedure qualifica-
tion tests and the steelmaker's recommendations are
to be observed.
.2 For normal strength hull structural steels
grades A, B, D and E which have been tested by GL,
Chapter 1
Page 3–9
weldability normally is considered to have been
proven. The suitability of these base materials for
high efficiency welding processes with high heat
input shall be verified.
.3 Higher strength hull structural steels grade
AH/DH/EH/FH which have been approved by GL in
accordance with the relevant requirements of Rules
for Materials and Welding normally have had their
weldability examined and, provided their handling is
in accordance with normal shipbuilding practice, may
be considered to be proven. The suitability of these
base materials for high efficiency welding processes
with high heat input shall be verified.
.4 High strength (quenched and tempered) fine
grain structural steels, low temperature steels,
stainless and other (alloyed) structural steels require
special approval by GL. Proof of weldability of the
respective steel is to be presented in connection with
the welding procedure and welding consumables.
.5 Cast steel and forged parts require testing by
GL. For castings intended to be used for welded
shipbuilding structures the maximum permissible
values of the chemical composition according to the
GL Rules Steel and Iron Materials (II-1-2), Section 4,
B.4 and Table 4.1 have to be observed.
.6 Aluminium alloys require testing by GL.
Proof of their weldability shall be presented in con-
nection with the welding procedure and welding
consumables.
.7 Welding consumables used are to be suitable
for the parent metal to be welded and are to be ap-
proved by GL.
C3.2.4.3 Manufacture and testing
.1 The manufacture of welded structural com-
ponents may only be carried out in workshops or
plants that have been approved. The requirements
that have to be observed in connection with the fabri-
cation of welded joints are laid down in the Rules II –
Materials and Welding, Part 3 – Welding.
.2 The weld quality grade of welded joints
without proof by calculation (see C3.2.4.1) depends
on the significance of the welded joint for the total
structure and on its location in the structural element
(location to the main stress direction) and on its
stressing. For details concerning the type, scope and
manner of testing, see Rules Welding in the Various
Fields of Application (II-3-3), Section 1, I. Where
proof of fatigue strength is required, in addition the
requirements of C3.7.6 apply.
C3.2.4.4 Welding processes for aluminium
alloys
In general, the welding of the hull structures is to be
performed with the MIG (metal-arc inert gas) and
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures I - Part 3
Page 3–10 GL 2012

TIG (tungsten-arc inert gas) processes using welding
consumables recognized as suitable for the base ma-
terial to be used. Welding processes and filler materi-
als other than those above are to be individually con-
sidered by GL at the time of the approval of welding
procedures.
C3.2.5 Corrosion protection – heterogeneous
steel/aluminium alloy assembly
.1 Connections between aluminium alloy parts,
and between aluminium alloy and steel parts, if any,
are to be protected against corrosion by means of
coatings applied by suitable procedures agreed by
GL.
.2 In any case, any direct contact between steel
and aluminium alloy is to be avoided (e.g. by means
of zinc or cadmium plating of the steel parts and
application of a suitable coating on the corresponding
light alloy parts).
.3 Any heterogeneous jointing system is sub-
ject to GL’s agreement.
.4 The use of transition joints made of alumin-
ium/ steel-cladded plates or profiles is subject to
GL’s agreement.
.5 Transition joints are to be type-approved.
.6 Qualifications tests for welding procedures
are to be carried out for each joint configuration.
In addition to this it is strongly recommended to carry
out pre-construction baseline testing.
.2 Baseline testing
This testing of materials is done on pre-fabricated
samples, representing typical construction methods
and lay-up intended for the particular project. Testing
and evaluation should be finished before the vessel’s
construction starts.
With a variety of tests, cognition shall be attained
about:
− Confirming design values, i.e. bending stiffness,
bending capacity limited by skins, bending/shear
capacity limited by core and/or core bonding. All
these issues could be covered with long beam
bending tests or shorter beam bending tests.
− Proper building performance.
− Compatibility of materials.
.3 As-built testing
In order to obtain confirmation about the quality of
the finished product, representative test samples need
to be taken from the hull and be tested. These test
samples can be taken from cut-outs and the scope of
testing is depending on the composite design of the
vessel and its areas of importance (usually 3 or 4
point bend test on sandwich beams or compressive
strength test for solid laminates).

.7 A welding booklet giving preparations and

various welding parameters for each type of assembly C3.3 Design Acceleration
is to be submitted for review.
C3.3.1 Vertical acceleration at LCG
C3.2.6 Fibre-reinforced plastic (FRP) struc-
tures .1 The design vertical acceleration at LCG, aCG
(expressed in g), is defined by the designer and corre-
C3.2.6.1 Materials sponds to the average of the 1 per cent highest accel-
erations in the most severe sea conditions expected,
.1 Constituent materials in addition to the gravity acceleration.

Constituent materials contributing to the structural Generally, it is to be not less than:

integrity shall be GL-approved. For a composite
structure this will include fibre fabrics, laminating V
a CG = cHSC ⋅ c RW ⋅
resin (matrix), structural adhesives and core materi- L
als.
where cHSC values are indicated in Table C3.3.1.
In individual cases it may be acceptable to provide
GL-approval equivalence by tests.
Table C3.3.1
Production facilities where the vessel and/or major
structural components are constructed need to obtain Passenger,
a GL Shop approval for composite components. Type of
Ferry, Supply Pilot Rescue
service
Cargo
The general requirements for material and production
are defined in GL Rules Fibre Reinforced Plastics cHSC 0,24 0,36 0,50 0,60
and Bonding (II-2-1).
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 3–11

cRW = service range coefficient Hs = permissible significant wave height at actual

craft speed Vx (see C3.3.3),
= 1,00 for unlimited service range
= 0,90 for restricted service area RSA (200) r = distance of the point from:
= 0,75 for restricted service area RSA (50) − 0,5 D for monohull craft
= 0,66 for restricted service area RSA (20) − waterline at draught T, for twin-hull craft
= 0,60 for restricted service area RSA (SW)
C3.3.3 Assessment of limit operating condi-
Note tions
The provisions in Section 1, 1.3.4 apply irrespective C3.3.3.1 General
of the above service range restrictions.
.1 “Limit operating conditions” in this para-
.2 For craft with type of service “Passenger,
graph are to be taken to mean sea states (character-
Ferry, Cargo” an acceleration greater than aCG = 1,0 g
ized only by their significant wave heights) compati-
may not be adopted for the purpose of defining limit
ble with the structural design parameters of the craft,
operating conditions.
i.e. the sea states in which the craft may operate de-
.3 The longitudinal distribution of vertical pending on its actual speed.
acceleration along the hull is given by:
.2 Limit operating conditions are derived from
av = kv ⋅ aCG the restrictions presented in C3.3.3.2, C3.3.3.3 and
C3.3.3.4 below.
kv = longitudinal distribution factor, not to be less
than (see Figure C3.3.1): .3 Other specific design parameters influenced
by sea state and speed could be also considered at the
= 1 for x ≤ LCG
discretion of GL.
x
1−
L for x > LCG .4 It is the designer’s responsibility to specify
= 2− the format and the values of the limit operating con-
LCG
1− ditions. Their format may be for example a relation
L
between speed and significant wave height which
aCG = design acceleration at LCG ascertains actual loads less than the one used for
structural design. They shall include the maximum
kv
allowed significant wave height Hsm consistent with
2 the structural strength. Hsm is not to be greater than
the value calculated according to C3.3.3.1.7 below.

1 .5 The limit operating conditions are defined,

at the discretion of GL, on the basis of results of
model tests and full-scale measurements or by nu-
x merical simulations.
0 LCG L

Fig. C3.3.1 .6 The limit operating conditions, taken as a

basis for classification, are indicated in the Classifica-
.4 Variation of av in the transverse direction tion Certificate and are to be considered in defining
the worst intended conditions and the critical design
may generally be disregarded.
conditions in Section 1.
C3.3.2 Transverse acceleration
.7 It is assumed that, on the basis of weather
forecast, the craft does not encounter, within the time
.1 Transverse acceleration is defined on the
interval required for the voyage, sea states with sig-
basis of results of model tests and full-scale meas-
nificant heights, in m, greater than the following:
urements, considering their characteristic value as
specified in C3.3.4.1. a CG L1,5
Hsm = 5 ⋅ ⋅
.2 In the absence of such results, transverse V 6 + 0,14 ⋅ L
acceleration [g] at the calculation point of the craft
may be obtained from: where vertical acceleration aCG is defined in C3.3.1,
but need not to be taken less than 1,0 g.
H ⎛ ⎛ Vx ⎞ r ⎞⎟
2
a t = 2,5 ⋅ s ⎜
⋅ 1 + 5 ⋅ ⎜1 + ⎟ ⋅
⎜ .8 For craft with a particular shape or other
L
⎝ ⎝ 6 L ⎠ L ⎟⎠ characteristics, GL reserves the right to require model
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures I - Part 3
Page 3–12 GL 2012

tests or full-scale measurements to verify results C3.3.3.3 Limitation imposed by wet deck im-
obtained by the above formula. pact loads for catamarans

C3.3.3.2 Limitation imposed by vertical accel- .1 Wet deck impact pressure is given in C3.5.4.
eration at LCG

.1 Bottom impact pressure, given in C3.5.3, .2 The formula in C3.5.4 may be used to define
and deck loads, given in C3.5.8, are explicitly or maximum speeds compatible with actual structure of
implicitly depending on the vertical acceleration at wet deck, depending on sea states having a signifi-
LCG. Therefore, the design values of these loads, cant height Hs .
taken as the basis for the classification, directly im-
pose limitation on vertical acceleration level at LCG. .3 The reduction of relative impact velocity Vsl
induced by stabilisation system if any is to be disre-
.2 It is the designer’s responsibility to provide garded for the purpose of limit operating conditions
for a relation between the speed and the significant imposed by wet deck impact loads.
wave height that provides a maximum vertical accel-
eration less than the design value.
C3.3.3.4 Limitation imposed by global loads
.3 The significant wave height is related to the
craft’s geometric and motion characteristics and to .1 For monohulls, catamarans and trimarans,
the vertical design acceleration aCG by the following the longitudinal bending moment and shear forces as
formula: given in C3.4.1 and C3.4.2 are explicitly or implicitly
depending on vertical acceleration along the ship.
10,9 ⋅ a CG ⋅ K cat ⋅ K H Therefore, the design values of these loads, taken as
Hs =
K F2 the basis for classification, directly impose limitation
on vertical acceleration level at LCG. The require-
Bcl - Hsm ments of C3.3.3.2 apply.
with Kcat = 1 + ≥ 1, 0
L
.2 For catamarans and trimarans, the transverse
= 1,0 for monohulls and trimarans bending moment, the torsional bending moment and
the vertical shear force as given in C3.4.2 are depend-
Bcl = distance between the center lines of the ing on vertical acceleration aCG. Therefore, the re-
hulls of catamarans quirements of C3.3.3.2 apply.
3, 23
KF = ⋅ (2, 43 ⋅ L + Vx ) .3 For SWATH craft, the global loads as given
L
in C3.4.3 are not depending on ship motions.
2
⎛ 1 ⎞ .4 For ships with length greater than 100m, the
KH = K 0,35 ⎜ − 0,11⎟ + 1 relation between vertical acceleration along the ship
2
⎝K ⎠
and global loads are to be ascertained on basis of
results of model tests and/or full-scale measurements
KF
K = or by numerical simulations, as indicated in C3.3.3.2.
KT
.5 The reduction of vertical acceleration along
4, 6 ⋅ A wp x CG the ship induced by stabilisation system if any is to be
KT = ⋅ disregarded for the purpose of limit operating condi-
Δ L
tions imposed by global loads.
Awp = area of water line
C3.3.3.5 Hull monitoring
xCG = distance [m] from aft perpendicular to LCG
.1 GL may require a hull monitoring system to
.4 For craft, such as SESs, for which a speed be fitted on board, allowing to monitor and display in
reduction does not necessarily imply a reduction in real time the vertical acceleration and any other sensi-
acceleration, the speed is to be modified depending tive parameter with respect to the strength.
on the sea state according to criteria defined, at the
discretion of GL, on the basis of motion characteris-
tics of the craft. .2 The information is to be available at the
wheelhouse and displayed in a clear format allowing
.5 The reduction of vertical acceleration aCG to compare with design values.
induced by stabilisation system if any is to be disre-
garded for the purpose of limit operating conditions .3 When a hull monitoring system is requested,
imposed by bottom impact loads. its specification is to be submitted for review.
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 3–13

C3.4 Overall Loads MsS = still water sagging bending moment [kN⋅m]

C3.4.1 Monohulls cRW = see C3.3.1.1

C3.4.1.1 General C = 6 + 0,02 L

For the purpose of this calculation, CB may not be
.1 In general, the wave induced bending loads taken less than 0,6.
and shear forces according to C3.4.1.2 are accepted.
.4 Total shear force
.2 For monohulls of unusual form and design
and for ships with extreme bow flare, GL may require 3, 2 ⋅ M bI
TbI =
determination of vertical wave-induced bending mo- L
ments and share forces as well as their distribution
over the ship’s length considering various mass dis- Mbl = the greatest between MblH and MblS, calcu-
tributions. Accepted calculation procedures are to be lated according to C3.4.1.2.2 and C3.4.1.2.3,
applied. as applicable.
.3 Where deemed necessary, stresses due tor- .5 Longitudinal distribution of total bending
sion and/or horizontal wave bending are to be consid- moment
ered in a global stress analysis.
The longitudinal distribution of the total bending
moments is given by:
Note
Upon request, such calculations will be performed by KM ⋅ MblH in hogging
GL. KM ⋅ MblS in sagging
C3.4.1.2 Bending moment and shear force KM = longitudinal distribution factor as shown on
Figure C3.4.1.
.1 General
For the envisaged mass distributions for the defined 1,0
loading condition values of vertical still water bend-
ing moment are to be calculated over the ship’s
KM

length.
The values of the total longitudinal bending moments
and shear force are given, in first approximation, by
the formula in C3.4.1.2.3 and C3.4.1.2.4. The for-
mula in C3.4.1.2.2 is to be applied when deemed
necessary by GL on the basis of the motion character-
istics of the ship.
For ships having L < 100 m, the total bending mo-
ments in hogging or in sagging condition respec-
tively, are to be taken as the greatest of those given
by the formulae in C3.4.1.2.2 and C3.4.1.2.3.
Hull girder loads determined by direct calculation
according to C3.4.1.2.6 are accepted.
.2 Bending moment due to still water loads,
wave induced loads and impact loads
M bIH = M bIS = 0,55 ⋅ Δ ⋅ L ⋅ (1 + a CG )
where aCG is the vertical acceleration at the LCG,
defined in C3.3.1.
.3 Bending moment due to still water loads
and wave induced loads
M bIH = MsH + 0, 21 ⋅ C ⋅ L2 ⋅ B ⋅ CB ⋅ cRW
M bIS = MsS + 0,12 ⋅ C ⋅ L2 ⋅ B ⋅ ( CB + 0, 7 ) ⋅ cRW
MsH = still water hogging bending moment [kN⋅m]
0
0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1,0
x/L
Fig. C3.4.1
.6 Direct calculation of hull girder design
As a basis for direct calculation of design values,
loading conditions corresponding to the actual weight
distribution are to be used.
In principle, the estimated representative mass distri-
butions for the defined loading conditions will be the
average of the mass distributions that result in the
highest and the lowest stillwater vertical bending
moment. This representative mass distribution leads
to an average displacement and an average vertical
stillwater bending moment.
Analysis of the craft in harmonic waves is to be exe-
cuted by direct computational methods that evaluate
response amplitude operators of wave-induced verti-
cal shear forces and bending moments. Using an
adequate nonlinear correction procedure that ac-
counts for a realistic wave breaking criterion, the
wave contour along the craft’s side has to be deter-
mined for relevant harmonic waves of selected ampli-
tudes and phase positions. Hydrodynamic pressures
are to be extrapolated up to the wave contour.
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures I - Part 3
Page 3–14 GL 2012

Hydrodynamic calculations are to be performed for Pbi = gi · avi

speeds that correspond to the operational profile of
the craft.

After completing the nonlinear correction procedure,

the forces acting on the craft, including inertial 0,1 L

P0
0,5 L
forces, generally are not in balance. Equilibrium can
be achieved by resolving the motion equations, re- xSL
sulting in nonlinearly corrected wave amplitude de- A. P. FSL F. P.
L
pendent response values of, e.g., bending moments.
Repeating this procedure for different wave periods av0
c = L
and wave headings yields nonlinearly corrected av0 + av1
(pseudo) response amplitude operators that depend on av1
wave height. Depending on the considered phase av0
avi
locations, two separate sets of transfer functions
result, one set for the sagging condition and another
set for the hogging condition. Fig. C3.4.2

Treating these nonlinearly corrected pseudo transfer Bi = craft breadth [m] at uppermost deck;
functions like transfer functions of linear systems,
(xi and Bi to be measured at the centre of
stochastic methods are to be used to evaluate shear
forces and bending moments. For stationary seaways, interval i),
a cos² distribution of wave energy about the principal p0 = maximum hydrodynamic pressure [kPa] equal
direction of wave encounter direction is to be as- to:
sumed. The seaways’ main wave headings relative to
the craft are to be considered as equally distributed. a v1 ⋅ G ⋅ (r02 − x 2W )
=
Wave heights used to obtain the wave amplitude
dependent pseudo transfer functions are to be taken
fSL ⋅ ( r02 + 0,5 ⋅ L ⋅ ( xSL − x W ) − x SL ⋅ x W )
as equal to the significant wave height of the corre- av1 = vertical design acceleration at the forward
sponding natural seaway. perpendicular, as defined in C3.3,
Calculated long-term values of shear forces and G = weight force [kN] equal to:
bending moments are to be based on long-term wave
statistics relevant for the craft’s operating area. = ∑ g i ⋅ Δx i

For the sagging condition only, an additional shear gi = weight per unit length [kN/m] of interval i;
force and bending moment caused by slamming loads for twin-hull craft, gi is to be defined for one
in the craft’s forebody area are to be determined as hull,
specified below. For the purpose of this calculation,
the hull is considered longitudinally subdivided into a xW = distance, in m, of LCG from the midship
number of intervals. Generally, 20 intervals are to be perpendicular:
considered. ∑ ( g i ⋅ Δx i ⋅ x i )
= − 0,5 ⋅ L
For twin-hull craft, the calculation below applies to ∑ ( g i ⋅ Δx i )
one of the hulls, i.e. the longitudinal distribution of
weight forces gi and the corresponding breadth Bi are r0 = radius of gyration [m] of weight distribution,
equal to:
to be defined for one hull.
0,5
⎛ ∑ g ⋅ Δx ⋅ ( x − 0,5 ⋅ L )2 ⎞
The total impact force [kN] is:
= ⎜ ⎟
i i i
⎜ ∑ gi ⋅ Δx i ⎟
FSL = ∑ qSLi ⋅ Δx i ⎝ ⎠
normally 0,2 L < r0 < 0,25 L (guidance value)
Δxi = length of interval [m]
xSL = distance [m] of centre of surface FSL from the
qSLi = additional load per unit length [kN/m] midship perpendicular, given by:
for x/L ≥ 0,6 see also Figure C3.4.2, given by: 1 ⎛ ⎛x ⎞⎞
= ∑ Δx i ⋅ x i ⋅ Bi ⋅ sin ⎜ 2π ⋅ ⎜ i − 0, 6 ⎟ ⎟ − 0,5 ⋅ L
fSL ⎝ ⎝ L ⎠⎠
⎛ ⎛x ⎞⎞
qSLi = p0 ⋅ Bi ⋅ sin ⎜ 2 ⋅ π ⋅ ⎜ i − 0,6 ⎟ ⎟ fSL = surface [m2] equal to:
⎝ ⎝ L ⎠⎠
⎛ ⎛x ⎞⎞
xi = distance [m] from the aft perpendicu- = ∑ Δx i ⋅ Bi ⋅ sin ⎜ 2π ⋅ ⎜ i − 0, 6 ⎟ ⎟
lar ⎝ ⎝ L ⎠⎠
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 3–15

The resulting load distribution qsi [kN/m] for the C3.4.2.2 Longitudinal bending moment and
calculation of the impact induced sagging bending shear force
moment and shear force is:
.1 Refer to C3.4.1.2.
(a) For x/L < 0,6:
qsi = qbi = gi ⋅ avi .2 In C3.4.1.2.6, the breadth Bi is defined as
avi = total dimensionless vertical acceleration at below:
interval i, equal to: Bi = maximum breadth of one hull at the consid-
= a h + a p ⋅ ( x i − 0,5 ⋅ L ) ered longitudinal location xi [m]

ah = acceleration due to heaving motion, equal .3 When slamming of wet-deck is expected to

to: occur (cf. C3.5.4), Bi is to be taken as:

FSL ⎛ r2 − x ⋅ x ⎞ Bi = the maximum breadth of one hull at the con-

= ⋅⎜ 0 SL W ⎟
G ⎜ r2 − x2 ⎟ sidered longitudinal location [m] without be-
⎝ 0 W ⎠ ing greater than B/2, multiplied by the coeffi-
ap = acceleration due to pitching motion [m-1]: cient fB, where:

FSL ⎛x −x ⎞ fB = 2 ⋅ (1 - BW/B)
= ⋅ ⎜ SL W ⎟
G ⎜ r2 − x2 ⎟
⎝ 0 W ⎠ C3.4.2.3 Transverse bending moment and
shear force
ah and ap are relative to g
(b) For x/L ≥0,6: The transverse bending moment Mbt [kNm] and shear
force Tbt [kN] are given by:
qsi = qbi - qSLi
Δ ⋅ b ⋅ a CG ⋅ g
The impact induced sagging bending moment and M bt =
shear force are obtained by integration of the load 5
distribution qsi along the hull. They are to be added to
the respective values calculated according to Δ ⋅ a CG ⋅ g
Tbt =
C3.4.1.2.3 in order to obtain the total bending mo- 4
ment and shear force due to still water loads, wave
induced loads and impact loads. b = transverse distance [m] between the centres
of the two hulls,
C3.4.2 Catamarans
aCG = vertical acceleration at LCG, defined in
C3.4.2.1 General C3.3.1.

.1 The values of the longitudinal bending mo-
ment and shear force are given by the formulae in
C3.4.1.2.
.2 For catamarans, the hull connecting struc-
tures are to be checked for load conditions specified
in C3.4.2.2 and C3.4.2.3. These load conditions are to
be considered as acting separately.
.3 Design moments and forces given in the
following paragraphs are to be used unless other
values are verified by model tests, full-scale meas-
urements or any other information provided by the
designer (see C3.3.4.1, Requirements for model
tests).
.4 For craft with length L > 65 m or speed V >
45 knots, or for craft with structural arrangements
that do not permit a realistic assessment of stress
conditions based on simple models, the transverse
loads are to be evaluated by means of direct calcula-
tions carried out in accordance with criteria specified
in C3.6 or other criteria considered equivalent by GL.
C3.4.2.4 Transverse torsional connecting mo-
ment
The catamaran transverse torsional connecting mo-
ment [kN ⋅ m] about a transverse axis is given by:
M tt = 0,125 ⋅ Δ ⋅ L ⋅ a CG ⋅ g
where aCG is the vertical acceleration at LCG, de-
fined in C3.3.1, which need not to be taken greater
than 1,0 g for this calculation.
C3.4.3 Small waterplane area twin-hull
(SWATH) craft - Forces and moments
acting on twin-hull connections
C3.4.3.1 Side beam force
.1 The design beam side force [kN] (see Figure
C3.4.3) is given by:
FQ = 12,5 ⋅T ⋅ Δ2/3 ⋅ d ⋅ LS
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures I - Part 3
Page 3–16 GL 2012

⎛ Δ ⎞ C3.4.4 Trimarans
d = 1,55 − 0, 75 ⋅ tanh ⎜ ⎟
⎝ 11000 ⎠
The transverse design bending moments and shear
forces for trimarans, subdivided in two load cases,
LS = 2,99 ⋅ tanh ( λ ) − 0, 725 will be calculated with respect to the structural ar-
rangement. In general, the design loads can be taken
0,137 ⋅ A lat as symmetrical to the centre line of the vessel. The
λ=
T ⋅ Δ1/ 3 sum of deck loads, self weights and buoyancy forces
can be evenly distributed in longitudinal direction.
Concentrated masses, lifting forces of foils and pillar
Alat = lateral area [m2] projected on a vertical
loads are considered at their effective positions.
plane, of one hull with that part of strut or struts be-
low waterline at draught T.
.1 Upward load case: Following forces acting at
hM their respective load centres are to be considered:

− maximum upward and outward lifting forces of

foils and stabilizers jointed to the outer hulls ac-
cording to GL rudder calculation (C3.10).
T/2

FQ FQ
T

− Buoyancy force of the outer hull at 15° heeling

angle and max displacement multiplied by 1,1.
Fig. C3.4.3
− Tank loads and deck load outside the main (cen-
tre) hull not to be taken into account.
.2 The lateral pressure [kN/m2] acting on one
hull is given by:
FQ .2 Downward load case: Following design deck
pQ = loads multiplied by (1+0,4 aCG) are to be considered:
A lat
− Sheltered deck: p = 1,0 kPa
The distribution of the lateral force FQ can be taken
as constant over the effective length Le = Alat / T [m]. − Passenger deck: p = 2,5 kPa
The constant lateral force per unit length [kN/m] is
thus given by:
− Car deck (1,0 t axle load): p = 2,0 kPa
FQ
qQ =
Le − Car deck (3,5 t axle load): p = 4,0 kPa

C3.4.3.2 Bending moment − Truck deck: max. truck weights evenly distrib-
uted
.1 The corresponding design bending moment
[kN ⋅ m] is given by: − tank weights

MQ = hM ⋅ FQ
hM = half the draught T plus the distance from the
waterline at draught T to the midpoint of the
wet deck structure (see Figure C3.4.4) [m]
MQ = hM · F Q
− maximum downward and inward lifting forces of
foils and stabilizers jointed to the outer hulls ac-
cording to GL rudder calculation
Sum of static weights and tank loads up to the maxi-
mum displacement (half value for a symmetrical
model) are to be taken into account in following
order:

1. masses in fixed positions (tank loads, etc.)

hM 2. distributed deck loads from upper to lower deck

started from outside each with the intention to
FQ FQ cover the worst possible transverse weight distri-
bution (concerning the maximum transverse
Fig. C3.4.4 bending moment)
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 3–17

C3.5 Local Loads and Design Criteria k1

C3.5.1 General 1,0

This Section provides data regarding design loads for

0,5
determining the scantlings of the hull structural ele-
ments by means of the design formulae given in the
following Sections or by means of direct calculations.
x/L
The dynamic portions of the design loads are design 0 0,5 0,8 1,0
values which can only be applied within the design
concept of this Chapter.
Fig. C3.5.1

C3.5.2 Load centre

K2 = factor accounting for impact area:
.1 For plates:
u 0,75 − 1, 7
= 0, 455 − 0,35 ⋅
– vertical stiffening system: 0,5 ⋅ stiffener spacing u 0,75 + 1, 7
above the lower support of plate field, or lower
edge of plate when the thickness changes within ≥ 0,50 for plating,
the plate field
≥ 0,45 for stiffeners,
– horizontal stiffening system: Midpoint of plate
field
≥ 0,35 for girders and floors,
.2 For stiffeners and girders: s
u = 100 ⋅
Sr
– centre of span

Sr = reference area [m2]

C3.5.3 Impact pressure on the bottom of hull
.1 In general, bottom slamming is expected on
the whole bottom area. The slamming area may be
limited if the conditions for aCG and VFr according to
Table C3.5.1 are met. VFr is defined as follows:
V of the craft displacement
VFr =
L0,5
Aft of these slamming areas the impact pressure can
be reduced to ps over a length of 0,1 L
.2 The impact pressure [kPa] acting on the
bottom of hull is not less than:
psl = 100 ⋅ T ⋅ K1 ⋅ K 2 ⋅ K 3 ⋅ a cg
K1 = longitudinal bottom impact pressure distribu-
tion factor (see Figure C3.5.1):
= 0,5 + x/L for x/L < 0,5:
= 1,0 for 0,5 ≤ x/L ≤ 0,8
= 3,0 - 2,5 ⋅ x/L for x/L > 0,8
Δ
= 0, 7 ⋅
T
Δ = displacement [t] (see C3.1.4). For catamaran,
Δ in the above formula is to be taken as half
where s is the area [m2] supported by the element
(plating, stiffener, floor or girder). For plating, the
supported area is the spacing between the stiffeners
multiplied by their span, without taking for the latter
more than three times the spacing between the stiff-
eners
K3 = factor accounting for shape and deadrise of
the hull:
70 − α d
=
70 − αdCG
where αdCG is the deadrise angle [°] measured at
LCG and αd is the deadrise angle [°] between hori-
zontal line and straight line joining the edges of re-
spective area measured at the longitudinal position of
the load point; values taken for αd and αdCG are to be
between 10° and 30°

where x is the distance [m] from the aft perpendicular aCG = design vertical acceleration at LCG, de-
to the load point fined in C3.3.1.
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures I - Part 3
Page 3–18 GL 2012

.3 Sea intakes and other openings − for 0,7 < x/L < 0,8:
.1 Sea chests are to have scantlings as for bot- x
tom structure (see C3.7.7.3 and C3.7.8.2 condition K WD = 6, 0 ⋅ − 3,8
L
(b)), taking a design pressure pt, in kPa, equal to:
pt = ps + 0,5 ⋅ psl − for x/L ≥ 0,8:
where ps and psl are as defined in C3.5.5 and KWD = 1,0
C3.5.3 respectively.
If a safety valve is installed pt is not to be less than
where x is the distance [m] from the aft perpendicular
100 pv, where pv is the blow out pressure at the safety to the load point
valve in bar, but not less than 1 bar.
VX = ship’s speed [kn]
C3.5.4 Impact pressure on wet deck (includ-
ing tunnel radius) HA = air gap [m] equal to the distance between
the waterline at draught T and the wet deck
.1 In general, wet deck slamming is expected
on the whole wet deck area. The slamming area may KWD
be limited if the conditions for aCG and VFr according
to Table C3.5.1 are met. 1,0

Table C3.5.1
aCG VFr 0,5
bottom wet deck
0,4

VFr < 4,5 fwd of fwd of

0,7 L 0,8 L x/L
aCG ≤ 1 0 0,2 0,7 0,8 1,0
fwd of fwd of
4,5 ≤ VFr ≤ 5
0,5 L 0,7 L
Fig. C3.5.2
fwd of fwd of
1 < aCG ≤ 1,5 VFr ≤ 5
0,5 L 0,7 L C3.5.5 Sea pressures
The impact pressure [kPa] acting on the wet deck is
not less than: C3.5.5.1 Sea pressure on bottom and side shell

⎛ H ⎞ .1 The sea pressure [kPa] considered as acting

psl = 3 ⋅ K 2 ⋅ K 3 ⋅ K WD ⋅ VX ⋅ Vsl ⋅ ⎜1 − 0,85 ⋅ A ⎟
⎝ HS ⎠ on the bottom and side shell is not less than psmin,
defined in Table C3.5.2, nor less than:
Vsl = relative impact velocity [m/s] equal to:
− for z ≤ T
4 ⋅ HS
= +1
L ⎛ ⎛ S⎞ ⎞
ps = 10 ⋅ ⎜ T0 + 0, 75 ⋅ S − ⎜ 1 − 0, 25 ⋅ ⎟ ⋅ z ⎟
⎝ ⎝ T ⎠ ⎠
HS = significant wave height,
K2 = factor accounting for impact area, as de- − for z > T
fined in C3.5.3.1 with maximum displace-
ment of the craft ps = 10 ⋅ ( T0 + S − z )
K3 = factor accounting for shape and deadrise of T0 = T, in general
wet deck, as defined in C3.5.3.2 where 10°
is taken for αdCG, = T + 0,09 y, for SWATH and outer hulls of
trimaran
KWD = longitudinal wet deck impact pressure dis-
z = vertical distance [m] from the moulded base
tribution factor (see Figure C3.5.2):
line to load point. z is to be taken positively
− for x/L < 0,2: upwards,
⎛ x⎞ y = transverse distance [m] from the centre line to
K WD = 0,5 ⋅ ⎜1, 0 − ⎟ load point. y is to be taken positive,
⎝ L ⎠
S = as given [m] in Table C3.5.2 with CB taken
− for 0,2 ≤ x/L ≤ 0,7: not greater than 0,5.
KWD = 0,4 = T, for SWATH
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures
GL 2012
Table C3.5.2
S Pmin
L L+ 75
x/L ≥ 0,9 T ≤ 0,36⋅ aCG ⋅ ≤ 3,5⋅ T 20≤ ≤35
CB 5
L + 75
x/L ≤ 0,5 T ≤ 0,60⋅ aCG ⋅ L ≤ 2,5⋅ T 10≤ ≤ 20
10
.2 Between midship area and fore end (0,5 <
x/L < 0,9), ps varies in a linear way as follows:
⎛ x⎞
ps = psFP − ⎜ 2, 25 − 2,5 ⋅ ⎟ ⋅ ( psFP − psM )
⎝ L⎠
where psFP is the sea pressure at fore end and psM in
midship area.
C3.5.5.2 Stern doors and side shell doors
.1 The sea pressures on stern doors and side
shell doors is to be taken according to C3.5.5.1 for
scantlings of plating and secondary members.
.2 The design forces [kN] considered for the
scantlings of primary members are to be not less
than:
− external force: Fe = A ⋅ pS
− internal force: Fi = Fo + 10 ⋅ W
A = area [m2] of the door opening
W = mass of the door [t]
Fp = total packing force [kN]. Packing line pres-
sure is normally not to be taken less than
5 N/mm,
Fo = the greater of Fc and 5 ⋅ A [kN]
Fc = accidental force [kN] due to loose of cargo
etc., to be uniformly distributed over the area
A and not to be taken less than 300 kN. For
small doors, such as bunker doors and pilot
doors, the value of Fc may be appropriately
reduced. However, the value of Fc may be
taken as zero, provided an additional structure
such as an inner ramp is fitted, which is capa-
ble of protecting the door from accidental
forces due to loose cargoes,
pS = sea pressure as defined in C3.5.5.1
.3 The design forces [kN] considered for the
scantlings of securing or supporting devices of doors
opening outwards are to be not less than:
− external force: Fe = A ⋅ ps
− internal force: Fi = Fo + 10 ⋅ W + Fp
where the parameters are defined in C3.5.5.2.2.
Chapter 1
Page 3–19
.4 The design forces [kN] considered for the
scantlings of securing or supporting devices of doors
opening inwards are to be not less than:
− external force: Fe = A ⋅ ps + Fp
− internal force: Fi = Fo + 10 ⋅ W
where the parameters are defined in C3.5.5.2.2.
C3.5.5.3 Bow doors
The arrangement of bow doors is to comply with the
provisions of 2.2.3. Loads according to C3.5.5.2 are
to be taken. If an inner bow door is required accord-
ing to 2.2.3 a design load according to C3.5.5.4 is to
be considered. The inner bow door is to be fitted
within the limits for the collision bulkhead but not
less than 1,2 m aft of the bow door.
C3.5.5.4 Sea pressures on front walls of the hull
.1 The pressure [kPa] considered as acting on
front walls of the hull (in case of stepped main deck),
not located at the fore end, is not less than:
⎛ x1 ⎞
p sf = 6 ⋅ ⎜ 1 + ⎟ ⋅ (1 + 0, 0 4 5 ⋅ L − 0, 3 8 ⋅ z 1 )
⎜
⎝ 2 ⋅ L ⋅ ( C B + 0,1 ) ⎟⎠
x1 = distance [m] from front walls to the midship
perpendicular (for front walls aft of the mid-
ship perpendicular, x1 is equal to 0),
z1 = distance [m] from load point to waterline at
draught T.
psF is not less than the greater of:
3 + (6,5 + 0,06 ⋅ L)
3 + 2,4 ⋅ aCG
.2 For front walls located at the fore end, the
pressure psF will be individually considered by GL,
but not less than 1,2 times the value according to
C3.5.5.4.1.
C3.5.5.5 Sea pressures on deckhouses
.1 The pressure [kPa] considered as acting on
walls of deckhouses is not less than:
⎛ ⎞
x1
⎜ 2 ⋅ L ⋅ ( C + 0,1) ⎟⎟ (
psu = K su ⋅ ⎜1 + ⋅ 1 + 0, 045 ⋅ L − 0,38 ⋅ z1 )
⎝ B ⎠
Ksu = coefficient
− for front walls of a deckhouse located di-
rectly on the main deck not at the fore end:
Ksu = 6,0
− for unprotected front walls of the second
tier, not located at the fore end:
Ksu = 5,0
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures I - Part 3
Page 3–20 GL 2012

− for sides of deckhouses, b being the breadth,
in m, of the considered deckhouse:
Ksu = 1,5 + 3,5 b/B (with 3 ≤ Ksu ≤ 5)
− for the other walls:
Ksu = 3,0
x1 = distance [m] from front walls or from wall
elements to the midship perpendicular (for
front walls or side walls aft of the midship per-
pendicular, x1 is equal to 0),
z1 = distance [m] from load point to waterline at
draught T.
.2 The minimum values of psu [kPa] to be con-
sidered are:
− for the front wall of the lower tier:
psu = 6,5 + 0,06 ⋅ L
C3.5.6.1.3 Stern tube bulkhead
.1 If a stern tube bulkhead is provided, it shall,
in general, be so arranged that the stern tube and the
rudder trunk are enclosed in a watertight compart-
ment. The stern tube bulkhead should extend to the
datum or to a watertight platform situated above the
design waterline.
.2 Where a complete stern tube bulkhead is not
practicable, only watertight void spaces enclosing the
stern tube entrances, providing the possibility for a
second watertight sealing may be arranged. The same
arrangement can be applied for the rudder trunk.
C3.5.6.1.4 Remaining watertight bulkheads
.1 The remaining watertight bulkheads are, in
general, to extend to the datum. Wherever practica-
ble, they shall be situated in one frame plane, other-
wise those portions of decks situated between parts of
transverse bulkheads are to be watertight.

− for the sides and aft walls of the lower tier: C3.5.6.1.5 Openings in watertight bulkheads
psu = 4,0 .1 The requirements of Section 2, 2.2.2 are to
be observed.
− for the other walls or sides:
C3.5.6.2 Pressures on watertight bulkheads
psu = 3,0
The pressure [kPa] considered as acting on subdivi-
.3 For unprotected front walls located at the sion bulkheads is not less than:
fore end, the pressure psu will be considered by GL as
psb = 9,81 ⋅ h3
given in C3.5.6.2.
h3 = distance [m] from load point to a point 1 m
C3.5.6 Bulkheads above the bulkhead deck at the ship’s side, for
the collision bulkhead to a point 1 m above the
C3.5.6.1 General
upper edge of the collision bulkhead at ship’s
.1 This section applies to watertight and non- side.
watertight bulkheads.
C3.5.7 Tank structures
.2 Horizontal part of bulkheads are also to
C3.5.7.1 General
comply with the rules for deck beams.
This section applies to all kinds of tanks with the tank
.3 The special requirements for tanks in the boundaries forming a direct part of the hull structure.
hull are given in C3.5.7. In addition the requirements for detached tanks and
the procedure of testing for tightness are given.
C3.5.6.1.1 Watertight subdivision
All tanks are to be suitably subdivided by bulkheads
.1 Number and location of transverse bulk- or swash bulkheads in order to avoid excessive liquid
heads fitted in addition to those specified in C2.1.7 sloshing.
are to be so selected as to ensure sufficient transverse
Hollow structural elements are not permitted in tanks
strength of the hull.
for flammable liquids.
.2 For ships which require proof of survival Oil is not be carried in a forepeak tank.
capability in damaged conditions, the watertight
subdivision will be determined by damage stability C3.5.7.2 Air, overflow and sounding pipes
calculations.
Each tank is to be fitted with air pipes, overflow
C3.5.6.1.2 Collision bulkhead pipes and sounding pipes. The air pipes are to be led
to above the exposed deck. The arrangement is to be
.1 The collision bulkhead shall extend water- such as to allow complete filling of the tanks. The
tight up to the datum (bulkhead deck). Steps or re- height from the deck to the point where the water
cesses may be permitted provided Section 2, C2.1.8.2 may have access is to be at least 760 mm on the da-
is observed. tum and 450 mm on a superstructure deck.
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures
GL 2012
The sounding pipes are to be led to the bottom of the
tanks.
C3.5.7.3 Separation of oil fuel tanks from tanks
for other liquids
Fuel oil tanks are to be separated from tanks for lu-
bricating oil, hydraulic oil, thermal oil, vegetable oil,
feedwater, condensate water and potable water by
cofferdams.
For steel and aluminium structures the arrangement
of cofferdams between oil fuel and lubricating oil
tanks may be dispensed with provided that:
– the common boundary is continuous, i.e. it does
not abut at the adjacent tank boundaries, see Fig.
C3.5.3
Where the common boundary cannot be con-
structed continuously according to Fig. C3.5.3,
the fillet welds on both sides of the common
boundary are to be welded in two layers and the
throat thickness is not to be less than 0,5 ⋅ t
(t = plate thickness).
common
boundary
Fig. C3.5.3 Continuous common boundary re-
placing a cofferdam
– Stiffeners or pipes do not penetrate the common
boundary.
– The corrosion allowance tk for steel plates for
the common boundary is not less than 1,0 mm.
C3.5.7.4 Potable Water Tanks
Potable water tanks shall be separated from tanks
containing liquids other than potable water, ballast
water, distillate or feed water.
In no case sanitary arrangement or corresponding
piping are to be fitted directly above the potable wa-
ter tanks.
Manholes arranged in the tank top are to have sills.
If pipes carrying liquids other than potable water are
to be led through potable water tanks, they are to be
fitted in a pipe tunnel.
Air and overflow pipes of potable water tanks are to
be separated from pipes of other tanks.
C3.5.7.5 Swash Bulkheads
The total area of perforation shall not be less than
5 % and should not exceed 10 % of the total bulkhead
area.
Chapter 1
Page 3–21
The plate thickness shall, in general, be equal to the
minimum thickness. Strengthenings may be required
for load bearing structural parts.
The free lower edge of a swash bulkhead is to be
adequately stiffened.
The section modulus of the stiffeners and girders is to
be calculated with pt1, but disregarding pv.
C3.5.7.6 Independent tanks
Detached tanks are to be adequately secured against
forces due to the ship's motions.
Detached tanks in hold spaces are also to be provided
with antifloatation devices. It is to be assumed that
the hold spaces are flooded to the load water line.
The stresses in the antifloatation devices caused by
the floatation forces are not to exceed the material's
yield stress.
Fittings and pipings on detached tanks are to be pro-
tected by battens, and gutter ways are to be fitted on
the outside of tanks for draining any leakage oil.
C3.5.7.7 Pressures on tank structures
The design pressure [kPa] for service condition is:
p t1 = 9,81 ⋅ h1 ⋅ρ ⋅ (1 + 0, 4 ⋅ a v ) + 100 ⋅ p v
h1 = distance [m] from load point to tank top,
ρ = liquid density [t/m3] (1,0 t/m3 for water),
pv = setting pressure [bar] of pressure relief valve,
when fitted.
The maximum static design pressure [kPa] is:
p t2 = 9,81 ⋅ h 2
h2 = distance [m] from load point to top of over-
flow or to a point located 1,5 m above the
tank top, whichever is greater.
For tanks equipped with pressure relief valves and/or
for tanks intended to carry liquids of a density greater
than 1,0 t/m3, the head h2 is at least to be measured to
a level at the following distance hp above tank top:
hp = 2,5 ρ or
= 10 pv, where pv > 0,25 ρ
Regarding the design pressure of fuel tanks and bal-
last tanks which are connected to an overflow system,
the dynamic pressure increase due to the overflowing
is to be taken into account in addition to the static
pressure height up to the highest point of the over-
flow system.
C3.5.7.8 Testing for Tightness
.1 Testing of fuel oil, ballast, trimming, feed
water, fresh water and anti-rolling tanks is to be ef-
fected by a combination of a leak test by means of air
pressure and an operational test by means of water or
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures I - Part 3
Page 3–22 GL 2012

the liquid for which the tank is intended to be used. .2 Where decks are intended to carry masses of
The air pressure is not to exceed 0,2 bar gauge. The significant magnitude, including vehicles, the con-
increased risk of accident while the tanks are sub- centrated loads transmitted to structures are given by
jected to the air pressure is to be observed. the corresponding static loads multiplied by (1 + 0,4 ⋅
av ).
.2 Where one tank boundary is formed by the
ship's shell, the leak test is to be carried out before C3.5.8.2 Weather decks and exposed areas
launching. For all other tanks leak testing may be
carried out after launching. Erection welds as well as .1 For weather decks and exposed areas with-
welds of assembly openings are to be coated 2 after out deck cargo:
the leak test is carried out. This applies also to man-
ual weld connections of bulkheads with the other − if zd ≤ 2:
tanks boundaries and of collaring arrangements at p = 6,0 kPa
intersections of tank boundaries and e.g. frames,
beams, girders, pipes etc. If it is ensured that in adja- − if 2 < zd < 3:
cent tanks the same type of liquid is carried, e.g. in
adjacent ballast tanks, the above mentioned weld p = (12 – 3 zd) kPa
connections may be coated 2 prior to the leak test.
− if zd ≥ 3:
All other welded connections in tank boundaries may p = 3,0 kPa
be coated prior to the leak test if it is ensured by
suitable means (e.g. by visual examination of the where zd is the vertical distance [m] from deck to
welded connections) that the connections are com- waterline at draught T.
pletely welded and the surfaces of the welds do not
exhibit cracks or pores. p can be reduced by 20 % for primary supporting
members and pillars under decks located at least 4 m
above the waterline at draught T, excluding embarka-
.3 Where the tanks are not subjected to the leak tion areas.
test as per 2. but are leak tested with water the bulk-
heads are, in general, to be tested from one side. The .2 For weather decks and exposed areas with
testing should be carried out prior to launching or in deck cargo:
the dock. Subject to approval by GL, the test may
also be carried out after launching. Water testing may − if zd ≤ 2:
be carried out after application of a coating 2, pro- p = (pc + 3) kPa
vided that during the visual inspection as per 2. above
deficiencies are not noted. The test head shall corre- − if 2 < zd < 3:
spond to a head of water of 2,5 m above the top of
p = (pc + 7 – 2 zd ) kPa
tank or to the top of overflow or air pipe, whichever
is the greater. − if zd ≥ 3:
.4 The operational test may be carried out p = (pc + 1) kPa
when the ship is afloat or during the trial trip. For all
tanks the proper functioning of filling and suction zd = distance defined in C3.5.8.2.1,
lines and of the valves as well as functioning and
tightness of the vent, sounding and overflow pipes is pc = uniform pressure due to deck cargo load [kPa]
to be tested. to be defined by the designer, but taken as not
less than 3,0 kPa.
C3.5.8 Deck loads
C3.5.8.3 Enclosed cargo decks
C3.5.8.1 General
.1 For enclosed cargo decks other than decks
.1 The pressure [kPa] considered as acting on carrying vehicles:
decks is given by the formula: p = pc
pd = p ⋅ (1 + 0,4 ⋅ av)
with pc as defined in C3.5.8.2.2.
p = uniform pressure due to the load carried [kPa].
For enclosed cargo decks carrying vehicles, the loads
Minimum values are given in C3.5.8.2 to
are defined in C3.5.8.7.
C3.5.8.6,
av = design vertical acceleration, defined in C3.3. C3.5.8.4 Enclosed accommodation decks

.1 For enclosed accommodation decks not

–––––––––––––– carrying goods:
2 Shopprimers are not regarded as a coating within the scope of
these requirements. p = 3,0 kPa
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 3–23

p can be reduced by 20 per cent for primary support-
ing members and pillars under such decks.
.2 For enclosed accommodation decks carrying
goods:
p = pc
With pc as defined in C3.5.8.2.2.
C3.5.8.5 Sheltered decks
.1 They are decks which are not accessible to
the passengers and which are not subjected to the sea
pressures. Crew can access such decks with care and
taking account of the admissible load, which is to be
clearly indicated.
The deck load [kPa] for shelter decks is:
pd = 1,3 (1 + 0,4 av)
A lower value may be accepted, at the discretion of
GL, provided that such a value as well as the way of
access to the deck are clearly specified by and agreed
upon with the Owner.
The minimum value to be considered for such areas
forward of the bridge is
pd = 3,0 kPa
C3.5.8.7.2 Design loads
.1 For determining the deck scantlings, the
following loads are to be used:
− uniformly distributed load resulting from the
mass of the deck and maximum number of cars to
be carried. This load is not to be taken less than
2,5 kPa multiplied by (1 + 0,4 av).
− wheel load P
Where all wheels of one axle are standing on a deck
girder or a deck beam, the axle load is to be evenly
distributed on all wheels.
Where not all of the wheels of one axle are standing
on a deck girder or a deck beam, the following wheel
loads are to be used:
P = 0,5 ⋅ axle load for 2 wheels per axle
= 0,3 ⋅ axle load for 4 wheels per axle
= 0,2 ⋅ axle load for 6 wheels per axle
.2 For determining the scantlings of the sus-
pensions, the increased wheel load in case of four and
six wheels per axle as per C3.5.8.7.2.1 need not be
considered.

C3.5.8.6 Platforms of machinery spaces and .3 For determining the primary structure of
mooring decks decks under racking effects, the following loads are
to be used:
.1 The minimum value to be considered for − uniformly distributed load resulting from the
platforms of machinery spaces is mass of the deck and maximum number of cars to
p = 8,0 kPa be carried. This load is not to be taken less than
2,5 kPa.
.2 The minimum value to be considered for
platforms of mooring decks is − wheel load P.

p = 6,0 kPa C3.5.8.7.3 Permissible deflection

C3.5.8.7. Decks carrying vehicles .1 The deflection of girders subjected to loads

stipulated under C3.5.8.7.2 is not to exceed:
C3.5.8.7.1 General

.1 These Rules apply to movable as well as to
removable car decks not forming part of the ship's
structure.
.2 The following information should be in-
cluded in the plans to be submitted for approval:
– scantlings of the car decks
– masses of the car decks
– number and masses of cars intended to be stowed
on the decks
– wheel loads and distance of wheels
f = for steel and aluminium structures
200
= unsupported span of girder
.2 An adequate safety distance should be main-
tained between the girders of a loaded deck and the
top of cars stowed on the deck below.
C3.5.8.7.4 Buckling
The buckling strength of girders is to be proved ac-
cording to C3.7.5, if required.

– connection of the car decks to the hull structure C3.5.9 Handrails

– moving and lifting gear of the car decks Following design loads can be taken for handrails of
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures
Page 3–24
− weather decks and exposed areas 750 N/m
− inner decks 750 N/m
− outer ramps 500 N/m
− Ro-Ro decks which are only accessible in harbour
areas 200 N/m
− sheltered decks 200 N/m
If neither escape routes, life-raft accesses nor heli
winch areas etc. are included, reduced requirements
can be stipulated.
Following permissible bending stress [MPa] of the
stanchions (loaded at upper end) is to be observed:
150/k for steel
70/k for aluminium alloys
The maximum permissible distance between the
stanchions is 1,6 m.
C3.6 Welded Joints
Note
The content of C3.6 is to a large extent identical to
that of the GL Rules for Welding in the Various
Fields of Application (II-3-3), Section 1, G. Because
of the re-issues of II-3-3 and these Rules at different
times, some temporary divergences may arise and in
such circumstances the more recent Rules shall take
precedence. Special questions and problems will be
solved in an actual case by using these Rules in addi-
tion to the following information.
These requirements and figures arise from welded
joints of steel structures. For aluminium alloys devia-
tions or further requirements may be taken into con-
sideration.
C3.6.1 Design
C3.6.1.1 General design principles
.1 During the design stage welded joints are to
be planned such as to be accessible during fabrica-
tion, to be located in the best possible position for
welding and to permit the proper welding sequence to
be followed.
.2 Both the welded joints and the sequence of
welding involved are to be so planned as to enable
residual welding stresses to be kept to a minimum in
order that no excessive deformation occurs. Welded
joints should not be over dimensioned, see also
C3.6.3.3.3.
.3 When planning welded joints, it shall first be
established that the type and grade of weld envisaged,
such as full root weld penetration in the case of HV
or DHV (K) weld seams, can in fact be perfectly
I - Part 3
GL 2012
executed under the conditions set by the limitations
of the manufacturing process involved. If this is not
the case, a simpler type of weld seam shall be se-
lected and its possibly lower load bearing capacity
taken into account when dimensioning the compo-
nent.
.4 Highly stressed welded joints - which, there-
fore, are generally subject to examination - are to be
so designed that the most suitable method of testing
for faults can be used (radiography, ultrasonic, sur-
face crack testing methods) in order that a reliable
examination may be carried out.
.5 Special characteristics peculiar to the mate-
rial, such as the lower strength values of rolled mate-
rial in the thickness direction (see C3.6.2.5.1) or the
softening of cold worked aluminium alloys as a result
of welding, are factors which have to be taken into
account when designing welded joints. Clad plates
where the efficiency of the bond between the base
and the clad material is proved may generally be
treated as solid plates (up to medium plate thick-
nesses where mainly filled weld connections are
used).
.6 In cases where different types of material are
paired and operate in sea water or any other electro-
lytic medium, for example welded joints made be-
tween unalloyed carbon steels and stainless steels in
the wear-resistant cladding in rudder nozzles or in the
cladding of rudder shafts, the resulting differences in
potential greatly increase the susceptibility to corro-
sion and shall therefore be given special attention.
Where possible, such welds are to be positioned in
locations less subject to the risk of corrosion (such as
on the outside of tanks) or special protective counter-
measures are to be taken (such as the provision of a
protective coating or cathodic protection).
C3.6.1.2 Design details
.1 Stress flow, transitions
.1.1 All welded joints on primary supporting
members shall be designed to provide as smooth a
stress profile as possible with no major internal or
external notches, no discontinuities in rigidity and no
obstructions to strains, see C3.7.1.
.1.2 This applies in analogous manner to the
welding of subordinate components on to primary
supporting members whose exposed plate or flange
edges should, as far as possible, be kept free from
notch effects due to welded attachments.
.1.3 Butt joints in long or extensive continuous
structures such as bilge keels, fenders, crane rails,
slop coamings, etc. attached to primary structural
members are therefore to be welded over their entire
cross-section.
.1.4 Wherever possible, joints (especially site
joints) in girders and sections shall not be located in
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures
GL 2012
areas of high bending stress. Joints at the knuckle of
flanges are to be avoided.
.1.5 The transition between differing component
dimensions shall be smooth and gradual. Where the
depth of web of girders or sections differs, the flanges
or bulbs are to be bevelled and the web slit and ex-
panded or pressed together to equalize the depths of
the members. The length of the transition should be at
least equal twice the difference in depth.
.1.6 Where the plate thickness differs at joints
perpendicularly to the direction of the main stress,
differences in thickness greater than 3 mm shall be
accommodated by bevelling the proud edge in the
manner shown in Fig. C3.6.1 at a ratio of at least 1 : 3
or according to the notch category. Differences in
thickness of 3 mm or less may be accommodated
within the weld. For aluminium a ratio of 1 : 5 is re-
commended. Differences in thickness are not al-
lowed.
max. 3
£ 1:
3 .3
Fig. C3.6.1 Accommodation of differences of
thickness
.1.7 For the welding on of plates or other rela-
tively thin-walled elements, forgings and aluminium
and steel castings should be appropriately tapered or
provided with integrally cast or forged welding
flanges in accordance with Fig. C3.6.2.
Fig. C3.6.2 Welding flanges on steel castings or
forgings
.1.8 For the connection of shaft brackets to the
boss and shell plating, see C3.6.1.4.3 and C3.9.1.
.2 Local clustering of welds, minimum spac-
ing
.2.1 The local clustering of welds and short dis-
tances between welds are to be avoided. Adjacent
butt welds should be separated from each other by a
distance of at least
50 mm + 4 × plate thickness
Fillet welds should be separated from each other and
from butt welds by a distance of at least
30 mm + 2 × plate thickness
Chapter 1
Page 3–25
The width of replaced or inserted plates (strips)
should, however, be at least 300 mm or ten times the
plate thickness, whichever is the greater.
.2.2 Reinforcing plates, welding flanges, mount-
ings and similar components socket-welded into
plating should be of the following minimum size:
D min = 170 + 3 (t − 10) ≥ 170 mm
D = diameter of round or length of side of angu-
lar weldments [mm]
t = plating thickness [mm]
The corner radii of angular socket weldments should
be 5 t [mm] but at least 50 mm. Alternatively the
"longitudinal seams" are to extend beyond the "trans-
verse seams". Socket weldments are to be fully
welded to the surrounding plating.
Regarding the increase of stress due to different
thickness of plates see also C3.7.6.
Welding cut-outs
.3.1 Welding cut-outs for the (later) execution of
butt or fillet welds following the positioning of trans-
verse members should be rounded (minimum radius
25 mm or twice the plate thickness, whichever is the
greater) and should be shaped to provide a smooth
transition on the adjoining surface as shown in
Fig. C3.6.3 (especially necessary where the loading is
mainly dynamic).
r ³ 2t ³ 25
[t]
r ³ 2t ³ 25
[t]
Fig. C3.6.3 Welding cut-outs
.3.2 Where the welds are completed prior to the
positioning of the crossing members, no welding cut-
outs are needed. Any weld reinforcements present are
to be machined off prior to the location of the cross-
ing members or these members are to have suitable
cut-outs.
.4 Local reinforcements, doubling plates
.4.1 Where platings (including girder plates and
tube walls) are subjected locally to increased stresses,
thicker plates should be used wherever possible in
preference to doubling plates. Bearing bushes, hubs
etc. shall invariably take the form of thicker sections
welded into the plating, see C3.6.2.2.2.
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures
Page 3–26
.4.2 Where doublings cannot be avoided, the
thickness of the doubling plates should not exceed
twice the plating thickness. Doubling plates whose
width is greater than approximately 30 times their
thickness shall be plug welded to the underlying
plating in accordance with C3.6.3.3.11 at intervals
not exceeding 30 times the thickness of the doubling
plate.
.4.3 Along their (longitudinal) edges, doubling
plates shall be continuously fillet welded with a
throat thickness "a" of 0,3 × the doubling plate thick-
ness. At the ends of doubling plates, the throat thick-
ness "a" at the end faces shall be increased to
0,5 × the doubling plate thickness but shall not ex-
ceed the plating thickness, see Fig. C3.6.4.
The welded transition at the end faces of the doubling
plates to the plating should form with the latter an
angle of 45° or less.
.4.4 Where proof of fatigue strength is required
(see C3.7.6), the configuration of the end of the dou-
bling plate shall conform to the selected detail cate-
gory.
t
b/2 ~ 1,5 b
r ³ 2t
2t
b
r³
Fig. C3.6.4 Welding at the ends of doubling
plates
.4.5 Doubling plates are not permitted in tanks
for flammable liquids.
.5 Intersecting members, stress in the thick-
ness direction
.5.1 Where, in the case of intersecting members,
plates or other rolled products are stressed in the
thickness direction by shrinking stresses due to the
welding and/or applied loads, suitable measures shall
be taken in the design and fabrication of the struc-
tures to prevent lamellar tearing (stratified fractures)
due to the anisotropy of the rolled products.
.5.2 Such measures include the use of suitable
weld shapes with a minimum weld volume and a
welding sequence designed to reduce transverse
shrinkage. Other measures are the distribution of the
stresses over a larger area of the plate surface by
using a build-up weld or the joining together of sev-
eral "fibres" of members stressed in the thickness
direction as exemplified by the deck stringer/sheer
strake joint shown in Fig. C3.6.12.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
.5.3 In case of very severe stresses in the thick-
ness direction due, for example, to the aggregate
effect of the shrinkage stresses of bulky single or
double-bevel butt welds plus high applied loads,
plates with guaranteed through thickness properties
(extra high-purity material and guaranteed minimum
reductions in area of tensile test specimens taken in
thickness direction) 3 are to be used.
.6 Welding of cold formed sections, bending
radii
.6.1 Wherever possible, welding should be
avoided at the cold formed sections with more than
5 % permanent elongation 4 and in the adjacent areas
of structural steels with a tendency towards strain
ageing.
.6.2 Welding may be performed at the cold
formed sections and adjacent areas of hull structural
steels and comparable structural steels (e.g. those in
quality groups S...J... and S...K... to DIN EN 10025)
provided that the minimum bending radii are not less
than those specified in Table C3.6.1.
Table C3.6.1 Minimum inner bending radius r
Plate thickness Minimum inner bending
t radius r
to 4 mm 1,0 × t
to 8 mm 1,5 × t
to 12 mm 2,0 × t
to 24 mm 3,0 × t
over 24 mm 5,0 × t
Note
The bending capacity of the material may necessitate
a larger bending radius.
.6.3 For other steels and other materials, where
applicable, the necessary minimum bending radius
shall, in case of doubt, be established by test. Proof of
adequate toughness after welding may be stipulated
for steels with minimum nominal upper yield point of
more than 355 N/mm2 and plate thicknesses of
30 mm and above which have undergone cold form-
ing resulting in 2 % or more permanent elongation.
––––––––––––––
3 See Rules Steel and Iron Materials (II-1-2), Section 1 and
also Supply Conditions 096 for Iron and Steel Products,
"Plate, strip and universal steel with improved resistance to
stress perpendicular to the product surface" issued by the
German Iron and Steelmakers' Association.
4 Elongation ε in the outer tensile-stressed zone
100
ε = [% ]
1+ 2 r t
r = inner bending radius [mm]
t = plate thickness [mm]
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 3–27

.7 Build-up welds on rudderstocks and pint- elled welds with an open root and an attached or an
les integrally machined or cast, permanent weld pool
support (backing) as shown in Fig. C3.6.6.
.7.1 Wear resistance and/or corrosion resistant
build-up welds on the bearing surfaces of rudder-
stocks, pintles etc. shall be applied to a thickened 30° 30°
collar exceeding by at least 20 mm the diameter of
the adjoining part of the shaft.
t t
.7.2 Where a thickened collar is impossible for
design reasons, the build-up weld may be applied to 6 6
the smooth shaft provided that relief-turning in ac-
cordance with C3.6.1.2.7.3 is possible (leaving an
Fig. C3.6.6 Single-side welds with permanent
adequate residual diameter).
weld pool supports (backings)
.7.3 After welding, the transition areas between
the welded and non-welded portions of the shaft shall .1.4 The weld shapes illustrated in Fig. C3.6.7
be relief-turned with large radii, as shown in shall be used for clad plates. These weld shapes shall
Fig. C3.6.5, to remove any base material whose struc- be used in analogous manner for joining clad plates
ture close to the concave groove has been altered by to (unalloyed and low alloyed) hull structural steels.
the welding operation and in order to effect the
physical separation of geometrical and metallurgical 60° 60°
"notches".
building weld on relief - turning
thickened collar after welding
:4
.1
ax

Welding the support material at an adequate disdance

m

(min. 2 mm) from the cladding material

Fig. C3.6.5 Build-up welds applied to rudder-

Grooving out the clad side of the plate
stocks and pintles

C3.6.1.3 Weld shapes and dimensions

.1 Butt joints Welding the clad side of the plate in at least two
passes, using special interpass electrodes where
.1.1 Depending on the plate thickness, the weld- necessary
ing method and the welding position, butt joints shall
be of the square, V or double-V shape conforming to Fig. C3.6.7 Weld shapes for welding of clad
the relevant standards (e.g. EN 22553/ISO 2533, plates
ISO 9692 -1, -2, -3 or -4). Where other weld shapes
are applied, these are to be specially described in the
.2 Corner, T and double-T (cruciform)
drawings. Weld shapes for special welding processes
joints
such as single-side or electrogas welding shall have
been tested and approved in the context of a welding
procedure test. .2.1 Corner, T and double-T (cruciform) joints
with complete union of the abutting plates shall be
.1.2 As a matter of principle, the rear sides of made as single or double-bevel welds with a mini-
butt joints shall be grooved and welded with at least mum root face and adequate air gap, as shown in
one capping pass. Exceptions to this rule, as in the Fig. C3.6.8, and with grooving of the root and cap-
case of submerged-arc welding or the welding proc- ping from the opposite side.
esses mentioned in C3.6.1.3.1.1, require to be tested
and approved in connection with a welding procedure
test. The effective weld thickness shall be deemed to
be the plate thickness, or, where the plate thicknesses
2-3

2-3

differ, the lesser plate thickness. Where proof of

°
45

°
45

fatigue strength is required (see C3.7.6), the detail

»

category depends on the execution (quality) of the

weld. t t
.1.3 Where the aforementioned conditions cannot
be met, e.g. where the welds are accessible from one Fig. C3.6.8 Single and double-bevel welds with
side only, the joints shall be executed as lesser bev- full root penetration
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures
Page 3–28
The effective weld thickness shall be assumed as the
thickness of the abutting plate. Where proof of fa-
tigue strength is required (see C3.7.6), the detail
category depends on the execution (quality) of the
weld.
.2.2 Corner, T and double-T (cruciform) joints
with a defined incomplete root penetration, as shown
in Fig. C3.6.9, shall be made as single or double-
bevel welds, as described in C3.6.1.3.2.1, with a
back-up weld but without grooving of the root.
f f
2-3
°
45
45
»
t t
Fig. C3.6.9 Single and double-bevel welds with
defined incomplete root penetration
The effective weld thickness may be assumed as the
thickness of the abutting plate t, where f is the in-
complete root penetration of 0,2 t with a maximum of
3 mm, which is to be balanced by equally sized dou-
ble fillet welds on each side. Where proof of fatigue
strength is required (see C3.7.6), these welds are to
be assigned to type D1.
.2.3 Corner, T and double-T (cruciform) joints
with both an unwelded root face c and a defined
incomplete root penetration f shall be made in accor-
dance with Fig. C3.6.10
f/2 c f/2 c cient penetration has to be verified in way of the
f/2
2-3
°
45
°
45
t t
Fig. C3.6.10 Single and double-bevel welds with
unwelded root face and defined in
complete root penetration
The effective weld thickness shall be assumed as the
thickness of the abutting plate t minus (c + f), where f
is to be assigned a value of 0,2 t subject to a maxi-
mum of 3 mm. Where proof of fatigue strength is
required (see C3.7.6), these welds are to be assigned
to types D2 or D3.
.2.4 Corner, T and double-T (cruciform) joints
which are accessible from one side only may be made
in accordance with Fig. C3.6.11 in a manner analo-
gous to the butt joints referred to in C3.6.1.3.1.3
using a weld pool support (backing), or as single-
side, single bevel welds in a manner similar to those
prescribed in C3.6.1.3.2.2.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
6
f
45°
2-3
45
»
t
Fig. C3.6.11 Single-side welded T joints
The effective weld thickness shall be determined by
analogy with C3.6.1.3.1.3 or C3.6.1.3.2.2, as appro-
2-3 priate. Wherever possible, these joints should not be
used where proof of fatigue strength is required (see
C.3.7.6).
.2.5 Where corner joints are flush, the weld
shapes shall be as shown in Fig. C3.6.12 with bevel-
ling of at least 30° of the vertically drawn plates to
avoid the danger of lamellar tearing. A similar proce-
dure is to be followed in the case of fitted T joints
(uniting three plates) where the abutting plate is to be
socketed between the aligned plates.
.2.6 Where, in the case of T joints, the direction
of the main stress lies in the plane of the horizontal
plates (e.g. the plating) shown in Fig. C3.6.13 and
where the connection of the perpendicular (web)
plates is of secondary importance, welds uniting three
plates may be made in accordance with Fig. C3.6.13
(with the exception of those subjected mainly to
dynamic loads). For the root passes of the three plate
weld sufficient penetration shall be achieved. Suffi-
f/2 welding procedure test.
»15° »15°
2-3
2-3 2-3
»30° »30°
5°
»4
Fig. C3.6.12 Flush fitted corner joints
The effective thickness of the weld connecting the
horizontal plates shall be determined in accordance
with C3.6.1.3.2.2. The requisite "a" dimension is
determined by the joint uniting the vertical (web)
plates and shall, where necessary, be determined in
accordance with Table C3.6.3 or by calculation as for
fillet welds.
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures
GL 2012
2a 2a
5° 5° »1
»1 »1
5° »1 5°
a
Fig. C3.6.13 Welding together three plates
.3 Fillet weld connections
.3.1 In principle fillet welds are to be of the dou-
ble fillet weld type. Exceptions to this rule (as in the
case of closed box girders and mainly shear stresses
parallel to the weld) are subject to approval in each
individual case. The throat thickness "a" of the weld
(the height of the inscribed isosceles triangle) shall be
determined in accordance with Table C3.6.3 or by
calculation according to C3.6.2. The leg length of a
fillet weld is to be not less than 1,4 times the throat
thickness "a". For fillet welds at doubling plates, see
C3.6.2.4.3 and for bracket joints, see C3.6.2.2.7.
.3.2 The relative fillet weld throat thicknesses
specified in Table C3.6.3 relate to normal strength
and higher strength hull structural steels and compa-
rable structural steels. They may also be generally
applied to high-strength structural steels and non-
ferrous metals provided that the "tensile shear
strength" of the weld metal used is at least equal to
the tensile strength of the base material. Failing this,
the "a" dimension shall be increased accordingly and
the necessary increment shall be established during
the welding procedure test (see Rules Welding in the
Various Fields of Application (II-3-3), Section 1, F.).
Alternatively proof by calculation taking account of
the properties of the weld metal may be presented.
Note
In the case of higher-strength aluminium alloys, such
an increment may be necessary for cruciform joints
subject to tensile stresses, as experience shows that in
the welding procedure tests the tensile-shear strength
of fillet welds (made with matching filler metal) often
fails to attain the tensile strength of the base mate-
rial. See also Rules Welding in the Various Fields of
Application (II-3-3), Section 1, F.
.3.3 The throat thickness of fillet welds shall not
exceed 0,7 times the lesser thickness of the parts to
be connected (generally the web thickness). The
minimum throat thickness is defined by the expres-
sion:
t1 + t 2
a min = [mm],
3 close to foundation bolts, see Table C3.6.3), unless
but not less than 2,5 mm
Chapter 1
Page 3–29
t1 = lesser (e.g. the web) plate thickness [mm]
t2 = greater (e.g. the flange) plate thickness [mm]
.3.4 It is desirable that the fillet weld section
shall be flat faced with smooth transitions to the base
material. Where proof of fatigue strength is required
(see C3.7.6), machining of the weld (grinding to
remove notches) may be required depending on the
notch category. The weld should penetrate at least
close to the theoretical root point.
.3.5 Where mechanical welding processes are
used which ensure deeper penetration extending well
beyond the theoretical root point and where such
penetration is uniformly and dependably maintained
under production conditions, approval may be given
for this deeper penetration to be allowed for in de-
termining the throat thickness. The effective dimen-
sion:
2 emin
a deep = a + [mm]
3
shall be ascertained in accordance with Fig. C3.6.14
and by applying the term "emin" to be established for
each welding process by a welding procedure test.
The throat thickness shall not be less than the mini-
mum throat thickness related to the theoretical root
point.
e
a
e
a
em
theoretical
in
root centre
Fig. C3.6.14 Fillet welds with increased penetra-
tion
.3.6 When welding on top of shop primers which
are particularly liable to cause porosity, an increase
of the "a" dimension by up to 1 mm may be stipu-
lated depending on the welding process used. This is
specially applicable where minimum fillet weld
throat thicknesses are employed. The size of the in-
crease shall be decided on a case by case basis con-
sidering the nature and severity of the stressing fol-
lowing the test results of the shop primer in accor-
dance with the Rules Welding in the Various Fields
of Application (II-3-3), F. This applies in analogous
manner to welding processes where provision has to
be made for inadequate root penetration.
.3.7 Strengthened filled welds continuous on
both sides are to be used in areas subjected to severe
dynamic loads (e.g. for connecting the longitudinal
and transverse girders of the engine base to top plates
single or double-bevel welds are stipulated in these
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures
Page 3–30
locations. In these areas the "a" dimension shall equal
0,7 times the lesser thickness of the parts to be
welded.
.3.8 Intermittent fillet welds in accordance with
Table C3.6.3 may be located opposite one another
(chain intermittent welds, possibly with scallops) or
may be staggered, see Fig. C3.6.15. In case of small
sections other types of scallops may be accepted.
In water and cargo tanks, in the bottom area of fuel
oil tanks and of spaces where condensed or sprayed
water may accumulate and in hollow components
(e.g. rudders) threatened by corrosion, only continu-
ous or intermittent fillet welds with scallops shall be
used. This applies accordingly also to areas, struc-
tures or spaces exposed to extreme environmental
conditions or which are exposed to corrosive cargo.
There shall be no scallops in areas where the plating
is subjected to severe local stresses (e.g. in the bot-
tom section of the fore ship) and continuous welds
are to be preferred where the loading is mainly dy-
namic.
[t]
25
h
r³
h C3.6.1.3.3.9. The width of the holes shall be equal to
f £ 4 £ 75 e £ 150
e be less than 15 mm. The ends of the holes shall be
b=e+
e 20 mm. Wherever possible only the necessary fillet
b=e+
Fig. C3.6.15 Scallop, chain and staggered welds
.3.9 The throat thickness au of intermittent fillet
welds is to be determined according to the selected
pitch ratio b/ by applying the formula:
⎛b⎞
au = 1,1 ⋅ a ⎜ ⎟ [mm]
⎝ ⎠
a = required fillet weld throat thickness [mm]
for a continuous weld according to Table
C3.6.3 or determined by calculation
b = pitch = e + [mm]
e = interval between the welds [mm]
= length of fillet weld [mm]
The pitch ratio b/ should not exceed 5. The maxi-
mum unwelded length (b – with scallop and chain
welds, or b/2 – with staggered welds) should not
exceed 25 times the lesser thickness of the parts to be
I - Part 3
GL 2012
welded. The length of scallops should, however, not
exceed 150 mm.
.3.10 Lap joints should be avoided wherever pos-
sible and are not to be used for heavily loaded com-
ponents. In the case of components subject to low
loads lap joints may be accepted provided that, wher-
ever possible, they are orientated parallel to the direc-
tion of the main stress. The width of the lap shall be
1,5 t + 15 mm (t = thickness of the thinner plate).
Except where another value is determined by calcula-
tion, the fillet weld throat thickness "a" shall equal
0,4 times the lesser plate thickness, subject to the
requirement that it shall not be less than the minimum
throat thickness required by C3.6.1.3.3.3. The fillet
weld shall be continuous on both sides and shall meet
at the ends.
.3.11 In the case of plug welding, the plugs
should, wherever possible, take the form of elongated
holes lying in the direction of the main stress. The
distance between the holes and the length of the holes
may be determined by analogy with the pitch "b" and
the fillet weld length " " in the intermittent welds
covered by C3.6.1.3.3.8. The fillet weld throat thick-
ness "au" may be established in accordance with
at least twice the thickness of the plate and shall not
semi-circular. Plates or sections placed underneath
should at least equal the perforated plate in thickness
and should project on both sides to a distance of
1,5 × the plate thickness subject to a maximum of
welds shall be welded, while the remaining void is
packed with a suitable filler. Lug joint welding is not
allowed.
C3.6.1.4 Welded joints of particular compo-
nents
.1 Welds at the ends of girders and stiffeners
.1.1 As shown in Fig. C3.6.16, the web at the end
of intermittently welded girders or stiffeners is to be
continuously welded to the plating or the flange plate,
as applicable, over a distance at least equal to the
depth "h" of the girder or stiffener subject to a maxi-
mum of 300 mm. Regarding the strengthening of the
welds at the ends, extending normally over 0,15 of
the span, see Table C3.6.3.
no scallops h h 1,7h
20
h
b b
b
Fig. C3.6.16 Welds at the ends of girders and stif-
feners
.1.2 The areas of bracket plates should be con-
tinuously welded over a distance at least equal to the
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 3–31

length of the bracket plate. Scallops are to be located lated in accordance with C3.6.2.2.6. The fillet weld
only beyond a line imagined as an extension of the throat thickness is not to be less than the minimum
free edge of the bracket plate. specified in C3.6.1.3.3.3.

.1.3 Wherever possible, the free ends of stiffen-

ers shall abut against the transverse plating or the .3 Welded shaft bracket joints
webs of sections and girders so as to avoid stress
concentrations in the plating. Failing this, the ends of
.3.1 Unless cast in one piece or provided with
the stiffeners are to be sniped and continuously
integrally cast welding flanges analogous to those
welded over a distance of at least 1,7 h subject to a
prescribed in C3.6.1.2.1.7 (see Fig. C3.6.18), strut
maximum of 300 mm.
barrel and struts are to be connected to each other and
to the shell plating in the manner shown in Fig.
.1.4 Where butt joints occur in flange plates, the
C3.6.19.
flange shall be continuously welded to the web on
both sides of the joint over a distance at least equal to
the width of the flange. .3.2 In the case of single-strut shaft brackets no
welding is to be performed on the arm at or close to
.2 Joints between section ends and plates the position of constraint. Such components shall be
provided with integrally forged or cast welding
.2.1 Welded joints connecting section ends and flanges.
plates may be made in the same plane or lapped.
Where no design calculations have been carried out
or stipulated for the welded connections, the joints [t]
may be made analogously to those shown in Fig.
C3.6.17.

h h t
d
d

d ³ 1,75 h d ³ h Fig. C3.6.18 Shaft bracket with integrally cast

welding flanges
³ 0,67 h
2

h h [t]
[t']
1 1 ³2d³20
0
t'

t
d
d

³ 2 ³ 300
2 smoothly
2 rounded joint d
contours

d ³ 1,5 h d ³ 1,5 h

³ 0,75 h ³ 0,5 h
1 1
t = plating thickness in accordance with Section 6, F. in [mm]
³ ³
2 0,33 h 2 0,75 h t' =
d
+5 [mm] where d < 50mm
3
Fig. C3.6.17 Joints uniting section ends and plates t' = 3 Öd [mm] where d ³ 50mm
.2.2 Where the joint lies in the plane of the plate, For shaft brackets of elliptically shaped cross section d may
it may conveniently take the form of a single-bevel be substituted by 2/3 d in the above formulae.
butt weld with fillet. Where the joint between the
plate and the section end overlaps, the fillet weld
shall be continuous on both sides and shall meet at Fig. C3.6.19 Shaft bracket without integrally cast
the ends. The necessary "a" dimension is to be calcu- welding flanges
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures I - Part 3
Page 3–32 GL 2012

C3.6.2 Stress Analysis S = first moment of the cross sectional area of

the flange connected by the weld to the web
C3.6.2.1 General analysis of fillet weld stresses in relation to the neutral beam axis [cm3]

.1 Definition of stresses I = moment of inertia of the girder section [cm4]

For calculation purposes, the following stresses in a W = section modulus of the connected section
fillet weld are defined (see also Fig. C3.6.20): [cm2]

σ⊥ = normal stresses acting vertically to the direc- C3.6.2.2 Determination of stresses

tion of the weld seam
.1 Fillet welds stressed by normal and shear
τ⊥ = shear stress acting vertically to the direction forces
of the weld seam
Flank and frontal welds are regarded as being equal
τ = Shear stress acting in the direction of the for the purposes of stress analysis. In view of this,
weld seam normal and shear stresses are calculated as follows:
P
σ = τ = [N/mm2]
∑a⋅

Joint as shown in Fig. C3.6.21:

a – Stresses in frontal fillet welds:
P1
τ⊥ = [N/mm2]
s^ tII 2⋅a ( 1 + 2)
90° t^
P2 P2 ⋅ e
τ = ± [N/mm2]
2⋅a ( 1 + 2) 2 ⋅ a ⋅ Ft

Ft = ( 1 + a) ( 2 + a) [mm2]
a

Fig. C3.6.20 Stresses in a fillet weld 1

flank fillet weld
a
frontal fillet weld
Normal stresses acting in the direction of the weld
seam need not be considered. a P1
2

a
For calculation purposes the weld seam area is a ⋅ .
a
Due to equilibrium conditions the following applies
to the flank area vertical to the shaded weld seam P2
area: τ⊥ = σ ⊥ . e

The equivalent stress is to be calculated by the fol- Fig. C3.6.21 Weld joint of an overlapped lifting
lowing formula: eye
– Stresses in flank fillet welds:
σv = σ 2⊥ + τ⊥2 + τ2
P2
τ⊥ = [N/mm2]
.2 Definitions 2⋅a ( 1 + 2)

a = throat thickness [mm] P1 P2 ⋅ e

τ = ± [N/mm2]
2⋅a ( 1 + 2) 2 ⋅ a ⋅ Ft
= length of fillet weld [mm]
1, 2, e [mm]
P = single force [N]
– Equivalent stress for frontal and flank fillet
M = bending moment at the position considered welds:
[Nm]
Q = shear force at the point considered [N] σv = τ2⊥ + τ2
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 3–33

Joint as shown in Fig. C3.6.22: Is = moment of inertia of the welded joint

related to the x-axis [cm4]
P2
Ss(z) = the first moment of the connected
weld section at the point under con-
P1
sideration [cm3]
z = distance from the neutral axis [cm]
e

– Equivalent stress:
It has to be proved that neither σ⊥max in the
region of the flange nor τIImax in the region of
Fig. C3.6.22 Weld joint of a vertically mounted the neutral axis nor the equivalent stress
lifting eye σv = σ 2⊥ + τ2 exceed the permitted limits
P2 3 ⋅ P1 ⋅ e given in C3.6.2.2.8 at any given point. The
τ⊥ = + [N/mm2] equivalent stress σv should always be calcu-
2 ⋅ ⋅ a 2
⋅ a
lated at the web-flange connection
P1
τ = [N/mm2] .3 Fillet weld joints stressed by bending and
2 ⋅ ⋅ a torsional moments and shear forces
Regarding the normal and shear stresses resulting
Equivalent stress:
from bending, see C3.6.2.2.2. Torsional stresses
resulting from the torsional moment MT are to be
σv = τ2⊥ + τ2
calculated:
M T ⋅ 103
.2 Fillet weld joints stressed by bending τT = [N/mm 2 ]
moments and shear forces 2 ⋅ a ⋅ Am
MT = torsional moment [Nm]
The stresses at the fixing point of a girder are calcu-
lated as follows (in Fig. C3.6.23 a cantilever beam is Am = sectional area [mm2] enclosed by the weld
given as an example): seam
Q The equivalent stress composed of all three compo-
nents (bending, shear and torsion) is calculated by
means of the following formulae:
eo
z
M x x σv = σ2⊥ + τ2 + τT2 [N/mm 2 ],
eu
where τ and τT have not the same direction

( )
2
σv = σ2⊥ + τ + τT [N/mm 2 ],
Fig. C3.6.23 Fixing point of a cantilever beam
where τ and τT have the same direction
– Normal stress due to bending moment:
M .4 Continuous fillet weld joints between web
σ⊥ ( z) = z [N/mm2 ] and flange of bending girders
Is
M The stresses are to be calculated in way of maximum
σ⊥ max = eu [N/mm2 ], if eu > e0 shear forces. Stresses in the weld's longitudinal direc-
Is
tion need not be considered.
M
= e0 [N/mm2 ], if eu < e0 In the case of continuous double fillet weld connec-
Is
tions the shear stress is to be calculated as follows:
– Shear stress due to shear force: Q ⋅ S
τ = [N/mm 2 ]
Q ⋅ Ss ( z ) 20 ⋅ I ⋅ a
τ (z) = [N/mm 2 ]
10 ⋅ Is ⋅ ∑ a The fillet weld thickness required is:
Q ⋅ Ss max Q ⋅ S
τ max = [N/mm 2 ] a req = [mm]
20 ⋅ Is ⋅ a 20 ⋅ I ⋅ τzul
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures I - Part 3
Page 3–34 GL 2012

.5 Intermittent fillet weld joints between .6.2 Profiles joined by means of two flank and
web and flange of bending girders two frontal fillet welds (all round welding as shown
in Fig. C3.6.26):
Shear stress:
Q
Q ⋅ S ⋅ α ⎛b⎞ τ⊥ = [N/mm2 ]
τ = ⎜ ⎟ [N/mm ] 2
a (2 d + 1 + 2 )
20 ⋅ I ⋅ a ⎝ ⎠
b = pitch M ⋅ 103
τII = [N/mm2 ]
a ⋅ c ( 2d + 1 + 2 )
α = 1,1 stress concentration factor which takes
into account increases in shear stress at The equivalent stress is:
the ends of the fillet weld seam " "
σv = τ2⊥ + τ2

W ⋅ 103
a req = [mm]
⎛ + 2⎞
1,5 ⋅ c ⋅ d ⎜1 + 1 ⎟
b ⎝ 2d ⎠

Fig. C3.6.24 Intermittent fillet weld joint

The fillet weld thickness required is: M Q
Q ⋅ S ⋅ 1,1 ⎛ b ⎞ d
a req = [mm]
20 ⋅ I ⋅ τzul ⎜⎝ ⎟⎠

1
c
.6 Fillet weld connections on overlapped
profile joints

r
.6.1 Profiles joined by means of two flank fillet Fig. C3.6.26 Profile joined by means of two flank
welds (see Fig. C3.6.25): and two frontal fillet welds (all
Q round welding)
τ⊥ = [N/mm 2 ]
2 ⋅ a ⋅ d
.7 Bracket joints
M ⋅ 103
τ = [N/mm 2 ] Where profiles are joined to brackets as shown in Fig.
2 ⋅ a ⋅ c ⋅ d
C3.6.27, the average shear stress is:
The equivalent stress is:
3 ⋅ M ⋅ 103 Q
τ = + [N/mm2 ]
σv = τ2⊥ + τ 2
4 ⋅ a ⋅ d 2 2 ⋅ a ⋅ d

c, d, 1 , 2 , r [mm] see Fig. C3.6.25 d = length of overlap [mm]

d
3 1 − d
c = r +
4
2
[ mm] M Q
d

Q
d

M
d
2

1
c

Fig. C3.6.27 Bracket joint with idealized stress

r

distribution resulting from moment

Fig. C3.6.25 Profile joined by means of two flank M and shear force Q
fillet joints
The required fillet weld thickness is to be calcu-
As the influence of the shear force can generally be lated from the section modulus of the profile as fol-
neglected, the required fillet weld thickness may be lows:
determined by the following formula: 1 000 ⋅ W
3
a req = [mm]
W ⋅ 10 d2
a req = [mm]
1,5 ⋅ c ⋅ d (The shear force Q has been neglected.)
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 3–35

.8 Permissible stresses
The permissible stresses for various materials under
mainly static loading conditions are given in Table
C3.6.2. The values listed for high strength steels, aus-
tenitic stainless steels and aluminium alloys are based
on the assumption that the strength values of the weld
metal used are at least as high as those of the parent
metal. If this is not the case, the "a"-value calculated
shall be increased accordingly (see also C3.6.1.3.2).

Table C3.6.2 Permissible stresses in fillet weld seams

ReH or Rp0,2 Permissible stresses [N/mm2]

Material
[N/mm2] equivalent stress, shear stress σvp, τp
normal strength
GL–A/B/D/E 235 115
hull structural steel

GL–A/D/E/F 32 315 145

higher strength
GL–A/D/E/F 36 355 160
structural steel
GL–A/D/E/F 40 390 175

1.4306/304 L 180

1.4404/316 L 190

1.4435/316 L 190
110
1.4438/317 L 195

1.4541/321 205
austenitic and austenitic-
ferritic stainless steels
1.4571/316 Ti 215

1.4406/316 LN 280

1.4429/316 LN 295 130

1.4439/317 LN 285

1.4462/318 LN 480 205

AlMg3/5754 80 1 36

AlMg4,5Mn0,7/5083 125 1 56
aluminium alloys
AlMgSi/6060 65 2 30

AlSi1MgMn/6082 115 2 51
1 Plates, soft condition
2 Sections, cold hardened
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures I - Part 3
Page 3–36 GL 2012

Table C3.6.3 Fillet weld connections

Basic thickness of
fillet welds a/t0 1 Intermittent
Structural parts to be connected fillet welds
for double continuous
permissible 3
fillet welds 2
Bottom structures
transverse and longitudinal girders to each other 0,35 ×
– to shell and inner bottom 0,20 ×
centre girder to flat keel and inner bottom 0,40
transverse and longitudinal girders and stiffeners including shell plating in way of 0,30
bottom strengthening forward
machinery space
transverse and longitudinal girders to each other 0,35
– to shell and inner bottom 0,30
inner bottom to shell 0,40
sea chests, water side 0,50
inside 0,30
Machinery foundation
longitudinal and transverse girders to each other and to the shell 0,40
– to inner bottom and face plates 0,40
– to top plates 0,50 4
– in way of foundation bolts 0,70 4
– to brackets and stiffeners 0,30
longitudinal girders of thrust bearing to inner bottom 0,40
Decks
– to shell (general) 0,40
deckstringer to sheerstrake 0,50
Frames, stiffeners, beams etc.
general 0,15 ×
in peak tanks 0,30 ×
bilge keel to shell 0,15
Transverses, longitudinal and transverse girders
general 0,15 ×
within 0,15 of span from supports 0,25
cantilevers 0,40
pillars to decks 0,40
Bulkheads, tank boundaries, walls of superstructures and deckhouses
– to decks, shell and walls 0,40
Hatch coamings
– to deck 0,40
– to longitudinal stiffeners 0,30
Hatch covers
general 0,15 ×5
watertight or oiltight fillet welds 0,30
Rudder
plating to webs 0,25 ×
Stem
plating to webs 0,25 ×
1 t0 = Thickness of the thinner plate.
2 In way of large shear forces larger throat thicknesses may be required on the bases of calculations according to C3.6.2.
3 For intermittent welding in spaces liable to corrosion C3.6.1.3.3.8 is to be observed.
4 For plate thicknesses exceeding 15 mm single or double bevel butt joints with, full penetration or with defined incomplete root penetration
according to Fig. C3.6.9 to be applied.
5 excepting hatch covers above holds provided for ballast water.
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 3–37

C3.7 Steel and Aluminium Alloy Craft t = thickness [mm] of plating and deck panels,

C3.7.1 Structural Details Z = required section modulus [cm3] of stiffeners

C3.7.1.1 Longitudinal members
.1 All longitudinal members taken into account
for calculating the midship section modulus are to
extend over the required length within 0,4 L amid-
ships and are to be tapered gradually to the required
end scantlings.
and primary supporting members,
s = spacing of stiffeners [m] measured along the
plating,
= overall span of stiffeners [m] i.e. the distance
between the supporting elements at the ends of
the stiffeners (see Figure C3.7.1),

.2 Abrupt discontinuities of strength of longi-

tudinal members are to be avoided as far as practica-
ble. Where longitudinal members having different
scantlings are connected with each other, smooth
transitions are to be provided.

.3 At the ends of longitudinal bulkheads or

continuous longitudinal walls suitable scarping bra-
ckets are to be provided.

C3.7.1.2. Transverses and girders

.1 Where transverses and girders fitted in the

same plane are connected to each other, major dis-
continuities of strength shall be avoided. The web
depth of the smaller girder shall, in general, not be
less than 60 % of the web depth of the greater one.

.2 The taper between face plates with different

dimensions is to be gradual. In general the taper shall
not exceed 1 : 3. At intersections the forces acting in
the face plates are to be properly transmitted.

.3 For transmitting the acting forces the face

plates and webs are to be supported at their knuckles.
.4 For preventing the face plates from tripping
adequately spaced stiffeners or tripping brackets are
to be provided. The spacing of these tripping ele-
ments shall not exceed 12 ⋅ bf
.5 The webs are to be stiffened to prevent
buckling (see also C3.7.5).
.6 The location of lightening holes shall be
such that the distance from hole edge to face plate is
not less than 0,25 ⋅ web depth.
Fig. C3.7.1 Examples of spans of ordinary
stiffeners
S = scantling span of primary supporting mem-
bers [m], which can be reduced by one
third of sum of bracket length, if any
b = actual spacing of primary supporting mem-
bers
p = design pressure [kPa] calculated as defined
in C3.5
σam = permissible normal stress [MPa]

.7 In way of high shear stresses lightening
holes in the webs are to be avoided as far as possible.
In the following requirements for the scantlings of
hull structures (plating, stiffeners, primary supporting
members) are given. The loads acting on such struc-
tures are to be calculated in accordance with the pro-
visions of C3.5.
C3.7.2 Definitions and symbols
τam = permissible shear stress [MPa]
k = material factor defined in C3.2
e = ratio between permissible and actual hull
girder longitudinal bending stresses
= σp / σbl
σp = maximum permissible stress [MPa] as
defined in C3.7.3.1

The definitions and symbols used are the following σbl = longitudinal bending stress [MPa] as de-
ones: fined in C3.7.3.1
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures I - Part 3
Page 3–38 GL 2012

μ = defined as follows: .2 The compressive values of normal stresses

and the shear stresses are not to exceed the values of
2 critical stresses for plates and stiffeners calculated
⎛s⎞
= 1,1 − 0,5 ⋅ ⎜ ⎟ according to C3.7.5 and C3.7.6.
⎝ ⎠
.3 In general, the wet deck is to be constituted
which needs not be taken greater than 1,0 by continuous plating for its entire longitudinal and
transverse extension. Alternative solutions may,
C3.7.3 Overall strength however, be examined by GL on the basis of consid-
erations pertaining to the height of the wet deck
C3.7.3.1 Longitudinal strength above the waterline and to the motion characteristics
of the craft.
.1 In general, the scantlings resulting from
local strength calculations in the following are such .4 In the special case of catamaran, when the
as to ensure adequate longitudinal strength of the hull structure connecting both hulls is formed by a deck
girder for the craft with length less than or equal to with single plating stiffened by n reinforced beams,
24 m. the normal and shear stresses in the beams for the
load condition in C3.4.2.4 can be calculated as indi-
.2 Specific longitudinal strength calculations cated in C3.7.3.3.
are required for craft whose hull geometry suggests
significant bending moments in still water with the .5 For craft with L > 65 m or speed V > 45
craft at rest. knots, or for those craft whose structural arrange-
ments do not permit a realistic assessment of stress
.3 Longitudinal stress [MPa] at height z above conditions based on simple models, the transverse
the base line contributing to the craft longitudinal strength is to be checked by means of direct calcula-
strength is obtained from the following equation: tions carried out in accordance with the criteria speci-
fied in article C3.1.2.
M bl
σbl = ⋅ ( z - z0 ) ⋅ 10−3 C3.7.3.3 Transverse strength in the special case
Iy of catamaran craft when the structure
connecting both hulls is formed by a
Mbl = total bending moment [kNm] defined in deck with single plate stiffened by n
C3.4.1 or C3.4.2, reinforced beams over the deck

z0 = height of neutral axis above base line [m] .1 Referring to Figure C3.7.2, G is the centre of
the stiffnesses ri of the n beams. Its position is de-
Iy = moment of inertia [m4] related to the fined by:
transverse axis
∑ ri ⋅ x i
The values of stress σbl are not to exceed σp, with: a=
∑ ri
− steel structures:
a = abscissa [m] of the centre G with respect to an
σp = 150/k [MPa] arbitrarily chosen origin 0,
− aluminium alloy structures: ri = stiffness [N/m] of the beam i:
σp = 70/k [MPa] 12 ⋅ Ei ⋅ Ii
= ⋅106
S3i
.4 Moreover, the compressive values of σ are
not to exceed the values of critical stresses for plates
and stiffeners calculated according to C3.7.5 and Ei = Young’s modulus [MPa] of the beam i
C3.7.6. Ii = bending inertia [m4] of the beam i
C3.7.3.2 Transverse strength of catamaran Si = span [m] of the beam i between the inner
faces of the hulls
.1 The equivalent Von Mises stresses obtained
for load conditions in C3.4.2.3 and C3.4.3.2 are not xi = abscissa, in m, of the beam i with respect to
to exceed the following values: the origin 0
− steel structures: If Fi [N] is the force taken over by the beam i,
σp = 175/k [MPa] the deflection yi [m] of the hull in way of the
beam i, is:
− aluminium alloy structures: F ⋅ S3 ⋅10−6 Fi
yi = i i = = di ⋅ ω
σp = 75/k [MPa] 12 ⋅ Ei ⋅ Ii ri
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 3–39

di = abscissa [m] of the beam i in relation to G:
= xi – a
ω = rotation angle [rad] of one hull in relation to
the other around a transverse axis passing
through G
.2 The section modulus of ordinary stiffeners is
to be calculated in association with an effective width
of plating equal to the spacing of the stiffeners, with-
out exceeding 20 per cent of the span.
C3.7.4.2 Girders

.1 The effective width of plating em of frames

and girders may be determined according to Table
3.7.1 considering the type of loading.

Table C3.7.1 Effective width em of frames and

girders

/e 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
em1/e 0 0,36 0,64 0,82 0,91 0,96 0,98 1,00 1,0
em2/e 0 0,20 0,37 0,52 0,65 0,75 0,84 0,89 0,9

em1 is to be applied where girders are loaded

by uniformly distributed loads or else by
not less than 6 equally spaced single loads.
em2 is to be applied where girders are loaded
by 3 or less single loads.
Intermediate values may be obtained by direct
interpolation.

= length between zero-points of bending

moment curve, i.e. unsupported span in
Fig.C3.7.2
case of simply supported girders and 0,6 x
.2 From the transverse torsional moment (cf. unsupported span in case of constraint of
C3.4.2.4) Mtt = Fi ⋅ di 10-3, the formula for ω may be both ends of girders
obtained: e = width of plating supported, measured from
M tt centre to centre of the adjacent unsup-
ω= ⋅103 ported fields
2
∑ ri ⋅ di

.3 As Mtt , ri and di are known, ω is thus de-
duced, then the force Fi [N] the bending moment Mi
[N⋅m] and the corresponding normal and shear
stresses can be evaluated in each beam:
Fi = ω ⋅ ri ⋅ di
Mi = Fi ⋅ Si / 2
Note
Beams calculated by the above method are assumed
to be fixed in each hull as beams in way of bulkheads
inside hulls. For this hypothesis to be correct, the
beams are to extend over the whole breadth of both
hulls and their stiffness is to be kept the same over
the overall span inside and outside the hulls.
C3.7.4 Effective width of plating
C3.7.4.1 Stiffeners
.1 Generally, the spacing of stiffeners (secon-
dary members) may be taken as effective width of
plating.
Special calculations may be required for determining
the effective breadth of one-sided or non-symmetrical
flanges.
.2 The effective cross sectional area of plates is
not to be less than the cross sectional area of the face
plate.
.3 The effective width of stiffeners and girders
subjected to compressive stresses may be determined
according to C3.7.5, but is in no case to be taken
greater than the effective breadth determined by
C3.7.4.2.1.
C3.7.4.3 Cantilevers
Where cantilevers are fitted at every frame, the effec-
tive width of plating may be taken as the frame spac-
ing. Where cantilevers are fitted at a greater spacing
the effective width of plating at the respective cross
section may approximately be taken as the distance of
the cross section from the point on which the load is
acting, however, not greater than the spacing of the
cantilevers.
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures I - Part 3
Page 3–40 GL 2012

C3.7.5 Proof of buckling strength .2 This requirement may be waived in the case
of special arrangements for dry-docking of craft of
The buckling strength is to be proved according to unusual hull design in the opinion of GL.
the GL Rules Hull Structures (I-1-1), Section 3, F.
C3.7.7.3 Bottom shell and bilge plating
C3.7.6 Fatigue
The fatigue strength is to be proved according to the .1 The minimum required thickness is to satisfy
the requirements of the formula in C3.7.7.1 under the
GL Rules Hull Structures (I-1-1), Section 20.
following two conditions:
(a) p = impact pressure psl if occurring on the
bottom as defined in C3.5.3;
C3.7.7 Plating
σam = 235/k [MPa] for steel structures
C3.7.7.1 Formula
= 95/k [MPa] for aluminium al-
loy structures
.1 The thickness [mm] required for the pur-
poses of resistance to design pressure, is given by the (b) p = sea pressure ps as defined in C3.5.5;
formula:
σam = 185/k [MPa] for steel structures
p = 85/k [MPa] for aluminium al-
t = 22, 4 ⋅μ ⋅ s ⋅
σam loy structures

Pressure p [kPa] and permissible stress σam [MPa] .2 The thickness of bilge plating is not, in any
case, to be less than that of the bottom and side adja-
are defined in requirements stipulated in C3.7.7.3 to cent, whichever is greater.
C3.7.7.8 for the various parts of the hull.
.3 The thickness of plates connected to the
.2 Adequate provision is also to be made to stern frame, or in way of propeller shaft brackets, is
limit corrosion. In general, a corrosion allowance of to be at least 1,5 times the thickness of the adjacent
0,5 mm has been considered in the following formu- plating.
las. Steel plating of tanks, sea chests and chain lock-
ers are to be increased by an additional 0,5 mm.
.4 In craft fitted with a bow thruster, the thick-
ness of the connection with the housing of such pro-
.3 In addition, the thicknesses of plating are to peller is to be considered individually by GL.
be not less than the minimum values given in Table
C3.7.2, in general. .5 Sea intakes and other openings are to be well
rounded at the corners and located, as far as practica-
.4 Lesser thicknesses than given in Table ble, well clear of sharp edges.
C3.7.2 may be accepted provided that their adequacy
in relation to strength against buckling and collapse is C3.7.7.4 Plating of side shell and front walls
demonstrated to the satisfaction of GL.
.1 The minimum required thickness is given by
the formula in C3.7.7.1, assuming:
Table C3.7.2
p = sea pressure ps as defined in C3.5.5, for side
Minimum shell plating
Element
thickness [mm]
= sea pressure psf as defined in C3.5.6, for front
Shell plating:
wall plating
− Bottom shell plating 1,35 ⋅ L1/3 ≥ 2,5
− Side shell plating and wet 1,15 ⋅ L1/3 ≥ 2,5 σam = 185/k [MPa] for steel structures
deck plating
= 85/k [MPa] for aluminium alloy struc-
Deck plating 2,5 tures
Bulkhead plating 2,5
.2 The thickness of the sheerstrake is to be not
Deckhouse side shell plating 2,5 less than that of the side or stringer plate.

3 At the ends of deckhouses, the thickness of

the sheerstrake is to be suitably increased.
C3.7.7.2 Keel
.4 Where side scuttles or windows or other
.1 The thickness of keel plating is to be not less openings are located on the sheerstrake, the thickness
than that required for adjacent bottom plating. is to be increased to compensate for the openings.
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 3–41

c = 1,20 - 0,40 f/F

C3.7.7.5 Plating of wet deck and internal sides
of catamaran for the aspect ratio b/s ≥ 2,5:

.1 The minimum required thickness for the wet for the range 0 < f/F < 0,3:
deck plating is given by the formula in C3.7.7.1,
assuming: f⎛ f ⎞
c = 2,0 - ⎜ 5, 2 − 7, 2 ⎟
F⎝ F⎠
(a) p = impact pressure psl as defined in C3.5.4;
σam = 235/k [MPa] for steel structures for the range 0,3 ≤ f/F ≤ 1,0:
= 95/k [MPa] for aluminium alloy c = 1,20 - 0,517 f/F
structures
For intermediate values of b/s the factor c is to be
(b) p = sea pressure ps as defined in C3.5.5; obtained by direct interpolation.

σam = 185/k [MPa] for steel structures f = print area of wheel or group of wheels
= 85/k [MPa] for aluminium alloy F = area of plate panel s ⋅ b according to Fig.
structures C3.7.3
.2 Moreover, the thickness of internal sides, s = width of smaller side of plate panel (in gen-
may be intermediate between that of the bottom of eral beam spacing)
hulls and the bottom of the wet deck. In any case, it is
b = width of larger side of plate panel
to be no less than that required in C3.7.7.4 for exter-
nal sides. F need not be taken greater than 2,5 s2
C3.7.7.6 Deck plating In case of narrowly spaced wheels these may be
grouped together to one wheel print area.
.1 The minimum required thickness is given by
the formula in C3.7.7.1, assuming:
p = deck pressure pd as defined in C3.5.8;

σam = 185/k [MPa] for steel structures

= 85/k [MPa] for aluminium alloy
structures
v
The thickness of areas of watertight decks or flats
forming steps in watertight bulkheads or the top or
the bottom of a tank is also to comply with the provi-
b
sions of C3.7.11 and C3.7.12.

.2 Thickness of decks for wheel loading Fig. C3.7.3

.2.1 The thickness of deck plating for wheel

loading is to be determined by the following formula: .2.2 Where the wheel print area is not known, it
may approximately be determined as follows:
t = c ⋅ fM (P ⋅ k) 0,5 [mm]
f = 100 ⋅ P/p [cm2]
P = static load [kN] of one wheel or group of
wheels on a plate panel s ⋅ b considering the p = specific wheel pressure according
acceleration factor (1 + 0,4 av), av defined in
Section C3.3 .2.3 In deck beams and girders, the stress is not
to exceed 165/k [MPa] for steel structures or 75/k
fM = 1,0 for steel [MPa] for aluminium structures respectively.
= 1,46 for aluminium
C3.7.7.8 Plating of deckhouse walls
c = factor according to the following formulae:
.1 The minimum required thickness is given by
for the aspect ratio b/s = 1: the formula in C3.7.7.1, assuming:
for the range 0 < f/F < 0,3:
p = sea pressure psu as defined in C3.5.7;
f⎛ f⎞
c = 1,87 - ⎜ 3, 4 − 4, 4 ⎟ σam = 185/k [MPa] for steel structures
F⎝ F⎠
= 85/k [MPa] for aluminium alloy struc-
for the range 0,3 ≤ f/F ≤ 1,0: tures
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures I - Part 3
Page 3–42 GL 2012

.2 Openings (doors, windows) are to be well and the thickness of the face plate is to be not less
rounded at the corners. than 1/15 of its width.

.3 Where there is no access from inside deck-
houses to ’tween-decks below or where one of the
boundary walls concerned is in a particularly shel-
tered position, reduced scantlings compared with
those above may be accepted, at the discretion of GL.
C3.7.8 Ordinary stiffeners
C3.7.8.1 General
.1 In the following the requirements are given
to be complied with for ordinary stiffeners of the
bottom, sides, decks and, for catamaran, the wet deck
and internal sides.
.5 For aluminium alloy stiffeners, the web
thickness is to be not less than:
− 1/15 of the depth, for flat bars
− 1/35 of the depth, for other sections
and the thickness of the face plate is to be not less
than 1/20 of its width.
.6 In general, the resistant weld section Aw
2
[cm ] connecting the ordinary stiffeners to the web of
primary members, is not to be less than:
A w = ϕ ⋅ p ⋅ s ⋅ ⋅ k ⋅10−3

.2 The section modulus Z [cm3] and the shear

ϕ = coefficient as indicated in Table C3.7.5
area At [cm2] required for the purpose of supporting
the design pressure transmitted by the plating, are p = design pressure [kPa] acting on the secondary
given by the following formulae: stiffeners, defined below for various hull re-
gions
2
⋅s⋅ p
Z = 1000 ⋅ s = spacing of ordinary stiffeners [m]
m ⋅ σam
= span of ordinary stiffeners [m]
⋅s⋅p
At = 5 ⋅ k = greatest material factor of ordinary stiffener
τam
and primary member, defined in C3.2
where m is a coefficient depending on the type of
stiffener. The values of m are indicated in Table Table C3.7.5 Coefficient ϕ
C3.7.4.
Aluminium
The pressure p [kPa] and allowable stresses σam and Case Weld
alloy
Steel
τam [MPa] are defined in C3.7.8.2 to C3.7.8.6 for the Parallel to the reaction
various regions of the hull. 1 exerted on primary 200 100
member
Table C3.7.4 Coefficient m Perpendicular to the
2 reaction exerted on 160 75
Type of stiffener m primary member
Continuous stiffeners 12
Non-continuous stiffeners and without .7 For aluminium alloys, when calculating the
8
brackets at the end of span resistant connecting weld section, the fillet weld
length de [mm] is determined as follows (see cases 1
and 2 in Table C3.7.5):
.3 These formulae are valid for stiffeners
whose web is perpendicular to the plating, or forms case 1 : de = l - 10,
an angle to the plating of less than 15°.
where l is the length of the weld [mm]
In the case of stiffeners whose web forms an angle
α > 15° to the perpendicular to the plating, the re- case 2 : for extruded T stiffeners, the lesser of:
quired modulus and shear area may be obtained from de = b - 10 and de = 4 t,
the same formulae, dividing the values of Z and At by
cos (α). where b [mm] is the flange width of the ordinary
stiffener and t [mm] is the web thickness of the pri-
.4 For steel stiffeners, the web thickness is to mary member.
be not less than:
C3.7.8.2 Bottom and bilge stiffeners
− 1/18 of the depth, for flat bars
.1 Both single and double bottoms are gener-
− 1/50 of the depth, for other sections ally to be longitudinally framed.
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 3–43

.2 The section modulus, shear area and welding For side stiffeners contributing to the longitudinal
section required for bottom and bilge stiffeners are strength:
given by the formulae in C3.7.8.1, assuming:
(a) p = impact pressure psl if occurring on the − steel structures:
bottom as defined in C3.5.3;
σam = 150 CS/k [MPa]
For steel structures:
σam = 150/k [MPa] τam = 90/k [MPa]
τam = 90/k [MPa]
− aluminium alloy structures:
For aluminium alloy structures:
σam = 70/k [MPa] σam = 70 CA/k [MPa]

τam = 45/k [MPa] τam = 45/k [MPa]

(b) p = sea pressure ps as defined in C3.5.5; For side stiffeners not contributing to the longitudinal
For stiffeners contributing to the longitudinal strength and front wall stiffeners:
strength:
− steel structures:
− steel structures:
σam = 150 CS/k [MPa] σam = 150/k [MPa]
τam = 90/k [MPa]
τam = 90/k [MPa]
− aluminium alloy structures:
σam = 70 CA/k [MPa] − aluminium alloy structures:

τam = 45/k [MPa] σam = 70/k [MPa]

For stiffeners not contributing to the longitudinal
strength: τam = 45/k [MPa]
− steel structures:
where CS and CA are given by Table C3.7.6.
σam = 150/k [MPa]
τam = 90/k [MPa] C3.7.8.4 Stiffeners of wet deck and internal
sides of catamaran
− aluminium alloy structures:
σam = 70/k [MPa] .1 The section modulus, shear area and welding
section required for bottom stiffeners of the wet deck
τam = 45/k [MPa]
are given by the formulae in C3.7.8.1, assuming:
where CS and CA are given by Table C3.7.6.
(a) p = impact pressure psl if occurring on the bot-
.3 Bottom longitudinals are preferably continu- tom as defined in C3.5.4;
ous through the transverse elements. Where they are
interrupted at a transverse watertight bulkhead, con-
tinuous brackets are to be positioned through the For steel structures:
bulkhead so as to connect the ends of longitudinals.
σam = 180/k [MPa]
C3.7.8.3 Side and front wall stiffeners
.1 The section modulus, shear area and welding τam = 90/k [MPa]
section are given by the formulae in C3.7.8.1, assum-
ing: For aluminium alloy structures:
p = sea pressure ps as defined in C3.5.5, for side
stiffeners σam = 85/k [MPa]
= sea pressure psf as defined in C3.5.6, for front
wall stiffeners τam = 45/k [MPa]
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures I - Part 3
Page 3–44 GL 2012

(b) p = sea pressure ps as defined in C3.5.5; For side stiffeners not contributing to the longitudinal
strength:
For stiffeners contributing to the longitudinal
strength:
− steel structures:
− steel structures:
σam = 150/k [MPa]
σam = 150 CS/k [MPa]
τam = 90/k [MPa] τam = 90/k [MPa]
− aluminium alloy structures:
− aluminium alloy structures:
σam = 70 CA/k [MPa]
τam = 45/k [MPa] σam = 70/k [MPa]
For stiffeners not contributing to the longitudinal
strength: τam = 45/k [MPa]

− steel structures:
where CS and CA are given by Table C3.7.6.
σam = 150/k [MPa]
τam = 90/k [MPa] .2 Where longitudinals are interrupted in way
of watertight bulkheads or reinforced transverse
− aluminium alloy structures:
structures, the continuity of the structure is to be
σam = 70/k [MPa] maintained by means of brackets penetrating the
transverse element. GL may allow double brackets
τam = 45/k [MPa] welded to the transverse element, provided that spe-
where CS and CA are given by Table C3.7.6. cial provision is made for the alignment of longitudi-
nals.
.2 Internal side stiffeners may have characteris-
tics intermediate between those of the bottom of the
hull and those of the bottom of the wet deck. In any C3.7.8.6 Stiffeners of boundary walls of deck-
case, such characteristics are not to be less than those houses
required in C3.7.8.3 for external sides.
.1 The section modulus, shear area and welding
C3.7.8.5 Deck stiffeners section are given by the formulae in C3.7.8.1, assum-
.1 The section modulus, shear area and welding ing:
section are given by the formulae in C3.7.8.1, assum-
ing: p = sea pressure psu as defined in C3.5.7
p = deck pressure pd as defined in C3.5.8
− steel structures:
For stiffeners contributing to the longitudinal
strength: σam = 150/k [MPa]
− steel structures:
σam = 150 CS/k [MPa] τam = 90/k [MPa]

τam = 90/k [MPa]

− aluminium alloy structures:
− aluminium alloy structures:
σam = 70/k [MPa]
σam = 70 CA/k [MPa]
τam = 45/k [MPa] τam = 45/k [MPa]
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 3–45

Table C3.7.6 Coefficient CS and CA

Steel structures Aluminium alloy structure

L x/L
CS 1 CA 1
L ≤ 24 m 0 ≤ x/L ≤ 1 1 1
1 1
L > 24 m 2 0 ≤ x/L ≤ 1 1, 4 − 1,3 −
e e
x/L < 1 1 1
⎛ 1⎞ ⎛ x ⎞ ⎛ 1⎞ ⎛ x ⎞
0,1 < x/L ≤ 0,3 1 + 0,5 ⋅ ⎜ 0, 4 − ⎟ ⋅ ⎜ 10 ⋅ −1⎟ 1 + 0,5 ⋅ ⎜ 0,3 − ⎟ ⋅ ⎜10 ⋅ −1⎟
⎝ e⎠ ⎝ L ⎠ ⎝ e⎠ ⎝ L ⎠
Alternative
1 1
method for 0,3 < x/L < 0,7 1, 4 − 1,3 −
24 m < L ≤ 65 m 3 e e
⎛ 1⎞ ⎛ x ⎞ ⎛ 1⎞ ⎛ x ⎞
0,7 ≤ x/L ≤ 0,9 1 − 0,5 ⋅ ⎜ 0, 4 − ⎟ ⋅ ⎜10 ⋅ − 9 ⎟ 1 − 0,5 ⋅ ⎜ 0,3 − ⎟ ⋅ ⎜10 ⋅ − 9 ⎟
⎝ e⎠ ⎝ L ⎠ ⎝ e⎠ ⎝ L ⎠
0,9 < x/L ≤ 1 1 1
1 In these formulae, the values of C and C are to be taken less than or equal to 1.
S A
2 The ratio e is to be calculated at the location x, on basis of bending moments distribution defined in C3.4.1 and C3.4.2.
3 The ratio e is to be calculated at the section comprised between 0,3 ⋅ L and 0,7 ⋅ L at which e takes the highest value.

.2 Any front or side wall vertical stiffeners of .3 The section modulus Z [cm3] and shear area
first tier deckhouses are to be connected, by means of 2
At [cm ] required to support the design pressure
brackets at the ends, to strengthening structures for transmitted by the ordinary stiffeners are given by the
decks or adjacent sides. following formulae:
S2 ⋅ b ⋅ p
.3 In general, reinforced stiffeners are to be Z = 1000 ⋅
fitted on the edges of large openings in the plating. m ⋅ σam
They are to be scarphed into the area outside of open-
ings. The openings for doors are, in general, to be S⋅ b ⋅ p
At = 5 ⋅
stiffened all the way round. τam

m = coefficient which depends on support condi-

C3.7.9 Primary supporting members tions at the ends of the girder span, generally
assumed to be:
C3.7.9.1 General = 10, in general
= 8, if one end condition is to be regarded as
.1 In the following the requirements are given simply supported, at least
to be complied with for primary supporting members
of the bottom, sides, decks and, for catamaran, the = 12, if the bending stiffness of both supporting
wet deck. structures are considerably higher than for this
girder
.2 The primary supporting members (floors, The pressure p [kPa] and allowable stresses σam and
frames, beams) are to form continuous transverse τam [MPa] are defined in C3.7.9.2 to C3.7.9.6 for
frames. In general, the stiffened frame spacing [mm] various parts of the hull.
is not to exceed:
.4 The above formulae are applicable where
1200 + 10 ⋅ L reinforced structures are not of the grillage type.
Otherwise, the scantlings of reinforced structures are
without being greater than 2 m. to be stipulated by means of direct calculations per-
formed on the basis of criteria agreed upon with GL.
Primary supporting members with spacing other than .5 The section modulus of primary supporting
that defined above may be required for specific parts members is to be calculated in association with an
of the hull (e.g. machinery space, under pillars), as attached plating, according to criteria according to
stipulated in the provisions below. C3.7.4 to C3.7.6.
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures I - Part 3
Page 3–46 GL 2012

.6 For steel stiffeners, the following geometric
ratios are to be satisfied:
− The web thickness is to be not less than 1/80 of
web depth.
− The face plate thickness is to be not less than 1/30
of face plate breadth (1/15 for face plates which
are not symmetrical with respect to the web).
.7 For aluminium stiffeners, the following
geometric ratios are to be satisfied, where the com-
pressive stress is not known:
− The web thickness is to be not less than 1/35 of
web depth.
where CS and CA are given by Table C3.7.6.
.2 Floors are to be positioned in way of side
and deck transverses. Intermediate floors may also be
fitted provided that they are adequately connected at
the ends.
.3 Manholes and other openings are not to be
located at the ends of floor or girder spans, unless
shear stress checks are carried out in such areas.
.4 Floors are to be fitted in machinery spaces,
generally at every frame, and additional stiffeners are
to be provided at bottom in way of machinery and
pillars.

− The face plate thickness is to be not less than 1/20 .5 In way of main machinery seatings, girders
of face plate breadth (1/10 for face plates which are to be positioned extending from the bottom to the
are not symmetrical with respect to the web). foundation plate of main engines.

.8 Particular attention is to be paid to compres- .6 A girder is, generally, to be fitted centreline

sive buckling strength of associated plating of trans- for dry-docking. The height of such a girder is to be
verse primary members. not less than that of floors amidships and the thick-
ness less than the value t [mm] obtained from the
C3.7.9.2 Floors and girders of single bottom formula:
.1 The section modulus and shear area are t = ( 0, 05 ⋅ L + 2 ) ⋅ k 0,5 for steel
given by the formulae in C3.7.9.1 for the following
two conditions: = ( 0, 07 ⋅ L + 2,5 ) ⋅ k 0,5 for aluminium alloys
(a) p = impact pressure psl if occurring on the bottom In hulls with a longitudinally framed bottom and
as defined in C3.5.3; width B > 8 m, side girders are also to be positioned
For steel structures: in such a way as to divide the floor span into ap-
proximately equal parts. In catamaran, B is to be
σam = 150/k [MPa] taken as the width of a single-hull. The thickness of
the web may be assumed to be equal to that of the
τam = 90/k [MPa] centre girder less 1 mm, and the area of the face plate
For aluminium alloy structures: may be reduced to 60 % of that of the centre girder.
Where side girders are intended to support floors, a
σam = 70/k [MPa] structural check of their scantlings is to be carried out
as deemed necessary by GL.
τam = 45/k [MPa]

(b) p = sea pressure ps as defined in C3.5.5; C3.7.9.3 Primary supporting members of sides
and front walls
− steel floors:
.1 The section modulus and shear area are
σam = 150/k [MPa] given by the formulae in C3.7.9.1, assuming:
τam = 90/k [MPa] p = sea pressure psf as defined in C3.5.5, for primary
− aluminium alloy floors: members of side
σam = 70/k [MPa] = sea pressure psf as defined in C3.5.6, for primary
members of front walls
τam = 45/k [MPa]
− steel structures:
− steel girders:
σam = 150 CS/k [MPa] σam = 150/k - σa [MPa]

τam = 90/k [MPa] τam = 90/k [MPa]

− aluminium alloy girders: − aluminium alloy structures:

σam = 70 CA/k [MPa] σam = 70/k - σa [MPa]
τam = 45/k [MPa] τam = 45/k [MPa]
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 3–47

σa being the stress induced by the normal force in − steel deck girders:
side transverses due to deck loads transmitted by
σam = 150 CS/k [MPa]
deck beams.
τam = 90/k [MPa]
C3.7.9.4 Primary supporting members of the
wet deck and internal sides of catama- − aluminium alloy deck girders:
ran
σam = 70 CA/k [MPa]
.1 The required section modulus and shear area τam = 45/k [MPa]
are given by the formulae in C3.7.9.1 for the follow-
ing two conditions: where CS and CA are given by Table C3.7.6.
(a)
.2 When there are concentrated loads of sig-
p = impact pressure psl as defined in C3.5.4: nificant magnitude (e.g. transmitted by pillars or
other primary members or due to the carriage of ve-
− steel structures: hicles), deck girders are to be adequately strength-
ened.
σam = 180/k [MPa]
τam = 90/k [MPa] C3.7.9.6 Primary supporting members of deck-
house boundary walls
− aluminium alloy structures: .1 The section modulus and shear area are
σam = 85/k [MPa] given by the formulae in C3.7.9.1, assuming:

τam = 45/k [MPa] p = sea pressure psu as defined in C3.5.7

Additional intermediate frames are to be provided − steel structures:

forward of 0,8L. The required section modulus and σam = 150/k [MPa]
shear area is not to be less than 70 % of the required
values according to the slamming pressure consider- τam = 90/k [MPa]
ing the main frame spacing.
− aluminium alloy structures:
(b)
σam = 70/k [MPa]
p = sea pressure pd as defined in C3.5.8
τam = 45/k [MPa]
− steel structures:
C3.7.10 Pillars
σam = 150/k [MPa]
.1 General
τam = 90/k [MPa]
.1.1 Structural members at heads and heels of
− aluminium alloy structures: pillars as well as substructures are to be con-
structed according to the forces they are sub-
σam = 70/k [MPa] jected to.
τam = 45/k [MPa] Where pillars are affected by tension loads
doublings are not permitted.
C3.7.9.5 Primary supporting members of decks
.1.2 Pillars in tanks are to be checked for tension.
.1 The required section modulus and shear area Tubular pillars are not permitted in tanks for
are given by the formulae in C3.7.9.1 for the follow- flammable liquids.
ing two conditions:
.1.3 For structural elements of the pillars' trans-
p = deck pressure pd as defined in C3.5.8 verse section, sufficient buckling strength ac-
cording to C3.7.5 has to be verified. The wall
− steel deck transverses: thickness of tubular pillars which may be ex-
pected to be damaged during loading and
σam = 150/k [MPa] unloading operations is not to be less than:
τam = 90/k [MPa] t w = 4,5 + 0,015 da [mm] for da ≤ 300 mm
− aluminium alloy deck transverses:
= 0,03 da [mm] for da > 300 mm
σam = 70/k [MPa]
.1.4 Pillars also loaded by bending moments have
τam = 45/k [MPa] to be specially considered.
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures I - Part 3
Page 3–48 GL 2012

.2 Scantlings Is = minimum moment of inertia [cm4] of the

The sectional area of pillars is not to be less than: pillar cross section

Ps A = sectional area of the pillar [cm2]

As req = 10 ⋅ [cm 2 ]
σp ds = pillar diameter [cm]

σp = permissible compressive stress [MPa] da = outside diameter of pillar [cm]

κ di = inside diameter of pillar [cm]

= ⋅ R eH
S'
C3.7.11 Bulkhead Structures
S' = safety factor
.1 Proof of buckling strength of longitudinal
= 2,00 in general and transverse bulkhead structures is to be carried out
= 1,66 in accommodation area, for steel pil- according to C3.7.5. For longitudinal bulkheads the
lar, only global design stresses and the stresses due to local
loads are to be considered.
κ = reduction factor
C3.7.11.1 Plating
1
=
φ + φ2 − λs2 .1 The thickness of the bulkhead plating [mm]
is not to be less than:
φ = 0,5 ⎡1 + n p ( λs - λ0 ) + λs2 ⎤
⎣ ⎦ psb
t = 22, 4 ⋅ f m ⋅μ ⋅ s ⋅
for steel: σam

λ0 = 0,2 fm = coefficient depending on the material

np = 0,34 for tubular and rectangular pillars = 0,75 for steel structures
= 0,49 for open sections = 0,70 for aluminium alloy structures
for aluminium without heat treatment (i.e. 5000 se- psb = design pressure [kPa] as defined in
ries): C3.5.6
λ0 = 0,0 σam = 235/k [MPa] for steel structures
np = 0,32 = 95/k [MPa] for aluminium alloy
structures
for aluminium with heat treatment (i.e. 6000 series):
λ0 = 0,1 .2 The stern tube bulkhead is to be provided
with a strengthened plate in way of the stern tube.
np = 0,20
.3 In areas where concentrated loads due to
λs = degree of slenderness of the pillar ship manoeuvres at terminals may be expected, the
buckling strength of bulkhead plate fields directly
s R eH attached to the side shell, is to be examined.
= ≥ λ0
is ⋅π E
C3.7.11.2 Stiffeners and girders
ls = length of the pillar [cm]
.1 The required scantlings of stiffeners and
ReH = nominal yield point or Rp0,2 for aluminium
girders are determined according to strength calcula-
alloy [MPa] tions, by applying the following permissible stress
E = Young’s modulus [MPa] values :

is = minimum radius of gyration [cm] of the − for steel structures:

pillar cross section
σam = 200/k [MPa]
I
= τam = 120/k [MPa]
A
σvM = 220/k [MPa]
= 0,25 ds for solid pillars of circular cross
section − for aluminium alloy structures:
= 0,25 (da2 + di2)0,5 for tubular pillars σam = 90/k [MPa]
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 3–49

τam = 55/k [MPa] fm = coefficient depending on the material

σvM = 95/k [MPa] = 0,80 for steel structures
= 0,75 for aluminium alloy structures
.2 The buckling strength of the webs is to be pt = design pressure [kPa] as taken the maxi-
checked according to C3.7.5 mum value of pt1 and pt2, as defined in
.3 Bulkhead stiffeners cut in way of watertight C3.5.7.7
doors are to be supported by carlings or stiffeners. σam = 185/k [MPa] for steel structures
.4 In areas with cut-outs secondary bending of σam = 85/k [MPa] for aluminium alloy struc-
the plate strips beneath the cut-out shall be taken into tures
account for girders.
The corrosion allowance tk for steel plates is not less
C3.7.11.3 Corrugated Bulkheads than 0,5 mm, for aluminium plates tk = 0 mm.

.1 The plate thickness of corrugated bulkheads .3 Stiffeners and girders

is not to be less than required according to C3.7.11.1
The required scantlings of stiffeners and girders are
For the spacing s [m] the greater one of the values b determined according to strength calculations, by
or c according to C3.7.11.3.3 is to be taken. applying the following permissible stress values :
– if subjected to load pt1:
.2 The section modulus of a corrugated bulk-
head element is to be determined according to steel structures
C3.7.11.2.
σam = 150/k [MPa]
.3 The actual section modulus [cm3]
of a cor- τam = 90/k [MPa]
rugated bulkhead element is to be assessed according
to the following formula: σvM = 180/k [MPa]
Wc = d ⋅ t ⋅ (3 ⋅ b + c) / 6000 aluminium alloy structures:
where the symbols are as shown in Figure C3.7.6 and σam = 70/k [MPa]
are expressed in mm. In no case is the angle ϕ to be
less than 45°. τam = 45/k [MPa]

b
σvM = 85/k [MPa]

– if subjected to load p t2:

t steel structures
c

j σam = 180/k [MPa]

τam = 115/k [MPa]

s
σvM = 200/k [MPa]
Fig. C3.7.6 aluminium alloy structures:

C3.7.12 Tank Structures σam = 80/k [MPa]

.1 General τam = 50/k [MPa]

If the boundaries of tanks are formed by integrated σvM = 90/k [MPa]
structural elements of the ship, their dimensioning
has to follow the definitions in the sections for the The buckling strength of the webs is to be checked
relevant parts. The requirements of this section have according to C3.7.5
to be observed additionally.
C3.7.13 Bow, Shell Side and Stern Doors
For independent tanks the minimum thickness is 2,5
mm in general. C3.7.13.1 Plating
.2 Plating .1 The required thickness, in mm, is given by
the following formula:
The plate thickness, in mm, is not to be less than:
pt ps
t = 22, 4 ⋅ f m ⋅μ ⋅ s ⋅ + tk t = 22, 4 ⋅μ ⋅ s ⋅
σam σam
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures I - Part 3
Page 3–50 GL 2012

ps = design pressure [kPa] as defined in C3.8 Fibre-reinforced Plastic Craft

C3.5.5.2.1,
C3.8.1 General
σam = 185/k [MPa] for steel structures The subsequent requirements are applicable under the
following conditions, which are subject to up-
= 85/k [MPa] for aluminium alloy struc- date/amendment:
tures
− Loads and design pressures are of “maximum
C3.7.13.2 Ordinary stiffeners service loads” character, as defined in relevant
GL Rules. Possible reductions on particularly
.1 The section modulus, shear area and welding “rare loading” scenarios such as pressure loading
section required for ordinary stiffeners are given by on watertight bulkheads have not been imple-
the formulae in C3.7.8.1, assuming: mented and yet should be handled case by case.
− The following methodology typically applies to
p = design pressure ps as defined in C3.5.5.2.1, orthogonal structured components with a clear hi-
erarchy of structural members. Where this condi-
m = coefficient depending on the type of stiffener tion is not fulfilled, more comprehensive investi-
and support conditions at the ends of the gations will have to apply, e.g. grillage analysis.
stiffener span, to be taken according to Table
C3.7.4, − The orthogonal structured components are as-
sumed to have constant structural and material
– steel structures: properties along their length, respectively. If this
is not the case, the locations of highest bending
σam= 150/k [MPa] moment and shear force can vary from the gen-
eral assumptions within this section and thus need
τam= 90/k [MPa] to be treated specifically (e.g. stiffener or girder
with varying height or laminate).
– aluminium alloy structures:
C3.8.2 Elasto-mechanical properties of lami-
σam= 70/k [MPa] nated structures

τam= 45/k [MPa] C3.8.2.1 Nomenclature:

C3.7.13.3 Primary members, securing and sup-
porting devices
.1 The scantlings of the primary members, secur-
ing and supporting devices of side shell doors and
stern doors are to be determined to withstand the
design loads defined in C3.5.5.2.2 and C3.5.5.2.3,
using the following permissible stresses, where k is
the material factor defined in C3.2.2 for steel (not to
be taken less than 0,72) or in C3.2.3.3 for aluminium
alloys:
σam = bending stress
= 120/k [MPa] for steel structures
= 55/k [MPa] for aluminium alloy struc-
tures
τam = shear stress
ψ = mass content of reinforcing material in
a laminate
ϕ = volume content of reinforcement mate-
rial in a laminate
E11 = Young’s modulus of a single ply with
unidirectional fibres, parallel to fibres
E22 = Young’s modulus of a single ply with
unidirectional fibres, perpendicular to
fibres
ν12, ν21 = Poisson’s ratios of a single ply
G12 = shear modulus of a single ply
ρf = specific gravity of fibre material
ρm = specific gravity of matrix material
EfL = Young’s modulus of fibre in fibre direc-
tion

= 80/k [MPa] for steel structures EfT = Young’s modulus of fibre transverse to
fibre direction
= 35/k [MPa] for aluminium alloy struc-
Em = Young’s modulus of matrix
tures
νf12 = Poisson’s ratio of fibre
σvM = 150/k [MPa] for steel structures
νm = Poisson’s ratio of resin
= 70/k [MPa] for aluminium alloy struc-
tures Gm = shear modulus of the matrix
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 3–51

Gf = shear modulus of the fibre Y 2

Q X
Ex = Young’s modulus of a ply, multiply or
laminate in x-direction of global lami- Q
nate co-ordinate system
1
Ey = Young’s modulus of a ply, multiply or
laminate in y-direction of global lami-
nate co-ordinate system Fig. C3.8.1 Local single ply and global laminate
Gxy = shear modulus of a ply, multiply or coordinate systems
laminate in xy-direction of global lami-
nate co-ordinate system C3.8.2.2 Basic single ply analysis

Θ = angle of inclination/transformation .1 Fibre content by volume

from local ply coordinate system (1, 2
coordinates) to global laminate coordi- The fibre volume fraction of a laminate is determined
nate system (x, y coordinates), see Fig. by the formula:
3.8.1 ψ
ϕ=
ρf
laminate = is a general expression for a structural ψ + (1 − ψ ) ⋅
unity, a composition of structural fibres, ρm
laid down in a polymer matrix. A lami-
nate may contain a sandwich core or The thickness ti,ply of a single ply is then derived as:
other constituents for achieving certain
1 1 − ψi
mechanical purposes. t i,ply = mfi ⋅ ( + )
ρf ψi ⋅ρm
layer types:
mfi = single ply areal weight of fibre reinforce-
ply = In the definition of these Rules, a ply is
ments
one laminated layer containing fibre re-
inforcements aligned in one direction ψi = fibre mass fraction of single ply
only (unidirectional) or one layer of iso-
tropic or quasi-isotropic material .2 Basic ply stiffness properties
(CSM)
A single unidirectional laminated ply consists of long
multiply = A multiply is consisting of a limited fibres, oriented in one direction, embedded in a poly-
number of plies of different alignments meric matrix. Typical fibre materials are E-glass,
(e.g. laminated fabrics, such as bi-axial, aramid or carbon. Representative material properties
tri-axial, quad-axial, in woven or of fibre and matrix materials can be found in Table
stiched arrangement, or as pre-preg). C3.8.1.

Table C3.8.1 Constituent materials properties

Fibres Matrices

E-Glass Aramid HS Carbon HM Carbon Polyester Epoxy

Specific gravity [g/cm3] 2,54 1,44 1,74 1,81 1,2 1,2

parallel to
[MPa] 73000 124000 230000 392000
Young’s fibres
3000 3600
Modulus perpendicular
[MPa] 73000 6900 28000 15000
to fibres

Shear Modulus [MPa] 30000 2800 50000 28600 1140 1330

Poisson’s ratio − 0,18 0,36 0,23 0,20 0,316 0,35

Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures I - Part 3
Page 3–52 GL 2012

The following values are derived for plies contain- .1 Stiffness matrix of single ply in local co-
ing unidirectional fibres. From those, the properties ordinate system
of multiaxially aligned laminated plies may be de-
rived, see C3.8.2.1.3 and C3.8.2.1.4. Chopped strand The components of the stiffness matrix are deter-
mats are considered separately in C3.8.2.1.5. mined for an orthotropic ply, which is part of a non-
woven or woven fabric and are calculated as follows:
a) Longitudinal Young´s modulus:
E11 = ϕ ⋅ EfL + (1 − ϕ) ⋅ E m E11
Q11 =
(1 − ν12 ⋅ ν 21 )
b) Transverse Young´s modulus:

Em 1 + 0.85 ⋅ ϕ2 ν 21 ⋅ E11
E 22 = ⋅ Q12 =
Em (1 − ν12 ⋅ ν 21 )
1 − ν m 2 (1 − ϕ)1.25 + ϕ ⋅
EfT ⋅ (1 − ν m 2 )
E 22
c) Poisson´s ratios: Q22 =
(1 − ν12 ⋅ ν 21 )
ν12 = ϕ ⋅ νf12 + (1 − ϕ) ⋅ ν m
Q33 = G12 ⋅ a
E
ν 21 = ν12 ⋅ 22
E11 Q21 = Q12

d) Shear modulus: Q = Stiffness matrix of orthotropic layer in local

0.8 ply coordinate system
1 + 0.8 ⋅ ϕ
G12 = G m ⋅
G
(1 − ϕ)1.25 + m ⋅ ϕ a = 1.0 for a non-woven fabric
G f12
= 1.2 for satin (1×8 or 1×6) weave style fabrics
Em
Gm =
2 ⋅ (1 + ν m )
= 1.5 for twill (2×2, 3×1, 4×4) weave style
fabrics
.3 Stiffness properties of chopped strand
mat
= 2.0 for plain (1×1) weave style fabrics
The Young’s modulus of a chopped strand mat
(CSM) laminate can be calculated as: Stiffness matrix components Q for chopped strand
mat (CSM) are to be derived using the above equa-
3 5 tions, too, where:
E CSM = ⋅ E11 + ⋅ E 22
8 8
E11 = E22 = ECSM
E CSM
G CSM =
2 ⋅ (1 + νCSM ) ν12 = ν21 = 0,28
with E11 and E22 determined like for a basic single
G12 = GCSM
unidirectional layer with fibre volume content appro-
priate for CSM.
.2 Angle transformation for single unidirec-
C3.8.2.3 Single ply stiffness tional ply stiffnesses to global coordinate
system
The representative stiffness values for a single ply
that is part of a multiply fabric or a laminate is de- The following formulae are used to transform elasto-
rived in three steps. Firstly the stiffness matrix Q is mechanical properties found in C3.8.2.3.1 for a uni-
computed for each ply from its engineering constants directional laminated ply in the local 1, 2 coordinate
in the local coordinate system (ref. C3.8.2.3.1). In a system to the global x, y coordinate system by an in-
second step, the stiffness matrix Q is transformed to
plane polar transformation of angle “Θ”.
the global coordinate system, resulting in the trans-
formed stiffness matrix Q´ (ref. C3.8.2.3.2). From
this, the engineering constants of each ply in the Q11' = Q11 ⋅ cos 4 Θ + 2 ⋅ (Q12 + 2 ⋅ Q33)
global laminate coordinate system are determined in
a third step (see C3.8.2.4). ⋅ sin 2 Θ ⋅ cos 2 Θ + Q22 ⋅ sin 4 Θ
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 3–53

Q22 ' = Q11 ⋅ sin 4 Θ + 2 ⋅ (Q12 + 2 ⋅ Q33) n

A23L =A32= ∑ Q23'i ⋅ t i
⋅ sin 2 Θ ⋅ cos 2 Θ + Q22 ⋅ cos 4 Θ i=1

n
Q23' = Q32 ' = (Q22 − Q12 − 2 ⋅ Q33) ⋅ cos3 Θ ⋅ sin Θ A33L = ∑ Q33'i ⋅ t i
i=1
− (Q11 − Q12 − 2 ⋅ Q33) cos Θ ⋅ sin 3 Θ

Q13' = Q31' = (Q22 − Q12 − 2 ⋅ Q33) ⋅ cos Θ ⋅ sin 3 Θ Bending extension matrix BL:

− (Q11 − Q12 − 2 ⋅ Q33) cos3 Θ ⋅ sin Θ All forced to be zero:

Q12 ' = (Q11 + Q22 − 4 ⋅ Q33) ⋅ sin 2 Θ ⋅ cos 2 Θ B11L = B12L = B13L = B21L = B22L = B23L = B31L
+Q12 ⋅ (sin 4 Θ + cos 4 Θ) = B32L = B33L = 0

Q33' = (Q11 + Q22 − 2 ⋅ Q12 − 2 ⋅ Q33) ⋅ sin 2 Θ ⋅ cos 2 Θ Bending matrix D:

4 4
+Q33 ⋅ (sin Θ + cos Θ)
Q21' = Q12' D11L =
1 n
3 i=1
3
(
3
∑ Q11'i ⋅ zi - zi-1 )
Θ = Angle of transformation
Q' = Transformed stiffness matrix of orthotropic D12L = D21 =
1 n 3
(3
∑ Q12'i ⋅ zi - zi-1
3 i=1
)
layer in global coordinate system

C3.8.2.4 Stiffness properties of a single or multi-

ply layer
D13L = D31 =
1 n 3
(3
∑ Q13'i ⋅ zi - zi-1
3 i=1
)
The multiply is a layer, which is treated as laminate
with a distinct number of plies (e.g. woven, stitched D22L =
1 n
3 i=1
3 3
(
∑ Q22'i ⋅ zi - zi-1 )
or pre-pregged; bi-axial, tri-axial or quad-axial ar-
rangement) and is considered to be one layer of fab-
ric used to build up a laminate D23L = D32 =
1 n 3
(3
∑ Q23'i ⋅ zi - zi-1
3 i=1
)
The stiffness properties of this single or multiply
layer will be determined by Classical Laminate The-
ory with the exception that coupling effects causing
out-of plane deformations are restrained.
D33L =
1 n 3 3
(
∑ Q33'i ⋅ zi - zi-1
3 i=1
)
Thus, the bending extension coupling effects of the
single or multiply will be neglected here by forcing
t/2
the coupling matrix “B” to be zero. This simulates
the multiply to be symmetrical.
Following the classical laminate theory the ABDL i=1
2 t/2
matrix is the stiffness matrix of the multiply (Index zo
3
“L” for “layer”) and will lead to the engineering z1
z2 z3
constants of the multiply. z4
4
x
z6 z5
The individual matrices are calculated as follows: zn 5
6 y
Extension matrix AL: n
z
n
A11L = ∑ Q11'i ⋅ t i Fig. C3.8.2 Ply definitions
i=1

n Resulting in the ABDL matrix:

A12L =A21= ∑ Q12'i ⋅ t i
i=1
⎡ A11L A12L A13L 0 0 0 ⎤
⎢ A21 A22L A23L 0 0 0 ⎥⎥
n ⎢ L
A13L =A31= ∑ Q13'i ⋅ t i ⎢ A31L A32L A33L 0 0 0 ⎥ ⎡A B⎤
i=1 ⎢ ⎥=
⎢ 0 0 0 D11L D12L D13L ⎥ ⎢⎣ B D ⎥⎦ L
n ⎢ 0 0 0 D21L D22L D23L ⎥
A22L = ∑ Q22'i ⋅ t i ⎢ ⎥
i=1 ⎣⎢ 0 0 0 D31L D32L D33L ⎦⎥
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures I - Part 3
Page 3–54 GL 2012

and the inverse ABDL matrix These mean values should only be used for in-plane
assessments or for very homogeneous layups:
⎡ a11L a12L a13L 0 0 0 ⎤
⎢ ⎥ b) Neutral axis z of an unsymmetrical laminate,
⎢ a21L a22L a23L 0 0 0 ⎥
-1 measured vs. a reference axis:
⎢ a31L a32L a33L 0 0 0 ⎥ ⎡a b⎤ ⎡A B ⎤
⎢ ⎥=⎢ ⎥ =⎢ ⎥
⎢ 0 0 0 d11L d12L d13L ⎥ ⎣ b d ⎦ L ⎣ B D ⎦ L ∑ E i ⋅ t i ⋅ zi
z=
⎢ 0 0 0 d21L d22L d23L ⎥ ∑ Ei ⋅ t i
⎢ ⎥
⎣⎢ 0 0 0 d31L d32L d33L ⎦⎥
Ei = Young´s modulus layer in relevant direc-
tion
The engineering constants for the multiply layer are: zi = distance of layer centroid from reference
axis
1
Ex = ; Note that the neutral axes of a laminate can be dis-
t ⋅ a11L
similar in different directions.
1 c) Flexural stiffness EI of a single skin laminate per
Ey = ;
t ⋅ a22L unit width:
1 t i3
G xy = ; EI = ∑ Ei ⋅ ( + ti ⋅ e i 2 )
t ⋅ a33L 12
a12L ei = distance of layer centriod from neutral
υ xy = − axis of laminate
a11L
The following layer stiffness values will be used for Note that the flexural stiffness of a laminate can be
buckling analysis in C3.8.6.2: dissimilar in different directions.
A11L d) The in-plane shear stiffness GAu of a single skin
Q11'L =
tL laminate per unit width:

A12L GA u = ∑ G i ⋅ t i
Q12'L =
tL If the shear stiffness per unit width is not applicable
but the shear stiffness of a whole plate, the relevant
A22L plate width needs to be accounted for additionally.
Q22'L =
tL
GA = ∑ G i ⋅ t i ⋅ w
A33L w = plate width
Q33'L =
tL
.2 Sandwich laminates
Q21'L = Q'12L
In the sense of this methodology, “sandwich” is
tL = thickness of single or multiply layer considered to be an effective structural arrangement
of materials with significantly different stiffness
C3.8.2.5 Laminate stiffness characteristics, where however the sandwich core
shall have a sufficient amount of shear stiffness to
.1 Single skin laminates allow for simplifications made in elemental beam
theory.
A single skin laminate is consisting of a total of n
laminated layers, where the index i stands for a par- Thus, the flexural and in-plane shear stiffness of a
ticular layer i of this compound. The following is sandwich laminate is calculated like for single skin
also valid for determining the properties of sandwich laminates, taking into account the core as an elemen-
skins each: tary layer with its particular thickness and modulus.

a) The mean laminate engineering constants and the C3.8.2.6 Beam analysis
thickness of a laminate are:
Beams are structural elements that are mainly sub-
∑ E xi ⋅ t i ∑ E yi ⋅ t i jected to bending moments and also to shear forces
Ex,laminate = ; Ey,laminate = when loaded laterally. In general, the associated
∑ ti ∑ ti plating contributes to stiffness and strength. Stiffen-
∑ G xyi ⋅ t i ers, frames and girders can be considered as beams in
Gxy,laminate = ; tlaminate = ∑ t i this sense.
∑ ti
The following assumptions imply that the beams
Exi,yi; Gxy,i = engineering constants of layer perform “plane bending”, i.e. that the neutral axis of
ti = thickness of layer i the beam with associated plating is parallel to the
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 3–55

axis about which the assembly bends; the beam as- ei = distance of element’s centroid from neutral
sembly is symmetrical about the axis which is per- axis of assembly
pendicular to the plating. Si = cross sectional area of element
.1 Effective width of plating .3 Shear stiffness
The following approach provides an indication about
For determining the shear stiffness of a beam assem-
the effective width of plating. This is based on the bly, usually only the shear webs are accounted for.
assumption that the associated plating has near-
quasi-isotropic in-plane properties. It may be adopted GA = ∑ G i ⋅ t i ⋅ h i
for reasonably balanced in-plane stiffness laminates.
ti = web thickness
The effective width of plating weff is taken as being
hi = height of web measured perpendicular to
dependant on the ratio L1/w solely. The width of
associated plating
plating to account for when determining the beams
stiffness can be taken from Fig. C3.8.3 as a fraction G = in-plane shear modulus of element
of w.
C3.8.3 Laterally loaded plates
L1 is the length between zero bending moments of a
beam between supports and is determined as follows: C3.8.3.1 Applicability
L1 = unsupported span for beams with hinged end In the following the structural design requirements
for laterally loaded shells and plates are given. Lat-
supports
eral loading is usually caused by static or dynamic
= 0,4 – times the unsupported span for beam sea or water pressure (slamming) of hull shells,
with ends fixed decks, superstructure, watertight bulkheads, tank
w = width of plating supported, measured from walls etc.
centre to centre of the adjacent unsupported The methodology presented in the following is cov-
fields ering flat or slightly curved panels of generally
1
square or rectangular geometry with different bound-
ary conditions. Other geometries (e.g. triangular or
0,998

1,000
0,993
0,980

0,9
0,960

trapezoid styled) require an equivalent approach.

0,910

0,8
0,820

0,7
0,6
Plates considered here are generally laminated as
weff/w

0,640

0,5 single skin or sandwich panels.

0,4
0,3 It is recommended that elasto-mechanical properties
0,360

0,2 of inner and outer sandwich skin do not differ sig-

0,1 nificantly. This is to avoid secondary effects, such as
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 superimposed twist or bending in plates.
L1/w
The following approaches are featuring the ideas and
Fig. C3.8.3 Effective width of plating the background of the “plate theory”. Membrane
effects occurring due to curved shells are treated with
Additionally the beams foot width “wf” can be added a linear reduction coefficient. Further contribution,
to weff, see Fig. C3.8.4. like calculated using other methods or FEA, will
generally not be accepted.
The objective is to determine plate stresses and
strains from bending moments and shear forces
caused by lateral pressure. The problem of an all-side
supported panel will effectively be reduced to a unit
wf beam strip, by using appropriate coefficients. The
evaluation of stresses/strains is focussing on the spot
where the maximum bending stress/strain occurs and
Fig. C3.8.4 Typical top hat stiffener a spot where the maximum through-thickness shear
stress/strain occurs. Further to that, a correction is
The calculated effective width shall not be taken incorporated to allow the use of orthotropic material
greater than the load width. and plate properties and the application to sandwich
construction.
.2 Flexural stiffness If not explicitly mentioned, unit consistent variables
EI = ∑ Ei ⋅ (Ii + Si ⋅ ei ) 2 are to be used.

Ei = tensile modulus of element C3.8.3.2 Parameters

Ii = specific moment of inertia of element Laminated plates are to be characterised by the fol-
lowing parameters:
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures I - Part 3
Page 3–56 GL 2012

.1 Structural parameters In specific cases, hull chines or other sudden changes

EIx = panel bending stiffness in panels global x-
direction (about panels global y-direction
EIy = panel bending stiffness in panels global y-
direction (about panels global x-direction
tc = thickness of sandwich core
zi = distance from a certain location of the neutral
axis in bending
These values are calculated in C3.8.2.2 or C3.8.2.3.
.2 Geometrical parameters
sx = unsupported span in global x-direction
sy = unsupported span in global y-direction
Boundary conditions: all edges fixed or all edges
simply supported
.3 Load details and design pressures
Lateral design pressures acc. to relevant GL Rules
and Guidelines.
in geometry may be considered being a boundary as
well. Should a chine be considered presenting one
edge of a panel, the angle of the chine ω shall be
close to 90° to allow for such assumption, see Fig.
C3.8.5. Should the angle be greater than 90°, the
panel span taken for panel calculations needs to be
increased virtually, using the characteristic correction
factors described below.
The panel span which is delimited by a chine has to
be multiplied by the correction factor cs:
sx/y = corrected panel span
= cs ⋅ sc
cs = correction factor
sc = panel span

.4 Geometric aspect ratio arg

w
sx
arg = chi
sy ne

.5 Effective aspect ratio sc

For orthotropic panel properties with EIx not equal
EIy, the geometrical aspect ratio arg needs to be cor-
rected:
EI y
arcorr = arg ⋅ 4 Fig. C3.8.5 Panel span
EI x

For the purpose of further calculations, the corrected 2.000

aspect ratio arcorr has to be related to the span of the 2

panel that is considered to be effective to take up the 1.9

major bending and shear loads (see C3.8.3.1) and 1.8
will be called “effective span seff”: 1.7
connection factor cs

1.545

1.6
If arcorr is > 1, then areff = arcorr.
1.5
Thus, the panel effective span seff (direction of main 1.4
1.230

load take-up) runs in y-direction. 1.3

1.108

1.2
If arcorr is < 1, then areff = 1/arcorr
1.061
1.037
1.020
1.010
1.000

1.005

1.2
Thus, the panel effective span seff (direction of main 1
load take-up) runs in x-direction. 50 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180
chine angle w [deg]
.6 Edge support boundary conditions and
corrections Fig. C3.8.6 Panel span correction factor cs de-
pendant on chine angle
Generally, panels which are continuous over their
supporting structure can be assumed providing a This correction is particularly applicable for equidis-
fixed edge boundary condition, whereas panels e.g. tant spacings of panels, i.e. for panels on both sides
butting against a sandwich panel will be considered of vessel’s chined centreline without the existence of
with edge condition “simply supported”. Similar a centreline girder, e.g.where the panels are delimited
considerations should be carried out for great varia- by off-centre longitudinals. For determination of cs
tions in neighboring panel sizes. see Fig. C3.8.6
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 3–57

.7 Plate curvature β = see Table C3.8.2

Curvature will only be considered if the plate is Pd = lateral design pressure on associated plating
curved in the direction of the effective span seff, see acc. to C3.8.1
Fig. C3.8.7.
seff = effective panel span
Curvature correction coefficient:
rc = curvature correction coefficient
h
rc = 1,15 − 5 ⋅
seff .2 Maximum reaction shear force
h FQ − max = γ ⋅ Pd ⋅ s eff
for 0,03 < < 0,1
s
γ = see Table C3.8.2
Pd = lateral design pressure on associated plating
acc. to C3.8.1
seff = effective panel span
h

seff .3 Maximum lateral deflection

4
Fig. C3.8.7 Plate curvature α ⋅ Pd ⋅ seff
z max =
12 ⋅ EIeff
C3.8.3.3 Maximum bending moment, shear
force and lateral deflection of panel α = see Table C3.8.2
As mentioned in C3.8.3.1, the calculation is being Pd = lateral design pressure on associated plating
reduced to the assessment of a panel strip of one unit acc. to C3.8.1
width (e.g. 1 mm).
seff = effective panel span
.1 Maximum bending moment EIeff = plate bending stiffness relevant for the direc-
2
β ⋅ Pd ⋅ s eff tion of the effective panel span
M b − max = ⋅ rc
6 For allowable deflections see C3.8.8.

Table C3.8.2 Values β, α, γ

For all edges simply supported

areff 1 1,2 1,4 1,6 1,8 2 3 4 5 

β 0,2874 0,3762 0,453 0,5172 0,5688 0,6102 0,7134 0,741 0,7476 0,75

α 0,0444 0,0616 0,077 0,0906 0,1017 0,111 0,1335 0,14 0,1417 0,1421

γ 0,42 0,455 0,478 0,491 0,499 0,503 0,505 0,502 0,501 0,5

For all edges fixed

areff 1 1,2 1,4 1,6 1,8 2 

β 0,3078 0,3834 0,4356 0,468 0,4872 0,4974 0,5

α 0,0138 0,0188 0,0226 0,0251 0,0267 0,0277 0,0284

γ 0,42 0,455 0,478 0,491 0,499 0,503 0,5

Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures
Page 3–58
C3.8.3.4 Determination of laminate strains and
stresses
.1 Laminate strains
The structural performance of a laterally loaded plate
is characterised by the occurring strains in the lami-
nate using the following approach.
Resulting strains at a distance of zi from the plate’s
neutral axis:
M b − max ⋅ zi
εi =
EIeff
The maximum strains through bending moments
usually emerge at the outer surfaces of a composite.
Hence, for evaluating the maximum strains, use the
maximum distances from the neutral axis at each side
of the plate.
The calculated strains may not exceed the allowables
defined in C3.8.8. Apart from the pure bending
strains, stability issues such as skin wrinkling need to
be considered, relate to C3.8.6.
.2 Determination of core shear stresses in
sandwich laminates
Whereas with solid coreless laminates, the through-
thickness interlaminar stress is rarely a design crite-
rion, it is so for most of the lower density/strength
cores of a typical sandwich. The core has to transmit
the through-thickness shear forces. A certain contri-
bution by the skins is assumed.
Core shear stress is calculated as being:
Fq − max
τc =
t t
t c + s1 + s2
2 2
Fq-max = see C3.8.3.3.2
tc = core thickness
ts1, ts2 = skin thickness of skins
The calculated stresses may not exceed the allow-
ables defined in C3.8.8.
C3.8.4 Laterally loaded beams
C3.8.4.1 Applicability
The following approach can be used for laterally
loaded beams, stiffeners, frames and girders, with or
without associated plating attached. These structural
members are usually part of an orthogonal structural
system of a vessel. In well found cases, curvature
effects may be taken into account in a similar way as
shown for panels, see Fig. C3.8.8.
Typically, the beams consist of a web designed to
carry the shear force and two flanges to carry the
bending load, both generated by lateral pressure.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
The web may be attached vertically or inclined to the
attached shell (only the structural height times the
thickness as effective shear area is to be considered).
One flange is usually presented by a certain amount
of attached plating (see effective width) and possible
additional pads beneath the web. The other flange is
presented by the “capping” of the beam.
Beams should be designed in a way that the transfer
of loads is fibre dominant. In general this will require
shear webs to consist of +/-45° layers of laminate,
whereas the flanges consist of a certain number of 0°
plies. However, it shall be taken into account that
shear loads are transferred from the web into the
flange.
The following approaches are featuring the partly
simplified “Classical Laminate Theory” and the sim-
ple “Beam Theory”.
The objective is to determine beam stresses and
strains from bending moments and shear forces
caused by lateral pressure on the associated plating.
The computational model is presented by a simple
beam with appropriate support conditions.
In case the scantlings are constant over the full length
of the beam, it is sufficient to evaluate stresses and
strains, respectively, through
− bending moment and shear force at the end of the
beam for a support condition “ends fixed”
− bending moment at the centre of the beam and
shear effects at the end of the beam for a support
condition “ends simply supported”
Laminated beams may have a great variety of section
shapes. Generally it is recommended to use symmet-
rical or near-symmetrical section shapes, as unsym-
metrical shapes are subjected to superimposed secon-
dary effects such as transverse bending or a twisting
of the beam (flange). This makes a more refined
analysis necessary than offered below.
Note
Due to the resulting transverse bending moment
occurring in the flange, L-section beams with com-
mon width to height ratio show up to 2-times the
calculated strains/stresses compared to calculated
using the below approach. Measures shall be taken to
reduce the strains by increasing the flange scantlings,
or mounting tripping brackets along the beam.
If not explicitly mentioned, use consistent unit vari-
ables.
Laminated beams including their associated plating
are to be characterised by the following parameters:
C3.8.4.2 Parameters
.1 Structural parameters
The following parameters have been determined in
C3.8.2.6:
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 3–59

EI = beam bending stiffness including associated .2 Maximum reaction shear force

plating
The maximum shear force typically occurs at the
GA = shear stiffness of webs boundaries:
zi = distance from a certain location within the P ⋅l⋅ w
beam to the neutral axis in bending Fq −max = d
2
weff = effective width of plating Pd = see C3.8.1
l = see C3.8.4.3.1
.2 Geometrical parameters
w = see C3.8.4.3.1
l = unsupported length of the beam
.3 Maximum lateral deflection
w = load width
The maximum lateral deflection of a beam is typi-
Boundary condition (all edges fixed or all edges
cally observed half way along the beam, considering
simply supported)
that both ends have similar end support conditions
.3 Load details and the beam has constant structural section and
material properties along its length:
For panel design pressures see C3.8.1
P ⋅ w ⋅ l 4 ⋅ cd
z max = d
.4 Beam curvature correction 384 ⋅ EI
Curvature correction coefficient: Pd = see C3.8.1
h l = see C3.8.4.3.1
rcb = 1,15 − 5 ⋅
w = see C3.8.4.3.1
h cd = boundary condition coefficient
for 0,03 < < 0,1
= 1 for fixed end supports
= 5 for simply supported
For allowable deflections see C3.8.8.

C3.8.4.4 Beam construction notes

.1 In general, the bonding laminate (if not inte-
h

gral with the shear web) of a shear web needs to have

the same shear stiffness/strength as the web. The lap
l

of the bonding has to be large enough to transmit in-

Fig. C3.8.8 Beam curvature definitions
C3.8.4.3 Maximum bending moment, shear
force and lateral deflection of beam
.1 Maximum bending moment
plane shear forces. It is important to place the bond-
ing tapes using the specified fibre orientations
throughout, see Fig. C3.8.9.
This is not only applicable to the bond between the
beam and the associated plate but also to the bond
between the beam and the next higher hierarchical
member in structure, which it is supported by.

Pd ⋅ w ⋅ l2 ⋅ rcb
M b − max =
cb
Pd = lateral design pressure on associated plating
acc. to C3.8.1
w = load width
l = length of beam between supports
rcb = beam curvature reduction factor see 3.8.4.2.4
cb = boundary condition coefficient
= 12 for fixed end supports Fig. C3.8.9 Bonding of a beam to adjacent struc-
= 8 for simply supported ture
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures I - Part 3
Page 3–60 GL 2012

.2 The requirement for a sufficient amount of but need to be evaluated in addition should facings or
shear buckling stiffness of web laminates may lead to cores be of uncommon type or configuration.
the inclusion of stabilising measures for webs (e.g.
sandwich web or foam filled). If webs are of single C3.8.6.1 Skin wrinkling of sandwich skins
skin style, the web height may not exceed 30-times Skin wrinkling of sandwich skins may be critical
the web thickness to prevent shear buckling. especially in cases where a sandwich panel is sub-
jected to loadings so that at least one skin is in com-
.3 In special cases it may be required to replace pression. Depending on the stiffness of the laminate
the core of the associated plate with a higher in the relevant direction and on the supporting prop-
strength/stiffness shear tie. erties of the core, the following approach is used to
assess strains above which skin wrinkling is ex-
.4 Web laminates necessary to carry the shear pected:
loads should in general continue across the capping
laminate and be interspersed with the capping lami- Critical wrinkling strain for sandwich with “solid,
nate. isotropic” cores like foam:
1/3
C3.8.5 Determination of laminate strains and ( Ebf ⋅ Ec ⋅ Gc )
stresses εsw −crit = k1 ⋅
Ef
C3.8.5.1 General Critical wrinkling strain for sandwich cored with
The structural performance of a laterally loaded beam honeycomb:
is characterised by the occurring strains in the lami- 1/2
nate. The maximum bending strains usually emerge ( E bf ⋅ Ec ⋅ t f / t c )
εsw −crit = k 2 ⋅
at the most external areas of the composite. The most Ef
critical shear loading can usually be found in the
shear webs. Ebf = skin laminate flexural modulus relevant to
direction of compression. Thus, care shall be
C3.8.5.2 Strains and stresses taken for laminate stacks of only few layers
of alternating fibre direction. For skins made
.1 In-plane uniaxial strains of many layers providing balanced through
Resulting bending strains at a distance of ei from the thickness elastic properties, a mean com-
beam’s neutral axis: pressive young’s modulus may be adopted
instead
M b − max ⋅ ei
εi = Ef = skin laminate tensile (compressive) modulus
EI
Ec = core’s Young’s modulus in compression
For evaluating the maximum strains, the maximum
distances ei from the neutral axis at each side of the Gc = core’s shear modulus
beam are to be used. Due to special configurations, tf = thickness of skin
materials or geometries it might be necessary to cal-
culate the strains at other characteristic locations tc = thickness of core
along the beam. k1 = 0,5
The calculated strains may not exceed the allowables k2 = 0,6
defined in C3.8.8.
C3.8.6.2 Buckling of orthotropic plates under
.2 In-plane shear strains in webs uniaxial membrane loads
Fq − max .1 Considerations and limitations
γs =
GA The buckling of sandwich panels needs to be consid-
ered for global in-plane compression and in-plane
The calculated strains shall not exceed the allowables
shear.
defined in C3.8.8.
The following methodology is based on simplified
C3.8.6 Stability considerations classical laminate theory, i.e. only valid for laminate
Sandwich structures need to undergo special stability plates (sandwich or single skin) which are well bal-
evaluations to prove that pertinent buckling in differ- anced through thickness. Only sandwich laminates
ent forms will not occur. For marine structures typi- with skin in-plane tensile stiffness (E  t) difference of
cally the most critical buckling modes are the global no more than 20 % in each direction x or y may be
buckling of a panel and face wrinkling of the skins. considered this way:
To cope for the latter, analytical approaches are of- E x −os ⋅ t os
fered in the following. Buckling modes like shear 0.8 ≤ ≤ 1.2
crimping and face dimpling are less likely to occur E x −is ⋅ t is
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 3–61

and: Index “i” stands for each particular layer of a total of

E y −os ⋅ t os “n” layers of a laminate
0.8 ≤ ≤ 1.2 Q11'L, Q12'L, Q22'L and Q33'L are coefficients de-
E y ⋅ t is
termined in C3.8.2.4
where “os” and “is” are indices for “outer skin” and zi are distances from ply surfaces to the laminate
“inner skin”. midplane as depicted in Fig. C3.8.2
Also, all edges need to be supported. There is no 10

implementation for the possibility to calculate plates

9
with one free edge.
8
This condition presumes that there will be no or only
minor coupling between in-plane and out-of-plane 7 all edges clamped
effects. loaded edges
6 simply supported,
unloaded egdes
.2 Critical buckling strain clamped

h (a)
5
For arbitrary boundary conditions the critical mem- loaded edges
brane strain of an orthotropic plate that leads to buck- 4 clamped,
unloaded egdes
ling is: simply suported
3
1 π
εB−crit = ⋅ k x ⋅ ( )2 ⋅ D11 ⋅ D22 2
E a −mean ⋅ t tot b all edges simply
supported
1
Ea-mean = mean Young’s modulus in load direction
(a) of full laminate (incl. core) 0
0 0,5 1 1,5 2 2,5 3 3,5
ttot = total thickness of full laminate (incl. a
core)
b = plate width perpendicular to load direc- Fig. C3.8.10: Simplified h( α ) curves
tion
a = plate width parallel to load direction C3.8.6.3 Buckling of orthotropic plates under
kx = buckling coefficient: in-plane shear loads
The general provisions C3.8.6.2.1 apply.
= h(α) + q ⋅β
q = boundary condition adjustment factor .1 Critical buckling strain
= 2 for unloaded edges simply sup- For an all-sided simply supported orthotropic plate,
ported the critical in-plane shear strain that leads to buckling
= 2,36 for unloaded edges clamped is:
2
h( α ) = see Fig. C3.8.10 1 ⎛π⎞
γ B-crit = ⋅ k S ⋅ ⎜ ⎟ ⋅ 4 Da ⋅ D b3
G a-mean ⋅ t tot ⎝w⎠
α = modified aspect ratio:
t
a 4 D22
= ⋅
b D11 a
b X,1
β = “Seydel” orthotropic parameter:
D12 + 2 ⋅ D33 t
= Y,2
D11⋅ D22
Coefficients from the laminate’s bending matrix D: Fig. C3.8.11: Nomenclature
n 1 Ga-mean = mean in-plane shear modulus of full lami-
D11 = ∑ Q11'Li ⋅ (z3i − z3i −1 ) nate
i =1 3
n
ttot = total thickness of full laminate
1
D12 = ∑ Q12'Li ⋅ (z3i − z3i −1 ) w = plate width a or b, see below
i =1 3
n kS = buckling coefficient, as per Fig. C3.8.12
1
D22 = ∑ Q22'Li ⋅ (z3i − z3i −1 )
i =1 3 β = Seydel orthotropic parameter
n 1 D12 + 2 ⋅ D33
D33 = ∑ Q33'Li ⋅ (z3i − z3i −1 ) =
i =1 3 D11⋅ D22
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures I - Part 3
Page 3–62 GL 2012

α = modified inverse aspect ratio used in association with the provisions described and
defined so far.
1 b D11
= = 4
This criterion is providing an appropriate limit for
α a D22
fibre reinforced composites under the condition that
If α ≤ 1, then the composite shows a fibre-dominant load transfer.
w = b These limits provide a sufficient margin over inter-
Da = D11 laminar micro cracking and fibre failure in all in-
plane directions.
Db = D22
For adhesive bonds, the structural evaluation of
If α > 1, then sandwich cores and evaluation of stability criteria,
α = α safety factors are serving to achieve sufficient integ-
rity. Further to that, a deflection criterion has to be
w = a
fulfilled:
Da = D22
− Maximum strain for carbon laminates in axial
Db = D11 tension/compression is to be the smaller value of:
b = plate width in X,1 direction
− 0,25 % (typical for standard modulus, interme-
a = plate width in Y,2 direction diate modulus or high strength carbon fibre) or
20
19 b − Ultimate compressive strain/3
18
17 2,8
16 GL reserves the right to inquire test certificates
2,4
15 for tests on ultimate compressive strain, using
Buckling coefficient ks

14 2,0
13 ASTM D-695. Tests need to be carried out at
12 1,6 accredited, independant laboratories.
11 1,2
10
9 1,0 − Maximum allowable strain of 0,35 % for E-Glass
0,8
8
7 0,4
laminates in axial tension/compression
6
5 0,0 − Maximum allowable in-plane shear strain for
4
3
carbon laminates is to be smaller value of
2
1 − 0,45 % (typical for standard modulus, interme-
0
0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1 diate modulus or high strength carbon fibres)
effective aspect ratio a
or
− Ultimate compressive strain · 0,6
Fig. C3.8.12 Buckling coefficient ks
− Maximum allowable in-plane shear strain for E-
C3.8.7 Further considerations Glass laminates of 0,7 %

C3.8.7.1 Through-thickness effects − Safety factor of 2,5 vs. core shear failure (linear
shear stress distribution over the core and each
In general it is preferred to have a fibre-dominant half of the skins). Basis are the GL approved val-
load absorption in a composite structure, but in some ues or the “msmv”(manufacturer specified mini-
cases it will be unavoidable that through thickness mum values) values for structural cores.
effects occur. Those structural details will be treated
individually and case by case. − Appropriate safety of skin/core bond
− Factor of 2,5 vs. panel buckling and 2,0 for skin
C3.8.7.2 Minimum shell thickness
wrinkling on the strains determined according to
No particular algorithm has been implemented to C3.8.6.
determine a minimum shell or skin thickness for hull
laminates. As global strength and stiffness criteria − Factor of 2,5 vs. shear strength in an adhesive
have been set, a remaining issue is that of a shell bond using adhesives approved by GL.
laminate being prone to local forces or impact when − Maximum permissible lateral deflections under
docking, dry docking or from collision with floating lateral load:
or submerged debris. This subject will be handled
individually. − 1,5 % of effective panel span for single skin
laminate panels
C3.8.8 Allowable strains, safety factors and
maximum deflections − 1,0 % of effective panel span for sandwich
panels
For fibre reinforced composite components, the
“maximum strain criteria” is mainly used to assess − 0,5 % of unsupported span of a stiffener or
the structural integrity. This criterion may solely be girder
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures
GL 2012
− 0,3 % of unsupported span of engine founda-
tion
C3.8.9 Construction and design details
C3.8.9.1 Consequences of elasticity
Unlike metals, fibre reinforced composites used for
marine applications exhibit almost linear elastic be-
haviour to failure. This is as long as the structural
response is fibre-dominated, which is preferred over a
matrix dominant behaviour. Respecting this, compos-
ites show little or no yielding until failure. This as-
pect requires particular attention. Especially in struc-
tural details with occurring stress concentrations,
consideration shall already be given in static strength
analysis. In cases in which these concentrations are
compensated appropriately, fatigue will not be as
critical. This is valid for in-plane loads with fibre
dominated load absorption. However, through-
thickness loading (especially shear and tension) can
not always be avoided and yet needs to be handled in
an appropriately conservative way. “Intercracking” or
delamination caused by overloading, impact or defi-
cient structural design is considered to be the cause
for subsequent failure of components and thus can be
deemed as cause for fatigue with composites.
C3.8.9.2 Recommendations
The following recommendations do not claim to be
all-inclusive and are subject to up-date/change/
amendment:
− In general, the basic laminate stacking sequence
shall be homogeneous; preferably symmetrical
and balanced, if not particular attention has to be
paid to possible arising secondary effects.
− A laminate should consist of plies aligned in at
least 4 distinct directions (e.g. 0°, +/-45°, 90°),
with not less than 10 % in each direction. Ply an-
gles should be aligned appropriately for major
load direction(s). Excemptions are the following
components/items:
− mainly in-plane shear loaded webs of girders,
stiffeners, frames
− local tape reinforcements
− Grouping of plies with the same fibre direction
should be avoided, but total thickness of these
plies may not exceed 1,5 mm (typically for car-
bon laminates).
− Not all parts are suitable for composites. Complex
3-dimensional stress states may make suitable
isotropic materials a preferred choice (e.g. local
fittings).
− Inaccessibility of composite components needs to
be considered in design in terms of inspectability
during production, in-service and after damage.
Chapter 1
Page 3–63
C3.8.9.3 Details
All structural details are subject to examination by
GL. In general the following provisions shall be ob-
served.
1. The occurrence of peeling effects, such as
abrupt stiffness changes is to be minimized. Secon-
dary bonding is always to be backfilled with suitably
coved filler bed.
2. For mechanical fastenings, a domination of
fibre orientation in one direction of more than 40 % is
not advisable.
3. Core chamfers of sandwich laminates should
not be steeper than 1:3 thickness/taper ratio.
4. Exposed fibres and sandwich cores shall be
sealed or clashed with laminate.
C3.9 Hull Appendages
C3.9.1 Shaft brackets
.1 The strut axes should intersect in the axis of
the propeller shaft as far as practicable. The angle
between two struts shall be in range from 50° to 120°
which differs from the angle included between pro-
peller blades. Where 3- or 5-bladed propellers are
fitted, an approximately 90° angle is recommended.
Where 4-bladed propellers are fitted, the angle should
be approximately 70° or 110°. The axes of the arms
should intersect in the axis of the propeller shaft.
Exceptions to this will be considered by GL on a
case-by-case basis.
The struts are to be extended through the shell plating
and are to be attached in an efficient manner to the
frames and plate floors respectively. The construction
in way of the shell is to be carried out with special
care. For strengthening of the shell in way of struts
and shaft bossings, see C3.7.7.3.3.
In case of welded connection, the struts are to have a
weld flange or a thickened part or are to be connected
with the shell plating in another suitable manner. The
requirements of C3.6.1.4.3 are to be observed.
.2 In general, the scantlings of solid struts can
be determined as outlined below depending on shaft
diameter d:
– strut thickness 0,44 d
– cross-sectional area 0,44 d2
in propeller bracket
– length of boss 2,5 da
– wall thickness of boss 0,25 d
da = as-built diameter
d = 95 (Pw ⋅ Cw / n) (1/3)
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures I - Part 3
Page 3–64 GL 2012

Cw = 560/(160+Rm) – bending stress:

150
Rm = tensile strength of the strut material σam =
k ⋅ f´m
Pw = single engine output in kW
– shear stress:
n = shaft revolutions per minute 90
τam =
Based on further details other scantling calculations k ⋅ f´m
can be accepted as agreed by GL.
– Von Mises equivalent bending stress:
.3 Propeller brackets and shaft bossings of 190
welded construction are to have the same strength as σeq,am =
k ⋅ f´m
solid ones according to 2. The thickness of plating
shall not be less than 0,1 d. k = material factor defined in C3.2
.4 The shaft brackets are to be checked of f’m = coefficient depending on the material
cracks during each drydocking. = 1,00 for steel structures
.5 For one strut propeller brackets a strength, = 2,15 for aluminium alloy structures
vibration and fatigue analysis is to be carried out.
Table C3.9.1
C3.9.2 Waterjets
Component LDC1 LDC2 LDC3 LDC4
.1 The supporting structures of waterjets are to
be able to withstand the loads thereby generated in Built-in nozzle:
the following conditions: - plating X1 X2
– maximum ahead thrust - bending behaviour X3
– maximum thrust at maximum lateral inclination Ship stern X2 X X4
– maximum reversed thrust (going astern) Bolting on stern X5 X5
Information on the above loads is to be given by the 1 to be checked under lateral pressure and against fatigue
waterjet manufacturer and supported by documents. behaviour
2 buckling to be checked (100 % of F transferred by built-in
.2 For each waterjet, following loading cases x
are to be investigated: nozzle in case of thrust bearing aft of the stern)
3 ratio of M directly sustained by the built-in nozzle to be
LDC 1 : internal hydrodynamic pressure ph in the y
estimated on basis of relative stiffnesses
built-in nozzle
4 ratio of M directly sustained by the transom structure to be
y
LDC 2 : horizontal longitudinal force Fx1 in normal estimated on basis of relative stiffnesses
service (ahead) 5 bolting calculation taking account of the actual pre-tension
LDC 3 : horizontal transverse force Fy and associated in bolts

moment Mz during steering operation

LDC 4 : horizontal longitudinal force Fx2, vertical
force Fz and overturning moment My in
crash-stop situation
.3 The actual location of the thrust bearing is to
be adequately considered (either located aft of the
stem in the stator bowl or inside the waterjet com-
partment)
.4 The scantlings are to be checked by direct
calculations.
.5 Table C3.9.1 indicates the loading cases to
be considered for the various components of the
waterjet system. Other loading cases could be consid-
ered for specific or new design.
.6 The stress criteria for static analysis may be
taken as the following one, in MPa:
.7 The stress criteria for fatigue analysis are to
be specified by the designer.
.8 The shell thickness in way of nozzles as well
as the shell thickness of the tunnel are to be individu-
ally considered. In general, such thicknesses are to be
not less than 1,5 times the thickness of the adjacent
bottom plating.
.9 General principles to be followed for such
structures subject to cyclic loadings are listed hereaf-
ter:
– continuous welding
– shear connections between stiffeners and trans-
verse frames
– soft toe brackets
– no sniped ends
– no termination on plate fields
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures
GL 2012
– no scallops in critical areas
– no start and stop of welding in corners or at ends
of stiffeners and brackets
– possibly grinding of toes of critical welds
Note
As a guidance, the following criteria may be consid-
ered:
The bending natural frequency of plates and strength
members of the hull in the area of waterjets should
not be less than 2,3 times the blade frequency for
structures below the design waterline and between
transom and aft engine room bulkhead. Structural
components (such as the casing of waterjet and ac-
cessory parts and the immersed shell area) which
may transfer pressure fluctuations into the ship struc-
ture have to fulfill the requirements of the waterjet
manufacturer. Especially with regard the grids in-
stalled in the inlet duct, the hydrodynamic design
should assure an unproblematic operation with re-
spect to cavitation phenomenon.
This checking is left to the manufacturers (see para-
graph 3.4)
C3.10 Rudder
C3.10.1 General
.1 Rudder stock, cone coupling, rudder bear-
ings and the rudder body of spade rudders are dealt
with in the following. For rudders supported by sole
piece and semi-spade rudders and other types of
couplings the GL Rules Hull Structures (I-1-1), Sec-
tion 14 are to be observed.
.2 The steering gear compartment shall be
readily accessible and, as far as practicable, separated
from the machinery space.
Note
Concerning the use of non-magnetisable material in
the wheel house in way of a magnetic compass, the
requirements of the national Administration con-
cerned are to be observed.
C3.10.2 Structural details
.1 Effective means are to be provided for sup-
porting the weight of the rudder body without exces-
sive bearing pressure, e.g. by a rudder carrier at-
tached to the upper part of the rudder stock. The hull
structure in way of the rudder carrier is to be suitably
strengthened.
.2 Suitable arrangements are to be provided to
prevent the rudder from lifting.
Connections of rudder blade structure with solid parts
in forged or cast steel, which are used as rudder stock
Chapter 1
Page 3–65
housing, are to be suitably designed to avoid any
excessive stress concentration at these areas.
.3 The rudder stock is to be carried through the
hull either enclosed in a watertight trunk, or glands
are to be fitted above the deepest load waterline, to
prevent water from entering the steering gear com-
partment and the lubricant from being washed away
from the rudder carrier. If the top of the rudder trunk
is below the deepest waterline two separate stuffing
boxes are to be provided.
Note
The following measures are recommended in the GL
Technical Publication, Paper No. 05-1 "Recommen-
dations for Preventive Measures to Avoid or Mini-
mize Rudder Cavitation", regarding:
Profile selection:
– Use the appropriate profile shape and thickness.
– Use profiles with a sufficiently small absolute
value of pressure coefficient for moderate angles
of attack (below 5°). The pressure distribution
around the profile should be possibly smooth. The
maximum thickness of such profiles is usually lo-
cated at more than 35 % behind the leading edge.
– Use a large profile nose radius for rudders operat-
ing in propeller slips.
– Computational Fluid Dynamic (CFD) analysis for
rudder considering the propeller and ship wake
can be used.
Rudder sole cavitation:
Round out the leading edge curve at rudder sole.
Propeller hub cavitation:
Fit a nacelle (body of revolution) to the rudder at the
level of the propeller hub. This nacelle functions as
an extension of the propeller hub.
Cavitation at surface irregularities:
– Grind and polish all welds.
– Avoid changes of profile shape. Often rudders are
built with local thickenings (bubbles) and dents to
ease fitting of the rudder shaft. Maximum changes
in profile shape should be kept to less than two
percent of profile thickness.
Gap cavitation:
– Round out all edges of the part around the gap.
– Gap size should be as small as possible.
– Place gaps outside of the propeller slipstream.
C3.10.3 Materials
.1 For materials for rudder stock, pintles, cou-
pling bolts etc. see Rules II – Materials and Welding,
Part 1 – Metallic Materials.
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures I - Part 3
Page 3–66 GL 2012

.2 In general materials having a minimum x2

nominal upper yield point ReH of less than 200 MPa
and a minimum tensile strength of less than 400 MPa c
or more than 900 MPa shall not be used for rudder
stocks, pintles, keys and bolts.

The requirements of this Section are based on a mate-

A

b
rial's minimum nominal upper yield point ReH of
235 MPa. If material is used having a ReH differing Af
from 235 MPa, the material factor kr is to be deter-
mined as follows:
x1
0,75
⎛ 235 ⎞
kr = ⎜ ⎟ for R eH > 235 [N / mm 2 ] x1 + x2 A
⎝ R eH ⎠ c= 2 b=
c

235 C3.10.1 Rudder area geometry

= for R eH ≤ 235 [N / mm 2 ]
R eH Λ = aspect ratio of rudder area At

ReH = minimum nominal upper yield point of ma- b2

=
terial used [MPa] At

ReH is not to be taken greater than 0,7 · Rm
or 450 MPa, whichever is less. Rm = tensile
strength of the material used.
.3 Before significant reductions in rudder stock
diameter due to the application of steels with ReH
exceeding 235 MPa are accepted, GL may require the
evaluation of the elastic rudder stock deflections.
Large deflections should be avoided in order to avoid
excessive edge pressures in way of bearings.
va = astern speed of ship [kn]; if the astern speed
va is less than 0,4 ⋅ v0 or 6 kn, whichever is
less, determination of rudder force and
torque for astern condition is not required.
For greater astern speeds special evaluation
of rudder force and torque as a function of
the rudder angle may be required. If no limi-
tations for the rudder angle at astern condi-
tion is stipulated, the factor κ2 is not to be
taken less than given in Table C3.10.1 for
astern condition.

.4 The permissible stresses given in C3.10.8 C3.10.5 Rudder Force and Torque
are applicable for normal strength hull structural
.1 The rudder force is to be determined accord-
steel. When higher tensile steels are used, higher
ing to the following formula:
values may be used which will be fixed in each indi-
vidual case. CR = 132 ⋅ A ⋅ V02 ⋅ k1 ⋅ k2 ⋅ k3

V0 = min [V, 2/3 ⋅ (V + 2 ⋅ L0,5)]

C3.10.4 Definitions
= va for astern condition
CR = rudder force [N]
k1 = coefficient, depending on the aspect ratio Λ
QR = rudder torque [Nm]
= (Λ + 2)/3, where Λ need not be taken greater
than 2
A = total movable area of the rudder [m2], meas-
ured at the mid-plane of the rudder k2 = coefficient, depending on the type of the
rudder and the rudder profile according to
At = A + area of a rudder horn, if any [m2] Table C3.10.1
k3 = coefficient, depending on the location of the
Af = portion of rudder area located ahead of the rudder
rudder stock axis [m2]
= 0,8 for rudders outside the propeller jet
b = mean height of rudder area [m] = 1,0 elsewhere, including also rudders
within the propeller jet
c = mean breadth of rudder area [m], see Fig.
C3.10.1 = 1,15 for rudders aft of the propeller nozzle
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 3–67

Table C3.10.1 Coefficient k2 iliary tiller shall not be less than 0,77 Dt and the
height not less than 0,8 Dt.
Profile / κ2
type of rudder ahead astern .4 The rudder stock is to be secured against
axial sliding. The degree of the permissible axial
NACA-00 series 1,1 1,4 clearance depends on the construction of the steering
Göttingen profiles
engine and on the bearing.
flat side profiles 1,1 1,4
mixed profiles 1,21 1,4 C3.10.6.2 Strengthening of rudder stock
(e. g. HSVA)
.1 If the rudder is so arranged that additional
hollow profiles 1,35 1,4 bending stresses occur in the rudder stock, the stock
high lift rudders 1,7 to be specially diameter has to be suitably increased. The increased
considered; diameter is, where applicable, decisive for the scant-
if not known: lings of the coupling.
1,7
For the increased rudder stock diameter the equiva-
.2 The rudder torque is to be determined by the lent stress of bending and torsion is not to exceed the
following value:
following formula:
118
Q R = CR ⋅ r [Nm] σv = σb2 + 3τ2 ≤ [N / mm 2 ]
kr
r = c (α − k b ) [m]
Bending stress:
α = 0,33 for ahead condition 10, 2 ⋅ M b
= 0,66 for astern condition (general) σb = [N / mm 2 ]
D13
kb = balance factor as follows: Mb = bending moment at the neck bearing [Nm]
Af Torsional stress:
=
A
5,1 ⋅ Q R
= 0,08 for unbalanced rudders τ = [N / mm 2 ]
D13
rmin = 0,1 ⋅ c [m] for ahead condition D1 = increased rudder stock diameter [cm]
.3 Effects of the provided type of rudder/profile
on choice and operation of the steering gear are to be The increased rudder stock diameter may be deter-
observed. mined by the following formula:
2
C3.10.6 Scantlings of the Rudder Stock 4 ⎛ Mb ⎞
D1 = 0,1 ⋅ D t 6 1 + ⎜ ⎟
3 ⎝ QR ⎠
C3.10.6.1 Rudder stock diameter
QR = see C3.10.5.1.2
.1 The diameter of the rudder stock for trans- Dt = see C3.10.6.1.1
mitting the rudder torque is not to be less than:
Dt = 4, 2 3 QR ⋅ k r [mm] Note
QR = see C3.10.5.1.2 Where a double-piston steering gear is fitted, addi-
tional bending moments may be transmitted from the
The related torsional stress is: steering gear into the rudder stock. These additional
bending moments are to be taken into account for
68
τt = [N / mm 2 ] determining the rudder stock diameter.
kr
kr = see C3.10.3.2 C3.10.6.3 Analysis

.2 The steering gear is to be determined for the .1 General

rudder torque QR as required in C3.10.5.1.2 and un-
der consideration of the frictional losses at the rudder
bearings.
.3 In case of mechanical steering gear the di-
ameter of the rudder stock in its upper part which is
only intended for transmission of the torsional mo-
ment from the auxiliary steering gear may be 0,9 Dt.
The length of the edge of the quadrangle for the aux-
The evaluation of bending moments, shear forces and
support forces for the system rudder - rudder stock
may be carried out for some basic rudder type as
shown in Fig. C3.10.1 as outlined in .2 to .3.
.2 Data for the analysis
10 – 30 = lengths of the individual girders of the
system [m]
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures I - Part 3
Page 3–68 GL 2012

Load on rudder body (general): C3.10.7.2 Cone couplings

CR C3.10.7.2.1 Cone couplings with key
pR = [kN / m]
⋅ 103
10 .1 Cone couplings shall have a taper c on dia-
meter of 1 : 8 - 1 : 12. c = (d0 – du)/ according to
CR, see C3.10.5.1.1
Fig. C3.10.3.
.3 Moments and forces to be evaluated The cone shapes should fit very exact. The nut is to
be carefully secured, e.g. by a securing plate as
.3.1 The bending moment MR and the shear force shown in Fig. C3.10.3.
Q1 in the rudder body, the bending moment Mb in the
neck bearing and the support forces B2, B3 are to be .2 The coupling length shall, in general, not
evaluated. be less than 1,5 ⋅ d0.
The so evaluated moments and forces are to be used .3 For couplings between stock and rudder a
for the stress analyses required by C3.10.6.2 and key is to be provided, the shear area of which is not
C3.10.8.1. to be less than:

.3.2 The moments and forces may be determined 16 ⋅ Q F

as = [cm 2 ]
by the following formulae: d k ⋅ R eH1
⎛ 10 (2 x1 + x 2 ) ⎞ QF = design yield moment of rudder stock [Nm]
M b = C R ⎜ 20 + ⎟ [Nm]
⎝ 3 (x1 + x 2 ) ⎠ according to C3.10.9
Mb dk = diameter of the conical part of the rudder
B3 = [N]
stock [mm] at the key
30
B2 = CR + B3 [N] ReH1 = minimum nominal upper yield point of the
key material [MPa]
.4 The effective surface area of the key (with-
C3.10.7 Rudder Couplings
out rounded edges) between key and rudder stock or
cone coupling is not to be less than:
C3.10.7.1 General
5 ⋅ QF
.1 The couplings are to be designed in such a ak = [cm 2 ]
way as to enable them to transmit the full torque of d k ⋅ R eH2
the rudder stock.
ReH2 = minimum nominal upper yield point of the
.2 For spade rudders only cone couplings are key, stock or coupling material [MPa],
permitted, in general. whichever is less.

B3
30

B2
20

C2
Mb
10

pR

C1 Load M Q

Fig. C3.10.2 Spade rudder

I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 3–69

.5 The dimensions of the slugging nut are to be

as follows, see Fig. C3.10.3:

– height:

hn = 0,6 ⋅ dg

– outer diameter (the greater value to be taken):

dn = 1,2 ⋅ du or dn = 1,5 ⋅ dg dg
Securing
flat bar d1
– external thread diameter:
Fig. C3.10.4 Cone coupling without key and with
dg = 0,65 ⋅ d0 securing flat bar

.6 It is to be proved that 50 % of the design Note

yield moment will be solely transmitted by friction in A securing flat bar will be regarded as an effective
the cone couplings. This can be done by calculating securing device of the nut, if its shear area is not less
the required push-up pressure and push-up length than:
according to C3.10.7.3 for a torsional moment Q'F =
0,5 ⋅ QF. Ps ⋅ 3
As = [ mm 2 ]
ReH
d0
insulation
Ps = shear force as follows

liner Pe ⎛d ⎞
= ⋅ μ1 ⎜ 1 − 0,6 ⎟ [N]
sealing/ 2 ⎜ dg ⎟
insulation ⎝ ⎠
Pe = push-up force according to C3.10.7.3.3.2
da [N]
dm μ1 = frictional coefficient between nut and rudder
body, normally μ1 = 0,3
du d1 = mean diameter of the frictional area between
nut and rudder body, see C3.10.4
hn

dg dg = thread diameter of the nut

securing
dn plate for nut ReH = yield point [MPa] of the securing flat bar
material

Fig. C3.10.3 Cone coupling with key and secur- .3 For the safe transmission of the torsional
ing plate moment by the coupling between rudder stock and
rudder body the push-up length and the push-up pres-
C3.10.7.3 Cone couplings with special arrange- sure are to be determined by the following formulae.
ments for mounting and dismounting
the couplings .3.1 Push-up pressure
The push-up pressure is not to be less than the greater
.1 Where the stock diameter exceeds 200 mm of the two following values:
the press fit is recommended to be effected by a hy-
draulic pressure connection. In such cases the cone 2 ⋅ QF ⋅ 103
p req1 = [MPa]
shall be more slender, c ≈ 1 : 12 to ≈ 1 : 20. d 2m ⋅ ⋅ π ⋅ μ0

.2 In case of hydraulic pressure connections the 6 ⋅ M b ⋅ 103

p req2 = [MPa]
2
nut is to be effectively secured against the rudder ⋅ dm
stock or the pintle. A securing plate for securing the
nut against the rudder body is not to be provided, see QF = design yield moment of rudder stock accord-
Fig. C3.10.4. ing to C3.10.9 [Nm]
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures I - Part 3
Page 3–70 GL 2012

dm = mean cone diameter [mm] Where due to the fitting procedure a partial push-up
effect caused by the rudder weight is given, this may
= cone length [mm] be taken into account when fixing the required push-
up length, subject to approval by GL.
μ0 = 0,15 (frictional coefficient)
Mb = bending moment in the cone coupling (e.g.
in case of spade rudders) [Nm] C3.10.8 Rudder Body, Rudder Bearings

It has to be proved that the push-up pressure does not C3.10.8.1 Strength of rudder body
exceed the permissible surface pressure in the cone.
.1 The rudder body is to be stiffened by hori-
The permissible surface pressure is to be determined
zontal and vertical webs in such a manner that the
by the following formula:
rudder body will be effective as a beam. The rudder

p perm =
(
0,8 ⋅ R eH 1 − α 2 ) shall be additionally stiffened at the aft edge.
.2 The strength of the rudder body is to be
3 + α4 proved by direct calculation according to C3.10.6.3
ReH = yield point [MPa] of the material of the .3 For rudder bodies without cut-outs the per-
gudgeon missible stress are limited to:
dm bending stress due to MR:
α = (see Fig. C3.10.3)
da σb = 110 MPa

The outer diameter of the gudgeon shall not be less shear stress due to Q1:
than: τ = 50 MPa
da = 1,5 ⋅ d m [mm]
equivalent stress due to bending and shear:
.3.2 Push-up length σv = σ2b + 3τ2 = 120 MPa
The push-up length is not to be less than:
MR, Q1 see C3.10.6.3.3.
preq ⋅ dm 0,8 ⋅ R tm
Δ1 = + [mm] In case of openings in the rudder plating for access to
⎛1 − α ⎞2 c cone coupling the permissible stresses according to
E⎜ ⎟ c
⎜ 2 ⎟ 1.4 apply. Smaller permissible stress values may be
⎝ ⎠
required if the corner radii are less than 0,15 ⋅ ho,
Rtm = mean roughness [mm] where ho = height of opening.

≈ 0,01 mm .4 In rudder bodies with cut-outs the following

stress values are not to be exceeded:
c = taper on diameter according to C3.10.7.3.1
bending stress due to MR:
E = Young's modulus (2,06 ⋅ 105 MPa)
σb = 90 MPa
The push-up length is, however, not to be taken
greater than: shear stress due to Q1:
1,6 ⋅ R eH ⋅ d m 0,8 ⋅ R tm τ = 50 MPa
Δ 2 = + [mm]
3 + α 4
E ⋅ c c
torsional stress due to Mt:

Note τt = 50 MPa

In case of hydraulic pressure connections the re-

quired push-up force Pe for the cone may be deter- The distance between the vertical webs shall not
exceed 1,2 ⋅ h.
mined by the following formula:
The radii in the rudder plating are not to be less than
⎛c ⎞ 4 – 5 times the plate thickness, but in no case less
Pe = preq ⋅ d m ⋅ π ⋅ ⎜ + 0,02 ⎟ [N]
⎝2 ⎠ than 50 mm.

The value 0,02 is a reference for the friction coeffi- C3.10.8.2 Rudder plating
cient using oil pressure. It varies and depends on the
mechanical treatment and roughness of the details to .1 The thickness of the rudder plating is to be
be fixed. determined according to the following formula:
I - Part 3 Section 3 Structures Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 3–71

t = 1, 74 ⋅ a pR ⋅ k + t k [mm] B
Ab = [mm 2 ]
q
tk = 2 mm for steel,
B = support force [N]
= 0 mm for aluminium
q = permissible surface pressure acc. to Table
CR C3.10.2
pR = 10 ⋅ T + [kPa]
3
10 ⋅ A
Table C3.10.2 Permissible surface pressure q
a = the smaller unsupported width of a plate
panel [m] Bearing material q [N/mm2]
The thickness shall, however, not be less than the lignum vitae 2,5
thickness tmin of hull bottom plating. white metal, oil lubricated 4,5
Regarding dimensions and welding GL Rules Hull synthetic material 1 5,5
Structures (I-1-1), Section 19, B.4.4.1 have to be steel 2, bronze and hot-pressed
observed in addition. 7,0
bronze-graphite materials
.2 For connecting the side plating of the rudder 1 Synthetic materials to be of approved type.
to the webs tenon welding is not to be used. Where Surface pressures exceeding 5,5 N/mm2 may be accepted
in accordance with bearing manufacturer's specification
application of fillet welding is not practicable, the and tests, but in no case more than 10 N/mm2.
side plating is to be connected by means of slot weld- 2 Stainless and wear resistant steel in an approved combi-
ing to flat bars which are welded to the webs (on one nation with stock liner. Higher surface pressures than
side of the rudder only). 7 N/mm2 may be accepted if verified by tests.

.3 The thickness of the webs is not to be less

than 70 % of the thickness of the rudder plating ac-
cording to .1. Webs exposed to seawater shall be
dimensioned according to .1.
C3.10.8.3 Transmitting of the rudder torque
.1 For transmitting the rudder torque, the rud-
der plating according to C3.10.8.2.1 is to be increased
by 25 % in way of the coupling. A sufficient number
of vertical webs is to be fitted in way of the coupling.
.5 Stainless and wear resistant steels, bronze
and hot-pressed bronze-graphit materials have a con-
siderable difference in potential to non-alloyed steel.
Respective preventive measures are required.
.6 The bearing height shall be equal to the
bearing diameter, however, is not to exceed 1,2 times
the bearing diameter. Where the bearing depth is less
than the bearing diameter, higher specific surface
pressures may be allowed.

.2 If the torque is transmitted by a prolonged C3.10.8.5 Guidance values for bearing clear-
shaft extended into the rudder, the latter shall have ances
the diameter Dt or D1, whichever is greater, at the .1 For metallic bearing material the bearing
upper 10 % of the intersection length. Downwards it clearance shall generally not be less than:
may be tapered to 0,6 Dt, in spade rudders to 0,4
db
times the strengthened diameter, if sufficient support + 1, 0 [mm]
is provided for. 1000
db = inner diameter of bush
C3.10.8.4 Rudder bearings
.2 If non-metallic bearing material is applied,
.1 In way of bearings liners and bushes are to the bearing clearance is to be specially determined
be fitted. Their minimum thickness is considering the material's swelling and thermal ex-
tmin = 8 mm for metallic materials and syn- pansion properties.
thetic material .3 The clearance is not to be taken less than
= 22 mm for lignum material 1,5 mm on diameter. In case of self lubricating
bushes going down below this value can be agreed to
Where in case of small ships bushes are not fitted, the on the basis of the manufacturer's specification.
rudder stock is to be suitably increased in diameter in
way of bearings enabling the stock to be re-machined C3.10.9 Design Yield Moment of Rudder Stock
later. The design yield moment of the rudder stock is to be
determined by the following formula:
.2 An adequate lubrication is to be provided.
D3t
.3 The projected bearing surface Ab (bearing Q F = 0, 02664 [Nm]
kr
height × external diameter of liner) is not to be less
than Dt = stock diameter [mm] according to C3.10.6.1
Chapter 1 Section 3 Structures
Page 3–72
Where the actual diameter Dta is greater than the
calculated diameter Dt, the diameter Dta is to be
used. However, Dta need not be taken greater than
1,145 ⋅ Dt.
C3.10.10 Stopper, Locking Device
.1 Stopper
The motions of quadrants or tillers are to be limited
on either side by stoppers. Except where the steering
gear is provided with its own rudder stopping de-
vices, the stoppers and their foundations connected to
the ship's hull are to be of strong construction so that
the yield point of the applied materials is not ex-
ceeded at the design yield moment of the rudder
stock.
.2 Locking device
Each steering gear is to be provided with a locking
device in order to keep the rudder fixed at any posi-
tion. This device as well as the foundation in the
ship's hull are to be of strong construction so that the
yield point of the applied materials is not exceeded at
the design yield moment of the rudder stock as speci-
fied in C3.10.9.
Where the ship's speed exceeds 12 kn, the design
yield moment need only be calculated for a stock
diameter based on a speed v0 = 12 kn.
C3.11 Stabilizers
C3.11.1 General
Two different situations are to be considered for the
purpose of Section 3, depending on the main function
of the stabilisation system.
– In general, the stabilisation system (foils, trim
tabs or interceptors) is only a motion reduction or
a ride control system. The hydrodynamic effects
of fin stabilizers on the rolling or pitching behav-
iour of the ship are not part of the classification
procedure. The classification however includes
the integration of the system into the hull struc-
ture.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
– The second situation is that the stabilisation sys-
tem is associated with the safe operation of the
craft as described in 16.1.1. In that case, the sys-
tem has to comply to the present Rules.
C3.11.2 Classification process
.1 The complete bearing system and the drive
unit directly mounted at the fin stock are to be situ-
ated within an own watertight compartment of mod-
erate size at the ship's side or bottom. For installation
purposes, inspection and maintenance watertight
closable openings (with safeguards that they can be
opened only during docking) have to be provided in
suitable number and size.
For retractable fins a recess of sufficient size to har-
bour the complete fin has to be provided in addition
at the ship’s shell.
.2 At the penetration of the fin stock and at the
slot of retractable fins, the shell has to be strength-
ened in a sufficient way.
.3 The watertight boundaries of the fin recess,
if applicable, and of the drive compartment have to
be dimensioned according to bottom and side shell
requirements. Special attention has to be given to the
transmission of the fin support forces from the stock
bearings into the ship's structure. The local rein-
forcements and the overall transmission of the forces
by girders, web frames, etc. have to be defined by
direct calculations considering fatigue strength and
have to be included in the hull drawings submitted.
.4 If the fin body extends over the maximum
breadth of the ship, the location of non-retractable
fins should be marked on the shell.
.5 Possible interferences between hydraulic
installation and the safety of the craft are of concern,
only. The applicable regulations depend on the loca-
tion of the hydraulic power pack. The working prin-
ciples are not checked. However, the hydraulic sys-
tem documentation is to be submitted.
.6 For the second situation the structure of the
stabilisation devices, hydraulic system used for acti-
vation of stabilisation system and associated electri-
cal devices has additionally comply to the present
rule.
I - Part 3 Appendix C3A1 Special Requirements for Scantlings of Hydrofoil Hull Structures
GL 2012
Appendix C3A1
Special Requirements for Scantlings of Hydrofoil Hull Structures
C3A1.1 Foreword
.1 The requirements of this Appendix apply to
hydrofoils, i.e. craft which can sail both at high speed,
with the hull emerging from the water surface, sup-
ported by the hydrodynamic lift of a system of con-
nected underwater foil planes (foils), and as conven-
tional floating craft during manoeuvring operations or
in emergency conditions.
.2 Where not expressly specified, the symbols
used here are those already defined in this Section.
.3 This Appendix generally covers hydrofoils
with a length L ≤ 35 m and fitted with two foils, a bow
and an after foil, and a screw propeller, having a
maximum sailing speed on foils of 40 knots, and in-
tended for the carriage of passengers and, if applica-
ble, of cargo.
.4 Hydrofoils with characteristics other than
those above, or which are not designed in accordance
with these Rules, are to be individually considered.
C3A1.2 General
.1 The hull is to be designed with the aim of
achieving safe navigation of the hydrofoil, both when
emerging on foils and when floating under the differ-
ent displacement, trim and stability conditions, in still
water and in sea waves, which are expected in service.
The designer is to establish, by calculations and, if
necessary, tank tests on models, hull shapes, weights
and their distribution, the position, shape and type of
foils and the thrust of the propulsion system in order
to ensure suitable structural strength of the hull and
safe transverse and longitudinal stability of the hydro-
foil, with particular reference to transient conditions of
lifting from water, alighting on water and turning.
.2 Hydrofoils covered by this Appendix gener-
ally have hard chine hulls as well as bottoms present-
ing a significant deadrise, bow foil within 1/3 L of the
bow and after foil within 1/3 L of the stern.
Foils may be of the partially submerged Vee (narrow
or wide) self-stabilizing type, or of the completely
submerged, horizontal non-self-stabilizing type fitted
with automatic stabilizing devices; foils may be of the
fixed or lifting type.
.3 In the case of hydrofoils with general charac-
teristics substantially different from those above or
having special arrangements, GL reserves the right to
require appropriate additional calculations as well as
Chapter 1
Page A1–1
tank tests on models, followed, if necessary, by ex-
haustive sea trials before entry into service.
C3A1.3 Definitions and Symbols
L = Rule length, in m (see C3.1),
La = longitudinal distance, in m, between mid bow
foil and mid after foil, measured parallel to L,
Lft = overall length, in m,
B = moulded breadth, in m (see C3.1),
Ba = greatest foil breadth, in m,
D = depth, in m (see C3.1),
Da = greatest depth, in m, measured vertically from
the lower side of the more deeply submerged
foil to the corresponding top of the deck beam,
at the side of the main deck,
T = draught, in m (see C3.1),
Ta = greatest draught, in m, of the more deeply
submerged foil, measured vertically with craft
at rest,
T’a = greatest draught, in m, of the more deeply
submerged foil, measured vertically with full
load craft on sailing trim on foils,
fm = coefficient depending on the material:
− 1,00 for steel structures
− 1,45 for aluminium alloy structures
f’m = coefficient depending on the material:
− 1,00 for steel structures
− 2,15 for aluminium alloy structures
k = material factor defined in Section 3, C3.2
C3A1.4 Documents to be submitted
.1 In addition to the plans and information listed
in C3.0, the following calculations, specifications and
plans (in triplicate) are to be submitted to GL for ap-
proval, together with the following information:
(a) outer shell expansion, including stiffeners in way
of foils, rudder, stern tubes and propeller shaft
brackets;
(b) structure of foils and relevant hull connection
stiffeners as well as quality of materials employed,
with specification of intended heat treatments and
non-destructive tests;
Chapter 1 Appendix C3A1 Special Requirements for Scantlings of Hydrofoil Hull Structures I - Part 3
Page A1–2 GL 2012

(c) calculations and diagrams relevant to the longitu-
dinal strength of the hull;
(d) calculation of foil structure strength, including the
specification of the loading conditions considered
and restraints assumed.
.2 Any other documents, calculations and plans
deemed useful by GL for the purpose of classification
are also to be submitted.
C3A1.5 Longitudinal Strength
C3A1.5.1 General
.1 The longitudinal strength of the hull is to be
calculated for at least the two conditions specified
below, adopting the more severe of the resulting scant-
lings.
(a) Floating hydrofoil
Hydrofoil floating in still water,
(b) Emerging hydrofoil on foils
(1) Emerging hydrofoil supported by its foils and
considered on its sailing trim in still water without
any additional motion, taking account, in the act-
ing forces diagram, of the vertical components
(lift) of hydrodynamic forces on the foils,
(2) Hydrofoil in the conditions specified in (1) but in
sea waves, taking account of pitching, rolling and
heaving motions, and of consequent acceleration
and forces of inertia.
.2 The calculation of the hull cross-section
modulus is to include the shells and associated stiffen-
ers which, due to their longitudinal continuity, effec-
tively contribute to longitudinal strength.
.3 As regards the acceleration values and wave
characteristics to be assumed in the calculations, they
are to include the severest sea conditions expected for
the hydrofoil in service, according to the provisions in
C3.3.
In general, maximum σstresses occur at about 0,5 La,
and maximum τ stresses in way of the bow foil.
.2 Attention is to be paid to scantling distribu-
tion for structures contributing to the longitudinal
strength of the different hull zones, so as to avoid
structural discontinuities, which would give rise to
peaks in the diagrams of moments of inertia and of
section moduli, with consequent abrupt variations in
stresses. The structures constituting the hull are also to
comply with the requirements for local hull strength,
set out below.
.3 For hydrofoils with length L ≤ 35m, the Rule
midship section moduli at bottom Zb and at deck Zd,
in cm3, are given by the formula:
Zb = Zd = (6,3 ⋅La 60) ⋅103
.4 The section modulus is, in any case, to be
such as to comply with the allowable stresses given in
Table C3A1.1.
.5 The section moduli of the cross-sections Wb
at bottom and Wd at deck are conventionally obtained
by dividing the moment of inertia of the cross-section
under consideration by the vertical distance between
the horizontal neutral axis and the base line, and by
the distance between this axis and the top of the deck
beam, at the side, of the strength deck, respectively.
.6 To calculate the moment of inertia of the
above cross-sections, the net cross-section of continu-
ous elements contributing to longitudinal strength, and
therefore reduced for openings, manholes and other
holes which are not completely compensated, is to be
taken into account; in the case of riveted structures, in
contrast, rivet holes in shells and bars are not required
to be deducted from the strength cross-section.
C3A1.6 Local Strength
C3A1.6.1 General

C3A1.5.2 Allowable stresses Rule values of mid- .1 Hull structure dimensions are to comply with
ship section modulus / Section modulus the relevant requirements of this Section considering
calculation the craft as floating, and neglecting dynamic effects
due to accelerations, impact and wave loads.
.1 The maximum allowable bending stresses σ
at deck and bottom and shear stress τ at sides are gen- .2 The structural arrangements to be adopted in
erally not to exceed the values given in Table C3A1.1. these craft are specified below, together with mini-
mum scantlings to be satisfied in any case.
Table C3A1.1 Maximum allowable stresses
.3 The scantlings of the outer shell, decks and
Hydrofoil relevant stiffeners contributing to local hull strength
σ at σ at τ at are to comply with the requirements of this Appendix.
under
bottom deck sides They are to be increased, if necessary, depending on
conditions
specified in: [N/mm2] [N/mm2] [N/mm2] the longitudinal strength as required in C3A1.5.
C3A1.5.1.1 (a)
45 / (k⋅f'm) 45 / (k⋅f'm) 40 / (k⋅f'm) .4 The spacing of secondary stiffeners is, in
C3A1.5.1.1 (b)(1)
general, not to exceed 300 mm, at least in way of foils,
C3A1.5.1.1 (b)(2) 85 / (k⋅f'm) 85 / (k⋅f'm) 70 / (k⋅f'm) the machinery space and forward of the bow foil.
I - Part 3 Appendix C3A1 Special Requirements for Scantlings of Hydrofoil Hull Structures
GL 2012
.5 Primary transverse frames, consisting of
floors, side transverses and deck transverses, are to be
fitted both where the structure of ordinary stiffeners is
of the transverse type and where it is of the longitudi-
nal type.
In the first case, the frames give support to bottom
girders, side stringers and deck girders, which in turn,
support the ordinary shell stiffeners, i.e., floors, webs
and beams, respectively; in the second case they sup-
port the longitudinals directly.
Structures different from the above are to be individu-
ally considered in each case.
C3A1.6.2 Bottom shell plating
.1 The thickness tb, in mm, of the bottom shell,
in the area from the bow foil to the stern, is in no case
to be less than:
3 ⋅ fm ⋅ k
.2 The thickness tk of the keel strake is to be, in
general, at least equal to 1,2 times the thickness
adopted for the bottom and in no case less than 4 mm.
.3 The bottom thickness tbf in the area forward
of the bow foil is to be at least 1,2 tb, provided that the
takeoff speed of the hydrofoil is not greater than ap-
proximately 20 knots and the maximum sailing speed
on foils is not greater than approximately 40 knots.
For greater speeds, the thickness tbf is to be individu-
ally considered in each case, depending on the results
of calculations and, if necessary, experiments to be
performed by the designer, to assess the hydrody-
namic force on the shell due to water in the takeoff
stage and the wave action on the shell in the sailing
condition on foils at maximum service speed.
.4 Takeoff speed is intended as the minimum
speed necessary to lift the hull on foils in still water.
.5 In way of foils, the bottom thickness is to be
increased appropriately and in no case is it to be less
than, in mm:
5 ⋅ fm ⋅ k
C3A1.6.3 Side shell plating
.1 The thickness ts, in mm, of the side shell is to
be not less than:
3 ⋅ fm ⋅ k
.2 The thickness ts, in mm, from 0,1 L aft the
bow foil to 0,1 L forward of such foil is to be not less
than:
5 ⋅ fm ⋅ k
Chapter 1
Page A1–3
.3 The thickness tsh of the sheerstrake, for the
whole hull length, is to be at least equal to that of the
corresponding side.
.4 Where, on the sheerstrake, side ports or side
scuttles or other large openings are fitted, the thick-
ness is to be increased such as to compensate these
openings.
.5 The thickness tsh is also to be increased in
way of end bulkheads of any castles, or, in any case,
in way of steps in the strength deck.
.6 In way of foils, the side thickness is to be
suitably increased and is, in no case, to be less than, in
mm:
5 ⋅ fm ⋅ k
C3A1.6.4 Deck and flat plating
.1 The thickness td, in mm, of the deck plating is
to be not less than:
3 ⋅ fm ⋅ k
.2 The thickness tst of the stringer plate of the
strength deck is to be at least equal to that adopted for
the sheerstrake or for the remaining deck plating,
whichever is greater.
.3 The thickness, in mm, of decks below the
strength deck, generally consisting of flats, is to be not
less than:
− if the ’tween deck is intended for accommodation
or similar:
2 ⋅ fm ⋅ k
− if the deck forms a tank bottom or tank top:
2,5 ⋅ f m ⋅ k
C3A1.6.5 Bottom structure
.1 For the bottom, longitudinal framing extend-
ing through the whole length is generally required,
except for extreme stern and extreme bow areas,
where the framing is generally transverse.
.2 In way of the bow foil and after foil, ordinary
floors of suitable scantlings, to be individually consid-
ered in each case, are to be fitted. In way of the fore
foil, the floor spacing is generally to be one half the
frame spacing.
.3 In the machinery space, at least two girders
on each side are to be fitted, at least one of which is to
be fitted in way of one of the engine seating girders.
.4 In the area forward of the bow foil, at least
one girder on each side is to be fitted. The height, in
general, is to be at least equal to that of the bottom
Chapter 1 Appendix C3A1 Special Requirements for Scantlings of Hydrofoil Hull Structures
Page A1–4
transverses, and preferably located in the same plane
as a deck girder, if fitted. The girder thickness is to be
not less than, in mm:
3 ⋅ fm ⋅ k
.5 At the bow foil and after foil, the number and
scantlings of the floors are to be individually consid-
ered in each case, depending on the type of structure
proposed. In any case, two floors belonging to com-
plete transverse rings (side and deck transverses) are
to be fitted, and located one forward and the other aft
of the hull penetrations of the bow foil bearing arm.
Intermediate floors in this area are to be positioned,
between those usually fitted at each frame spacing,
and all such bottom transverses are to have a section
modulus of at least 1,25 times that required for the
area aft of the engine room.
.6 In the area forward of the bow foil, the floors
are generally to have a section modulus of at least 1,8
times that required for the area aft of the engine room
and a spacing not greater than four web spacings. In
the usual case of bottoms presenting forward a dea-
drise angle greater than approximately 25°, the floors
are to have a horizontal upper edge and a height of at
least 0,2 ⋅ D in the centreline.
.7 In the case the takeoff and sailing speed of
the hydrofoil are greater than those specified in
C3A1.6.2.3, the scantlings of the forward floors are to
be individually considered in each case.
C3A1.6.6 Side structure
.1 This structure may be of the transverse type,
i.e. consisting of ordinary webs, supported by stringers
(or flats) and side transverses belonging to the primary
transverse rings, or, for hydrofoils with length L
greater than approximately 20 m, of the longitudinal
type, i.e. consisting of longitudinals supported by side
transverses belonging to these rings.
.2 Continuity of the longitudinals is to be en-
sured, considering their contribution to the longitudi-
nal strength of the hull.
.3 Side transverses are to be fitted for the pur-
pose of supporting the longitudinals, and side stringers
(or flats), to be individually considered in each case,
are to be fitted in way of and forward of the machinery
space.
.4 In way of foils, scantlings are to be individu-
ally considered in each case.
.5 The section modulus of the side transverses
forward of the bow foil is to be individually consid-
ered in each case: in any event, two side transverses
are to be fitted in way of the floors located forward
and aft of the hull penetrations of the bow foil bearing
arm, for which in general:
h / S ≥ 0,25
I - Part 3
GL 2012
where h is the web height and S is the conventional
span of the side transverse.
.6 In way of the bow and after foils and in the
case of side transverses supporting deck bracket-
transverses, the provisions of C3A1.6.5.5 to
C3A1.6.5.7 apply.
.7 In the area forward of the bow foil, the side
transverses are preferably to have an h/S ratio of at
least 0,2. As regards the case of high hydrofoil speeds,
the provisions of C3A1.6.5.5 to C3A1.6.5.7 are to be
complied with.
C3A1.6.7 Deck structure
.1 Strength deck stiffeners may be of the trans-
verse type where constituted by beams supported by
girders which are in turn supported by deck trans-
verses belonging to the primary transverse rings,
which may or may not be associated with pillars; such
stiffeners are of the longitudinal type where they con-
sist of longitudinals supported by the deck transverses.
The latter structure is recommended where L > 20 m.
.2 Stiffeners of decks below the strength deck
and stiffeners of flats intended for passenger accom-
modation or forming the top of the machinery space
are to have a section modulus not less than, in cm3:
4 ⋅ fm ⋅ k
.3 Where the deck or flat forms the top of a tank
for liquids, the provisions of C3.7 or C3.8 are to be
complied with.
.4 The scantlings of stiffeners fitted on account
of special structural requirements, for example in way
of foils, are to be individually considered in each case.
.5 Deck transverses are to be fitted in way of
side transverses, so as to constitute members of com-
plete transverse rings.
.6 They may instead be of the bracket type in
the general case of hydrofoils for which L is less than
approximately 15 m, and fitted with long deck open-
ings; in such case, deck transverses, continuous from
side to side, are to be fitted at least immediately aft
and forward of the machinery space and forward of
the bow foil. An intermediate flat, between bottom
and deck, is to be fitted at least in the area aft of the
machinery space.
.7 The scantlings of deck transverses in way of
foils and the scantlings of panting deck transverses
fitted in the fore peak, at approximately mid-depth
between bottom and deck, are to be individually con-
sidered in each case.
.8 Owing to their span (roughly 0,3 to 0,5 m),
deck transverses of the bracket type are generally
composed of wide brackets connected to the web
frame and the side stringer of the deck opening. The
I - Part 3 Appendix C3A1 Special Requirements for Scantlings of Hydrofoil Hull Structures
GL 2012
scantlings of such deck transverses are to be individu-
ally considered in each case.
C3A1.6.8 Watertight bulkheads
.1 For the hydrofoils considered in this Appen-
dix, four watertight subdivision bulkheads are gener-
ally required to be fitted as follows:
− watertight collision bulkhead, located not less than
0,05 ⋅ L from the forward perpendicular and, in
general, not more than 0,08 ⋅ L from the same per-
pendicular,
− fore and after watertight bulkhead of the machin-
ery space,
− after watertight bulkhead, located, in general,
about 0,05 ⋅ L from the aft perpendicular, but in no
case more than 0,08 ⋅ L from the same perpendicu-
lar.
.2 In the case of hydrofoils intended for the
carriage of passengers, the watertight subdivision
bulkheads are also to satisfy the relevant requirements
of Section 2.
C3A1.7 Foils
C3A1.7.1 General
.1 The type, shape and location of foils is to be
determined by the designer based upon the general
design provisions specified in C3A1.2, taking account
of the fact that the essential function of foils is to
support the hull, emerging at a sufficient height above
the water surface so as to allow sailing even in waves,
while ensuring the stability of the hydrofoil at the
same time.
After determining these characteristics, the strength
calculations for foils and relevant hull supporting
connections are to be performed.
.2 In the case of hydrofoils with foil types other
than those considered below, GL reserves the right,
after examining the calculations, to require special
checks and tests, as specified in C3A1.2.
.3 The foil profile and shape are to comply with
the provisions of the present article and, even when
sailing in waves, to avoid cavitation phenomena dan-
gerous for the stability of the hydrofoil.
.4 Calculation of the forces acting on the hydro-
foil may be performed by considering the craft in
sailing condition on foils in still water.
.5 The following acting forces are assumed:
− hydrofoil weight, at least in the two conditions of
full load and without passengers
− hydrodynamic resistance of the bow foil and after
foil and associated lift
− thrust of propellers
Chapter 1
Page A1–5
.6 For the equilibrium, the algebraic sum of the
acting forces and relevant moments with respect to the
hydrofoil’s centre of gravity is obviously to be equal
to zero.
.7 In addition, the hydrofoil is to be considered
during its turning manoeuvres. This means that water
thrust on the rudder, whose action gives rise to varia-
tions in the hydrodynamic resistance and in the lift
distribution on foils, as well as the forces generated by
balancing flaps, are to be added to the forces above.
.8 Moreover, taking into account the most se-
vere dynamic conditions expected for the hydrofoil in
service, the above forces and, in addition, forces of
inertia generated by rolling, pitching and heaving,
including those during takeoff from the water and
alighting on the water, are to be considered in the
designer’s calculations.
The characteristics of such motions, i.e. oscillation
amplitude and period, and the consequent acceleration
from which the forces of inertia originate, are to be
considered individually by GL in each case, based
upon the experience already gained, if the hydrofoil
under consideration is similar to previous ones which
have given good results in service, or, otherwise, upon
the results of exhaustive tank tests on models, as well
as sea trials on the hydrofoil itself, before entry into
service.
C3A1.7.2 Foil strength calculations
.1 In the case of V-type or W-type foils, each is
usually connected, by quasi-vertical or vertical arms,
to a horizontal member, fitted transversely with re-
spect to the hull, and supported by special hull struc-
tures.
The foils and arms may therefore in such cases be
considered, overall, as a system consisting of beams
and joints supported by the hull structures.
.2 The forces acting on the foils consist of hy-
drodynamic resistance and lift, as well as the reactions
of the structures mentioned above which balance such
forces.
.3 Strength calculations are therefore to take
account of the nature of the restraints from the hull on
the reticular system and acting forces, in the loading
conditions specified above, as well as of the mechani-
cal properties of the materials employed, which are
generally high-strength welding steels.
.4 In particular, diagrams of bending moments
and axial and shear forces acting on the foils are to be
plotted and the stresses deriving from them are to be
calculated.
Chapter 1 Appendix C3A1 Special Requirements for Scantlings of Hydrofoil Hull Structures
Page A1–6
C3A1.7.3 Foil construction
.1 The foil joints are generally constituted of
forged or cast steel, or are obtained from plate, while
the beams are to be made of fabricated plating, and
connections are to be welded.
.2 Since, due to the shape and dimensions of the
foil profile, the foils themselves are not internally
accessible, and therefore back-welding of all welded
joints is not possible, the constructional plan is to
specify special types of edge preparation, welding
sequence and performance, to ensure the absence of
defects and minimise internal stresses due to shrinkage
at welds.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
In particular, the number of slot-welded joints on
plating is to be minimised.
.3 Materials are to be tested by GL, and elec-
trodes and welding processes are to be recognised as
suitable in accordance with the Rules.
.4 Butt-joints are to be subjected to radiographic
examination and, if inaccessible from one side, to
magnetic particle or dye-penetrant examination.
.5 Depending on the quality of the material
adopted and on welding processes, GL reserves the
right to require thermal stress-relieving in the furnace
after welding.
I - Part 3 Appendix C3A2 Requirements for Scantlings of Air-cushion Vehicle Hull Structures
GL 2012
Appendix C3A2
Requirements for Scantlings of Air-cushion Vehicle Hull Structures
C3A2.1 Foreword
The requirements of this Appendix apply to “flexible
skirt hovercraft”, i.e. air-cushion vehicles with a
downwardly-extending flexible structure used to
contain or divide the air-cushion. This type of air-
cushion vehicle is amphibious.
Unless otherwise specified, the symbols used here are
those already defined in C3.1.
C3A2.2 General
C3A2.2.1 Definitions and symbols
Wmax = maximum operational weight: the
weight up to which operation in the in-
tended mode is permitted [kg]
Wmin = minimum operational weight: is the
minimum overall weight at which the
craft is permitted to operate under nor-
mal conditions [kg]
The Wmin is the sum of the weights of:
  basic weight: weight of the craft with
its basic equipment, including a de-
clared quantity of oil and unusable
fuel, without any passengers and pay-
load [kg]
  weight of a minimum crew to ensure
a save manoeuvring and navigation
of the craft [kg]
L = maximum length of the rigid structure
[m]
LCG = longitudinal centre of gravity, measured
from stern [m]
Section = longitudinal fragmentation of craft into
parts of equal length
Station = centre of one section
C3A2.3 Documents to be submitted
C3A2.3.1 Documents submitted for approval
In addition to the information stipulated in C3.0, the
following information and drawings are requested:
 general arrangement drawing showing the general
structural layout, intended use of different spaces
and tanks, and location of propelling, lifting and
operating installations.
Chapter 1
Page A2–1
 structural members of the hull shown in side
view, plan view and cross sections, which in-
cludes hull, deck, superstructures, bulkheads,
frames, floors, bottom plating, side plating, etc.
 hull to deck joint drawing
 fuel tanks, holding tanks (material, dimensions,
connections, pressure head, fastening details)
 bonding of structural components to the hull and
to each other (for example laminate angles or
welding (procedure, throat thickness))
 engine foundation
 structural design of the propelling mountings and
integration of propelling foundation to the hull
structure with designation of maximum occurring
thrust/lifting loads in all relevant directions
 skirt and its structural integration and the occur-
ring loads at its mounting parts
 seating, foundations, supporting brackets and air
pipes of lifting plant
 landing, ground supporting and mooring ar-
rangements, if any, including handling equipment
 hoisting and handling equipment, if any, used on
board
 longitudinal weight distribution for following
loading cases:
  minimum operational weight
  maximum operational weight
 a design performance curve showing the speed in
kn vs. the significant wave height in m has to be
provided for minimum operational weight and
maximum operational weight.
This is not an exhaustive list; other drawings and
information may be required.
C3A2.3.2 Justification of scantlings
.1 Scantlings are to be justified by calculation
notes indicating relevant loads, calculation methods
and computation results.
.2 When computer calculations are carried out,
the software is to be indicated, and indications are to
be communicated with regard to structure descrip-
tion, boundary conditions and the way loads are in-
troduced.
Chapter 1 Appendix C3A2 Requirements for Scantlings of Air-cushion Vehicle Hull Structures I - Part 3
Page A2–2 GL 2012

.3 Justifications can be based on recognised .3 Determination of weight distribution,

experimental results: recorded for similar structures LCG and radius of gyration
and corrected, if required, to allow for minor varia-
The following defines the mass moment of inertia
tions of certain parameters, the effects of which have
characteristics:
been suitably evaluated.
The overall weight of each weight scenario has to be
In that case, tested structures, test conditions, meth-
distributed over the longitudinal stations likewise the
ods and results, as well as variations in the parame-
existing mass distribution.
ters and their effects on the structure in question, are
to be clearly defined. m
W = ∑ Mi
i =1
C3A2.4 Overall Loads
The overall loads addressed in this section are con- W = overall weight [kg]
sidered to subject global structural characteristics of m = total number of sections
the vessel, i.e. global sections.
Mi = mass of section i [kg]
C3A2.4.1 Loads due to water impact while
Determination of longitudinal centre of gravity:
flying
m
.1 General ∑ ( Mi ⋅ x i )
LCG = i =1
This section addresses load scenarios in which air- m
cushion vehicles are subjected to wave impacts while ∑ Mi
i =1
operating in the flying mode.
Impact by waves is causing a global response of the xi = x – location of station i [m]
vessel. The resulting inertia effects are acting on the
Determination of mass moment of inertia J [kg ⋅ m2]:
hull’s global structure and are causing a global longi-
tudinal bending and global shear loading, varying
( )
m
over the craft’s length. J = ∑ Mi ⋅ x 'i2
i =1
The amount of this inertia load is depending on fol-
lowing parameters: x’i = LCG − x i [m]

 Loading case Determination of radius of gyration k [m]:

 Speed of air cushion vehicle
 Corresponding wave 
 Location of wave impact
and has to be determined for the most severe combi-
nation which can arise within the design environ-
mental conditions and the craft limitations for which
certification is sought.
The results of these calculations are to be submitted
to GL.
.2 Principle of procedure
The craft will be divided into equally spaced longitu-
dinal sections. Weights, accelerations and the corre-
sponding inertia loads will be calculated for each
section station to result in a global force balance.
These individual forces of each section are resulting
in a characteristic bending moment and shear force
distribution.
For this procedure a detailed weight distribution has
to be provided to determine:
 Masses per section
 Craft’s centre of gravity, LCG
 Craft’s gyration radius
J
k=
W
As described in C3A2.4.1.1, the wave’s impact leads
to inertia loads, acting on the whole structure of the
craft. The loads consist mainly of two components,
which are the overall vertical acceleration and the
angular acceleration. Both depend amongst others on
the location of the impact. Does the wave impact the
craft at its LCG, the crafts reaction will result in ver-
tical acceleration only, whereas an impact off the
LCG will result in an overall vertical acceleration and
angular acceleration. Both types of acceleration will
be determined separately and will be superimposed
afterwards.
.4 Vertical acceleration
The overall vertical acceleration is depending on the
maximum speed of the craft, the craft’s overall
weight, the vertical speed of impact and location of
impact. It can be expressed by the formula:
K x ⋅ Vv ⋅ V
nW =
( )
2/3
W1/ 3 ⋅ 1 + rG2
nW = impact load of the craft at position xi of
spot of the impact [g]
I - Part 3 Appendix C3A2 Requirements for Scantlings of Air-cushion Vehicle Hull Structures Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page A2–3

nWmin = 0,5 xi, impact = distance of station of wave impact to

LCG [m]
Kx = coefficient depending on position xi of
spot of the impact, determined according .6 Superimposing of accelerations
to Fig. C3A2.1
The superimposing of both, the vertical (see
Vv = relative vertical speed of impact [m/s] C3A2.4.1.4) and the tangential acceleration gives the
occurring (vertical) acceleration for each station.
V = the maximum speed of air-cushion vehi-
cle [m/s]. It correlates to a significant Equation of superimposed vertical acceleration at the
wave height H. The relation between V rearmost station, nv, aft:
and H is to be provided by the designer
as the design performance curve. n v, aft = n w,i − n a ⋅ x aft
rG = ratio of distance measured parallel to the nv, aft = vertical acceleration at rearmost station
hull reference axis from spot of impact to [g]
LCG, to the radius of gyration:
xaft = distance of the rearmost station to LCG
x' [m]
rG = i
k Equation of superimposed vertical acceleration at the
Determination of relative vertical speed of impact Vv foremost station, nv, fore:
[m]:
n v, fore = n w, i + n a ⋅ x fore
π⋅g
Vv = 0,6 + H ⋅ nv, fore = acceleration at foremost station [g]
2⋅A
xfore = distance of the foremost station to LCG
H = wave height [m]
[mm]
A = wave length [m] nv, i = acceleration at station i [g]
Values of A and H are defined in C3A2.4.2 Linear interpolation between the rearmost and fore-
most acceleration gives the individual acceleration nvi
Kx of each station.
1,5
.7 Forces acting on each section
As described in C3A2.4.1, the bending moment and
1 shear force distribution will be derived by the sum-
mation of vertical forces acting on each station.

x This force is the product of the section mass and the

0 L/2 L stations acceleration (derived in C3A2.4.1.5) In addi-
tion to that, if applicable for the specific station, the
Fig. C3A2.1 Coefficient Kx direct load of the wave impact also has to be added to
the respective section load.
.5 Angular acceleration The forces acting on each section are finally de-
The angular acceleration results from a wave impact scribed in following equation:
at the rigid bottom of the air -cushion vehicle at a
Fi = M i ⋅ n v, i ⋅ g + Fi, wave
longitudinal location, which differs from the location
of the craft’s LCG. The impact induces a rotation
The amount of the total wave impact force is equal to
about the LCG and yields to a linear distribution of
the sum of all station forces. It is recommended to
tangential acceleration.
distribute the direct wave load onto two adjacent
Equation of overall angular acceleration, na: stations, and apply it depending on the location of
impact at the bow, stern or LCG.
T n W i ⋅ W ⋅ x i, impact
na = =
( )
m
J J Fi, wave = ∑ Mi ⋅ g ⋅ n v i
i =1
na = overall angular acceleration [rad/s2],
applies for all stations Note

T = applied torque [N⋅ m] Hence the wave impact load Fi, wave is acting in the
opposite direction to the section mass, it is negative.
nWi = impact load at station of wave impact
[g] (see C3A2.4.1.4) Mi = mass of section i [kg]
Chapter 1 Appendix C3A2 Requirements for Scantlings of Air-cushion Vehicle Hull Structures I - Part 3
Page A2–4 GL 2012

nvi = acceleration for station i [rad/s2] Ploc = 1, 2 ⋅ K 'x ⋅ VV ⋅ V [kN/m2]

g = acceleration due to gravity [9,81 m/s2] K’x = coefficient depending on position x of
To analyse the most critical load case, it is required to spot of the impact and determined ac-
investigate wave impacts at bow, stern and LCG. cording to Fig. C3A2.2

Note Vv and V = values defined in C3A2.4.1.4 above.

Steady state 1g is not included and is assumed to be K'x

supported by cushion with negligible effect on global
loads.
2

C3A2.4.2 Air-cushion vehicle afloat

1
The wave considered for scantling calculations of
flexible skirt craft afloat is a sinusoidal wave of
height H and length A [m] and confirming the fol- x
lowing equations: 0 0,778 L L

 for A ≤41,50 m: Fig. C3A2.2 Coefficient K'x

H = A / 10
.2 Distributed bottom pressure
 for A > 41,50 m: The average pressure is 44% of the local pressure. It
will be applied to evaluate scantlings of main frames
⎛ 300 − A3 / 2 ⎞
H = 6,51 − 0,57 ⋅⎜ ⎟ and is given by the formula:
⎜ 100 ⎟
⎝ ⎠
Pdistr = 0,53 ⋅ K 'x ⋅ VV ⋅ V [kN/m2]
The value H is defined by the designer on the basis of
the limit operating conditions indicated in the Enclo- .3 Increased pressures in bow section
sure of the Class Certificate and on the midship sec-
tion drawing (see C3.3.1 and C3.3.4). Hence the bow area of the craft is exposed to slam-
ming loads, pressures in this area will be determined
The worst conditions are generally encountered when regardless of the values provided by the design per-
A is approximately equal to: formance curve. A high velocity in combination with
a high wave height yields to the increased local and
 L for head wave, distributed pressure:
 B for beam wave. Ploc, bow = 1, 2 ⋅ K 'x ⋅ VV ⋅ Vbow

C3A2.5 Local Loads Pdistr, bow = 0,53 ⋅ K 'x ⋅ VV ⋅ Vbow

C3A2.5.1 Water impact loads x

The bow area is defined as: ≥ 0,8
The rigid structure can be subjected to direct wave L
impact under the following circumstances: Vbow = Vmax ⋅ 0,8
 Craft in flying situation under worst intended
conditions H bow = H(0,8 ⋅ Vmax ) ⋅ 3
 Plough-in of cushion system
Note
 Craft afloat, at rest or not
Vmax and H to be taken from design performance
The local and distributed pressures have to be deter- curve VV , see C3A2.4.1.4
mined for the maximum loads which can arise from
the most severe combination of loading scenarios,
C3A2.5.2 Loads arising from propelling and
speed of air cushion vehicle and corresponding rela-
steering installation
tive vertical velocity.
These loads are applied to the structure through the
.1 Local pressure connections of foundations, seating, gantries, etc.
supporting the propelling engine, the lifting installa-
The local pressure due to water impact is considered tion, their auxiliaries as well as steering gear such as
to be the peak slamming load. It will be applied to rudders and skegs.
evaluate scantlings of secondary stiffeners and shell
elements on a frame space. It can be expressed by the For propelling and lifting plants, loads are calculated
formula: on the basis of the most critical situations to be ex-
I - Part 3 Appendix C3A2 Requirements for Scantlings of Air-cushion Vehicle Hull Structures Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page A2–5

pected (e.g. breakdowns, sudden changes in engine C3A2.5.4 Landing load

speed, reverse propeller pitch).
For steering arrangements, loads are either contrac-
tual loads (power rudders) or loads actually encoun-
tered. The latter can be deduced from calculations or
tests. The basic contractual loads applied by the pilot
on the controls are as follows:
 0,46 kN on a control stick or control wheel ahead
or reverse gear
 0,28 kN on a control stick - laterally
 0,185 kN on a control wheel - tangential action
 0,60 kN on pedals or levers
See also C3A2.7.8.
.1 This refers to amphibious air-cushion vehi-
cles normally parking on land.
.2 The worst landing case is defined by the
following parameters:
 Maximum lifting height
 Highest possible descending speed
 Worst mass, trim, heeling and horizontal speed
conditions (e.g. asymmetrical landing supports,
gusts of wind)

C3A2.5.3 Deck loads .3 This case determines local forces applied to

.1 General
.1 The pressure [kN/m2] considered as
acting on deck is given by the formula:
pd = p (1+nvi )
p = uniform pressure due to the load
carried [kN/m2]. Minimum val-
ues are given in C3.5.8.2 to
C3.5.8.6
nvi = design vertical acceleration, see
C3A2.4.1.5
.2 Where decks are intended to carry
masses of significant magnitude, in-
cluding vehicles, the concentrated loads
transmitted to structures are given by
the corresponding static loads multi-
plied by (1 + nvi)
.2 Decks loads in particular
For determination of :
 weather decks and exposed areas
 sheltered decks
 enclosed accommodation decks
 enclosed cargo decks
 platforms in machinery spaces
 decks carrying vehicles
landing-gear connecting points.
It can also determine certain general forces, in par-
ticular for torsion resulting from asymmetrical land-
ing supports.
C3A2.5.5 Hoisting Load
.1 This case affects the scantlings of hoisting
points and their connections to the structure (distribu-
tion of concentrated forces).
.2 It also has to be checked that this case does
not generate general bending or torsion forces
(asymmetrical hoisting) leading to stresses that ex-
ceed allowable values.
.3 The maximum authorized mass for hoisting
is to be determined by the designer and indicated in
the maintenance manual.
C3A2.5.6 Anchoring – Mooring – Towage
.1 These situations determine the concentrated
forces applied to points of ground or quay anchoring
and mooring, together with towage.
.2 The maximum authorized forces to be ap-
plied at the preceding points are equal to the respec-
tive breaking loads of anchor, mooring and towing
cable lines.

 pressures on tank structures

C3A2.6 Load Factors
 pressures on subdivision bulkheads
see: C3.5.8.2 to C3.5.8.10 C3A2.6.1 Acceleration under service conditions

.3 Sea pressures on deckhouses

.1 For the calculation of local forces, including
For determination see C3.5.7 those resulting from liquid loads, acceleration can be
Chapter 1 Appendix C3A2 Requirements for Scantlings of Air-cushion Vehicle Hull Structures I - Part 3
Page A2–6 GL 2012

at least any of the values between the following lim-
its:
 from 0,7 g upwards to 0,8 g downwards in addi-
tion with gravity
 from 0,5 g afterwards to 1,0 g forwards
 from 0,5 g on one side to 0,5 g on the other side
.2 The preceding values apply to air-cushion
vehicles for “open sea” or “restricted open sea” ser-
vice.
.3 Reductions may be allowed for craft for
“moderate environment” or “smooth sea” service (see
C3.3.1).
C3A2.6.2 Acceleration in event of collision
See C4.3
C3A2.7 Allowable Stresses
All Loads defined in C3A2.4 and C3A2.5 are maxi-
mum design loads. These loads are maximum loads
anticipated in the conditions for which the certifica-
tion is sought.
Requirements for the scantlings of hull structures
(plating, stiffeners, primary supporting members) and
corresponding limiting values for materials are de-
fined for
 steel and aluminium alloy structures in C3.7
 for reinforced fibre structures in C3.8
I - Part 3 Section 4 Accommodation and Escape Measures
GL 2012
Section 4
Accommodation and Escape Measures
C4.0 Documents to be submitted
The following plans and documents are to be submit-
ted. To facilitate a smooth and efficient approval proc-
ess they shall be submitted electronically via
GLOBE 1. In specific cases and following prior
agreement with GL they can also be submitted in
paper form in triplicate.
.1 Windows, arrangements and details.
.2 Plan showing the arrangement of means of
communication.
.3 Calculation of the collision load and relevant
arrangement of the accommodation spaces (containing
the indication of seat characteristics, arrangement and
installation, the characteristics of the safety belts).
.4 Plans showing the means of escape and the
means of access to the various craft spaces.
.5 Evacuation procedure and evacuation time
calculation.
Further documentation may be required if deemed
necessary by GL.
4.1 General
4.1.1 Public spaces and crew accommodation shall
be designed and arranged so as to protect the occu-
pants from unfavourable environmental conditions
and to minimize the risk of injury to occupants during
normal and emergency conditions.
4.1.2 Spaces accessible to passengers shall not
contain controls, electrical equipment, high-
temperature parts and pipelines, rotating assemblies
or other items, from which injury to passengers could
result, unless such items are adequately shielded,
isolated, or otherwise protected.
4.1.3 Public spaces shall not contain operating
controls unless the operating controls are so protected
and located that their operation by a crew member
shall not be impeded by passengers during normal
and emergency conditions.
4.1.4 Windows in passenger and crew accommoda-
tion shall be of adequate strength and suitable for the
worst intended conditions specified in the Permit to
Operate and be made of material which will not break
into dangerous fragments if fractured.
––––––––––––––
1 Detailed information about the secured GL system GLOBE
can be found on GL’s website www.gl-group.com/globe.
Chapter 1
Page 4–1
4.1.5 The public spaces, crew accommodation and
the equipment therein shall be designed so that each
person making proper use of these facilities will not
suffer injury during craft's normal and emergency
start, stop and manoeuvring in normal cruise and in
failure or maloperation conditions.
4.2 Public Address and Information System
4.2.1 A general emergency alarm system shall be
provided. The alarm shall be audible throughout all
the public spaces, corridors and stairways, crew ac-
commodation and normal crew working spaces and
open decks, and the sound pressure level shall be at
least 10 dB(A) above ambient noise levels under way
in normal cruise operation. The alarm shall continue
to function after it has been triggered until it is nor-
mally turned off or is temporarily interrupted by a
message on the public address system.
4.2.2 There shall be a public address system cover-
ing all areas where passengers and crew have access,
escape routes, and places of embarkation into survival
craft. The system shall be such that flooding or fire in
any compartment does not render other parts of the
system inoperable. The public address system and its
performance standards shall be approved by the Ad-
ministration having regard to the recommendations
developed by the Organization 2.
4.2.3 All passenger craft shall be equipped with
illuminated or luminous notices or video information
system(s) visible to all sitting passengers, in order to
notify them of safety measures.
4.2.4 The master shall, by means of the public
address system and the visual information system, be
able to request passengers "please be seated" when
found to be appropriate to safeguard passengers and
always when the safety level 1 according to table 1 of
annex 3 is exceeded.
4.3 Design Acceleration Levels
4.3.1 For passenger craft, superimposed vertical
accelerations above 1.0 g at longitudinal centre of
gravity shall be avoided unless special precautions
are taken with respect to passenger safety.
4.3.2 Passenger craft shall be designed for the
collision design acceleration gcoll with respect to the
––––––––––––––
2 Refer to the Recommendations on performance standards for
public address systems on passenger ships, including cabling
(MSC/Circ.808) and the Code on Alarms and Indicators, 1995
(resolution A.830(18)).
Chapter 1 Section 4 Accommodation and Escape Measures I - Part 3
Page 4–2 GL 2012

safety in, and escape from, the public spaces, crew where the kinetic energy of the craft at speed Vimp is:
accommodation and escape routes, including in way
of life-saving appliances and emergency source of E = 0,5U Vimp2
power. The size and type of craft together with speed,
where the main particulars of the craft are:
displacement and building material shall be taken into
consideration when the collision load is determined. L = craft length as defined in Section 1 [m]
The collision design condition shall be based on head-
on impact at a defined collision speed. D = depth of the craft from the underside of keel
to the top of the effective hull girder [m]
4.3.3 Mounting of large masses such as main en-
gines, auxiliary engines, lift fans, transmissions and U = craft displacement, being the mean of the
electrical equipment shall be proved by calculation to lightweight and maximum operational weight
withstand, without fracturing, the design acceleration [t]
given in table 4.3.3. Vimp = estimated impact speed [m/s] = 60 % of
maximum speed as defined in Section 1
Table 4.3.3 - Design acceleration as multiples of g
g = acceleration due to gravity = 9.806 m/s2.
Types of craft All HSC
except Amphibious For hydrofoils, the collision design acceleration, gcoll
amphibious ACVs shall be taken as the greater of either the gcoll as cal-
Direction ACVs culated above or:
Forward direction gcoll 6 gcoll = F/(g ⋅ U)
After direction 2 or gcoll if less 3 where:
Transverse direction 2 or gcoll if less 3 F = failure load of bow foil assembly applied at
Vertical direction 2 or gcoll if less 3 the operational waterline [kn].

where: C4.3.4 For sandwich structures, the hull material factor M is

taken equal to 0,8.
gcoll = the collision design acceleration expressed as a
multiple of the acceleration due to gravity (9.806 m/s2) 4.3.5 As an alternative to the requirements of 4.3.4,
the collision design acceleration gcoll may be deter-
4.3.4 Collision design acceleration gcoll (for craft mined by carrying out a collision load analysis of the
other than amphibious ACVs where gcoll = 6) shall be craft on a vertical rock having a maximum height of 2
calculated as follows: m above the waterline and using the same assumption
for displacement and impact speed Vimp as described
⎛ P ⎞ in 4.3.4. This evaluation may be carried out as part of
gcoll = 1,2 ⎜ ⎟ , but not to be taken greater than
⎝ g× Δ ⎠ the safety analysis. If the collision design accelera-
tions are determined by both 4.3.6 and the collision
12
load analysis, the lower resulting value may be used
where the load P shall be taken as the lesser of P1 and as the collision design acceleration.
P2, where:
4.3.6 Compliance with the provisions of 4.1.5 and
P1 = 460 ( M ⋅ C L ) 4.3.1 shall be shown for the actual type of craft, as
2/3
( E ⋅ CH )1/3
described in annex 9.
P2 = 9000 ⋅ M ⋅ CL ( CH D ) 1/2 4.3.7 Limiting sea states for operation of the craft
shall be given in normal operation condition and in
where the hull material factor M shall be taken as: the worst intended conditions, at 90 % of maximum
M = 1,3 for high tensile steel speed and at reduced speed as necessary.

M = 1,0 for aluminium alloy

4.4 Accommodation Design
M = 0,95 for mild steel
M = 0,8 for fibre-reinforced plastics, 4.4.1 The public spaces, control stations and crew
accommodation of high-speed craft shall be located
where the length factor CL of the craft is: and designed to protect passengers and crew in the
design collision condition. In this respect, these spaces
( 165+ L ) ⎛ L ⎞
0.4
shall not be located forward of a transverse plane (see
CL = ⎜ 85 ⎟
245 ⎝ ⎠ figure 4.4.1) such that:

where the height factor CH= (80 – L)/45 but not Abow = 0,0035 A m f V, but never less than 0,04 A,
greater than 0,75 or less than 0,3, where:
I - Part 3 Section 4 Accommodation and Escape Measures Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 4–3

Abow = the plan projected area of craft energy ab-
sorbing structure forward of the transverse
plane (m²)
A = total plan projected area of craft [m2]
0,95
m = material factor =
M
M = appropriate hull material factor as given in
4.3.4
Where materials are mixed, the material factor shall
be taken as a weighted mean, weighted according to
the mass of material in the area defined by Abow.
f = framing factor as follows:
− longitudinal deck and shell stiffening = 0,8
− mixed longitudinal and transverse = 0,9
− transverse deck and shell stiffening = 1,0
V = 90 % of maximum speed [m/s].
4.4.2 The public spaces and crew accommodation
shall be designed based on the guidelines given in
table 4.4.2 or by other methods which have been
proven to give equal protective qualities.
4.4.3 Equipment and baggage in public spaces and
in the operator's compartment shall be positioned and
secured so that they remain in the stowed position
when exposed to the collision design acceleration
according to 4.3.4, 4.3.5 and table 4.3.3.
4.4.4 Seats, life-saving appliances and items of
substantial mass and their supporting structure shall
not deform or dislodge under any loads up to those
specified in 4.3.4, 4.3.5 and table 4.3.3 in any manner
that would impede subsequent rapid evacuation of
passengers.

Total - Abow

Abow 4.4.5 There shall be adequate handholds on both

A A sides of any passage to enable passengers to steady
themselves while moving about. The armrests and
backrests of seats in public spaces may serve as hand-
Figure 4.4.1 : Plan view of two different craft styles holds.

Table 4.4.2 – Overview general design guidelines 3

Design level 1: gcoll less than 3
1 Seat/seat belts
1.1 Low or high seatback
1.2 No restrictions on seating direction
1.3 Sofas allowed
1.4 No seat belts requirement
2 Tables in general allowed
3 Padding of projecting objects
4 Kiosks, bars, etc., no special restrictions
5 Baggage, no special requirements
6 Large masses, restrainment and positioning
Design level 2: gcoll = 3 to 12
1 Seat/seat belts
1.1 Seatbacks with protective deformation and padding
1.2 Forward or backward seating direction
1.3 No sofas allowed as seat
Lap belt in seats when no protective structure forward unless satisfactorily tested without belts in
1.4
that orientation and arrangement
2 Tables with protective feature allowed. Dynamic testing
3 Padding of protective objects
4 Kiosks, bars, etc., on aft side of bulkheads, or other specially approved arrangements
5 Baggage placed with protection forward
6 Large masses, restrainment and positioning

––––––––––––––
3 Other arrangements may be employed if an equivalent level of safety is achieved
Chapter 1 Section 4 Accommodation and Escape Measures
Page 4–4
4.5 Seating Construction
4.5.1 A seat shall be provided for each passenger
and crew member for which the craft is certified to
carry. Such seats shall be arranged in enclosed
spaces.
4.5.2 Seats fitted in addition to those required
under 4.5.1 and which are not permitted to be used in
hazardous navigational situations or potentially
dangerous weather or sea conditions need not com-
ply with 4.5 or 4.6. Such seats shall be secured ac-
cording to 4.4.4 and clearly identified as not being
able to be used in hazardous situations.
4.5.3 The installation of seats shall be such as to
allow adequate access to any part of the accommoda-
tion space. In particular, they shall not obstruct ac-
cess to, or use of, any essential emergency equipment
or means of escape.
4.5.4 Seats and their attachments, and the struc-
ture in the proximity of the seats, shall be of a form
and design, and so arranged, such as to minimize the
possibility of injury and to avoid trapping of the pas-
sengers after the assumed damage in the collision
design condition according to 4.4.1. Dangerous pro-
jections and hard edges shall be eliminated or pad-
ded.
4.5.5 Seats, seat belts, seat arrangements and
adjacent parts such as tables shall be designed for
the actual collision design acceleration as specified
in 4.3.4.
4.5.6 All seats, their supports and their deck at-
tachments shall have good energy-absorbing charac-
teristics and shall meet the requirements of annex 10.
4.6 Safety Belts
4.6.1 One-hand-release safety belts of three-point
type or with shoulder harness shall be provided for
all seats from which the craft may be operated for all
craft with the gcoll acceleration from the collision
design acceleration exceeding 3, as prescribed in
4.3.4.
4.6.2 Safety belts shall be provided on passenger
seats and crew seats, if necessary, to obtain the pro-
tective performance measures described in annex 10.
4.7 Exits and Means of Escape
4.7.1 In order to ensure immediate assistance
from the crew in an emergency situation, the crew
accommodation, including any cabins, shall be lo-
cated with due regard to easy, safe and quick access
to the public spaces from inside the craft. For the
same reason, easy, safe and quick access from the
operating compartment to the public spaces shall be
provided.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
4.7.2 The design of the craft shall be such that all
occupants may safely evacuate the craft into survival
craft under all emergency conditions, by day or by
night. The positions of all exits which may be used in
an emergency, and of all life-saving appliances, the
practicability of the evacuation procedure, and the
evacuation time to evacuate all passengers and crew
shall be demonstrated.
4.7.3 Public spaces, evacuation routes, exits,
lifejacket stowage, survival craft stowage, and the
embarkation stations shall be clearly and perma-
nently marked and illuminated as required in Section
12.
4.7.4 Each enclosed public space and similar
permanently enclosed space allocated to passengers
or crew shall be provided with at least two exits as
widely separated as practical. All exits shall clearly
indicate the directions to the evacuation station and
safe areas. On category A craft and cargo craft, at
least one exit shall give access to the evacuation
station serving the persons in the enclosed space
considered, and all other exits shall give access to a
position on the open deck from which access to an
evacuation station is provided. On category B craft,
exits shall provide access to the alternative safe area
required by 7.11.1; external routes may be accepted
providing that the requirements of 4.7.3 and 4.7.11
are complied with.
4.7.5 Subdivision of public spaces to provide ref-
uge in case of fire may be required in compliance
with 7.4.4.1 and 7.11.1.
4.7.6 Exit doors shall be capable of being readily
operated from inside and outside the craft in daylight
and in darkness. The means of operation shall be
obvious, rapid and of adequate strength. Doors along
escape routes should, wherever appropriate, open in
the direction of escape flow from the space served.
4.7.7 The closing, latching and locking arrange-
ments for exits shall be such that it is readily appar-
ent to the appropriate crew member when the doors
are closed and in a safe operational condition, either
in direct view or by an indicator. The design of exter-
nal doors shall be such as to minimize the possibility
of jamming by ice or debris.
4.7.8 The craft shall have a sufficient number of
exits which are suitable to facilitate the quick and
unimpeded escape of persons wearing approved
lifejackets in emergency conditions, such as collision
damage or fire.
4.7.9 Sufficient space for a crew member shall be
provided adjacent to exits for ensuring the rapid
evacuation of passengers.
I - Part 3 Section 4 Accommodation and Escape Measures
GL 2012
4.7.10 All exits, together with their means of open-
ing, shall be adequately marked for the guidance of
passengers. Clear markings, including the location of
the fire control plan, shall be provided for the guid-
ance of rescue personnel outside the craft.
4.7.11 Footholds, ladders, etc., provided to give
access from the inside to exits shall be of rigid con-
struction and permanently fixed in position. Perma-
nent handholds shall be provided whenever necessary
to assist persons using exits, and shall be suitable for
conditions when the craft has developed any possible
angles of list or trim.
4.7.12 At least two unobstructed evacuation paths
shall be available for the use of each person. Evacua-
tion paths shall be disposed such that adequate
evacuation facilities will be available in the event of
any likely damage or emergency conditions, and
evacuation paths shall have adequate lighting sup-
plied from the main and emergency sources of power.
Doors providing escape from a space shall, where
possible, be situated at opposite ends of the space.
Where the doors providing escape from a space are
situated in the same end of the space, the distance
between those doors shall be greater than the maxi-
mum length of the space.
4.7.13 The width of corridors, doorways and stair-
ways which form part of the evacuation paths shall
be not less than 900 mm for passenger craft and 700
mm for cargo craft. This width may be reduced to
600 mm for corridors, doorways and stairways serv-
ing spaces where persons are not normally employed.
There shall be no protrusions in evacuation paths
which could cause injury, ensnare clothing, damage
lifejackets or restrict evacuation of disabled persons.
Requirements of this paragraph do not apply to aisles
(fore-aft passageways separating seating areas) or to
spaces between adjacent rows of seats. However, the
width of aisles and the seat pitch shall be such as to
allow the craft to comply with the provisions of 4.8.
4.7.14 Special category spaces used for stowage of
motor vehicles shall be provided with walkways hav-
ing a width of at least 600 mm leading to a safe
means of escape
4.7.15 Adequate notices shall be provided to direct
passengers to exits.
4.7.16 Provision shall be made on board for em-
barkation stations to be properly equipped for
evacuation of passengers into life-saving appliances.
Such provision shall include handholds, anti-skid
treatment of the embarkation deck, and adequate
space which is clear of cleats, bollards and similar
fittings.
4.7.17 Main propulsion machinery spaces and ro-
ro spaces shall be provided with two means of escape
leading to a position outside the spaces from which a
safe route to the evacuation stations is available. One
Chapter 1
Page 4–5
means of escape from the main propulsion machinery
spaces shall avoid direct access to any ro-ro space.
Main propulsion machinery spaces having a length of
less than 5 m and not being routinely entered or
continuously manned, may be provided with a single
means of escape. At least one means of escape from a
machinery space shall consist of either a ladder lead-
ing to a door or hatch (not being a horizontal flush-
hatch) or a door located in the lower part of that
space and giving access to an adjacent compartment
from which a safe means of escape is provided.
4.7.18 Spaces that are only entered occasionally by
crew members may have only one means of escape
provided that it is independent of watertight doors.
4.8 Evacuation Time
4.8.1 The provisions for evacuation shall be de-
signed such that the craft can be evacuated under
controlled conditions in a time of one third of the
structural fire protection time (SFP) provided in
7.4.2 for areas of major fire hazard areas after sub-
tracting a period of 7 min for initial detection and
extinguishing action.
Evacuation time =
( SFT -7 ) (min)
3
where:
SFP = structural fire protection time (min)
In determining the evacuation time, all means of
escape are to be considered serviceable and they
need not be dimensioned to take into account any
additional number of persons that might be diverted
from other means of escape if one or more of those
other means of escape are lost or rendered unserv-
iceable.
4.8.2 An evacuation procedure, including an
evacuation analysis carried out taking into account
the guidelines developed by the Organization 4 shall
be developed for the information of the Administra-
tion in connection with the approval of fire insulation
plans and for assisting the owners and builders in
planning the evacuation demonstration required in
4.8.3. The evacuation procedures shall include:
.1 the emergency announcement made by the
master;
.2 contact with base port;
.3 the donning of lifejackets;
.4 manning of survival craft and emergency sta-
tions;
.5 the shutting down of machinery and oil fuel
supply lines;
––––––––––––––
4 Refer to the Guidelines to be developed by the Organization.
Chapter 1 Section 4 Accommodation and Escape Measures
Page 4–6
.6 the order to evacuate;
.7 the deployment of survival craft and marine
escape systems and rescue boats;
.8 the bowsing in of survival craft;
.9 the supervision of passengers;
.10 the orderly evacuation of passengers under
supervision;
.11 crew checking that all passengers have left the
craft;
.12 the evacuation of crew;
.13 releasing the survival craft from the craft; and
.14 the marshalling of survival craft by the rescue
boat, where provided.
4.8.3 Achievement of the required evacuation time
(as ascertained in accordance with 4.8.1) shall be
verified by a practical demonstration conducted
under controlled conditions in the presence of the
Administration, and shall be fully documented and
verified for passenger craft by the Administration.
4.8.4 Evacuation demonstrations shall be carried
out with due concern for the problems of mass
movement or panic acceleration likely to arise in an
emergency situation when rapid evacuation is neces-
sary. The evacuation demonstrations shall be dry
shod with the survival craft initially in their stowed
positions and be conducted as follows:
.1 The evacuation time on a category A craft shall
be the time elapsed from the moment the first
abandon craft announcement is given, with any
passengers distributed in a normal voyage con-
figuration, until the last person has embarked
in a survival craft, and shall include the time
for passengers and crew to don lifejackets.
.2 The evacuation time on a category B craft and
cargo craft shall be the time elapsed from the
moment the order to abandon the craft is given
until the last person has embarked in a survival
craft. Passengers and crew may be wearing
lifejackets and prepared for evacuation, and
they may be distributed among assembly sta-
tions.
.3 For all craft the evacuation time shall include
the time necessary to launch, inflate and secure
the survival craft alongside ready for embarka-
tion.
4.8.5 The evacuation time shall be verified by an
evacuation demonstration which shall be performed
using the survival craft and exits on one side, for
which the evacuation analysis indicates the greatest
evacuation time, with the passengers and crew allo-
cated to them.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
4.8.6 On craft where a half trial is impracticable,
the Administration may consider a partial evacuation
trial using a route which the evacuation analysis
shows to be the most critical.
4.8.7 The demonstration shall be carried out in
controlled conditions in the following manner in
compliance with the evacuation plan.
.1 The demonstration shall commence with the
craft afloat in harbour, in reasonably calm
conditions, with all machinery and equipment
operating in the normal seagoing condition.
.2 All exits and doors inside the craft shall be in
the same position as they are under normal
seagoing condition.
.3 Safety belts, if required, shall be fastened.
.4 The evacuation routes for all passengers and
crew shall be such that no person need enter
the water during the evacuation.
4.8.8 For passenger craft, a representative com-
position of persons with normal health, height and
weight shall be used in the demonstration, and shall
consist of different sexes and ages so far as it is prac-
ticable and reasonable.
4.8.9 The persons, other than the crew selected for
the demonstration, shall not have been specially
drilled for such a demonstration.
4.8.10 Where the Administration is satisfied that
the evacuation time determined in accordance with
4.8.1 to 4.8.9 can thereby be accurately estimated,
the Administration may accept an evacuation demon-
stration in which persons are not required to descend
through MES or equivalent means of evacuation,
provided the time required to embark into the sur-
vival craft can be determined using:
.1 data obtained from the type-approval tests of
the equipment, increased by a factor based on
the guidelines developed by the Organization 5;
or
.2 time extrapolated from trials using a limited
number of participants.
4.8.11 An emergency evacuation demonstration
shall be carried out for all new designs of high-speed
craft and for other craft where evacuation arrange-
ments differ substantially from those previously
tested.
4.8.12 The specific evacuation procedure followed
during the craft's initial demonstration on which
––––––––––––––
5 Refer to the Guidelines for a simplified evacuation analysis of
high-speed passenger craft (MSC/Circ.1166), in particular
paragraph 3.5.1 thereof.
I - Part 3 Section 4 Accommodation and Escape Measures
GL 2012
certification is based shall be included in the craft
operating manual together with the other evacuation
procedures contained in 4.8.2. During the demon-
stration, video recordings shall be made, both inside
and outside the craft, which shall form an integral
part of the training manual required by 18.2.
4.9 Baggage, Stores, Shops and Cargo Com-
partments
4.9.1 Provision shall be made to prevent shifting
of baggage, stores and cargo compartment contents,
having due regard to occupied compartments and
accelerations likely to arise. If safeguarding by posi-
tioning is not practicable, adequate means of re-
straint for baggage, stores and cargo shall be pro-
vided. Shelves and overhead shelves for storage of
carry-on baggage in public spaces shall be provided
with adequate means to prevent the luggage from
falling out in any conditions that may occur.
4.9.2 Controls, electric equipment, high-
temperature parts, pipelines or other items, the dam-
age or failure of which could affect the safe operation
of the craft or which may require access by crew
members during a voyage, shall not be located in
baggage, store and cargo compartments unless such
items are adequately protected so that they cannot be
damaged or, where applicable, operated inadver-
tently by loading, by unloading or by movement of the
contents of the compartment.
4.9.3 Loading limits, if necessary, shall be durably
marked in those compartments.
4.9.4 Having regard to the purpose of the craft,
the closures of the exterior openings of the luggage
and cargo compartments as well as special-category
spaces shall be appropriately weathertight.
4.10 Noise Levels
4.10.1 The noise level in public spaces and crew
accommodation shall be kept as low as possible to
Chapter 1
Page 4–7
enable the public address system to be heard, and
shall not in general exceed 75 dB(A).
4.10.2 The maximum noise level in the operating
compartment shall not in general exceed 65 dB(A) to
facilitate communication within the compartment and
external radiocommunications.
4.11 Protection of the Crew and Passengers
4.11.1 Efficient guard rails or bulwarks shall be
fitted on all exposed parts of decks to which crew or
passengers have access. Alternative arrangements
such as safety harnesses and jack-stays may be ac-
cepted if they provide an equivalent level of safety.
The height of the bulwarks or guard rails shall be at
least 1 m from the deck, provided that where this
height would interfere with the normal operation of
the craft, a lesser height may be approved.
4.11.2 The opening below the lowest course of the
guard rails shall not exceed 230 mm. The other
courses shall be not more than 380 mm apart. In the
case of craft with rounded gunwales the guard rail
supports shall be placed on the flat of the deck.
4.11.3 Satisfactory means (in the form of guard
rails, life lines, gangways or underdeck passages,
etc.) shall be provided for the protection of the crew
in getting to and from their quarters, the machinery
space and all other parts used in the necessary work
of the craft.
4.11.4 Deck cargo carried on any craft shall be so
stowed that any opening which is in way of the cargo
and which gives access to and from the crew's quar-
ters, the machinery space and all other parts used in
the necessary work of the craft, can be properly
closed and secured against the admission of water.
Effective protection for the crew in the form of guard
rails or life lines shall be provided above the deck
cargo if there is no convenient passage on or below
the deck of the craft.
I - Part 3 Section 5 Direction Control Systems
GL 2012
Section 5
Direction Control Systems
C5.0 Documents to be submitted
C5.0.1 The following drawings and documents are to
be submitted. To facilitate a smooth and efficient
approval process they shall be submitted electronically
via GLOBE 1. In specific cases and following prior
agreement with GL they can also be submitted in
paper form in triplicate.
.1 Assembly and general drawings of all direc-
tional control systems;
.2 Diagrams of hydraulic and electric equip-
ment;
.3 Detail drawings of all load-transmitting com-
ponents.
C5.0.2 The drawings and other documents must con-
tain all data necessary for verifying scantlings and
power calculations as well as material specifications.
C5.0.3 Further documentation may be required if
deemed necessary by GL.
5.1 General
5.1.1 Craft shall be provided with means for direc-
tional control of adequate strength and suitable design
to enable the craft's heading and direction of travel to
be effectively controlled to the maximum extent possi-
ble in the prevailing conditions and craft speed with-
out undue physical effort at all speeds and in all con-
ditions for which the craft is to be certificated. The
performance shall be verified in accordance with
annex 9.
5.1.2 Directional control may be achieved by
means of air or water rudders, foils, flaps, steerable
propellers or jets, yaw control ports or side thrusters,
differential propulsive thrust, variable geometry of the
craft or its lift-system components or by a combination
of these devices.
C5.1.2 Any other arrangement will be given special
consideration.
5.1.3 For the purpose of this Section, a directional
control system includes any steering device or devices,
any mechanical linkages and all power or manual
devices, controls and actuating systems.
––––––––––––––
1 Detailed information about the secured GL system GLOBE
can be found on GL’s website www.gl-group.com/globe.
Chapter 1
Page 5–1
5.1.4 Attention is drawn to the possibility of inter-
action between directional control systems and stabi-
lisation systems. Where such interaction occurs or
where dual-purpose components are fitted, the re-
quirements of 12.5 and Sections 16 and 17 are also to
be complied with, as applicable.
C5.1.5 Steering devices are to be installed so as to be
accessible at all times and to be able to be maintained
without difficulty.
C5.1.6 Steering devices are to be mounted on substan-
tial seatings in order to transmit the force sufficiently
to the hull structure.
C5.1.7 Important load-transmitting components and
components subjected to internal pressure are to be
made of steel or other approved ductile material.
At the discretion of GL, grey cast iron may be used for
certain components with low stress level.
C5.1.8 The pipes of hydraulic systems are to be made
of seamless or longitudinally welded steel tubes.
At the discretion of GL, copper may be used.
C5.1.9 Approved high-pressure hose assemblies may
be used for short pipe connections.
C5.1.10 Testing of materials
The materials of important load-transmitting compo-
nents, including pressurized pipes and casings, are to
be tested in the presence of the Surveyor in accor-
dance with GL’s Rules for Materials.
5.2 Reliability
5.2.1 The probability of total failure of all direc-
tional control systems shall be extremely remote when
the craft is operating normally, i.e., excluding emer-
gency situations such as grounding, collision or a
major fire.
C5.2.1 Guidance to probability levels is given in An-
nex 3.
5.2.2 A design incorporating a power drive or an
actuation system employing powered components for
normal directional control shall provide a secondary
means of actuating the device unless an alternative
system is provided.
C5.2.2 The actuation system is to be operated by
power:
 for passenger craft category B
Chapter 1 Section 5 Direction Control Systems
Page 5–2
 in any case where the maximum effective torque
to be applied to the directional control device ex-
ceeds 25 kNm
5.2.3 The secondary means of actuating the direc-
tional control device may be manually driven when
the Administration is satisfied that this is adequate,
bearing in mind the craft's size and design and any
limitations of speed or other parameters that may be
necessary.
C5.2.3.1 The secondary means of actuating the device
is to be power-operated if the effective torque to be
applied to the directional control device by the secon-
dary means exceeds 40 kNm.
C5.2.3.2 A secondary means of actuating the device
need not be installed in a craft equipped with two
rudders and/or similar devices, or with two approved
means for steering, provided that each system is capa-
ble of steering the craft with the other system out of
operation.
5.2.4 The directional control systems shall be con-
structed so that a single failure in one drive or system,
as appropriate, will not render any other one inoper-
able or unable to bring the craft to a safe situation.
The Administration may allow a short period of time
to permit the connection of a secondary control device
when the design of the craft is such that such delay
will not, in their opinion, hazard the craft.
5.2.5 A failure mode and effect analysis shall in-
clude the directional control system.
5.2.6 If necessary to bring the craft to a safe condi-
tion, power drives for directional control devices,
including those required to direct thrust forward or
astern, shall become operative automatically, and
respond correctly, within 5 s of power or other failure.
Back-up electrical systems may be required for the
starting-up time of an auxiliary diesel according to
12.2 or an emergency diesel generator according to
12.3.6.
5.2.7 Directional control devices involving vari-
able geometry of the craft or its lift system components
shall, so far as is practicable, be so constructed that
any failure of the drive linkage or actuating system
will not significantly hazard the craft.
C5.2.8 The average rate of turning of the main actua-
tion system in general is to be not less than 2.3 de-
grees per second. It may be reduced with the consent
of the Society, if hazard to the stability of the craft can
occur.
C5.2.9 The average rate of turning of the secondary
actuation system is to be not less than 0,5 degrees per
second.
C5.2.10 Steering devices are to be provided with suit-
able mechanical stopping arrangements at the maxi-
mum design steering device angle.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
C5.2.11 Power-operated directional control systems
are to be provided with power cut-off arrangements
which stop the steering device before the mechanical
stoppers are reached. These arrangements are to be
synchronized with the steering device itself and not
with the control system.
C5.2.12 Steering devices are to be able to be locked in
any required position for maintenance purposes.
C5.2.13 Power-operated directional control systems
are to be provided with an overload protection device.
This device is to be secured to prevent later adjust-
ment by unauthorized persons. Means are to be pro-
vided for checking the setting while in service.
C5.2.14 The pipes of hydraulically operated control
systems are to be installed in such a way as to ensure
maximum protection while remaining readily accessi-
ble. They are to be installed at a sufficient distance
from the craft shell.
C5.2.15 Hydraulic power supply and piping for steer-
ing is not to be used for other purposes. At the discre-
tion of GL, exemptions may be permitted for water
jets, azimuth thrusters and similar units.
C5.2.16 In the event of loss of hydraulic oil, it is to be
possible to isolate the damaged system in such a way
that the second control system remains fully service-
able.
C5.2.17 Tanks forming part of a hydraulic control
system are to be fitted with oil level indicators.
C5.2.18 A low-level alarm is to be provided at the
craft's operating position.
C5.2.19 Filters for cleaning the fluid are to be located
in the piping system.
C5.2.20 In power-operated hydraulic main steering
control systems, an additional permanently installed
storage tank is to be provided with the capacity to
refill at least one of the control systems, including the
service tank.
5.3 Demonstrations
5.3.1 The limits of safe use of any of the control
system devices, shall be based on demonstrations and
a verification process in accordance with annex 9.
5.3.2 Demonstration in accordance with annex 9
shall determine any adverse effects upon safe opera-
tion of the craft in the event of an uncontrollable total
deflection of any one control device. Any limitation on
the operation of the craft as may be necessary to en-
sure that the redundancy or safeguards in the systems
provide equivalent safety shall be included in the craft
operating manual.
I - Part 3 Section 5 Direction Control Systems
GL 2012
C5.3.3 Each power unit is to be subjected to a type
test in the manufacturer's workshop according to a
programme accepted by GL. During the test, no over-
heating, excessive vibration or other irregularities are
to occur. After the test the power unit is to be disman-
tled and inspected.
C5.3.4 Pressure vessels including cylinders and pipes
are to be subjected to a pressure test. The test pressure
is to be 1,5 times the maximum working pressure.
Tightness tests are to be conducted on components for
which this is appropriate.
C5.3.5 Sea trials have to be carried out in conformity
with the GL Rules for Machinery Installations (I-1-2),
Section 14. (See also the GL Guidelines for Sea Trials
of Motor Vessels (VI-11-3)). Notwithstanding from
the before mentioned Rules and Guidelines, the aver-
age turning rates have to be in compliance witch
C5.2.8 and C5.2.9.
5.4 Control Position
5.4.1 All directional control systems shall normally
be operated from the craft's operating station.
Chapter 1
Page 5–3
5.4.2 If directional control systems can also be
operated from other positions, then two-way commu-
nication shall be arranged between the operating
station and these other positions.
5.4.3 Adequate indications shall be provided at the
operating station and these other positions to provide
the person controlling the craft with verification of the
correct response of the directional control device to
this demand, and also to indicate any abnormal re-
sponses or malfunction. The indications of steering
response or rudder angle indicator shall be independ-
ent of the system for directional control. The logic of
such feedback and indications shall be consistent with
the other alarms and indications so that in an emer-
gency operators are unlikely to be confused.
C5.4.4 Adequate indication which other operating
position is in service is to be provided at the operating
station.
C5.4.5 Controls are to be independent of one another,
and so designed that the control system device cannot
move unintentionally.
I - Part 3 Section 6 Anchoring, Towing and Berthing
GL 2012
Section 6
Anchoring, Towing and Berthing
6.1 General
6.1.1 A primary assumption made in this Section is
that high-speed craft will only need an anchor for
emergency purposes.
6.1.2 The arrangements for anchoring, towing and
berthing and the local craft structure, the design of the
anchor, towing and berthing arrangements and the
local craft structure shall be such that risks to persons
carrying out anchoring, towing or berthing proce-
dures are kept to a minimum.
6.1.3 All anchoring equipment, towing bitts, moor-
ing bollards, fairleads, cleats and eyebolts shall be so
constructed and attached to the hull that, in use up to
design loads, the watertight integrity of the craft will
not be impaired. Design loads and any directional
limitations assumed shall be listed in the craft operat-
ing manual.
6.1.4 Under any operating load up to the breaking
strength of the anchor cable or mooring lines, the
loads on the bitts, bollards, etc., shall not result in
damage to the hull structure that will impair its water-
tight integrity. A strength margin of at least 20 %
above the resultant load based on the minimum speci-
fied breaking strength of the relevant cable or warp
shall be required.
C6.1.5 The SWL for the intended use for each ship-
board fitting is to be noted in the towing and mooring
arrangements plan available on board for the guidance
of the Master.
6.2 Anchoring
6.2.1 High-speed craft shall be provided with at
least one anchor with its associated cable or cable
and warp and means of recovery. Every craft shall be
provided with adequate and safe means for releasing
the anchor and its cable and warp.
C6.2.1 The equipment of anchors, chain cables,
wires and ropes is to be determined from Table C6.5.1
in accordance with the equipment numeral EN.
Ships built under survey of GL and which are to have
the mark 7 stated in their Certificate and in the Regis-
ter Book shall be equipped with anchors and chain
cables complying with the Rules for Materials and
having been tested on approved machines in the pres-
ence of a Surveyor.
For small craft with a length L ≤ 25 m, some partial
exemption from the Rules may be accepted especially
for what concerns anchor operation; in particular,
where proper and safe anchor operation is assured,
Chapter 1
Page 6–1
hand operated machinery and/or absence of hawse
pipe may be accepted.
For such ships engaged in a regular service, the sec-
ond anchor and its relevant chain cable may be hold
readily available in one of the home ports.
Note
The anchoring equipment required by this Section is
intended of temporary mooring of a vessel within a
harbour or sheltered area when the vessel is awaiting
berth, tide, etc.
The equipment is, therefore, not designed to hold a
ship off fully exposed coasts in rough weather or to
stop a craft which is moving or drifting. In this condi-
tion the loads on the anchoring equipment increase to
such a degree that its components may be damaged or
lost owing to the high energy forces generated, par-
ticularly in large craft.
For crafts where frequent anchoring in open sea is
expected, the owner's and shipyard's attention is
drawn to the fact that anchoring equipment shall be
provided in excess of the requirements of these Rules.
The anchoring equipment required by this Section is
designed to hold a ship in good holding ground in
conditions such as to avoid dragging of the anchor. In
poor holding ground the holding power of the anchors
will be significantly reduced.
The equipment numeral formula for anchoring equip-
ment required under this Section is based on an as-
sumed current speed of 2,5 m/sec, wind speed of 25
m/sec and a scope of chain cable between 6 and 10,
the scope being the ratio between length of chain paid
out and water depth.
It is assumed that under normal circumstances a ship
will use only one bow anchor and chain cable at a
time.
6.2.2 Good engineering practice shall be followed
in the design of any enclosed space containing the
anchor-recovery equipment to ensure that persons
using the equipment are not put at risk. Particular
care shall be taken with the means of access to such
spaces, the walkways, the illumination and protection
from the cable and the recovery machinery.
6.2.3 Adequate arrangements shall be provided for
two-way voice communication between the operating
compartment and persons engaged in dropping,
weighing or releasing the anchor.
6.2.4 The anchoring arrangements shall be such
that any surfaces against which the cable may chafe
Chapter 1 Section 6 Anchoring, Towing and Berthing I - Part 3
Page 6–2 GL 2012

(for example, hawse pipes and hull obstructions) are A = area [m2] in profile view of the hull, superstruc-
designed to prevent the cable from being damaged tures and houses, having a breadth greater than
and fouled. Adequate arrangements shall be provided B/4, above the summer load waterline within
to secure the anchor under all operational conditions. the length L of the craft defined in C3.1.4.
6.2.5 The craft shall be protected so as to minimize In the measurement of hi, sheer and trim are to be
the possibility of the anchor and cable damaging the ignored.
structure during normal operation.
If a deckhouse having a breadth greater than B/4 is
located above of a deck house equal to or less than B/4
6.3 Towing
in breadth, the wider house is to be considered and the
6.3.1 Adequate arrangements shall be provided to narrow house may be ignored.
enable the craft to be towed in the worst intended Only the parts of windscreens or bulwarks more than
conditions. Where towage is to be from more than one 1,5 m in height above the deck are to be included
point, a suitable bridle shall be provided. when determining hi and A.
6.3.2 The towing arrangements shall be such that .2 Multihull craft
any surface against which the towing cable may chafe
(for example, fairleads) is of sufficient radius to pre- The equipment number is to be calculated as follows:
vent the cable being damaged when under load. ⎡ ⎤
EN = Km ⋅ Δ2 / 3 + 2 ⋅ ⎢a ⋅ B + ∑ ( bi ⋅ hi ⋅ sin Θi ) − St ⎥ + 0,1⋅ A
6.3.3 The maximum permissible speed at which the ⎣ i ⎦
craft may be towed shall be included in the operating where:
manual. – for craft with N identical hulls: Km = N1/3
i.e.:
6.4 Berthing – for catamarans: Km = 1,26
6.4.1 Where necessary, suitable fairleads, bitts and – for trimarans: Km = 1,44
mooring ropes shall be provided.
– for quadrimarans: Km = 1,59
6.4.2 Adequate storage space for mooring lines – for craft with one mid hull and 2 ⋅ n non-identical
shall be provided such that they are readily available lateral hulls (N = 2 ⋅ n + 1):
and secured against the high relative wind speeds and
accelerations which may be experienced. n
( B0 ⋅ T0 )2 / 3 + 2 ⋅ ∑ ( Bi ⋅ Ti )2 / 3
C6.5 Equipment i =1
Km =
⎛ n ⎞
C6.5.1 Documents to be submitted ⎜ B0 ⋅ T0 + 2 ⋅ ∑ Bi ⋅ Ti ⎟
⎝ i =1 ⎠
A detailed drawing showing all the elements necessary
for the evaluation of the equipment number of the (N odd)
craft is to be submitted together with the calculations – for craft with non-identical hulls, but of an even
of the EN number. number (N = 2 ⋅ n):
The anchoring equipment to be fitted on the concerned n
∑ ( Bi ⋅ Ti )
2/3
craft is to be specified.
i =1
K m = 21/ 3 ⋅
C6.5.2 Equipment number 2/3
⎛ n ⎞
⎜ ∑ Bi ⋅ Ti ⎟
.1 Monohull craft ⎝ i =1 ⎠
The equipment number is to be calculated as follows: (N even)
St = transverse area, amidships, of the tunnel(s)
⎡ ⎤
EN = Δ 2 / 3 + 2 ⋅ ⎢a ⋅ B + ∑ ( bi ⋅ h i ⋅ sin Θi ) ⎥ + 0,1 ⋅ A existing between the hulls and the waterline
⎣ i ⎦ B0, T0 = breadth and draught [m] of the mid full hull
Δ = maximum displacement [t] (if any), measured amidship (see Figure
a = distance [m] from summer load waterline amid- C6.5.2)
ships to the upper deck at side Bi, Ti = breadth and draught [m] of the lateral hulls,
hi = height [m] on the centreline of each tier of deck measured amidship (see Figure C6.5.2)
houses having an actual breadth bi greater than N = total number of craft hulls
B/4, where B is the breadth [m] as defined in n = number of lateral hulls on one side of the
C3.1.4 of Section 3 longitudinal symmetry plane of the craft
Θi = angle of inclination aft of each front bulkhead, Δ = total displacement of the craft [t]
as shown on Figure C6.5.1 Other symbols are defined in C6.5.2.1.
I - Part 3 Section 6 Anchoring, Towing and Berthing
GL 2012
1,5 m
Bulwark
Summer load waterline
Fig. C6.5.1
C6.5.3 Anchors
.1 For craft with an equipment number greater
than 600, two anchors and two relevant chain cables
are required. When two bow anchors are fitted, the
mass of each anchor, the diameter and the length of
each chain cable are to comply with the requirements
of Table C6.5.1.
The bow anchors are to be connected to their chain
cables and positioned on board ready for use. It is to
be ensured that each anchor can be stowed in the
hawse and hawse pipe in such a way that it remains
firmly secured in seagoing conditions. Details have to
be coordinated with the owner.
Chafing lips of suitable form with ample lay-up and
radius adequate for the size of the chain cable are to
be provided at the shell and deck. The shell plating at
the hawse pipes is to be reinforced as necessary.
.2 Anchors shall be of an approved design.
Normally “high holding power anchors” (HHP) or
“very high holding power anchors” (VHHP) are to be
used. Possible use of ordinary anchors will be spe-
cially considered by GL.
.3 For HHP anchors, the mass of the anchor
shall comply with the values in Table C6.5.1. The
actual mass of each anchor may vary within (+7, -3)
per cent of the required individual mass provided that
the total mass of all bower anchors is not less than the
sum of the required individual masses.
.4 The mass of a VHHP anchor is to be not less
than 2/3 of the required mass as per Table C6.5.1.
.5 A HHP or VHHP anchor is to be suitable for
use on board without any prior adjustment or special
placement on the sea bed.
B1 0,5 St
T1
T0
In the example: N = 3 and n = 1. In cases where N is even : B0 = T0 = 0
Fig. C6.5.2
Chapter 1
Page 6–3
1,5 m
Qi
a
For approval as a HHP or VHHP anchor satisfactory
tests are to be made on various types of bottom and
the anchor is to have a holding power at least, twice
or four times, respectively, that of an ordinary stock-
less anchor ("Admiralty Standard Stockless") of the
same mass. The mass of anchors to be tested should
be representative of the full range of sizes intended to
be manufactured. The tests are to be carried out on at
least two sizes of anchors in association with the
chain cables appropriate to the weight. The anchors
to be tested and the standard stockless anchors should
be of approx. the same mass.
The chain length used in the tests should be approx. 6
to 10 times the depth of water.
The tests are normally to be carried out from a tug,
however, alternative shore based tests (e.g. with suit-
able winches) may be accepted.
Three tests are to be carried out for each anchor and
type of bottom. The pull shall be measured by means
of a dynamometer or recorded by a recording instru-
ment. Measurements of pull based on rpm/bollard
pull curve of the tug may be accepted.
Testing by comparison with a previously approved
HHP anchor may be accepted as a basis for approval.
The maximum mass of an anchor thus approved may
be 10 times the mass of the largest size of anchor
tested.
The dimensioning of the chain cable and of the wind-
lass is to be based on the undiminished anchor mass
according to the Tables.
B
B0 0,5 St B1
Chapter 1 Section 6 Anchoring, Towing and Berthing
Page 6–4
C6.5.4 Chain cables
.1 The diameters for stud link chain cables
given in the Tables apply to chain cables made of
chain cable materials specified in the Rules II – Ma-
terials and Welding, Part 1 – Metallic Materials, for
the following grades:
– Grade K2 (special quality)
– Grade K3 (extra special quality)
Normally grade K2 or K3 stud link chain cables are
to be used with HHP anchors. In case of VHHP an-
chors, grade K3 chain cables are to be used.
Proposal for use of grade K1 chain cables connected
to ordinary anchors will be specially considered by
GL.
.2 The total length of chain given in Table
C6.5.1 is to be divided in approximately equal parts
between the required number of bower anchors
.3 The breaking load, in kN, of the chain cable
diameters shown between parentheses in Table
C6.5.1 may be derived from the following formulae:
– for grade K2 chain cables:
BL = 13,73 ⋅ d2 ⋅ (44 - 0,08 ⋅ d) ⋅ 10-3
– for grade K3 chain cables:
BL = 19,61 ⋅ d2 ⋅ (44 - 0,08 ⋅ d) ⋅ 10-3
where d is, in mm, the chain cable diameter taken
from Table C6.5.1 corresponding respectively to
grade K2 and grade K3 chain cables.
.4 For craft with an equipment number
EN ≤ 205, studless short link chain cables may be
used, provided that:
(a) steel grade of the studless chain cable meets the
requirement of C6.5.4.1
(b) equivalence in strength is to be based on proof
load (not on breaking load)
(c) the studless chain cable meets the requirements of
GL.
The proof loads PL and breaking loads BL, in kN,
required for the studless link chain cables are given
by the following formulae, where d, in mm, is the
required diameter of grade K2 and grade K3 stud
chain cables taken from Table C6.5.1:
– grade K2:
PL2 = 9,807 ⋅d2 ⋅ (44 - 0,08 ⋅ d) ⋅10-3
BL2 = 2 ⋅ PL2
– grade K3:
PL3 = 13,73 ⋅ d2 ⋅ (44 - 0,08 ⋅ d) ⋅ 10-3
BL3 = 2 ⋅ PL3
.5 For connection of the anchor with the chain
cable approved Kenter-type anchor shackles may be
chosen in lieu of the common Dee-shackles. A fore-
runner with swivel is to be fitted between anchor and
I - Part 3
GL 2012
chain cable. In lieu of a forerunner with swivel an
approved swivel shackle may be used. However,
swivel shackles are not to be connected to the anchor
shank unless specially approved. A sufficient number
of suitable spare shackles are to be kept on board to
facilitate fitting of the spare anchor at any time. On
owner's request the swivel shackle may be dispensed
with.
.6 The attachment of the inboard ends of the
chain cables to the ship's structure is to be provided
with means suitable to permit, in case of emergency,
an easy slipping of the chain cables to sea operable
from an accessible position outside the chain locker.
The inboard ends of the chain cables are to be se-
cured to the structures by a fastening able to with-
stand a force neither less than 15 % nor more than
30 % of the rated breaking load of the chain cable.
C6.5.5 Steel wire ropes for anchors
.1 Steel wire ropes may be used as an alterna-
tive to stud link chain cables required in Table C6.5.1
provided that the following requirements are com-
plied with.
.2 The length Lswr in m, of the steel wire rope
is to be not less than:
– when EN ≤ 130:
Lswr = Lch
– when 130 < EN ≤ 500:
Lswr = Lch ⋅ (EN + 850) / 900
– when EN > 500:
Lswr = 1,5 ⋅ Lch
where Lch is the required length of stud link chain
cable as per Table C6.5.1.
.3 The effective breaking load of the steel wire
rope is to be not less than the required breaking load
of the chain cable it replaces.
.4 Between anchor and steel wire rope a shot of
12,5 m in length or of the distance between stowed
anchor and windlass shall be provided. The smaller
length of this chain part is to be taken.
C6.5.6 Synthetic fibre ropes for anchors
.1 Synthetic fibre ropes may be used as an
alternative to stud link chain cables required in Table
C6.5.1 when EN ≤ 130, provided that the following
requirements are complied with.
.2 Fibre ropes are to be made of polyamide or
other equivalent synthetic fibres, excluding polypro-
pylene.
.3 The length Lsfr, in m, of the synthetic fibre
rope is to be not less than:
– when EN ≤ 60:
Lsfr = Lch
I - Part 3 Section 6 Anchoring, Towing and Berthing
GL 2012
– when 60 < EN ≤ 130
Lsfr = Lch ⋅ (EN + 80)/140
where Lch is the required length of stud link chain
cable as per Table C6.5.1.
.4 The effective breaking load Ps, in kN, of the
synthetic fibre rope is to be not less than the follow-
ing value:
Ps = 2,2 ⋅ BL8/9
where BL, in kN, is the required breaking load of
stud link chain cable as per Table C6.5.1.
.5 Between anchor and synthetic fibre rope a
short length of chain cable shall be provided.
C6.5.7 Windlass
.1 The windlass is to be power driven and suit-
able for the size of chain cable, and is to have the
characteristics stated below.
.2 The windlass is to be fitted in a suitable
position in order to ensure an easy lead of the chain
cable to and through the hawse pipe; the deck, at the
windlass, is to be suitably reinforced.
.3 The windlass is to be able to supply, for at
least 30 minutes, a continuous duty pull PC, in N,
corresponding to the grade of the chain cables, given
by the following formulae:
– for grade K2 chain cables:
PC = 42,5 ⋅ d2
– for grade K3 chain cables:
PC = 47,5 ⋅ d2
where d is the stud link chain cable diameter of the
intended steel grade, in mm.
.4 The windlass unit prime mover is to provide
the necessary temporary overload capacity for break-
ing out the anchor.
The temporary overload capacity or “short term pull”
is to be not less than 1,5 times the continuous duty
pull PC for at least two minutes.
The speed in this overload period may be lower than
the nominal speed specified in C6.5.9.5.
.5 The nominal speed of the chain cable when
hoisting the anchor and cable may be a mean speed
only and is to be not less than 0,15 m/s.
The speed is to be measured over two shots of chain
cable during the entire trip; the test is to commence
with 3 shots (82,5 m) of chain fully submerged, or
with the longest practicable submerged chain length
where the chain length does not allow 3 shots to be
paid out.
.6 The windlass is to be provided with a brake
having sufficient capacity to stop chain cable and
anchor when paying out, even in the event of failure
of the power supply.
Chapter 1
Page 6–5
.7 Windlass and brake not combined with a
chain stopper have to be designed to withstand a pull
of 80 % of the breaking load of the chain cable with-
out any permanent deformation of the stressed parts
and without brake slip.
Windlass and brake combined with a chain stopper
have to be designed to withstand a pull of 45 % of the
breaking load of the chain cable.
.8 The windlass, its frame and the brake are to
be efficiently anchored to the deck. Corresponding
drawings including joining details are to be submitted
for approval.
C6.5.8 Chain stopper
.1 A chain stopper is normally to be fitted be-
tween the windlass and the hawse pipe in order to
relieve the windlass of the pull of the chain cable
when the ship is at anchor.
.2 A chain stopper is to be capable of with-
standing a pull of 80 % of the breaking load of the
chain cable; the deck at the chain stopper is to be
suitably reinforced.
However, fitting of a chain stopper is not compul-
sory.
.3 Chain tensioners or lashing devices support-
ing the weight of the anchor when housed in the
anchor pocket are not to be considered as chain stop-
pers.
.4 Where the windlass is at a distance from the
hawse pipe and no chain stopper is fitted, suitable
arrangements are to be provided to lead the chain
cable to the
windlass.
C6.5.9 Chain locker
.1 The chain locker is to be of capacity and
depth adequate to stow all chain cable equipment and
provide an easy direct lead to the windlass.
.2 Where two anchor lines are fitted, the port
and starboard chain cables are to be separated by a
steel bulkhead in the locker.
.3 The minimum required stowage capacity
without mud box for each bow anchor chain is as
follows:
S = 1,1 d² ℓ/200 000 [m³]
d = chain diameter [mm] according to Table C6.5.1
ℓ = total length of stud link chain cable according
to Table C6.5.1
The shape of the base areas shall as far as possible be
quadratic with a maximum edge length of 33 d. As an
alternative, circular base areas may be selected, the
diameter of which shall not exceed 30 – 35 d.
Above the stowage of each chain locker a free depth
of at least
Chapter 1 Section 6 Anchoring, Towing and Berthing
Page 6–6
h = 750 [mm] for L = 25 m
h = 1500 [mm] for L ≥ 50 m
is to be additionally provided. For intermediate
lengths L linear interpolation is to be applied for the
depth h.
.4 The chain locker boundaries and their access
openings are to be watertight to prevent flooding of
adjacent spaces, where essential installations or
equipment are arranged, in order to not affect the
proper operation of the ship after accidental flooding
of the chain locker.
C6.5.10 Special requirements to minimize the
ingress of water
.1 Spurling pipes and cable lockers are to be
watertight up to the weather deck.
.2 Where means of access is provided, it is to
be closed by a substantial cover and secured by
closely spaced bolts.
.3 Spurling pipes through which anchor cables
are led are to be provided with permanently attached
closing appliances to minimize water ingress.
.4 Adequate drainage facilities of the chain
locker are to be provided.
.5 Where the chain locker boundaries are also
tank boundaries their scantlings of stiffeners and
plating are to be determined as for tanks in accor-
dance with C3.7.12.
Where this is not the case the plate thickness and the
section modulus are to be determined according to
C3.7.12. The distance from the load centre to the top
of the chain locker pipe is to be taken for calculating
the load.
C6.5.11 Allowable stresses
The allowable stresses for the windlass, chain stopper
and the corresponding substructures etc. are not to
exceed
Normal: 85 %
Shear: 55 %
Von Mises: 95 %
of the specific minimum yield point ReH or Rp0,2 of
the used material, respectively.
C6.5.12 Anchoring sea trials
.1 The anchoring sea trials are to be carried out
on board in the presence of a Society surveyor.
.2 The test is to demonstrate that the windlass
complies with the requirements given in C6.5.9.5.
(See also GL Rules Machinery Installations (I-1-2),
Section 14 and Guidelines for Sea Trials of Motor
Vessels (VI-11-3)).
I - Part 3
GL 2012
.3 The brake is to be tested during lowering
operations.
C6.6 Shipboard fittings for towing
C6.6.1 Arrangement and strength
Shipboard fittings for towing are to be located on
longitudinals, beams and/or girders, which are part of
the deck construction so as to facilitate efficient dis-
tribution of the towing load. Other arrangements may
be accepted provided the strength is confirmed ade-
quate for the intended service.
The strength of shipboard fittings used for ordinary
towing operations (not emergency towing) at bow,
sides and stern and their supporting hull structures are
to be determined on the basis of 1.1.1 and 1.1.2.
.1 Load considerations
Unless greater safe working load (SWL) of shipboard
fittings is specified by the applicant, the minimum
design load to be used is the following value of (1) or
(2), whichever is applicable:
(1) for normal towing operations (e.g. harbour / ma-
noeuvring), 1.25 times the intended maximum
towing load (e.g. static bollard pull) as indicated
on the towing and mooring arrangements plan.
(2) for other towing service (e.g. escort), the nominal
breaking strength of the tow line according to Ta-
ble C6.4.1.
Note
Side projected area including maximum stacks of
deck cargoes is to be taken into account for selection
of towing lines.
(3) The design load is to be applied through the tow
line according to the arrangement shown on the
towing and mooring arrangements plan, see
Fig.C6.4.1.
(4) When a specific SWL is applied for a shipboard
fitting at the request of the applicant, by which
the design load will be greater than the above
minimum values, the strength of the fitting is to
be designed using this specific design load.
.2 Allowable stresses
Normal stress: 100% of the specified minimum yield
point of the material
Shearing stress: 60% of the specified minimum yield
point of the material
C6.6.2 Safe working load (SWL)
1) The SWL used for normal towing operations (e.g.
harbour / manoeuvring) is not to exceed 80% of
the design load per 1.1.1(1) and the SWL used for
other towing operations (e.g. escort) is not to ex-
ceed the design load per 1.1.1(2). For fittings
used for both normal and other towing operations,
the greater of the design loads of 1.1.1(1) and
1.1.1(2) is to be used.
I - Part 3 Section 6 Anchoring, Towing and Berthing Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 6–7

2) The SWL of each shipboard fitting is to be .3 Wire ropes shall be of the following type:
marked (by weld bead or equivalent) on the deck
fittings used for towing. – 6 × 24 wires with 7 fibre cores for breaking
loads of up to 500 kN
3) The above requirements on SWL apply for a type: Standard
single post basis (no more than one turn of one
cable). – 6 × 36 wires with 1 fibre core for breaking loads
of more than 500 kN
4) The towing and mooring arrangements plan men- type: Standard
tioned in H. is to define the method of use of tow-
ing lines. Where wire ropes are stored on mooring winch
drums, steel cored wire ropes may be used e.g.:
C6.7 Mooring Equipment
– 6 × 19 wires with 1 steel core
C6.7.1 Ropes type: Seale
1 The following requirements and the Tables
– 6 × 36 wires with 1 steel core
C6.7.1 and C6.5.1 for tow lines and mooring ropes
are recommendations only, a compliance with which type: Warrington-Seale
is not a condition of Class.
.4 Regardless of the breaking load, recom-
.2 For tow lines and mooring lines, steel wire mended in C6.5.1, the diameter of fibre ropes should
ropes as well as fibre ropes made of natural or syn- not be less than 20 mm.
thetic fibres or wire ropes consisting of steel wire and
fibre cores may be used. The breaking loads 1 speci- .5 The length of the individual mooring ropes
fied in Table C6.7.1 are valid for wire ropes and may be up to 7 per cent less than that given in the
ropes of natural fibre (manila) only. Where ropes of table provided that the total length of all the wires
synthetic fibre are used, the breaking load is to be and ropes is not less than the sum of the required
increased above the table values. The extent of in- individual lengths.
crease depends on the material quality.
Where mooring winches on large ships are located on
The required diameters of synthetic fibre ropes used one side of the ship, the lengths of mooring ropes
in lieu of steel wire ropes may be taken from Table should be increased accordingly.
C6.7.1.
C6.7.2 Shipboard fittings (mooring bollards and
Table C6.7.1 Wire/fibre ropes diameter
bitts, fairleads, stand rollers, chocks)
Steel wire Synthetic Fibre ropes
ropes 1 wire ropes The selection of shipboard fittings is to be made by
polyamide 2 polyamide polyester polypro- the shipyard in accordance with an industry standard
pylene (e.g. ISO 3913 Shipbuilding Welded Steel Bollards)
diam. diam. diam. diam. diam. accepted by GL. When the shipboard fitting is not
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] selected from an accepted industry standard, the
12 30 30 30 30
design load used to assess its strength and its attach-
13 30 32 32 32
ment to the ship is to be in accordance with C6.7.3.
14 32 36 36 36
16 32 40 40 40
.1 Arrangement
18 36 44 44 44 Shipboard fittings for mooring are to be located on
20 40 48 48 48 longitudinals, beams and/or girders, which are part of
22 44 48 48 52 the deck construction so as to facilitate efficient dis-
24 48 52 52 56 tribution of the mooring load. Other arrangements
26 56 60 60 64 may be accepted provided the strength is confirmed
28 60 64 64 72 adequate for the service.
32 68 72 72 80
36 72 80 80 88 .2 Safe working load (SWL)
40 72 88 88 96
1) The SWL is not to exceed 80% of the design load
1 according to DIN 3068 or similar.
per C6.7.3.1.
2 Regular laid ropes of refined polyamide monofilaments and
filament fibres. 2) The SWL of each shipboard fitting is to be
marked (by weld bead or equivalent) on the deck
fittings used for mooring.
–––––––––––––– 3) The above requirements on SWL apply for a
1 The term "breaking load" used throughout this section means single post basis (no more than one turn of one
the "nominal breaking load". cable).
Chapter 1 Section 6 Anchoring, Towing and Berthing I - Part 3
Page 6–8 GL 2012

4) The towing and mooring arrangements plan men-

on li ign load
tioned in C6.1.5 is to define the method of use of
mooring lines.

ne
ng

Des
f itti s
C6.7.3 Supporting hull structure for mooring don ime t )
oa n 2 ine
equipment i g n l re thad on l
s o a
De ot m n lo
(N esig
D
Arrangement of the reinforced members (carling)
beneath shipboard fittings is to consider any variation
of direction (horizontally and vertically) of the moor- Design load on
Fitting lin e
ing forces (which is to be not less than the design
load as per .1) acting through the arrangement of
connection to the shipboard fittings.
Fig. C6.7.1 Application of design loads
.1 Load considerations
4) When a specific SWL is applied for a shipboard
1) Unless greater safe working load (SWL) of ship- fitting at the request of the applicant, by which
board fittings is specified by the applicant, the de- the design load will be greater than the above
sign load applied to shipboard fittings and sup- minimum values, the strength of the fitting is to
porting hull structures is to be 1,25 times the be designed using this specific design load.
breaking strength of the mooring line according
to Table C6.7.1. 5) The acting point of the mooring force on ship-
board fittings is to be taken at the attachment
point of a mooring line or at a change in its direc-
2) The design load applied to supporting hull struc- tion.
tures for winches, etc. is to be 1,25 times the in-
tended maximum brake holding load and, for cap-
stans, 1,25 times the maximum hauling-in force. .2 Allowable stresses
Normal stress: 100 % of the specified minimum yield
3) The design load is to be applied through the moor- point of the material
ing line according to the arrangement shown on
the towing and mooring arrangements plan, see Shearing stress: 60 % of the specified minimum yield
Fig. C6.7.1. point of the material
I - Part 3 Section 6 Anchoring, Towing and Berthing Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 6–9

Table C6.5.1 Equipment

Equipment Stud link chain cable
HHP bow anchor Recommended ropes
Number EN for bow anchor
No. A < EN ≤B Mass of Num- Total Diameter 1 Towline Mooring ropes
for each ber of length
grade grade Length 2 Break. Num- Length 3 Break.
Reg. anchor anchors Load
K2 K3 Load ber
steel steel
A B kg] m] mm] [mm] m] kN] m] kN]
51 19 22 16 1 65 (6) (5,5) 180 100 3 80 35
52 22 25 20 1 70 (6,5) (6) 180 100 3 80 35
53 25 30 24 1 70 (7) (6,5) 180 100 3 80 35
54 30 35 28 1 75 (7,5) (7) 180 100 3 80 35
55 35 40 32 1 75 (8) (7,5) 180 100 3 80 35
56 40 45 40 1 80 (8,5) (7,5) 180 100 3 80 35
57 45 50 48 1 82,5 (9) (8) 180 100 3 80 35
58 50 60 60 1 82,5 (10) (8,5) 180 100 3 80 35
59 60 70 67 1 82,5 11 (9,5) 180 100 3 80 35
60 70 80 75 1 110 11 (10) 180 100 3 100 40
61 80 90 90 1 110 12,5 11 180 100 3 100 40
62 90 100 105 1 110 12,5 11 180 100 3 110 40
63 100 110 120 1 110 14 12,5 180 100 3 110 40
64 110 120 135 1 110 14 12,5 180 100 3 110 45
65 120 130 150 1 110 14 12,5 180 100 3 110 45
66 130 140 180 1 110 16 14 190 100 3 120 50
67 140 150 195 1 137,5 16 14 180 100 3 120 50
68 150 175 225 1 137,5 17,5 16 180 100 3 120 55
69 175 205 270 1 137,5 17,5 16 180 110 3 120 60
70 205 240 315 1 137,5 19 17,5 180 130 4 120 65
71 240 280 360 1 137,5 20,5 19 180 150 4 120 70
72 280 320 430 1 165 22 20,5 180 175 4 140 80
73 320 360 495 1 165 24 22 180 200 4 140 85
74 360 400 525 1 165 26 22 180 225 4 140 95
75 400 450 585 1 165 26 24 180 250 4 140 100
76 450 500 675 1 192,5 28 26 190 275 4 140 110
77 500 550 765 1 192,5 30 26 190 305 4 160 120
78 550 600 855 1 192,5 32 28 190 340 4 160 130
79 600 660 900 2 385 32 30 190 370 4 160 145
80 660 720 970 2 385 34 30 190 405 4 160 160
81 720 780 1080 2 440 36 32 190 440 4 170 170
82 780 840 1125 2 440 36 32 190 480 4 170 185
83 840 910 1195 2 440 38 34 190 520 4 170 200
84 910 980 1305 2 440 40 36 200 560 4 170 215
85 980 1060 1440 2 440 42 36 200 600 4 180 230
86 1060 1140 1575 2 440 42 38 200 645 4 180 250
87 1140 1220 1710 2 467,5 44 38 200 690 4 180 270
88 1220 1300 1845 2 467,5 46 40 200 740 4 180 285
1 Values of chain cable diameters shown in brackets are given only to allow determination of the corresponding studless chain cable.
2 Length of towline needs not to be taken greater than 5 L
3 Length of mooring ropes needs not to be taken greater than 2 L
I - Part 3 Section 7 Fire Safety
GL 2012
Section 7
Fire Safety
C7.0 Documents to be submitted
C7.0.1 The following drawings and documents are
to be submitted. To facilitate a smooth and efficient
approval process they shall be submitted electroni-
cally via GLOBE 1 . In specific cases and following
prior agreement with GL they can also be submitted
in paper form in triplicate.
.1 Plan showing the arrangements of the fire
subdivision, including doors and other closing means
of openings in fire resisting divisions.
.2 Schematic plan concerning the natural and
mechanical ventilation, with indication of location of
dampers and identification numbers of the fans serv-
ing each craft section.
.3 Plan showing automatic fire detection sys-
tems and manually operated call points, including fire
alarm systems.
.4 Plan relating to the water fire-fighting sys-
tem (pumps, piping, etc.).
.5 Plan relating to the arrangement of fixed fire
extinguishing systems.
.6 Constructional plans relevant to pressure
vessels or bottles serving fixed fire extinguishing
systems mentioned under .5.
.7 Plans of pumping and drainage means for
the water delivered by fixed water-spraying fire ex-
tinguishing systems.
.8 Plan relating to all other fire-fighting instal-
lations, either fixed or portable.
C7.0.2 Further documentation may be required, if
deemed necessary by GL.
7.1 General Requirements
7.1.1 The following basic principles underlie the
provisions in this Section and are embodied therein
as appropriate, having regard to the category of craft
and the potential fire hazard involved:
.1 maintenance of the main functions and safety
systems of the craft, including propulsion and
control, fire-detection, alarms and extinguish-
ing capability of unaffected spaces, after fire
in any one compartment on board;
––––––––––––––
1 Detailed information about the secured GL system GLOBE
can be found on GL’s website www.gl-group.com/globe.
Chapter 1
Page 7–1
.2 division of the public spaces for category B
craft, in such a way that the occupants of any
compartment can escape to an alternative safe
area or compartment in case of fire;
.3 subdivision of the craft by fire-resisting
boundaries;
.4 restricted use of combustible materials and
materials generating smoke and toxic gases in
a fire;
.5 detection, containment and extinction of any
fire in the space of origin;
.6 protection of means of escape and access for
fire fighting; and
.7 immediate availability of fire-extinguishing
appliances.
7.1.2 The requirements in this Section are based
in the following conditions:
.1 Where a fire is detected, the crew immediately
puts into action the fire-fighting procedures,
informs the base port of the accident and pre-
pares for the escape of passengers to alterna-
tive safe area or compartment, or, if neces-
sary, for the evacuation of passengers.
.2 The use of fuel with a flashpoint below 43 °C
is not recommended. However, fuel with a
lower flashpoint, but not lower than 35 °C,
may be used in gas turbines only subject to
compliance with the provisions specified in
7.5.1 to 7.5.6.
.3 The repair and maintenance of the craft is
carried out in accordance with the require-
ments given in Sections 18 and 19 of this
Code.
.4 Enclosed spaces having reduced lighting, such
as cinemas, discotheques, and similar spaces
are not permitted.
.5 Passenger access to special category spaces
and open ro-ro spaces is prohibited during the
voyage except when accompanied by a crew
member responsible for fire safety. Only
authorised crew members shall be permitted
to enter cargo spaces at sea.
C7.1.3 The following products are to be of ap-
proved type:
 Fire-restricting materials,
 Fire-resisting divisions (decks, bulkheads, doors),
 Penetrations of fire-resisting divisions for pipes,
cables, ducts,
Chapter 1 Section 7 Fire Safety I - Part 3
Page 7–2 GL 2012

 Surface materials, 7.2.3 “Non-combustible material” is a material

which neither burns nor gives off flammable vapours
 Primary deck covering, in sufficient quantity for self-ignition when heated to
 Upholstery furniture, approximately 750 °C, this being determined in ac-
cordance with the Fire Test Procedures Code.
 Bedding components,
 Curtains, 7.2.4 “A standard fire test” is one in which speci-
mens of the relevant bulkheads, decks or other con-
 Non-combustible materials, structions are exposed in a test furnace by a specified
 Oil pipes (other than steel or copper and copper test method in accordance with the Fire Test Proce-
alloys), dures Code.
 Flexible pipes, 7.2.5 Where the words “steel or other equivalent
 Portable and mobile fire extinguishers, material” occur, “equivalent material” means any
non-combustible material which, by itself or due to
 Nozzles for water spray systems or sprinkler insulation provided, has structural and integrity
systems, properties equivalent to steel at the end of the appli-
 Fire-detection systems, cable exposure to the standard fire test (e.g., alumin-
ium alloy with appropriate insulation).
 Fire hoses and nozzles,
 Vapour detection systems, 7.2.6 “Low flame-spread” means that the surface
thus described will adequately restrict the spread of
 Non-sparking fans. flame, this being determined in accordance with the
Fire Test Procedures Code.
7.2 Definitions
7.2.7 “Smoke-tight” or “capable of preventing the
7.2.1 “Fire-resisting divisions” are those divi- passage of smoke” means that a division made of
sions formed by bulkheads and decks which comply non-combustible or fire-restricting materials is capa-
with the following: ble of preventing the passage of smoke.
.1 They shall be constructed of non-combustible
or fire-restricting materials which by insula- 7.3 Classification of Space Use
tion or inherent fire-resisting properties sat- 7.3.1 For the purposes of classification of space
isfy the requirements of 7.2.1.2 to 7.2.1.6. use in accordance with fire hazard risks, the follow-
.1 They shall be suitably stiffened. ing grouping shall apply:

.2 They shall be so constructed as to be capable .1 "Areas of major fire hazard", referred to in

of preventing the passage of smoke and flame
up to the end of the appropriate fire protection
time.
.3 Where required they shall maintain load-
carrying capabilities up to the end of the ap-
propriate fire protection time.
.4 They shall have thermal properties such that
the average temperature on the unexposed
side will not rise more than 140 °C above the
original temperature, nor will the tempera-
ture, at any one point, including any joint, rise
more than 180 °C above the original tempera-
ture during the appropriate fire protection
time.
.5 A test of a prototype bulkhead or deck in ac-
cordance with the Fire Test Procedures Code
shall be required to ensure that it meets the
above requirements.
C7.2.1 With reference to 7.2.1.6 test procedures for
fire-resisting divisions of high speed craft adopted by
the Organization by IMO Resolution MSC 45 (65)
are to be applied.
7.2.2 “Fire-restricting materials” are those mate-
rials which have properties complying with the Fire
Test Procedures Code.
Tables 7.4-1 and 7.4-2 by A, include the fol-
lowing spaces:
− machinery spaces
− ro-ro spaces
− spaces containing dangerous goods
− special category spaces
− store-rooms containing flammable liquids
− galleys
− sales shops having a deck area of 50 m² or
greater and containing flammable liquids
for sale
− trunks in direct communication with the
above spaces.
.2 "Areas of moderate fire hazard", referred to in
Tables 7.4-1 and 7.4-2 by B, include the fol-
lowing spaces:
− auxiliary machinery spaces, as defined in
1.4.5
− bond stores containing packaged bever-
ages with alcohol content not exceeding 24
% by volume
− crew accommodation containing sleeping
berths
I - Part 3 Section 7 Fire Safety
GL 2012
− service spaces
− sales shops having a deck area of less
than 50 m² containing a limited amount of
flammable liquids for sale and where no
dedicated store is provided separately
− sales shops having a deck area of 50 m² or
greater not containing flammable liquids
− trunks in direct communication with the
above spaces.
.3 “Areas of minor fire hazard", referred to in
Tables 7.4-1 and 7.4-2 by C, include the fol-
lowing spaces:
− auxiliary machinery spaces, as defined in
1.4.6
− cargo spaces.
− fuel tank compartments
− public spaces
− tanks, voids and areas of little or no fire
risk
− refreshment kiosks
− sales shops other than those specified in
7.3.1.1 and 7.3.1.2
− corridors in passenger areas and stairway
enclosures
− crew accommodation other than that men-
tioned in 7.3.1.2
− trunks in direct communication with the
above spaces.
.4 "Control stations", referred to in Tables 7.4-1
and 7.4-2 by D, as defined in 1.4.16
.5 "Evacuation Stations and external escape
routes", referred to in Tables 7.4-1 and 7.4-2
by E, include the following areas:
− external stairs an open decks used for es-
cape routes
− assembly stations, internal and external
− open deck spaces and enclosed prome-
nades forming lifeboat and liferaft embar-
kation and lowering stations
− the craft's side to the waterline in the
lightest seagoing condition, superstruc-
ture and deckhouse sides situated below
and adjacent to the liferaft's and evacua-
tion slide's embarkation areas.
.6 "Open Spaces" referred to in Tables 7.4-1 and
7.4-2 by F, include the following areas:
− open spaces locations other than evacua-
tion stations and external escape routes
and control stations.
7.3.2 In relation to the classification of spaces in
7.3.1, the following additional criteria shall be ap-
plied:
Chapter 1
Page 7–3
.1 if a space is divided by partial bulkheads into
two (or more) smaller areas such that they
form enclosed spaces, then the enclosed
spaces shall be surrounded by bulkheads and
decks in accordance with tables 7.4-1 and 7.4-
2, as applicable. However, if the separating
bulkheads of such spaces are at least 30 %
open, then the spaces may be considered as
the same space.
.2 Cabinets having a deck area of less than 2 m2
may be accepted as part of the space they
serve, provided they have open ventilation to
the space and do not contain any material or
equipment that could be a fire risk.
.3 Where a space has the special characteristics
of two or more space groupings, the structural
fire protection time of the divisions shall be
the highest for the space groupings concerned.
For example, the structural fire protection
time of the divisions of emergency generator
rooms shall be of the highest value for the
space when the space is considered as being a
control station (D) and a machinery space (A).
7.3.3 In approving structural fire protection de-
tails, the Administration shall have regard to the risk
of heat transmission at intersections and terminal
points of required thermal barriers.
7.3.4 To prevent heat transmission at intersections
and terminal points, the insulation of the deck or
bulkhead shall be carried past the intersection or
terminal point for a distance of at least 450 mm in the
case of steel or aluminium structures (refer to figures
7.3.4a and 7.3.4b).
7.3.5 If a space is divided by a deck or bulkhead
and the fire insulation required for each space is
different, the insulation with the higher structural fire
protection time shall continue on the deck or bulk-
head with the insulation of the lesser structural fire
protection time for a distance of at least 450 mm
beyond the boundary between the spaces.
7.3.6 Where the lower part of the fire insulation
has to be cut for drainage, the construction shall be
in accordance with the structural details shown in
figure 7.3.6.
Where d £ 450 mm Where d > 450 mm
d d d
450 mm
d = depth of stiffener girder
Figure 7.3.4a
Chapter 1 Section 7 Fire Safety I - Part 3
Page 7–4 GL 2012

450 mm and cargo craft by 4.8.1, then the times given below
in 7.4.2.2 and 7.4.2.3 may be amended pro rata. In
Bulkhead, Bulkhead, no case shall the structural fire protection time be
deck, etc. deck, etc.

450 mm
less than 30 min.
C7.4.1.1 Fire insulation may be omitted on upper
side of decks provided that a fixed water spraying
system delivering not less than 5 l/min/m2 is in-
Figure 7.3.4b stalled.
7.4.1.2 In using Tables 7.4-1 and 7.4-2, it shall be
Lining noted that the title of each category is intended to be
Deck typical rather than restricted. For determining the
£ 100 mm appropriate fire integrity standards to be applied to
boundaries between adjacent spaces, where there is
doubt as to their classification for the purpose of this
Section, they shall be treated as spaces within the
relevant category having the most stringent boundary
450 mm
requirement.
Figure 7.3.6 7.4.1.3 The hull, superstructure, structural bulk-
heads, decks, deckhouses and pillars shall be con-
7.4 Structural Fire Protection structed of approved non-combustible materials hav-
ing adequate structural properties. The use of other
7.4.1 Main structure fire-restricting materials may be permitted provided
the requirements of this Section are complied with
7.4.1.1 The requirements below apply to all craft and the materials are in compliance with the Fire
irrespective of construction material. The structural Test Procedures Code.
fire protection times for separating bulkheads and
decks shall be in accordance with tables 7.4-1 and 7.4.1.4 Paragraph 7.4.1.3 does not apply to ap-
7.4.-2, and the structural fire protection times are all pendages such as air propellers, air ducts to propel-
based on providing protection for a period of 60 min lers, transmission shafts, rudders and other control
as referred to in 4.8.1. If any other lesser structural surfaces, struts, spars, flexible skirts, etc., which do
fire protection time is determined for category A craft not comprise part of the main structure of the craft.

Table 7.4-1 Structural fire protection times for separating bulkheads and decks of passenger craft

A B C D E F

A 60 (1,2) 30 (3) (3,4) (3) ¾

Areas of major
fire hazard 60 (1,2) 60 (1) 60 (1,8) 60 (1) 60 (1) 60 (1,7,9)
B 30 (2) (3) (3,4) (3) ¾
Areas of
moderate fire
hazard 30 (2) 30 (8) 60 30 (3)
C (3) (3,4) (3) ¾

Areas of minor
fire hazard (3) 30 (8,10) (3) (3)
D (3,4) (3) ¾

Control stations (3,4) (3,4) (3)

E (3) ¾
Evacuation
stations and
escape routes (3) (3)
F ¾

Open spaces ¾
I - Part 3 Section 7 Fire Safety Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 7–5

Table 7.4-2 Structural fire protection times for separating bulkheads and decks of cargo craft
A B C D E F

A 60 (1,2) 30 (3) (3,4) (3) ¾

Areas of major
fire hazard 60 (1,2) 60 (1) 60 (1,8) 60 (1) 60 (1) 60 (1,7,9)

B (2,6) (3) (3,4) (3) ¾

Areas of
moderate fire
hazard (2,6) (6) 60 (6) (3)

C (3) (3,4) (3) ¾

Areas of minor
fire hazard (3) 30 (8) (3) (3)

D (3,4) (3) ¾

Control stations (3,4) (3,4) (3)

E (3) ¾

Evacuation
stations and
escape routes (3) (3)

F ¾

Open spaces ¾

Notes: 5. There are no special requirements for material or

The figures on either side of the diagonal line repre-
sent the required structural fire protection time for
the protection system on the relevant side of the divi-
sion. When steel construction is used and two differ-
ent structural fire protection times are required for a
division in the table, only the greater one need be
applied.
1. The upper side of decks within spaces protected
by fixed fire-extinguishing systems need not be in-
sulated.
2. Where adjacent spaces are in the same alphabeti-
cal category and a note 2 appears, a bulkhead or
deck between such spaces need not be fitted if
deemed unnecessary by the Administration. For
example, a bulkhead need not be required be-
tween two store-rooms. A bulkhead, is however,
required between a machinery space and a spe-
cial category space even through both spaces are
in the same category.
3. No structural fire protection requirements; how-
ever, a smoke-tight division made of non-
combustible or fire restricting material is re-
quired.
4. Control stations which are also auxiliary machin-
ery spaces shall be provided with 30 min struc-
tural fire protection.
integrity of boundaries where only a dash ap-
pears in the tables.
6. The fire protection time is 0 min and the time for
prevention of passage of smoke and flame is 30
min as determined by the first 30 min of the stan-
dard fire test.
7. Fire resisting divisions need not comply with
7.2.1.5.
8. When steel construction is used, fire resisting
divisions adjacent to void spaces need not comply
with 7.2.1.5.
9. The fire protection time may be reduced to 0 min
for those parts of open ro-ro spaces which are not
essential parts of the craft's main load bearing
structure, where passengers have no access to
them and the crew need not have access to them
during any emergency.
10. On category A craft, this value may be reduced to
0 min where the craft is provided with only a sin-
gle public space (excluding lavatories) protected
by a sprinkler system and adjacent to the operat-
ing compartment.
7.4.2 Fire-resisting divisions
7.4.2.1 Areas of major and moderate fire hazard
shall be enclosed by fire-resisting divisions comply-
Chapter 1 Section 7 Fire Safety
Page 7–6
ing with the requirements of 7.2.1 except where the
omission of any such division would not affect the
safety of the craft. These requirements need not apply
to those parts of the structure in contact with water at
least 300 mm below the craft’s waterline in the light-
weight condition in displacement mode, but due re-
gard shall be given to the effect of temperature of hull
in contact with water and heat transfer from any
uninsulated structure in contact with water to insu-
lated structure above the water.
7.4.2.2 Fire-resisting bulkheads and decks shall be
constructed to resist exposure to the standard fire test
for a period of 30 min for areas of moderate fire
hazard and 60 minutes for areas of major fire hazard
except as provided in 7.4.1.1.
7.4.2.3 Main load-carrying structures within areas
of major fire hazard and areas of moderate fire haz-
ard and structures supporting control stations shall
be arranged to distribute load such that there will be
no collapse of the construction of the hull and super-
structure when it is exposed to fire for the appropri-
ate fire protection time. The load-carrying structure
shall also comply with the requirements of 7.4.2.4
and 7.4.2.5.
7.4.2.4 If the structures specified in 7.4.2.3 are
made of aluminium alloy their installation shall be
such that the temperature of the core does not rise
more than 200°C above the ambient temperature in
accordance with the times in 7.4.1.1 and 7.4.2.2.
7.4.2.5 If the structures specified in 7.4.2.3 are
made of combustible material, their insulation shall
be such that their temperatures will not rise to a level
where deterioration of the construction will occur
during the exposure to the standard fire test in ac-
cordance with the Fire Test Procedures Code to such
an extent that the load-carrying capability, in accor-
dance with the times in 7.4.1.1 and 7.4.2.3, will be
impaired.
7.4.2.6 The construction of all doors, and door
frames in fire-resisting divisions, with the means of
securing them when closed, shall provide resistance
to fire as well as to the passage of smoke and flame
equivalent to that of the bulkheads in which they are
situated. Watertight doors of steel need not be insu-
lated. Also, where a fire-resisting division is pene-
trated by pipes, ducts, electrical cables etc., ar-
rangements shall be made to ensure that the fire-
resisting integrity of the division is not impaired, and
necessary testing shall be carried out in accordance
with the Fire Test Procedures Code. Where machin-
ery shafts penetrate fire-resisting watertight divi-
sions, arrangements shall be made to ensure that the
required watertight and fire-resisting integrity of the
division is not impaired.
7.4.2.7 Ventilation openings may be accepted in
entrance doors to public toilets, provided they are
positioned in the lower portion of the door and fitted
with closable grilles made of non-combustible or fire-
I - Part 3
GL 2012
restricting material and operable from outside the
space.
7.4.3 Restricted use of combustible materials
7.4.3.1 All separating divisions, ceilings or linings if
not a fire resisting division, shall be of non-
combustible or fire restricting materials. Draught
stops shall be of non-combustible or fire-restricting
material.
7.4.3.2 Where insulation is installed in areas in
which it could come into contact with any flammable
fluids or their vapours, its surface shall be imperme-
able to such flammable fluids of vapours. The fire
insulation in such spaces may be covered by metal
sheets (not perforated) or by vapour proof glass cloth
sealed at joints.
7.4.3.3 Furniture and furnishings in public spaces
and crew accommodation shall comply with the fol-
lowing standards 2:
.1 all case furniture e.g., desks, wardrobes,
dressing tables, bureaux and dressers is con-
structed entirely of approved non-combustible
or fire-restricting materials, except that a
combustible veneer with a calorific value not
exceeding 45 MJ/m2 may be used on the ex-
posed surface of such articles;
.2 all other furniture such as chairs, sofas and
tables, is constructed with frames of non-
combustible or fire-restricting materials;
.3 all draperies, curtains and other suspended
textile materials have qualities of resistance to
the propagation of flame, this being deter-
mined in accordance with the Fire Test Pro-
cedures Code;
.4 all upholstered furniture has qualities of resis-
tance to the ignition and propagation of flame,
this being determined in accordance with the
Fire Test Procedures Code;
.5 all bedding components have qualities of
resistance to the ignition and propagation of
flame, this being determined in accordance
with the Fire Test Procedures Code; and
––––––––––––––
2 Fire test procedures referenced in the FTP Code (resolution
MSC.61(67), as amended, and MSC/Circ.916, 964, 1004,
1008, 1036 and 1120 should be applied to items and materi-
als covered by this paragraph as follows:
.1 case furniture (FTP Code, annex 1, parts 1 and 10);
.2 frames of all other furniture (FTP Code, annex 1, parts 1
and 10);
.3 draperies, textiles and other suspended textile materials
(FTP Code, annex 1, part 7);
.4 upholstered furniture, e.g. passenger seating (FTP Code,
annex 1, part 8);
.5 bedding components (FTP Code, annex 1, part 9); and
.6 deck finish materials (FTP Code, annex 1, parts 2 and 6).
I - Part 3 Section 7 Fire Safety
GL 2012
.6 all deck finish materials comply with the Fire
Test Procedures Code.
C7.4.3.3 Requirement 7.4.3.3.1 is applicable to
furniture such as desks, wardrobes, dressing tables,
bureaux and dressers.
7.4.3.4 Subject to 7.4.3.5 the following surfaces
shall, as a minimum standard, be constructed of
materials having low flame-spread characteristics:
.1 exposed surfaces in corridors and stairway
enclosures, and of bulkheads (including win-
dows), wall and ceiling linings in all public
spaces, crew accommodation, service spaces,
control stations and internal assembly and
evacuation stations;
.2 surfaces in concealed or inaccessible spaces
in corridors and stairway enclosures, public
spaces, crew accommodation, service spaces,
control stations and internal assembly and
evacuation stations.
7.4.3.5 Paragraph 7.4.3.4 does not apply to parti-
tions, windows and sidescuttles made of glass which
are deemed to be non-combustible and to comply
with the requirements for low-flame spread surfaces
or to items and materials referred to in 7.4.3.3 3.
7.4.3.6 Any thermal and acoustic insulation shall be
of non-combustible or of fire-restricting material.
Vapour barriers and adhesives used in conjunction
with insulation, as well as insulation of pipe fittings
for cold service systems need not be non-combustible
or fire-restricting, but they shall be kept to the mini-
mum quantity practicable and their exposed surfaces
shall have low flame spread characteristics.
7.4.3.7 Exposed surfaces in corridors and stairway
enclosures, and of bulkheads (including windows),
wall and ceiling linings, in all public spaces, crew
accommodation, service spaces, control stations and
internal assembly and evacuation stations shall be
constructed of materials which, when exposed to fire,
are not capable of producing excessive quantities of
smoke or toxic products, this being determined in
accordance with the Fire Test Procedures Code.
7.4.3.8 Void compartments, where low-density com-
bustible materials are used to provide buoyancy,
shall be protected from adjacent fire hazard areas by
fire-resisting divisions, in accordance with tables 7.4-
1 and 7.4-2. Also, the space and closures to it shall
be gastight but it shall be ventilated to atmosphere.
7.4.3.9 In compartments where smoking is allowed,
suitable non-combustible ash containers shall be
provided. In compartments where smoking is not
allowed, adequate notices shall be displayed.
––––––––––––––
3 Refer to 7.9.3.4 and the FTP Code, annex 2, paragraphs 1 and
5.1.
Chapter 1
Page 7–7
7.4.3.10 The exhaust gas pipes shall be arranged so
that the risk of fire is kept to a minimum. To this
effect, the exhaust system shall be insulated and all
compartments and structures which are contiguous
with the exhaust system, or those which may be af-
fected by increased temperatures caused by waste
gases in normal operation or in an emergency, shall
be constructed of non-combustible material or be
shielded and insulated with non-combustible material
to protect from high temperatures.
7.4.3.11 The design and arrangement of the exhaust
manifolds or pipes shall be such as to ensure the safe
discharge of exhaust gases.
7.4.4 Arrangement
7.4.4.1 Internal stairways connecting only two
decks need only be enclosed at one deck by means of
divisions and self-closing doors having the structural
fire protection time as required by tables 7.4-1 and
7.4-2 for divisions separating those areas which each
stairway serves.
7.4.4.2 Open stairways may be fitted in public
spaces consisting of only two decks, provided the
stairways lie wholly within such public spaces and
the following conditions are met:
.1 all levels are used for the same purpose;
.2 the area of the opening between the lower and
upper parts of the space is at least 10 % of the
deck area between the upper and lower parts
of the space;
.3 the design is such that persons within the
space should be generally aware, or could
easily be made aware of, a developing fire or
other hazardous situation located within that
space;
.4 sufficient means of escape are provided from
both levels of the space directly leading to an
adjacent safe area or compartment; and
.5 the whole space is served by one section of the
sprinkler system.
7.4.4.3 Lift trunks shall be so fitted as to prevent the
passage of smoke and flame from one deck to another
and shall be provided with means of closing so as to
permit the control of draught and smoke.
7.4.4.4 In public spaces, crew accommodation,
service spaces, control stations, corridors and stair-
ways, air spaces enclosed behind ceilings, panelling
or linings shall be suitably divided by close-fitting
draught stops not more than 14 m apart. Draught
stops are not required in public spaces of category A
craft having only one public space and on other craft
in spaces with open ceilings (perforated ceilings)
where the opening is 40 % or more and the ceiling is
Chapter 1 Section 7 Fire Safety
Page 7–8
arranged in such a way that a fire behind the ceiling
can be easily seen and extinguished.
7.5 Fuel and Other Flammable Fluid Tanks
and Systems
7.5.1 Tanks containing fuel and other flammable
fluids shall be separated from passenger, crew, and
baggage compartments by vapour-proof enclosures
or cofferdams which are suitably ventilated and
drained.
7.5.2 Fuel oil tanks shall not be located in, be
formed by any part of the structural boundary of,
areas of major fire hazard. However, flammable
fluids of a flashpoint not less than 60 °C may be lo-
cated within such areas provided the tanks are made
of steel or other equivalent material. The use of alu-
minium in lubricating oil sump tanks for engines, or
in lubricating oil filter housings fitted integral with
the engines, is accepted.
C7.5.2 Integral or independent fuel tanks made of
aluminium alloys, GRP or equivalent may be located
within major fire hazard areas when they are insu-
lated for 60 minutes fire integrity. The same insula-
tion standard is required for bulkheads or decks sepa-
rating oil fuel tanks from major fire hazard areas.
7.5.3 Every fuel oil pipe which, if damaged, would
allow oil to escape from a storage, settling or daily
service tank shall be fitted with a cock or valve di-
rectly on the tank capable of being closed from a
position outside the space concerned in the event of a
fire occurring in the space in which such tanks are
situated.
7.5.4 Pipes, valves and couplings conveying
flammable fluids shall be of steel or such alternative
material satisfactory to a standard 4, in respect of
strength and fire integrity having regard to the ser-
vice pressure and the spaces in which they are in-
stalled. Wherever practicable, the use of flexible
pipes shall be avoided.
7.5.5 Pipes, valves and couplings conveying
flammable fluids shall be arranged as far from hot
surfaces or air intakes of engine installations, electri-
cal appliances and other potential sources of ignition
as is practicable and be located or shielded so that
the likelihood of fluid leakage coming into contact
with such sources of ignition is kept to a minimum.
7.5.6 Fuel with a flash point below 35 °C shall not
be used. In every craft in which fuel with a flashpoint
below 43 °C is used, the arrangements for the stor-
age, distribution and utilization of the fuel shall be
such that, having regard to the hazard of fire and
explosion which the use of such fuel may entail, the
safety of the craft and of persons on board is pre-
––––––––––––––
4 Refer to the Guidelines for the application of plastic pipes on
ships, adopted by the Organization by resolution A.753(18).
I - Part 3
GL 2012
served. The arrangements shall comply, in addition
to the requirements of 7.5.1 to 7.5.5, with the follow-
ing provisions:
.1 tanks for the storage of such fuel shall be
located outside any machinery space and at a
distance of not less than 760 mm inboard from
the shell side and bottom plating, and from
decks and bulkheads;
.2 arrangements shall be made to prevent over-
pressure in any fuel tank or in any part of the
oil fuel system, including the filling pipes. Any
relief valves and air or overflow pipes shall
discharge to a position which, in the opinion
of the Administration, is safe;
.3 the spaces in which fuel tanks are located
shall be mechanically ventilated, using ex-
haust fans providing not less than six air
changes per hour. The fans shall be such as to
avoid the possibility of ignition of flammable
gas-air mixtures. Suitable wire mesh guards
shall be fitted over inlet and outlet ventilation
openings. The outlets for such exhausts shall
be discharged to a position which, in the opin-
ion of the Administration is 'No Smoking'
signs shall be posted at the entrance to such
spaces;
.4 earthed electrical distribution systems shall
not be used, with the exception of earthed in-
trinsically safe circuits;
.5 suitable certified safe type 5 electrical equip-
ment be used in all spaces where fuel leakage
could occur, including the ventilation system.
Only electrical equipment and fittings essen-
tial for operational purposes shall be fitted in
such spaces;
.6 a fixed vapour-detection system shall be in-
stalled in each space through which fuel lines
pass, with alarms provided at the continuously
manned control station;
.7 every fuel tanks shall, where necessary, be
provided with "savealls" or gutters which
would catch any fuel which may leak from
such tank;
.8 safe and efficient means of ascertaining the
amount of fuel contained in any tank shall be
provided. Sounding pipes shall not terminate
in any space where the risk of ignition of
spillage from the sounding pipe might arise. In
particular, they shall not terminate in passen-
ger or crew spaces. The use of cylindrical
––––––––––––––
5 Refer to Recommendations published by the International
Electrotechnical Commision and, in particular, publication
60092 – Electrical Installations in Ships.
I - Part 3 Section 7 Fire Safety
GL 2012
gauge glasses is prohibited, except for cargo
craft where the use of oil-level gauges with
flat glasses and self-closing valves between
the gauges and fuel tanks may be permitted by
the Administration. Other means of ascertain-
ing the amount of fuel contained in any tank
may be permitted if such means do not require
penetration below the top of the tank, and pro-
viding their failure or overfilling of the tank
will not permit the release of fuel;
.9 during bunkering operations, no passenger
shall be on board the craft or in the vicinity of
the bunkering station, and adequate 'No
Smoking' and 'No Naked Lights' signs shall be
posted. Vessel-to-shore fuel connections shall
be of closed type and suitably grounded dur-
ing bunkering operations;
.10 the provision of fire detection and extinguish-
ing systems in spaces where non-integral fuel
tanks are located shall be in accordance with
paragraphs 7.7.1 to 7.7.3; and
.11 refuelling of the craft shall be done at the
approved refuelling facilities, detailed in the
route operational manual, at which the fol-
lowing fire appliances are provided:
.11.1 a suitable foam applicator system con-
sisting of monitors and foam-making
branch pipes capable of delivering
foam solution at a rate of not less than
50 l /m for not less than 10 min;
.11.2 dry powder extinguishers of total ca-
pacity not less than 50 kg; and
.11.3 carbon dioxide extinguishers of total
capacity not less than 16 kg.
C7.5.6 With reference to 7.5.6.3, fans are to be of a
non-sparking type in accordance with GL’s Rules.
7.6 Ventilation
7.6.1 The main inlets and outlets of all ventilation
systems shall be capable of being closed from outside
the spaces being ventilated. The controls shall be
easily accessible as well as prominently and perma-
nently marked and shall indicate whether the shut-off
is open or closed. In addition, such openings to areas
of major fire hazard shall be capable of being closed
from a continuously manned control station.
7.6.2 All ventilation fans shall be capable of being
stopped from outside the spaces which they serve,
and from outside the spaces in which they are in-
stalled. Ventilation fans serving areas of major fire
hazard shall be capable of being operated from a
continuously manned control station. The means
provided for stopping the power ventilation to the
machinery space shall be separated from the means
provided for stopping ventilation of other spaces.
Chapter 1
Page 7–9
7.6.3 Areas of major fire hazard and spaces serv-
ing as assembly stations shall have independent ven-
tilation systems and ventilation ducts. Ventilation
ducts for areas of major fire hazard shall not pass
through other spaces, unless they are contained
within a trunk or in an extended machinery space or
casing insulated in accordance with tables 7.4-1 and
7.4-2; ventilation ducts of other spaces shall not pass
through areas of major fire hazard. Ventilation out-
lets from areas of major fire hazard shall not termi-
nate within a distance of 1 m from any control sta-
tion, evacuation station or external escape route. In
addition, exhaust ducts from galley ranges shall be
fitted with:
.1 a grease trap readily removable for cleaning
unless an alternative approved grease re-
moval system is fitted;
.2 a fire damper located in the lower end of the
duct (the junction between the duct and the
galley range hood) which is automatically and
remotely operated, and in addition a remotely
operated fire damper located in the upper end
of the duct;
.3 a fixed means for extinguishing a fire within
the duct;
.4 remote control arrangements for shutting off
the exhaust fans and supply fans, for operating
the fire dampers mentioned in .2 and for oper-
ating the fire-extinguishing system, which
shall be placed in a position close to the en-
trance to the galley. Where a multi-branch
system is installed, a remote means located
with the above controls shall be provided to
close all branches exhausting through the
same main duct before an extinguishing me-
dium is released into the system; and
.5 suitably located hatches for ins pection and
cleaning. At minimum, one hatch shall be pro-
vided close to the exhaust fan and others lo-
cated in areas of high grease accumulation
such as the lower end of the duct as referred
to in 7.6.3.2.
7.6.4 Where a ventilation duct passes through a
fire-resisting division, a fail safe automatic closing
fire damper shall be fitted adjacent to the division.
The duct between the division and the damper shall
be of steel or other equivalent material and insulated
to the same standard as required for the fire resisting
division. The fire damper may be omitted where ducts
pass through spaces surrounded by fire-resisting
divisions without serving those spaces providing that
the duct has the same structural fire protection time
as the divisions it penetrates. Where a ventilation
duct passes through a smoke-tight division, a smoke
damper shall be fitted at the penetration unless the
duct which passes through the space does not serve
Chapter 1 Section 7 Fire Safety
Page 7–10
that space. Fire and smoke dampers shall be ar-
ranged so as to be readily accessible. Where placed
behind ceilings or linings, they shall be provided with
an inspection door marked to identify the damper.
Such identification shall also be placed on any re-
quired remote controls.
7.6.5 Where ventilation systems penetrate decks,
the arrangements shall be such that the effectiveness
of the deck in resisting fire is not thereby impaired
and precautions shall be taken to reduce the likeli-
hood of smoke and hot gases passing from one be-
tween-deck space to another through the system.
7.6.6 All dampers fitted on fire-resisting or smoke-
tight divisions shall also be capable of being manu-
ally closed from each side of the division in which
they are fitted, except for those dampers fitted on
ducts serving spaces not normally manned such as
stores and toilets that may be manually operated only
from outside the served spaces. Manual closing may
be achieved by mechanical means of release or by
remote operation of the fire or smoke damper by
means of a fail-safe electrical switch or pneumatic
release (i.e. spring-loaded, etc.). All dampers shall
also be capable of being remotely closed from the
continuously manned control station.
7.6.7 Ducts shall be made of non-combustible or
fire restricting material. Short ducts, however, may
be of combustible materials subject to the following
conditions:
.1 their cross-section does not exceed 0,02 m² ;
.2 their length does not exceed 2 m;
.3 they may only be used at the terminal end of
the ventilation system;
.4 they shall not be situated less than 600 mm
from an opening in a fire-resisting or fire-
restricting division; and
.5 their surfaces have low flame spread charac-
teristics.
7.7 Fire Detection and Extinguishing Systems
7.7.1 Fire detection systems
Areas of major and moderate fire hazard and other
enclosed spaces not regularly occupied within public
spaces and crew accommodation, such as toilets,
stairway enclosures, corridors and escape routes
shall be provided with an approved automatic smoke
detection system and manually operated call points
complying with the requirements of 7.7.1.1 and
7.7.1.3 to indicate at the control station the location
of outbreak of a fire in all normal operating condi-
tions of the installations. Control stations not nor-
mally occupied (e.g., emergency generator rooms)
need not be provided with manually operated call
I - Part 3
GL 2012
points. Detectors operated by heat instead of smoke
may be installed in galleys. Main propulsion machin-
ery room(s) shall in addition have detectors sensing
other than smoke and be supervised by TV cameras
monitored from the operating compartment. Manu-
ally operated call points shall be installed throughout
the public spaces, crew accommodation, corridors
and stairway enclosures, service spaces and where
necessary control stations. One manually operated
call point shall be located at each exit from these
spaces and from areas of major fire hazard.
7.7.1.1 General requirements
.1 Any required fixed fire-detection and fire
alarm system with manually operated call
points shall be capable of immediate opera-
tion at all times.
.2 Power supplies and electric circuits necessary
for the operation of the system shall be moni-
tored for loss of power or fault conditions as
appropriate. Occurrence of a fault condition
shall initiate a visual and audible fault signal
at the control panel which shall be distinct
from a fire signal.
.3 There shall be not less than two sources of
power supply for the electrical equipment used
in the operation of the fixed fire-detection and
fire alarm system, one of which shall be an
emergency source. The supply shall be pro-
vided by separate feeders reserved solely for
that purpose. Such feeders shall run to an
automatic change-over switch situated in or
adjacent to the control panel for the fire-
detection system.
.4 Detectors and manually operated call points
shall be grouped into sections, each of which
shall comprise a group of fire detectors and
manually operated call points as displayed at
the indicating unit(s) required by this para-
graph. The activation of any detector or
manually operated call point shall initiate a
visual and audible fire signal at the control
panel and indicating units. If the signals have
not received attention within two minutes an
audible alarm shall be automatically sounded
throughout the crew accommodation and ser-
vice spaces, control stations and machinery
spaces. There shall be no time delay for the
audible alarms in crew accommodation areas
when all the control stations are unattended.
The alarm sounder system need not be an in-
tegral part of the detection system.
.5 The control panel shall be located in the oper-
ating compartment or in the main fire control
station.
.6 Indicating units shall, as a minimum, denote
the section in which a detector or manually
operated call point has operated. At least one
unit shall be so located that it is easily acces-
I - Part 3 Section 7 Fire Safety
GL 2012
sible to responsible members of the crew at all
times, when at sea or in port, except when the
craft is out of service. One indicating unit
shall be located in the operating compartment
if the control panel is located in the space
other than the operating compartment.
.7 Clear information shall be displayed on or
adjacent to each indicating unit about the
spaces covered and the location of the sec-
tions.
.8 Where the fire-detection system does not in-
clude means of remotely identifying each de-
tector individually, no section covering more
than one deck within public spaces, crew ac-
commodation, corridors, service spaces and
control stations shall normally be permitted
except a section which covers an enclosed
stairway. In order to avoid delay in identifying
the source of fire, the number of enclosed
spaces included in each section shall be lim-
ited as determined by the Administration. In
no case shall more than 50 enclosed spaces be
permitted in any section. If the detection sys-
tem is fitted with remotely and individually
identifiable fire detectors, the sections may
cover several decks and serve any number of
enclosed spaces.
.9 In passenger craft, if there is no fire-detection
system capable of remotely and individually
identifying each detector, a section of detec-
tors shall not serve spaces on both sides of the
craft nor on more than one deck and neither
shall it be situated in more than one zone ac-
cording to 7.11.1. Notwithstanding the preced-
ing requirements of this paragraph, the Ad-
ministration may accept that the same section
of detectors can serve spaces on more than
one deck if such spaces are located in the fore
or aft end of the craft or they are so arranged
that they constitute common spaces on differ-
ent decks (e.g., fan rooms, galleys, public
spaces, etc.).
.10 A section of fire detectors which covers a
control station, a service space, a public
space, crew accommodation, corridor or
stairway enclosure shall not include a ma-
chinery space of major fire hazard. In the case
of a fire detection system with remotely and
individually identifiable fire detectors, this re-
quirement is met if no machinery spaces of a
major fire hazard are included in a loop (elec-
trical circuit linking detectors of various sec-
tions in a sequence and connected (input and
output) to the indicating unit(s)) covering ac-
commodation spaces, service spaces and con-
trol stations.
.11 Detectors shall be operated by heat, smoke or
other products of combustion, flame, or any
combination of these factors. Detectors oper-
Chapter 1
Page 7–11
ated by other factors indicative of incipient
fires may be considered by the Administration
provided that they are no less sensitive than
such detectors. Flame detectors shall only be
used in addition to smoke or heat detectors.
.12 Suitable instructions and component spares
for testing and maintenance shall be provided.
.13 The function of the detection system shall be
periodically tested by means of equipment
producing hot air at the appropriate tempera-
ture, or smoke or aerosol particles having the
appropriate range of density or particle size,
or other phenomena associated with incipient
fires to which the detector is esigned to re-
spond. All detectors shall be of a type such
that they can be tested for correct operation
and restored to normal surveillance without
the renewal of any component.
.14 The fire-detection system shall not be used for
any other purpose, except that the control
panel may be used to activate one or more of
the following:
.1 paging system;
.2 fan stops;
.3 closure of fire doors;
.4 closure of fire and smoke dampers; and
.5 sprinkler system.
.15 Fire detection systems in which all fire detec-
tors are individually identifiable (i.e. having
zone address identification capability) shall be
so arranged that:
.1 a loop cannot be damaged at more than
one point by a fire and no loop shall pass
through a space twice. When this is not
practical (e.g., for large public spaces),
the part of the loop which by necessity
passes through the space for a second
time shall be installed at the maximum
possible distance from the other parts of
the loop;
.2 means are provided to ensure that any
fault (e.g., power break; short circuit;
earth) occurring in the loop shall not ren-
der the whole loop ineffective;
.3 all arrangements are made to enable the
initial configuration of the system to be
restored in the event of failure (electrical,
electronic, informatic); and
.4 the first initiated fire alarm shall not pre-
vent any other detector to initiate further
fire alarms.
.16 The fire detection system in vehicle deck
spaces, excluding manual call points, may be
Chapter 1 Section 7 Fire Safety
Page 7–12
switched off with a timer during load-
ing/unloading of vehicles.
7.7.1.2 Installation requirements
.1 In addition to 7.7.1, manually operated call
points shall be readily accessible in the corri-
dors of each deck such that no part of the cor-
ridor is more than 20 m from a manually op-
erated call point.
.2 Where a fixed fire-detection and fire alarm
system is required for the protection of spaces
other than stairways, corridors and escape
routes, at least one detector complying with
7.7.1.1.11 shall be installed in each such
space.
.3 Detectors shall be located for optimum per-
formance. Positions near beams and ventila-
tion ducts or other positions where patterns of
air flow could adversely affect performance
and positions where impact or physical dam-
age is likely shall be avoided. Detectors
which are located in the overhead shall be a
minimum distance of 0,5 m away from bulk-
heads, except in corridors, lockers and stair-
ways.
.4 The maximum spacing of detectors shall be in
accordance with the table below:
Type of Maximum Maximum Maximum
detector floor area distance distance
per detector apart away from
between bulkheads
centres
Heat 37 m2 9m 4,5 m
Smoke 74 m2 11 m 5,5 m
The Administration may require or permit
other spacings based upon test data which
demonstrate the characteristics of the detec-
tors.
.5 Electrical wiring which forms parts of the
system shall be so arranged as to avoid ma-
chinery spaces of major fire hazard, and other
enclosed spaces of major fire hazard except,
where it is necessary, to provide for fire detec-
tion or fire alarm in such spaces or to connect
to the appropriate power supply.
7.7.1.3 Design requirements
.1 The system and equipment shall be suitably
designed to withstand supply voltage variation
and transients, ambient temperature changes,
vibration, humidity, shock, impact and corro-
sion normally encountered in ships.
.2 Smoke detectors shall be certified to operate
before the smoke density exceeds 12,5 % ob-
I - Part 3
GL 2012
scuration per metre, but not until the smoke
density exceeds 2 % obscuration per metre.
Smoke detectors to be installed in other spaces
shall operate within sensitivity limits to the
satisfaction of the Administration having re-
gard to the avoidance of detector insensitivity
or over-sensitivity.
.3 Heat detectors shall be certified to operate
before the temperature exceeds 78 °C but not
until the temperature exceeds 54 °C, when the
temperature is raised to those limits at a rate
less than 1 °C per minute. At higher rates of
temperature rise, the heat detector shall oper-
ate within temperature limits having regard to
the avoidance to detector insensitivity or over-
sensitivity.
.4 At the discretion of the Administration, the
permissible temperature of operation of heat
detectors may be increased to 30 °C above the
maximum deckhead temperature in drying
rooms and similar spaces of a normal high
ambient temperature.
.5 Flame detectors corresponding to 7.7.1.1.11
shall have a sensitivity sufficient to determine
flame against an illuminated space back-
ground and a false signal identification sys-
tem.
7.7.2 Fire detection for periodically unattended
machinery spaces
A fixed fire-detection and fire alarm system for peri-
odically unattended machinery spaces shall comply
with the following requirements:
.1 The fire-detection system shall be so designed
and the detectors so positioned as to detect
rapidly the onset of fire in any part of those
spaces and under any normal conditions of
operation of the machinery and variations of
ventilation as required by the possible range
of ambient temperatures. Except in spaces of
restricted height and where their use is spe-
cially appropriate, detection systems using
only thermal detectors shall not be permitted.
The detection system shall initiate audible and
visual alarms distinct in both respects from
the alarms of any other system not indicating
fire, in sufficient places to ensure that the
alarms are heard and observed on the navi-
gating bridge and by a responsible engineer
officer. When the operating compartment is
unmanned the alarm shall sound in a place
where a responsible member of the crew is on
duty.
.2 After installation, the system shall be tested
under varying conditions of engine operation
and ventilation.
I - Part 3 Section 7 Fire Safety
GL 2012
7.7.3 Fixed fire-extinguishing systems
7.7.3.1 Areas of major fire hazard shall be pro-
tected by an approved fixed fire-extinguishing system
operable from the operating compartment and, where
provided, from a control position which is adequate
for the fire hazard that may exist. The system shall
comply with 7.7.3.2 and 7.7.3.3 or with alternative
arrangements approved by the Administration taking
into account the recommendations and guidelines
developed by the Organization 6 and be capable of
local manual control and remote control from the
continuously manned control stations.
7.7.3.2 Additional fixed fire-extinguishing systems
not required by the Code, but fitted to the craft are to
meet the design requirements of this Code, except for
the second discharge required for fixed gas fire-
extinguishing systems.
7.7.3.3 General requirements
.1 In all craft where gas is used as the extin-
guishing medium, the quantity of gas shall be
sufficient to provide two independent dis-
charges. The second discharge into the space
shall only be activated manually from a posi-
tion outside the space being protected. Where
the space has a local fire-suppression system
installed, based on the guidelines developed
by the Organization 7, to protect fuel oil, lu-
bricating oil and hydraulic oil located near
exhaust manifolds, turbo chargers or similar
heated surfaces on main and auxiliary internal
combustion engines, a second discharge need
not be required.
.2 The use of a fire-extinguishing medium which,
in the opinion of the Administration, either by
itself or under expected conditions of use will
adversely affect the earth's ozone layer and/or
gives off toxic gases in such quantities as to
endanger persons shall not be permitted.
.3 The necessary pipes for conveying fire-
extinguishing medium into protected spaces
shall be provided with control valves so
marked as to indicate clearly the spaces to
which the pipes are led. Non-return valves
shall be installed in discharge lines between
cylinders and manifolds. Pipelines may pass
through accommodation spaces, provided they
are of substantial thickness and their tightness
is verified with a pressure test, after their in-
stallation, at a pressure head not less than 5
––––––––––––––
6 Refer to MSC/Circ.1165 – Revised Guidelines for the Approval
of Equivalent water-based fire-extinguishing systems for Ma-
chinery Spaces and Cargo Pump-Rooms and to MSC/Circ.848
– Revised Guidelines for the approval of equivalent fixed gas
fire-extinguishing systems, as referred to in SOLAS 74, for ma-
chinery spaces and cargo pump-rooms.
7 Refer to MSC.1/Circ.1387 – Revised Guidelines for the Ap-
proval of fixed water-based local Application fire-fighting sys-
tems for Use in Category A Machinery Spaces (MSC/Circ.913).
Chapter 1
Page 7–13
N/mm2. In addition, pipelines passing through
accommodation areas shall only be joined by
welding and shall not be fitted with drains or
other openings within such spaces. Pipelines
shall not pass through refrigerated spaces.
Suitable provision shall be made to prevent
inadvertent admission of the medium to any
space.
.4 The piping for the distribution of fire-
extinguishing medium shall be arranged and
discharge nozzles so positioned that a uniform
distribution of medium is obtained.
.5 Means shall be provided to close all openings
which may admit air to, or allow gas to escape
from, a protected space. Openings that may
admit air to, or allow gas to escape from, a
protected space shall be capable of being
closed from outside the protected space.
.6 Where the volume of free air contained in air
receivers in any space is such that, if released
in such space in the event of fire, such release
of air within that space would seriously affect
the efficiency of the fixed fire-extinguishing
system, the Administration shall require the
provision of an additional quantity of fire-
extinguishing medium corresponding to the
gross volume of the machinery space being in-
creased by the volume of air receivers con-
verted to free air volume. Alternatively, a dis-
charge pipe connected to a safety valve may
be fitted to each air receiver, provided it leads
directly to the open air.
.7 Means shall be provided for automatically
giving audible warning of the release of fire-
extinguishing medium into any space in which
personnel normally work or which personnel
can be expected to enter (e.g., ro-ro spaces)
and where their access is facilitated by doors
or hatches or to which they have access. The
alarm shall automatically operate (e.g., by
opening of the release cabinet door) for a
suitable period before the medium is released,
but not less than 20 s. Visible alarm shall be
arranged in addition to the audible alarm 8.
.8 The means of control of any fixed gas fire-
extinguishing system shall be readily accessi-
ble and simple to operate and shall be
grouped together in as few locations as possi-
ble at positions not likely to be cut off by a fire
in a protected space. At each location there
shall be clear instructions relating to the op-
eration of the system, having regard to the
safety of personnel.
.9 Automatic release of fire-extinguishing me-
dium shall not be permitted.
––––––––––––––
8 Refer to the Code on Alarms and Indicators, 1995 (resolution
A.830(19)).
Chapter 1 Section 7 Fire Safety
Page 7–14
.10 Where the quantity of extinguishing medium is
required to protect more than one space, the
quantity of medium available need not be
more than the largest quantity required for
any one space so protected. Spaces are con-
sidered as separated where divisions comply
with tables 7.4-1 and 7.4-2, as appropriate, or
the divisions are gastight and of steel or
equivalent materials.
.11 Pressure containers required for the storage
of fire-extinguishing medium shall be located
outside protected spaces in accordance with
7.7.3.2.14. Pressure containers may be lo-
cated inside the space to be protected if in the
event of accidental release persons will not be
endangered.
.12 Means shall be provided for the crew to safely
check the quantity of medium in the containers
without moving the containers completely
from their fixing position.
.13 Containers for the storage of fire-
extinguishing medium and associated pressure
components shall be designed having regard
to their locations and maximum ambient tem-
peratures expected in service.
.14 When the fire-extinguishing medium is stored
outside a protected space, it shall be stored in
a room which shall be situated in a safe and
readily accessible location. For the purpose of
the application of tables 7.4-1 and 7.4-2, such
storage rooms shall be treated as control sta-
tions. For the storage rooms for fire-
extinguishing media of fixed gas fire-
extinguishing systems, the following apply:
.1 the storage room shall not be used for any
other purposes;
.2 if the storage space is located below deck,
it shall be located no more than one deck
below the open deck and shall be directly
accessible by a stairway or ladder from
the open deck;
.3 spaces shall be effectively ventilated.
Spaces which are located below deck or
spaces where access from the open deck is
not provided, shall be fitted with a me-
chanical ventilation system designed to
take exhaust air from the bottom of the
space and shall be sized to provide at
least 6 air changes per hour; and
.4 access doors shall open outwards, and
bulkheads and decks including doors and
other means of closing any opening
therein, which form the boundaries be-
tween such rooms and adjacent enclosed
spaces shall be gastight.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
.15 Spare parts for the system shall be stored on
board or at a base port.
.16 If the release of a fire extinguishing medium
produces significant over or under pressurisa-
tion in the protected space, means shall be
provided to limit the induced pressures to ac-
ceptable limits to avoid structural damage.
C7.7.3.2
(a) With reference to 7.7.3.2.10, see also the require-
ments of 7.7.3.2.1.
(b) With reference to C7.7.3.2.13, the GL Rules ap-
ply.
(c) With reference to 7.7.3.2.14, storage rooms are to
be provided with a mechanical ventilation system,
capable of effecting at least 6 air changes per
hour; if such rooms have a direct door access to
open deck, natural ventilation may be sufficient.
7.7.3.4 Carbon dioxide systems
.1 For cargo spaces, the quantity of carbon diox-
ide available shall, unless otherwise provided,
be sufficient to give a minimum volume of free
gas equal to 30 % of the gross volume of the
largest cargo space so protected in the craft.
.2 For machinery spaces, the quantity of carbon
dioxide carried shall be sufficient to give a
minimum volume of free gas equal to the lar-
ger of the following volumes, either:
.2.1 40 % of the gross volume of the largest
machinery space so protected, the vol-
ume to exclude that part of the casing
above the level at which the horizontal
area of the casing is 40 % or less of the
horizontal area of the space concerned
taken midway between the tank top and
the lowest part of the casing; or
.2.2 35 % of the gross volume of the largest
machinery space protected, including
the casing; respectively for cargo craft
of less than 2000 gross tonnage; pro-
vided also that if two or more machin-
ery spaces are not entirely separate
they shall be considered as forming one
space.
.3 For the purpose of this paragraph the volume
of free carbon dioxide shall be calculated at
0,56 m3/kg.
.4 For machinery spaces, the fixed piping system
shall be such that 85 % of the gas can be dis-
charged into the space within 2 min.
.5 Two separate controls shall be provided for
releasing carbon dioxide into a protected
space and to ensure the activation of the
alarm. One control shall be used to discharge
the gas from its storage containers. A second
I - Part 3 Section 7 Fire Safety
GL 2012
control shall be used for opening the valve of
the piping which conveys the gas into the pro-
tected spaces.
.6 The two controls shall be located inside a
release box clearly identified for the particu-
lar space. If the box containing the controls is
to be locked, a key to the box shall be in a
break-glass type enclosure conspicuously lo-
cated adjacent to the box.
7.7.4 Portable fire extinguishers 9
Control stations, public spaces, crew accommoda-
tion, corridors and service spaces shall be provided
with portable fire extinguishers of approved type and
design. At least five portable extinguishers shall be
provided, and so positioned, as to be readily avail-
able for immediate use. In addition, at least one ex-
tinguisher suitable for machinery space fires shall be
positioned outside each machinery space entrance.
Each portable fire extinguisher shall:
.1 not exceed 23 kg in total mass;
.2 have a capacity of at least 5 kg if of powder or
carbon dioxide type;
.3 have a capacity of at least 9 l if of foam type;
.4 be examined annually;
.5 be provided with a sign indicating the date
when was last examined;
.6 be hydraulic-pressure tested (cylinders and
propellant bottles) every 10 years;
.7 not be placed in accommodation spaces if of
carbon dioxide type;
.8 if located in control stations and other spaces
containing electrical or electronic equipment
or appliances necessary for the safety of the
craft, be provided with extinguishing media
which are neither electrically conductive nor
harmful to the equipment and appliances;
.9 be ready for use and located in easily visible
places such that it can be reached quickly and
easily at any time in the event of a fire;
.10 be located such that its serviceability is not
impaired by the weather, vibration or other
external factors; and
.11 be provided with a device to identify whether
it has been used.
C7.7.4 In the vicinity of the main switchboard and
of any electrical panel of 20 kW or more, at least one
––––––––––––––
9 Refer to the Improved guidelines for marine portable fire
extinguishers (resolution A.951(23)), and Fire protection
equipment – Portable fire extinguishers – Performance and
construction (ISO 7165:1999).
Chapter 1
Page 7–15
portable carbon dioxide fire extinguisher or equiva-
lent are to be provided.
7.7.5 Fire pumps, fire mains, hydrants and hoses
Fire pumps, and appropriate associated equipment,
or alternative effective fire-extinguishing systems
shall be fitted as follows:
.1 At least two pumps powered by independent
sources of power shall be arranged. Each
pump shall have at least two-thirds the capac-
ity of a bilge pump as determined by 10.3.5
and 10.3.6 but not less than 25 m3/h. Each fire
pump shall be able to deliver sufficient quan-
tity and pressure of water to simultaneously
operate the hydrants as required by .4.
.2 The arrangement of the pumps shall be such
that in the event of a fire in any one compart-
ment, all the fire pumps will not be put out of
action.
.3 Isolating valves to separate the section of the
fire main within the machinery space contain-
ing the main fire pump or pumps from the rest
of the fire main shall be fitted in an easily ac-
cessible and tenable position outside the ma-
chinery spaces. The fire main shall be so ar-
ranged that when the isolating valves are shut
all the hydrants on the craft, except those in
the machinery space referred to above, can be
supplied with water by a fire pump not located
in this machinery space through pipes which
do not enter this space. The fire main shall be
capable of being drained and shall be fitted
with valves arranged so that fire main
branches can be isolated when the main is
used for purposes other than fire-fighting. The
spindles of manually operated valves shall be
easily accessible and all valves shall be
clearly marked.
.4 Hydrants shall be so arranged so that any
location on the craft can be reached by the
water jets from two fire hoses from two differ-
ent hydrants, one of the jets being from within
the space can be reached by two water jets
from two different hydrants, each jet being
supplied from a single length of hose. One hy-
drant shall be located in the vicinity of and
outside each entrance to a machinery space.
.5 Each fire hose shall be of non-perishable
material. Fire hoses shall have a length of:
.1 at least 10 m;
.2 or more than 15 m in machinery spaces;
and
.3 or more than 20 m for other spaces and
open decks.
Chapter 1 Section 7 Fire Safety
Page 7–16
.6 Each fire hose shall be provided with a nozzle
of an approved dual purpose type (i.e.
spray/jet type) incorporating a shutoff.
C7.7.5 With reference to 7.7.5.1, the sufficient
quantity of water is to be delivered with a discharge
pressure at the nozzles of at least:
− 0,3 N/mm2 for cargo craft and passenger craft of
less than 4000 tons GT,
− 0,4 N/mm2 for passenger craft of 4000 tons GT
and above.
With reference to 7.7.5.5, the maximum length is to
be 20 m.
7.7.6 Protection of deep-fat cooking equipment
Where deep-fat cooking equipment is installed, all
such installations shall be fitted with:
.1 an automatic or manual fixed extinguishing
system tested to an appropriate standard ac-
ceptable to the Organization 10;
.2 a primary and back up thermostat with an
alarm to alert the operator in the event of fail-
ure of either thermostat;
.3 arrangements for automatically shutting off
the electrical power to the deep-fat cooking
equipment upon activation of the extinguish-
ing system;
.4 an alarm for indicating operation of the extin-
guishing system in the galley where the
equipment is installed; and
.5 controls for manual operation of the extin-
guishing system which are clearly labelled for
ready use by the crew.
7.8 Protection of Special Category Spaces and
Ro-Ro Spaces
7.8.1 Structural protection
7.8.1.1 Subject to 7.8.1.2 boundaries of special
category spaces shall be insulated in accordance
with tables 7.4-1 and 7.4-2.
7.8.1.2 The vehicle deck of a special category space
or a ro-ro space, including an open ro-ro space, need
only be insulated on the underside if required. Vehi-
cle decks located totally within ro-ro spaces may be
accepted without structural fire protection, provided
these decks are not part of, or do not provide support
to, the craft’s main load-carrying structure and pro-
vided satisfactory measures are taken to ensure that
––––––––––––––
10 Refer to ISO 15371 – Ships and marine technology – Fire-
extinguishing systems for protection of galley deep-fat cook-
ing equipment – Fire tests.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
the safety of the craft, including fire-fighting abilities,
integrity of fire resisting divisions and means of
evacuation, is not affected by a partial or total col-
lapse of these internal decks.
7.8.1.3 Indicators shall be provided on the navigat-
ing bridge which shall indicate when any door lead-
ing to or from the special category space or ro-ro
space is closed.
7.8.1.4 Fire doors in boundaries of special category
spaces leading to spaces below the vehicle deck shall
be arranged with coamings of a height of at least 100
mm.
7.8.2 Fixed fire-extinguishing system
7.8.2.1 Each special category space and ro-ro space
shall be fitted with an approved fixed pressure water-
spraying system 11 for manual operation which shall
protect all parts of any deck and vehicle platform in
such space, provided that the Administration may
permit the use of any other fixed fire-extinguishing
system that has been shown by full-scale test in con-
ditions simulating a flowing petrol fire in the space to
be not less effective in controlling fires likely to occur
in such a space.
7.8.2.2 The pumps of the system shall be capable of
maintaining:
.1 half the total required application rate with
any one pump unit out of function, for cate-
gory A craft; and
.2 the total required application rate with any
one pump unit out of function, for category B
craft.
7.8.2.3 Fixed fire-extinguishing systems shall fulfil
the following requirements:
.1 the valve manifold shall be provided with a
pressure gauge, and each of the valves shall
be marked to identify the protected areas;
.2 instructions for maintenance and operation of
the installation shall be set up in the room
where the valves are located; and
.3 the piping system shall be provided with a
sufficient number of drainage valves.
7.8.3 Patrols and detection
7.8.3.1 A continuous fire patrol shall be maintained
in special category spaces and ro-ro spaces unless a
fixed fire detection and fire alarm system, complying
with the requirements of 7.7.1, and a television sur-
veillance system are provided. The fixed fire detec-
tion system shall be capable of rapidly detecting the
––––––––––––––
11 Refer to Recommendation on fixed fire-extinguishing systems
for special category spaces (resolution A.123(V)).
I - Part 3 Section 7 Fire Safety
GL 2012
onset of fire. The spacing and location of detectors
shall be tested taking into account the effects of venti-
lation and other relevant factors.
7.8.3.2 Manually operated call points shall be pro-
vided as necessary throughout the special category
spaces and ro-ro spaces and one shall be placed
close to each exit from such spaces. Manually oper-
ated call points shall be spaced so that no part of the
space shall be more than 20 m from a manually op-
erated call point.
7.8.4 Fire-extinguishing equipment
7.8.4.1 There shall be provided in each special
category space and ro-ro space:
.1 at least three water fog applicators, which
shall consist of a metal L-shaped pipe, the
long limb being approximately 2 m in length
and capable of being fitted to a fire hose, and
the short limb being approximately 250 mm in
length and fitted with a fixed water fog nozzle
or capable of being fitted with a water spray
nozzle;
.2 one portable foam applicator unit consisting
of an air foam nozzle of an inductor type ca-
pable of being connected to the fire main by a
fire hose, together with a portable tank con-
taining 20 l of foam-making liquid and one
spare tank. The nozzle shall be capable of
producing effective foam suitable for extin-
guishing an oil fire of at leas 1,5 m3/min. At
least two portable foam applicator units shall
be available in the craft for use in such space;
and
.3 portable fire extinguishers of approved type
and design shall be located so that no point in
the space is more than approximately 15 m
walking distance from an extinguisher, pro-
vided that at least one portable extinguisher is
located at each access to such space. In addi-
tion to complying with 7.7.4, fire extinguishers
shall be suitable for A and B class fires and
have a capacity of 12 kg dry powder or
equivalent.
7.8.5 Ventilation system
7.8.5.1 There shall be provided an effective power
ventilation system 12 for the special category spaces
and ro-ro spaces sufficient to give at least 10 air
changes per hour while navigating and 20 air
changes per hour at the quayside during vehicle
loading and unloading operations. The system for
such spaces shall be entirely separated from other
ventilation systems and shall be operating at all times
––––––––––––––
12 Refer to the Design guidelines and operational recommenda-
tions for ventilation systems in ro-ro cargo spaces
(MSC/Circ.729).
Chapter 1
Page 7–17
when vehicles are in such spaces. Ventilation ducts
serving special category spaces and ro-ro spaces
capable of being effectively sealed shall be separated
for each such space. The system shall be capable of
being controlled from a position outside such spaces.
7.8.5.2 The ventilation shall be such as to prevent
air stratification and the formation of air pockets.
7.8.5.3 Means shall be provided to indicate in the
operating compartment any loss or reduction of the
required ventilating capacity.
7.8.5.4 Arrangements shall be provided to permit a
rapid shutdown and effective closure of the ventila-
tion system in case of fire, taking into account the
weather and sea conditions.
7.8.5.5 Ventilation ducts, including dampers, shall
be made of steel or other equivalent material. Ducts
lying inside the served space may be made of non-
combustible or fire-restricting material.
7.8.6 Scuppers, bilge pumping and drainage
7.8.6.1 In view of the serious loss of stability which
could arise due to large quantities of water accumu-
lating on the deck or decks consequent to the opera-
tion of the fixed pressure water-spraying system,
pumping and drainage arrangements shall be such as
to prevent such accumulation. Scuppers fitted for this
purpose shall be arranged so as to ensure that such
water is rapidly discharged directly overboard. Al-
ternatively, pumping and drainage facility shall be
provided additional to the requirements of Section
10. When it is required to maintain watertight or
weathertight integrity, as appropriate, the scuppers
shall be arranged so that they can be operated from
outside the space protected.
C7.8.6.1 Unless justificatory calculations are submit-
ted, scuppers at least 150 mm in diameter are to be
fitted every 9 m on both sides.
7.8.6.2 In respect of scuppers and drainage pumps
fitted in accordance with 7.8.6.1:
.1 the amount of water for which drainage is
provided shall take into account the capacity
of both the water spraying system pumps and
required number of fire hose nozzles;
.2 the drainage system shall have a capacity of
not less than 125 % of the capacity specified
in .1 above; and
.3 bilge wells shall be of sufficient holding ca-
pacity and shall be arranged at the side shell
of the ship at a distance from each other of not
more than 40 m in each watertight compart-
ment.
7.8.7 Precautions against ignition of flammable
vapours or liquids
Chapter 1 Section 7 Fire Safety
Page 7–18
7.8.7.1 On any deck or platform, if fitted, on which
vehicles are carried and on which explosive vapours
might be expected to accumulate, except platforms
with openings of sufficient size permitting penetration
of petrol gases downwards, equipment which may
constitute a source of ignition of flammable vapours
and, in particular, electrical equipment and wiring,
shall be installed at least 450 mm above the deck or
platform. Electrical equipment installed more than
450 mm above the deck or platform shall be of a type
enclosed and protected by an enclosure having an
ingress protection based on an international standard
acceptable to the Organization 13. However, if the
installation electrical equipment and wiring less than
450 mm above the deck or platform is necessary for
the safe operation of the craft, such electrical equip-
ment and wiring may be installed provided that the
equipment is certified “safe type” based on an inter-
national standard acceptable to the Organization. 14
7.8.7.2 If installed in an exhaust ventilation duct,
electrical equipment shall be certified “safe type”.15
The equipment and wiring, if fitted, shall be suitable
for use based on standards acceptable to the Organi-
zation 16 and the outlet from any exhaust duct shall
be sited in a safe position, having regard to other
possible sources of ignition.
7.8.7.3 If pumping and drainage arrangements are
provided, it shall be ensured that:
.1 water contaminated with petrol or other
flammable substances is not drained to ma-
chinery spaces or other spaces where sources
of ignition may be present; and
.2 electrical equipment fitted in tanks or other
components of the drainage system shall be of
a type suitable for use in explosive petrol/air
mixtures.
7.8.8 Open ro-ro spaces
7.8.8.1 Open ro-ro spaces shall comply with the
requirements set out in 7.8.1.1, 7.8.2, 7.8.3, 7.8.4 and
7.8.6.
7.8.8.2 For those parts of a ro-ro space which are
completely open from above, the requirements set out
in 7.8.2, 7.8.3.1 and 7.8.6 need not be complied with.
––––––––––––––
13
Refer to publication IEC 60529 – Degrees of protection
provided by enclosures (IP Code), in particular, refer to the
standards for an ingress protection of at least IP 55 or refer
to the publication IEC 60079 series – Electrical apparatus
for explosive gas atmospheres, in particular, refer to the
standards for protection by an apparatus for use in zone 2
areas.
14 Refer to the publication IEC 60079 series – Electrical appa-
ratus for explosive gas atmospheres (in particular, refer to
the standards for equipment and wiring to be suitable for use
in zone 1 areas).
15 Refer to publication IEC 60092.
16 Refer to zone 1 areas as defined in the publication IEC 60079
series.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
However, a continuous fire patrol or a television
surveillance system shall be maintained.
7.9 Miscellaneous
7.9.1 There shall be permanently exhibited, for the
guidance of the master and officers of the craft, fire
control plans showing clearly for each deck the fol-
lowing positions: the control stations, the sections of
the craft which are enclosed by fire-resisting divi-
sions together with particulars of the fire alarms, fire
detection systems, the sprinkler installations, the
fixed and portable fire-extinguishing appliances, the
means of access to the various compartments and
decks in the craft, the ventilating system (including
particulars of the master fan controls, the positions of
dampers and identification numbers of the ventilating
fans serving each section of the craft), the location of
the international shore connection, if fitted, and the
position of all means of control referred to in 7.5.3,
7.6.2, 7.7.1 and 7.7.3.1. The text of such plans 17
shall be in the official language of the flag state.
However, if the language is neither English nor
French, a translation into one of those languages
shall be included.
7.9.2 A duplicate set of fire control plans or a
booklet containing such plans shall be permanently
stored in a prominently marked weathertight enclo-
sure outside the deckhouse for the assistance of
shore-side fire-fighting personnel.
7.9.3 Openings in fire resisting divisions
7.9.3.1 Except for any hatches between cargo, spe-
cial category, ro-ro, store, and baggage spaces and
between such spaces and the weather decks, all open-
ings shall be provided with permanently attached
means of closing which shall be at least as effective
for resisting fires as the divisions in which they are
fitted.
7.9.3.2 It shall be possible for each door to be
opened and closed from each side of the bulkhead by
one person only.
7.9.3.3 Fire doors bounding areas of major fire
hazard and stairway enclosures shall satisfy the fol-
lowing requirements:
.1 The doors shall be self-closing and be capable
of closing with an angle of inclination of up to
3.5° opposing closure. The approximate time
of closure for hinged fire doors shall be no
more than 40 s and no less than 10 s from the
beginning of their movement with the craft in
the upright position. The approximate uniform
rate of closure for sliding fire doors shall be
––––––––––––––
17 Refer to Graphical symbols for fire control plans, adopted by
the Organization by resolution A.654(16) and Graphical sym-
bols for shipboard fire control plans adopted by the Organiza-
tion by resolution A.952(23).
I - Part 3 Section 7 Fire Safety
GL 2012
of no more than 0,2 m/s and no less than 0,1
m/s with the craft in the upright position.
.2 Remote released sliding or power-operated
doors shall be equipped with an alarm that
sounds at least 5 s but no more than 10 s after
the door is released from the continuously
manned control station and before the door
begins to move and continue sounding until
the door is completely closed. Doors designed
to reopen upon contacting an object in their
paths shall re-open no more than 1 m from the
point of contact.
.3 All doors shall be capable of remote release
from a continuously manned central control
station, either simultaneously or in groups,
and shall be capable of release also individu-
ally from a position at both sides of the door.
Indication shall be provided at the fire door
indicator panel in the continuously manned
control station whether each of the remote re-
leased doors is closed. The release mechanism
shall be so designed that the door will auto-
matically close in the event of disruption of the
control system or main source of electrical
power. Release switches shall have an on-off
function to prevent automatic resetting of the
system. Hold-back hooks not subject to con-
tinuously manned control station release shall
be prohibited.
.4 A door closed remotely from the continuously
manned control station shall be capable of be-
ing re-opened at both sides of the door by lo-
cal control. After such local opening, the door
shall automatically close again.
.5 Local power accumulators for power-operated
doors shall be provided in the immediate vi-
cinity of the doors to enable the doors to be
operated after disruption of the control system
or main source of electric power at least ten
times (fully opened and closed) using the local
controls.
.6 Disruption at one door of the control system
or main source of electric power shall not im-
pair the safe functioning of the other doors.
.7 Double-leaf doors equipped with a latch nec-
essary to their fire integrity shall have a latch
that is automatically activated by the opera-
tion of the doors when released by the system.
.8 Doors giving direct access to special category
spaces which are power-operated and auto-
matically closed need not be equipped with
alarms and remote-release mechanisms re-
quired in .2 and .3.
Chapter 1
Page 7–19
.9 The components of the local control system
shall be accessible for maintenance and ad-
justing.
.10 Power-operated doors shall be provided with
a control system of an approved type which
shall be able to operate in case of fire, this be-
ing determined in accordance with the Fire
Test Procedures Code. This system shall sat-
isfy the following requirements:
.1 the control system shall be able to operate
at a temperature of at least 200 °C for at
least 60 min, served by the power supply;
.2 the power supply for all other doors not
subject to fire shall not impaired; and
.3 at temperatures exceeding 200 °C the
control system shall be automatically iso-
lated from the power supply and shall be
capable of keeping the door closed up to
at least 945 °C.
7.9.3.4 The requirements for integrity of fire-
resisting divisions of the outer boundaries facing
open spaces 18 of a craft shall not apply to glass
partitions, windows and side scuttles. Similarly, the
requirements for integrity of fire-resisting divisions
facing open spaces shall not apply to exterior doors
in superstructures and deck houses.
7.9.3.5 Doors in smoke-tight divisions shall be self-
closing. Doors which are normally kept open shall
close automatically or by remote control from a con-
tinuously manned control station.
7.10 Firefighter's Outfits
7.10.1 All craft other than category A passenger
craft shall carry at least two firefighter's outfits com-
plying with the requirements of 7.10.3.
7.10.1.1 In addition, there shall be provided in cate-
gory B passenger craft for every 80 m, or part
thereof, of the aggregate of the length of all passen-
ger spaces and service spaces on the deck which
carries such spaces or, if there is more than one such
deck, on the deck which has the largest aggregate of
such length, two firefighter's outfits and two sets of
personal equipment, each comprising the items stipu-
lated in 7.10.3.1.1 to 7.10.3.1.3.
7.10.1.2 In category B passenger craft, for each pair
of breathing apparatuses there shall be provided one
water fog applicator complying with the requirements
of 7.8.4.1, which shall be stored adjacent to such
apparatus.
7.10.1.3 The Administration may require additional
sets of personal equipment and breathing apparatus,
having due regard to the size and type of the craft.
––––––––––––––
18 Refer to the definition in 7.3.1.6
Chapter 1 Section 7 Fire Safety
Page 7–20
7.10.2 The firefighter's outfits and sets of personal
equipment shall be stored in permanently and clearly
marked locations arranged so as to be easily accessi-
ble and ready for use and, where more than one fire-
fighter's outfit or more than one set of personal
equipment is carried, they shall be stored in widely
separated positions.
7.10.3 A firefighter's outfit shall consist of:
.1 Personal equipment comprising:
.1.1 protective clothing 19 of material to
protect the skin from the heat radiating
from the fire and from burns and scald-
ing by steam or gases. The outer sur-
face shall be water-resistant;
.1.2 boots of rubber or other electrically
non-conductive material;
.1.3 a rigid helmet providing effective pro-
tection against impact;
.1.4 an electric safety lamp (hand lantern)
of an approved explosion-proof type
certified to a standard acceptable to the
Organization 20 with a minimum burn-
ing period of 3 h; and
.1.5 high-voltage insulation.
.2 a self-contained compressed-air-operated
breathing apparatus of an approved type, the
volume of air contained in the cylinders of
which shall be at least 1200 l, or other self-
contained breathing apparatus, which shall be
capable of functioning for at least 30 min.
Two spare charges suitable for use with the
apparatus shall be provided for each required
apparatus.
.3 For each breathing apparatus a fireproof
lifeline of approximately 30 m in length and
sufficient strength shall be provided capable
of being attached by means of a snaphook to
the harness of the apparatus or to a separate
belt in order to prevent the breathing appara-
tus becoming detached when the lifeline is
operated. The lifeline shall be subjected to a
test by static load of 3,5 kN for 5 min.
7.11 Arrangement
7.11.1 For category B craft, the public spaces shall
be divided into zones according to the following:
––––––––––––––
19 Refer to Protective clothing – Protection against heat and fire
– Evaluation of materials and material assemblies when ex-
posed to source of radiant heat (ISO 6942:2002).
20 Refer to Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres
(IEC publication 60079).
I - Part 3
GL 2012
.1 The craft shall be divided into at least two
zones. The mean length of each zone shall not
exceed 40 m.
.2 For the occupants of each zone there shall be
an alternative safe area to which it is possible
to escape in case of fire. The alternative safe
area shall be separated from other passenger
zones by smoke-tight divisions of non-
combustible materials or fire-restricting mate-
rials extending from deck to deck. The alterna-
tive safe area can be another passenger zone.
Alternative safe areas shall be dimensioned on
the basis of one person per seat and 0,35 m²
per person of the net remaining area, based
on the maximum number of persons they are
called to accommodate in an emergency.
.3 The alternative safe area shall, as far as prac-
ticable, be located adjacent to the passenger
zone it is intended to serve. There shall be at
least two exits from each passenger zone, lo-
cated as far away from each other as possible,
leading to the alternative safe area. Escape
routes shall be provided to enable all passen-
gers and crew to be safely evacuated from the
alternative safe area within the structural fire
protection time for areas of major fire hazard.
7.11.2 Category A craft need not be divided into
zones.
7.11.3 Control stations, stowage positions of life-
saving appliances, escape routes and places of em-
barkation into survival craft shall not, as far as prac-
ticable, be located adjacent to any areas of major or
moderate fire hazard.
7.12 Ventilation
Each safe zone in the public spaces shall be served by
a ventilation system independent of the ventilation
system of any other zone. The ventilation fans of each
zone in the public spaces shall also be capable of
being independently controlled from a continuously
manned control station.
7.13 Fixed Sprinkler System
7.13.1 Public spaces and service spaces, crew
accommodation areas where sleeping berths are
provided, storage rooms other than those containing
flammable liquids, and similar spaces shall be pro-
tected by a fixed sprinkler system based on the stan-
dards developed by the Organization 21. A stairway
open at one deck shall be considered part of the
space to which it is open and consequently shall be
protected by any sprinkler system provided for that
––––––––––––––
21 Refer to the Standards for fixed sprinkler systems for high
speed craft, adopted by the Organization by resolution
MSC.44(65), as may be amended, and the associated interpre-
tations of MSC/Circ.912.
I - Part 3 Section 7 Fire Safety
GL 2012
space. Manually operated sprinkler systems shall be
divided into sections of appropriate size and the
valves for each section, start of sprinkler pump(s)
and alarms shall be capable of being operated from
two spaces separated as widely as possible, one of
which shall be a continuously manned control sta-
tion. In category B craft, no section of the system
shall serve more than one of the zones required in
7.11.
7.13.2 Plans of the system shall be displayed at
each operating station. Suitable arrangements shall
be made for the drainage of water discharged when
the system is activated.
7.13.3 Category A craft need not comply with the
requirements of 7.13.1 and 7.13.2 providing that:
− smoking is not permitted;
− sales shops, galleys, service spaces, ro-ro spaces
and cargo spaces are not fitted;
− the maximum number of passengers carried does
not exceed 200; and
− the voyage duration at 90 % of maximum speed
from departure port to destination when fully
laden does not exceed 2 h.
Part C - Requirements for Cargo Craft
7.14 Control Stations
Control stations, life-saving appliances stowage
positions, escape routes and places of embarkation
into survival craft shall be located adjacent to crew
accommodation areas.
7.15 Cargo Spaces
Cargo spaces, except open deck areas or refrigerated
holds, shall be provided with an approved automatic
smoke-detection system complying with 7.7.1 to indi-
cate at the control station the location of outbreak of
a fire in all normal operating conditions of the instal-
lations and shall be protected by an approved fixed
quick-acting fire-extinguishing system complying
with 7.7.3.2 operable from the control station.
7.16 Fixed Sprinkler System
7.16.1 Crew accommodation where sleeping berths
are provided, having a total deck area greater than
50 m2 (including corridors serving such accommoda-
tion), shall be protected by a fixed sprinkler system
based on the standards developed by the Organiza-
tion 21.
7.16.2 Plans of the system shall be displayed at
each operating station. Suitable arrangements shall
be made for the drainage of water discharged when
the system is activated.
Chapter 1
Page 7–21
Part D – Requirements for Craft and Cargo Spaces
intended for the Carriage of Dangerous Goods 22
7.17 General
7.17.1 In addition to complying with the require-
ments of 7.15 for cargo craft and with the require-
ments of 7.8 for both passenger and cargo craft as
appropriate, craft types and cargo spaces referred to
in 7.17.2 intended for the carriage of dangerous
goods shall comply with the requirements of this
paragraph, as appropriate, except when carrying
dangerous goods in limited quantities 23 and ex-
cepted quantities 24, unless such requirements have
already been met by compliance with the require-
ments elsewhere in this Section. The types of craft
and modes of carriage of dangerous goods are re-
ferred to in 7.17.2 and in table 7.17-1, where the
numbers appearing in 7.17.2 are referred to in the
top line.
Craft constructed on or after 1 July 2002 but before 1
January 2011, with cargo spaces intended for the
carriage of packaged dangerous goods, shall comply
with 7.13.3, except when carrying dangerous goods
specified as classes 6.2 and 7 and dangerous goods
in limited quantities 23 and excepted quantities 24 in
accordance with tables 7.17-1 and 7.17-3, not later
than the date of the first renewal survey on or after 1
January 2011.
Cargo craft of less than 500 gross tonnage con-
structed on or after 1 July 2002 shall comply with
this paragraph, but the Administration of the State
whose flag the craft is entitled to fly may, in consulta-
tion with the port State, reduce the requirements and
such reduced requirements shall be recorded in the
document of compliance referred to in 7.17.4.
7.17.2 Application of Tables 7.17-1 and 7.17-2
The following craft types and cargo spaces shall
govern the application of tables 7.17-1 and 7.17-2:
.1 craft and cargo spaces not specifically de-
signed for the carriage of freight containers
but intended for the carriage of dangerous
goods in packaged form including goods in
freight containers and portable tanks;
.2 purpose-built container craft and cargo
spaces intended for the carriage of dangerous
goods in freight containers and portable
tanks. In this regard, a purpose-built con-
tainer space is a cargo space fitted with cell
guides for stowage and securing containers;
––––––––––––––
22
Refer to the International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code
(IMDG Code), adopted by the Organization by resolution
A.716(17), as amended, and the International Maritime Solid
Bulk Cargoes Code, adopted by resolution MSC.268(85), as
amended.
23 Refer to chapter 3.4 of the IMDG Code.
24 Refer to chapter 3.5 of the IMOG Code.
Chapter 1 Section 7 Fire Safety I - Part 3
Page 7–22 GL 2012

Table 7.17-1 Application of the requirements of 7.17.3 to different modes of carriage of dangerous goods in craft
and cargo spaces

Sub-section 7.17.2 7.17.2.1 7.17.2.2 7.17.2.3 7.17.2.4

Solid dangerous goods in
bulk (includes cargoes of
group B of the Interna-
tional Maritime Solid
Weather Not Bulk Cargoes Code,
decks specifi- Container Open except for cargoes deno-
.1 to .4 cally cargo Ro-ro ro-ro ted Materials Hazardous
Sub-section 7.17.3 inclusive designed spaces spaces spaces in Bulk)
For application of re-
7.17.3.1.1 × × × × ×
quirements of Part D to
different classes of dan-
7.17.3.1.2 × × × × × gerous goods, see Table
7.17-2
7.17.3.1.3 − × × × ×

7.17.3.1.4 − × × × ×

7.17.3.2 − × × × ×

7.17.3.3 − × × × −

7.17.3.4.1 − × ×1 × ×

7.17.3.4.2 − × ×1 × ×

7.17.3.5 − × × × −

7.17.3.6.1 × × × × ×

7.17.3.6.2 × × × × ×

7.17.3.7 × × − − ×

7.17.3.8.1 − × × × −

7.17.3.8.2 − − − ×2 ×

7.17.3.9 − − − × ×

7.17.3.10 × − − × ×
1 For classes 4 and 5.1 solids not applicable to closed freight containers. For classes 2, 3, 6.1 and 8 when carried in closed freight
containers the ventilation rate may be reduced to not less than two air changes per hour. For classes 4 and 5.1 liquids when carried in
closed freight containers, the ventilation rate may be reduced to not than two air changes per hour. For the purpose of this requirement a
portable tank is a closed freight container.
2 Applies only to ro-ro spaces, not capable of being sealed.

× Wherever "×" appears in the table it means that this requirement is applicable to all classes of dangerous goods as given in the
appropiate line of Table 7.17-3, except as indicated by the notes.
I - Part 3 Section 7 Fire Safety Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 7–23

Table 7.17-2 Application of the requirements of 7.17.3 to different classes of dangerous goods for craft and
cargo spaces carrying solid dangerous goods in bulk

Class
4.1 4.2 4.3 3 5.1 6.1 8 9
Sub-
section
7.17.3.1.1 × × − × − − ×

7.17.3.1.2 × × − × − − ×

7.17.3.2 × ×4 × ×5 − − ×5

7.17.3.4.1 − ×4 × − − − −

7.17.3.4.2 ×6 × 4,7 ×7 × 4,6 − − × 4,6

7.17.3.4.4 × × × × × × ×

7.17.3.6 × × × × × × ×

3 The hazards of substances in this Class which may be carried in bulk are such that special consideration must be given by the
Administration to the construction and equipment of the craft involved in addition to meeting the requirements enumerated in this table.
4 Only applicable to seedcake containing residues of solvent extractions, to ammonium nitrate and to ammonium nitrate fertilizers.
5 Only applicable to ammonium nitrate fertilizers. However, a degree of protection in accordance with standards contained in the
"International Electrotechnical Commision, publication 79 – Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas Atmosphere", is sufficient.
6 Only suitable wire mesh guards are required.
7 For seedcake containing residues of solvent extraction and cargoes of IMSBC Code Class 4.3, two separate fans shall be permanently
fitted unless portable type fans have been adapted for being securely fitted (e.g., fixed) prior to loading and during the voyage. The
ventilation system shall comply with the provisions of 7.17.3.4.1 and 7.17.3.4.2. Ventilation shall be such that any escaping gases cannot
reach public spaces or crew accommodation on or under deck.

.3 craft and ro-ro spaces, including special
category spaces, intended for the carriage of dan-
gerous goods; and
.4 craft and cargo spaces intended for the
carriage of solid dangerous goods in bulk.
7.17.3 Requirements
Unless otherwise specified the following require-
ments shall govern the application of tables 7.17-1,
7.17-2 and 7.17-3 to both "on deck" and "under
deck" stowage of dangerous goods. The numbers of
the following sub-sections are indicated in the first
column of the above-mentioned tables. For the
purpose of this section, “on deck” shall be taken to
mean spaces on the weather deck.
7.17.3.1 Water supplies
7.17.3.1.1 Arrangements shall be made to ensure
immediate availability of a supply of water from the
fire main at the required pressure either by perma-
nent pressurization or by suitably placed remote
starting arrangements for the fire pumps.
C7.17.3.1.1 Immediate supply of water from the
fire main shall be provided by remote starting ar-
rangement for all main fire pumps from the naviga-
tion bridge or by permanent pressurization of the
fire main and by automatic start-up of the main fire
pumps.
7.17.3.1.2 The quantity of water delivered shall be
capable of simultaneously supplying the arrange-
ments required by 7.17.3.1.3 for the largest desig-
nated cargo space and the four nozzles of a size and
at a pressure as specified in 7.7.5, capable of being
trained on any part of the cargo space when empty.
This requirement shall be met by the total capacity
of the main fire pump(s) not including the capacity
of the emergency fire pump, if fitted. This amount of
water may be applied by equivalent means to the
satisfaction of the Administration.
7.17.3.1.3 Means shall be provided of effectively
cooling the designated under deck cargo space
with water at not less than 5 l/min/m2 of the hori-
zontal area of cargo spaces, either by a fixed ar-
rangement of spraying nozzles, or flooding the
space with water. Hoses may be used for this pur-
pose in small cargo spaces and in small areas of
larger cargo-spaces at the discretion of the Admini-
stration. In any event the drainage and pumping
arrangements shall meet the requirements of 7.8.6
and be such as to prevent the build-up of free sur-
faces. If this is not possible the adverse effect upon
Chapter 1 Section 7 Fire Safety
Page 7–24
stability of the added weight and free surface of
water shall be taken into account.
7.17.3.1.4 Provision to flood a designated under
deck cargo space with suitable specified media may
be substituted for the requirements in 7.17.3.1.3
above. Substitution by a high expansion foam sys-
tem complying with regulation II-2/40.4.1.1.2 of the
Convention is also acceptable.
7.17.3.1.5 The requirements of 7.17.3.1.1 to
7.17.3.1.4 may be fulfilled by a water spray system
approved by the Administration based on the stan-
dards developed by the Organization 25, provided
that the amount of water required for fire-fighting
purposes in the largest cargo space allows simulta-
neous use of the water spray system plus four jets of
water from hose nozzles in accordance with
7.17.3.1.2.
7.17.3.1.6 Craft carrying dangerous goods shall be
provided with three fire hoses and nozzles comply-
ing with 7.7.5.6 in addition to those required by
7.7.5.5.
7.17.3.2 Sources of ignition
Electrical equipment and wiring shall not be fitted
in enclosed cargo spaces or vehicle decks, unless it
is essential for operational purposes. However, if
electrical equipment is fitted in such spaces, it shall
be of a certified safe type 26 for use in the danger-
ous environments to which it may be exposed unless
it is possible to completely isolate the electrical
system (by removal of links in the system, other
than fuses). Cable penetrations of the decks and
bulkheads shall be sealed against the passage of
gas or vapour. Through runs of cables and cables
within the cargo spaces shall be protected against
damage from impact. Any other equipment which
may constitute a source of ignition of flammable
vapour shall not be permitted.
C7.17.3.2 For the design and explosion protection
of the electrical equipment and classification of the
dangerous areas, see GL Rules for Electrical Instal-
lations (I-1-3), Section 17.
7.17.3.3 Detection system
Enclosed cargo spaces shall be provided with an
approved automatic smoke detection system com-
plying with 7.7.1 or with a detection system which,
in the opinion of the Administration gives equiva-
lent protection.
––––––––––––––
25 Refer to paragraphs 9.2, 9.3 and 9.4 of the Interim guide-
lines for open-top containerships (MSC/Circ.608/Rev.1).
26 Refer to IEC publication 92-506 Electrical Installations in
Ships Part 506: Special features-Ships carrying specific
dangerous goods and materials hazardous only in bulk and
IEC 79 – Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmos-
pheres.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
7.17.3.4 Ventilation
7.17.3.4.1 Adequate power ventilation shall be
provided in enclosed spaces. The arrangement shall
be such as to provide for at least six air changes
per hour in the cargo space based on an empty
space and for removal of vapours from the upper or
lower parts of the space, as appropriate.
7.17.3.4.2 The fans shall be such as to avoid the
possibility of ignition of flammable gas air mix-
tures. Exhaust fans shall be of non-sparking type.
Suitable wire mesh guards having a mesh size not
exceeding 13 mm x 13 mm shall be fitted over inlet
and outlet ventilation openings to prevent foreign
objects from entering into the casing.
7.17.3.4.3 If adjacent spaces are not separated
from cargo spaces by gastight bulkheads or decks,
ventilation requirements shall apply to the adjacent
spaces as for the cargo space itself.
7.17.3.4.4 Natural ventilation shall be provided in
enclosed spaces intended for the carriage of solid
dangerous goods in bulk, where there is no provi-
sion for mechanical ventilation.
7.17.3.4.5 For open-top container craft, power
ventilation is required only for the lower part of the
cargo hold for which purpose-built ducting is re-
quired. The ventilation rate shall be at least two air
changes per hour based on the empty hold volume
below the weather deck.
C7.17.3.4 The ducting is to be arranged for re-
moval of gases and vapours from the upper and
lower part of the cargo hold. This requirement is
considered to be met if the ducting is arranged such
that approximately 1/3 of the air volume is removed
from the upper part and 2/3 from the lower part.
The position of air inlets and air outlets shall be
such as to prevent short circuiting of the air. Inter-
connection of the hold atmosphere with other is not
permitted.
7.17.3.5 Bilge pumping
Where it is intended to carry flammable or toxic
liquids in enclosed spaces, the bilge pumping sys-
tem shall be designed to ensure against inadvertent
pumping of such liquids through machinery space
piping or pumps. Where large quantities of such
liquids are carried, consideration shall be given to
the provision of additional means of draining those
spaces as follows:
.1 if the bilge drainage system for cargo spaces
is additional to the system served by pumps
in the machinery space, the capacity of the
system shall be not less than 10 m3/h per
cargo space served. If the additional system
is a common system, the capacity need not
exceed 25 m3/h. The additional bilge system
need not be arranged with redundancy.
Whenever flammable or toxic liquids are
carried, the bilge line into the machinery
I - Part 3 Section 7 Fire Safety
GL 2012
space shall be isolated either by fitting a
blank flange or by a closed lockable valve;
.2 if bilge drainage of cargo spaces is ar-
ranged by gravity drainage, the drainage
shall be either lead directly overboard or to
a closed drain tank located outside the ma-
chinery spaces. The tank shall be provided
with vent pipe to a safe location on the open
deck;
.3 enclosed spaces outside machinery spaces
containing bilge pumps serving cargo
spaces intended for carriage of flammable
or toxic liquids shall be fitted with separate
mechanical ventilation giving at least six air
changes per hour. Electrical equipment in
the space shall be of certified safe type.27 If
the space has access from another enclosed
space, the door shall be selfclosing; and
.4 drainage from a cargo space into bilge wells
in a lower space is only permitted if that
space satisfies the same requirements as the
cargo space above.
7.17.3.6 Personnel protection
7.17.3.6.1 Four sets of full protective clothing resis-
tant to chemical attack shall be provided in addi-
tion to the firefighter’s outfits required by 7.10 and
shall be selected taking into account the hazards
associated with the chemicals being transported
and the standards developed by the Organization
according to the class and physical state. The pro-
tective clothing shall cover all skin, so that no part
of the body is unprotected.
7.17.3.6.2 At least two self-contained breathing
apparatuses additional to those required by 7.10
shall be provided. In addition to the requirements
of 7.10.3.2.2, two spare charges suitable for use
with the breathing apparatus shall be provided for
each required apparatus.
7.17.3.7 Portable fire extinguishers
Portable fire extinguishers with a total capacity of
at least 12 kg of dry powder or equivalent shall be
provided for the cargo spaces. These extinguishers
shall be in addition to any portable fire extinguish-
ers required elsewhere in this Section.
7.17.3.8 Fixed fire extinguishing system
7.17.3.8.1 Cargo spaces, except for open decks,
shall be provided with an approved fixed fire extin-
guishing system complying with the provisions of
7.7.3 or with a fire extinguishing system which, in
––––––––––––––
27 Refer to publication IEC 60092-506: Special features –
Ships carrying dangerous goods and materials hazardous
only in bulk.
Chapter 1
Page 7–25
the opinion of the Administration, gives equivalent
protection for the cargo carried 28.
7.17.3.8.2 Each open ro-ro space having a deck
above it and each ro-ro space not capable of being
sealed shall be fitted with an approved fixed pres-
sure water-spraying system for manual operation
which shall protect all parts of any deck and vehi-
cle platform in such space, except that the Admini-
stration may permit the use of any other fixed fire-
extinguishing system that has been shown by full-
scale test to be no less effective. In any event the
drainage and pumping arrangements shall meet the
requirements of 7.8.6, have valves operable from
outside the space at a position in the vicinity of the
extinguishing system controls and shall be such as
to prevent the build-up of free surfaces. If this is not
possible the adverse effect upon stability of the
added weight and free surface of water shall be
taken into account to the extent deemed necessary
by the Administration in its approval of the stability
information.
7.17.3.9 Separation between ro-ro spaces and
open ro-ro spaces
A separation shall be provided between a ro-ro
space and an adjacent open ro-ro space. The sepa-
ration shall be such as to minimize the passage of
dangerous vapours and liquids between such
spaces. Alternatively, such separation need not be
provided if both spaces fully comply with the re-
quirements for ro-ro spaces in Part D.
7.17.3.10 Separation between ro-ro spaces and
weather decks
A separation shall be provided between a ro-ro
space and the adjacent weather deck. The separa-
tion shall be such as to minimize the passage of
dangerous vapours and liquids between such
spaces. Alternatively, a separation need not be
provided if the ro-ro space fully complies with the
requirements for ro-ro spaces in Part D. However,
a separation is still required when dangerous goods
carried shall be loaded on the weather deck only.
7.17.4 Document of compliance
The Administration shall provide the craft with an
appropriate document as evidence of compliance of
construction and equipment with the requirements
of this Part D.
––––––––––––––
28 For cargoes for which a fixed gas fire extinguishing system
is ineffective, refer to the List of cargoes in table 2 of
MSC.1/Circ.1395.
Chapter 1 Section 7 Fire Safety I - Part 3
Page 7–26 GL 2012

Table 7.17-3 Application of the requirements of Sub-section 7.17.3 to different classes of dangerous goods
except solid dangerous goods in bulk

Class

6.1 liquids FP 12 ≥ 23 °C to ≤ 60 °C

8 liquids FP 12 ≥ 23 °C to ≤ 60 °C
3 FP 12 ≥ 23 °C to ≤ 60 °C

6.1 liquids FP 12 < 23 °C

8 liquids FP 12 < 23 °C
2.3 non-flammable
2.3 flammable 17

3 FP 12 < 23 °C

4.3 liquids 18

6.1 liquids
1.1 to 1.6 9

4.3 solids

6.1 solids

8 liquids
8 solids
5.1 10
5.2 13
1.4S
2.1
2.2

4.1
4.2
Section

9
7.17.3.1.1 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
7.17.3.1.2 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
7.17.3.1.3 X
7.17.3.1.4 X
7.17.3.2 X X X X X15 X X X14
7.17.3.3 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
7.17.3.4.1 X X X X8 X8 X X X8 X X X8 X X X8
7.17.3.4.2 X X X X X14
7.17.3.5 X X X X X X16 X16
7.17.3.6 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X11
7.17.3.7 X X X X X X X X X X X
7.17.3.8 X9 X X X X X X X X X X X X10 X X X X X X X X X X
7.17.3.9 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
7.17.3.10 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

8 When “mechanically-ventilated spaces” are required by the IMDG Code.

9 Stow 3 m horizontally away from the machinery space boundaries in all cases.
10 Refer to the IMDG Code.
11 As appropriate for the goods to be carried.
12 FP means flashpoint.
13 Under the provisions of the IMDG Code, stowage of class 5.2 dangerous goods under deck or in enclosed ro-ro spaces is prohibited.
14 Only applicable to dangerous goods evolving flammable vapour listed in the IMDG Code.
15 Only applicable to dangerous goods having a flashpoint less than 23 °C listed in the IMDG Code.
16 Only applicable to dangerous goods having a subsidiary risk class 6.1.
17 Under the provisions of the IMDG Code, stowage of class 2.3 having subsidiary risk class 2.1 under deck or in enclosed ro-ro spaces is
prohibited.
18 Under the provisions of the IMDG Code, stowage of class 4.3 liquids having a flashpoint less than 23 °C under deck or in enclosed ro-ro
spaces is prohibited.
I - Part 3 Section 8 Life-Saving Appliances and Arrangements
GL 2012
Section 8
Life-Saving Appliances and Arrangements
8.1 General and Definitions
8.1.1 Life-saving appliances and arrangements
shall enable abandonment of the craft in accordance
with the requirements of 4.7 and 4.8.
8.1.2 Except where otherwise provided in this
Code, the life-saving appliances and arrangements
required by this Section shall meet the detailed speci-
fications set out in chapter III of the Convention and
the LSA Code and be approved by the Administration.
8.1.3 Before giving approval to life-saving appli-
ances and arrangements, the Administration shall
ensure that such life-saving appliances and arrange-
ments:
.1 are tested to confirm that they comply with the
requirements of this Section, in accordance
with the recommendations of the Organization
1 ; or
.2 have successfully undergone, to the satisfaction
of the Administration, tests which are substan-
tially equivalent to those specified in those rec-
ommendations.
8.1.4 Before giving approval to novel life-saving
appliances or arrangements, the Administration shall
ensure that such appliances or arrangements:
.1 provide safety standards at least equivalent to
the requirements of this Section and have been
evaluated and tested in accordance with the
recommendations of the Organization 2 ; or
.2 have successfully undergone, to the satisfaction
of the Administration, evaluation and tests
which are substantially equivalent to those rec-
ommendations.
8.1.5 Before accepting life-saving appliances and
arrangements that have not been previously approved
by the Administration, the Administration shall be
satisfied that life-saving appliances and arrangements
comply with the requirements of this Section.
––––––––––––––
1 Refer to the Revised Recommendation on Testing of Life-Saving
Appliances, adopted by the Organization by resolution
MSC.81(70).
2 Refer to the Code of Practice fort he Evaluation, Testing and
Acceptance of Prototype Novel Life-Saving Appliances and Ar-
rangements, adopted by the Organization by resolution
A.520(13).
Chapter 1
Page 8–1
8.1.6 Except where otherwise provided in this
Code, life-saving appliances required by this Section
for which detailed specifications are not included in
the LSA Code shall be to the satisfaction of the Ad-
ministration.
8.1.7 The Administration shall require life-saving
appliances to be subjected to such production tests as
are necessary to ensure that the life-saving appliances
are manufactured to the same standard as the ap-
proved prototype.
8.1.8 Procedures adopted by the Administration for
approval shall also include the conditions whereby
approval would continue or would be withdrawn.
8.1.9 The Administration shall determine the pe-
riod of acceptability of life-saving appliances which
are subject to deterioration with age. Such life-saving
appliances shall be marked with a means for deter-
mining their age or the date by which they shall be
replaced.
8.1.10 For the purposes of this Section, unless ex-
pressly provided otherwise:
.1 Detection is the determination of the location
of survivors or survival craft.
.2 Embarkation ladder is the ladder provided at
survival craft embarkation stations to permit
safe access to survival craft after launching.
.3 Embarkation station is the place from which a
survival craft is boarded. An embarkation sta-
tion may also serve as an assembly station,
provided there is sufficient room, and the as-
sembly station activities can safely take place
there.
.4 Float-free launching is that method of launch-
ing a survival craft whereby the craft is auto-
matically released from a sinking craft and is
ready for use.
.5 Free-fall launching is that method of launching
a survival craft whereby the craft with its com-
plement of persons and equipment on board is
released and allowed to fall into the sea with-
out any restraining apparatus.
.6 Immersion suit" is a protective suit which re-
duces the body heat-loss of a person wearing it
in cold water.
.7 Inflatable appliance is an appliance which
depends upon non-rigid, gas-filled chambers
Chapter 1 Section 8 Life-Saving Appliances and Arrangements
Page 8–2
for buoyancy and which is normally kept unin-
flated until ready for use.
.8 Inflated appliance is an appliance which de-
pends upon non-rigid, gas-filled chambers for
buoyancy and which is normally kept inflated
and ready for use at all times.
.9 Launching appliance or arrangement is a
means of transferring a survival craft or rescue
boat from its stowed position safely to the wa-
ter.
.10 Marine evacuation system (MES) is an appli-
ance designed to rapidly transfer a large num-
ber of persons from an embarkation station by
means of a passage to a floating platform for
subsequent embarkation into associated sur-
vival craft or directly into associated survival
craft.
.11 Novel life-saving appliance or arrangement is
a life-saving appliance or arrangement which
embodies new features not fully covered by the
provisions of this Section but which provides
an equal or higher standard of safety.
.12 Rescue boat is a boat designed to assist and
rescue persons in distress and to marshal sur-
vival craft.
.13 Retrieval is the safe recovery of survivors.
.14 Retro-reflective material is a material which
reflects in the opposite direction a beam of
light directed on it.
.15 Survival craft is a craft capable of sustaining
the lives of persons in distress from the time of
abandoning the craft.
.16 Thermal protective aid is a bag or suit of wa-
terproof material with low thermal conduc-
tance.
8.2 Communications
8.2.1 Craft shall be provided with the following
radio life-saving appliances:
.1 at least three two-way VHF radiotelephone
apparatus shall be provided on every passen-
ger high-speed craft and on every cargo high-
speed craft of 500 gross tonnage and upwards.
Such apparatus shall conform to performance
standards not inferior to those adopted by the
Organization 3 ;
.2 at least one search and rescue locating device
shall be carried on each side of every passen-
ger high-speed craft and every cargo high-
––––––––––––––
3 Refer to the Recommendation on Performance Standards for
Survival Craft Portable Two-Way VHF Radiotelephone Appara-
tus, adopted by the Organization by resolution A.809(19).
I - Part 3
GL 2012
speed craft of 500 gross tonnage and upwards.
Such search and rescue locating device shall
conform to the applicable performance stan-
dards not inferior to those adopted by the Or-
ganization 4. The search and rescue locating
device shall be stowed in such locations that
they can be rapidly placed in any one of the
liferafts. Alternatively, one search and rescue
locating device shall be stowed in each survival
craft.
8.2.2 Craft shall be provided with the following on-
board communications and alarm systems:
.1 an emergency means comprising either fixed or
portable equipment or both for two-way com-
munications between emergency control sta-
tions, assembly and embarkation stations and
strategic positions on board;
.2 a general emergency alarm system complying
with the requirements of paragraph 7.2.1 of the
LSA Code to be used for summoning passen-
gers and crew to assembly stations and to initi-
ate the actions included in the muster list. The
system shall be supplemented by a public ad-
dress system complying with the requirements
of paragraph 7.2.2 of the LSA Code, or by
other suitable means of communication. The
systems shall be operable from the operating
compartment.
8.2.3 Signalling equipment
8.2.3.1 All craft shall be provided wit h a portable
daylight signalling lamp which is available for use in
the operating compartment at all times and which is
not dependent on the craft's main source of electrical
power.
8.2.3.2 Craft shall be provided with not less than 12
rocket parachute flares, complying with the require-
ments of paragraph 3.1 of the LSA Code, stowed in or
near the operating compartment.
8.3 Personal Life-saving Appliances
8.3.1 Where passengers or crew have access to
exposed decks under normal operating conditions, at
least one lifebuoy on each side of the craft capable of
quick release from the control compartment and from
a position at or near where it is stowed, shall be pro-
vided with a self-igniting light and a self-activating
smoke signal. The positioning and securing arrange-
ments of the self-activating smoke signal shall be such
that it cannot be released or activated solely by the
accelerations produced by collisions or groundings.
––––––––––––––
4 Refer to the Recommendation on performance standards for
survival craft radar transponders for use in search and rescue
operations, adopted by the Organization by resolution
MSC.247(83) (A.802(19), as amended) and the Recommendation
on performance standards for survival craft AIS search and res-
cue transmitter (AIS SART), adopted by the Organization by
resolution MSC.246(83).
I - Part 3 Section 8 Life-Saving Appliances and Arrangements
GL 2012
8.3.2 At least one lifebuoy shall be provided adja-
cent to each normal exit from the craft and on each
open deck to which passengers and crew have access,
subject to a minimum of two being installed.
8.3.3 Lifebuoys fitted adjacent to each normal exit
from the craft shall be fitted with buoyant lines of at
least 30 m in length.
8.3.4 Not less than half the total number of life-
buoys shall be fitted with self-igniting lights. However,
the lifebuoys provided with self-igniting lights shall
not include those provided with lines in accordance
with 8.3.3.
8.3.5 A lifejacket complying with the requirements
of paragraph 2.2.1 or 2.2.2 of the LSA Code be pro-
vided for every person on board the craft and, in addi-
tion:
.1 a number of lifejackets suitable for children
equal to at least 10 % of the number of passen-
gers on board shall be provided or such
greater number as may be required to provide
a lifejacket for each child;
.2 every passenger craft shall carry lifejackets for
not less than 5 % of the total number of per-
sons on board. These lifejackets shall be
stowed in conspicuous places on deck or at as-
sembly stations;
.3 a sufficient number of lifejackets shall be car-
ried for persons on watch and for use at re-
motely located survival craft and rescue boat
stations; and
.4 all lifejackets shall be fitted with a light, which
complies with the requirements of paragraph
2.2.3 of the LSA Code.
8.3.6 Lifejackets shall be so placed as to be readily
accessible and their positions shall be clearly indi-
cated.
8.3.7 An immersion suit, of an appropriate size,
complying with the requirements of paragraph 2.3 of
the LSA Code shall be provided for every person as-
signed to crew the rescue boat.
8.3.8 An immersion suit or anti-exposure suit shall
be provided for each member of the crew assigned, in
the muster list, to duties in an MES party for embark-
ing passengers into survival craft. These immersion
suits or anti-exposure suits need not be required if the
craft is constantly engaged on voyages in warm cli-
mates where, in the opinion of the Administration,
such suits are unnecessary.
Chapter 1
Page 8–3
8.4 Muster List, Emergency Instructions and
Manuals
8.4.1 Clear instructions to be followed in the event
of an emergency shall be provided for each person on
board .5
8.4.2 Muster lists complying with the requirements
of regulation III/37 of the Convention shall be exhib-
ited in conspicuous places throughout the craft includ-
ing the control compartment, engine-room and crew
accommodation spaces.
8.4.3 Illustrations and instructions in appropriate
languages shall be posted in public spaces and be
conspicuously displayed at assembly stations, at other
passenger spaces and near each seat to inform pas-
sengers of:
.1 their assembly station;
.2 the essential actions they must take in an emer-
gency;
.3 the method of donning lifejackets.
8.4.4 Every passenger craft shall have passenger
assembly stations:
.1 in the vicinity of, and which provide ready
access for all the passengers to, the embarka-
tion stations unless in the same location; and
.2 which have ample room for the marshalling
and instruction of passengers.
8.4.5 A training manual complying with the re-
quirements of 18.2.3 shall be provided in each crew
messroom and recreation room
8.5 Operating Instructions
8.5.1 Poster or signs shall be provided on or in the
vicinity of survival craft and their launching controls
and shall:
.1 illustrate the purpose of controls and the pro-
cedures for operating the appliance and give
relevant instructions and warnings:
.2 be easily seen under emergency lighting condi-
tions;
.3 use symbols in accordance with the recommen-
dations of the Organization 6 .
––––––––––––––
5 Refer to the Guidelines for passenger safety instructions on roro
passenger ships (MSC/Circ.681).
6 Refer to Symbols related to Life-Saving Appliances and Ar-
rangements, adopted by the Organization by resolution
A.760(18), as amended by resolution MSC.82(70).
Chapter 1 Section 8 Life-Saving Appliances and Arrangements
Page 8–4
8.6 Survival Craft Stowage
8.6.1 Survival craft shall be securely stowed out-
side and as close as possible to the passenger accom-
modation and embarkation stations. The stowage shall
be such that each survival craft can be safely launched
in a simple manner and remain secured to the craft
during and subsequent to the launching procedure.
The length of the securing lines and the arrangements
of the bowsing lines shall be such as to maintain the
survival craft suitably positioned for embarkation. The
Administrations may permit the use of adjustable
securing and/or bowsing lines at exits where more
than one survival craft is used. The securing arrange-
ments for all securing and bowsing lines shall be of
sufficient strength to hold the survival craft in position
during the evacuation process.
8.6.2 Survival craft shall be so stowed as to permit
release from their securing arrangements at or near to
their stowage position on the craft and from a position
at or near to the operating compartment.
8.6.3 So far as is practicable, survival craft shall
be distributed in such a manner that there is an equal
capacity on both sides of the craft.
8.6.4 The launching procedure for inflatable lif-
erafts shall, where practicable, initiate inflation.
Where it is not practicable to provide automatic infla-
tion of liferafts (for example, when the liferafts are
associated with an MES), the arrangement shall be
such that the craft can be evacuated within the time
specified in 4.8.1.
8.6.5 Survival craft shall be capable of being
launched and then boarded from the designated em-
barkation stations in all operational conditions and
also in all conditions of flooding after receiving dam-
age to the extent prescribed in Section 2.
8.6.6 Survival craft launching stations shall be in
such positions as to ensure safe launching having
particular regard to clearance from the propeller or
waterjet and steeply overhanging portions of the hull.
8.6.7 During preparation and launching, the sur-
vival craft and the area of water into which it is to be
launched shall be adequately illuminated by the light-
ing supplied from the main and emergency sources of
electrical power required by Section 12.
8.6.8 Means shall be available to prevent any dis-
charge of water on to survival craft when launched.
8.6.9 Each survival craft shall be stowed:
.1 so that neither the survival craft nor its stow-
age arrangements will interfere with the opera-
tion of any other survival craft or rescue boat
at any other launching station;
.2 in a state of continuous readiness;
I - Part 3
GL 2012
.3 fully equipped; and
.4 as far as practicable, in a secure and sheltered
position and protected from damage by fire and
explosion.
8.6.10 Every liferaft shall be stowed with its painter
permanently attached to the craft and with a float free
arrangement complying with the requirements of
paragraph 4.1.6 of the LSA Code so that, as far as
practicable, the liferaft floats free and, if inflatable,
inflates automatically should the high speed craft sink.
8.6.11 Rescue boats shall be stowed:
.1 in a state of continuous readiness for launching
in not more than 5 min;
.2 in a position suitable for launching and recov-
ery; and
.3 so that neither the rescue boat nor its stowage
arrangements will interfere with the operation
of survival craft at any other launching station.
8.6.12 Rescue boats and survival craft shall be se-
cured and fastened to the deck so that they at least
withstand the loads likely to arise due to a defined
horizontal collision load for the actual craft and the
vertical design load at the stowage position.
8.7 Survival Craft and Rescue Boat Embarka-
tion and Recovery Arrangements
8.7.1 Embarkation stations shall be readily acces-
sible from accommodation and work areas. If the
designated assembly stations are other than the pas-
senger spaces, the assembly stations shall be readily
accessible from the passenger spaces, and the embar-
kation stations shall be readily accessible from the
assembly stations.
8.7.2 Evacuation routes, exits and embarkation
points shall comply with the requirements of 4.7.
8.7.3 Alleyways, stairways and exits giving access
to the assembly and embarkation stations shall be
adequately illuminated by lighting supplied from the
main and emergency source of electrical power re-
quired by Section 12.
8.7.4 Where davit-launched survival craft are not
fitted, MES or equivalent means of evacuation shall be
provided in order to avoid persons entering the water
to board survival craft. Such MES or equivalent
means of evacuation shall be so designed as to enable
persons to board survival craft in all operational
conditions and also in all conditions of flooding after
receiving damage to the extent prescribed in Section
2.
8.7.5 Subject to survival craft and rescue boat
embarkation arrangements being effective within the
environmental conditions in which the craft is permit-
I - Part 3 Section 8 Life-Saving Appliances and Arrangements
GL 2012
ted to operate and in all undamaged and prescribed
damage conditions of trim and heel, where the free-
board between the intended embarkation position and
the waterline is not more than 1.5 m, the Administra-
tion may accept a system where persons board lif-
erafts directly.
8.7.6 Where an MES is provided for embarkation
into survival craft on a category B craft, an alterna-
tive means of evacuating passengers and crew into
survival craft on the same side of the craft in condi-
tions up to and including the worst intended condi-
tions is to be provided for use if the MES is lost or
rendered unserviceable in the event of damage of
longitudinal extent specified in 2.6.7.1.
8.7.7 Rescue boat embarkation arrangements shall
be such that the rescue boat can be boarded and
launched directly from the stowed position and recov-
ered rapidly when loaded with its full complement of
persons and equipment.
8.7.8 Launching systems for rescue boats on cate-
gory B craft may be based on power supply from the
craft's power supply under the following conditions:
.1 the davit or crane shall be supplied with power
from 2 sources in each independent engine
room;
.2 the davit or crane shall comply with the re-
quired launching, lowering and hoisting speeds
when using only one power source; and
.3 the davit or crane is not required to be acti-
vated from a position within the rescue boat.
8.7.9 On multihull craft with a small HL1 angle of
heel and trim, the design angles in paragraph 6.1 of
the LSA Code may be changed from 20º /10º to the
maximum angles calculated in accordance with annex
7, including heeling lever HL2, HTL, HL3 or HL4.
8.7.10 Rescue boat davits or cranes may be de-
signed for launching and recovering the boat with 3
persons only on the condition that an additional
boarding arrangement is available on each side com-
plying with 8.7.5.
8.7.11 A safety knife shall be provided at each MES
embarkation station.
8.8 Line-throwing Appliance
A line-throwing appliance complying with the re-
quirements of paragraph 7.1 of the LSA Code shall be
provided.
8.9 Operational Readiness, Maintenance and
Inspections
8.9.1 Operational readiness Before the craft leaves
port and at all times during the voyage, all life-saving
Chapter 1
Page 8–5
appliances shall be in working order and ready for
immediate use.
8.9.2 Maintenance
.1 Instructions for on-board maintenance of life-
saving appliances complying with the require-
ments of regulation III/36 of the Convention
shall be provided and maintenance shall be
carried out accordingly.
.2 The Administration may accept, in lieu of the
instructions required by .1, a shipboard
planned maintenance programme which in-
cludes the requirements of regulation III/36 of
the Convention.
8.9.3 Maintenance of falls
8.9.3.1 Falls used in launching shall be turned end
for end at intervals of not more than 30 months and be
renewed when necessary due to deterioration of the
falls or at intervals of not more than five years, which-
ever is the earlier.
8.9.3.2 The Administration may accept in lieu of
"end for ending" required in paragraph 8.9.3.1, peri-
odic inspection of the falls and their renewal when-
ever necessary due to deterioration or at intervals of
not more than four years, whichever is the earlier.
8.9.4 Spares and repair equipment Spares and
repair equipment shall be provided for life-saving
appliances and their components which are subject to
excessive wear or consumption and need to be re-
placed regularly.
8.9.5 Weekly inspection The following tests and
inspections shall be carried out weekly:
.1 all survival craft, rescue boats and launching
appliances shall be visually inspected to ensure
that they are ready for use;
.2 all engines in rescue boats shall be run ahead
and astern for a total period of not less than 3
min provided the ambient temperature is above
the minimum temperature required for starting
and running the engine. During this period of
time, it should be demonstrated that the gear-
box and gearbox train are engaging satisfacto-
rily. If the special characteristics of an out-
board motor fitted to a rescue boat would not
allow it to be run other than with its propeller
submerged for a period of 3 min, it should be
run for such period as prescribed in the manu-
facturer's handbook.; and
.3 the general emergency alarm system shall be
tested.
8.9.6 Monthly inspections Inspection of the life-
saving appliances, including survival craft equipment
shall be carried out monthly using the checklist re-
quired by regulation III/36.1 of the Convention to
Chapter 1 Section 8 Life-Saving Appliances and Arrangements
Page 8–6
ensure that they are complete and in good order. A
report of the inspection shall be entered in the log-
book.
8.9.7 Servicing of inflatable liferafts, inflatable
lifejackets, marine evacuation systems and inflated
rescue boats
8.9.7.1 Every inflatable liferaft, inflatable lifejacket
and MES shall be serviced:
.1 at intervals not exceeding 12 months, provided
where in any case this is impracticable, the
Administration may extend this period by one
month;
.2 at an approved servicing station which is com-
petent to service them, maintains proper servic-
ing facilities and uses only properly trained
personnel 7.
8.9.8 Rotational deployment of marine evacuation
systems In addition to or in conjunction with the ser-
vicing intervals of marine evacuation systems required
by paragraph 8.9.7.1, each marine evacuation system
shall be deployed from the craft on a rotational basis
at intervals to be agreed by the Administration pro-
vided that each system is to be deployed at least once
every six years.
8.9.9 An Administration which approves new and
novel inflatable liferaft arrangements pursuant to 8.1
may allow for extended service intervals under the
following conditions:
8.9.9.1 The new and novel liferaft arrangement shall
maintain the same standard, as required by testing
procedure, throughout the extended service intervals.
8.9.9.2 The liferaft system shall be checked on board
by certified personnel according to paragraph 8.9.7.1.
8.9.9.3 Service at intervals not exceeding five years
shall be carried out in accordance with recommenda-
tions of the Organization
8.9.10 All repairs and maintenance of inflated res-
cue boats shall be carried out in accordance with the
manufacturers instructions. Emergency repairs may
be carried out on board the craft, however, permanent
repairs shall be effected at an approved servicing
station.
8.9.11 An Administration which permits extension of
liferaft service intervals in accordance with para-
graph 8.9.9 shall notify the Organization of such ac-
tion in accordance with regulation I/5(b) of the Con-
vention.
––––––––––––––
7 Refer to the Recommendation on Conditions for the Approval of
Servicing Stations for Inflatable Liferafts, adopted by the Or-
ganization by resolution A.761(18), as amended by resolution
MSC.55(66).
I - Part 3
GL 2012
8.9.12 Periodic servicing of hydrostatic release
units Hydrostatic release units shall be serviced:
.1 at intervals not exceeding 12 months, provided
where in any case this is impracticable, the
Administration may extend this period by one
month;
.2 at a servicing station which is competent to
service them, maintains proper servicing facili-
ties and uses only properly trained personnel.
8.9.13 Marking of stowage locations Containers,
brackets, racks and other similar stowage locations
for life-saving equipment, shall be marked with sym-
bols in accordance with the recommendations of the
Organization, indicating the devices stowed in that
location for that purpose. If more than one device is
stowed in that location, the number of devices shall
also be indicated.
8.9.14 Periodic servicing of launching appliances.
8.9.14.1 Launching appliances:
.1 shall be serviced at recommended intervals in
accordance with instructions for on-board
maintenance as required by regulation III/36 of
the Convention;
.2 shall be subject to a thorough examination at
the annual surveys required by paragraph
1.5.1.3;
.3 shall upon completion of the examination in .2
be subjected to a dynamic test of the winch
brake at maximum lowering speed. The load to
be applied shall be the mass of the survival
craft or rescue boat without persons on board,
except that, at intervals not exceeding five
years, the test shall be carried out with a proof
load equal to 1.1 times the weight of the sur-
vival craft or rescue boat and its full comple-
ment of persons and equipment.
8.10 Survival Craft and Rescue Boats
8.10.1 All craft shall carry:
.1 survival craft with sufficient capacity as will
accommodate not less than 100 % of the total
number of persons the craft is certified to
carry, subject to a minimum of two such sur-
vival craft being carried;
.2 in addition, survival craft with sufficient ag-
gregate capacity to accommodate not less than
10% of the total number of persons the craft is
certified to carry;
.3 sufficient survival craft to accommodate the
total number of persons the craft is certified to
carry even, in the event that all the survival
craft to one side of the craft centerline and
within the longitudinal extent of damage de-
I - Part 3 Section 8 Life-Saving Appliances and Arrangements
GL 2012
fined in 2.6.7.1 are considered lost or rendered
unserviceable;
.4 at least one rescue boat for retrieving persons
from the water, but not less than one such boat
on each side when the craft is certified to carry
more than 450 passengers;
.5 craft of less than 30 m in length may be ex-
empted from carrying a rescue boat, provided
the craft meets all of the following require-
ments:
.5.1 the craft is arranged to allow a helpless person
to be recovered from the water;
.5.2 recovery of the helpless person can be ob-
served from the navigating bridge; and
.5.3 the craft is sufficiently manoeuvrable to close
in and recover persons in the worst intended
conditions.
.6 notwithstanding the provisions of .4 and .5
above, craft shall carry sufficient rescue boats
to ensure that, in providing for abandonment
by the total number of persons the craft is certi-
fied to carry:
.6.1 not more than nine of the liferafts provided in
accordance with 8.10.1.1 are marshalled by
each rescue boat; or
Chapter 1
Page 8–7
.6.2 if the Administration is satisfied that the rescue
boats are capable of towing a pair of such lif-
erafts simultaneously, not more than 12 of the
liferafts provided in accordance with 8.10.1.1
are marshalled by each rescue boat; and
.6.3 the craft can be evacuated within the time
specified in 4.8.
8.10.2 Where the Administration considers it appro-
priate, in view of the sheltered nature of the voyages
and the suitable climatic conditions of the intended
area of operations, the Administration may permit the
use of open reversible inflatable liferafts complying
with annex 11 on category A craft as an alternative to
liferafts complying with paragraph 4.2 or 4.3 of the
LSA Code.
8.11 Helicopter Pick-up Areas
Craft operating on voyages having a duration of 2 h
or more between each port of call shall be provided
with a helicopter pick-up area approved by the Ad-
ministration having regard to the recommendations
adopted by the Organization 8.
––––––––––––––
8 Refer to the Merchant ship search and rescue manual
(MERSAR), adopted by the Organization by resolution
A.229(VII), as amended.
I - Part 3 Section 9 Machinery
GL 2012
Section 9
Machinery
Part A - General
9.1 General
9.1.1 The machinery, associated piping systems
and fittings relating to main machinery and auxiliary
power units shall be of a design and construction
adequate for the service for which they are intended
and shall be so installed and protected as to reduce to
a minimum any danger to persons on board, due re-
gard being paid to moving parts, hot surfaces and
other hazards. The design shall have regard to mate-
rials used in construction, the purpose for which the
equipment is intended, the working conditions to
which it will be subjected and the environmental con-
ditions on board.
9.1.2 All surfaces with temperatures exceeding 220
°C where impingement of flammable liquids may oc-
cur as a result of a system failure shall be insulated.
The insulation shall be impervious to flammable liq-
uids and vapours.
9.1.3 Special consideration shall be given to the
reliability of single essential propulsion components
and a separate source of propulsion power sufficient
to give the craft a navigable speed, especially in the
case of unconventional arrangements, may be re-
quired.
9.1.4 Means shall be provided whereby normal
operation of propulsion machinery can be sustained
or restored even though one of the essential auxilia-
ries becomes inoperative. Special consideration shall
be given to the malfunctioning of:
.1 a generating set which serves as a main
source of electrical power;
.2 the fuel oil supply systems for engines;
.3 the sources of lubricating oil pressure;
.4 the sources of water pressure;
.5 an air compressor and receiver for starting
or control purposes;
.6 the hydraulic, pneumatic or electrical means
for control in main propulsion machinery, including
controllable-pitch propellers.
However, having regard to overall safety considera-
tions, a partial reduction in propulsion capability
from normal operation may be accepted.
Chapter 1
Page 9–1
9.1.5 Means shall be provided to ensure that the
machinery can be brought into operation from the
dead craft condition without external aid.
9.1.6 All parts of machinery, hydraulic, pneumatic
and other systems and their associated fittings which
are under internal pressure shall be subjected to ap-
propriate tests including a pressure test before being
put into service for the first time.
9.1.7 Provision shall be made to facilitate clean-
ing, inspection and maintenance of main propulsion
and auxiliary machinery including boilers and pres-
sure vessels.
9.1.8 The reliability of machinery installed in the
craft shall be adequate for its intended purpose.
9.1.9 The Administration may accept machinery
which does not show detailed compliance with the
Code where it has been used satisfactorily in a similar
application, provided that it is satisfied:
.1 that the design, construction, testing, installa-
tion and prescribed maintenance are together ade-
quate for its use in a marine environment; and
.2 that an equivalent level of safety will be
achieved.
9.1.10 A failure mode and effect analysis shall in-
clude machinery systems and their associated con-
trols.
9.1.11 Such information as is necessary to ensure
that machinery can be installed correctly regarding
such factors as operating conditions and limitations
shall be made available by the manufacturers.
9.1.12 Main propulsion machinery and all auxiliary
machinery essential to the propulsion and the safety of
the craft shall, as fitted in the craft, be designed to
operate when the craft is upright and when inclined at
any angle of list up to and including 15° either way
under static conditions and 22.5° under dynamic con-
ditions (rolling) either way and simultaneously in-
clined by dynamically (pitching) 7.5° by bow or stern.
The Administration may permit deviation from these
angles, taking into consideration the type, size and
service conditions of the craft.
9.1.13 All boilers, and pressure vessels and associ-
ated piping systems shall be of a design and construc-
tion adequate for the purpose intended and shall be so
installed and protected as to minimise danger to per-
sons on board. In particular, attention shall be paid to
Chapter 1 Section 9 Machinery I - Part 3
Page 9–2 GL 2012

the materials used in the construction and the working
pressures and temperatures at which the item will
operate and the need to provide an adequate margin
of safety over the stresses normally produced in ser-
vice. Every boiler, pressure vessel and associated
piping systems shall be fitted with adequate means to
prevent over-pressures in service and be subjected to
a hydraulic test before being put into service, and
where appropriate at subsequent specified intervals,
to a pressure suitably in excess of the working pres-
sure.
C9.1.15.3 In addition to the Rules, GL reserves the
right to impose further requirements in respect of all
types of machinery, where this is unavoidable due to
new findings or operational experience, or GL may
permit deviations from the Rules where these are
specially warranted.
C9.1.15.4 National rules or regulations outside GL
Rules remain unaffected.
C9.1.16 Ambient conditions

C9.1.13 Pressure vessels and steam and hot water
generators are to be designed, constructed, equipped
and tested according to GL Rules.
For the installation of oil-fired steam and hot-water
generators automatic oil, steam or air atomizing burn-
ers or rotary cup burners complying with GL Rules are
to be provided.
The selection, layout and arrangement of all shipboard
machinery, equipment and appliances is to be such as
to ensure faultless continuous operation under the
ambient conditions specified in Tables C9.1 and C9.2.
C9.1.17 Design and construction of machinery
installation

9.1.14 Arrangements shall be provided to ensure C9.1.17.1 General

that, in the event of failure in any liquid cooling sys-
tem, it is rapidly detected and alarmed (visual and
audible) and means instituted to minimise the effects
of such failures on machinery serviced by the system.
C9.1.15 Classification
Main propulsion and manoeuvring equipment must
provide full control of speed and direction of the craft.
Every important, automatically or remote controlled
system must have alternative arrangements for opera-
tion.

C9.1.15.1 Designs which deviate from the Rules may
be approved provided that such designs have been
examined by GL for suitability and have been recog-
nized as equivalent.
C9.1.15.2 Machinery installations which have been
developed on novel principles and/or which have not
yet been sufficiently tested in shipboard service re-
quire GL’s special approval.
Such machinery may be designated by a suffix at-
tached to the character of classification and be sub-
jected to intensified survey, if sufficiently reliable
proof cannot be provided of its suitability and equiva-
lence.
C9.1.17.2 Materials, welding and tests
.1 All materials and components subject to the
Rules are to be manufactured and tested in accordance
with GL Rules.
.2 The fabrication of welded components, ap-
proval of companies and testing of welders are subject
to GL Rules.
.3 Machinery and its components are subject to
constructional and material tests, pressure and leakage
tests and trials. All the tests prescribed in the follow-
ing sections are to be conducted under the supervision
of GL.

Table C9.1 Inclinations (see note)

Angle of inclinations °2

Installations, Components Athwartship Fore-and-aft
static dynamic static Dynamic
Main and auxiliary machinery 15 22,5 5 7,5
Ship safety equipment, e.g. emergency power
installations, emergency fire pumps and their drives
22,5 22,5 10 10
Switchgear, electrical and electronic appliances 1
and remote-control systems
1 Up to an angle of inclination of 45° no undesired switching operations or functional changes may occur.
2 Athwartships and fore-and-aft inclinations may occur simultaneously.

Note: GL may be consider deviations from these angles, talking into consideration the type, size and service
condition of the craft.
I - Part 3 Section 9 Machinery Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 9–3

Table C9.2 Environmental conditions for machinery and electrical installations (see Note)
Seawater temperature +32 °C
Ambient air temperature -25 °C to -45 °C, relative humidity (1 bar / 45 °C) 60 %
Enclosed machinery spaces Temperature range 0 °C to 55 °C. Relative humidity 100 %.
Ability to withstand oil vapour and salt-laden air
Air-conditioned control rooms Temperature range 0 °C to 40 °C. Relative humidity 80 %
Open deck Temperature range -25 °C to +45 °C. Ability to withstand
temporary flooding with seawater and salt-laden spray
Note: GL may approve other conditions for craft operating only in special agreed geographical areas.

.4 In the case of parts produced in series, other
methods of testing may be agreed with GL instead of
the tests prescribed, provided that the former are
recognized as equivalent by GL.
.5 GL reserves the right, where necessary, to
increase the scope of the tests and also to subject to
testing those parts which are not expressly required to
be tested according to the Rules.
.6 After installation on board of propulsion and
auxiliary machinery, operational functioning of the
machinery including the associated auxiliary equip-
ment is to be verified. All safety equipment is to be
tested, unless adequate testing has already been per-
formed at the manufacturer's works in the presence of
GL Representative.
.7 In addition, the entire machinery installation
is to be tested during sea trials as far as possible un-
der intended service conditions.
C9.1.18 Shipboard trials (dock and sea trials)
C9.1.18.1 Dock and sea trials are to be carried out to
the satisfaction of the GL Surveyor
Sea trials are to be performed in compliance with the
Guidelines for Sea Trials of Motor Vessels (VI-11-3),
unless stipulated otherwise in these Rules.
C9.1.18.2 Sea trials with propulsion engines driving
fixed pitch propellers:
.1 Sea trials with internal combustion engines
driving fixed pitch propellers are to be performed in
conformity with the GL Rules Machinery Installa-
tions (I-1-2), Section 2, E.5 (See also Guidelines for
Sea Trials of Motor Vessels (VI-11-3)).
.2 Sea trials with gas turbines driving fixed
pitch propellers have to be carried out at rated turbine
speed n0 for at least 2 hours. Other tests such as start-
ing tests, minimum on load speed, astern trial and
final testing of monitoring and safety system have to
be carried out in conformity with the GL Rules Ma-
chinery Installations (I-1-2), Section 2, E.5 (See also
Guidelines for Sea Trials of Motor Vessels (VI-11-
3)).
C9.1.18.3 Sea trials with propulsion engines driving
controllable pitch propellers, reversing gears or water
jets:
.1 Sea trials with internal combustion engines
driving controllable pitch propeller, reversing gears
or water jets are to be performed in conformity with
the GL Rules Machinery Installations (I-1-2), Section
2, E.5 (See also Guidelines for Sea Trials of Motor
Vessels (VI-11-3)). Manoeuvring trials are to be
conducted with various propeller pitches. Where
provision is made for combinator operation, the com-
binator curves are to be plotted and verified by meas-
urements.
.2 Sea trials with gas turbines driving control-
lable pitch propellers, reversing gears or water jets
have to be carried out at 100 % power at turbine
speed n0 for at least 2 hours. Other tests such as start-
ing tests, minimum on load speed, astern trial and
final testing of monitoring and safety system have to
be carried out in conformity with the GL Rules Ma-
chinery Installations (I-1-2), Section 2, E.5 (See also
Guidelines for Sea Trials of Motor Vessels (VI-11-
3)). Manoeuvring trials are to be conducted with
various propeller pitches. Where provision is made
for combinator operation, the combinator curves are
to be plotted and verified by measurements.
C9.1.18.4 Sea trials for main engines driving genera-
tors for propulsion:
Sea trials for main engines driving generators for
propulsion are to be performed in conformity with the
GL Rules Machinery Installations (I-1-2), Section 2,
E.5 (See also Guidelines for Sea Trials of Motor
Vessels (VI-11-3)).
C9.1.18.5 Sea trials for engines driving auxiliaries
and electrical generators:
Sea trials for engines driving auxiliaries and electrical
generators are to be performed in conformity with the
GL Rules Machinery Installations (I-1-2), Section 2,
E.5. (See also Guidelines for Sea Trials of Motor
Vessels (VI-11-3)).
C9.1.18.6 Stopping test from full ahead is to be car-
ried out. Time and distance are to be noted.
Chapter 1 Section 9 Machinery
Page 9–4
9.2 Engine (general)
9.2.1 The engines shall be fitted with adequate
safety monitoring and control devices in respect of
speed, temperature, pressure and other operational
functions. Control of the machinery shall be from the
craft's operating compartment. Category B craft and
cargo craft shall be provided with additional ma-
chinery controls in or close to the machinery space.
The machinery installation shall be suitable for op-
eration as in an unmanned machinery space 1, in-
cluding automatic fire detection system, bilge alarm
system, remote machinery instrumentation and alarm
system. Where the space is continuously manned, this
requirement may be varied in accordance with the
requirements of the Administration.
9.2.2 The engines shall be protected against over-
speed, loss of lubricating oil pressure, loss of cooling
medium, high temperature, malfunction of moving
parts and overload. Safety devices shall not cause
complete engine shutdown without prior warning,
except in cases where there is a risk of complete
breakdown or explosion. Such safety devices shall be
capable of being tested.
9.2.3 At least two independent means of stopping
the engines quickly from the operating compartment
under any operating conditions shall be available.
Duplication of the actuator fitted to the engine shall
not be required.
9.2.4 The major components of the engine shall
have adequate strength to withstand the thermal and
dynamic conditions of normal operation. The engine
shall not be damaged by a limited operation at a
speed or at temperatures exceeding the normal val-
ues but within the range of the protective devices.
9.2.5 The design of the engine shall be such as to
minimise the risk of fire or explosion and to enable
compliance with the fire precaution requirements of
Section 7.
9.2.6 Provision shall be made to drain all excess
fuel and oil to a safe position so as to avoid a fire
hazard.
9.2.7 Provision shall be made to ensure that,
whenever practical, the failure of systems driven by
the engine shall not unduly affect the integrity of the
major components.
9.2.8 The ventilation arrangements in the machin-
ery spaces shall be adequate under all envisaged
operating conditions. Where appropriate, arrange-
ments shall ensure that enclosed engine compart-
ments are forcibly ventilated to the atmosphere be-
fore the engine can be started.
––––––––––––––
1 Refer to part E of chapter II-I of the Convention.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
9.2.9 Any engines shall be so installed as to avoid
excessive vibration within the craft.
9.3 Gas Turbines
C9.3.0.1 Documents to be submitted
For every gas turbine installation, the drawings and
documents required in GL’s Rules are to be submit-
ted for approval by the turbine manufacturer. To
facilitate a smooth and efficient approval process
they shall be submitted electronically via GLOBE2.
In specific cases and following prior agreement with
GL they can also be submitted in paper form in tripli-
cate.
C9.3.0.2 The materials of shafts, turbine and com-
pressor wheels, guide vanes and blades, turbine and
compressor casings, combustion chambers and heat
exchangers are to be tested in accordance with test
specifications laid down by the gas turbine manufac-
turer and recognized by GL as part of the approval
procedure.
9.3.1 Gas turbines shall be designed to operate in
the marine environment and shall be free from surge
or dangerous instability throughout its operating
range up to the maximum steady speed approved for
use. The turbine installation shall be arranged to
ensure that the turbine cannot be continuously oper-
ated within any speed range where excessive vibra-
tion, stalling, or surging may be encountered.
9.3.2 The gas turbines shall be designed and in-
stalled such that any reasonably probable shedding
of compressor or turbine blades will not endanger the
craft, other machinery, occupants of the craft or any
other persons.
9.3.3 Requirements of 9.2.6 shall apply to gas
turbines in respect of fuel which might reach the
interior of the jet pipe or exhaust system after a false
start or after stopping.
9.3.4 Turbines shall be safeguarded as far as
practicable against the possibility of damage by in-
gestion of contaminants from the operating environ-
ment. Information regarding the recommended
maximum concentration of contamination shall be
made available. Provision shall be made for prevent-
ing the accumulation of salt deposits on the compres-
sors and turbines and, if necessary, for preventing the
air intake from icing.
9.3.5 In the event of a failure of a shaft or weak
link, the broken end shall not hazard the occupants of
the craft, either directly or by damaging the craft or
its systems. Where necessary, guards may be fitted to
achieve compliance with these requirements.
––––––––––––––
2 Detailed information about the secured GL system GLOBE
can be found on GL’s website www.gl-group.com/globe.
I - Part 3 Section 9 Machinery
GL 2012
9.3.6 Each engine shall be provided with an
emergency overspeed shutdown device connected,
where possible, directly to each rotor shaft.
C9.3.6 Startup is to take place automatically, in a
fixed sequence.
9.3.7 Where an acoustic enclosure is fitted which
completely surrounds the gas generator and the high
pressure oil pipes, a fire detection and extinguishing
system shall be provided for the acoustic enclosure.
9.3.8 Details of the manufacturers' proposed
automatic safety devices to guard against hazardous
conditions arising in the event of malfunction in the
turbine installation shall be provided together with
the failure mode and effect analysis.
9.3.9 The manufacturers shall demonstrate the
soundness of the casings. Intercoolers and heat ex-
changers shall be hydraulically tested on each side
separately.
C9.3.10 The following minimum monitoring equip-
ment is to be provided:
.1 Air pressure and temperature at compressor
inlet,
.2 Gas pressure and temperature at gas genera-
tor outlet,
.3 Lubricating oil pressure and temperature,
.4 Gas generator and power turbine speeds.
C9.3.11 Gas turbine and compressor rotors are to be
dynamically balanced when in the condition ready for
assembly and are to undergo an overspeed test.
C9.3.12 Sea trials have to be carried out according to
C9.1.18.
9.4 Diesel Engines for Main Propulsion and
Essential Auxiliaries
C9.4.0.1 Documents to be submitted
For each diesel engine type, the drawings and docu-
ments required in the GL Rules are to be submitted
for approval by the engine manufacturer. To facilitate
a smooth and efficient approval process they shall be
submitted electronically via GLOBE 2. In specific
cases and following prior agreement with GL they
can also be submitted in paper form in triplicate.
C9.4.0.1.1 Auxiliary engines intended as prime
movers for harbour generator sets with less than 50
kW are not subject to approval.
C9.4.0.2 Definitions
C9.4.0.2.1 For the purposes of these Rules, diesel
engines are reciprocating internal combustion en-
gines.
Chapter 1
Page 9–5
C9.4.0.2.2 Diesel engines are to be designed such
that their rated power when running at rated speed
can be delivered as continuous power.
The continuous power for which the engine is to be
designed is defined as in ISO 3046/1.
C9.4.0.2.3 Subject to the approval of GL for propul-
sion plants where overload is used/required fre-
quently, the diesel engines may be designed for a
continuous power (fuel stop power) which cannot be
exceeded.
C9.4.0.2.4 Diesel engines for installation on board of
high speed craft must have been type-tested by GL.
For this purpose, a type-approval test in accordance
with GL’s Rules for diesel engines is to be per-
formed.
9.4.1 Any main diesel propulsion system shall
have satisfactory torsional vibration and other vibra-
tional characteristics verified by individual and com-
bined torsional and other vibration analyses for the
system and its components from power unit through
to propulsor.
C9.4.1 The speed ranges where excessive vibrations
may be encountered are to be marked in red on the
tachometer, where practicable, and an instruction
plate indicating that the engine is not to be continu-
ously operated within these speed ranges is to be
fitted near each control station.
9.4.2 All external high-pressure fuel delivery lines
between the high-pressure fuel pumps and fuel noz-
zles shall be protected with a jacketed tubing system
capable of containing fuel from a high-pressure line
failure. The jacketed tubing system shall include a
means for collection of leakages and arrangements
shall be provided for an alarm to be given of a fuel
line failure.
9.4.3 Engines of a cylinder diameter of 200 mm or
a crankcase volume of 0.6 m³ and above shall be
provided with crankcase explosion relief valves of an
approved type with sufficient relief area. The relief
valves shall be arranged with means to ensure that
discharge from them is directed so as to minimise the
possibility of injury to personnel.
C9.4.3 Where crankcase venting systems are pro-
vided, their clear opening is to be as small as possi-
ble.
The vent pipes of two or more engines are not to be
combined.
9.4.4 The lubrication system and arrangements
shall be efficient at all running speeds, due consid-
eration being given to the need to maintain suction
and avoid the spillage of oil in all conditions of list
and trim and degree of motion of the craft.
9.4.5 Arrangements shall be provided to ensure
that visual and audible alarms are activated in the
Chapter 1 Section 9 Machinery I - Part 3
Page 9–6 GL 2012

event of either lubricating oil pressure or lubricating
oil level falling below a safe level, considering the
rate of circulation of oil in the engine. Such events
shall also cause automatic reduction of engine speed
to a safe level, but automatic shutdown shall only be
activated by conditions leading to a complete break-
down, fire or explosion.
9.4.6 Where diesel engines are arranged to be
started, reversed or controlled by compressed air, the
arrangement of the air compressor, air receiver and
air starting system shall be such as to minimise the
risk of fire or explosion.
C9.4.9.2 Details of the starting equipment as well as
the number of starts are to be in compliance with the
GL Rules for Machinery Installations (I-1-2), Section
2, H. (See also Guidelines for Sea Trials of Motor
Vessels (VI-11-3)).
C9.4.9.3 Starting air compressors are to be approved
according to GL’s Rules.
C9.4.10 Control equipment
C9.4.10.1 Main engines
Engine control position

C9.4.7 Tests and trials An engine control position is to be provided from

which the propulsion plant (including reversing gear
Material tests for main components of diesel engines, or controllable pitch propeller) can be operated and
pressure tests and shop trials have to be conducted monitored.
according the GL Rules Machinery Installations (I-1-
2). As a minimum requirement, the engine control posi-
tion is to be equipped with the following indicators,
Sea Trials have to be carried out according to which are to be clearly and logically arranged:
C9.1.18. .1 Speed.
C9.4.8 Filters .2 Lubricating oil pressure at engine inlet.

C9.4.8.1 Lubricating oil filters .3 Fuel pressure at engine inlet.

Lubricating oil lines are to be fitted with lubricating .4 Cylinder cooling water pressure.
oil filters of suitable size and fineness, located in the .5 Starting air pressure.
main oil flow on the delivery side of the pumps.
.6 Charging air pressure.
Steps are to be taken to ensure that main flow filters
can be cleaned without interrupting operation and .7 Control air pressure at engine inlet.
filtration. Indicators are to be provided directly on the engine
for the following readings:
C9.4.8.2 Fuel filters
.8 Lubricating oil temperature.
The supply lines of the fuel-injection pumps are to be
fitted with switch-over duplex filters. .9 Coolant temperature.
.10 Exhaust gas temperature, wherever the dimen-
C9.4.8.3 Filters for emergency engines sions permit, at each cylinder outlet and at the
For emergency diesel generators and emergency turbocharger inlet/outlet.
diesel fireextinguishing pump sets, simplex filters for In case of geared transmissions or controllable-pitch
fuel oil and lubricating oil are acceptable. propellers, the scope of the control equipment men-
tioned above is to be extended accordingly.
C9.4.8.4 Filter arrangements
C9.4.10.2 Auxiliary engines
Fuel and lubricating oil filters which are to be
mounted directly on the engine are not to be located As a minimum requirement, the following indicating
above rotating parts or in the immediate proximity of instrumentsare to be mounted in a logical manner on
hot components. the engine:
Where this arrangement is not feasible, rotating parts .1 Tachometer.
and hot components are to be sufficiently shielded.
.2 Pressure gauge for lubricating oil pressure.
Drip pans of suitable size are to be mounted under .3 Pressure gauge for fuel pressure.
fuel filters. The same applies to lubricating oil filters
if oil can escape during dismantling of the filter. .4 Pressure gauge for cooling water pressure.
.5 Thermometer for cooling water.
C9.4.9 Starting equipment

C9.4.9.1 The starting equipment is to enable engines 9.5 Transmissions

to be started up from the shut-down condition using
the starting equipment available in the machinery C9.5.0.1 The design and arrangement of transmission
space. components such as shaftings, couplings, clutches
I - Part 3 Section 9 Machinery
GL 2012
and gears in propulsion, manoeuvring and lifting
devices are subject to approval and certification.
C9.5.0.2 Documentation and strength calculations on
the basis of GL’s Rules are to be submitted. Alterna-
tively, recognized calculation procedures may be
accepted.
C9.5.0.3 Steel shaft lines
.1 Materials are to comply with GL’s Rules.
.2 Shaft dimensions are to comply with GL’s
Rules standard calculations.
.3 Alternatively, for shafts protected from sea-
water (no direct contact between steel and seawater):
 a fatigue strength calculation e.g. according to
DIN 743 or similar may be accepted. This calcu-
lation is to be based on the loads (torque, bending
moment, thrust etc.) acting on the shaft at MCR
conditions.
 in addition to a fatigue strength calculation, a
static load calculation is required. At no location
of the shaft is the von Mises (equivalent) stress to
exceed the yield point of the shaft material for the
torque at MCR multiplied by the safety factor S,
where S ≥ 3.
.4 In any case for thin walled hollow shafts, a
safety factor S against buckling is required in refer-
ence to the torque at MCR, where S ≥ 3.
.5 All relevant load and material data have to
be submitted.
C9.5.0.4 Composites shaft lines
.1 Materials are to comply with GL’s Rules.
.2 Mathematical analysis of the relevant types
of failure (static, fatigue, buckling and vibrations)
according to classical laminate theory for a simple
geometry or FEM for a complex analysis is required.
.3 The material components and manufacturing
process has to be specified and an experimental
strength analysis (tests on samples and prototypes in
presence of GL representative) is to be provided. The
required safety factors and the validity of experimen-
tal strength analysis for the full scale component have
to be agreed with GL.
.4 If fire protection requirements are relevant
for the composites shafting, specific arrangements are
to be provided at the satisfaction of GL.
9.5.1 The transmission shall be of adequate
strength and stiffness to enable it to withstand the
most adverse combination of the loads expected in
service without exceeding acceptable stress levels for
the material concerned.
9.5.2 The design of shafting, bearings and mounts
shall be such that hazardous whirling and excessive
Chapter 1
Page 9–7
vibration could not occur at any speed up to 105% of
the shaft speed attained at the designed overspeed
trip setting of the prime mover.
C9.5.2.1 Torsional vibrations
Calculations for torsional vibration behaviour are to
be submitted to GL in due time. Calculations must
include the equivalent mass-elastic system, natural
frequencies and corresponding vibration modes, as
well as the forced response for gears, couplings,
shaftings. Calculations are to be checked in accor-
dance with GL Rules.
Torsional vibration measurements may be required
by GL. Such measurements will be necessary to de-
tect dynamic torques, especially for plants working
under unclearly defined conditions. As far as such
measurements aim to provide special knowledge
concerning load and response characteristics, ade-
quate measuring techniques are to be applied, by
agreement with GL.
C9.5.2.2 Stability of the system
The closed loop system including governor and plant
must be stable under all conditions. This may be
checked during sea trials for normal and misfiring
conditions, clutch-in procedures, parallel connecting
of units, loading of generators, etc.
In special cases, stability calculations may be re-
quired by GL.
C9.5.2.3 Whirling vibrations
Calculations of natural frequencies for whirling may
be required by GL. This will regularly be the case for
thin, long shaftings supported by few bearings. The
calculations may be required in a simplified form
(natural frequencies), or as complete forced vibra-
tions using methods or programmes approved by GL.
C9.5.2.4 Lateral vibrations
Vibration calculations for resilently mounted recipro-
cating main engines are to be submitted to GL for
approval. Calculations may be carried out in a simpli-
fied form, i.e. natural frequencies for the six degrees
of freedom and corresponding modes, provided that
no resonances excited by major engine orders are
within the operational speed range.
9.5.3 The strength and fabrication of the transmis-
sion shall be such that the probability of hazardous
fatigue failure under the action of the repeated loads
of variable magnitude expected in service is ex-
tremely remote throughout its operational life. Com-
pliance shall be demonstrated by suitably conducted
tests, and by designing for sufficiently low stress
levels, combined with the use of fatigue resistant
materials and suitable detail design. Torsional vibra-
tion or oscillation likely to cause failure may be ac-
ceptable if it occurs at transmission speeds which
would not be used in normal craft operation, and it is
recorded in the craft operating manual as a limita-
tion.
Chapter 1 Section 9 Machinery
Page 9–8
9.5.4 Where a clutch is fitted in the transmission,
normal engagement of the clutch shall not cause
excessive stresses in the transmission or driven items.
Inadvertent operation of any clutch shall not produce
dangerously high stresses in the transmission or
driven item.
9.5.5 Provision shall be made such that a failure
in any part of the transmission, or of a driven com-
ponent, will not cause damage which might hazard
the craft or its occupants.
9.5.6 Where failure of lubricating fluid supply or
loss of lubricating fluid pressure could lead to haz-
ardous conditions, provision shall be made to enable
such failure to be indicated to the operating crew in
adequate time to enable them as far as practicable to
take the appropriate action before the hazardous
condition arises.
9.6 Propulsion and Lift Devices
C9.6.0.1 The design and arrangement of propulsion
and lift devices are subject to approval and certifica-
tion.
C9.6.0.2 Documentation and strength calculations on
the basis of GL’s Rules are to be submitted. Alterna-
tively, recognized calculation procedures may be
accepted.
C9.6.0.3 The scantlings of propellers intended for
hydrofoils classed as HSC category A is to be such
that the strength of the blade, at the relevant verifica-
tion sections, is not less than 4 with respect to the
ultimate tensile strength of the propeller blade mate-
rial. The designer is to be present GL, together with
the propeller drawings, a detailed hydrodynamic load
and stress analysis at the relevant verification sec-
tions.
9.6.1 The requirements of this section are based
on the premise that:
.1 Propulsion arrangements and lift arrange-
ments may be provided by separate devices, or be
integrated into a single propulsion and lift device.
Propulsion devices may be air, or water propellers or
water jets and the requirements apply to all types of
craft.
.2 Propulsion devices are those which directly
provide the propulsive thrust and include machinery
items and any associated ducts, vanes, scoops and
nozzles, the primary function of which is to contribute
to the propulsive thrust.
.3 The lift devices, for the purposes of this
section, are those items of machinery which directly
raise the pressure of the air and move it for the pri-
mary purpose of providing lifting force for an air-
cushion vehicle.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
9.6.2 The propulsion and lift devices shall be of
adequate strength and stiffness. The design data, cal-
culations and trials, where necessary, shall establish
the ability of the device to withstand the loads which
can arise during the operations for which the craft is
to be certificated, so that the possibility of catastro-
phic failure is extremely remote.
9.6.3 The design of propulsion and lift devices
shall pay due regard to the effects of allowable cor-
rosion, electrolytic action between different metals,
erosion or cavitation which may result from opera-
tion in environments in which they are subjected to
spray, debris, salt, sand, icing, etc.
9.6.4 The design data and testing of propulsion
and lift devices shall pay due regard, as appropriate,
to any pressure which could be developed as a result
of a duct blockage, to steady and cyclic loadings, to
loadings due to external forces and to the use of the
devices in manoeuvring and reversing and to the
axial location of rotating parts.
9.6.5 Appropriate arrangements shall be made to
ensure that:
.1 ingestion of debris or foreign matter is mini-
mised;
.2 the possibility of injury to personnel from
shafting or rotating parts is minimised; and
.3 where necessary, inspection and removal of
debris can be carried out safely in service.
C9.6.6 For stabilisation means:
.1 The different situations are described in
C3.11.
.2 In case of situation 1, only power activated
items such as foils, trims and tabs are assessed. The
following parts are reviewed:
 hydraulic system used for activation of stabilisa-
tion system,
 associated electrical devices.
.3 In case of situation 2, only possible interfer-
ence between hydraulic/electrical installations and
the safety of the craft are to be checked. The hydrau-
lic/electrical systems documentation is to be submit-
ted for that purpose. The applicable regulations de-
pend on the location of the hydraulic power pack.
The working principles are not checked.
Part B - Requirements for Passenger Craft
9.7 Independent Means of Propulsion for Cate-
gory B Craft
Category B craft shall be provided with at least two
independent means of propulsion so that the failure
of one engine or its support systems would not cause
the failure of the other engine or engine systems and
I - Part 3 Section 9 Machinery Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 9–9

with additional machinery controls in or close to the Part C - Requirements for Cargo Craft
machinery space.

9.8 Means for Return to a Port of Refuge for
Category B Craft
Category B craft shall be capable of maintaining the
essential machinery and control so that, in the event
of a fire or other casualties in any one compartment
on board, the craft can return to a port of refuge
under its own power.
9.9 Essential Machinery and Control
Cargo craft shall be capable of maintaining the es-
sential machinery and control in the event of a fire or
other casualties in any one compartment on board.
The craft need not be able to return to a place of
refuge under its own power.
I - Part 3 Section 10 Auxiliary Systems Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 10–1

Section 10

Auxiliary Systems

Part A General .6 Temperature ranges

.7 Equipment list.
C10.0 Documents to be submitted
C10.0.3 Machinery arrangement plan showing the
C10.0.1 Diagrammatical plans for piping systems and layout of machinery components such as engines,
arrangements, including all the details necessary for fans, heat exchangers, generators, switchboards,
approval as listed below, are to be submitted. To fa- pumps, purifiers, excluding pipes, valves and accesso-
cilitate a smooth and efficient approval process they ries.
shall be submitted electronically via GLOBE 1. In C10.0.4 Further documentation may be required if
specific cases and following prior agreement with GL deemed necessary by GL.
they can also be submitted in paper form in triplicate.
.1 Tank arrangement for fuel and other flamma- 10.1 General
ble fluids
10.1.1 Fluid systems shall be constructed and ar-
.2 Fuel systems (bunkering, transfer and service) ranged so as to assure a safe and adequate flow of
.3 Lubricating oil systems fluid at a prescribed flow rate and pressure under all
conditions of craft operation. The probability of a
.4 Cooling water systems (seawater and fresh failure or a leakage in any one fluid system, causing
water) damage to the electrical system, a fire or an explosion
.5 Compressed air systems (starting air, control hazard shall be extremely remote. Attention shall be
air, working air) directed to the avoidance of impingement of flamma-
ble liquid on hot surfaces in the event of leakage or
.6 Exhaust gas systems
fracture of the pipe.
.7 Bilge pumping and drainage systems
10.1.2 The maximum allowable working pressure in
.8 Oily bilge water and oil residue systems any part of the fluid system shall not be greater than
.9 Ballast and antiheeling systems the design pressure, having regard to the allowable
stresses in the materials. Where the maximum allow-
.10 Steam heating, feed water and condensate able working pressure of a system component, such as
systems a valve or a fitting, is less than that computed for the
.11 Air, overflow and sounding pipes pipe or tubing, the system pressure shall be limited to
the lowest of the component maximum allowable
.12 Sanitary systems working pressures. Every system which may be ex-
.13 Fittings on side and bottom posed to pressures higher than the system's maximum
allowable working pressure shall be safeguarded by
.14 Arrangement of remote controlled valves appropriate relief devices.
.15 Hydraulic systems for hatch covers, shell clos-
10.1.3 Tanks and piping shall be pressure-tested to
ing appliances, watertight doors and hoists.
a pressure that will assure a safety margin in excess of
C10.0.2 The diagrammatical plans or accompanying the working pressure of the item. The test on any stor-
age tank or reservoir shall take into account any pos-
lists are to include the following particulars:
sible static head in the overflow condition and the
.1 Outside diameters and wall thicknesses of dynamic forces arising from craft motions.
pipes
10.1.4 Materials used in piping systems shall be
.2 Materials for pipes, valves and fittings compatible with the fluid conveyed and selected giving
.3 Type and capacity of pumps due regard to the risk of fire. Non-metallic piping
material may be permitted in certain systems provided
.4 Type of flexible hoses and expansion elements the integrity of the hull and watertight decks and bulk-
.5 Maximum working pressures heads is maintained 2.

–––––––––––––– ––––––––––––––
1 Detailed information about the secured GL system GLOBE 2 Refer to the Guidelines for the Application of Plastic Pipes on
can be found on GL’s website www.gl-group.com/globe. Ships, adopted by the Organization by resolution.
Chapter 1 Section 10 Auxiliary Systems I - Part 3
Page 10–2 GL 2012

C10.1.5 Definitions signed with regard to their mechanical characteristics.

C10.1.5.1 Maximum allowable working pressure
PB
This is the maximum allowable working pressure for
components and piping systems with regard to the
materials used, requirements, working temperatures
and undisturbed operation.
C10.1.5.2 Nominal pressure PN
This is the term applied to a selected pres-
sure/temperature ratio used for the standardization of
structural components. In general, the numerical value
of the nominal pressure for a standardized component
made of the material specified in the standard will
correspond to the maximum allowable working pres-
sure PB at 20 °C.
C10.1.5.3 Test pressure PP
This is the pressure to which components and piping
systems are subjected for testing purposes.
C10.1.5.4 Design pressure PR
This is the maximum allowable working pressure PB
for which components and piping systems are de-
In general, the design pressure is the maximum allow-
able working pressure at which the safety equipment
will intervene (e.g. activation of safety valves, open-
ing of return lines of pumps, operating of overpressure
safety arrangements, opening of relief valves) or at
which the pumps will operate against closed valves.
C10.1.6 Materials
For the testing of pipes, selection of joints, welding
and heat treatment, pipes are divided into three
classes, as indicated in Tables C10.1 and C10.2.
Details of approved materials are given in Table
C10.3.
GL’s Rules for Materials are also to be observed.
C10.1.6.1 Steel pipes, valves and fittings
Pipes belonging to Classes I and II are to be either of
seamless drawn material, or produced by a welding
procedure approved by GL. In general, carbon and
carbonmanganese steel pipes, valves and fittings are
not to be used for temperatures above 400 °C.

Table C10.1 Classification of pipes into pipe classes

Design pressure PR [bar]

Medium/type of pipeline
Design temperature t [°C]

Pipe class I II III

Toxic media all
Corrosive media
1
Inflammable media with service temperature above the flash point all –
Inflammable media with a flash point of 60 °C or less
PR > 16 PR ≤ 16 PR ≤ 7
Steam or and and
t > 300 t ≤ 300 t ≤170
Air, gas
Non-flammable hydraulic fluid PR > 40 PR ≤ 40 PR ≤ 16
Boiler feedwater, condensate or and and
Seawater and fresh water for cooling t > 300 t ≤ 300 t ≤ 200
Brine in refrigerating plant
PR > 16 PR ≤ 16 PR ≤ 7
Liquid fuels, lubricating oil, flammable hydraulic fluid or and and
t > 150 t ≤ 150 t ≤ 60
Refrigerants – all –
Open-ended pipelines (without shutoff), e.g. drains, venting pipes,
– – all
overflow lines and boiler blowdown lines
1 Classification in Pipe Class II is possible if special safety arrangements are available and structural safety precautions are arranged.
I - Part 3 Section 10 Auxiliary Systems Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 10–3

Table C10.2 Approved materials and types of material Certificates

Type of
Type of Design Pipe Nominal diameter Certificate 2
Approved materials
component temperature class DN
A B C

Pipes 1, Steel,
> 50 × − −
Pipe elbows, Copper, Copper alloys, I + II
≤ 50 – × –
Fittings Aluminium –
Aluminium alloys
Plastics III All – – ×

Valves 1, Steel,
Flanges, Cast steel, > 300 °C
DN > 100 × – –
Nodular cast iron I, II
DN ≤ 100 – × –
Copper,
> 225 °C
Copper alloys
PB × DN > 2500
Steel, × – –
or DN > 250
Cast steel, ≤ 300 °C I, II
PB × DN ≤ 2500
Nodular cast iron – × –
or DN ≤ 250
Steel,
Cast steel,
– III All – – ×
Nodular cast iron,
Grey cast iron

Copper,
≤ 225 °C PB × DN > 1500 × – –
Copper alloys
I, II
Aluminium,
≤ 200 °C PB × DN ≤ 1500 – × –
Aluminium alloys

Acc. to
Type
Plastics III All – – ×
Approval
Certificate

Semi-finished
I, II – – × –
products,
Screws and According to Table C10.3 –
other compo- III – – – ×
nents

1 Casings of valves and pipes fitted on ship’s side and bottom and bodies of valves fitted on collision bulkhead are to be included in pipe
class II
2 Test Certificates acc. to GL Rules II – 1 – 1, Section 1, H. with the following abbreviations:
A: GL Material Certificate, B: Manufacturer Inspection Certificate, C: Manufacturer Test Report
Chapter 1 Section 10 Auxiliary Systems
Page 10–4
C10.1.6.2 Pipes, valves and fittings of aluminium
and aluminium alloy
Aluminium and aluminium alloys are to comply with
GL’s Rules for Materials and may be used for tem-
peratures up to 200 °C.
 Pipes made of aluminium may be used for the
following services:
 Fresh cooling water systems
 Bilge systems outside areas of major fire hazard,
as defined in 7.3.1
 Air and sounding pipes; for air and sounding
pipes of tanks containing flammable liquids out-
side of major fire hazard areas, as defined in 7.3.1
 Pipes containing flammable liquids outside areas
of major fire hazards, as defined in 7.3.1
 Pipes for non-essential services.
Seawater cooling pipes and ballast pipes and other
seawater pipes made of aluminium alloys, may be
accepted at the discretion of GL.
C10.1.6.3 Pipes, valves and fittings of non-metallic
materials
Pipes, connecting pieces, valves and fittings made of
plastic materials may be used at the discretion of the
Society.
Note: Plastic pipes and the application are to comply
with IMO Resolution A 753(18).
Plastic pipes are to be permanently marked with the
following particulars:
 Manufacturer's marking
 Standard specification number
 Outside diameter and wall thickness
 Year of manufacture.
Valves and connecting pieces made of plastic shall,
as a minimum requirement, be marked with the
manufacturer's marking and the nominal diameter.
C10.1.6.4 Pipes, valves and fittings of copper and
copper alloys
Pipes of copper and copper alloys are to be of seam-
less drawn material, or produced by a method ap-
proved by GL. Copper pipes for Classes I and II are
to be seamless.
In general, copper and copper alloy pipelines are not
to be used for media having temperatures above the
following limits:
 Copper and aluminium brass: 200 °C
 Copper nickel alloys: 300 °C
 High-temperature bronze: 260 °C.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
C10.1.6.5 Pipes, valves and fittings of nodular
ferritic cast iron
Pipes, valves and fittings of nodular ferritic cast iron
according to GL’s Rules may be used for bilge and
ballast pipes within double-bottom tanks, and tanks
for other purposes approved by GL. In special cases
(applications corresponding in principle to Classes II
and III) and at GL’s discretion, valves and fittings
made of ferritic nodular cast iron may be accepted for
temperatures up to 350 °C.
C10.1.6.6 Pipes, valves and fittings of lamella
graphite cast iron (grey cast iron)
Pipes, valves and fittings of grey cast iron may be
used for Class III systems.
The use of grey cast iron is not permitted:
 for media at temperatures above 220 °C and for
pipelines subject to water hammering, severe
stresses or vibration
 for valves and pipes fitted on craft sides, and for
valves fitted on the collision bulkhead
 for valves on fuel and oil tanks which are subject
to static head.
C10.1.7 Testing
C10.1.7.1 Testing of materials
Pipes, bends, fittings, valve bodies and flanges for
piping systems belonging to Classes I and II are sub-
ject to tests in accordance with GL’s Rules for Mate-
rials under GL’s supervision.
C10.1.7.2 Testing prior to installation on board
.1 All Class I and II piping as well as all piping
for compressed air and flammable liquids with a
design pressure PR greater than 0,35 MPa are, after
completion of manufacture but before insulation and
coating, to be subjected to a hydraulic pressure test in
the presence of a Surveyor at a pressure of 1,5⋅PR.
When technical reasons do not allow complete hy-
draulic pressure tests on all pre-fabricated pipe sec-
tions before assembly on board, proposals are to be
submitted for approval to GL.
.2 When hydraulic pressure tests of piping are
carried out on board, they may be conducted in con-
junction with the tests required under C10.1.7.3.
.3 Pressure testing of pipes with nominal di-
ameters less than 15 mm may be omitted, at GL’s
discretion, pending the application.
I - Part 3 Section 10 Auxiliary Systems Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 10–5

Table C10.3 Approved materials

Pipe class
Material or application
I II III
Pipes for general applications: Pipes for Steel not subject to any special
general quality specification, weldability
 above 300 °C:
applications in accordance with Rules for
high-temperature steel pipes
Welding
Pipes  below -10 °C:
pipes made of steel with
high low-temperature
toughness, stainless steel
pipes for chemicals
Steels

Forgings, Steel suitable for the corresponding loading and process conditions,
Plates, for temperatures > 300 °C, high temperature steels,
Fanges for temperatures below –10 °C, steel with high low-temperature toughness
Bolts for general machinery
constructions:
 above 30 °C:
Bolts, high-temperature steels Bolts for general machinery construction
Nuts
 below -10 °C:
steel with high low-
temper- ature toughness
Cast steel for general applica-
tions:
 above 30 °C:
high-temperature cast steel
Castings (valves, fittings, pipes)

Cast steel
 below -10 °C: Cast steel for general applications
cast steel with high low-
temperature toughness
 for aggressive media:
stainless castings

Nodular cast iron Only ferritic grades, elongation A5 at least 15 %

At least GG-20 up to 200 °C,

Cast iron with Grey cast iron is not permitted
– –
lamellar graphite in values and fittings on ship’s
side, collision bulkhead and fuel
and oil tanks
Non-ferrous metals

Copper,
For seawater and alkaline water, only corrosion
(valves, fittings,

Copper alloys –
resistant copper and copper alloys
pipes)

Aluminium, Upon special

– See C10.1.6.2
Aluminium alloys approval of GL
Non-metallic
materials

Non-metallic
– – See C10.1.6.3
Chapter 1 Section 10 Auxiliary Systems I - Part 3
Page 10–6 GL 2012

C10.1.7.3 Testing after installation on board  Valves and connections in the ship's side to not
less than 0,5 MPa.
.1 After assembly on board, all piping covered
by these Rules is to be subjected to a tightness test in C10.1.8 Minimum wall thickness
presence of a Surveyor.
C10.1.8.1 Minimum pipe thicknesses are stated in
In general, all pipe systems are to be tested for leak- Table C10.4 to Table C10.10. These minimum thick-
age under operational conditions. If necessary, alter- nesses may be increased if considered necessary,
native tests to hydraulic pressure tests may be ap- following stress analysis.
plied.
Slight differences in diameters and wall thicknesses
.2 Heating coils in tanks and piping for flam- based on recognized standards may be accepted.
mable liquids are to be tested at a pressure of 1,5 PR,
but in no case at less than 0,4 MPa. Provided that pipes are effectively protected against
corrosion, the wall thicknesses of group M steel pipes
may, at the discretion of GL, be reduced by up to 1
C10.1.7.4 Testing of valves
mm. The amount of the reduction is to be in relation
Valves are to be subjected to a hydraulic pressure and to the wall thickness.
tightness test in the manufacturer's works, in presence
Protective coatings (e.g. hot-dip galvanizing) may be
of a Surveyor:
recognized as effective corrosion protection provided
 Valves of pipe Classes I and II to 1,5 PR that its preservation during installation is guaranteed.

Table C10.4 Choice of minimum wall thickness for steel pipes

Location
Fuel and changeover tanks

Fresh cooling water tanks

Cofferdam / void spaces

Drinking water tanks

Lubricating oil tanks

Hydraulic oil tanks

Ballast water tanks
Machinery spaces

Living quarters

Piping system
Weather deck
Cargo holds

Bilge lines --- M ---

Ballast lines M --- X

M M X X
Seawater lines M
X
Fuel lines M --- N X
N
Lubricating lines N X
N --- N
Hydraulic lines ---
X X
Drinking water lines N
M X X N
Fresh cooling water lines N X

M, N Refer to Table C10.10

x Pipelines are not to be installed.
(-) Pipelines may be installed by special agreement with GL.
I - Part 3 Section 10 Auxiliary Systems Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 10–7

Table C10.5 Choice of minimum wall thickness for air, overflow, sounding and sanitary pipes made of steel
Location
Air, sounding and over-
Piping Drain lines and scupper pipes
flow pipes
system or
position of Tanks Tanks with below freeboard deck
Cargo Machinery
open pipe with same disparate or datum above
above below holds spaces
outlets media media without with freeboard
open deck open deck
shut-off on shut-off on deck
ship's side ship's side
Air, over-
flow and
M C – – – C M M M
sounding
pipes
Scupper
pipes from A
open deck
Discharge
and scup-
per pipe
B –
leading A B A – – B A
directly
overboard
Discharge
of pumps
– A
of sanitary
systems
A, B, C : Refer to Table C10.10 M : Refer to Table C10.6

Table C10.6 Minimum wall thickness of steel pipes

Group N Group M
da1 s da 1 s da 1 s da 1 s da 1 s
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
from 10,2 1,6 from 114,3 3,2 from 406,4 6,3 from 21,3 3,2 from 219,1 5,9
from 43,5 1,8 from 133,0 3,6 from 660,0 7,1 from 38,0 3,6 from 244,5 6,3
from 20,0 2,0 from 152,4 4,0 from 762,0 8,0 from 51,0 4,0 from 660,4 7,1
from 48,3 2,3 from 177,8 4,5 from 864,0 8,8 from 76,1 4,5 from 762,0 8,0
from 70,0 2,6 from 244,5 5,0 from 914,0 10,0 from 117,8 5,0 from 863,6 8,8
from 88,9 2,9 from 323,9 5,6 from 193,7 5,4 from 914,4 10,0
1 da = outside diameter

Table C10.7 Minimum wall thickness for austen- Table C10.8 Minimum wall thickness for copper
itic steel pipes and copper alloy pipes

Pipe outside diameter Minimum wall Pipe outside Minimum wall thickness s [mm]
da [mm] thickness s [mm] diameter
da [mm] Copper Copper alloy
up to 17,2 1,0 8 – 10 1,0 0,8
up to 48,3 1,6 12 – 20 1,2 1,0
up to 88,9 2,0 25 – 44,5 1,5 1,2
50 – 76,1 2,0 1,5
up to 168,3 2,3
88,9 – 108 2,5 2,0
up to 219,1 2,6 133 – 159 3,0 2,5
up to 273,0 2,9 193,7 – 267 3,5 3,0
up to 406,0 3,6
273 – 457,2 4,0 3,5
(470) – 4,0 3,5
over 406,0 4,0 508 – 4,5 4,0
Chapter 1 Section 10 Auxiliary Systems I - Part 3
Page 10–8 GL 2012

Table C10.9 Minimum wall thickness for alumin-  Bilge and ballast lines
ium and aluminium alloy pipes
 Sea water lines
Pipe outside diameter Minimum wall
 Fresh and seawater cooling lines
[mm] thickness s [mm]
< 10 1,5  Firefighting and deckwash lines
12 – 38 2,0  Vent, fill and sounding pipes
43 – 57 2,5
 Drinking water lines
76 – 89 3,0
108 – 133 4,0  Sanitary discharge lines.
159 – 194 4,5 Use of pipe couplings is not permitted in:
219 – 273 5,0
> 273 5,5  Bilge lines inside ballast and fuel tanks
Note: For Seawater pipes the wall thickness is not to be less  Ballast lines inside cargo holds and fuel tanks
than 5,0 mm.
 Pipes containing flammable liquids within major
fire hazard areas as defined in 7.3.1, cargo holds
Table C10.10 Minimum wall thickness for copper and ballast tanks.
and copper alloy pipes
C10.1.10 Layout, marking and installation
Pipe outside Minimum wall thickness s [mm]
diameter [mm] A B1 C C10.1.10.1 Piping systems are to be identified ac-
cording to their purpose. Valves are to be perma-
38 – 82,5 4,5 7,1 6,3 nently marked.
88,9 – 4,5 8,0 6,3
101,6 – 114,3 4,5 8,0 7,1 C10.1.10.2 Pipe penetrations through bulkheads and
127 – 139,7 4,5 8,8 8,0 tank walls are to be water- and oil-tight. Bolts pene-
152,4 – 4,5 10,0 8,8 trating bulkheads are not permitted. Holes for set
screws are not to be drilled in tank walls.
159 – 177,8 5,0 10,0 8,8
193,7 – 5,4 12,5 8,8 C10.1.10.3 The installation of pipes for water or oil
219,1 – 5,9 12,5 8,8 behind or above electric switchboards is to be
244,5 – 457,2 6,3 12,5 8,8 avoided. If this is impracticable, pipes and valves are
1 The pipe thickness may not be greater than the thickness of to be well shielded and/or located as far as possible
the shell plates.
from the switchboard.

C10.1.10.4 Piping systems are to be so arranged that

C10.1.9 Pipe connections
C10.1.9.1 The following pipe connections may be
used for steel pipes:
 Fully penetrating butt welds with/without provi-
sion to improve the quality of the root
 Socket welds with suitable fillet weld thickness
 Screw connection of a type approved by GL
 Steel flanges of a recognized standard.
they may be completely emptied, drained and vented.
Piping systems in which accumulation of liquids
during operation could cause damage are to be
equipped with special draining devices.
C10.1.10.5 Pipelines laid through coated tanks are to
be either effectively protected against corrosion or
made of a material with low susceptibility to corro-
sion. The protection against corrosion of the tanks as
well as that of the pipes are to be compatible to each
other.

Screwed socket connections or similar are permitted
only for subordinate systems for pipes below DN 65.
C10.1.9.2 Flanges made of non-ferrous metals may
be used in accordance with recognized standards and
within the limits laid down in approvals.
C10.1.9.3 Non-metallic pipes are to be connected by
approved methods (e.g. welding, glueing or cement-
ing) or by approved detachable connections.
C10.1.9.4 Type-approved pipe couplings may be
used in the following systems:
C10.1.10.6 Water pipes, air and sounding pipes pass-
ing through freezing chambers are to be avoided as
far as practicable.
C10.1.10.7 Piping systems are to be adequately sup-
ported, to prevent detrimental vibrations occurring in
the system.
C10.1.11 Valves
C10.1.11.1 Shutoff devices
Shutoff devices are to comply with a recognized
standard. Valves with screwed-on covers are to be
I - Part 3 Section 10 Auxiliary Systems
GL 2012
secured, to prevent inadvertent loosening of the
cover.
Hand-operated shutoff devices are to be closed by
turning in a clockwise direction.
Valves are to be clearly marked to show whether they
are open or closed.
C10.1.11.2 Craft side valves
.1 Craft side valves are to be easily accessible
and capable of being operated from above the floor.
Where, subject to C10.1.6.2 and C10.1.6.3, sea water
pipes made of aluminium alloys or non-metallic ma-
terials are accepted by GL, craft's side valves inside
machinery spaces and other spaces with major fire
hazard are to be provided with means of remote clo-
sure from outside the space.
.2 Valves are to be of a flanged type and made
of metallic ductile material.
.3 The minimum wall thickness of pipe
branches connected to the craft's hull below the da-
tum shall be as follows:
 for steel pipes: in accordance with Table C10.10,
Group B
 for aluminium pipes: at least equal to that of the
shell plating, but need not to exceed 8 mm.
C10.1.11.3 Remote-controlled valves
.1 General
For remote-controlled valves, failure of power supply
is not to cause:
 opening of closed valves
 closing of open valves on fuel tanks and in cool-
ing water systems for propulsion and power gen-
erating machinery.
Remote-controlled valves are to be equipped with an
emergency operating arrangement. They are to be
accessible for maintenance and repair work.
.2 Power units
Power units for remote-controlled valves are to be
equipped with at least two independent power supply
units.
For the closing of valves which are not closed by
spring action, power units are to be fitted with pres-
sure accumulators.
Pneumatically operated valves may be supplied by air
from the general compressed air system.
.3 Control station
At the control station, means are to be provided to
show whether the valves are open or closed.
Chapter 1
Page 10–9
For visual indication of the closed position of valves,
limitposition indicators approved by GL are to be
provided.
The control position is to be located in a space which
is normally attended, e.g. operating compartment.
.4 Bilge piping
Valves and control lines for bilge systems are to be
located as far as possible from the bottom and side
shell of the craft.
.5 Fuel pipes
Valves mounted directly at fuel tanks above the dou-
ble bottom are to be capable of being closed from
outside the compartment in which they are installed
(e.g. from craft's operating compartment or other
suitable locations).
C10.1.12 Hose assemblies and compensators of
non-metallic materials
C10.1.12.1 Requirements
Hose assemblies and compensators of non-metallic
material are to be type-approved and tested according
to GL’s Rules.
Hose assemblies and compensators including their
couplings are to be suitable for media, pressures and
temperatures.
Selection of hose assemblies and compensators is to
be based on the maximum allowable working pres-
sure of the system concerned. 0,5 MPa is to be con-
sidered as the minimum working pressure.
C10.1.12.2 Installation
Hose assemblies are not to be longer than necessary
for the application.
The minimum bending radius is not to be less than
the radius specified by the manufacturer.
Hose assemblies and compensators are to be accessi-
ble.
Hoses used in fresh water systems with working
pressures ≤ 0,5 MPa, or in charging air and scaveng-
ing air ducts, may be fastened with double clips.
Hoses which are installed directly near hot surfaces
are to be provided with additional heat-resistant
sheathing.
C10.1.13 Pumps
C10.1.13.1 General
Construction, materials and tests of pumps are to
comply with the Society Rules.
C10.1.13.2 Relief valves
Positive displacement pumps are to be fitted with
relief valves which cannot be adjusted to the closed
position. They are to discharge into the suction side
of the pump.
Chapter 1 Section 10 Auxiliary Systems
Page 10–10
C10.1.13.3 Tests
The pumps listed below are subject to tests carried
out at the manufacturer's works, under GL supervi-
sion:
 Fire pumps and emergency fire pumps
 Bilge pumps
 Seawater cooling pumps
 Fresh water cooling pumps
 Fuel transfer pumps
 Fuel service pumps
 Fuel injection valve cooling pumps
 Lubricating oil pumps
 Ballast pumps
 Boiler feedwater pumps
 Boiler water circulating pumps
 Other pumps considered necessary for perform-
ance ofessential functions.
10.2 Arrangement of Oil Fuel, Lubricating Oil
and Other Flammable Oil
10.2.1 The provisions of 7.1.2.2 apply to the use of
oil as fuel.
C10.2.1 The requirements stipulated in 7.5 are to be
complied with.
10.2.2 Oil fuel, lubricating oil and other flammable
oil lines shall be screened or otherwise suitably pro-
tected to avoid, as far as practicable, oil spray or oil
leakages onto hot surfaces, into machinery air in-
takes or other sources of ignition. The number of
joints in such piping systems shall be kept to a mini-
mum. Flexible pipes carrying flammable liquids shall
be of an approved type. 3
C10.2.2(a) As far as practicable, flammable liquid
lines are not to be arranged in the vicinity of boilers,
turbines or equipment with surface temperatures
greater than 220 °C, nor above electrical equipment.
C10.2.2(b) Pumps are to be provided with shutoff
valves.
C10.2.2(c) Filling pipes for tanks containing flam-
mable liquids are to terminate on open deck and be
arranged so that leakages are collected by suitable
coamings.
Fuel-oil filling connections are, as far as practicable,
to be arranged on both sides of the craft.
––––––––––––––
3 Refer to the Guidelines to Minimize Leakages from Flammable
Liquid Systems for Improving Reliability and Reducing Risk of
Fire (MSC/Circ.647).
I - Part 3
GL 2012
10.2.3 Fuel oil, lubricating oils and other flamma-
ble oils shall not be carried forward of public spaces
and crew accommodation.
C10.2.3
C10.2.3.1 All tanks not forming part of the craft
structure are to be fastened securely and arranged so
that they can be readily inspected.
Free-standing fuel tanks are to be installed so as to
allow free circulation of air around the tanks.
Fuel tanks for emergency diesel generators are to be
located inside the emergency generator room.
C10.2.3.2 Appliances, mountings and fittings not
forming part of the fuel tank equipment may be fitted
to tank walls only by means of intermediate supports.
Only components forming part of the tank equipment
may be fitted to freestanding tanks.
For valves and pipe connections, the tank walls are to
beprovided with strengthening flanges. Bolt holes are
not to be drilled in tank surfaces.
Instead of strengthening flanges, short, thick pipe
flange connections may be welded to the tank sur-
faces.
10.2.4 Oil fuel arrangements
In a craft in which oil fuel is used, the arrangements
for the storage, distribution and utilisation of the oil
fuel shall be such as to ensure the safety of the craft
and persons on board and shall at least comply with
the following provisions.
10.2.4.1 As far as practicable, all parts of the oil fuel
system containing heated oil under pressure exceed-
ing 0.18 N/mm² shall not be placed in a concealed
position such that defects and leakage cannot readily
be observed. The machinery spaces in way of such
parts of the oil fuel system shall be adequately illu-
minated.
C10.2.4.1 Fuel lines are not to pass through tanks
containing feedwater, drinking water or lubricating
oil.
10.2.4.2 The ventilation of machinery spaces shall be
sufficient under all normal conditions to prevent
accumulation of oil vapour.
C10.2.4.2 The provisions of Art. 10.6 and Art. 10.7
are to be complied with.
10.2.4.3 Location of fuel tanks shall be in accordance
with 7.5.2.
C10.2.4.3 Fuel tanks are to be separated by
voids/cofferdams from tanks containing lubricating,
hydraulic, thermal or edible oil and drinking water.
Fuel service tanks inside machinery spaces are to be
made of steel.
I - Part 3 Section 10 Auxiliary Systems
GL 2012
10.2.4.4 No oil fuel tank shall be situated where spill-
age or leakage therefrom can constitute a hazard by
falling on heated surfaces. Reference is made to the
fire safety requirements in 7.5.
10.2.4.5 Oil fuel pipes shall be fitted with cocks or
valves in accordance with 7.5.3.
C10.2.4.5(a) The controls of such valves are to be
located outside the space in which the tanks are ar-
ranged, as far as possible combined in one location,
preferably the craft's operating compartment.
C10.2.4.5(b) Valves subject to static head are to be
made of ductile material.
C10.2.4.5(c) Remote-controlled shutoff valves may
be dispensed with for tanks with a capacity of less
than 50 litres.
10.2.4.6 Every fuel tank shall, where necessary, be
provided with savealls or gutters to catch any fuel
which may leak from such tanks.
C10.2.4.6 Tanks located above the double bottom are
to be fitted with self-closing drains.
10.2.4.7 Safe and efficient means of ascertaining the
amount of oil fuel contained in any oil fuel tank shall
be provided.
10.2.4.7.1 Where sounding pipes are used, they shall
not terminate in any space where the risk of ignition
of spillage from the sounding pipe might arise. In
particular, they shall not terminate in public spaces,
crew accommodation or machinery spaces. Termina-
tions shall be provided with a suitable means of clo-
sure and provision to prevent spillage during refuel-
ling operations.
10.2.4.7.2 Other oil-level gauges may be used in
place of sounding pipes. Such means are subject to
the following conditions:
.1 In passenger craft, such means shall not
require penetration below the top of the tank
and their failure or overfilling of the tanks
will not permit release of fuel.
.2 The use of cylindrical gauge glasses shall be
prohibited. In cargo craft, the Administra-
tion may permit the use of oil-level gauges
with flat glasses and self-closing valves be-
tween the gauges and fuel tanks. Such other
means shall be acceptable to the Administra-
tion and shall be maintained in the proper
condition to ensure their continued accurate
functioning in service.
C10.2.4.7.3 Level-indicating devices which are not
type approved by GL may be accepted if sounding
pipes are provided in addition.
Chapter 1
Page 10–11
Sight glasses and oil gauges fitted directly on the tank
wall, and cylindrical glass gauges, are not permitted.
C10.2.4.7.4 Sounding pipes are to terminate outside
main fire hazard areas and as far as possible above
the open deck. However, where this is not possible,
the following requirements are to be met:
 Oil-level gauges are to be provided in addition to
sounding pipes.
 Sounding pipes are either to terminate in loca-
tions remote from ignition hazards or to be fitted
with effective screens to prevent spillages coming
into contact with a source of ignition.
 Sounding pipes are to be fitted with self-closing
shutoff devices and self-closing testing devices.
10.2.4.8 Provision shall be made to prevent over-
pressure in any oil tank or in any part of the fuel
system, including bunkering pipes and any filling
pipes served by on-board pumps. Any relief valves
and air or overflow pipes shall discharge to a safe
position where there is no risk of fire and explosion
from the emergence of oils and vapours, shall not
lead into crew spaces, passenger spaces, special
category spaces, ro-ro spaces (other than open ro-ro
spaces), machinery spaces or similar spaces. For fuel
of flashpoint less than 43 °C such valves and pipes
shall terminate with flame arresters in accordance
with the standards developed by the Organization 4.
C10.2.4.8 Lines of relief/safety valves and overflow-
lines are to discharge into leakage, drain or overflow
tanks.
10.2.4.9 Oil fuel pipes and their valves and fittings
shall be of steel or other approved material, except
that restricted use of flexible pipes shall be permissi-
ble in positions where the Administration is satisfied
that they are necessary. Such flexible pipes and end
attachments shall be approved fire-resisting materi-
als of adequate strength and shall be constructed to
the satisfaction of the Administration.
10.2.5 Lubricating oil arrangements
The arrangements for the storage, distribution and
utilisation of oil used in pressure lubrication systems
shall be such as to ensure the safety of the craft and
persons on board. The arrangements made in ma-
chinery spaces and, whenever practicable, in auxil-
iary machinery spaces shall at least comply with the
provisions of 10.2.4.1 and 10.2.4.4 to 10.2.4.8 except
that:
.1 this does not preclude the use of sight-flow
glasses in lubricating systems provided they
are shown by test to have a suitable degree of
fire resistance; and
––––––––––––––
4 Refer to the Revised Standards for the Design, Testing and
Locating of Devices to Prevent the Passage into Cargo Tanks in
Tankers (MSC/Circ.677).
Chapter 1 Section 10 Auxiliary Systems
Page 10–12
.2 sounding pipes may be permitted in machinery
spaces if fitted with appropriate means of clo-
sure; and
.3 lubricating oil storage tanks with a capacity of
less than 500 l may be permitted without re-
mote operated valves as required in 10.2.4.5.
C10.2.5(a) Flexible pipes are permissible in positions
where GL is satisfied that they are necessary. Such
flexible pipes and end attachments in pressure lubri-
cating systems located in machinery spaces and aux-
iliary machinery spaces as defined in Section 7 are to
be of approved fire-resistant material of adequate
strength and constructed to the satisfaction of GL.
C10.2.5(b) Lubricating oil systems are to be con-
structed to ensure reliable lubrication over the whole
range of speed and during run-down of the engines,
and are to ensure adequate heat transfer.
C10.2.5(c) Independent standby pumps are to be
provided for propulsion engines. For craft with more
than one main engine, each provided with an inde-
pendent lubricating oil system, standby pumps are not
required.
Engines and gears fitted with attached pumps are to
be provided with an independent auxiliary lubricating
pump if lubrication before starting is necessary.
C10.2.5(d) Equipment for suitable treatment of lubri-
cating oil (e.g. purifiers, automatic back-flushing
filters, filters, free-jet centrifuges) are to be provided.
.1 Lubricating oil filters are to be fitted in
pump pressure lines.
Uninterrupted supply of filtered oil has to be ensured
under maintenance conditions of filter equipment.
Mesh size and filter capacity are to be in accordance
with the engine manufacturer's requirements.
.2 Main filters are to be provided with differen-
tial pressure monitoring.
Back-flushing cycles of automatic filters are also to
be monitored.
.3 Engines for emergency power supply or
emergency fire pumps may be provided with simplex
filters.
10.2.6 The arrangements for storage, distribution
and utilisation of other flammable oil employed un-
der pressure in power transmission systems, control
and activating systems and heating systems shall be
such as to ensure the safety of the craft and persons
on board. In locations where means of ignition are
present, such arrangements shall at least comply with
the provisions of 10.2.4.4 and 10.2.4.7 and with the
provisions of 10.2.4.8 and 10.2.4.9 in respect of
strength and construction.
C10.2.6 The provisions of 10.2.4.6, 10.2.5.2 and
10.2.5.3 are to be complied with where applicable, as
well as the provisions of 10.2.4.9 in respect of the
I - Part 3
GL 2012
approval of the fire-resistant materials of flexible
pipes.
10.2.7 Arrangement within machinery spaces
In addition to the requirements of 10.2.1 to 10.2.6,
the oil fuel and lubricating oil systems shall comply
with the following:
.1 Where daily service fuel tanks are filled auto-
matically or by remote control, means shall be
provided to prevent overflow spillages.
C10.2.7.1 Service tanks are to be fitted with high-
and low-level alarms.
.2 Other equipment which treats flammable liq-
uids automatically, such as oil fuel purifiers,
which, whenever practicable, should shall be
installed in a special space reserved for puri-
fiers and their heaters, shall have arrange-
ments to prevent overflow spillages.
C10.2.7.2 Purifiers for cleaning fuel and lubricating
oil are to be in accordance with GL’s Rules.
.3 Where daily service oil fuel tanks or settling
tanks are fitted with heating arrangements, a
high-temperature alarm shall be provided if
the flashpoint of the oil can be reached due to
failure of the thermostatic control.
C10.2.7.3 Tanks which require preheating are to be
fitted with temperature-indicating devices and, where
necessary, thermal insulation.
Heating coils are to be provided with shutoff valves
at tank inlet and outlet. Heating coils are also to be
fitted at the tank outlet with an upstream device to
test the condensate. Heating coil connections in tanks
are to be welded.
Heating coils are to be supported in such a way as not
to be subjected to non-allowable stresses due to vi-
bration, particularly at their points of clamping.
Further requirements concerning heating systems
(e.g. boiler, piping layout) are to be taken into con-
sideration.
10.3 Bilge Pumping and Drainage Systems
10.3.1 Arrangements shall be made for draining
any watertight compartment other than the compart-
ments intended for permanent storage of liquid.
Where, in relation to particular compartments,
drainage is not considered necessary, drainage ar-
rangements may be omitted, but it shall be demon-
strated that the safety of the craft will not be im-
paired.
C10.3.1(a) Bilge suctions are to be suitably arranged
and fitted with mud boxes.
C10.3.1(b) Every machinery space is normally to be
provided with at least two bilge suctions, one at each
I - Part 3 Section 10 Auxiliary Systems
GL 2012
side. Additional suctions may be required for craft
having long machinery spaces.
C10.3.1(c) Bilge suctions are to be arranged so as not
to impede the cleaning of bilges and bilge wells.
10.3.2 Bilge pumping arrangements shall be pro-
vided to allow every watertight compartment other
than those intended for permanent storage of liquid
to be drained. The capacity or position of any such
compartment shall be such that flooding thereof
could not affect the safety of the craft.
10.3.3 The bilge pumping system shall be capable
of operation under all possible values of list and trim
after the craft has sustained the postulated damage in
2.6.6 to 2.6.10. The bilge pumping system shall be so
designed as to prevent water flowing from one com-
partment to another. The necessary valves for con-
trolling the bilge suctions shall be capable of being
operated from above the datum. All distribution
boxes and manually operated valves in connection
with the bilge pumping arrangements shall be in
positions which are accessible under ordinary cir-
cumstances. The spindles of manually operated
valves shall be easily accessible and all valves shall
be clearly marked.
C10.3.3(a) Valves in pipe connections between bilge
and seawater or ballast water systems, as well as
between bilge connections of different compartments,
are to be arranged so that even in the event of faulty
operation or intermediate positions of the valves,
seawater is safely prevented from penetrating through
the bilge system.
C10.3.3(b) To prevent penetration of ballast and
seawater into the ship through the bilge system, two
means of reverse-flow protection are to be fitted in
the bilge connections, one of which is to be a screw-
down non-return valve. One such means of protection
is to be fitted in each branch line.
For emergency and direct suctions, one screw-down
nonreturn valve is sufficient.
C10.3.3(c) A combination of a non-return valve with
positive closing device and shutoff valve may be
recognized as equivalent to a screw-down non-return
valve, at the discretion of GL.
C10.3.3(d) Discharges below the datum are to be
provided with shutoff valves located at the shell.
10.3.4 The power operated self-priming bilge
pumps may be used for other duties such as fire fight-
ing or general service but not for pumping fuel or
other flammable liquids.
C10.3.4(a) In the event of pump failure, one pump
for fire fighting and one pump for bilge pumping are
to remain available.
Chapter 1
Page 10–13
C10.3.4(b) Bilge ejectors are acceptable for bilge
pumping arrangements if an independent supply of
driving water is provided.
10.3.5 Each power bilge pump shall be capable of
pumping water through the required bilge pipe at a
speed of not less than 2 m/s.
10.3.6 The diameter (d) of the bilge main shall be
calculated according to the following formula, except
that the actual internal diameter of the bilge main
may be rounded off to the nearest size of a recognized
standard:
d = 25 + 1.68(L(B+D))0.5
where :
d is the internal diameter of the bilge main
[mm];
L is the length of the craft [m] as defined in
Section 1;
B is, for monohull craft, the breadth of the
craft [m] as defined in Section 1 and, for
multi-hull craft, the breadth of a hull at or
below the design waterline [m]; and
D is the moulded depth of the craft to the da-
tum [m].
10.3.7 Internal diameters of suction branches shall
meet the requirements of the Administration but shall
not be less than 25 mm. Suction branches shall be
fitted with effective strainers.
C10.3.7 The diameter is given by the formula:
dB = 25 + 2,15 (LB · (B1 + d))0,5
where:
dB = internal diameter [mm] of the branch pipes
LB = length [m] of the watertight compartment
B1 = average breadth [m] of the compartment at or
below the design waterline.
10.3.8 An emergency bilge suction shall be pro-
vided for each machinery space containing a propul-
sion prime mover. This suction shall be led to the
largest available power pump other than a bilge
pump, propulsion or oil pump. Emergency bilge suc-
tions shall be provided for craft with common bilge
pumping systems according to 10.3.6 and for craft
with individual bilge pumps according to 10.3.13.
C10.3.8(a) Emergency bilge suctions are to be ar-
ranged in an accessible position, at a suitable distance
from the double bottom ceiling or the craft bottom.
The position is to allow the free flow of bilge water.
Chapter 1 Section 10 Auxiliary Systems
Page 10–14
The diameter is to be equal to the diameter of the
suction line of the pump.
C10.3.8(b) Emergency bilge valves and the suction
valves of the relevant pumps are to be capable of
being operated from above the floor.
10.3.9 The spindles of the sea inlet valves shall
extend well above the machinery space floor plates.
C10.3.9 The provisions of C10.1.11.2 are to be com-
plied with.
10.3.10 All bilge suction piping up to the connection
to the pumps shall be independent of other piping.
10.3.11 Spaces situated above the water level in the
worst anticipated damage conditions may be drained
directly overboard through scuppers fitted with non-
return valves.
10.3.12 Any unattended space for which bilge pump-
ing arrangements are required shall be provided with
a bilge alarm.
C10.3.12 Each machinery space is normally to be
provided with at least two bilge alarms.
10.3.13 For craft with individual bilge pumps, the
total capacity Q of the bilge pumps for each hull shall
not be less than 2.4 times the capacity of the pump
defined in 10.3.5 and 10.3.6.
10.3.14 In bilge pumping arrangements where a
bilge main is not provided, then, with the exception of
the spaces forward of public spaces and crew ac-
commodation, at least one fixed submersible pump
shall be provided for each space. In addition, at least
one portable pump shall be provided supplied from
the emergency supply, if electric, for use on individ-
ual spaces. The capacity of each submersible pump
Qn shall not be less than:
Qn = Q/(N-1) tonnes/h with a minimum of
8 tonnes/h
where :
N = number of submersible pumps
Q = total capacity as defined in 10.3.13.
10.3.15 Nonreturn valves shall be fitted in the fol-
lowing components:
.1 bilge valve distribution manifolds;
.2 bilge suction hose connections where fitted
directly to the pump or to the main bilge suc-
tion pipe; and
.3 direct bilge suction pipes and bilge pump
connections to main bilge suction pipe.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
C10.3.15 For reverse-flow protections, see C10.3.3.2
and C10.3.3.3.
C10.3.16 Arrangements for oily bilge water and
oil residues
Each craft is to be provided with at least:
 a collecting tank for oily bilge water, fuel and oil
residues
 equipment for discharge of oil residues to recep-
tion facilities.
Note
MARPOL 73/78 as amended and national require-
ments are to be observed.
10.4 Ballast Systems
10.4.1 Water ballast shall not in general be carried
in tanks intended for oil fuel. In craft in which it is
not practicable to avoid putting water in oil fuel
tanks, oily-water separating equipment shall be fitted,
or other alternative means such as discharge to shore
facilities shall be provided for disposing of the oily-
water ballast. The provisions of this paragraph are
without prejudice to the provisions of the Interna-
tional Convention for the Prevention of Pollution
from Ships in force.
10.4.2 Where a fuel-transfer system is used for
ballast purposes, the system shall be isolated from
any water ballast system and meet the requirements
for fuel systems and the International Convention for
the Prevention of Pollution from Ships in force.
C10.4.3 Piping layout
Where pipes are led through the collision bulkhead, a
shutoff valve, made of ductile metallic material, is to
be fitted directly at the collision bulkhead.
The valve is to be capable of being closed by remote
control from the operating compartment.
10.5 Cooling Systems
The cooling arrangements provided shall be ade-
quate to maintain all lubricating and hydraulic fluid
temperatures within the manufacturers' recom-
mended limits during all operations for which the
craft is to be certificated.
C10.5.1 General
Cooling water circuits are to be provided with tem-
perature controls in accordance with the requirements
of Section 11. Control devices whose failure may
impair the functional reliability of the system are to
be equipped for manual operation.
I - Part 3 Section 10 Auxiliary Systems
GL 2012
C10.5.2 Cooling water pumps
C10.5.2.1 Main and standby cooling water pumps are
to be provided for propulsion systems with one main
engine, or systems with more than one engine using a
common cooling water system.
For propulsion plants with more than one engine, and
for auxiliary engines provided with individual cool-
ing circuits, standby pumps may be dispensed with
C10.5.2.2 Standby cooling water pumps shall be
driven independently.
C10.5.3 Heat exchangers, coolers
C10.5.3.1 For common cooling systems, the number
and capacity of heat exchangers and coolers is to be
considered by GL.
C10.5.3.2 Heat exchangers and coolers are to be
provided with:
 shutoff valves at inlet and outlet
 vents and drains.
C10.5.4 Keel coolers
Keel coolers are to be fitted with pressure gauges at
the fresh water inlet and outlet.
C10.5.5 Seawater cooling systems
C10.5.5.1 At least two sea inlets are to be provided.
Wherever possible, sea chests are to be provided and
positioned as low as possible on either side of the
craft.
On multi-hull craft or craft with independent engine
rooms, one sea chest or sea inlet for each hull or
engine room is considered sufficient.
C10.5.5.2 Each sea chest is to be provided with an
effective vent and a connection to flush the sea chest
gratings. The flushing media may not exceed the
construction pressure of the sea chest.
C10.5.5.3 The suction lines of seawater pumps are to
be fitted with strainers.
Strainers are to be arranged so that they can be
cleaned while the pumps are in operation.
For multiple-engine installations, single strainers are
considered sufficient.
C10.5.6 Sea valves
The provisions of C10.1.11.2 are to be complied
with.
Discharge pipes for seawater cooling systems are to
be fitted with a shutoff valve at the shell. If dis-
charges are located above the datum, shutoff valves
may be dispensed with.
Chapter 1
Page 10–15
C10.5.7 Fresh water cooling systems
C10.5.7.1 Where heat exchangers for fuel or lubricat-
ing oil are incorporated in cylinder cooling water
circuits of propulsion engines, the entire cooling
water circuit is to be monitored for fuel and oil con-
tamination.
C10.5.7.2 Expansion tanks are to be fitted with filling
connections, aeration/de-aeration devices, water level
indicators and drains.
C10.5.7.3 Means are to be provided for preheating as
required.
10.6 Engine Air Intake Systems
Arrangements shall provide sufficient air to the en-
gine and shall give adequate protection against dam-
age, as distinct from deterioration, due to ingress of
foreign matter.
C10.6.1 The provisions of 7.6 of Section 7 and of
Art. 10.7, if relevant, are to be complied with.
10.7 Ventilation Systems
Machinery spaces shall be adequately ventilated so
as to ensure that when machinery therein is operating
at full power in all weather conditions, including
heavy weather, an adequate supply of air is main-
tained to the spaces for the safety and comfort of
personnel and the operation of the machinery. Auxil-
iary machinery spaces shall be adequately ventilated
appropriate for the purpose of those spaces. The
ventilation arrangements shall be adequate to ensure
that the safe operation of the craft is not put at risk.
C10.7.1 The provisions of 7.6 of Section 7 are to be
complied with.
C10.7.2 Each independent machinery space is to be
provided with its own ventilation system.
In general, ventilation systems for machinery spaces
are to be independent of each other.
C10.7.3 The height of the coamings from the inlet
and outlet openings is to comply with 2.2.8.4 of Sec-
tion 2.
If water traps are to be provided, air velocity is to be
taken into account.
C10.7.4 The air is to be conducted in such a way as
to avoid local accumulations of heat wherever possi-
ble (e.g. by means of a secondary system of selective
ventilation or by under-floor ducting of exhaust air).
C10.7.5 The air supply is not to be directed immedi-
ately towards hot machine parts, turbine components,
measuring instruments or switchboards. Electrical
machinery and installations (e.g. switch cabinets) are
to be protected, so that water particles penetrating
into air ducts will not cause damage. Risks of this
Chapter 1 Section 10 Auxiliary Systems
Page 10–16
kind are to be minimized by appropriate arrangement
of ducts and air outlets.
C10.7.6 The capacity and arrangement of ventilation
systems/ducts is to ensure that accumulation of oil
vapour is avoided and a slight overpressure in the
machinery space during normal operation is guaran-
teed.
Provision is to be made to remove CO2, in case of
flooding of the machinery space.
C10.7.7 Ventilation capacity is to be based on the
heat radiation of equipment installed in the space.
10.8 Exhaust Systems
10.8.1 All engine exhaust systems shall be adequate
to assure the correct functioning of the machinery
and that safe operation of the craft is not put at risk.
C10.8.1 Exhaust pipes are to be installed separately
from each other, taking structural fire protection into
account.
Account is to be taken of thermal expansion when
laying out and suspending lines.
Exhaust lines and silencers are to be provided with
suitable drains of adequate size.
10.8.2 Exhaust systems shall be so arranged as to
minimise the intake of exhaust gases into manned
spaces, air-conditioning systems, and engine intakes.
Exhaust systems shall not discharge into air-cushion
intakes.
10.8.3 Pipes through which exhaust gases are dis-
charged through the hull in the vicinity of the water-
line shall be fitted with erosion-/corrosion-resistant
shut-off flaps or other devices on the shell or pipe end
and acceptable arrangements made to prevent water
flooding the space or entering the engine exhaust
manifold.
C10.8.3(a) Shutoff flaps may be omitted if the over-
flow point of the exhaust pipe is located above the
most unfavourable damage water line.
Shutoff devices are to be fitted with means for remote
controlled closing above the datum, preferably from
the operating compartment. The closed position is to
be indicated.
C10.8.3(b) The use of flexible hoses in wet exhaust
systems may be accepted at the discretion of the
Society, if the hoses are suitable for this purpose
(media, pressure and temperature).
C10.8.3(c) Materials used in exhaust systems are to
be resistant to sea water corrosion and exhaust prod-
ucts.
10.8.4 Gas turbine engine exhausts shall be ar-
ranged so that hot exhaust gases are directed away
I - Part 3
GL 2012
from areas to which personnel have access, either on
board the craft or in the vicinity of the craft when
berthed.
C10.8.5 Insulation
Exhaust lines, silencers and exhaust gas boilers are to
be insulated properly.
Insulating materials are to be incombustible.
Exhaust lines inside engine rooms are to be provided
with metal sheathing or other approved type of hard
sheathing.
C10.A.1 Compressed Air Systems
C10.A.1.1 Starting equipment
Starting equipment (e.g. air compressors and air re-
ceivers) are to comply with Art. 9.3 of Section 9 for
gas turbines and Art. 9.4 of Section 9 for diesel en-
gines.
C10.A.1.2 Compressed air lines
Pressure lines connected to air compressors are to be
fitted with non-return valves at the compressor out-
lets.
Oil and water separators are to be provided.
The starting air line to each engine is to be fitted with
a nonreturn device and drain.
A safety valve is to be fitted behind each pressure-
reducing valve.
The compressed air supply for blowing through sea
chests may not exceed the design pressure of the sea
chest (see C10.5.5.2).
C10.A.1.3 Control air system
Control air systems for essential consumers are to be
provided with the necessary means of air treatment.
C10.A.2 Steam Heating, Feedwater and Conden-
sate Systems
C10.A.2.1 General
For steam and hot water generators as well as for oil-
fired burners, the provision of 9.1.13 of Section 9 are
to be complied with.
Pipes, pumps and valves belonging to these systems
are also subject to the following requirements.
C10.A.2.2 Steam lines
Steam lines are to be installed and supported so that
expected stresses due to thermal expansion, external
loads and shifting of the supporting structure under
both normal and interrupted service conditions will
be safely compensated. Sufficiently rigid positions
are to be arranged as fixed points for the steam piping
systems. Steam lines are to be provided with suffi-
cient expansion arrangements.
I - Part 3 Section 10 Auxiliary Systems
GL 2012
Steam lines are to be installed so that water pockets
will be avoided. Means are to be provided for reliable
drainage of the piping system.
Steam lines are to be effectively insulated to prevent
heat losses. Pipe penetrations through bulkheads and
decks are to be insulated to prevent heat conduction.
At points where there is a possibility of contact, the
surface temperature of the insulated steam lines may
not exceed 60 °C. Wherever necessary, additional
protection arrangements against unintended contact
are to be provided.
C10.A.2.3 Feedwater lines
Feedwater lines are to be fitted with shutoff valves
and check valves at the boiler inlet. Where shutoff
and check valves are not directly connected in series,
the intermediate pipe is to be fitted with a drain.
Feedwater pumps are to be fitted with shutoff valves
on the suction side and screw-down non-return valves
on the delivery side. The pipes are to be arranged so
that each pump can supply each feedwater line.
Provision of only one feedwater line for auxiliary and
exhaust gas boilers is sufficient if the preheaters and
automatic regulating devices are fitted with bypass
lines.
Continuous-flow boilers need not be fitted with these
valves, provided that the heating of the boiler is auto-
matically switched off if the feedwater supply fails,
and that the feedwater pump supplies only one boiler.
Feedwater lines may not pass through tanks which do
not contain feedwater.
C10.A.2.4 Capacity of feedwater pumps
Provision of only one feedwater pump is sufficient if
the boiler is not intended for essential services.
Where two feedwater pumps are provided, the capac-
ity of each is to be equivalent to at least 1,25 times
the maximum permitted output of all the connected
steam producers.
Where more than two feedwater pumps are installed,
the capacity of all other feedwater pumps, in the
event of failure of the pump with the largest capacity,
is to comply with the requirements above.
For continuous-flow boilers, the capacity of the fe-
edwater pumps is to be at least 1,0 times the maxi-
mum steam output.
Special conditions may be accepted for the capacity
of the feedwater pumps, for plants incorporating a
combination of oil-fired and exhaust-gas boilers or
other arrangements.
C10.A.2.5 Boiler water circulating systems
The provision of only one circulating pump for each
boiler is sufficient in the following cases:
 boilers are heated only by gases whose tempera-
ture does not exceed 400 °C, or
Chapter 1
Page 10–17
 a common standby circulating pump is provided,
which can be connected to any boiler,
 the burners of oil- or gas-fired auxiliary boilers
are arranged so that they are automatically shut
off if the circulating pump fails and the heat
stored in the boiler does not cause any unaccept-
able evaporation of the available water in the
boiler,
 the boiler is not intended for essential services.
C10.A.2.6 Condensate recirculation
The condensate of all heating systems used to heat oil
(e.g. fuel, lubricating, cargo oil) is to be led to con-
densate observation tanks. These tanks are to be fitted
with vents to the open deck.
C10.A.3 Air, Overflow and Sounding Pipes
C10.A.3.1 General
The minimum wall thickness for steel pipes is to be
in accordance with Table C10.5, Table C10.6 and
Table C10.10.
The minimum wall thickness for pipes in material
other than steel shall be at least:
 in accordance with Tables C10.7, C10.8 or C10.9
below the open deck
 increased by at least 50 % above the open deck.
All compartments and tanks arranged with filling
and/or drainage equipment are to be fitted with air
pipes and sounding devices.
C10.A.3.2 Air and overflow pipes
Voids, cofferdams and tanks are to be fitted with air
pipes. The arrangement is to allow total filling of
tanks under normal trim conditions.
Air pipes located on open deck are to be fitted with
automatic air pipe heads approved by GL at a height
not lower than 760 mm above deck.
Note: Refer to International Convention on Load
Lines, 1966 Reg. 20 (LLC66) as amended.
Air pipes of tanks which contain fuel oil are to termi-
nate on open deck to save locations with no risk of
ignition (see also 10.2.4.8).
Air pipes of tanks which contain liquids other than
fuel oil may terminate inside closed spaces. Means
are to be provided for safe drainage in the event of
overflow.
Air pipes of integral tanks located at the shell side are
to terminate above the datum.
Air and overflow pipes are to be arranged in such a
way that they are self-draining under normal condi-
tions.
Where air and overflow pipes of several tanks are
connected to a common line, the common line and
connections are to be arranged so that, if a leakage
occurs in one tank due to hull damage or listing of the
ship, fuel or water cannot flow into another tank.
Chapter 1 Section 10 Auxiliary Systems
Page 10–18
The minimum inner diameter of air/overflow pipes is
not to be less than 40 mm.
The clear cross-sectional area of air/overflow pipes is
to be at least 1,25 times the cross-sectional area of the
filling pipes. However, pump capacity and pressure
head are to be considered in sizing air and overflow
pipes.
C10.A.3.3 Sounding pipes
Sounding pipes are to be provided for tanks, coffer-
dams and void spaces and bilge wells in spaces which
are not accessible at all times. As far as possible,
sounding pipes are to be laid straight and are to ex-
tend as near as possible to the bottom of the tank
close to the pump suction.
Sounding pipes may not be used as filling pipes.
Where tanks are fitted with remote level indicators
approved by GL, provision of sounding pipes may be
dispensed with.
Sounding pipes which terminate below the datum are
to be fitted with self-closing shutoff devices. Such
sounding pipes are permissible only in spaces which
are accessible at all times. All other sounding pipes
are to be extended to the open deck. Sounding pipe
openings are always to be accessible and fitted with
watertight closing devices.
Sounding pipes for tanks which contain flammable
liquids are to extend to the open deck, or comply with
the requirements of Art. 7.5 of Section 7 and
10.2.4.7.
Sounding pipes are to have a nominal inside diameter
of at least 32 mm.
C10.A.4 Drinking Water Systems
Note
Any national rules are to be observed.
Drinking water systems are to comply with GL’s
Rules.
C10.A.5 Sanitary Systems
C10.A.5.1 General arrangement
Sanitary discharge pipes are to be arranged so that, in
the event of damage, undamaged compartments can-
not be flooded by damaged discharge lines, even if
the craft inclines temporarily.
Where discharge lines from several watertight com-
partments are connected to one tank, the compart-
ments are to be separated from each other by gate or
ball valves at the watertight bulkheads. Valves shall
be capable of being closed by remote control from
the craft operating compartment or another space
above the datum. An indicator for the closed position
is to be provided among the controls.
The minimum wall thicknesses of sanitary discharge
pipes are to be determined in accordance with Table
I - Part 3
GL 2012
C10.5 and Table C10.10. Penetrations of pipes of
smaller thickness, pipes of special types and plastic
pipes through bulkheads or decks of type A fire in-
tegrity require Society approval.
Overboard discharges are to be fitted with means of
preventing ingress of water from the sea. The Load
Line Convention (LLC) as amended is to be applied
analogously.
C10.A.5.2 Sewage tanks and sewage treatment
systems
Sewage tanks are to be fitted with air pipes leading to
the open deck above the datum.
Sewage tanks are to be fitted with a filling connec-
tion, a connection for flushing the tank and a level
alarm. Existing overflows to the bilge or openings for
adding of chemicals are considered as internal open-
ings.
The discharge lines of sewage tanks below the datum
are to be fitted with a non-return valve and a gate
valve. The gate valve is to be fitted directly at the
craft's shell.
A single screw-down non-return valve may be used
instead of the gate and non-return valves.
The second means of reverse-flow protection may be
a pipe loop with an overflow height which remains
above the water level in the worst anticipated damage
condition. The pipe loop is to be fitted with an auto-
matic ventilation device located 45° below the crest
of the loop.
Ballast and bilge pumps may not be used for empty-
ing sewage tanks.
C10.A.6 Hydraulic Systems for Hatch Covers,
Shell Closing Appliances, Watertight
Doors and Hoists
C10.A.6.1 General
Cylinders are preferably to be made of steel, cast
steel or nodular cast iron (with a predominantly fer-
ritic matrix).
For cylinders, where PB ⋅ Δi > 2000, materials are to
be tested in accordance with GL’s Rules (Di being
the inside diameter [mm]).
Testing of materials by GL may be dispensed with in
the case of cylinders for secondary applications,
provided that evidence in the form of a works test
certificate (e.g. to EN 10 204 - 2.3) is supplied.
For testing the materials of hydraulic accumulators,
see Section 9.
C10.A.6.2 Hydraulic operating equipment for
hatch covers
C10.A.6.2.1 Design and construction
Hydraulic operating equipment for hatch covers may
be served either by a common power station for all
I - Part 3 Section 10 Auxiliary Systems
GL 2012
hatch covers or by several power stations individually
assigned to a single hatch cover. Where a common
power station is used, at least two pump units are to
be fitted. Where the systems are supplied individu-
ally, changeover valves or fittings are required so that
operation can be maintained if one pump unit fails.
Movement of hatch covers may not be initiated by
starting of the pumps. Special control stations are to
be provided to control the opening and closing of
hatch covers. Controls are to be so designed that, as
soon as they are released, movement of the hatch
covers stops immediately.
Hatches are normally to be visible from control sta-
tions. If, in exceptional cases, this is impossible,
opening and closing of the hatches are to be signalled
by an audible alarm. In addition, the control stations
are then to be equipped with indicators to monitor
movements of the hatch covers.
At control stations, the controls governing opening
and closing operations are to be appropriately
marked.
Suitable equipment is to be fitted in, or immediately
adjacent to, each power unit (cylinder or similar)
used to operate hatch covers, to enable the hatches to
be closed slowly in the event of a power failure (e.g.
due to a pipe rupture).
Hatch covers are to be fitted with devices which
prevent them from moving into their end positions at
excessive speed. Such devices are not to cause the
power unit to be switched off.
C10.A.6.2.2 Pipes
Pipe dimensions are to be calculated according to
GL’s Rules.
Piping systems are to be fitted with filters to clean the
hydraulic fluid.
Equipment is to be provided to enable the hydraulic
systems to be vented.
The accumulator space of the hydraulic accumulator
is to have permanent access to the relief valve of the
connected system. The gas chamber of the accumula-
tor may be filled only with inert gases. Gas and oper-
ating media are to be separated by accumulator bags,
diaphragms or similar devices.
Connection between the hydraulic systems used for
hatch cover operation and other hydraulic systems is
permitted only at the discretion of GL.
Tanks forming part of the hydraulic system are to be
fitted with oil-level indicators.
C10.A.6.2.3 Emergency operation
Devices shall be fitted that are independent of the
main system and which enable hatch covers to be
opened and closed in the event of failure of the main
system. Such devices may, for example, take the
form of loose rings enabling hatch covers to be
moved by cargo winches, warping winches etc.
Chapter 1
Page 10–19
C10.A.6.3 Hydraulically operated closing appli-
ances in the craft's shell
C10.A.6.3.1 Scope
The following requirements apply to the power
equipment of hydraulically operated closing appli-
ances in the craft's shell, such as shell and landing
doors which are not normally operated while at sea.
C10.A.6.3.2 Design and construction
The movement of doors and other closing devices in
the shell may not be initiated by starting of the pumps
at the power station.
Local control, inaccessible to unauthorized persons,
is to be provided for every closing appliance in the
craft's shell. As soon as the controls (push-buttons,
levers or similar) are released, movement of the ap-
pliance is to be stopped immediately.
Closing appliances in the craft's shell are normally to
be visible from control stations. If the movement
cannot be observed, audible alarms are to be fitted. In
addition, control stations are to be equipped with
indicators enabling the movement to be monitored.
Closing appliances in the craft's shell are to be fitted
with devices which prevent them from moving into
their end positions at excessive speed. Such devices
are not to cause the power unit to be switched off.
As far as necessary, mechanical means are to be
provided to lock closing appliances in the open posi-
tion.
Every power unit driving horizontally hinged or ver-
tically operated closing appliances is to be fitted with
throttle valves or similar devices, to prevent sudden
dropping of the closing appliance.
Driving power shall be shared between at least two
mutually independent pump units.
For pipes see C10.A.6.2.2.
C10.A.6.4 Hydraulic operating systems for water-
tight doors
Requirements concerning these items are given in
Section 2.
C10.A.6.5 Hoists
C10.A.6.5.1 Scope
For the purposes of these requirements, hoists include
hydraulically operated appliances such as wheelhouse
hoists, lifts and similar equipment.
C10.A.6.5.2 Design and construction
Hoists may be operated either by a combined power
station or by individual power stations.
In the case of a combined power supply, with hydrau-
lic drive pipes connected to other hydraulic systems,
a second pump unit is to be fitted.
Chapter 1 Section 10 Auxiliary Systems
Page 10–20
The movement of hoists is not to be initiated merely
by starting the pumps. The movement is to be con-
trolled from special operating stations. Controls are to
be so arranged that, as soon as they are released, the
movement of the hoist stops immediately.
Local controls, inaccessible to unauthorized persons,
are to be fitted. The movement of hoists is normally
to be visible from the operating stations. If the
movement cannot be observed, audible and/or visual
warning devices are to be fitted. In addition, operat-
ing stations are to be equipped with indicators to
monitor the movement of the hoist.
Devices are to be fitted which prevent the hoist from
reaching its end position at excessive speed. Such
devices are not to cause the power unit to be switched
off. As far as necessary, mechanical means are to be
provided to lock the hoist in its end positions.
Suitable equipment is to be fitted in, or immediately
adjacent to, each power unit used to operate hoists to
enable them to be lowered slowly if the power unit
fails or a pipe ruptures.
For pipes see C10.A.6.2.2.
C10.A.6.6 Tests at the manufacturer's works
C10.A.6.6.1 Testing of power units
Power units are to undergo testing on a test bed. Fac-
tory test certificates for this testing are to be submit-
ted at final inspection of the hydraulic system.
C10.A.6.6.2 Pressure and tightness tests
Pressure components are to undergo a pressure test at
test pressure PP = 1,5 ⋅ PR.
For the definitions of the PP and PR see C10.1.5.3
and C10.1.5.4. However, for maximum working
pressures above 20 MPa, the test pressure need not
exceed PR + 10 MPa.
For pressure testing of pipes, their valves and fittings,
see C10.1.7.
Tightness tests are to be performed on components
for which this is appropriate.
C10.A.6.6.3 Function tests
Watertight doors are to be subjected to a functional
test with an adverse list of 15°.
C10.A.6.6.4 Shipboard trials
After installation, the equipment is to undergo an
operational test.
Operational testing of watertight doors is to include
the emergency operating system and measurement of
closing times.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
Part B - Requirements for Passenger Craft
10.9 Bilge Pumping and Drainage Systems
10.9.1 For Category B craft at least three and for
Category A craft at least two power bilge pumps
shall be fitted connected to the bilge main, one of
which may be driven by the propulsion machinery.
Alternatively, the arrangement may be in accordance
with the requirements of 10.3.14.
10.9.2 The arrangements shall be such that at least
one power bilge pump shall be available for use in all
flooding conditions which the craft is required to
withstand as follows:
.1 one of the required bilge pumps shall be an
emergency pump of a reliable submersible
type having an emergency source of power; or
.2 the bilge pumps and their sources of power
shall be so distributed throughout the length
of the craft that at least one pump in an un-
damaged compartment will be available.
C10.9.2 The “emergency source” is to be located
above the datum.
10.9.3 On multihull craft, each hull shall be pro-
vided with at least two bilge pumps.
10.9.4 Distribution boxes, cocks and valves in con-
nection with the bilge pumping system shall be so
arranged that, in the event of flooding, one of the
bilge pumps may be operative in any compartment. In
addition, damage to a pump or its pipe connecting to
the bilge main shall not put the bilge system out of
action. When, in addition to the main bilge pumping
system, an emergency bilge pumping system is pro-
vided, it shall be independent of the main system and
so arranged that a pump is capable of operating in
any compartment under flooding conditions as speci-
fied in 10.3.3. In that case only the valves necessary
for the operation of the emergency system need be
capable of being operated from above the datum.
10.9.5 All cocks and valves referred to in 10.9.4
which can be operated from above the datum shall
have their controls at their place of operation clearly
marked and shall be provided with means to indicate
whether they are open or closed.
C10.9.5 The control station for remote-controlled
valves shall be located in the operating compartment
as far as possible.
C10.B.1 Operating Systems for Watertight Doors
Requirements concerning these items are given in
Section 2.
I - Part 3 Section 10 Auxiliary Systems
GL 2012
Part C - Requirements for Cargo Craft
10.10 Bilge Pumping Systems
10.10.1 At least two power pumps connected to the
main bilge system shall be provided, one of which
may be driven by the propulsion machinery. If the
Administration is satisfied that the safety of the craft
is not impaired, bilge pumping arrangements may be
dispensed with in particular compartments. Alterna-
tively, the arrangement may be in accordance with
the requirements of 10.3.14.
Chapter 1
Page 10–21
10.10.2 On multihull craft each hull shall be pro-
vided with at least two power pumps, unless a bilge
pump in one hull is capable of pumping bilge in the
other hull. At least one pump in each hull shall be an
independent power pump.
C10.C.1 Hydraulic Operating Systems for Water-
tight Doors
Requirements concerning these items are given in
Section 2.
I - Part 3 Section 11 Remote Control, Alarm and Safety Systems
GL 2012
Section 11
Remote Control, Alarm and Safety Systems
C11.0 Documents to be submitted
C11.0.1 The following drawings and documents are to
be submitted. To facilitate a smooth and efficient
approval process they shall be submitted electronically
via GLOBE 1. In specific cases and following prior
agreement with GL they can also be submitted in
paper form in triplicate.
.1 Layout diagrams showing the location of
individual components, input and output devices,
control cabinets and interconnection lines between the
components;
.2 Wiring and piping diagrams including details
of their material and connecting units;
.3 Plans and specification showing the working
principles of the system with comprehensive descrip-
tion;
.4 List of instruments stating name of manufac-
turers, types, working ranges, set points and applica-
tion with regard to their environmental conditions;
.5 Plans of control and monitoring panels with
details on their instrumentation and control devices;
.6 List of operating values of machinery and
limits for alarm and safety action threshold;
.7 Diagrams of electric and non-electric power
supply;
.8 System analysis of programmable electronic
systems including hardware configuration, algorithms
and - on special request - data structure and storage
allocations;
FMEA documentation as required in Annex 4 where
manual intervention for averting of a danger is not
possible;
.9 Testing programmes of the equipment in the
manufacturer's works and on dock and sea trial.
C11.0.2 Further documentation may be required if
deemed necessary by GL.
11.1 Definitions
11.1.1 "Remote control systems" comprise all
equipment necessary to operate units from a control
position where the operator cannot directly observe
the effect of his actions.
––––––––––––––
1 Detailed information about the secured GL system GLOBE
can be found on GL’s website www.gl-group.com/globe.
Chapter 1
Page 11–1
11.1.2 "Back-up control systems" comprise all
equipment necessary to maintain control of essential
functions required for the craft's safe operation when
the main control systems have failed or malfunctioned.
11.2 General
11.2.1 Failure of any remote or automatic control
systems shall initiate an audible and visual alarm and
shall not prevent normal manual control.
11.2.2 Manoeuvring and emergency controls shall
permit the operating crew to perform the duties for
which they are responsible in correct manner without
difficulty, fatigue or excessive concentration
C11.2.2 The operation of the remote control from the
craft's operation station is to be so designed and con-
structed that it does under normal conditions not re-
quire the operator's particular attention of the details
of the machinery.
The remote control systems consisting of steel cable
links or equivalent are to be submitted to GL for spe-
cial consideration.
The equipment, to which this Section applies, shall be
of state of the art design and construction and shall
have proved their reliability in marine service. If evi-
dence on the required reliability cannot be given by
relevant documentation, the equipment has to be sub-
jected to an approval according to the Rules of GL.
11.2.3 Where control of propulsion or manoeuvring
is provided at stations adjacent to but outside the
operating compartment, the transfer of control shall
only be effected from the station which takes charge of
control. Two-way voice communication shall be pro-
vided between all stations from which control func-
tions may be exercised and between each such station
and the look-out position. Failure of the operating
control system or of transfer of control shall bring the
craft to low speed without hazarding passengers or
the craft
C11.2.3 Under normal conditions, the transfer of the
control function between such control positions may
only be effected if the respective control devices are in
the same position or if equivalent means are provided
for smooth transfer of command without significant
change in the craft’s speed and direction of thrust.
11.2.4 For category B and cargo craft, remote con-
trol systems for propulsion machinery and directional
control shall be equipped with back-up systems con-
trollable from the operating compartment. For cargo
craft, instead of a back-up system described above, a
Chapter 1 Section 11 Remote Control, Alarm and Safety Systems
Page 11–2
back-up system controllable from an engine control
space such as an engine control room outside the
operating compartment, is acceptable.
C11.2.4 If provided so, the communication of ma-
chinery propulsion orders shall be effected by a tele-
graph system or equivalent means, which imply an
optical indication at the such control positions of the
machinery orders received from the craft's operating
station.
C11.2.5 Under all sailing conditions (including ma-
noeuvring), the propulsion machinery, including pro-
pellers, jets, flaps or other means which affect the
speed and direction of thrust of all category high speed
craft, is to be controllable from the craft's operating
station.
C11.2.6 In principle the remote control is to be per-
formed by a single control device for each independ-
ent propulsion unit with automatic performance of all
associated services including, where necessary, means
of preventing overload and prolonged running in criti-
cal speed ranges of the propulsion unit.
In cases where multiple propulsion units are designed
to operate simultaneously, the command on their con-
trols shall be designed for the possibility of being
connected in one control device, in order to select
individual or common control of the units, as neces-
sary for the appropriate mode of operation.
Movement of the control device shall take place in the
same direction as the desired motion of the ship.
C11.2.7 Each control position is to be provided with
means to indicate which of them is in control.
At any control position, from which control of craft's
manoeuvring is exercised, the operating effects caused
by control inputs to the propulsion unit shall continu-
ously be indicated.
C11.2.8 After restoration of normal conditions follow-
ing an automatic shut-down, the machinery shall not
start inadvertently before the control device has been
reset to stop. Following an automatic slow-down - if
provided – the propulsion of the craft shall not accel-
erate inadvertently before the control device has been
reset to the actual step of speed, to which the power of
the propulsion had been decreased.
Alternatively, other arrangements may be provided for
the operator to consciously admit starting or accelera-
tion of propulsion machinery.
Remote starting of a propulsion unit is to be automati-
cally inhibited if conditions exist which may hazard
the machinery, e.g. turning gear engaged, clutch en-
gaged, shut-down activated, etc.
C11.2.9 The power for the control system is to be
supplied from the same source which supplies the
essential services for the propulsion units. As an alter-
native, the power for the control system may be sup-
plied from other sources of power with backing-up
facilities, which are sufficient for at least 15 minutes
I - Part 3
GL 2012
operation of the control system, in case of failure in its
normal supply.
In case of category B craft, the control system of each
propulsion unit shall have its individual source of
power.
11.3 Emergency Controls
11.3.1 In all craft, the station or stations in the op-
erating compartment from which control of craft ma-
noeuvring and/or of its main machinery is exercised
shall be provided, within easy reach of the crew mem-
ber at that station, with controls for use in an emer-
gency to:
.1 activate fixed fire-extinguishing systems;
.2 close ventilation openings and stop ventilating
machinery supplying spaces covered by fixed
fire-extinguishing systems, if not incorporated
in .1;
.3 shut off fuel supplies to machinery in main and
auxiliary machinery spaces;.
.4 disconnect all electrical power sources from
the normal power distribution system (the op-
erating control shall be guarded to reduce the
risk of inadvertent or careless operation); and
.5 stop main engine(s) and auxiliary machinery.
C11.3.1 Unless it is considered impracticable, a single
failure of the emergency controls shall not have an
inadvertent effect on the system which it serves. In
case of such a failure, an alarm shall be given in the
craft's operating compartment.
The stopping device for main engine(s) is to be inde-
pendent from the remote control system at the craft's
operating station.
11.3.2 Where control of propulsion and manoeu-
vring is provided at stations outside the operating
compartment, such stations shall have direct commu-
nication with the operating compartment which shall
be a continuously manned control station.
11.3.3 In addition, for category B craft control of
propulsion and manoeuvring as well as emergency
functions referred to in 11.3.1 shall be provided at one
or more stations outside the operating compartment.
Such stations shall have direct communication with
the operating compartment which shall be a continu-
ously manned control station.
11.4 Alarm System
11.4.1 Alarm systems shall be provided which an-
nounce at the craft's control position, by visual and
audible means, malfunctions or unsafe conditions.
Alarms shall be maintained until they are accepted
and the visual indications of individual alarms shall
remain until the fault has been corrected, when the
alarm shall automatically reset to the normal operat-
ing condition. If an alarm has been accepted and a
I - Part 3 Section 11 Remote Control, Alarm and Safety Systems Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 11–3

second fault occurs before the first is rectified, the C11.4.1.2 With reference to 11.4.1.2.1 in particular,
audible and visual alarms shall operate again. Alarm the machinery is to be monitored in the scope as listed
systems shall incorporate a test facility. in Table C11.4.1.2.1 to Table C11.4.1.2.6.
11.4.1.1 Emergency alarms giving indication of condi- 11.4.1.3 All warnings required by 11.4.1.1 and
tions requiring immediate action shall be distinctive 11.4.1.2 shall be provided at all stations at which
and in full view of crew members in the operating control functions may be exercised.
compartment, and shall be provided for the following:
11.4.2 The alarm system shall meet appropriate
.1 activation of a fire-detection system; constructional and operational requirements for re-
.2 total loss of normal electrical supply; quired alarms. 2
.3 overspeed of main engines; 11.4.3 Equipment monitoring the passenger, cargo
.4 thermal runaway of any permanently installed and machinery spaces for fire and flooding shall, so
nickel-cadmium battery. far as is practicable, form an integrated sub-centre
incorporating monitoring and activation control for
C11.4.1.1 In addition to the alarms requested under all emergency situations. This sub-centre may require
11.4.1.1, the following alarms, giving indication that feedback instrumentation to indicate that actions initi-
is distinctive and in full view of crew members in the ated have been fully implemented.
operating compartment, are to be provided:
Table 11.4.1.2.1 Propulsion diesel engines
.1 fire (alarm to summon the crew);
Parameter Alarm level Remark
.2 general emergency alarm (alarm to summon
crew and passengers to muster stations); Lubricating oil pressure low
Lubricating oil
.3 fire-extinguishing medium imminent release; high
temperature inlet
.4 watertight doors imminent closing, compart- Differential pressure
ment flooding. across lubricating oil high
filter
11.4.1.2 Alarms with a visual display distinct from Pressure or flow of
low
that of alarms referred to in 11.4.1.1 shall indicate cooling water
conditions requiring action to prevent degradation to Temperature of cooling
an unsafe condition. These shall be provided for at high
water outlet
least the following: Level in cooling water
low
.1 exceeding the limiting value of any craft, ma- expansion tank
chinery or system parameter other than engine Deviation of each high if cylinder power
overspeed; cylinder from average above 130 kW
of exhaust gas
.2 failure of normal power supply to powered temperature, or low + high
directional or trim control devices; Exhaust gas
.3 operation of any automatic bilge pump; temperature of each
cylinder
.4 detection of bilge water in each watertight Exhaust gas if cylinder not
compartment below the design waterline; temperature after monitored
turbocharger high individually and
.5 failure of compass system;
if cylinder power
.6 low level of a fuel tank contents; below 130 kW
Pressure of fuel oil to if supplied by
.7 fuel oil tank overflow; low
engine electrical pumps
.8 extinction of side, masthead or stern navigation Temperature of fuel oil
lights; low + high if heated
to engine
.9 low level of contents of any fluid reservoir the Pressure of control air low
contents of which are essential for normal craft Pressure of starting air low
operation; Safety system failure
.10 failure of any connected electrical power
source;
.11 failure of any ventilation fan installed for venti-
lating spaces in which inflammable vapours
may accumulate; and
––––––––––––––
.12 diesel engine fuel line failure as required by 2 Refer to the Code on Alarms and Indicators, 1995, adopted by
9.4.2. the Organization by resolution A.830(19).
Chapter 1 Section 11 Remote Control, Alarm and Safety Systems I - Part 3
Page 11–4 GL 2012

C11.4.4 On category B craft, alarm systems including − on failure of operational units

their power supply have to be separate for each inde-
pendent propulsion unit and its essential auxiliaries. − to preserve stored energy resources (e.g. com-
pressed air)
11.5 Safety System
− on operational demand, if auxiliary machinery are
Where arrangements are fitted for overriding any operated in staggered service.
automatic shutdown system for the main propulsion
machinery in accordance with 9.2.2, they shall be Table C11.4.1.2.2 Propulsion gas turbines
such as to preclude inadvertent operation. When a
shutdown system is activated, an audible and visual Parameter Alarm level Remark
alarm shall be given at the control station and means Lubricating oil pressure low
shall be provided to override the automatic shutdown
Lubricating oil temperature high
except in cases where there is a risk of complete
breakdown or explosion. Differential pressure across
high
lubricating oil filter
C11.5.1 In case of need, the bridge operator may have Bearing temperature high
a possibility to cancel the safety devices which could Exhaust gas temperature
have caused the propelling machinery to stop (except high
outlet
for the overspeed one). Control of this device is to be
such as to preclude inadvertent operation; the indica- Vibrations high
tion “safety devices off” shall be clearly visible. Axial displacement high
Combustion/ignition failure
C11.5.2 After restoration of normal conditions follow-
ing a shut-down, resetting of the safety system shall be Hydraulic service oil
low
possible at the craft's operating station and at other pressure
positions from which the control can be exercised. Safety system failure

C11.5.3 Safety systems are to be designed as far as C11.6.2 The threshold for activation of the stand-by
practicable to be independent of the alarm and control system shall be such that normal operation is restored
system and their power supply, such that a failure or before the safety system is activated.
malfunction in these systems will not prevent the
safety system from operating. C11.6.3 The changeover to a stand-by unit due to a
fault is to be signalled visually and audibly. However,
an alarm is not to be tripped in the case of machinery
Safety systems including their power supply shall be
installations with auxiliary machines driven mechani-
separate for each propulsion unit.
cally from the propulsion plant where the stand-by
machines start up automatically in the lower speed
C11.5.4 Electrical circuits of safety systems for pro- range.
pulsion machinery and essential systems, which in
case of their failure have sudden effect on the avail- C11.6.4 Sets which have suffered a malfunction and
ability of the propulsion and directional control of the have shut down automatically may only be provided
craft, shall be such that a single failure in the system for restart after manual reset independent of the alarm
does not result, as far as practicable, in a loss of pro- acknowledgement.
pulsion and directional control. The electrical circuits
of safety systems for other machinery, which have no Table C11.4.1.2.3 Transmission, shaft gears
sudden effect on the availability of the propulsion and
steering, may be designed as suitable for their purpose Parameter Alarm level Remark
with the most effective protection of the machinery.
Lubricating oil pressure to
low
gears
C11.5.5 The power for the safety system shall be
supplied from the main source of electrical power. Lubricating oil temperature of
Provisions are to be made for supplying power unin- high
gears with sliding bears
terrupted to the safety system for at least 15 minutes
following a failure of the ship's main source of electri- Servo oil pressure of gears and
cal power. The electric and pneumatic supplies are to low
transmissions
be monitored.
Thrust bearing temperature high
C11.6 Stand-by systems
C11.6.1 Where stand-by units are required, they shall Stern tube temperature high
start up automatically:
I - Part 3 Section 11 Remote Control, Alarm and Safety Systems Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 11–5

Table C11.4.1.2.4 Main diesel generator sets Table 11.4.1.2.6 Miscellaneous

Parameter Alarm level Remark Parameter Alarm level Remark

Lubricating oil pressure low Remote control of
failure
propulsion
Pressure or flow of cooling
low Safety system of each
water tripped
machinery
Temperature of cooling water
high Override of safety
outlet activated
system
Starting power capacity low
Power of alarm
Voltage low failure
system
Frequency low Electrical non-
tripped
essential consumers
Overspeed tripped
Insulation resistance low
Safety system Failure
Emergency controls failure
Fire alarm system failure
Stand-by function of
start
Table C11.4.1.2.5 Auxiliary boilers auxiliaries
Machinery space 2 sensors at
Parameter Alarm level Remark
bilge level least for each
high
Water level low machinery
space
Stream pressure low + high
Fuel oil service tank if heated above
Flame failure shut down high
temperature flash-point
Safety system failure Purifier failure
I - Part 3 Section 12 Electrical Installations
GL 2012
Section 12
Electrical Installations
Part A – General
C12.0 Documents to be submitted
C12.0.1 The following drawings and documents are
to be submitted. To facilitate a smooth and efficient
approval process they shall be submitted electroni-
cally via GLOBE 1. In specific cases and following
prior agreement with GL they can also be submitted
in paper form in triplicate.
.1 Arrangement of essential electric equipment
.2 Single line general electric diagram of the
installation (including emergency installation)
.3 Diagram of power supplies or converters
.4 Electrical load analysis
.5 Calculation of short-circuit currents for each
installation in which the sum of rated power of the
energy sources which may be connected contempora-
neously to the network is greater than 500 kVA (kW),
and in each installation where selective protective
devices are foreseen
.6 List of circuits including, for each supply and
distribution circuit, data concerning the nominal cur-
rent, the cable type, length and cross-section, nominal
and setting values of the protective and control de-
vices
.7 Single line and functional diagram of the
main switchboard
.8 Single line and functional diagram of the
emergency switchboard
.9 Diagram of the most important section
boards
.10 Diagram of the supply, monitoring and con-
trol systems of the steering gear
.11 Diagram of the supply, monitoring and con-
trol systems of the propulsion plant
.12 Diagram of the general alarm system
.13 Diagram of the navigation-light switchboard
.14 Electrical diagram of the gas fire extinguish-
ing system
––––––––––––––
1 Detailed information about the secured GL system GLOBE
can be found on GL’s website www.gl-group.com/globe.
Chapter 1
Page 12–1
.15 Electrical diagram of the sprinkler fire extin-
guishing system
.16 Electrical diagram of the firedoor control and
monitoring
.17 Diagram of the emergency stop systems
.18 Diagram of the public address system or
other inter-communication systems.
C12.0.2 In addition to the documentation requested
above, the following is also required:
.1 For passenger craft:
(a) Single line diagram of the main cable runs show-
ing cables for duplicated equipment and the loca-
tion of the main distribution and emergency
switchboards
(b) Diagrams of switchboards for control, indication
and alarm of watertight doors.
.2 For passenger and cargo craft with spaces
intended for the carriage of motor vehicles with fuel
in their tanks and/or spaces intended for the carriage
of dangerous goods:
(a) Plan of dangerous spaces giving details of types
of cables and safety characteristics of the equip-
ment installed therein
(b) Diagrams of control and monitoring systems for
doors, closed-circuit television or monitoring sys-
tems for flooding on passenger craft with ro-ro
spaces or special category spaces
(c) Diagrams of supplementary emergency lighting
systems for the craft in the previous item (b).
Further documentation may be required, if deemed
necessary by GL.
12.1 General
12.1.1 Electrical installations 2 shall be such that:
.1 all electrical auxiliary services necessary for
maintaining the craft in normal operation and
habitable conditions will be ensured without
recourse to the emergency source of electrical
power;
––––––––––––––
2 Refer to the recommendations published by the International
Electrotechnical Commission and, in particular, Publication
60092 - Electrical Installations in Ships.
Chapter 1 Section 12 Electrical Installations
Page 12–2
.2 electrical services essential for safety will be
ensured under various emergency conditions;
and
.3 the safety of passengers, crew and craft from
electrical hazards will be ensured.
The FMEA shall include the electrical system, taking
into account the effects of electrical failure on the
systems being supplied. In cases where faults can
occur without being detected during routine checks on
the installations, the analysis shall take into account
the possibility of faults occurring simultaneously or
consecutively.
12.1.2 The electrical system shall be designed and
installed so that the probability of the craft being at
risk of failure of a service is extremely remote.
12.1.3 Where loss of particular essential service
would cause serious risk to the craft, the service shall
be fed by at least two independent circuits fed in such
a way that no single failure in the electrical supply or
distribution systems would affect both supplies.
12.1.4 The securing arrangements for heavy items,
i.e. accumulator batteries, shall, as far as practicable,
prevent excessive movement during the accelerations
due to grounding or collision.
12.1.5 Precautions shall be taken to minimise risk
of supplies to essential and emergency services being
interrupted by the inadvertent or accidental opening
of switches or circuit-breakers.
C12.1.6 Ambient conditions for electrical equipment
see Section 9, C9.1.16
12.2 Main Source of Electrical Power
12.2.1 A main source of electrical power of suffi-
cient capacity to supply all those services mentioned
in 12.1.1 shall be provided. The main source of elec-
trical power shall consist of at least two generating
sets.
C12.2.1 Electrical propulsion
For electrically propelled craft with two or more con-
stant-voltage propulsion generating sets, the craft's
service electric power may be derived from this
source and additional service generators need not be
fitted, provided that effective propulsion be main-
tained with one propulsion generator out of service.
12.2.2 The capacity of these generating sets shall be
such that, in the event of any one generating set being
stopped or failing, it will still be possible to supply
those services necessary to provide the normal opera-
tional conditions of propulsion and safety. Minimum
comfortable conditions of habitability shall also be
ensured which include at least adequate services for
cooking, heating, domestic refrigeration, mechanical
ventilation, and sanitary and fresh water.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
C12.2.2 Shaft-driven generators
One of the required generators may be a generator
driven by a main propulsion unit (shaft generator)
intended to operate at constant speed, (e.g. a system
where craft speed and direction are controlled only by
varying propeller pitch).
Shaft generator installations which do not comply
with this criterion may be fitted as additional
source(s) of power provided that:
.1 On loss of power from the shaft generator(s),
a stand-by generating set starts up automatically
.2 The capacity of the stand-by set is adequate
for the loads necessary for craft propulsion and safety
.3 These services are restored as quickly as
practicable
12.2.3 The arrangements of the craft's main source
of electrical power shall be such that the services
referred to in 12.1.1.1 can be maintained regardless
of the speed and direction of the propulsion machin-
ery or shafting.
C12.2.3
(a) In addition to the normal operational conditions of
propulsion and safety as per 12.2.2, steering con-
ditions are also to be provided.
(b) Those services necessary to provide normal opera-
tional conditions of propulsion, steering and safety
do not include services such as:
(1) Thrusters not forming part of the main propulsion
system
(2) Windlass
(3) Moorings
(4) Cargo handling gear
(5) Cargo pumps
(6) Air conditioning.
12.2.4 In addition, the generating sets shall be such
as to ensure that, with any one generator or its pri-
mary source of power out of operation, the remaining
generating set shall be capable of providing the elec-
trical services necessary to start the main propulsion
plant from dead craft condition. The emergency
source of electrical power may be used for the pur-
pose of starting from a dead craft condition if its
capability either alone or combined with that of any
other source of electrical power is sufficient to pro-
vide at the same time those services required to be
provided by 12.7.3.1 to 12.7.3.3 or 12.7.4.1 to
12.7.4.4 or 12.8.2.1 to 12.8.2.4.1, as appropriate.
12.2.5 Where transformers constitute an essential
part of the electrical supply system required by this
section, the system shall be so arranged as to ensure
the same continuity of supply as is stated in 12.2.
I - Part 3 Section 12 Electrical Installations Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 12–3

C12.2.5 This requirement also applies to static con-
verters or charging units.
The following requirement also applies to these trans-
formers.
The number, capacity and arrangement of power
transformers supplying auxiliary electrical systems
are to be such that, with any one transformer not in
operation, the remaining transformer(s) is (are) suffi-
cient to ensure the safe operation of those services
necessary to provide normal operational conditions of
propulsion and safety. Minimum comfortable condi-
tions of habitability are also to be ensured, including
at least adequate services for cooking, heating, do-
mestic refrigeration, mechanical ventilation, sanitary
and fresh water.
Each transformer required is to be located as a sepa-
rate unit, with a separate enclosure or equivalent ar-
rangement, and is to be served by separate circuits on
the primary and secondary sides. Each primary circuit
is to be provided with switchgear and protective de-
vices in each phase.
Each of the secondary circuits is to be provided with a
multipole isolating switch.
See the examples given in Figure C12.2.5.1.
Transformers supplying a bow thruster are excluded.
12.2.6 A main electric lighting system which shall
provide illumination throughout those parts of the
craft normally accessible to and used by passengers
and crew shall be supplied from the main source of
electrical power.
12.2.7 The arrangement of the main electric lighting
system shall be such that a fire or other casualty in
spaces containing the emergency source of electrical
power, associated transforming equipment, if any, the
emergency switchboard and the emergency lighting
switchboard will not render inoperative the main
electric lighting systems required by 12.2.6.
12.2.8 The main switchboard shall be so placed
relative to one main generating station that, as far as
practicable, the integrity of the normal electrical
supply may be affected only by a fire or other casualty
in one space. An environmental enclosure for the
main switchboard, such as may be provided by the
machinery control room situated within the main
boundaries of the space, shall not be considered as
separating the switchboards from the generators.
C12.2.8 By “main generating station” is understood
one or more generating set(s).
For the purpose of classification, GL adds the follow-
ing interpretation of the above requirement:
“The main switchboard and generating sets are, in
general, to be located in the same main fire zone (if
any) or in the same machinery compartment. How-
ever, the main switchboard may be installed inside a
machinery control room, provided that such a room be
contained within the main boundaries of the engine
room”.

Three-phase transformers Single-phase transformers

R R
S S
T T

(a) (a) enclosure or seperation (a) (a) (a)

(b) (b) (b) (b) (b)

R R
S S
T T

(a) = switchgear and protective devices (b) = multiple isolation switch

Fig. C12.2.5.1
Chapter 1 Section 12 Electrical Installations
Page 12–4
12.2.9 The main busbars shall be subdivided into at
least two parts which shall be connected by a circuit-
breaker or other approved means. So far as is practi-
cable, the connection of generating sets and any
other duplicated equipment shall be equally divided
between the parts. For category B craft, each part of
the main busbars with its associated generators shall
be arranged in separate compartments.
12.3 Emergency Source of Electrical Power
12.3.1 A self-contained emergency source of elec-
trical power shall be provided.
12.3.2 The emergency source of electrical power,
associated transforming equipment, if any, transi-
tional source of emergency electrical power, emer-
gency switchboard and emergency lighting
switchboard shall be located above the waterline in
the final condition of damage as referred to in Sec-
tion 2, operable in that condition and readily acces-
sible.
12.3.3 The location of the emergency source of
electrical power and associated transforming equip-
ment, if any, the transitional source of emergency
power, the emergency switchboard and the emer-
gency electrical lighting switchboards in relation to
the main source of electrical power, associated trans-
forming equipment, if any, and the main switchboard
shall be such as to ensure that a fire or other casualty
in spaces containing the main source of electrical
power, associated transforming equipment, if any,
and the main switchboard or in any machinery space
will not interfere with the supply, control, and distri-
bution of emergency electrical power. As far as prac-
ticable, the space containing the emergency source of
electrical power, associated transforming equipment,
if any, the transitional source of emergency electrical
power and the emergency switchboard shall not be
contiguous to the boundaries of the main machinery
spaces or those spaces containing the main source of
electrical power, associated transforming equipment,
if any, or the main switchboard.
12.3.4 Provided that suitable measures are taken
for safeguarding independent emergency operation
under all circumstances, the emergency generator, if
provided, may be used exceptionally, and for short
periods, to supply non-emergency circuits.
C12.3.4 “Exceptionally” is understood to cover con-
ditions such as:
(1) blackout,
(2) dead ship situation,
(3) routine use for testing.
12.3.5 Distribution systems shall be so arranged
that the feeders from the main and emergency
sources are separated both vertically and horizon-
tally as widely as practicable.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
12.3.6 The emergency source of electrical power
may be either a generator or an accumulator battery,
which shall comply with the following:
.1 Where the emergency source of electrical
power is a generator, it shall be:
.1.1 driven by a suitable prime mover with an
independent supply of fuel having a flashpoint
which meets the requirements of 7.1.2.2;
.1.2 started automatically upon failure of the elec-
trical supply from the main source of electri-
cal power and shall be automatically con-
nected to the emergency switchboard. Those
services referred to in 12.7.5 or 12.8.3 shall
then be transferred to the emergency generat-
ing set. The automatic starting system and the
characteristic of the prime mover shall be
such as to permit the emergency generator to
carry its full rated load as quickly as is safe
and practicable, subject to a maximum of 45
seconds; and
.1.3 provided with a transitional source of emer-
gency electrical power according to 12.7.5 or
12.8.3.
.2 Where the emergency source of electrical
power is an accumulator battery, it shall be
capable of:
.2.1 carrying the emergency electrical load with-
out recharging while maintaining the voltage
of the battery throughout the discharge period
within 12 % above or below its nominal volt-
age;
.2.2 automatically connecting to the emergency
switchboard in the event of failure of the main
source of electrical power; and
.2.3 immediately supplying at least those services
specified in 12.7.5 or 12.8.3.
C12.3.6 With reference to 12.3.6.1.2, for the purpose
of classification, the time for generator start-up and
loading is not to exceed 15 s.
12.3.7 The emergency switchboard shall be in-
stalled as near as is practicable to the emergency
source of electrical power.
12.3.8 Where the emergency source of electrical
power is a generator, the emergency switchboard
shall be located in the same space unless the opera-
tion of the emergency switchboard would thereby be
impaired.
12.3.9 No accumulator battery fitted in accordance
with this section shall be installed in the same space
as the emergency switchboard. An indicator shall be
mounted in a suitable space at the craft's operating
compartment to indicate when the batteries constitut-
I - Part 3 Section 12 Electrical Installations
GL 2012
ing either the emergency source of electrical power
or the transitional source of emergency electrical
power referred to in 12.3.6.1.3 are being discharged.
12.3.10 The emergency switchboard shall be sup-
plied during normal operation from the main
switchboard by an interconnector feeder which shall
be adequately protected at the main switchboard
against overload and short circuit and which shall be
disconnected automatically at the emergency switch-
board upon failure of the main source of electrical
power. Where the system is arranged for feedback
operation, the interconnector feeder shall also be
protected at the emergency switchboard at least
against short circuit. Failure of the emergency
switchboard, when being used in other than an emer-
gency, shall not put at risk the operation of the craft.
12.3.11 In order to ensure ready availability of the
emergency source of electrical power, arrangements
shall be made, where necessary, to disconnect auto-
matically non-emergency circuits from the emergency
switchboard to ensure that power shall be available
to the emergency circuits.
12.3.12 The emergency generator and its prime
mover and any emergency accumulator battery shall
be so designed and arranged as to ensure that they
will function at full rated power when the craft is
upright and when the craft has a list or trimming
accordance with 9.1.12 including any damage cases
considered in Section 2, or is in any combination of
angles within those limits.
12.3.13 Where accumulator batteries are installed to
supply emergency services, provisions shall be made
to charge them in situ from a reliable on-board sup-
ply. Charging facilities shall be so designed to permit
the supply of services, regardless of whether battery
is on charge or not. Means shall be provided to
minimise the risk of overcharging or overheating the
batteries. Means for efficient air ventilation shall be
provided.
12.4 Starting Arrangements for Emergency
Generating Sets
12.4.1 Emergency generating sets shall be capable
of being readily started in their cold condition at a
temperature of 0 °C. If this is impracticable, or if
lower temperatures are likely to be encountered,
provisions shall be made for heating arrangements to
ensure ready starting of the generating sets.
12.4.2 Each emergency generating set shall be
equipped with starting devices with a stored energy
capability of at least three consecutive starts. The
source of stored energy shall be protected to preclude
critical depletion by the automatic starting system,
unless a second independent means of starting is
provided. A second source of energy shall be pro-
vided for an additional three starts within 30 min,
Chapter 1
Page 12–5
unless manual starting can be demonstrated to be
effective.
12.4.3 The stored energy shall be maintained at all
times, as follows:
.1 electrical and hydraulic starting systems shall
be maintained from the emergency switch-
board;
.2 compressed air starting systems may be main-
tained by the main or auxiliary compressed
air receivers through a suitable nonreturn
valve or by an emergency air compressor
which, if electrically driven, is supplied from
the emergency switchboard;
.3 all of these starting, charging and energy-
storing devices shall be located in the emer-
gency generator space. These devices shall
not be used for any purpose other than the op-
eration of the emergency generating set. This
does not preclude the supply to the air re-
ceiver of the emergency generating set from
the main or auxiliary compresses air system
through the non return valve fitted in the
emergency generator space.
12.5 Steering and Stabilization
12.5.1 Where steering and/or stabilization of a
craft is essentially dependent on one device as with a
single rudder or pylon, which is itself dependent on
the continuous availability of electric power, it shall
be served by at least two independent circuits, one of
which shall be fed either from the emergency source
of electric power or from an independent power
source located in such a position as to be unaffected
by fire or flooding affecting the main source of
power. Failure of either supply shall not cause any
risk to the craft or passengers during switching to the
alterative supply and such switching arrangements
shall meet the requirements in 5.2.5. These circuits
shall be provided with short-circuit protection and an
overload alarm.
12.5.2 Protection against excess current may be
provided, in which case it shall be for not less than
twice the full load current of the motor or circuit so
protected and shall be arranged to accept the appro-
priate starting current with a reasonable margin.
Where three-phase supply is used an alarm shall be
provided in a readily observed position in the craft's
operating compartment that will indicate failure of
any one of the phases.
12.5.3 Where such systems are not essentially de-
pendent on the continuous availability of electric
power but at least one alternative system, not de-
pendent on the electric supply, is installed, then the
electrically powered or controlled system may be fed
by a single circuit protected in accordance with
12.5.2.
Chapter 1 Section 12 Electrical Installations
Page 12–6
12.5.4 The requirements of Sections 5 and 16 for
power supply of the directional control system and
stabilising system of the craft shall be met.
12.6 Precautions Against Shock, Fire and Other
Hazards of Electrical Origin
12.6.1 Exposed metal parts of electrical machines
or equipment which are not intended to be live but
which are liable under fault conditions to become live
shall be earthed unless the machines or equipment
are:
.1 supplied at a voltage not exceeding 50V direct
current or 50V, root-mean-square between
conductors; auto-transformers shall not be
used for the purpose of achieving this voltage;
or
.2 supplied at a voltage not exceeding 250V by
safety isolating transformers supplying only
one consuming device; or
.3 constructed in accordance with the principle
of double insulation.
12.6.1.2 The Administration may require additional
precautions for portable electrical equipment for use
in confined or exceptionally damp spaces where
particular risks due to conductivity may exist.
12.6.1.3 All electrical apparatus shall be constructed
and so installed as not to cause injury when handled
or touched in the normal manner.
12.6.2 Main and emergency switchboards shall be
so arranged as to give easy access, as may be
needed, to apparatus and equipment, without danger
to personnel. The sides and the rear and, where nec-
essary, the front of switchboards shall be suitably
guarded. Exposed live parts having voltages to earth
exceeding a voltage to be specified by the Admini-
stration shall not be installed on the front of such
switchboards. Where necessary, nonconducting mats
or gratings shall be provided at the front and rear of
the switchboard.
C12.6.2 The voltage, mentioned in 12.6.2, specified
by GL is 50 V.
12.6.3 When a distribution system, whether primary
or secondary, for power, heating or lighting, with no
connection to earth is used, a device capable of con-
tinuously monitoring the insulation level to earth and
of giving an audible or visual indication of abnor-
mally low insulation values shall be provided. For
limited secondary distribution systems the Admini-
stration may accept a device for manual checking of
the insulation level.
C12.6.3 For the purpose of classification, the indica-
tion of abnormally low insulation value is required to
be both audible and visual.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
12.6.4 Cables and wiring
12.6.4.1 Except as permitted by the Administration in
exceptional circumstances, all metal sheaths and
armour of cables shall be electrically continuous and
shall be earthed.
C12.6.4.1 With reference to 12.6.4.1, exemptions are
not in principle permitted for the purpose of classifi-
cation.
12.6.4.2 All electric cables and wiring external to
equipment shall be at least of a flame-retardant type
and shall be so installed as not to impair their origi-
nal flame-retarding properties. Where necessary for
particular applications, the Administration may per-
mit the use of special types of cables such as radio-
frequency cables, which do not comply with the fore-
going.
C12.6.4.2 Cables, cores and wires are normally to be
of a type approved by GL, on the basis of IEC stan-
dards, 92.3. series. Use of other cables is subject to
special consideration by tGLand to appropriate and
satisfactory testing.
Where cables are bunched, provisions are to be made
to limit fire propagation. This may comprise by either
of the following methods:
− use of cables successfully tested according to IEC
Report 332.3, or to an equivalent testing proce-
dure,
− fitting of suitable fire-stop screens,
− use of an appropriate protective coating.
In areas attended by passengers and in service areas,
only halogen-free cables shall be used for permanent
installations.
Electric cables having low emission of smoke and
toxic gases according to national or international
standards (e.g. IEC 754-1, IEC 1034-1, IEC 1034-2)
may be accepted.
Exceptions for individual cables for special purposes
have to be agreed with GL.
In all other areas of the craft, the use of halogen-free
cable is recommended.
12.6.4.3 Cables and wiring serving essential or
emergency power, lighting, internal communications
or signals shall, as far as practicable, be routed clear
of machinery spaces and their casings and other
areas of high fire risk. Where practicable, all such
cables shall be run in such a manner as to preclude
their being rendered unserviceable by heating of the
bulkheads that may be caused by a fire in an adjacent
space.
C12.6.4.3 For fire-resistant cables, the scope of in-
stallation is as follows:
I - Part 3 Section 12 Electrical Installations
GL 2012
.1 Cables for services required to be operable
under fire conditions, including those for their power
supplies, are to be of a fire resistant type, complying
with IEC 60331 where they pass through high fire
risk areas, fire zones or decks, other than those which
they serve.
.2 Systems that are self monitoring, fail safe or
duplicated with cable runs as widely separated as is
practicable may be exempted provided their function-
ality can be maintained.
Note
In case of cables for services required to be operable
under fire conditions, the fire resistant cables are to
extend from the control monitoring panel to the near-
est local distribution panel serving the relevant
deck/area.
In case of power supply cables used for services
required to be operable under fire conditions, the fire
resistant cables are to extend from their distribution
point within the space containing the emergency
source of electrical power to the nearest local distri-
bution panel serving the relevant deck/area.
.3 Emergency services required to be operable
under fire conditions include:
− Fire and general alarm system,
− Fire extinguishing systems and fire extinguisher
medium alarms,
− Fire detection system,
− Control and power systems to power operated fire
doors and status indication for all fire doors,
− Control and power systems to power operated
watertight doors and their status indication,
− Emergency lighting,
− Public address system
.4 The cables shall be arranged in such a way
as to minimise the loss of operational availability as a
result of a limited fire in any area.
.5 The cables shall be installed as straight as
possible and with strict observance of special installa-
tion requirements, e.g. permitted bending radii.
12.6.4.4 Where cables which are installed in hazard-
ous areas introduce the risk of fire or explosion in the
event of an electrical fault in such areas, special
precautions against such risks shall be taken to the
satisfaction of the Administration.
C12.6.4.4 “Special precautions” as per 12.6.4.4,
stipulated by GL include the following provisions:
.1 Where there are risks of corrosion, an im-
pervious non metal sheath is to be applied on top of
the armouring;
Chapter 1
Page 12–7
.2 Cables installed on deck or gangways are to
be protected against mechanical damage;
.3 Cables of intrinsically safety circuits are to
be separated from the others.
12.6.4.5 Cables and wiring shall be installed and
supported in such manner as to avoid chafing or
other damage.
12.6.4.6 Terminations and joints in all conductors
shall be so made as to retain the original electrical,
mechanical, flame-retarding and, where necessary,
fire-resisting properties of the cable.
12.6.5.1 Each separate circuit shall be protected
against short circuit and against overload, except as
permitted in 12.5 or where the Administration may
exceptionally otherwise permit.
12.6.5.2 The rating or appropriate setting of the
overload protective device for each circuit shall be
permanently indicated at the location of the protec-
tive device.
12.6.6 Lighting fittings shall be so arranged as to
prevent temperature rises which could damage the
cables and wiring, and to prevent surrounding mate-
rial from becoming excessively hot.
12.6.7 All lighting and power circuits terminating
in a bunker or cargo space shall be provided with a
multiple -pole switch outside the space for discon-
necting such circuits.
12.6.8.1 Accumulator batteries shall be suitably
housed, and compartments used primarily for their
accommodation shall be properly constructed and
efficiently ventilated.
12.6.8.2 Electrical or other equipment which may
constitute a source of ignition of flammable vapours
shall not be permitted in these compartments except
as permitted in 12.6.9.
12.6.8.4 Accumulator batteries shall not be located in
crew accommodation.
12.6.9 No electrical equipment shall be installed in
any space where flammable mixtures are liable to
collect, including those in compartments assigned
principally to accumulator batteries, in paint lockers,
acetylene stores or similar spaces, unless the Admini-
stration is satisfied that such equipment is:
.1 essential for operational purposes;
.2 of a type which will not ignite the mixture
concerned;
.3 appropriate to the space concerned; and .4
appropriately certified for safe usage in the
dusts, vapours or gases likely to be encoun-
tered.
Chapter 1 Section 12 Electrical Installations
Page 12–8
C12.6.9 The requirements of 12.6.9 apply to accumu-
lator batteries with total power exceeding
2 kW.
12.6.10 The following additional requirements from
.1 to .7 shall be met, and requirements from .8 to .13
shall be met also for non-metallic craft:
.1 The electrical distribution voltages throughout
the craft may be either direct current or alter-
nating current and shall not exceed:
.1.1 500 V for cooking, heating and other perma-
nently connected equipment; and
.1.2 250 V for lighting, internal communications
and receptacle outlets. The Administration
may accept higher voltages for propulsion
purposes.
.2 For electrical power distribution, two-wire or
three-wire systems shall be used. Four-wire
systems with neutral solidly earthed but with-
out hull return may also be used. Where ap-
plicable, the requirements for 7.5.6.4 or
7.5.6.5 shall also be met.
.3 Effective means shall be provided so that
voltage may be cut off from each and every
circuit and sub-circuit and from all apparatus
as may be necessary to prevent danger.
.4 Electrical equipment shall be so designed that
the possibility of accidentally touching live
parts, rotating or moving parts as well as
heated surfaces which might cause burns or
initiate fire is minimized.
.5 Electrical equipment shall be adequately se-
cured. The probability of fire or dangerous
consequences arising from damage to electri-
cal equipment shall be reduced to an accept-
able minimum.
.6 The rating or appropriate setting of the over-
load protective device for each circuit shall be
permanently indicated at the location of the
protection device.
.7 Where it is impracticable to provide electrical
protective devices for certain cables supplied
from batteries, e.g., within battery compart-
ments and in engine starting circuits, unpro-
tected cable runs shall be kept as short as pos-
sible and special precautions shall be taken to
minimize risk of faults, e.g., use of single-core
cables with additional sleeve over the insula-
tion of each core, with shrouded terminals.
.8 In order to minimize the risk of fire, structural
damage, electrical shock and radio interfer-
ence due to lightning strike or electrostatic
discharge, all metal parts of the craft shall be
bonded together, in so far as possible in con-
sideration of galvanic corrosion between dis-
I - Part 3
GL 2012
similar metals, to form a continuous electrical
system, suitable for the earth return of electri-
cal equipment and to connect the craft to the
water when water-borne. The bonding of iso-
lated components inside the structure is not
generally necessary, except in fuel tanks.
.9 Each pressure refuelling point shall be pro-
vided with a means of bonding the fuelling
equipment to the craft.
.10 Metallic pipes capable of generating electro-
static discharges, due to the flow of liquids
and gases, shall be bonded so as to be electri-
cally continuous throughout their length and
shall be adequately earthed.
.11 Primary conductors provided for lightning
discharge currents shall have a minimum
cross- section of 70 mm² in copper or equiva-
lent surge-carrying capacity in aluminium.
.12 Secondary conductors provided for the equali-
sation of static discharges, bonding of equip-
ment, etc., but not for carrying lightning dis-
charges shall have a minimum cross section of
5 mm² copper of equivalent surge current car-
rying capacity in aluminium.
.13 The electrical resistance between bonded
objects and the basic structure shall not ex-
ceed 0.02 Ohm except where is can be demon-
strated that a higher resistance will not cause
a hazard. The bonding path shall have suffi-
cient cross-sectional area to carry the maxi-
mum current likely to be imposed on it without
excessive voltage drop.
C12.6.10
(a) With reference to 12.6.10.6, see also 12.6.5.2.
(b) With reference to 12.6.10.11, stainless steel is
also acceptable.
Part B - Requirements for Passenger Craft
12.7 General
12.7.1 Separation and duplication of electrical
supply shall be provided for duplicated consumers of
essential services. During normal operation the sys-
tems may be connected to the same power-bus, but
facilities for easy separation shall be provided. Each
system shall be able to supply all equipment neces-
sary to maintain the control of propulsion, steering,
stabilization, navigation, lighting and ventilation, and
allow starting of the largest essential electric motor
at any load. Automatic load-dependent disconnection
of non-essential consumers may be allowed.
I - Part 3 Section 12 Electrical Installations
GL 2012
12.7.2 Emergency source of electrical power
Where the main source of electrical power is located
in two or more compartments which are not contigu-
ous, each of which has its own self-contained sys-
tems, including power distribution and control sys-
tems, completely independent of each other and such
that a fire or other casualty in any one of the spaces
will not affect the power distribution from the others,
or to the services required by 12.7.3 or 12.7.4, the
requirement of 12.3.1, 12.3.2 and 12.3.4 may be
considered satisfied without an additional emergency
source of electrical power, provided that:
.1 there is at least one generating set, meeting
the requirements of 12.3.12 and of sufficient
capacity to meet the requirements of 12.7.3 or
12.7.4 in each of at least two non-contiguous
spaces;
.2 the arrangements required by .1 in each such
space are equivalent to those required by
12.3.6.1, 12.3.7 to 12.3.11 and 12.4 so that a
source of electrical power is available at all
times to the services required by 12.7.3 or
12.7.4; and
.3 the generator sets referred to in .1 and their
self-contained systems are installed such that
one of them remains operable after damage or
flooding in any one compartment.
12.7.3 For category A craft, the emergency source
of power shall be capable of supplying simultane-
ously the following services:
.1 for a period of 5 h emergency lighting:
.1.1 at the stowage, preparation, launching and
deployed positions of survival craft and
equipment for embarkation into those craft;
.1.2 at all escape routes, such as alleyways, stair-
ways, exits from accommodation and service
spaces, embarkation points, etc;
.1.3 in the public spaces;
.1.4 in the machinery spaces and main emergency
generating spaces, including their control po-
sitions;
.1.5 in control stations;
.1.6 at the stowage positions for firemen's outfits;
and
.1.7 at the steering gear;
.2 for a period of 5 h;
.2.1 main navigation lights, except for "not under
command" lights;
.2.2 electrical internal communication equipment
for announcements for passengers and crew
required during evacuation;
Chapter 1
Page 12–9
.2.3 fire-detection and general alarm system and
manual fire alarms; and
.2.4 remote control devices of fire-extinguishing
systems, if electrical;
.3 for a period of 4 h of intermittent operation:
.3.1 the daylight signalling lamps, if they have no
independent supply from their own accumula-
tor battery; and
.3.2 the craft's whistle, if electrically driven;
.4 for a period of 5 h;
.4.1 craft radio facilities and other loads as set out
in 14.13.2; and
.4.2 essential electrically powered instruments and
controls for propulsion machinery, if alternate
sources of power are not available for such
devices;
.5 for a period of 12 h, the "not under command"
lights; and
.6 for a period of 10 min:
.6.1 power drives for directional control devices,
including those required to direct thrust for-
ward and astern, unless there is a manual al-
ternative acceptable to the Administration as
complying with 5.2.3.
C12.7.3 With reference to 12.7.3.4, in addition to the
services specified in 12.7.3.4.1 and 12.7.3.4.2, the
emergency source of power is to be capable of sup-
plying:
− One of the fire pumps required by 7.7.8.1.
− Sprinkler pump and drencher pump, if fitted.
− Emergency bilge pump and all equipment essen-
tial for the operation of electrically controlled
bilge valves, as required by Section 10.
12.7.4 For category B craft, the electrical power
available shall be sufficient to supply all those ser-
vices that are essential for safety in an emergency,
due regard being paid to such services as may have
to be operated simultaneously. The emergency source
of electrical power shall be capable, having regard to
starting currents and the transitory nature of certain
loads, of supplying simultaneously at least the follow-
ing services for the periods specified hereinafter, if
they depend upon an electrical source for their op-
eration.
.1 for a period of 12 h, emergency lighting:
.1.1 at the stowage, preparation, launching and
deployed positions of survival craft and
equipment for embarkation into those craft;
Chapter 1 Section 12 Electrical Installations I - Part 3
Page 12–10 GL 2012

.1.2 at all escape routes, such as alleyways, stair- .5 for a period of 30 min, any watertight doors,
ways, exits from accommodation and service required by Section 2 to be power-operated,
spaces, embarkation points, etc; together with their indicators and warning
signals;
.1.3 in the passenger compartments;
.6 for a period of 10 min, power drives for direc-
.1.4 in the machinery spaces and main emergency tional control devices including those required
generating spaces including their control po- to direct thrust forward and astern, unless
sitions; there is a manual alternative acceptable to the
Administration as complying with 5.2.3.
.1.5 in control stations;
12.7.5 Transitional source of emergency electrical
.1.6 at the stowage positions for firemen's outfits; power The transitional source of emergency electri-
and cal power required by paragraph 12.3.6.1.3 may
.1.7 at the steering gear; consist of an accumulator battery suitably located for
use in an emergency which shall operate without
.2 for a period of 12 h; recharging while maintaining the voltage of the bat-
tery throughout the discharge period within 12 %
.2.1 the navigation lights, and other lights required above or below its nominal voltage and be of suffi-
by International Regulations for Preventing cient capacity and so arranged as to supply auto-
Collisions at Sea in force; matically in the event of failure of either the main or
emergency source of electrical power at least the
.2.2 electrical internal communication equipment following services, if they depend upon an electrical
for announcements for passengers and crew source for their operation:
required during evacuation;
.1 for a period of 30 min, the load specified in
.2.3 fire-detection and general alarm system and 12.7.3.1, .2 and .3, or in 12.7.4.1, .2 and .3;
manual fire alarms; and and
.2.4 remote control devices of fire-extinguishing .2 with respect to the watertight doors:
systems, if electrical;
.2.1 power to operate the watertight doors, but not
.3 for a period of 4 h on intermittent operation: necessarily simultaneously, unless an inde-
pendent temporary source of stored energy is
.3.1 the daylight signalling lamps, if they have no provided. The power source shall have suffi-
independent supply from their own accumula- cient capacity to operate each door at least
tor battery; and three times, i.e. closed-open-closed, against
an adverse list of 15 °and
.3.2 the craft's whistle, if electrically driven;
.2.2 power to the control, indication and alarm
.4 for a period of 12 h; circuits for the watertight doors for half an
hour.
.4.1 the navigational equipment as required by
Section 13. Where such provision is unrea- 12.7.6 The requirements of 12.7.5 may be consid-
sonable or impracticable, the Administration ered satisfied without the installation of a transi-
may waive this requirement for craft of less tional source of emergency electrical power if each
than 5,000 gross tonnage; of the services required by that paragraph have in-
dependent supplies, for the period specified, from
.4.2 essential electrically powered instruments and accumulator batteries suitably located for use in an
controls for propulsion machinery, if alternate emergency. The supply of emergency power to the
sources of power are not available for such instruments and controls of the propulsion and di-
devices; rection systems shall be uninterruptible.
.4.3 one of the fire pumps required by 7.7.5.1;
12.7.7 In category A craft having limited public
.4.4 the sprinkler pump and drencher pump, if spaces, emergency lighting fittings of the type de-
fitted; scribed in 12.7.9.1 as meeting the requirements of
12.7.3.1 and 12.7.5.1 may be accepted, provided that
.4.5 the emergency bilge pump and all the equip- an adequate standard of safety is attained.
ment essential for the operation of electrically
powered remote controlled bilge valves as re- 12.7.8 Provisions shall be made for the periodic
quired by Section 10; and testing of the complete emergency system, including
the emergency consumers required by 12.7.3 or
.4.6 craft radio facilities and other loads as set out 12.7.4 and 12.7.5, and shall include the testing of
in 14.13.2; automatic starting arrangements.
I - Part 3 Section 12 Electrical Installations
GL 2012
12.7.9 In addition to the emergency lighting re-
quired by paragraph 12.7.3.1, 12.7.4.1 and 12.7.5.1
on every craft with ro-ro spaces:
.1 all passenger public spaces and alleyways
shall be provided with supplementary electric
lighting that can operate for at least three h
when all other sources of electric power have
failed and under any condition of heel. The il-
lumination provided shall be such that the ap-
proach to the means of escape can be readily
seen. The source of power for the supplemen-
tary lighting shall consist of accumulator bat-
teries located within the lighting units that are
continuously charged, where practicable, from
the emergency switchboard. Alternatively, any
other means of lighting, which is at least as ef-
fective, may be accepted by the Administra-
tion.
The supplementary lighting shall be such that
any failure of the lamp will be immediately
apparent. Any accumulator battery provided
shall be replaced at intervals having regard
to the specified service life in the ambient
condition that it is subject to in service; and
.2 a portable rechargeable battery-operated
lamp shall be provided in every crew space al-
leyway, recreational space and every working
space which is normally occupied unless sup-
plementary emergency lighting, as required by
.1, is provided.
12.7.10 Distribution systems shall be so arranged
that fire in any main vertical zone will not interfere
with services essential for safety in any other such
zone. This requirement will be met if main and emer-
gency feeders passing through any such zone are
separated both vertically and horizontally as widely
as is practicable.
Part C - Requirements for Cargo Craft
12.8 General
12.8.1 Separation and duplication of electrical
supply shall be provided for duplicated consumers of
essential services. During normal operation these
consumers may be connected to the same power-bus
directly or via distribution boards or group starters,
but shall be separated by removable links or other
approved means. Each power-bus shall be able to
supply all equipment necessary to maintain the con-
trol of propulsion, steering, stabilization, navigation,
lighting and ventilation, and allow starting of the
largest essential electric motor at any load. However,
having regard to 12.1.2, partial reduction in the
capability from normal operation may be accepted.
Non-duplicated consumers of essential services con-
nected to the emergency switchboard directly or via
distribution boards may be accepted. Automatic load-
Chapter 1
Page 12–11
dependent disconnection of non-essential consumers
may be allowed.
12.8.2 Emergency source of electrical power
12.8.2.1 Where the main source of electrical power is
located in two or more compartments which are not
contiguous, each of which has its own self-contained
systems, including power distribution and control
systems, completely independent of each other and
such that a fire or other casualty in any one of the
spaces will not affect the power distribution from the
others, or to the services required by 12.8.2.2, the
requirements of 12.3.1, 12.3.2 and 12.3.4 may be
considered satisfied without an additional emergency
source of electrical power, provided that:
.1 there is at least one generating set, meeting
the requirements of 12.3.12 and each of suffi-
cient capacity to meet the requirements of
12.8.2.2, in each of at least two non-
contiguous spaces;
.2 the arrangements required by .1 in each such
space are equivalent to those required by
12.3.6.1, 12.3.7 to 12.3.11 and 12.4 so that a
source of electrical power is available at all
times to the services required by 12.8.2; and
.3 the generator sets are referred to in .1 and
their self-contained systems are installed in
accordance with 12.3.2.
12.8.2.2 The electrical power available shall be suffi-
cient to supply all those services that are essential for
safety in an emergency, due regard being paid to
such services as may have to be operated simultane-
ously. The emergency source of electrical power shall
be capable, having regard to starting currents and
the transitory nature of certain loads, of supplying
simultaneously at least the following services for the
periods specified hereinafter, if they depend upon an
electrical source for their operation:
.1 for a period of 12 h, emergency lighting;
.1.1 at the stowage positions of life-saving appli-
ances;
.1.2 at all escape routes, such as alleyways, stair-
ways, exits from accommodation and service
spaces, embarkation points, etc.;
.1.3 in public spaces, if any;
.1.4 in the machinery spaces and main emergency
generating spaces including their control po-
sitions;
.1.5 in control stations;
Chapter 1 Section 12 Electrical Installations I - Part 3
Page 12–12 GL 2012

.1.6 at the stowage positions for fire-fighter's quired to direct thrust forward and astern,
outfits; and unless there is a manual alternative accept-
able to the Administration as complying with
.1.7 at the steering gear; 5.2.3.
.2 for a period of 12 h; 12.8.2.3 Provision shall be made for the periodic
testing of the complete emergency system, including
.2.1 the navigation lights, and other lights re-
the emergency consumers required by 12.8.2.2 and
quired by the International Regulations for
shall include the testing of automatic starting ar-
Preventing Collisions at Sea in force;
rangements.
.2.2 electrical internal communication equipment
for announcements during evacuation; 12.8.2.4 Where the emergency source of electrical
power is a generator, a transitional source of emer-
.2.3 fire-detection and general alarm system and gency power shall be provided according to para-
manual fire alarms; and graph 12.8.3, unless the automatic starting system
and the characteristics of the prime mover are such
.2.4 remote control devices of fire-extinguishing as to permit the emergency generator to carry its full
systems, if electrical; rated load as quickly as is safe and practicable, sub-
ject to a maximum of 45 s.
.3 for a period of 4 h of intermittent operation;
.3.1 the daylight signalling lamps, if they have no C12.8.2.4 For the purpose of classification, the time
independent supply from their own accumula- forgenerator start-up and loading is not to exceed 15s.
tor battery; and
12.8.3 Transitional source of emergency electrical
.3.2 the craft's whistle, if electrically driven; power The transitional source of emergency electri-
cal power required by paragraph 12.8.2.4 may con-
.4 for a period of 12 h; sist of an accumulator battery suitably located for use
in an emergency which shall operate without re-
.4.1 the navigational equipment as required by charging while maintaining the voltage of the battery
Section 13. Where such provision is unrea- throughout the discharge period within 12% above or
sonable or impracticable, the Administration below its nominal voltage and be of sufficient capac-
may waive this requirement for craft of less ity and so arranged as to supply automatically, in the
than 5,000 gross tonnage; event of failure of either the main or emergency
.4.2 essential electrically powered instruments and source of electrical power, at least the following
controls for propulsion machinery, if alter- services, if they depend upon an electrical source for
nate sources of power are not available for their operation:
such devices; .1 for a period of 30 min, the load specified in
.4.3 one of the fire pumps required by 7.7.5.1; 12.8.2.2.1, .2 and .3; and

.4.4 the sprinkler pump and drencher pump, if
fitted;
.4.5 the emergency bilge pump and all the equip-
ment essential for the operation of electrically
powered remote controlled bilge valves as re-
quired by Section 10; and
.4.6 craft radio facilities and other loads as set out
in 14.13.2.
.5 for a period of 10 min, power drives for direc-
tional control devices, including those re-
.2 with respect to watertight doors:
.2.1 power to operate the watertight doors, but not
necessarily simultaneously, unless an inde-
pendent temporary source of stored energy is
provided. The power source shall have suffi-
cient capacity to operate each door at least
three times, i.e. closed-open-closed, against
an adverse list of 15° and
.2.2 power to the control, indication and alarm
circuits for the watertight doors for half an
hour.
I - Part 3 Section 13 Shipborne Navigational System and Equipment and Voyage Date
GL 2012 Recorders
Section 13
Shipborne Navigational System and Equipment and Voyage Date Recorders
13.1 General
13.1.1 This Section covers items of equipment which
relate to the navigation of the craft as distinct from the
safe functioning of the craft. The following para-
graphs set out the minimum requirements.
13.1.2 The equipment and its installation shall be to
the satisfaction of the Administration. The Administra-
tion shall determine to what extent the provisions of
this Section do not apply to craft below 150 gross
tonnage.
13.1.3 The information provided by navigation sys-
tems and equipment shall be so displayed that the
probability of misreading is reduced to a minimum.
navigational systems and equipment shall be capable
of giving readings to an optimum accuracy.
13.2 Compasses
13.2.1 Craft shall be provided with a magnetic com-
pass which is capable of operating without electrical
supply, and which may be used for steering purposes.
This compass shall be mounted in a suitable binnacle
containing the required correcting devices and shall
be suitable for the speed and motion characteristics of
the craft.
13.2.2 The compass card or repeater shall be capa-
ble of being easily read from the position at which the
craft is normally controlled.
13.2.3 Each magnetic compass shall be properly
adjusted and its table or curve of residual deviations
shall be available at all times.
13.2.4 Care shall be taken in siting a magnetic com-
pass or magnetic sensing element so that magnetic
interference is eliminated or minimized as far as is
practicable.
13.2.5 Passenger craft certified to carry 100 pas-
sengers or less shall, in addition to the compass re-
quired by 13.2.1, be provided with a properly adjusted
transmitting heading device, suitable for the speed
and motion characteristics and area of operation of
the craft, capable of transmitting a true heading refer-
ence to other equipment.
Chapter 1
Page 13–1
13.2.6 Passenger craft certified to carry more than
100 passengers and cargo craft shall, in addition to
the compass required in 13.2.1, be provided with a
gyro-compass which shall be suitable for the speed
and motion characteristics and area of operation of
the craft.
13.3 Speed and Distance Measurement
13.3.1 Craft shall be provided with a device capable
of indicating speed and distance.
13.3.2 Speed- and distance-measuring devices on
craft fitted with an automatic radar plotting aid
(ARPA) or automatic tracking aid (ATA) shall be
capable of measuring speed and distance through the
water.
13.4 Echo-sounding Device
Non-amphibious craft shall be provided with an echo-
sounding device which will give an indication of depth
of water to a sufficient degree of accuracy for use
when the craft is in the displacement mode.
13.5 Radar Installations
13.5.1 Craft shall be provided with at least one
azimuth-stabilized radar operating on 9 GHz.
13.5.2 Craft of 500 gross tonnage and upwards or
craft certified to carry more than 450 passengers shall
also be provided with a 3 GHz radar or where consid-
ered appropriate by the Administration a second 9
GHz radar, or other means to determine and display
the range and bearing of other surface craft, obstruc-
tions, buoys, shorelines and navigational marks to
assist in navigation and in collision avoidance, which
are functionally independent of those referred to in
paragraph 13.5.1.
13.5.3 At least one radar shall be provided with
facilities for an ARPA or ATA suitable for the motion
and speed of the craft.
13.5.4 Adequate communication facilities shall be
provided between the radar observer and the person
in immediate charge of the craft.
13.5.5 Each radar installation provided shall be
suitable for the intended craft speed, motion charac-
teristics and commonly encountered environmental
conditions.
Chapter 1 Section 13 Shipborne Navigational System and Equipment and Voyage Date
Page 13–2 Recorders
13.5.6 Each radar installation shall be mounted so
as to be as free as practicable from vibration
13.6 Electronic Positioning Systems
Craft shall be provided with a receiver for a global
navigation satellite system or a terrestrial radio navi-
gation system, or other means, suitable for use at all
times throughout the intended voyage to establish and
update the craft's position by automatic means.
13.7 Rate-of-turn Indicator and Rudder Angle
Indicator
13.7.1 Craft of 500 gross tonnage or upwards shall
be provided with a rate-of-turn indicator. A rate-of-
turn indicator shall be provided in craft of less than
500 gross tonnage if the test according to annex 9
shows that the turn rate can exceed safety level 1.
13.7.2 Craft shall be provided with an indicator
showing the rudder angle. In craft without a rudder,
the indicator shall show the direction of steering
thrust.
13.8 Navigational Charts and Nautical Publica-
tions
13.8.1 Craft shall be provided with nautical charts
and nautical publications to plan and display the
ship’s route for the intended voyage and to plot and
monitor positions throughout the voyage; an elec-
tronic chart display and information system (ECDIS)
may be accepted as meeting the chart carriage re-
quirements of this paragraph.
13.8.2 High-speed craft shall be fitted with an
ECDIS as follows:
.1 craft constructed on or after 1 July 2008;
.2 craft constructed before 1 July 2008, not later
than 1 July 2010.
13.8.3 Back-up arrangements shall be provided to
meet the functional requirements of 13.8.1, if this
function is partly or fully fulfilled by electronic means.
13.9 Searchlight and Daylight Signalling Lamp
13.9.1 Craft shall be provided with at least one
adequate searchlight, which shall be controllable from
the operating station.
13.9.2 One portable daylight signalling lamp shall
be provided and maintained ready for use in the oper-
ating compartment at all times.
13.10 Night Vision Equipment
When operational conditions justify the provision of
night vision equipment, such equipment shall be pro-
vided.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
13.11 Steering Arrangement and Propulsion Indi-
cator(s)
13.11.1 The steering arrangement shall be so de-
signed that the craft turns in the same direction as that
of the wheel, tiller, joystick or control lever.
13.11.2 Craft shall be provided with means to show
the mode of the propulsion system(s).
13.11.3 Craft with emergency steering positions shall
be provided with arrangements for supplying visual
compass readings to the emergency steering position.
13.12 Automatic Steering Aid (automatic pilot)
13.12.1 Craft shall be provided with an automatic
steering aid (automatic pilot).
13.12.2 Provision shall be made to change from the
automatic to manual mode by a manual override.
13.13 Radar Reflector
If practicable, craft of 150 gross tonnage or below
shall be provided with a radar reflector, or other
means, to assist detection by ship navigating by radar
at both 9 and 3 GHz.
13.14 Sound Reception System
When the craft's bridge is totally enclosed and unless
the Administration determines otherwise, craft shall
be provided with a sound reception system, or other
means, to enable the officer in charge of the naviga-
tional watch to hear sound signals and determine their
direction.
13.15 Automatic Identification System
13.15.1 Craft shall be provided with an automatic
identification system (AIS) 13.15.2 Aid shall:
.1 provide automatically to appropriately
equipped shore stations, other vessels and air-
craft information, including the craft's identity,
type, position, course, speed, navigational
status and other safety-related information;
.2 receive automatically such information from
similarly fitted ships;
.3 monitor and track ships; and
.4 exchange data with shore-based facilities.
13.15.2 The requirements of paragraph 13.15.3 shall
not be applied to cases where international agree-
ments, rules or standards provide for the protection of
navigational information.
13.15.3 AIS shall be operated taking into account the
guidelines adopted by the Organization.
I - Part 3 Section 13 Shipborne Navigational System and Equipment and Voyage Date
GL 2012 Recorders
13.16 Voyage Data Recorder
13.16.1 To assist in casualty investigations, passen-
ger craft irrespective of size and cargo craft of 3,000
gross tonnage and upwards shall be provided with a
voyage data recorder (VDR).
13.16.2 The voyage data recorder system, including,
all sensors, shall be subjected to an annual perform-
ance test. The test shall be conducted by an approved
testing or servicing facility to verify the accuracy,
duration and recoverability of the recorded data. In
addition, tests and inspections shall be conducted to
determine the serviceability of all protective enclo-
sures and devices fitted to aid location. A copy of the
certificate of compliance issued by the testing facilities
stating the data of compliance and the applicable
performance standards, shall be retained on board the
craft.
13.17 Approval of Systems and Equipment, and
Performance Standards
13.17.1 All equipment to which this Section applies
shall be of a type approved by the Administration.
Such equipment shall conform to performance stan-
dards not inferior to those adopted by the Organiza-
tion.
13.17.2 The Administration shall require that the
manufacturers have a quality control system audited
by a competent authority to ensure continuous com-
pliance with the type approval conditions. Alterna-
tively, the Administration may use final product verifi-
cation procedures where the compliance with the type
approval certificate is verified by a competent author-
ity before the product is installed on board craft.
13.17.3 Before giving approval to systems or equip-
ment embodying new features not covered by this
Section, the Administration shall ensure that such
features support functions at least as effective as those
required by this Section.
13.17.4 When equipment for which performance
standards have been developed by the Organization, is
carried on craft in addition to those items of equip-
ment required by this Section, such additional equip-
ment shall be subject to approval and shall as far as
practicable comply with performance standards not
inferior to those adopted by the Organization. 1
––––––––––––––
1 Recommendation on performance standards for magnetic com-
passes(resolution A.382(X));
Recommendation on performance standards for marine transmit-
ting magnetic heading devices (TMHDs) (resolution
MSC.86(70), annex 2);
Recommendation on performance standards for Gyro-compasses
for high-speed craft (resolution A.821(19));
Recommendation on performance standards for devices to indi-
catespeed and distance (resolution A.824(19), as amended by
resolution MSC.96(72));
Chapter 1
Page 13–3
C13.18 Electric Power Supply-distribution Panels
C13.18.1 Local distribution panels are to be provided
for all items of electrically operated navigational e-
quipment. These panels are to be supplied by two
exclusive circuits, one fed from the main source of
electrical power and one fed from an emergency
source of electrical power.
Each item of navigational equipment is to be con-
nected individually to its distribution panel.
C13.18.2 Power supplies to distribution panels are to
be provided with automatic changeover facilities.
Failure of the main power supply to the distribution
panels is to set off an audible and visual alarm.
C13.18.3 Following loss of power (black-out), neces-
sary arrangements are to be made to enable all primary
functions to be reinstated within 30 seconds.
Recommendation on performance standards for echo-sounding
equipment (resolution A.224(VII) as amended by MSC.74(69),
annex 2);
Recommendation on performance standards for navigational ra-
dar equipment for high-speed craft (resolution A.820(19));
Recommendation on performance standards for "Auto Track-
ing"(resolution MSC.64(67), annex 4, appendix 1);
Recommendation on performance standards for shipborne Decca
navigator receivers (resolution A.816(19));
Recommendation on performance standards for shipborne Lo-
ran-C and Chayka receivers (resolution A.818(19));
Recommendation on performance standards for shipborne global
positioning system receiver equipment (resolution A.819(19));
Recommendation on performance standards for shipborne
GLONASS receiver equipment (resolution MSC.53(66));
Recommendation on performance standards for shipborne DGPS
and DGLONASS maritime radio beacon receiver equipment
(resolution MSC.64(67), annex 2);
Recommendation on performance standards for combined
GPS/GLONASS receiver equipment (resolution MSC.74(69), an-
nex 1);
Performance standards for rate-of-turn indicators (resolution
A.526(13));
Recommendation on performance standards for night vision
equipmentfor high-speed craft (resolution MSC.94(72));
Recommendation on performance standards for daylight signal-
ling lamps (resolution MSC.95(72)); and
Recommendation on performance standards for automatic steer-
ing aids(automatic pilots) for high-speed craft (resolution
A.822(19)).
I - Part 3 Section 14 Radiocommunications
GL 2012
Section 14
Radiocommunications
14.1 Application
14.1.1 Unless expressly provided otherwise, this
Section applies to all craft specified in 1.3.1 and 1.3.2.
14.1.2 This Section does not apply to craft to which
this Code would otherwise apply while such craft are
being navigated within the Great Lakes of North
America and their connecting and tributary waters as
far east as the lower exit of the St. Lambert Lock at
Montreal in the Province of Quebec, Canada 1.
14.1.3 No provision in this Section shall prevent the
use by any craft, survival craft or person in distress of
any means at their disposal to attract attention, make
known their position and obtain help.
14.2 Terms and Definitions
14.2.1 For the purpose of this Section, the following
terms shall have the meanings defined below:
.1 Bridge-to-bridge communications means safety
communications between craft and ships from
the position from which the craft is normally
navigated.
.2 Continuous watch means that the radio watch
concerned shall not be interrupted other than
for brief intervals when the craft's receiving
capability is impaired or blocked by its own
communications or when the facilities are un-
der periodical maintenance or checks.
.3 Digital selective calling (DSC) means a tech-
nique using digital codes which enables a radio
station to establish contact with, and transfer
information to, another station or group of sta-
tions, and complying with the relevant recom-
mendations of the International Telecommuni-
cation Union Radiocommunication Sector
(ITU-R).
.4 Direct-printing telegraphy means automated
telegraphy techniques which comply with the
relevant recommendations of the International
Telecommunication Union Radiocommunica-
tion Sector (ITU-R).
––––––––––––––
1 Such craft are subject to special requirements relative to radio
for safety purposes, as contained in the relevant agreement be-
tween Canada and the United States.
Chapter 1
Page 14–1
.5 General radiocommunications means opera-
tional and public correspondence traffic other
than distress, urgency and safety messages,
conducted by radio.
.6 Global Maritime Distress and Safety System
(GMDSS) Identities means maritime mobile
services identity, the craft's call sign, Inmarsat
identities and serial number identity which may
be transmitted by the craft's equipment and
used to identify the craft.
.7 Inmarsat means the Organization established
by the Convention on the International Mari-
time Satellite Organization (Inmarsat) adopted
on 3 September 1976.
.8 International NAVTEX service means the co-
ordinated broadcast and automatic reception
on 518 kHz of maritime safety information by
means of narrow-band direct-printing telegra-
phy using the English language. 2
.9 Locating means the finding of the ships, craft,
aircraft, units or persons in distress.
.10 Maritime safety information means naviga-
tional and meteorological warnings, meteoro-
logical forecasts and other urgent safety-
related messages broadcast to ships and craft.
.11 Polar orbiting satellite service means a service
which is based on polar orbiting satellites
which receive and relay distress alerts from
satellite EPIRBs and which provides their posi-
tion.
.12 Radio Regulations mean the Radio Regulations
annexed to, or regarded as being annexed to,
the most recent International Telecommunica-
tion Convention which is in force at any time.
.13 Sea area A1 means an area within the radio-
telephone coverage of at least one VHF coast
station in which continuous DSC alerting is
available, as may be defined by a Contracting
Government to the Convention. 3
––––––––––––––
2 Refer to the NAVTEX Manual approved by the Organization.
3 Refer to resolution A.801(19) concerning provision of radio
services for the global maritime distress and safety system
(GMDSS), adopted by the Organization.
Chapter 1 Section 14 Radiocommunications
Page 14–2
.14 Sea area A2 means an area, excluding sea area
A1, within the radiotelephone coverage of at
least one MF coast station in which continuous
DSC alerting is available, as may be defined by
a Contracting Government to the Convention.3
.15 Sea area A3 means an area, excluding sea
areas A1 and A2, within the coverage of an
Inmarsat geostationary satellite in which con-
tinuous alerting is available.
.16 Sea area A4 means an area outside sea areas
A1, A2 and A3.
14.2.2 All other terms and abbreviations which are
used in this Section and which are defined in the Ra-
dio Regulations and in the International Convention
on Maritime Search and Rescue (SAR), 1979, as it
may be amended, shall have the meanings as defined
in those Regulations and the SAR Convention.
14.3 Exemptions
14.3.1 It is considered highly desirable not to devi-
ate from the requirements of this Section; nevertheless
the Administration, in conjunction with the base port
State, may grant partial or conditional exemptions to
individual craft from the requirements of 14.7 to 14.11
provided:
.1 such craft comply with the functional require-
ments of 14.5; and
.2 the Administration has taken into account the
effect such exemptions may have upon the gen-
eral efficiency of the service for the safety of all
ships and craft.
14.3.1.3 An exemption may be granted under 14.3.1
only:
.1 if the conditions affecting safety are such as to
render the full application of 14.7 to 14.11 un-
reasonable or unnecessary; or
.2 in exceptional circumstances, for a single voy-
age outside the sea area or sea areas for which
the craft is equipped.
14.3.2 Each Administration shall submit to the Or-
ganization, as soon as possible after the first of Janu-
ary in each year, a report showing all exemptions
granted under 14.3.1 and 14.3.2 during the previous
calendar year and giving the reasons for granting
such exemptions.
14.4 Global Maritime Distress and Safety System
Identities
14.4.1 This section applies to all craft on all voy-
ages.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
14.4.2 Each Administration undertakes to ensure
that suitable arrangements are made for registering
Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS)
Identities and for making information on these identi-
ties available to Rescue Co-ordination Centres on a
24-hour basis. Where appropriate, international or-
ganizations maintaining a registry of these identities
shall be notified by the Administration of these as-
signments.
14.5 Functional Requirements
14.5.1 Every craft, while at sea, shall be capable:
.1 except as provided in 14.8.1.1 and 14.10.1.4.3,
of transmitting ship-to-shore distress alerts by
at least two separate and independent means,
each using a different radiocommunication ser-
vice;
.2 of receiving shore-to-ship distress alerts;
.3 of transmitting and receiving ship-to-ship dis-
tress alerts;
.4 of transmitting and receiving search and res-
cue co-ordinating communications;
.5 of transmitting and receiving on-scene commu-
nications;
.6 of transmitting and, as required by 13.5, re-
ceiving signals for locating 4;
.7 of transmitting and receiving 5 maritime safety
information;
.8 of transmitting and receiving general radio-
communications to and from shore-based radio
systems or networks subject to 14.15.8; and
.9 of transmitting and receiving bridge-to-bridge
communications.
14.6 Radio Installations
14.6.1 Every craft shall be provided with radio in-
stallations capable of complying with the functional
requirements prescribed by 14.5 throughout its in-
tended voyage and, unless exempted under 14.3, com-
plying with the requirements of 14.7 and, as appropri-
ate for the sea area or areas through which it will
pass during its intended voyage, the requirements of
either 14.8, 14.9, 14.10 or 14.11.
––––––––––––––
4 Refer to resolution A.614(15) on carriage of radar operating in
the frequency band 9,300 - 9, 500 MHz, adopted by the Organi-
zation.
5 It should be noted that craft may have a need for reception of
certain maritime safety information while in port.
I - Part 3 Section 14 Radiocommunications
GL 2012
14.6.2 Every radio installation shall:
.1 be so located that no harmful interference of
mechanical, electrical or other origin affects its
proper use, and so as to ensure electromag-
netic compatibility and avoidance of harmful
interaction with other equipment and systems;
.2 be so located as to ensure the greatest possible
degree of safety and operational availability;
.3 be protected against harmful effects of water,
extremes of temperature and other adverse en-
vironmental conditions;
.4 be provided with reliable, permanently ar-
ranged electrical lighting, independent of the
main sources of electrical power, for the ade-
quate illumination of the radio controls for op-
erating the radio installation; and
.5 be clearly marked with the call sign, the ship
station identity and other codes as applicable
for the use of the radio installation.
14.6.3 Control of the VHF radiotelephone channels,
required for navigational safety, shall be immediately
available on the navigating bridge convenient to the
conning position, and, where necessary, facilities shall
be available to permit radiocommunications from the
wings of the navigating bridge. Portable VHF equip-
ment may be used to meet the latter provision.
14.6.4 In passenger craft, a distress panel shall be
installed at the conning position. This panel shall
contain either one single button which, when pressed,
initiates a distress alert using all radiocommunication
installations required on board for that purpose or
one button for each individual installation. The panel
shall clearly and visually indicate whenever any but-
ton or buttons have been pressed. Means shall be
provided to prevent inadvertent activation of the but-
ton or buttons. If the satellite EPIRB is used as the
secondary means of distress alerting and is not re-
motely activated, it shall be acceptable to have an
additional EPIRB installed in the wheelhouse near the
conning position.
14.6.5 In passenger craft, information on the craft's
position shall be continuously and automatically pro-
vided to all relevant radiocommunication equipment
to be included in the initial distress alert when the
button or buttons on the distress panel is pressed.
14.6.6 In passenger craft, a distress alert panel shall
be installed at the conning position. The distress
alarm panel shall provide visual and aural indication
of any distress alert or alerts received onboard and
shall also indicate through which radiocommunication
service the distress alerts have been received.
Chapter 1
Page 14–3
14.7 Radio Equipment: General
14.7.1 Every craft shall be provided with:
.1 a VHF radio installation capable of transmit-
ting and receiving:
.1.1 DSC on the frequency 156.525 MHz (channel
70). It shall be possible to initiate the transmis-
sion of distress alerts on channel 70 from the
position from which the craft is normally navi-
gated; and
.1.2 radiotelephony on the frequencies 156.300
MHz (channel 6), 156.650 MHz (channel 13)
and 156.800 MHz (channel 16);
.2 a radio installation capable of maintaining a
continuous DSC watch on VHF channel 70
which may be separate from, or combined with,
that required by 14.7.1.1.1;
.3 a radar transponder capable of operating in
the 9 GHz band, which:
.3.1 shall be so stowed that it can be easily utilized;
and
.3.2 may be one of those required by 8.2.1.2 for a
survival craft;
.4 a receiver capable of receiving International
NAVTEX service broadcasts if the craft is en-
gaged on voyages in any area in which an In-
ternational NAVTEX service is provided;
.5 a radio facility for reception of maritime safety
information by the Inmarsat enhanced group
calling system 6 if the craft is engaged on voy-
ages in any area of Inmarsat coverage but in
which an International NAVTEX service is not
provided. However, craft engaged exclusively
on voyages in areas where a HF direct printing
telegraphy maritime safety information service
is provided and fitted with equipment capable
of receiving such service may be exempt from
this requirements. 7
.6 subject to the provisions of 14.8.3, a satellite
emergency position indicating radio beacon
(satellite EPIRB) 8 which shall be:
.6.1 capable of transmitting a distress alert either
through the polar orbiting satellite service op-
––––––––––––––
6 Refer to resolution A.701(17) concerning carriage of Inmarsat
enhanced group call SafetyNET receivers under the GMDSS,
adopted by the Organization.
7 Refer to the Recommendation on Promulgation of Maritime
Safety Information, adopted by the Organization by resolution
A.705(17).
8 Refer to resolution A.616(15) concerning search and rescue
homing capability, adopted by the Organization.
Chapter 1 Section 14 Radiocommunications
Page 14–4
erating in the 406 MHz band or, if the craft is
engaged only on voyages within Inmarsat cov-
erage, through the Inmarsat geostationary sat-
ellite service operating in the 1.6 GHz band;
.6.2 installed in an easily accessible position;
.6.3 ready to be manually released and capable of
being carried by one person into a survival
craft;
.6.4 capable of floating free if the craft sinks and of
being automatically activated when afloat; and
.6.5 capable of being activated manually.
14.7.2 Every passenger craft shall be provided with
means for two-way on-scene radiocommunications for
search and rescue purposes using the aeronautical
frequencies 121.5 MHz and 123.1 MHz from the posi-
tion from which the craft is normally navigated.
14.8 Radio Equipment: Sea Area A1
14.8.1 In addition to meeting the requirements of
14.7, every craft engaged on voyages exclusively in
sea area A1 shall be provided with a radio installation
capable of initiating the transmission of ship-to-shore
distress alerts from the position from which the craft is
normally navigated, operating either:
.1 on VHF using DSC; this requirement may be
fulfilled by the EPIRB prescribed by 14.8.3, ei-
ther by installing the EPIRB close to, or by re-
mote activation from, the position from which
the craft is normally navigated; or
.2 through the polar orbiting satellite service on
406 MHz; this requirement may be fulfilled by
the satellite EPIRB, required by 14.7.1.6, either
by installing the satellite EPIRB close to, or by
remote activation from, the position from which
the craft is normally navigated; or
.3 if the craft is on voyages within coverage of
MF coast stations equipped with DSC on MF
using DSC; or
.4 on HF using DSC; or
.5 through the Inmarsat geostationary satellite
service; this requirement may be fulfilled by:
.5.1 an Inmarsat ship earth station 9 ; or
.5.2 the satellite EPIRB, required by 14.7.1.6, ei-
ther by installing the satellite EPIRB close to,
––––––––––––––
9 This requirement can be met by Inmarsat ship earth stations
capable of two-way communications, such as Inmarsat-A and -B
(resolution A.808(19)) or Inmarsat-C (resolution A.807(19) and
MSC.68(68), annex 4) ship earth stations. Unless otherwise
specified, this footnote applies to all requirements for an Inmar-
sat ship earth station prescribed by this chapter.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
or by remote activation from, the position from
which the craft is normally navigated.
14.8.2 The VHF radio installation, required by
14.71.1, shall also be capable of transmitting and
receiving general radiocommunications using radiote-
lephony.
14.8.3 Craft engaged on voyages exclusively in sea
area A1 may carry, in lieu of the satellite EPIRB re-
quired by 14.7.1.6, an EPIRB which shall be:
.1 capable of transmitting a distress alert using
DSC on VHF channel 70 and providing for lo-
cating by means of a radar transponder operat-
ing in the 9 GHz band;
.2 installed in an easily accessible position;
.3 ready to be manually released and capable of
being carried by one person into a survival
craft;
.4 capable of floating free if the craft sinks and of
being automatically activated when afloat; and
.5 capable of being activated manually.
14.9 Radio Equipment: Sea Areas A1 and A2
14.9.1 In addition to meeting the requirements of
14.7, every craft engaged on voyages beyond sea area
A1, but remaining within sea area A2, shall be pro-
vided with:
.1 an MF radio installation capable of transmit-
ting and receiving, for distress and safety pur-
poses, on the frequencies:
.1.1 2,187.5 kHz using DSC; and
.1.2 2,182 kHz using radiotelephony;
.2 a radio installation capable of maintaining a
continuous DSC watch on the frequency
2,187.5 kHz which may be separate from, or
combined with, that required by 14.9.1.1.1; and
.3 means of initiating the transmission of ship-to-
shore distress alerts by a radio service other
than MF, operating either:
.3.1 through the polar orbiting satellite service on
406 MHz; this requirement may be fulfilled by
the satellite EPIRB, required by 14.7.1.6, ei-
ther by installing the satellite EPIRB close to,
or by remote activation from, the position from
which the craft is normally navigated; or
.3.2 on HF using DSC; or
.3.3 through the Inmarsat geostationary satellite
service; this requirement may be fulfilled by:
I - Part 3 Section 14 Radiocommunications
GL 2012
.3.3.1 the equipment specified in 14.9.3.2; or
.3.3.2 the satellite EPIRB, required by 14.7.1.6, ei-
ther by installing the satellite EPIRB close to,
or by remote activation from, the position from
which the craft is normally navigated.
14.9.2 It shall be possible to initiate transmission of
distress alerts by the radio installations specified in
14.9.1.1 and 14.9.1.3 from the position from which the
craft is normally navigated.
14.9.3 The craft shall, in addition, be capable of
transmitting and receiving general radiocommunica-
tions using radiotelephony or direct-printing telegra-
phy by either:
.1 a radio installation operating on working fre-
quencies in the bands between 1,605 kHz and
4,000 kHz or between 4,000 kHz and 27,500
kHz; this requirement may be fulfilled by the
addition of this capability in the equipment re-
quired by 14.9.1.1; or
.2 an Inmarsat ship earth station.
14.10 Radio Equipment: Sea Areas A1, A2 and A3
14.10.1 In addition to meeting the requirements of
14.7, every craft engaged on voyages beyond sea
areas A1 and A2, but remaining within sea area A3,
shall, if it does not comply with the requirements of
14.10.2, be provided with:
.1 an Inmarsat ship earth station capable of:
.1.1 transmitting and receiving distress and safety
communications using direct-printing telegra-
phy;
.1.2 initiating and receiving distress priority calls;
.1.3 maintaining watch for shore-to-ship distress
alerts, including those directed to specifically
defined geographical areas; and
.1.4 transmitting and receiving general radiocom-
munications, using either radiotelephony or
direct-printing telegraphy;
.2 an MF radio installation capable of transmit-
ting and receiving, for distress and safety pur-
poses, on the frequencies:
.2.1 2,187.5 kHz using DSC; and
.2.2 2,182 kHz using radiotelephony;
.3 a radio installation capable of maintaining a
continuous DSC watch on the frequency
2,187.5 kHz which may be separate from, or
combined with, that required by 14.10.1.2.1;
and
Chapter 1
Page 14–5
.4 means of initiating the transmission of ship-to-
shore distress alerts by a radio service operat-
ing either:
.4.1 through the polar orbiting service on 406
MHz; this requirement may be fulfilled by the
satellite EPIRB, required by 14.7.1.6, either by
installing the satellite EPIRB close to, or by
remote activation from, the position from
which the craft is normally navigated; or
.4.2 on HF using DSC; or
.4.3 through the Inmarsat geostationary satellite
service, by an additional ship earth station or
by the satellite EPIRB required by 14.7.1.6, ei-
ther by installing the satellite EPIRB close to,
or by remote activation from, the position from
which the craft is normally navigated.
14.10.2 In addition to meeting the requirements of
14.7, every craft engaged on voyages beyond sea
areas A1 and A2, but remaining within sea area A3,
shall, if it does not comply with the requirements of
14.10.1, be provided with:
.1 an MF/HF radio installation capable of trans-
mitting and receiving, for distress and safety
purposes, on all distress and safety frequencies
in the bands between 1,605 kHz and 4,000 kHz
and between 4,000 kHz and 27,500 kHz:
.1.1 using DSC;
.1.2 using radiotelephony; and
.1.3 using direct-printing telegraphy;
.2 equipment capable of maintaining a DSC
watch on 2,187.5 kHz, 8,414.5 kHz and on at
least one of the distress and safety DSC fre-
quencies 4,207.5 kHz, 6,312 kHz, 12,577 kHz
or 1 6,804.5 kHz at any time, it shall be possi-
ble to select any of these DSC distress and
safety frequencies. This equipment may be
separate from, or combined with, the equip-
ment required by 14.10.2.1;
.3 means of initiating the transmission of ship-to-
shore distress alerts by a radiocommunication
service other than HF operating either:
.3.1 through the polar orbiting satellite service on
406 MHz; this requirement may be fulfilled by
the satellite EPIRB required by 14.7.1.6, either
by installing the satellite EPIRB close to, or by
remote activation from, the position from
which the craft is normally navigated; or
.3.2 through the Inmarsat geostationary satellite
service, this requirement may be fulfilled by:
.3.2.1 an Inmarsat ship earth station; or
.3.2.2 the satellite EPIRB, required by 14.7.1.6, ei-
ther by installing the satellite EPIRB close to,
Chapter 1 Section 14 Radiocommunications
Page 14–6
or by remote activation from, the position from
which the craft is normally navigated; and
.4 in addition, the craft shall be capable of trans-
mitting and receiving general radiocommuni-
cations using radiotelephony or direct-printing
telegraphy by an MF/HF radio installation op-
erating on working frequencies in the bands
between 1,605 kHz and 4,000 kHz and between
4,000 kHz and 27,500 kHz. This requirement
may be fulfilled by the addition of this capabil-
ity in the equipment required by 14.10.2.1.
14.10.3 It shall be possible to initiate transmission of
distress alerts by the radio installations specified in
14.10.1.1, 14.10.1.2, 14.10.1.4, 14.10.2.1 and
14.10.2.3 from the position from which the craft is
normally navigated.
14.11 Radio Equipment: Sea Areas A1, A2, A3
and A4
In addition to meeting the requirements of 14.7, craft
engaged on voyages in all sea areas shall be provided
with the radio installations and equipment required by
14.10.2, except that the equipment required by
14.10.2.3.2 shall not be accepted as an alternative to
that required by 14.10.2.3.1, which shall always be
provided. In addition, craft engaged on voyages in all
sea areas shall comply with the requirements of
14.10.3.
14.12 Watches
14.12.1 Every craft, while at sea, shall maintain a
continuous watch:
.1 on VHF DSC channel 70, if the craft, in accor-
dance with the requirements of 14.7.1.2, is fit-
ted with a VHF radio installation;
.2 on the distress and safety DSC frequency
2,187.5 kHz, if the craft, in accordance with the
requirements of 14.9.1.2 or 14.10.1.3, is fitted
with an MF radio installation;
.3 on the distress and safety DSC frequencies
2,187.5 kHz and 8,414.5 kHz and also on at
least one of the distress and safety DSC fre-
quencies 4,207.5 kHz, 6,312 kHz, 12,577 kHz
or 16,804.5 kHz, appropriate to the time of day
and the geographical position of the craft, if
the craft, in accordance with the requirements
of 14.10.2.2 or 14.11.1, is fitted with an
MF/HF radio installation. This watch may be
kept by means of a scanning receiver; and
.4 for satellite shore-to-ship distress alerts, if the
craft, in accordance with the requirements of
14.10.1.1, is fitted with an Inmarsat ship earth
station.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
14.12.2 Every craft, while at sea, shall maintain a
radio watch for broadcasts of maritime safety infor-
mation on the appropriate frequency or frequencies on
which such information is broadcast for the area in
which the craft is navigating.
14.12.3 Until 1 February 2005, every craft, while at
sea shall continue to maintain, when practicable, a
continuous listening watch on VHF channel 16. This
watch shall be kept at the position from which the
craft is normally navigated.
14.13 Sources of Energy
14.13.1 There shall be available at all times, while
the craft is at sea, a supply of electrical energy suffi-
cient to operate the radio installations and to charge
any batteries used as part of a reserve source of en-
ergy for the radio installations.
14.13.2 Reserve and emergency sources of energy
shall be provided on every craft to supply radio instal-
lations, for the purpose of conducting distress and
safety radiocommunications, in the event of failure of
the craft's main and emergency sources of electrical
power. The reserve source of energy shall be capable
of simultaneously operating the VHF radio installa-
tion required by 14.7.1.1 and, as appropriate for the
sea area or sea areas for which the craft is equipped,
either the MF radio installation required by 14.9.1.1,
the MF/HF radio installation required by 14.10.2.1 or
14.11.1 or the Inmarsat ship earth station required by
14.10.1.1 and any of the additional loads mentioned in
14.13.5 and 14.13.8 for a period of at least 1 h.
14.13.3 The reserve source of energy shall be inde-
pendent of the propelling power of the craft and the
craft's electrical system.
14.13.4 Where, in addition to the VHF radio installa-
tion, two or more of the other radio installations re-
ferred to in 14.13.2 can be connected to the reserve
source or sources of energy, they shall be capable of
simultaneously supplying, for the period specified in
14.13.2, the VHF radio installation and:
.1 all other radio installations which can be con-
nected to the reserve source of energy at the
same time; or
.2 whichever of the radio installations will con-
sume the most power, if only one of the other
radio installations can be connected to the re-
serve source of energy at the same time as the
VHF radio installation.
14.13.5 The reserve source of energy may be used to
supply the electrical lighting required by 14.6.2.4.
14.13.6 Where a reserve source of energy consists of
a rechargeable accumulator battery or batteries:
I - Part 3 Section 14 Radiocommunications
GL 2012
.1 a means of automatically charging such batter-
ies shall be provided which shall be capable of
recharging them to minimum capacity re-
quirements within 10 h; and
.2 the capacity of the battery or batteries shall be
checked, using an appropriate method 10, at in-
tervals not exceeding 12 months, when the craft
is not at sea.
14.13.7 The siting and installation of accumulator
batteries which provide a reserve source of energy
shall be such as to ensure:
.1 the highest degree of service;
.2 a reasonable lifetime;
.3 reasonable safety;
.4 that the battery temperatures remain within the
manufacturer's specifications whether under
charge or idle; and
.5 that when fully charged, the batteries will pro-
vide at least the minimum required hours of
operation under all weather conditions.
14.13.8 If an uninterrupted input of information from
the craft's navigational or other equipment to a radio
installation required by this Section is needed to en-
sure its proper performance, including the navigation
receiver referred to in 14.18, means shall be provided
to ensure the continuous supply of such information in
the event of failure of the craft's main or emergency
source of electrical power.
14.14 Performance Standards
14.14.1 All equipment to which this Section applies
shall be of a type approved by the Administration.
Such equipment shall conform to appropriate per-
formance standards not inferior to those adopted by
the Organization 11.
––––––––––––––
10 One method of checking the capacity of an accumulator battery
is to fully discharge and recharge the battery, using normal op-
erating current and period (e.g. 10 h). Assessment of the
charge condition can be made at any time, but it should be
done without significant discharge of the battery when the craft
is at sea.
11 Refer to the following resolutions adopted by the Assembly of
the Organization:
Resolution A.525(13): Performance Standards for Narrow-
Band Direct-Printing Telegraph Equipment for the Reception
of Navigational and Meteorological Warnings and Urgent In-
formation to Ships.
Resolution A.694(17): General Requirements for Shipborne
Radio Equipment Forming Part of the Global Maritime Dis-
tress and Safety System (GMDSS) and for Electronic Naviga-
tional Aids.
Chapter 1
Page 14–7
14.15 Maintenance Requirements
14.15.1 Equipment shall be so designed that the main
units can be replaced readily without elaborate re-
calibration or readjustment.
14.15.2 Where applicable, equipment shall be so
constructed and installed that it is readily accessible
for inspection and on-board maintenance purposes.
14.15.3 Adequate information shall be provided to
enable the equipment to be properly operated and
Resolution A.808(19): Performance Standards for Ship Earth
Stations Capable of Two-Way Communications, and resolution
A.570(14), Type Approval of Ship Earth Stations.
Resolutions A.803(19) and MSC.68(68), annex 1: Performance
Standards for Shipborne VHF Radio installations Capable of
Voice Communication and Digital Selective Calling.
Resolutions A.804(19) and MSC.68(68), annex 2: Performance
Standards for Shipborne MF Radio Installations Capable of
Voice Communication and Digital Selective Calling.
Resolutions A.806(19) and MSC.68(68), annex 3: Performance
Standards for Shipborne MF/HF Radio Installations Capable
of Voice Communication, Narrow-Band Direct Printing and
Digital Selective Calling.
Resolutions A.810(19) and MSC.56(66): Performance Stan-
dards for Float-Free Satellite Emergency Position-Indicating
Radio Beacons (EPIRBs) Operating on 406 MHz (see also As-
sembly resolution A.696(17): Type Approval of Satellite Emer-
gency Position-Indicating Radio Beacons (EPIRBs) Operating
in the COSPAS-SARSAT System).
Resolution A.802(19): Performance Standards for Survival
Craft Radar Transponders for Use in Search and Rescue Op-
erations.
Resolution A.805(19): Performance Standards for Float-Free
VHF Emergency Position-Indicating Radio Beacons.
Resolutions A. 807(19) and MSC.68(68), annex 4: Performance
Standards for Inmarsat Standard-C Ship Earth Stations Capa-
ble of Transmitting and Receiving Direct-Printing Communica-
tions, and resolution A.570(14), Type Approval of Ship Earth
Stations.
Resolution A.664(16): Performance Standards for Enhanced
Group Call Equipment.
Resolution A.812(19): Performance Standards for Float-Free
Satellite Emergency Position-indicating Radio Beacons Oper-
ating Through the Ceostationary Inmarsat Satellite System on
1.6 GHz.
Resolution A.662(16): Performance Standards for Float-Free
Release and Activation Arrangements for Emergency Radio
Equipment.
Resolution A.699(17): System Performance Standard for the
Promulgation and Co-ordination of Maritime Safety Informa-
tion Using High-Frequency Narrow-Band Direct Printing.
Resolution A.700(17): Performance Standards for Narrow-
Band Direct-Printing Telegraph Equipment for the Reception
of Navigational and Meteorological Warnings and Urgent In-
formation to Ships (MSI) by HF.
Resolution MSC.80(70): Recommendation on Performance
Standards for on-scene (Aeronautical) Portable Two-Way VHF
Radiotelephone Apparatus.
Chapter 1 Section 14 Radiocommunications
Page 14–8
maintained, taking into account the recommendations
of the Organization. 12
14.15.4 Adequate tools and spares shall be provided
to enable equipment to be maintained.
14.15.5 The Administration shall ensure that radio
equipment required by this Section is maintained to
provide the availability of the functional requirements
specified in 14.5 and to meet the recommended per-
formance standards of such equipment.
14.15.6 On craft engaged on voyages in sea areas Al
and A2, the availability shall be ensured by using such
methods as duplication of equipment, shore-based
maintenance or at-sea electronic maintenance capa-
bility, or a combination of these, as may be approved
by the Administration.
14.15.7 On craft engaged on voyages in sea areas A3
and A4, the availability shall be ensured by using a
combination of at least two methods, such as duplica-
tion of equipment, shore-based maintenance or at-sea
electronic maintenance capability, as may be ap-
proved by the Administration, taking into account the
recommendations of the Organization. 13
14.15.8 However, for craft operating solely between
ports where adequate facilities for shore-based main-
tenance of the radio installations are available and
provided no journey between two such ports exceeds
six hours, then the Administration may exempt such
craft from the requirement to use at least two mainte-
nance methods. For such craft at least one mainte-
nance method shall be used.
14.15.9 While all reasonable steps shall be taken to
maintain the equipment in efficient working order to
ensure compliance with all the functional require-
ments specified in 14.5, malfunction of the equipment
for providing the general radiocommunications, re-
quired by 14.8, shall not be considered as making a
craft unseaworthy or as a reason for delaying the craft
in ports where repair facilities are not readily avail-
able, provided the craft is capable of performing all
distress and safety functions.
14.15.10 Satellite EPIRBs on all craft shall be:
––––––––––––––
12 Refer to the Recommendation on General Requirements for
Shipborne Radio Equipment Forming Part of the Global Mari-
time Distress and Safety System (GMDSS) and for Electronic
Navigational Aids, adopted by the Organization by resolution
A.694(17).
13
Administrations should take account of the Radio Maintenance
Guidelines for the Global Maritime Distress and Safety System
(GMDSS) related to Sea Areas A3 and A4, adopted by the Or-
ganization by resolution A.702(17).
I - Part 3
GL 2012
.1 annually tested for all aspects of operational
efficiency, with special emphasis on checking
the emission on operational frequencies, cod-
ing and registration, at intervals as specified
below:
.1.1 on passenger craft, within 3 months before the
expiry date of the High-Speed Craft Safety Cer-
tificate; and
.1.2 on cargo craft, within 3 months before the
expiry date, or 3 months before or after the an-
niversary date, of the High-Speed Craft Safety
Certificate;
The test may be conducted on board the craft
or at an approved testing station; and
.2 subject to maintenance at intervals not exceed-
ing five years, to be performed at an approved
shore-based maintenance facility.
14.16 Radio Personnel
14.16.1 Every craft shall carry personnel qualified
for distress and safety radiocommunication purposes
to the satisfaction of the Administration. The person-
nel shall be holders of certificates specified in the
Radio Regulations as appropriate, any one of whom
shall be designated to have primary responsibility for
radiocommunications during distress incidents.
14.16.2 In passenger craft, at least one person quali-
fied in accordance with sub-paragraph .1 shall be
assigned to perform only radiocommunication duties
during distress incidents.
14.17 Radio Records
A record shall be kept, to the satisfaction of the Ad-
ministration and as required by the Radio Regula-
tions, of all incidents connected with the radiocommu-
nication service which appear to be of importance to
safety of life at sea.
14.18 Position-updating
All two-way communication equipment carried on
board craft to which this Section applies which is
capable of automatically including the craft's position
in the distress alert shall be automatically provided
with this information from an internal or external
navigation receiver, if either is installed. If such a
receiver is not installed, the craft's position and the
time that position was correct shall be manually up-
dated at intervals not exceeding four hours, while the
craft is underway, so that it is always ready for trans-
mission by the equipment.
I - Part 3 Section 15 Operating Compartment Layout
GL 2012
Section 15
Operating Compartment Layout
15.1 Definitions
15.1.1 Operating area is the operating compartment
and those parts of the craft on both sides of, and close
to, the operating compartment which extend to the
craft's side.
15.1.2 Workstation is a position at which one or
several tasks constituting a particular activity are
carried out.
15.1.3 Docking workstation is a place equipped with
necessary means for docking the craft.
15.1.4 Primary controls are all control equipment
necessary for the safe operation of the craft when it is
under way, including those required in an emergency
situation.
15.2 General
The design and layout of the compartment from which
the crew operate the craft shall be such as to permit
operating crew members to perform their duties in a
correct manner without unreasonable difficulty, fa-
tigue or concentration, and to minimize the likelihood
of injury to operating crew members in both normal
and emergency conditions
15.3 Field of Vision from the Operating Com-
partment
15.3.1 The operating station shall be placed above
all other superstructures so that the operating crew
are able to gain a view all round the horizon from the
navigating workstation. Where it is impractical to
meet the requirements of this paragraph from a single
navigating workstation, the operating station shall be
designed so that an all-round view of the horizon is
obtained by using two navigating workstations com-
bined or by any other means to the satisfaction of the
Administration.
15.3.2 Blind sectors shall be as few and as small as
possible, and not adversely affect the keeping of a safe
look-out from the operating station. If stiffeners be-
tween windows are to be covered, this shall not cause
further obstruction inside the wheelhouse.
15.3.3 The total arc of blind sectors from right
ahead to 22.5° abaft the beam on either side shall not
exceed 20°. Each individual blind sector shall not
exceed 5°. The clear sector between two blind sectors
shall not be less than 10°.
Chapter 1
Page 15–1
15.3.4 Where it is considered necessary by the Ad-
ministration, the field of vision from the navigating
workstation shall permit the navigators from this
position to utilize leading marks astern of the craft for
track monitoring.
15.3.5 The view of the sea surface from the operat-
ing station, when the navigators are seated, shall not
be obscured by more than one craft length forward of
the bow to 90°on either side irrespective of the craft's
draught, trim and deck cargo.
15.3.6 The field of vision from the docking work-
station, if remote from the operating station, shall
permit one navigator to safely manoeuvre the craft to
a berth.
15.4 Operating Compartment
15.4.1 The design and arrangement of the operating
compartment, including location and layout of the
individual workstations, shall ensure the required field
of vision for each function.
15.4.2 The craft's operating compartment shall not
be used for purposes other than navigation, communi-
cations and other functions essential to the safe opera-
tion of the craft, its engines, passengers and cargo.
15.4.3 The operating compartment shall be provided
with an integrated operating station for command,
navigation, manoeuvring and communication and so
arranged that it can accommodate those persons re-
quired to navigate the craft safely.
15.4.4 The arrangement of equipment and means for
navigation, manoeuvring, control, communication and
other essential instruments shall be located suffi-
ciently close together to enable both the officer in
charge and any assisting officer to receive all neces-
sary information and to use the equipment and con-
trols, as required, while they are seated. If necessary,
the equipment and means serving these functions shall
be duplicated.
15.4.5 If a separate workstation for supervision of
engine performance is placed in the operating com-
partment, the location and use of this workstation
shall not interfere with the primary functions to be
performed in the operating station.
15.4.6 The location of the radio equipment shall not
interfere with the primary navigational functions in
the operating station.
Chapter 1 Section 15 Operating Compartment Layout
Page 15–2
15.4.7 The design and layout of the compartment
from which the crew operate the craft and the relative
positions of the primary controls shall be assessed
against the essential operational manning level.
Where minimum manning levels are proposed, the
design and layout of the primary and communication
controls shall form an integrated operational and
emergency control centre from which the craft can be
controlled under all operational and emergency
events by the operating crew without the necessity for
any crew member to vacate the compartment.
15.4.8 The relative positions of the primary controls
and the seats shall be such that each operating crew
member, with the seat suitably adjusted and without
prejudicing compliance with 15.2, can:
.1 without interference, produce full and unre-
stricted movement of each control both sepa-
rately and with all practical combinations of
movement of other controls; and
.2 at all workstations, exert adequate control
forces for the operation to be performed.
15.4.9 When a seat at a station from which the craft
may be operated has been adjusted so as to suit the
occupant, subsequent change of seat position to oper-
ate any control shall not be acceptable.
15.4.10 In craft where the Administration considers
the provision of a safety belt necessary for use by the
operating crew, it shall be possible for those operating
crew members, with their safety belts correctly worn,
to comply with 15.4.4 except in respect of controls
which it can be shown will only be required on very
rare occasions and which are not associated with the
need for safety restraint.
15.4.11 The integrated operating station shall contain
equipment which provides relevant information to
enable the officer in charge and any assisting officer
to carry out navigational and safety functions safely
and efficiently.
15.4.12 Adequate arrangements shall be made to
prevent passengers from distracting the attention of
the operating crew.
15.5 Instruments and Chart Table
15.5.1 Instruments, instrument panels and controls
shall be permanently mounted in consoles or other
appropriate places, taking into account operation,
maintenance and environmental conditions. However,
this shall not prevent the use of new control or display
techniques, provided the facilities offered are not
inferior to recognized standards.
15.5.2 All instruments shall be logically grouped
according to their functions. in order to reduce to a
minimum the risk of confusion, instruments shall not
I - Part 3
GL 2012
be rationalized by sharing functions or by inter-
switching.
15.5.3 Instruments required for use by any member
of the operating crew shall be plainly visible and eas-
ily read:
.1 with minimum practicable deviation from his
normal seating position and line of vision; and
.2 with the minimum risk of confusion under all
likely operating conditions.
15.5.4 Instruments essential for the safe operation of
the craft shall be clearly marked with any limitation if
this information is not otherwise clearly presented to
the operating crew. The instrument panels forming the
emergency control for the launching of liferafts and
the monitoring of the fire-fighting systems shall be in
separate and clearly defined positions within the op-
erating area.
15.5.5 The instruments and controls shall be pro-
vided with means for screening and dimming in order
to minimize glare and reflections and prevent them
being obscured by strong light.
15.5.6 The surfaces of console tops and instruments
shall have dark glare-free colours.
15.5.7 Instruments and displays providing visual
information to more than one person shall be located
for easy viewing by all users concurrently. If this is
not possible, the instrument or display shall be dupli-
cated.
15.5.8 If considered necessary by the Administra-
tion, the operating compartment shall be provided
with a suitable table for chart work. There shall be
facilities for lighting the chart. Chart-table lighting
shall be screened.
15.6 Lighting
15.6.1 A satisfactory level of lighting shall be avail-
able to enable the operating personnel to adequately
perform all their tasks both at sea and in port, by day
and night. There shall be only a limited reduction in
the illumination of essential instruments and controls
under likely system fault conditions.
15.6.2 Care shall be taken to avoid glare and stray
image reflection in the operating area environment.
High contrast in brightness between work area and
surroundings shall be avoided. Non-reflective or matt
surfaces shall be used to reduce indirect glare to a
minimum.
15.6.3 A satisfactory degree of flexibility within the
lighting system shall be available to enable the oper-
ating personnel to adjust the lighting intensity and
direction as required in the different areas of the op-
I - Part 3 Section 15 Operating Compartment Layout
GL 2012
erating compartment and at individual instruments
and controls.
15.6.4 Red light shall be used to maintain dark ad-
aptation whenever possible in areas or on items of
equipment requiring illumination in the operational
mode, other than the chart table.
15.6.5 During hours of darkness, it shall be possible
to discern displayed information and control devices.
15.6.6 Reference is made to additional requirements
on lighting in 12.7 and 12.8.
15.7 Windows
15.7.1 Divisions between windows, located in the
front, on the sides and in the doors, shall be kept to a
minimum. No division shall be installed immediately
forward of the operating stations.
15.7.2 Administrations shall be satisfied that a clear
view through the operating compartment windows is
provided at all times regardless of weather conditions.
The means provided for maintaining the windows in a
clear condition shall be so arranged that no reasona-
bly probable single failure can result in a reduction of
the cleared field of vision such as to interfere seriously
with the ability of the operating crew to continue the
operation and bring the craft to rest.
15.7.3 Arrangements shall be provided so that the
forward view from operating stations is not adversely
affected by solar glare. Neither polarized nor tinted
window glass shall be fitted.
15.7.4 Operating compartment windows shall be
angled to reduce unwanted reflection.
15.7.5 The windows shall be made of material which
will not break into dangerous fragments if fractured.
Chapter 1
Page 15–3
15.8 Communication Facilities
15.8.1 Such means as are necessary shall be pro-
vided to enable the crew to communicate between, and
have access to, each other and with other occupants of
the craft in both normal and emergency conditions.
15.8.2 Means to communicate between the operating
compartment and spaces containing essential machin-
ery, including any emergency steering position, irre-
spective of whether the machinery is remotely or lo-
cally controlled, shall be provided.
15.8.3 Means for making public address and safety
announcements from control stations to all areas to
which passengers and crew have access shall be pro-
vided.
15.8.4 Provisions shall be made for means to moni-
tor, receive and transmit radio safety messages at the
operating compartment.
15.9 Temperature and Ventilation
The operating compartment shall be equipped with
adequate temperature and ventilation control systems.
15.10 Colours
The surface materials inside the operating compart-
ment shall have a suitable colour and finish to avoid
reflections.
15.11 Safety Measures
The operating area shall be free of physical hazard to
the operating personnel and have non-skid flooring in
dry and wet conditions and adequate handrails. Doors
shall be fitted with devices to prevent them moving,
whether they are open or closed.
I - Part 3 Section 16 Stabilization Systems
GL 2012
Section 16
Stabilization Systems
16.1 Definitions
16.1.1 Stabilization control system is a system in-
tended to stabilize the main parameters of the craft's
attitude: heel, trim, course and height and control the
craft's motions: roll, pitch, yaw and heave. This term
excludes devices not associated with the safe opera-
tion of the craft, e.g. motion-reduction or ride-control
systems.
The main elements of a stabilization control system
may include the following:
.1 devices such as rudders, foils, flaps, skirts,
fans, water jets, tilting and steerable propel-
lers, pumps for moving fluids;
.2 power drives actuating stabilization devices;
and
.3 stabilization equipment for accumulating and
processing data for making decisions and giv-
ing commands such as sensors, logic proces-
sors and automatic safety control.
16.1.2 Self-stabilization of the craft is stabilization
ensured solely by the craft's inherent characteristics.
16.1.3 Forced stabilization of the craft is stabiliza-
tion achieved by:
.1 an automatic control system; or
.2 a manually assisted control system; or
.3 a combined system incorporating elements of
both automatic and manually assisted control
systems.
16.1.4 Augmented stabilization is a combination of
self-stabilization and forced stabilization.
16.1.5 Stabilization device means a device as enu-
merated in 16.1.1.1 with the aid of which forces for
controlling the craft's position are generated.
16.1.6 Automatic safety control is a logic unit for
processing data and making decisions to put the craft
into the displacement or other safe mode if a condition
impairing safety arises.
16.2 General Requirements
16.2.1 Stabilization systems shall be so designed
that, in case of failure or malfunctioning of any one of
the stabilization devices or equipment, it would be
possible either to ensure maintaining the main pa-
rameters of the craft's motion within safe limits with
Chapter 1
Page 16–1
the aid of working stabilization devices or to put the
craft into the displacement or other safe mode.
16.2.2 In case of failure of any automatic equipment
or stabilization device, or of its power drive, the pa-
rameters of craft motion shall remain within safe
limits.
16.2.3 Craft fitted with an automatic stabilization
system shall be provided with an automatic safety
control unless the redundancy in the system provides
equivalent safety. Where an automatic safety control
is fitted, provision shall be made to override it and to
cancel the override from the main operating station.
16.2.4 The parameters and the levels at which any
automatic safety control gives the command to de-
crease speed and put the craft safely in the displace-
ment or other safe mode shall take account of the safe
values of heel, trim, yaw and combination of trim and
draught appropriate to the particular craft and ser-
vice; also to the possible consequences of power fail-
ure for propulsion, lift or stabilization devices.
16.2.5 The parameters and the degree of stabiliza-
tion of the craft provided by the automatic stabiliza-
tion system shall be satisfactory, having regard to the
purpose and service conditions of the craft.
16.2.6 Failure mode and effect analysis shall in-
clude the stabilization system.
16.3 Lateral and Height Control Systems
16.3.1 Craft fitted with an automatic control system
shall be provided with an automatic safety control.
Probable malfunctions shall have only minor effects
on automatic control system operation and shall be
capable of being readily counteracted by the operat-
ing crew.
16.3.2 The parameters and levels at which any
automatic control system gives the command to de-
crease speed and put the craft safely into the dis-
placement or other safe mode shall take account of the
safety levels as given in section 2.4 of annex 3 and of
the safe values of motions appropriate to the particu-
lar craft and service.
16.4 Demonstrations
16.4.1 The limits of safe use of any of the stabiliza-
tion control system devices shall be based on demon-
strations and a verification process in accordance
with annex 9.
Chapter 1 Section 16 Stabilization Systems I - Part 3
Page 16–2 GL 2012

16.4.2 Demonstration in accordance with annex 9 the operation of the craft as may be necessary to en-
shall determine any adverse effects upon safe opera- sure that the redundancy or safeguards in the systems
tion of the craft in the event of an uncontrollable total provide equivalent safety shall be included in the craft
deflection of any one control device. Any limitation on operating manual.
I - Part 3 Section 17 Handling, Controllability and Performance Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 17–1

Section 17

Handling, Controllability and Performance

17.1 General 17.4 Effect of Failures

The operational safety of the craft in normal service
conditions and in equipment failure situations of a
craft to which this Code applies shall be documented
and verified by full-scale tests, supplemented by model
tests where appropriate, of the prototype craft. The
objective of tests is to determine information to be
included in the craft operating manual in relation to:
The effect of any likely failure in handling and control
devices, services or components (e.g. power opera-
tion, power assistance, trimming and stability aug-
mentation) shall be assessed in order that a safe level
of craft operation can be maintained. Effects of failure
identified as being critical according to annex 4 shall
be verified in accordance with annex 9.

.1 operating limitations;
17.5 Controllability and Manoeuvrability
.2 procedures for operation of the craft within the
limitations; 17.5.1 Instructions to crew members shall be pro-
vided in the craft operating manual regarding re-
.3 actions to be taken in the event of prescribed quired actions and craft limitations subsequent to
failure; and prescribed failures.

.4 limitations to be observed for safe operation 17.5.2 It is necessary to ensure that the effort re-
subsequent to prescribed failures. quired to operate the controls in the worst intended
conditions is not such that the person at the control
Operational information shall be available on board will be unduly fatigued or distracted by the effort
for guidance, or the craft shall have an instrument necessary to maintain the safe operation of the craft.
system for on-line check of operational performance
which shall be approved by the Administration taking
17.5.3 The craft shall be controllable and be capa-
into account the standards for the processing and
ble of performing those manoeuvres essential to its
presentation of measurements developed by the Or-
safe operation up to the critical design conditions.
ganization. As a minimum, the system shall measure
accelerations in three axes close to the craft longitu-
17.5.4.1 When determining the operating limitations
dinal centre of gravity.
of a craft, particular attention shall be paid to the
following aspects during normal operation and during
17.2 Proof of Compliance failures and subsequent to failures:
17.2.1 The information on controllability and ma- .1 yawing;
noeuvrability which shall be contained in the craft
operating manual shall include the characteristics .2 turning;
under 17.5 as applicable, the list of parameters of the
worst intended conditions affecting the controllability .3 automatic pilot and steering performance;
and manoeuvrability according to 17.6, information
.4 stopping in normal and emergency conditions;
on safe maximum speeds as described in 17.9 and the
performance data verified in accordance with annex .5 stability in the non-displacement mode about
9. three axes and in heave;
17.2.2 The information on operating limitations .6 trim;
which shall be contained in the route operational
manual shall include the characteristics under 17.2.1, .7 roll;
17.5.4.1 and 17.5.4.2.
.8 plough in;
17.3 Weight and Centre of Gravity .9 lift power limitations;
Compliance with each of the handling, controllability .10 broaching;
and performance requirements shall be established for
all combinations of weight and centre of gravity posi- .11 slamming; and
tion significant for the operational safety in the range
of weights up to the maximum permissible weight. .12 bow diving.
Chapter 1 Section 17 Handling, Controllability and Performance
Page 17–2
17.5.4.2 The terms in 17.5.4.1.2, .6, .7 and .11 are
defined as follows:
.1 "Turning" is the rate of change of direction of a
craft at its normal maximum operating speed in
specified wind and sea conditions.
.2 "Plough in" is an involuntary motion involving
sustained increase in drag of an air-cushion
vehicle at speed, usually associated with par-
tial collapse of the cushion system.
.3 "Lift power limitations" are those limitations
imposed upon the machinery and components
which provide the lift.
.4 "Slamming" is the water impact on the under-
side of the hull in the bow area of the craft.
17.6 Change of Operating Surface and Mode
There shall be no unsafe change in the stability, con-
trollability or attitude of the craft during transition
from one type of operating surface or mode to an-
other. Information on change in the behaviour charac-
teristics of the craft during transition shall be avail-
able to the master.
17.7 Surface Irregularities
Factors which limit the ability of the craft to operate
over sloping ground and steps or discontinuities shall
be determined, as applicable, and made available to
the master.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
17.8 Acceleration and Deceleration
The Administration shall be satisfied that the worst
likely acceleration or deceleration of the craft, due to
any likely failure, emergency stopping procedures or
other likely causes, would not hazard the persons on
the craft.
17.9 Speeds
Safe maximum speeds shall be determined, taking
account of the limitations from 4.3.1, modes of opera-
tion, wind force and direction and the effects of possi-
ble failures of any one lift or propulsion system over
calm water, rough water and over other surfaces, as
appropriate to the craft.
17.10 Minimum Depth of Water
The minimum depth of water and other appropriate
information required for operations in all modes shall
be determined.
17.11 Hard Structure Clearance
For amphibious craft, when cushion-borne, clearance
of the lowest point of the hard structure above a hard
flat surface shall be determined.
17.12 Night Operation
The schedule of tests shall include sufficient operation
to evaluate the adequacy of internal and external
lighting and visibility under conditions of normal and
emergency electrical power supply during service,
cruising and docking manoeuvres.
I - Part 3 Section 18 Operational Requirements
GL 2012
Section 18
Operational Requirements
Part A General
18.1 Craft Operational Control
18.1.1 The High-Speed Craft Safety Certificate, the
Permit to Operate High-Speed Craft or certified cop-
ies thereof, and copies of the route operational man-
ual, craft operating manual, and a copy of such ele-
ments of the maintenance manual as the Administra-
tion may require shall be carried on board.
18.1.2 The craft shall not be intentionally operated
outside the worst intended conditions and limitations
specified in the Permit to Operate High-Speed Craft,
in the High-Speed Craft Safety Certificate, or in
documents referred to therein.
18.1.3 The Administration shall issue a Permit to
Operate High-Speed Craft when it is satisfied that the
operator has made adequate provisions from the point
of view of safety generally, including the following
matters specifically, and shall revoke the Permit to
Operate if such provisions are not maintained to its
satisfaction:
.1 the suitability of the craft for the service in-
tended, having regard to the safety limitations
and information contained in the route opera-
tional manual;
.2 the suitability of the operating conditions in the
route operational manual;
.3 the arrangements for obtaining weather infor-
mation on the basis of which the commence-
ment of a voyage may be authorized;
.4 provision in the area of operation of a base
port having functions and facilities in accor-
dance with the requirements of this Code;
.5 the designation of the person responsible for
decisions to cancel or delay a particular voy-
age, e.g. in the light of the weather information
available;
.6 sufficient crew complement required for oper-
ating the craft, deploying and manning survival
craft, the supervision of passengers, vehicles
and cargo in both normal and emergency con-
ditions as defined in the Permit to Operate. The
crew complement shall be such that two offi-
cers are on duty in the operating compartment
when the craft is under way, one of whom may
be the master;
Chapter 1
Page 18–1
.7 crew qualifications and training, including
competence in relation to the particular type of
craft and service intended, and their instruc-
tions in regard to safe operational procedures;
.8 restrictions with regard to working hours,
rostering of crews and any other arrangements
to prevent fatigue, including adequate rest pe-
riods;
.9 the training of crew in craft operation and
emergency procedures;
.10 the maintenance of crew competence in regard
to operation and emergency procedures;
.11 safety arrangements at terminals and compli-
ance with any existing safety arrangements, as
appropriate;
.12 traffic control arrangements and compliance
with any existing traffic control, as appropri-
ate;
.13 restrictions and/or provisions relating to posi-
tion fixing and to operation by night or in re-
stricted visibility, including the use of radar
and/or other electronic aids to navigation, as
appropriate;
.14 additional equipment which may be required,
due to the specific characteristics of the service
intended, for example, night operation;
.15 communication arrangements between craft,
coast radio stations, base ports radio stations,
emergency services and other ships, including
radio frequencies to be used and watch to be
kept;
.16 the keeping of records to enable the Admini-
stration to verify:
.16.1 that the craft is operated within the specified
parameters,
.16.2 the observance of emergency and safety
drills/procedures;
.16.3 the hours worked by the operating crew;
.16.4 the number of passengers on board;
.16.5 compliance with any law to which the craft is
subject;
.16.6 craft operations; and
.16.7 maintenance of the craft and its machinery in
accordance with approved schedules;
Chapter 1 Section 18 Operational Requirements
Page 18–2
.17 arrangements to ensure that equipment is
maintained in compliance with the Administra-
tion's requirements, and to ensure co-
ordination of information as to the serviceabil-
ity of the craft and equipment between the op-
erating and maintenance elements of the op-
erator's organization;
.18 the existence and use of adequate instructions
regarding:
.18.1 loading of the craft so that weight and centre of
gravity limitations can be effectively observed
and cargo is, when necessary, adequately se-
cured;
.18.2 the provision of adequate fuel reserves;
.18.3 action in the event of reasonable foreseeable
emergencies; and
.19 provision of contingency plans by operators for
foreseeable incidents including all land-based
activities for each scenario. The plans shall
provide operating crews with information re-
garding search and rescue (SAR) authorities
and local administrations and organizations
which may complement the tasks undertaken by
crews with the equipment available to them. 1
18.1.4 The Administration shall determine the
maximum allowable distance from a base port or
place of refuge after assessing the provisions made
under 18.1.3.
18.1.5 The master shall ensure that an effective
system of supervision and reporting of the closing and
opening of accesses referred to in 2.2.4.2 and 2.2.4.3
is implemented
18.2 Craft Documentation
The company shall ensure that the craft is provided
with adequate information and guidance in the form of
technical manual(s) to enable the craft to be operated
and maintained safely. The technical manual(s) shall
consist of a route operational manual, craft operating
manual, training manual, maintenance manual and
servicing schedule. Arrangements shall be made for
such information to be updated as necessary.
18.2.1 Craft operating manual
The craft operating manual shall contain at least the
following information:
.1 leading particulars of the craft;
.2 description of the craft and its equipment;
––––––––––––––
1 Refer to the IMO Search and Rescue Manual (IMOSAR),
adopted by the Organization by resolution A.439(XI), and Use of
Radar Transponders for Search and Rescue Purposes, adopted
by resolution A.530(13).
I - Part 3
GL 2012
.3 procedures for checking the integrity of buoy-
ancy compartments;
.4 details arising from compliance with the re-
quirements of Section 2 likely to be of direct
practical use to the crew in an emergency;
.5 damage control procedures (e.g. information in
a damage control plan required by SOLAS
regulation II-1/23 or II-1/25-8.2, as appropri-
ate);
.6 description and operation of machinery sys-
tems;
.7 description and operation of auxiliary systems;
.8 description and operation of remote control
and warning systems;
.9 description and operation of electrical equip-
ment;
.10 loading procedures and limitations, including
maximum operational weight, centre of gravity
position and distribution of load, including any
cargo or car securing arrangement and proce-
dures depending on operational restrictions or
damaged conditions. Such arrangement and
procedures shall not be included as a separate
Cargo Securing Manual as required by chapter
VI of the Convention;
.11 description and operation of fire-detection and
fire-extinguishing equipment;
.12 drawings indicating the structural fire protec-
tion arrangements;
.13 description and operation of radio equipment
and navigational aids;
.14 information regarding the handling of the craft
as determined in accordance with Section 17;
.15 maximum permissible towing speeds and tow-
ing loads, where applicable;
.16 procedure for dry-docking or lifting, including
limitations;
.17 in particular, the manual shall provide infor-
mation, in clearly defined chapters, relating to:
.17.1 indication of emergency situations or malfunc-
tions jeopardizing safety, required actions to
be taken and any consequential restrictions on
operation of the craft or its machinery;
.17.2 evacuation procedures;
.17.3 the worst intended conditions;
.17.4 limiting values of all machinery parameters
requiring compliance for safe operation.
I - Part 3 Section 18 Operational Requirements Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 18–3

In regard to information on machinery or sys- .1 donning lifejackets and immersion suits, as

tem failures, data shall take into account the appropriate;
results of any FMEA reports developed during
the craft design. .2 muster at the assigned stations;

18.2.2 Route operational manual .3 boarding, launching and clearing the survival
craft and rescue boats;
The route operational manual shall include at least
the following information: .4 method of launching from within the survival
craft;
.1 evacuation procedures;
.5 release from launching appliances;
.2 operating limitations, including the worst in-
tended conditions; .6 methods and use of devices for protection in
launching areas, where appropriate;
.3 procedures for operation of the craft within the
limitations of .2; .7 illumination in launching areas;

.4 the elements of applicable contingency plans .8 use of all survival equipment;

for primary and secondary rescue assistance in
the case of foreseeable incidents, including
land-based arrangements and activities for
each incident;
.5 arrangements for obtaining weather informa-
tion;
.6 identification of the "base port(s)";
.7 identification of the person responsible for
decisions to cancel or delay voyages;
.8 identification of crew complement, functions
and qualifications;
.9 restrictions on working hours of crew;
.10 safety arrangements at terminals;
.11 traffic control arrangements and limitations, as
appropriate;
.12 specific route conditions or requirements relat-
ing to position fixing, operations by night and
in restricted visibility, including the use of ra-
dar or other electronic aids to navigation; and
.13 communication arrangements between craft,
coast radio stations, base ports radio stations,
emergency services and other ships, including
radio frequencies to be used and watch to be
kept.
18.2.3 Training manual
The training manual, which may comprise several
volumes, shall contain instructions and information, in
easily understood terms, illustrated wherever possible,
on evacuation, fire and damage control appliances
and systems and on the best methods of survival. Any
part of such information may be provided in the form
of audio-visual aids in lieu of the manual. Where ap-
propriate, the contents of the training manual may be
included in the craft operating manual. The following
shall be explained in detail:
.9 use of all detection equipment;
.10 with the assistance of illustrations, the use of
radio life-saving appliances;
.11 use of drogues;
.12 use of engine and accessories;
.13 recovery of survival craft and rescue boats,
including stowage and securing;
.14 hazards of exposure and the need for warm
clothing;
.15 best use of the survival craft facilities in order
to survive;
.16 methods of retrieval, including the use of heli-
copter rescue gear (slings, baskets, stretchers),
breeches-buoy and shore life-saving apparatus
and craft's line-throwing apparatus;
.17 all other functions contained in the muster list
and emergency instructions;
.18 instructions for emergency repair of the life-
saving appliances;
.19 instructions in the use of fire protection and
fire-extinguishing appliances and systems;
.20 guidelines for use of firefighter's outfit in a fire,
if fitted;
.21 use of alarms and communications associated
with fire safety;
.22 methods for surveying damage;
.23 use of damage control appliances and systems,
including operation of watertight doors and
bilge pumps; and
.24 for passenger craft, control of and communica-
tion with passengers in an emergency.
Chapter 1 Section 18 Operational Requirements
Page 18–4
18.2.4 Maintenance and servicing manual/system
The craft maintenance and servicing manual/system
shall contain as a minimum:
.1 detailed, illustrated description of all craft
structure, machinery installations and all in-
stalled equipment and systems required for safe
operation of the craft;
.2 specifications and quantities of all replenish-
able fluids and of structural materials which
may be required for repairs;
.3 operational limitations of machinery in terms
of values of parameters, vibration and con-
sumption of replenished fluids;
.4 limitations of wear of structure or machinery
components, including lives of components re-
quiring calendar or operating time replace-
ment;
.5 detailed description of procedures, including
any safety precautions to be taken or special
equipment required, to remove and install main
and auxiliary machinery, transmissions, pro-
pulsion and lift devices and flexible structure
components;
.6 test procedures to be followed subsequent to
replacement of machinery or system compo-
nents or for malfunction diagnosis;
.7 procedure for lifting or dry-docking the craft,
including any weight or attitude limitations;
.8 procedure for weighing the craft and establish-
ing the position of longitudinal centre of grav-
ity (LCG);
.9 where craft may be dismantled for transporta-
tion, instructions shall be provided for disman-
tling, transport and re-assembly;
.10 a servicing schedule, included in the mainte-
nance manual or published separately, detail-
ing the routine servicing and maintenance op-
erations required to maintain the operational
safety of the craft and its machinery and sys-
tems.
18.2.5 Information on passengers
18.2.5.1 All persons on board passenger craft shall be
counted prior to departure.
18.2.5.2 Details of persons who have declared a need
for special care or assistance in emergency situations
shall be recorded and communicated to the master
prior to departure.
18.2.5.3 The names and gender of all persons on
board, distinguished between adults, children and
infants shall be recorded for search and rescue pur-
poses.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
18.2.5.4 The information required by 18.2.5.1,
18.2.5.2 and 18.2.5.3 shall be kept ashore and made
readily available to search and rescue services when
needed.
18.2.5.5 The Administration may exempt from the
requirements of 18.2.5.3 passenger craft operating on
voyages having a duration of 2 h or less between each
port of call.
18.3 Training and Qualifications
18.3.1 The level of competence and the training
considered necessary in respect of the master and
each crew member shall be laid down and demon-
strated in the light of the following guidelines to the
satisfaction of the company in respect of the particular
type and model of craft concerned and the service
intended. More than one crew member shall be
trained to perform all essential operational tasks in
both normal and emergency situations.
18.3.2 The Administration shall specify an appro-
priate period of operational training for the master
and each member of the crew and, if necessary, the
periods at which appropriate retraining shall be car-
ried out.
18.3.3 The Administration shall issue a type rating
certificate to the master and all officers having an
operational role following an appropriate period of
operational/simulator training and on the conclusion
of an examination including practical test commensu-
rate with the operational tasks on board the particular
type and model of craft concerned and the route fol-
lowed. The type rating training shall cover at least the
following items:
.1 knowledge of all on-board propulsion and
control systems, including communication and
navigational equipment, steering, electrical,
hydraulic and pneumatic systems and bilge and
fire pumping;
.2 the failure mode of the control, steering and
propulsion systems and proper response to
such failures;
.3 handling characteristics of the craft and the
limiting operational conditions;
.4 bridge communication and navigation proce-
dures;
.5 intact and damage stability and survivability of
the craft in damage condition;
.6 location and use of the craft's life-saving appli-
ances, including survival craft equipment;
.7 location and use of escapes in the craft and the
evacuation of passengers;
I - Part 3 Section 18 Operational Requirements
GL 2012
.8 location and use of fire protection and fire-
extinguishing appliances and systems in the
event of fire on board;
.9 location and use of damage control appliances
and systems, including operation of watertight
doors and bilge pumps;
.10 cargo and vehicle stowage and securing sys-
tems;
.11 methods for control of and communication with
passengers in an emergency; and
.12 location and use of all other items listed in the
training manual.
18.3.4 The type rating certificate for a particular
type and model of craft should only be valid for ser-
vice on the route to be followed when it is so endorsed
by the Administration following the completion of a
practical test over that route.
18.3.5 The type rating certificate shall be re-
validated every two years and the Administration shall
lay down the procedures for re-validation.
18.3.6 All crew members shall receive instructions
and training, as specified in 18.3.3.6 to .12.
18.3.7 The Administration shall specify standards of
physical fitness and frequency of medical examina-
tions, having regard to the route and craft concerned.
18.3.8 The Administration of the country in which
the craft is to operate, if other than the flag State,
shall be satisfied with the training, experience and
qualifications of the master and each crew member. A
valid certificate of competency or a valid license ap-
propriately endorsed, in accordance with the provi-
sions of the International Convention on Standards of
Training, Certification and Watchkeeping (STCW)
1978, as amended, held by the master or crew, shall
be acceptable as evidence of satisfactory training and
experience to the Administration of the country in
which the craft is to operate.
18.4 Manning of survival craft and supervision
The company and the master shall ensure that:
.1 a sufficient number of trained persons are on
board for mustering and assisting untrained
persons;
.2 a sufficient number of crew members, who may
be deck officers or certificated persons, are on
board for operating the survival craft, rescue
boats and launching arrangements required for
abandonment by the total number of persons
on board;
.3 a deck officer or certificated person is placed
in charge of each survival craft to be used rec-
ognizing, however, that the Administration,
Chapter 1
Page 18–5
having due regard to the nature of the voyage,
the number of persons on board and the char-
acteristics of the craft, may permit a deck offi-
cer, certificated person or persons practised in
the handling and operation of liferafts to be
placed in charge of each liferaft or group of
liferafts;
.4 the person in charge of survival craft has a list
of the survival craft crew and sees that those
crew members are acquainted with their du-
ties;
.5 every rescue boat and lifeboat has a person
assigned who is capable of operating the en-
gine and carrying out minor adjustments; and
.6 the persons referred to in .1 to .3 are equitably
distributed among the craft's survival craft.
18.5 Emergency Instructions and Drills
18.5.1 The company shall ensure that the emergency
instructions and drills referred to in 18.5.1 to 18.5.10
are implemented, and the master shall be responsible
for the enforcement of these instructions and drills on
board. On or before departure, passengers shall be
instructed in the use of lifejackets and the action to be
taken in an emergency. The attention of the passen-
gers shall be drawn to the emergency instructions
required by 8.4.1 and 8.4.3.
18.5.2 Emergency fire and evacuation drills for the
crew shall be held on board the craft at intervals not
exceeding one week for passenger craft and one
month for cargo craft.
18.5.3 Each member of each crew shall participate
in at least one evacuation, fire and damage control
drill per month.
18.5.4 On-board drills shall, as far as practicable,
be conducted to simulate an actual emergency. Such
simulations shall include instruction and operation of
the craft's evacuation, fire and damage control appli-
ances and systems.
18.5.5 On-board instruction and operation of the
craft's evacuation, fire and damage control appliances
and systems shall include appropriate cross-training
of crew members.
18.5.6 Emergency instructions including a general
diagram of the craft showing the location of all exits,
routes of evacuation, assigned assembly stations,
emergency equipment, life-saving equipment and
appliances and illustration of lifejacket donning shall
be available to each passenger and crew member in
appropriate languages. It shall be placed near each
passenger and crew seat and conspicuously displayed
at assembly stations and other passenger spaces.
Chapter 1 Section 18 Operational Requirements
Page 18–6
18.5.7 Records
18.5.7.1 The date when musters are held, details of
abandon craft drills and fire drills, drills of other life-
saving appliances and on-board training shall be
recorded in such log-book as may be prescribed by the
Administration. If a full muster, drill or training ses-
sion is not held at the appointed time, an entry shall
be made in the log-book stating the circumstances and
the extent of the muster, drill or training session held.
A copy of such information shall be forwarded to the
operator's management.
18.5.7.2 The master shall ensure, before the craft
leaves the berth on any voyage, that a record is made
of the time of the last closing of the accesses referred
to 2.2.4.2 and 2.2.4.3.
18.5.8 Evacuation drills
18.5.8.1 Evacuation drill scenarios shall vary each
week so that different emergency conditions are simu-
lated.
18.5.8.2 Each evacuation craft drill shall include:
.1 summoning of crew to assembly stations with
the alarm required by 8.2.2.2 and ensuring that
they are made aware of the order to abandon
craft specified in the muster list;
.2 reporting to stations and preparing for the
duties described in the muster list;
.3 checking that crew are suitably dressed;
.4 checking that lifejackets are correctly donned;
.5 operation of davits if any used for launching
liferafts;
.6 donning of immersion suits or thermal protec-
tive clothing by appropriate crew members;
.7 testing of emergency lighting for mustering and
abandonment; and
.8 giving instructions in the use of the craft's life-
saving appliances and in survival at sea.
18.5.8.3 Rescue boat drill
.1 As far as is reasonable and practicable, rescue
boats shall be launched each month as part of
the evacuation drill, with their assigned crew
aboard, and manoeuvred in the water. in all
cases this requirement shall be complied with
at least once every three months.
.2 If rescue boat launching drills are carried out
with the craft making headway, such drills
shall, because of the dangers involved, be prac-
tised in sheltered waters only and under the
I - Part 3
GL 2012
supervision of an officer experienced in such
drills. *
18.5.8.4 Individual instructions may cover different
parts of the craft's life-saving system, but all the
craft's life-saving equipment and appliances shall be
covered within any period of one month on passenger
craft and two months on cargo craft. Each member of
the crew shall be given instructions which shall in-
clude but not necessarily be limited to:
.1 operation and use of the craft's inflatable lif-
erafts;
.2 problems of hypothermia, first-aid treatment of
hypothermia and other appropriate first-aid
procedures; and
.3 special instructions necessary for use of the
craft's life-saving appliances in severe weather
and severe sea conditions.
18.5.8.5 On-board training in the use of davit-
launched liferafts shall take place at intervals of not
more than four months on every craft fitted with such
appliances. Whenever practicable, this shall include
the inflation and lowering of a liferaft. This liferaft
may be a special liferaft intended for training pur-
poses only, which is not part of the craft's life-saving
equipment. Such a special liferaft shall be conspicu-
ously marked.
18.5.9 Fire drills
18.5.9.1 Fire drill scenarios shall vary each week so
that emergency conditions are simulated for different
craft compartments.
18.5.9.2 Each fire drill shall include:
.1 summoning of crew to fire stations;
.2 reporting to stations and preparing for the
duties described in the muster list;
.3 donning of firefighter's outfits;
.4 operation of fire doors and fire dampers;
.5 operation of fire pumps and fire-fighting
equipment;
.6 operation of communication equipment, emer-
gency signals and general alarm;
7 operation of fire-detection system; and
.8 instruction in the use of the craft's fire-fighting
equipment and sprinkler and drencher systems,
if fitted.
––––––––––––––
* Refer to resolution A.624(15) concerning guidelines on training
for the purpose of launching lifeboats and rescue boats from
ships making headway through the water.
I - Part 3 Section 18 Operational Requirements Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 18–7

18.5.10 Damage control drills type rating training shall cover the control and
evacuation of passengers additionally to 18.3.5.
18.5.10.1 Damage control drill scenarios shall vary
each week so that emergency conditions are simulated
for different damage conditions. 18.6.2 When a craft carries cargoes, the craft shall
comply with the requirements of part C of this Section
18.5.10.2 Each damage control drill shall include:
in addition to this part.
.1 summoning of crew to damage control stations;
.2 reporting to stations and preparing for the 18.7 Emergency Instructions and Drills
duties described in the muster list;
.3 operation of watertight doors and other water-
18.7.1 The company shall ensure that the emergency
tight closures;
instructions are implemented, and the master shall be
.4 operation of bilge pumps and testing of bilge responsible for communicating the provisions of the
alarms and automatic bilge pump starting sys- emergency instructions to passenger upon boarding.
tems; and
.5 instruction in damage survey, use of the craft Part C - Requirements for Cargo Craft
damage control systems and passenger control
in the event of an emergency.
18.8 Type Rating Training
Part B - Requirements for Passenger Craft

18.6 Type Rating Training The company shall ensure that type rating training is
implemented as provided in 18.3. For all crew mem-
18.6.1 The company shall ensure that the type rating bers, the type rating training shall cover knowledge of
training is implemented. For all crew members, the cargo and vehicles storage area securement systems.
I - Part 3 Section 19 Inspection and Maintenance Requirements
GL 2012
Section 19
Inspection and Maintenance Requirements
19.1 The Administration shall be satisfied with the
operator's organization or any organization on which
he may call in the maintenance of his craft and shall
specify the scope of the duties which any part of the
organization may carry out, having regard to the
number and competence of its staff, facilities avail-
able, arrangements for calling on specialist assistance
should it be necessary, record-keeping, communica-
tion and allocation of responsibilities.
19.2 The craft and equipment shall be maintained
to the satisfaction of the Administration; in particular:
.1 routine preventive inspection and maintenance
shall be performed to a schedule approved by
the Administration, which shall have regard at
least in the first instance to the manufacturer's
schedule;
.2 in the performance of maintenance tasks, due
regard shall be paid to maintenance manuals,
service bulletins acceptable to the Administra-
tion and to any additional instructions of the
Administration in this respect;
.3 all modifications shall be recorded and their
safety aspects investigated. Where it could have
any effect on safety, the modification, together
with its installation, shall be to the satisfaction
of the Administration;
Chapter 1
Page 19–1
.4 appropriate arrangements shall be provided
for informing the master of the serviceability
state of his craft and its equipment;
.5 the duties of the operating crew in respect of
maintenance and repairs and the procedure for
obtaining assistance with repairs when the
craft is away from the base port shall be
clearly defined;
.6 the master shall report to the maintenance
organization any defects and repairs which are
known to have occurred during operations;
.7 records of defects and their correction shall be
maintained and those defects of recurrent na-
ture, or those which adversely affect craft or
personal safety, shall be reported to the Ad-
ministration.
19.3 The Administration shall be satisfied that
arrangements are provided for ensuring adequate
inspection, maintenance and recording of all life-
saving appliances and distress signals carried.
I - Part 3 Annex 1 Form of High-Speed Craft Safety Certificate and Record of Chapter 1
GL 2012 Equipment Page 1–1

Annex 1

Form of High-Speed Craft Safety Certificate and Record of Equipment

HIGH-SPEED CRAFT SAFETY CERTIFICATE

This Certificate shall be supplemented by a Record of Equipment

(Official seal) (State)

Issued under the provisions of the
INTERNATIONAL CODE OF SAFETY FOR HIGH-SPEED CRAFT, 2000
(resolution MSC.97(73))

under the authority of the Government of

…………………………………………………………………..
(full designation of the State)

by…………………………………………………………………
(full official designation of the competent person or
organization authorized by the Administration)

Particulars of craft1
Name of craft ……………………………………………………………………………………
Manufacturer's model and hull number ………………………………………………………
Distinctive number or letters …………………………………………………………………..
IMO number 2……………………………………………………………………………………..
Port of registry …………………………………………………………………………………..
Gross tonnage …………………………………………………………………………………..
Sea areas in which the craft is certified to operate (paragraph 14.2.1)……………………
Design waterline corresponding to a height of ……below the reference line at the longitudinal centre of flotation,
and draughts at the draught marks of …… forward and ……… aft
The upper edge of the reference line is……… at (……… mm below uppermost deck at side) 3 (………… mm above
the underside of keel)* at longitudinal centre of flotation.
Category category A passenger craft/category B passenger craft/cargo craft 3
Craft type air-cushion vehicle/surface-effect ship/hydrofoil/monohull/multihull/other (give
detail……………)

––––––––––––––
1 Alternatively, the particulars of the craft may be placed horizontally in boxes.
2 In accordance with the IMO ship identification number scheme, adopted by the Organization by resolution A.600(15).
3 Delete as appropriate.
Chapter 1 Annex 1 Form of High-Speed Craft Safety Certificate and Record of I - Part 3
Page 1–2 Equipment GL 2012

Date on which keel was laid or craft was at

a similar stage of construction or on which
a major conversion was commenced…………………………………………………………….

THIS IS TO CERTIFY:
1 That the above-mentioned craft has been duly surveyed in accordance with the applicable provisions of the
International Code of Safety for High-Speed Craft, 2000.

2 That the survey showed that the structure, equipment, fittings, radio station arrangements and materials of
the craft and the condition thereof are in all respects satisfactory and that the craft complies with the relevant provi-
sions of the Code.

3 That the life-saving appliances are provided for a total number of …… persons and no more as follows:
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

4 That, in accordance with 1.11 of the Code, the following equivalents have been granted in respect of the
craft:

paragraph …………………………………… equivalent arrangement ………………………

…………………………………... ………………………

This certificate is valid until 4 ……………….……………………………………………………………

Completion date of the survey on which this certificate is based: ………………………………….

(dd/mm/yyyy)

Issued at …………………………………………………………………………………………………..
(Place of issue of certificate)

…………………. ………………………………………………………………
(Date of issue) (Signature of authorized official issuing the certificate)

……………………………………………………………….
(Seal or stamp of the issuing authority, as appropriate)

––––––––––––––
4 Insert the date of expiry as specified by the Administration in accordance with 1.8.4 of the Code. The day and the month of this date corre-
spond to the anniversary date as defined in 1.4.3 of the Code, unless amended in accordance with 1.8.12.1 of the Code.
I - Part 3 Annex 1 Form of High-Speed Craft Safety Certificate and Record of Chapter 1
GL 2012 Equipment Page 1–3

Endorsement for periodical surveys

This is to certify that, at a survey required by 1.5 of the Code, this craft was found to comply with the relevant provi-
sions of the Code.

Periodical survey: Signed: ………………………………………………

(Signature of authorized official)

Place: ……………………………………………….

Date: ………………………………………………...

……………………………………………...
(Signature of authorized official)

Periodical survey: Signed: ………………………………………………

(Signature of authorized official)

Place: ……………………………………………….

Date: ………………………………………………...

……………………………………………...
(Signature of authorized official)

Periodical survey: Signed: ………………………………………………

(Signature of authorized official)

Place: ……………………………………………….

Date: ………………………………………………...

……………………………………………...
(Signature of authorized official)

Periodical survey: Signed: ………………………………………………

(Signature of authorized official)

Place: ……………………………………………….

Date: ………………………………………………...

……………………………………………...
(Signature of authorized official)
Chapter 1 Annex 1 Form of High-Speed Craft Safety Certificate and Record of I - Part 3
Page 1–4 Equipment GL 2012

Endorsement to extend the Certificate if valid for less than 5 years where 1.8.8 of the Code applies
This craft complies with the relevant requirements of the Code, and this Certificate shall, in accordance with 1.8.8
of the Code, be accepted as valid until ………………………………….

Signed: ………………………………………………
(Signature of authorized official)

Place: ……………………………………………….

Date: ………………………………………………...

……………………………………………...
(Signature of authorized official)

Endorsement where the renewal survey has been completed and 1.8.9 of the Code applies
This craft complies with the relevant requirements of the Code, and this Certificate shall, in accordance with 1.8.9
of the Code, be accepted as valid until ………………………………....

Signed: ………………………………………………
(Signature of authorized official)

Place: ……………………………………………….

Date: ………………………………………………...

……………………………………………...
(Signature of authorized official)

Endorsement to extend the validity of the Certificate until reaching the port of survey where 1.8.10 of the Code
applies
This Certificate shall, in accordance with 1.8.10 of the Code, be accepted as valid until …………

Signed: ………………………………………………
(Signature of authorized official)

Place: ……………………………………………….

Date: ………………………………………………...

……………………………………………...
(Signature of authorized official)
I - Part 3 Annex 1 Form of High-Speed Craft Safety Certificate and Record of Chapter 1
GL 2012 Equipment Page 1–5

Endorsement for the advancement of the anniversary date where 1.8.12 of the Code applies
In accordance with 1.8.12 of the Code, the new anniversary date is …………………………..

Signed: ………………………………………………
(Signature of authorized official)

Place: ……………………………………………….

Date: ………………………………………………...

……………………………………………...
(Signature of authorized official)

In accordance with 1.8.13 of the Code, the new anniversary date is ……………………………

Signed: ………………………………………………
(Signature of authorized official)

Place: ……………………………………………….

Date: ………………………………………………...

……………………………………………...
(Signature of authorized official)
Chapter 1 Annex 1 Form of High-Speed Craft Safety Certificate and Record of I - Part 3
Page 1–6 Equipment GL 2012

RECORD OF EQUIPMENT FOR

HIGH-SPEED CRAFT SAFETY CERTIFICATE

This Record shall be permanently attached to the

High-Speed Craft Safety Certificate

RECORD OF EQUIPMENT FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE

INTERNATIONAL CODE OF SAFETY
FOR HIGH-SPEED CRAFT, 2000

1 Particulars of craft

Name of craft …………………………………………………………………………………….

Manufacturer's model and hull number ……………………………………………………….

Distinctive number or letters ……………………………………………………………………

IMO number 5 ……………………………………………………………………………………..

Category: category A passenger craft/category B passenger craft/cargo craft 6

Craft type: air-cushion vehicle, surface-effect ship, hydrofoil, monohull, multihull, other
(give detail ………………………………………………………………………) 6

Number of passengers for which certified ……………………………………………………

Minimum number of persons with required qualifications to operate the radio installations
……………………………

––––––––––––––
5 In accordance with the IMO ship identification number scheme adopted by the Organization by resolution A.600(15).
6 Delete as appropriate.
I - Part 3 Annex 1 Form of High-Speed Craft Safety Certificate and Record of Chapter 1
GL 2012 Equipment Page 1–7

2 Details of live-saving appliances

1 Total number of persons for which life-saving appliances are provided …………………….
2 Total number of lifeboats …………………….

2.1 Total number of persons accommodated by …………………….

Number of partially enclosed lifeboats complying with section 4.5 of the LSA …………………….
2.2
Code
Number of partially enclosed lifeboats complying with sections 4.6 and 4.7 of …………………….
2.3
the LSA Code

2.4 Other lifeboats …………………….

2.4.1 Number …………………….

2.4.2 Type …………………….

3 Number of rescue boat …………………….

3.1 Number of rescue boats which are included in the total lifeboats shown above …………………….

Liferafts complying with sections 4.1 to 4.3 of the LSA Code for which suitable …………………….
4
means of launching are provided
4.1 Number of liferafts …………………….

4.2 Number of persons accommodated by them …………………….

5 Open reversible lifeboats (Annex 11 of the Code) …………………….

5.1 Number of liferafts …………………….

5.2 Number of persons accommodated by them …………………….

6 Number of Marine Evacuation System (MES) …………………….

6.1 Number of persons served by them …………………….

7 Number of lifebuoys …………………….

8 Number of lifejackets …………………….

8.1 Number of suitable for adults …………………….

8.2 Number of suitable of children …………………….

9 Immersion suits …………………….

9.1 Total number …………………….

9.2 Number of suits complying with the requirements for lifejackets …………………….

10 Number of anti-explore suits …………………….

10.1 Total number …………………….

10.2 Number of suits complying with the requirements for lifejackets …………………….

11 Radio installations used in life-saving appliances …………………….

11.1 Number of radar transporters …………………….

11.2 Number of two-way VHF radiotelephone apparatus …………………….

10
Chapter 1 Annex 1 Form of High-Speed Craft Safety Certificate and Record of I - Part 3
Page 1–8 Equipment GL 2012

3 Details of navigational systems and equipment

1.1 Magnetic compass …………………….

1.2 Transmitting heading device (THD) …………………….

1.3 Gyro-compass …………………….

2 Speed and distance measuring device …………………….

3 Echo-sounding device …………………….

4.1 9 GHz radar …………………….

4.2 Second radar (3 GHz/9 GHz 7) …………………….

4.3 Automatic radar plotting aid (ARPA)/Automatic tracking aid (ATA)* …………………….

Receiver for global navigation satellite system/ Terrestrial navigation system/

5 …………………….
Other means of position fixing 7,8

6.1 Rate of turn indicator …………………….

6.2 Rudder angle indicator/Direction of steering thrust indicator 7 …………………….

7.1 Nautical charts/Electronic Chart Display and Information System (ECDIS)* …………………….

7.2 Back-up arrangements for ECDIS …………………….

7.3 Nautical publications …………………….

7.4 Back-up arrangement for nautical publications …………………….

8 Search light …………………….

9 Daylight signalling lamp …………………….

10 Night vision equipment …………………….

11 Means to show the mode of the propulsion systems …………………….

12 Automatic identification aid (Automatic pilot) …………………….

13 Radar reflector/ Other means 7,8 …………………….

14 Sound reception system …………………….

15 Automatic identification system (AIS) …………………….

16 Long-range identification and tracking system …………………….

17 Voyage data recorder (VDR) …………………….

––––––––––––––
7 Delete as appropriate
8 In case of “other means” they shall be specified.
I - Part 3 Annex 1 Form of High-Speed Craft Safety Certificate and Record of Chapter 1
GL 2012 Equipment Page 1–9

4 Details of radio facilities

Item Actual provision

1 Primary systems …………………….

1.1 VHF radio installations: …………………….

1.1.1 DSC encoder …………………….

1.1.2 DSC watch receiver …………………….

1.1.3 Radiotelephony …………………….

1.2 MF radio installations: …………………….

1.2.1 DSC encoder …………………….

1.2.2 DSC watch receiver …………………….

1.2.3 Radiotelephony

1.3 MF/HF radio installations: …………………….

1.3.1 DSC encoder …………………….

1.3.2 DSC watch receiver …………………….

1.3.3 Radiotelephony …………………….

1.3.4 Direct-printing radiotelephony …………………….

1.4 Immarsat ship earth station …………………….

2 Secondary means of alerting …………………….

3 Facilities for reception of maritime safety information …………………….

3.1 NAVTEX receiver …………………….

3.2 EGC receiver …………………….

3.3 HF direct-printing radiotelegraph receiver …………………….

4 Satellite EPIRB …………………….

4.1 COSPAS-SARSAT …………………….

4.2 Immarsat …………………….

5 VHF EPIRB …………………….

6 Ship’s radar transporter …………………….

7 Two-way on-scene radiocommunications 121.5 MHz & 123.1 MHz …………………….

Chapter 1 Annex 1 Form of High-Speed Craft Safety Certificate and Record of I - Part 3
Page 1–10 Equipment GL 2012

5 Methods used to ensure availability of radio facilities

(paragraphs 14.15.6, 14.15.7 and 14.15.8 of the Code)

5.1 Duplication of equipment ............................................................................................................

5.2 Shore-based maintenance ...........................................................................................................
5.3 At-sea maintenance capability ....................................................................................................

THIS IS TO CERTIFY that this Record is correct in all respects

Issued at .............................................................
(Place of issue of the Record)

....................... ...........................................................................
(Date of issue) (Signature of duly authorized official
issuing the Record)

.........................................................................................
(Seal or stamp of the issuing authority, as appropriate)
I - Part 3 Annex 2 Form of Permit to Operate High-Speed Craft Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 2–1

Annex 2

Form of Permit to Operate High-Speed Craft

Issued under the provisions of the

INTERNATIONAL CODE OF SAFETY FOR HIGH-SPEED CRAFT, 2000

(resolution MSC.97(73))

1 Name of craft ………………………………………………………………………………………………….

2 Manufacturer’s model and hull number …………………………………………………………………..

3 Distinctive number or letter …………………………………………………………………………………

4 IMO number 1 ………………………………………………………………………………………………..

5 Port of registry ………………………………………………………………………………………………..

6 Category of craft category A passenger craft/category B passenger

Craft/cargo craft 2
7 Name of operator ……………………………………………………………………………………………..

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
8 Areas or routes of operation ………………………………………………………………………………..

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..
9 Base port(s) …………………………………………………………………………………………………...

10 Maximum distance from place of refuge …………………………………………………………………..

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
11 Number of:

.1 passengers maximum permitted ………………………………………………………………………

.2 manning scale required ……………………………………………………………………................

12 Worst intended conditions …………………………………………………………………………………..

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
13 Other operational restrictions ………………………………………………………………………………

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………...
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………...

––––––––––––––
1 In accordance with the IMO ship identification number sheme, adopted by the Organization by resolution A.600(15).
2 Delete as appropriate.
Chapter 1 Annex 2 Form of Permit to Operate High-Speed Craft I - Part 3
Page 2–2 GL 2012

This permit confirms that the service mentioned above has been found to be in accordance with the
general requirements of 1.2.2 to 1.2.7 of the Code.

THIS PERMIT is issued under the authority of the Government of …………………………………………..

…………………………………………………………………………………………………..

THIS PERMIT is valid until …………………………………………………………………………….................

subject to the High-Speed Craft Safety Certificate remaining valid

Issued at …………………………………
(Place of issue of permit)

…………………… ……………………………………………………………..
(Date of issue) (Signature of duly authorized official
issuing the permit)

………………………………………………………………………..
(Seal or stamp of the issuing authority, as appropriate)
I - Part 3 Annex 3 Use of Probability Concept
GL 2012
Annex 3
Use of Probability Concept
1. General
1.1 Absolute safety cannot be achieved in any
human activity. Naturally, this fact shall be taken into
account in developing safety requirements, which
means that requirements shall not imply that safety is
absolute. In the case of traditional craft, it has fre-
quently been possible to specify certain aspects of
design or construction in some detail, in a way which
was consistent with some level of risk which had over
the years been intuitively accepted without having to
be defined.
1.2 For high-speed craft, however, it would often
be too restrictive to include engineering specifications
into the Code. Requirements therefore need to be
written (where this question arises) in the sense of "...
the Administration shall be satisfied on the basis of
tests, investigations and past experience that the prob-
ability of --- is (acceptably low)". Since different un-
desirable events may be regarded as having different
general orders of acceptable probability (e.g. tempo-
rary impairment of propulsion as compared with an
uncontrollable fire), it is convenient to agree on a
series of standardized expressions which can be used
to convey the relative acceptable probabilities of vari-
ous incidents, i.e. to perform a qualitative ranking
process. A vocabulary is given below which is in-
tended to ensure consistency between various re-
quirements, where it is necessary to describe the level
of risk which shall not be exceeded.
2. Terms associated with Probabilities
Different undesirable events may have different orders
of acceptable probability. in connection with this, it is
convenient to agree on standardized expressions to be
used to convey the relatively acceptable probabilities
of various occurrences, i.e. to perform a qualitative
ranking process.
2.1 Occurrences
2.1.1 Occurrence is a condition involving a poten-
tial lowering of the level of safety.
2.1.2 Failure is an occurrence in which a part, or
parts, of the craft fail or malfunction, e.g. runaway. A
failure includes:
.1 a single failure;
.2 independent failures in combination within a
system;
Chapter 1
Page 3–1
.3 independent failures in combinations involving
more than one system, taking into account:
.3.1 any undetected failure that is already present;
.3.2 such further failures 1 as would be reasonably
expected to follow the failure under considera-
tion; and
.4 common cause failure (failure of more than one
component or system due to the same cause).
2.1.3 Event is an occurrence which has its origin
outside the craft (e.g. waves).
2.1.4 Error is an occurrence arising as a result of
incorrect action by the operating crew or maintenance
personnel.
2.2 Probability of occurrences
2.2.1 Frequent is one which is likely to occur often
during the operational life of a particular craft.
2.2.2 Reasonably probable is one which is unlikely
to occur often but which may occur several times
during the total operational life of a particular craft.
2.2.3 Recurrent is a term embracing the total range
of frequent and reasonably probable.
2.2.4 Remote is one which is unlikely to occur to
every craft but may occur to a few craft of a type over
the total operational life of a number of craft of the
same type.
2.2.5 "Extremely remote" is one which is unlikely
to occur when considering the total operational life of
a number of craft of the type, but nevertheless shall be
considered as being possible.
2.2.6 Extremely improbable is one which is so
extremely remote that it shall not be considered as
possible to occur.
2.3 Effects
2.3.1 Effect is a situation arising as a result of an
occurrence.
––––––––––––––
1 In assessing the further failures which follow, account shall be
taken of any resulting more severe operating conditions for items
that have not up to that time failed.
Chapter 1 Annex 3 Use of Probability Concept I - Part 3
Page 3–2 GL 2012

2.3.2 Minor effect is an effect which may arise .4 marginal conditions for, or injury to, occu-
from a failure, an event, or an error, as defined in pants; or
2.1.2, 2.1.3, 2.1.4, which can be readily compensated
for by the operating crew. It may involve: .5 an essential need for outside rescue opera-
tions.
.1 a small increase in the operational duties of
the crew or in their difficulty in performing 2.3.5 Catastrophic effect is an effect which results
their duties; or in the loss of the craft and/or in fatalities.

.2 a moderate degradation in handling charac-
teristics; or
.3 slight modification of the permissible operat-
ing conditions.
2.3.3 Major effect is an effect which produces:
.1 a significant increase in the operational duties
of the crew or in their difficulty in performing
their duties which by itself shall not be outside
the capability of a competent crew provided
that another major effect does not occur at the
same time; or
.2 significant degradation in handling character-
istics; or
.3 significant modification of the permissible
operating conditions, but will not remove the
capability to complete a safe journey without
demanding more than normal skill on the part
of the operating crew.
2.3.4 "Hazardous effect" is an effect which pro-
duces:
.1 a dangerous increase in the operational duties
of the crew or in their difficulty in performing
their duties of such magnitude that they can-
not reasonably be expected to cope with them
and will probably require outside assistance;
or
.2 dangerous degradation of handling character-
istics; or
.3 dangerous degradation of the strength of the
craft; or
2.4 Safety level is a numerical value character-
izing the relationship between craft performance
represented as horizontal single-amplitude accelera-
tion (g) and the severity of acceleration-load effects
on standing and sitting humans. The safety levels and
the corresponding severity of effects on passengers
and safety criteria for craft performance shall be as
defined in table 1.
3. Numerical Values
Where numerical probabilities are used in assessing
compliance with requirements using the terms similar
to those given above, the following approximate
values may be used as guidelines to assist in provid-
ing a common point of reference. The probabilities
quoted shall be on an hourly or per-journey basis,
depending on which is more appropriate to the as-
sessment in question.
Frequent More than 10-3
Reasonably 10-3 to 10-5
probable
Remote 10-5 to 10-7
Extremely remote 10-7 to 10-9
Extremely Whilst no approximate
improbable numerical probability is given
for this, the figures used shall be
substantially less than 10-9
Note:
Different occurrences may have different acceptable probabili-
ties, according to the severity of their consequences (see Table
2).
 I - Part 3
GL 2012
Annex 3

CRITERIA NOT TO BE EXCEEDED

EFFECT COMMENTS
Type of load Value

LEVEL 1 Maximum acceleration 0.20 g 0.08 g: Elderly person will kee balance when holding.
MINOR EFFECT measured horizontally 1 0.15 g: Mean person will keep balance when holding.
Moderate degradation of safety 0.15 g: Sitting person will start holding.

LEVEL 2 Maximum acceleration 0.35 g 0.25 g: Maximum load for mean person keeping balance when holding.
MAJOR EFFECT measured horizontally 1 0.45 g: Mean person falls out of seat when not wearing seat belts.
Significant degradation of safety
Use of Probability Concept

Table 1

LEVEL 3 Collision design condition Ref. 4.3.3 Risk of unjury to passengers; safe emergency operation aftercollision.
HAZARDOUS EFFECT calculated
Major degradation of safety Maximum structural design load, Ref. 4.3.1 1.0 g: Degradation of passenger safety
based on vertical acceleration at
centre of gravity

LEVEL 4 Loss of craft or/and fatalities

CATASTROPHIC EFFECT
1 The accerometer used shall have an accuracy of at least 5 % full scale and shall not have a frequency response of less than 20 Hz. The sampling frequency should not be less than 5 times the maximum
frequency response. Anti-alias filters, if used, should have a passband equal to the frequency response.
Page 3–3
Chapter 1
 Page 3–4
Chapter 1

SAFETY LEVEL 1 1 1 2 3 4
Annex 3

EFFECT ON Normal Nuisance Operating Emergency Large reduction in Deaths, usually

CRAFT AND limitations procedures; safety margins; with loss of craft
OCCUPANTS significant crew over-burden
reduction in safety because of work-
margins; difficult load or environ-
for crew to cope mental conditions;
with adverse serious injury to a
conditions; small number of
passenger injuries. occupants.

F.A.R. 1
EXTREMELY
PROBABILITY PROBABLE IMPROBABLE
(reference only) IMPROBABLE
Use of Probability Concept

Table 2

JAR-25 2 EXTREMELY
PROBABLE IMPROBABLE
PROBABILITY IMPROBABLE
REASONABLY EXTREMELY
FREQUENT REMOTE
PROBABLE REMOTE

10-0 10-1 10-2 10-3 10-4 10-5 10-6 10-7 10-8 10-9

CATEGORY OF
EFFECT MINOR MAJOR HAZARDOUS CATASTROPHIC

1 United States Federal Aviation Regulations.

2 European Joint Airworthiness Regulations.
GL 2012
I - Part 3
I - Part 3 Annex 4 Procedures for Failure Mode and Effects Analysis
GL 2012
Annex 4
Procedures for Failure Mode and Effects Analysis
C0 Document to be submitted
FMEA report, including FMEA worksheets.
1. Introduction
1.1 In the case of traditional craft, it has been
possible to specify certain aspects of design or con-
struction in some level of detail, in a way which was
consistent with some level of risk which had over the
years been intuitively accepted without having to be
defined.
1.2 With the development of large high-speed
craft, this required experience has not been widely
available. However, with the now broad acceptance of
the probabilistic approach to safety assessments
within industry as a whole, it is proposed that an
analysis of failure performance may be used to assist
in the assessment of the safety of operation of high-
speed craft.
1.3 A practical, realistic and documented as-
sessment of the failure characteristics of the craft and
its component systems shall be undertaken with the
aim of defining and studying the important failure
conditions that may exist.
1.4 This annex describes a failure mode and
effects analysis (FMEA) and gives guidance as to how
it may be applied by:
.1 explaining basic principles;
.2 providing the procedural steps necessary to
perform an analysis;
.3 identifying appropriate terms, assumptions,
measures and failure modes; and
.4 providing examples of the necessary work-
sheets.
1.5 FMEA for high-speed craft is based on a
single -failure concept under which each system at
various levels of a system's functional hierarchy is
assumed to fail by one probable cause at a time. The
effects of the postulated failure are analysed and clas-
sified according to their severity. Such effects may
include secondary failures (or multiple failures) at
other level(s). Any failure mode which may cause a
catastrophic effect to the craft shall be guarded
against by system or equipment redundancy unless the
probability of such failure is extremely improbable
(refer to section 13). For failure modes causing haz-
ardous effects, corrective measures may be accepted
Chapter 1
Page 4–1
in lieu. A test programme shall be drawn to confirm
the conclusions of FMEA.
1.6 Whilst FMEA is suggested as one of the most
flexible analysis techniques, it is accepted that there
are other methods which may be used and which in
certain circumstances may offer an equally compre-
hensive insight into particular failure characteristics.
2. Objectives
2.1 The primary objective of FMEA is to provide
a comprehensive, systematic and documented investi-
gation which establishes the important failure condi-
tions of the craft and assesses their significance with
regard to the safety of the craft, its occupants and the
environment.
2.2 The main aims of undertaking the analysis
are to:
.1 provide the Administration with the results of a
study into the craft's failure characteristics so
as to assist in an assessment of the levels of
safety proposed for the craft's operation;
.2 provide craft operators with data to generate
comprehensive training, operational and main-
tenance programmes and documentation; and
.3 provide craft and system designers with data to
audit their proposed designs.
3. Scope of Application
3.1 FMEA shall be conducted for each high-
speed craft, before its entry into service, in respect of
the systems as required under the provisions of 5.2,
9.1.10, 12.1.1 and 16.2.6 of this Code.
3.2 For craft of the same design and having the
same equipment, one FMEA on the lead craft will be
sufficient, but each of the craft shall be subject to the
same FMEA conclusion trials.
4. System Failure Mode and Effects Analysis
4.1 Before proceeding with a detailed FMEA into
the effects of the failure of the system elements on the
system functional output it is necessary to perform a
functional failure analysis of the craft's important
systems. In this way only systems which fail the func-
tional failure analysis need to be investigated by a
more detailed FMEA.
4.2 When conducting a system FMEA the follow-
ing typical operational modes within the normal de-
Chapter 1 Annex 4 Procedures for Failure Mode and Effects Analysis I - Part 3
Page 4–2 GL 2012

sign environmental conditions of the craft shall be 5. Equipment Failure Mode and Effects
considered: Analysis
.1 normal seagoing conditions at full speed; The systems to be subject to a more detailed FMEA
investigation at this stage shall include all those that
.2 maximum permitted operating speed in con-
have failed the system FMEA and may include those
gested waters; and
that have a very important influence on the safety of
.3 manoeuvring alongside. the craft and its occupants and which require an in-
vestigation at a deeper level than that undertaken in
4.3 The functional interdependence of these sys- the system functional failure analysis. These systems
tems shall also be described in either block diagrams are often those which have been specifically designed
or fault-tree diagrams or in a narrative format to or adapted for the craft, such as the craft's electrical
enable the failure effects to be understood. As far as and hydraulic systems.
applicable, each of the systems to be analysed is as-
sumed to fail in the following failure modes:
6. Procedures
.1 complete loss of function;
The following steps are necessary to perform FMEA:
.2 rapid change to maximum or minimum output;
.1 to define the system to be analysed;
.3 uncontrolled or varying output;
.2 to illustrate the interrelationships of functional
.4 premature operation;
elements of the system by means of block dia-
.5 failure to operate at a prescribed time; and grams;

.6 failure to cease operation at a prescribed time. .3 to identify all potential failure modes and their
causes;
Depending on the system under consideration, other
failure modes may have to be taken into account. .4 to evaluate the effects on the system of each
failure mode;
4.4 If a system can fail without any hazardous or
catastrophic effect, there is no need to conduct a de- .5 to identify failure detection methods;
tailed FMEA into the system architecture. For systems
whose individual failure can cause hazardous or .6 to identify corrective measures for failure
catastrophic effects and where a redundant system is modes;
not provided, a detailed FMEA as described in the
following paragraphs shall be followed. Results of the .7 to assess the probability of failures causing
system functional failure analysis shall be documented hazardous or catastrophic effects, where appli-
and confirmed by a practical test programme drawn cable;
up from the analysis.
.8 to document the analysis;
4.5 Where a system, the failure of which may
cause a hazardous or catastrophic effect, is provided .9 to develop a test programme;
with a redundant system, a detailed FMEA may not be
required provided that: .10 to prepare FMEA report.

.1 the redundant system can be put into operation

or can take over the failed system within the
time-limit dictated by the most onerous opera-
tional mode in 4.2 without hazarding the craft;
.2 the redundant system is completely independent
from the system and does not share any com-
mon system element the failure of which would
cause failure of both the system and the redun-
dant system. Common system element may be
acceptable if the probability of failure complies
with section 13; and
.3 the redundant system may share the same
power source as the system. in such case an al-
ternative power source shall be readily avail-
able with regard to the requirement of .1.
The probability and effects of operator error to bring
in the redundant system shall also be considered.
7. System Definition
The first step in an FMEA study is a detailed study of
the system to be analysed through the use of drawings
and equipment manuals. A narrative description of the
system and its functional requirements shall be drawn
up including the following information:
.1 general description of system operation and
structure;
.2 functional relationship among the system ele-
ments;
.3 acceptable functional performance limits of the
system and its constituent elements in each of
the typical operational modes; and
.4 system constraints.
I - Part 3 Annex 4 Procedures for Failure Mode and Effects Analysis Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 4–3

8. Development of System Block Diagrams Table 1 - Example of a set of failure modes 1

1 Structural failure (rupture)
8.1 The next step is to develop block diagram(s) 2 Physical binding or jamming
showing the functional flow sequence of the system,
both for technical understanding of the functions and 3 Vibration
operation of the system and for the subsequent analy- 4 Fails to remain (in position)
sis. As a minimum the block diagram shall contain: 5 Fails to open
6 Fails to close
.1 breakdown of the system into major sub- 7 Fails open
systems or equipment; 8 Fails closed
9 Internal leakage
.2 all appropriate labelled inputs and outputs and
10 External leakage
identification numbers by which each sub-
system is consistently referenced; and 11 Fails out of tolerance (high)
12 Fails out to tolerance (low)
.3 all redundancies, alternative signal paths and 13 Inadvertent operation
other engineering features which provide "fail- 14 Intermittent operation
safe" measures. 15 Erratic operation
16 Erroneous indication
An example of a system block diagram is given at 17 Restricted flow
appendix 1.
18 False actuation
19 Fails to stop
8.2 It may be necessary to have a different set of 20 Fails to start
block diagrams prepared for each operational mode.
21 Fails to switch
22 Premature operation
9. Identification of Failure Modes, Causes and 23 Delayed operation
Effects 24 Erroneous input (increased)
25 Erroneous input (decreased)
9.1 Failure mode is the manner by which a fail- 26 Erroneous output (increased)
ure is observed. It generally describes the way the 27 Erroneous output (increased)
failure occurs and its impact on the equipment or
system. As an example, a list of failure modes is given 28 Loss of input
in table 1. The failure modes listed in table 1 can 29 Loss of output
describe the failure of any system element in suffi- 30 Shorted (electrical)
ciently specific terms. When used in conjunction with
31 Open (electrical)
performance specifications governing the inputs and
outputs on the system block diagram, all potential 32 Leakage (electrical)
failure modes can be thus identified and described. Other unique failure conditions as
Thus, for example, a power supply may have a failure 33 applicable to the system characteristics,
mode described as "loss of output" (29), and a failure requirements and operational constraints
cause "open (electrical)" (31).
9.4 If major systems can fail without any adverse
effect there is no need to consider them further unless
9.2 A failure mode in a system element could also
the failure can go undetected by an operator. To de-
be the failure cause of a system failure. For example,
cide that there is no adverse effect does not mean just
the hydraulic line of a steering gear system might have
the identification of system redundancy. The redun-
a failure mode of "external leakage" (10). This failure
dancy shall be shown to be immediately effective or
mode of the hydraulic line could become a failure
brought on line with negligible time lag. In addition, if
cause of the steering gear system's failure mode "loss
the sequence is:
of output" (29).
"failure - alarm - operator action - start of
back up - back up in service",
9.3 Each system shall be considered in a top-
down approach, starting from the system's functional the effects of delay shall be considered.
output, and failure shall be assumed by one possible ––––––––––––––
cause at a time. Since a failure mode may have more 1 Refer to IEC Publication: IEC 812 (1985), Analysis techniques
than one cause, all potential independent causes for for system reliability - procedure for failure mode and effects
each failure mode shall be identified. analysis (FMEA).
Chapter 1 Annex 4 Procedures for Failure Mode and Effects Analysis
Page 4–4
10. Failure effects
10.1 The consequence of a failure mode on the
operation, function, or status of an equipment or a
system is called a 'failure effect'. Failure effects on a
specific sub-system or equipment under consideration
are called local failure effects". The evaluation of
local failure effects will help to determine the effec-
tiveness of any redundant equipment or corrective
action at that system level. In certain instances, there
may not be a local effect beyond the failure mode
itself.
10.2 The impact of an equipment or sub-system
failure on the system output (system function) is called
an "end effect". End effects shall be evaluated and
their severity classified in accordance with the follow-
ing categories:
.1 catastrophic;
.2 hazardous;
.3 major; and
.4 minor.
The definitions of these four categories of failure ef-
fects are given in 2.3 of annex 3 of this Code.
10.3 If the end effect of a failure is classified as
hazardous or catastrophic, back-up equipment is
usually required to prevent or minimize such effect.
For hazardous failure effects corrective operational
procedures may be accepted.
11. Failure Detection
11.1 The FMEA study in general only analyses
failure effects based on a single failure in the system
and therefore a failure detection means, such as visual
or audible warning devices, automatic sensing de-
vices, sensing instrumentation or other unique indica-
tions shall be identified.
11.2 Where the system element failure is non-
detectable (i.e. a hidden fault or any failure which
does not give any visual or audible indication to the
operator) and the system can continue with its specific
operation, the analysis shall be extended to determine
the effects of a second failure, which in combination
with the first undetectable failure may result in a more
severe failure effect, e.g., hazardous or catastrophic
effect.
12. Corrective Measures
12.1 The response of any back-up equipment, or
any corrective action initiated at a given system level
to prevent or reduce the effect of the failure mode of a
system element or equipment, shall also be identified
and evaluated.
12.2 Provisions which are features of the design at
any system level to nullify the effects of a malfunction
or failure, such as controlling or deactivating system
I - Part 3
GL 2012
elements to halt generation or propagation of failure
effects, or activating back-up or standby items or
systems, shall be described. Corrective design provi-
sions include:
.1 redundancies that allow continued and safe
operation;
.2 safety devices, monitoring or alarm provisions,
which permit restricted operation or limit dam-
age; and
.3 alternative modes of operation.
12.3 Provisions which require operator action to
circumvent or mitigate the effects of the postulated
failure shall be described. The possibility and effect of
operator error shall be considered, if the corrective
action or the initiation of the redundancy requires
operator input, when evaluating the means to elimi-
nate the local failure effects.
12.4 It shall be noted that corrective responses
acceptable in one operational mode may not be ac-
ceptable at another, e.g., a redundant system element
with considerable time lag to be brought into line,
while meeting the operational mode "normal seagoing
conditions at full speed" may result in a catastrophic
effect in another operational mode, e.g., "maximum
permitted operating speed in congested water".
13. Use of Probability Concept
13.1 If corrective measures or redundancy as
described in preceding paragraphs are not provided
for any failure, as an alternative the probability of
occurrence of such failure shall meet the following
criteria of acceptance:
.1 a failure mode which results in a catastrophic
effect shall be assessed to be extremely im-
probable;
.2 a failure mode assessed as extremely remote
shall not result in worse than hazardous ef-
fects; and
.3 a failure mode assessed as either frequent or
reasonably probable shall not result in worse
than minor effects.
13.2 Numerical values for various levels of prob-
abilities are laid down in section 3 of annex 3 of this
Code. In areas where there are no data from craft to
determine the level of probabilities of failure other
sources can be used such as:
.1 workshop test, or
.2 history of reliability used in other areas under
similar operating conditions, or
.3 mathematical model if applicable.
I - Part 3 Annex 4 Procedures for Failure Mode and Effects Analysis Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 4–5

14. Documentation .2 the existence and quality of the craft's opera-

14.1 It is helpful to perform FMEA on work-
sheet(s) as shown in appendix 2.
14.2 The worksheet(s) shall be organized to first
display the highest system level and then proceed
down through decreasing system levels.
15. Test Programme
15.1 An FMEA test programme shall be drawn up
to prove the conclusions of FMEA. It is recommended
that the test programme shall include all systems or
system elements whose failure would lead to:
.1 major or more severe effects;
.2 restricted operations; and
.3 any other corrective action.
For equipment where failure cannot be easily simu-
lated on the craft, the results of other tests can be used
to determine the effects and influences on the systems
and craft.
15.2 The trials shall also include investigations
into:
.1 the layout of control stations with particular
regard to the relative positioning of switches
and other control devices to ensure a low po-
tential for inadvertent and incorrect crew ac-
tion, particularly during emergencies, and the
provision of interlocks to prevent inadvertent
operation for important system operation;
tional documentation with particular regard to
the pre-voyage checklists. It is essential that
these checks account for any unrevealed failure
modes identified in the failure analysis; and
.3 the effects of the main failure modes as pre-
scribed in the theoretical analysis.
15.3 The FMEA tests on board shall be conducted
in conjunction with provisions specified in 5.3, 16.4
and 17.4 of this Code, before the craft enters into
service.
16. FMEA Report
The FMEA report shall be a self-contained document
with a full description of the craft, its systems and
their functions and the proposed operation and envi-
ronmental conditions for the failure modes, causes
and effects to be understood without any need to refer
to other plans and documents not in the report. The
analysis assumptions and system block diagrams shall
be included, where appropriate. The report shall con-
tain a summary of conclusions and recommendations
for each of the systems analysed in the system failure
analysis and the equipment failure analysis. It shall
also list all probable failures and their probability of
failure, where applicable, the corrective actions or
operational restrictions for each system in each of the
operational modes under analysis. The report shall
contain the test programme, reference any other test
reports and the FMEA trials.
Chapter 1 Annex 4 Procedures for Failure Mode and Effects Analysis I - Part 3
Page 4–6 GL 2012

Appendix 1
Example of a system block diagram

Sterring control system Date …………………………………………..

Analyst ……………………………………….

Backup - System

EP Steering Control EP Steering Control EP Steering Backup EP Indication

Lever Mode 2 (S2) Lever Mode 1 (S1) Lever (B1) (I1)

ES

ES ES
EP EP Change Over Indication
Mode
Control EP Controller
Selector
(S3) (B2) (I2)
ES
ES

ES
EP Steering Control EP
Indicating Servo
ES Processing Unit (I3)
(S4)

ES
HP
Feedback Rudder ES
EP
(S6) MS (S5) MS

where:
EP - electric power
HP - hydraulic power
ES - electrical signal
MS - mechanical signal
I - Part 3 Annex 4 Procedures for Failure Mode and Effects Analysis Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 4–7

Appendix 2
FMEA worksheet

Name of system ……………………………………... References …………………………………………...

Mode of operation …………………………………... System block diagram ……………………………….
Sheet No. ……………………………………………. ………………………………………………………..
Date …………………………………………………. ………………………………………………………..
Name of analyst ……………………………………... Drawings …………………………………………….

Failure mode Proba-

Equip-
Correc- Severity bility of
ment Ident. Failure Failure Failure
Function Local End tive of failure failure Remark
name or No. mode cause detection
mode mode action effect (if appli-
number
cable)
I - Part 3 Annex 5 Ice Accretion Applicable to all Types of Craft
GL 2012
Annex 5
Ice Accretion Applicable to all Types of Craft
1. Icing Allowances
1.1 For craft operating in areas where ice ac-
cretion is likely to occur, the following icing allow-
ance shall be made in the stability calculations.
.1 30 kg/m² on exposed weather decks and
gangways;
.2 7.5 kg/m² for projected lateral area of each
side of the craft above the waterplane;
.3 the projected lateral area of discontinuous
surfaces of rail, sundry booms, spars (except
masts) and rigging and the projected lateral
area of other small objects shall be computed
by increasing the total projected area of con-
tinuous surfaces by 5 % and the static mo-
ments of this area by 10 %;
.4 reduction of stability due to asymmetric ice
accumulations in cross-structure.
1.2 For craft operating in areas where ice ac-
cretion may be expected:
.1 Within the areas defined in 2.1, 2.3, 2.4 and
2.5 known to have icing conditions signifi-
cantly different from those in 1.1, ice accre-
tion requirements of one half to twice the re-
quired allowance may be applied.
.2 Within the area defined in 2.2, where ice ac-
cretion in excess of twice the allowance re-
quired by 1.1 may be expected, more severe
requirements than those given in 1.1 may be
applied.
1.3 Information shall be provided in respect of
the assumptions made in calculating the condition of
the craft in each of the circumstances set out in this
annex for the following:
Chapter 1
Page 5–1
.1 duration of the voyage in terms of the period
spent in reaching the destination and return-
ing to port; and
.2 consumption rates during the voyage for fuel,
water, stores and other consumables.
2. Areas of Icing Conditions
In the application of 1, the following icing areas shall
apply:
.1 The area north of latitude 65° 0' N, between
longitude 28° and the west coast of Iceland;
north of the north coast of Iceland; north of
the rhumb line running from latitude 66°, lon-
gitude 15° to latitude 73° 0' N, longitude 15°,
north of latitude 73 °0' N between longitude
15° and 35°, and east of longitude 35°, as well
as north of latitude 56° in the Baltic Sea.
.2 The area north of latitude 43° bounded in the
west by the North American coast and the east
by the rhumb line running from latitude 43°,
longitude 48° to latitude 63°, longitude 28°
and thence along longitude 28°.
.3 All sea areas north of the North American
continent, west of the areas defined in sub-
paragraphs .1 and .2 of this paragraph.
.4 The Bering and Okhotsk Seas and the Tartary
Strait during the icing season.
.5 South of latitude 60°.
A chart to illustrate the areas is attached.
3. Special Requirements
Craft intended for operation in areas where ice ac-
cretion is known to occur shall be:
.1 designed to minimize the accretion of ice; and
.2 equipped with such means for removing ice as
the Administration may require.
 Page 5–2
Chapter 1

Chart of Areas of Icing Conditions

73° 30'N
Annex 5

35 °E

15 °E

15 °W
65° 30'N
66 °N
63 °N Sea
of 60°
A 56 °N Okhotsk Bering Sea

28 °W
Tartary
Strait
43 °N

48 °W
30°

0°

30°
Ice Accretion Applicable to all Types of Craft

Legend
Full ice accretion allowance should
be applied.
Vessels operating in this area have
A been subjected on occasion to icing
in excess of twice the indicated full 60°
ice accretion allowance.

60° 0° 60° 120° 180° 120°

GL 2012
I - Part 3
I - Part 3 Annex 6 Stability of Hydrofoil Craft Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 6–1

Annex 6

Stability of Hydrofoil Craft

The stability of these craft shall be considered in the
hull-borne, transitional and foil-borne modes. The
stability investigation shall also take into account the
effects of external forces. The following procedures
are outlined for guidance in dealing with stability.
As required by 2.3.1, the stability of hydrofoil craft
shall be assessed under all permitted conditions of
loading.
The term “hull-borne mode” has the same meaning as
“displacement mode” defined in 1.4.22 of the Code.
The term “foil-borne mode” has the same meaning as
“non-displacement mode” defined in 1.4.38 of the
Code.
1. Surface-piercing Hydrofoils
1.1 Hull-borne mode
1.1.1 The stability shall be sufficient to satisfy the
provisions of 2.3, 2.4 and 2.6 of this Code.
MC = minimum capsizing moment as determined when
account is taken of rolling;
MV = dynamically applied heeling moment due to the
wind pressure.
1.1.4 Heeling moment due to wind pressure
The heeling moment MV shall be taken as constant
during the whole range of heel angles and calculated
by the following expression:
MV = 0,001 PV AV Z (kN-m)
where :
PV = wind pressure = 750 (VW/26)² (N/m²)
AV = windage area including the projections of the
lateral surfaces of the hull, superstructure and
various structures above the waterline (m²)
Z= windage area lever (m) = the vertical distance
to the geometrical centre of the windage area
from the waterline

1.1.2 Heeling moment due to turning VW = the wind speed corresponding to the worst in-
tended conditions (m/s).
The heeling moment developed during manoeuvring of
the craft in the displacement mode may be derived 1.1.5 Evaluation of the minimum capsizing moment
from the following formula: Mc in the displacement mode
The minimum capsizing moment is determined from
V02
M R = 0,196 ⋅ ⋅ Δ ⋅ KG (kN⋅m) the static and dynamic stability curves taking rolling
L into account.
where:
Moment
or lever

MR = moment of heeling;
qZ
Vo = speed of the craft in the turn (m/s); S2
M
K
Δ = displacement (t);
L = length of the craft on the waterline (m); S1 q
KG = height of the centre of gravity above keel (m). 0

This formula is applicable when the ratio of the radius

of the turning circle to the length of the craft is 2 to 4.

1.1.3 Relationship between the capsizing moment

and heeling moment to satisfy the weather criterion. Figure 1 – Static stability curve

The stability of a hydrofoil boat in the displacement .1 When the static stability curve is used, Mc is
mode can be checked for compliance with the weather determined by equating the areas under the
criterion K as follows: curves of the capsizing and righting moments
(or levers) taking rolling into account, as indi-
MC cated by figure 1, where θz is the amplitude of
K= ≥1 roll and MK is a line drawn parallel to the ab-
MV
scissa axis such that the shaded areas S1 and
where: S2 are equal.
Chapter 1 Annex 6 Stability of Hydrofoil Craft
Page 6–2
MC = OM, if the scale of ordinates represents
moments,
MC = OM ⋅ displacement, if the scale of ordi-
nates represents levers.
.2 When the dynamic stability curve is used, first
an auxiliary point A shall be determined. For
this purpose the amplitude of heeling is plotted
to the right along the abscissa axis and a point
A' is found (see figure 2). A line AA' is drawn
parallel to the abscissa axis equal to the double
amplitude of heeling (AA' = 2θz) and the re-
quired auxiliary point A is found. A tangent AC
to the dynamic stability curve is drawn. From
the point A the line AB is drawn parallel to the
abscissa axis and equal to 1 radian (57.3°).
From the point B a perpendicular is drawn to
intersect with the tangent in point E. The dis-
tance BE is equal to the capsizing moment if
measured along the ordinate axis of the dy-
namic stability curve. If, however, the dynamic
stability levers are plotted along this axis, BE
is then the capsizing lever, and in this case the
capsizing moment Mc is determined by multi-
plication of ordinate BE (in metres) by the cor-
responding displacement in tonnes
Mc = 9.81 BE (kNm)
Moment
or lever
E
A'
A
0 q
qZ qZ
57.3° (1 radian)
Figure 2 – Dynamic stability curve
Section through front foil
M M
G G
S
WL
I - Part 3
GL 2012
.3 The amplitude of rolling θz is determined by
means of model and full-scale tests in irregular
seas as a maximum amplitude of rolling of 50
oscillations of a craft travelling at 90° to the
wave direction in sea state for the worst design
condition. If such data are lacking the ampli-
tude is assumed to be equal to 15°.
.4 The effectiveness of the stability curves shall be
limited to the angle of flooding.
1.2 Transitional and foil-borne modes
1.2.1 The stability shall satisfy the provisions of 2.4
and 2.5 of this Code.
1.2.1.1 The stability in the transitional and foil-borne
modes shall be checked for all cases of loading for the
intended service of the craft.
1.2.1.2 The stability in the transitional and foil-borne
modes may be determined either by calculation or on
the basis of data obtained from model experiments
and shall be verified by full-scale tests by imposition
of a series of known heeling moments by off-centre
ballast weights, and recording the heeling angles
produced by these moments. When taken in the hull-
borne , take-off, steady foil-borne and settling to hull-
C
borne modes, these results will provide an indication
of the values of the stability in the various situations of
the craft during the transitional condition.
B 1.2.1.3 The angle of heel in the foil-borne mode
caused by the concentration of passengers at one side
shall not exceed 8° During the transitional mode the
angle of heel due to the concentration of passengers
on one side shall not exceed 12° The concentration of
passengers shall be determined by the Administration,
having regard to the guidance given at annex 7 to this
Code.
Section through aft foil
g
a WL
lH
lB
LB LH
Figure 3
I - Part 3 Annex 6 Stability of Hydrofoil Craft Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 6–3

1.2.2 One of the possible methods of assessing foil- 2.1.2 Paragraphs 1.1.2 to 1.1.5 of this annex are
borne metacentric height (GM) in the design stage for appropriate to this type of craft in the hull-borne
a particular foil configuration is given in figure 3. mode.

⎛ LB ⎞ ⎛ LH ⎞
GM = nB ⋅ ⎜ - S ⎟ + nH ⋅⎜ -S⎟ 2.2 Transitional mode
⎝ 2 ⋅ tan I B ⎠ ⎝ 2 ⋅ tan I H ⎠
where: 2.2.1 The stability shall be examined by the use of
verified computer simulations to evaluate the craft's
nB = percentage of hydrofoil load borne by front foil motions, behaviour and responses under the normal
conditions and limits of operation and under the influ-
nH = percentage of hydrofoil load borne by aft foil ence of any malfunction.
LB = clearance width of front foil
LH = clearance width of aft foil 2.2.2 The stability conditions resulting from any
potential failures in the systems or operational proce-
a = clearance between bottom of keel and water dures during the transitional stage which could prove
hazardous to the craft's watertight integrity and stabil-
g = height of centre of gravity above bottom of keel ity shall be examined.
IB = angle at which front foil is inclined to horizontal
IH = angle at which aft foil is inclined to horizontal 2.3 Foil-borne mode

S = height of centre of gravity above water The stability of the craft in the foil-borne mode shall
be in compliance with the provisions of 2.4 of this
2. Fully submerged Hydrofoils Code. The provisions of paragraph 2.2 of this annex
shall also apply.
2.1 Hull-borne mode
2.4 Paragraphs 1.2.2.1, 1.2.2.2 and 1.2.2.3 of
2.1.1 The stability in the hull-borne mode shall be this annex shall be applied to this type of craft as
sufficient to satisfy the provisions of 2.3 and 2.6 of this appropriate and any computer simulations or design
Code. calculations shall be verified by full-scale tests.
I - Part 3 Annex 7 Stability of Multihull Craft Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 7–1

Annex 7

Stability of Multihull Craft

1. Stability Criteria in the Intact Condition 1.4 Heeling due to passenger crowding or
high-speed turning
A multihull craft, in the intact condition, shall have
sufficient stability when rolling in a seaway to suc- Heeling due to the crowding of passengers on one
cessfully withstand the effect of either passenger side of the craft or to high-speed turning, whichever
crowding or high-speed turning as described in 1.4. is the greater, shall be applied in combination with
The craft's stability shall be considered to be suffi- the heeling lever due to wind (HL2).
cient provided compliance with this paragraph is
achieved. 1.4.1 Heeling due to passenger crowding
When calculating the magnitude of the heel due to
1.1 Area under the GZ curve
passenger crowding, a passenger crowding lever
The area (A1) under the GZ curve up to an angle q
shall be at least: shall be developed using the assumptions stipulated
in 2.10 of this Code.
A1 = 0.055 x 30°/θ (m.rad)
1.4.2 Heeling due to high-speed turning
where
When calculating the magnitude of the heel due to the
θ is the least of the following angles: effects of high-speed turning, a high-speed turning
lever shall be developed using either the following
.1 the downflooding angle;
formula or an equivalent method specifically devel-
.2 the angle at which the maximum GZ occurs; oped for the type of craft under consideration, or
and trials or model test data:

.3 30° 1 Vo2 ⎛ d⎞
TL = ⎜ KG - ⎟ (m)
g R ⎝ 2⎠
1.2 Maximum GZ
where:
The maximum GZ value shall occur at an angle of at
least 10°. TL = turning lever (m)
Vo = speed of craft in the turn (m/s)
1.3 Heeling due to wind
R = turning radius (m)
The wind heeling lever shall be assumed constant at
all angles of inclination and shall be calculated as KG = height of vertical centre of gravity above keel
follows: (m)
P ⋅ A⋅ Z d = mean draught (m)
HL1 = i (m)
9800Δ g = acceleration due to gravity
HL2 = 1.5 HL1 (m) (see Figure1)
Alternatively, another method of assessment may be
where: employed, as provided for in 2.1.4 of this Code.

Pi = 500 (VW / 26)2 (N/m2) 1.5 Rolling in waves (figure 1)

where:
VW = wind speed corresponding to the worst in-
tended conditions (m/s)
A = projected lateral area of the portion of the
craft above the lightest service waterline (m2)
Z = vertical distance from the centre of A to a
point one half the lightest service draught (m)
Δ = displacement (t)
The effect of rolling in a seaway upon the craft's
stability shall be demonstrated mathematically. In
doing so, the residual area under the GZ curve (A2),
i.e. beyond the angle of heel (θh), shall be at least
equal to 0.028 m.rad up to the angle of roll θr. In the
absence of model test or other data θr shall be taken
as 15° or an angle of (θd - θh), whichever is less. The
determination of θr using model test or other data
shall be made using the method for determining θZ in
1.1.5.3 of annex 6
Chapter 1 Annex 7 Stability of Multihull Craft I - Part 3
Page 7–2 GL 2012

2. Criteria for Residual Stability after Dam- 2.5 The stability of the craft in the final condi-
age tion after damage shall be examined and shown to
satisfy the criteria, when damaged as stipulated in
2.1 The method of application of criteria to the 2.6 of this Code.
residual stability curve is similar to that for intact
stability except that the craft in the final condition 2.6 In the intermediate stages of flooding, the
after damage shall be considered to have an ade- maximum righting lever shall be at least 0.05 m and
quate standard of residual stability provided: the range of positive righting lever shall be at least
7°. In all cases, only one breach in the hull and only
.1 the required area A2 shall be not less than
one free surface need to be assumed.
0.028 m.rad (figure 2 refers); and
.2 there is no requirement regarding the angle at 3. Application of Heeling Levers
which the maximum GZ value shall occur.
3.1 In applying the heeling levers to the intact
2.2 The wind heeling lever for application on
and damaged curves, the following shall be consid-
the residual stability curve shall be assumed constant
ered:
at all angles of inclination and shall be calculated as
follows: .1 for intact condition:
P ⋅ A⋅ Z
HL3 = d .1.1 wind heeling lever (including gusting effect)
9800Δ (HL2); and
where:
.1.2 wind heeling lever (including gusting effect)
Pd = 120 (VW / 26)2 (N/m2) plus either the passenger crowding or speed
turning levers whichever is the greater (HTL).
VW = wind speed corresponding to the worst in-
tended conditions (m/s) .2 for damage condition:
A = projected lateral area of the portion of the ship .2.1 wind heeling lever - steady wind (HL3); and
above the lightest service waterline (m2)
Z = vertical distance from the centre of A to a point .2.2 wind heeling lever plus heeling lever due to
one half of the lightest service draught (m) passenger crowding (HL4)

Δ = displacement (t) 3.2 Angles of heel due to steady wind

2.3 The same values of roll angle shall be used
as for the intact stability, as determined in 1.5 of this
annex.
2.4 The downflooding point is important and is
regarded as terminating the residual stability curve.
The area A2 shall therefore be truncated at the down-
flooding angle.
3.2.1 The angle of heel due to a wind gust when
the heeling lever HL2, obtained as in 1.3, is applied
to the intact stability curve shall not exceed 10°.
3.2.2 The angle of heel due to a steady wind when
the heeling lever HL3, obtained as in 2.2, is applied
to the residual stability curve after damage, shall not
exceed 15° for passenger craft and 20° for cargo
craft.

MULTIHULL CRAFT CRITERIA

A2 A2
HTL HTL
A1
HL2 qr
qr

qh qd qm 30° qh qd qh qd
not greater than 10°

Figure 1 – Intact stability

I - Part 3 Annex 7 Stability of Multihull Craft Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 7–3

A2 A2
HL4 HL4
HL3
qr
qr

qe qh qd qd
qe qh qe qh
not greater than 15° for passenger craft and 20° for cargo craft

Figure 2 – Damage stability

Abbreviations used in figures 1 and 2 θd = Angle of downflooding

HL2 = Heeling lever due to wind + gusting θr = Angle of roll

HTL = Heeling lever due to wind + gusting + (pas- θe = Angle of equilibrium, assuming no wind,
senger crowding or turning) passenger crowding or turning effects
HL3 = Heeling lever due to wind θh = Angle of heel due to heeling lever HL2, HTL,
HL3 or HL4
HL4 = Heeling lever due to wind + passenger
crowding A1 ≥ Area required by 1.1
θm = Angle of maximum GZ A2 ≥ 0.028 m  rad
I - Part 3 Annex 8 Stability of Monohull Craft
GL 2012
Annex 8
Stability of Monohull Craft
1. Stability Criteria in the Intact Condition
1.1 The weather criterion contained in para-
graph 3.2 of the Intact Stability Code 1 shall apply. In
applying the weather criterion, the value of wind pres-
sure P (N/m2) shall be taken as:
500{Vw /26}2
where Vw = wind speed (m/s) corresponding to the
worst intended conditions.
The angle of heel due to wind, in applying paragraph
3.2.2.1.2 of the Intact Stability Code, shall not exceed
16° or 80 % of the angle of deck-edge immersion
(whichever is less). Where the angle of heel due to
wind exceeds 10°, efficient non-slip deck surfaces and
suitable holding points shall be provided, in accor-
dance with paragraph 2.13.1.1 of this Code. In apply-
ing the weather criterion, account shall also be taken
of the roll damping characteristics of individual craft
in assessing the assumed roll angle θ1, which may
alternatively be derived from model or full scale tests
using the method for determining θz in 1.1.5.3 of an-
nex 6. Hulls with features which greatly increase
damping, such as immersed sidehulls, substantial
arrays of foils, or flexible skirts or seals, are likely to
experience significantly smaller magnitudes of roll
angle. For such craft, therefore, the roll angle shall be
derived from model or full scale tests or, in the ab-
sence of such data, shall be taken as 15°.
1.2 The area under the righting lever curve (GZ
curve) shall not be less than 0,07 m  rad up to =
15° when the maximum righting lever (GZ) occurs at
= 15°, and 0,055 m  rad up to = 30° when the
maximum righting lever occurs at = 30° or above.
Where the maximum righting lever occurs at angles of
between = 15° and = 30°, the corresponding area
under the righting lever curve shall be:
A = 0,055 + 0,001 (30° -max) (m  rad)
where:
θmax is the angle of heel, in degrees, at which the right-
ing lever curve reaches its maximum.
1.3 The area under the righting lever curve be-
tween = 30° and = 40° or between = 30° and
––––––––––––––
1 Refer to the Code on Intact Stability for All Types of Ships
Covered by IMO Instruments, adopted by the Organization by
resolution A.749(18), as amended by resolution MSC.75(69).
Chapter 1
Page 8–1
the angle of flooding θF2 if this angle is less than 40°,
shall not be less than 0,03 m  rad.
1.4 The righting lever GZ shall be at least 0,2 m
at an angle of heel equal to or greater than 30°.
1.5 The maximum righting lever shall occur at an
angle of heel not less than 15°.
1.6 The initial metacentric height GMT shall not
be less than 0,15 m.
2. Criteria for Residual Stability after Damage
2.1 The stability required in the final condition
after damage, and after equalization where provided,
shall be determined as specified in 2.1.1 to 2.1.4.
2.1.1 The positive residual righting lever curve
shall have a minimum range of 15° beyond the angle
of equilibrium. This range may be reduced to a mini-
mum of 10°, in the case where the area under the
righting lever curve is that specified in 2.1.2, in-
creased by the ratio:
15
range
where the range is expressed in degrees. The range
shall be taken as the difference between the equilib-
rium heel angle and the heel angle at which the resid-
ual righting lever subsequently becomes negative or
the angle at which progressive flooding occurs,
whichever is less.
2.1.2 The area under the righting lever curve shall
be at least 0,015 m  rad, measured from the angle of
equilibrium to the lesser of:
.1 the angle at which progressive flooding occurs;
and
.2 27° measured from the upright.
2.1.3 A residual righting lever shall be obtained
within the range of positive stability, taking into ac-
count the greatest of the following heeling moments:
.1 the crowding of all passengers towards one
side;
.2 the launching of all fully loaded davit-launched
survival craft on one side; and
Chapter 1 Annex 8 Stability of Monohull Craft I - Part 3
Page 8–2 GL 2012

.3 due to wind pressure, as calculated by the
formula:
heeling moment
GZ = + 0, 04(m)
displacement
However, in no case, this righting lever shall be less
than 0,1 m.
2.1.4 For the purpose of calculating the heeling
moments referred to in 2.1.3, the following assump-
tions shall be made:
.1 Moments due to crowding of passengers. This
should be calculated in accordance with para-
graph 2.10 of the Code.
.2 Moments due to launching of all fully loaded
davit-launched survival craft on one side:
.2.1 all lifeboats and rescue boats fitted on the side
to which the ship has heeled after having sus-
tained damage shall be assumed to be swung
out fully loaded and ready for lowering;
.2.2 for lifeboats which are arranged to be
launched fully loaded from the stowed position,
the maximum heeling moment during launch-
ing shall be taken;
.2.3 a fully loaded davit-launched liferaft attached
to each davit on the side to which the ship has
heeled after having sustained damage shall be
assumed to be swung out ready for lowering;
.2.4 persons not in the life-saving appliances which
are swung out shall not provide either addi-
tional heeling or righting moment; and
.2.5 life-saving appliances on the side of the ship
opposite to the side to which the ship has
heeled shall be assumed to be in a stowed posi-
tion.
.3 Moments due to wind pressure:
.3.1 the wind pressure shall be taken as (120 {VW/
26}2) (N/m2), where VW = wind speed (m/s),
corresponding to the worst intended condition;
.3.2 the area applicable shall be the projected lat-
eral area of the ship above the waterline corre-
sponding to the intact condition; and
.3.3 the moment arm shall be the vertical distance
from a point at one half of the mean draught
corresponding to the intact condition to the
centre of gravity of the lateral area.
2.2 In intermediate stages of flooding, the maxi-
mum righting lever shall be at least 0,05m and the
range of positive righting levers shall be at least 7°. In
all cases, only one breach in the hull and only one free
surface need be assumed.
I - Part 3 Annex 9 Definitions, Requirements and Compliance Criteria related to
GL 2012 Operational and Safety Performance
Annex 9
Definitions, Requirements and Compliance Criteria related to Operational
and Safety Performance
This annex applies to all types of craft. Tests to evalu-
ate operational safety shall be conducted on the first
craft of a new design or of a design incorporating new
features which may modify the results of a previous
testing. The tests shall be carried out to a schedule
agreed between the Administration and the manufac-
turer. Where conditions of service warrant additional
testing (e.g., low temperature), the Administration or
base port State authorities as appropriate may require
further demonstrations. Functional descriptions, tech-
nical and system specifications relevant to the under-
standing and evaluation of craft performance shall be
available.
The objective of these tests is to provide essential
information and guidance to enable the craft to be
operated safely under normal and emergency condi-
tions within the design speed and environmental enve-
lope.
The following procedures are outlined as require-
ments in dealing with verification of craft perform-
ance.
1. Performance
1.1 General
1.1.1 The craft shall meet the applicable opera-
tional requirements in Section 17 of this Code and this
annex for all extremes of passenger and load configu-
rations for which certification is required. The limit-
ing sea state related to the different modes of opera-
tion shall be verified by tests and analyses of a craft of
the type for which certification is requested.
1.1.2 Operational control of the craft shall be in
accordance with procedures established by the appli-
cant for operation in service. Procedures to be estab-
lished shall be start procedure, cruise procedures,
normal and emergency stop and manoeuvre proce-
dures.
1.1.3 The procedures established under 1.1.2 shall:
.1 demonstrate that normal manoeuvres and craft
responses to failures are consistent in perform-
ance;
.2 use methods or devices that are safe and reli-
able; and
Chapter 1
Page 9–1
.3 include allowance for any time lag in the exe-
cution of procedures that may reasonably be
expected in service.
1.1.4 Procedures required by this annex shall be
conducted over water of sufficient depth such that
craft performance will not be affected.
1.1.5 Tests shall be conducted at minimum practi-
cable weight and additional testing shall be conducted
at maximum weight sufficient to establish the need for
additional restrictions and for testing to examine the
effect of weight.
2. Stopping
2.1 This test is to establish the acceleration ex-
perienced when stopping the craft in calm water with
no passenger load or cargo load during the following
conditions:
.1 normal stop for 90 % of maximum speed;
.2 emergency stop for 90 % of maximum speed;
and
.3 crash stop from 90 % of maximum speed and
from any transitional mode speed.
2.2 The tests referred to in 2.1.1 and 2.1.2 shall
document that the accelerations do not exceed safety
level 1 in annex 3 when control levers are used in
accordance to written procedures as given in the craft
operating manual or in an automatic mode. Should
safety level 1 be exceeded during normal stop, control
systems shall be modified in order to avoid ex-
ceedance or passengers shall be required to be seated
during normal stop. Should safety level 1 be exceeded
during emergency stop, then written procedures in the
craft operating manual shall include detailed informa-
tion of how to avoid exceedance or the control system
shall be modified to avoid exceedance.
2.3 The test referred to in 2.1.3 shall document
that the accelerations do not exceed safety level 2 in
annex 3 when control levers of automatic modes are
used in a manner which will give the highest accelera-
tions. If safety level 2 is exceeded then the craft oper-
ating manual shall include a warning that it is a risk
to passengers being injured, if a crash stop is per-
formed.
Chapter 1 Annex 9 Definitions, Requirements and Compliance Criteria related to
Page 9–2 Operational and Safety Performance
2.4 Other tests shall be repeated during craft
turning to establish the need or otherwise to impose
any speed-related restrictions during manoeuvres.
3. Cruise Performance
3.1 This test is to establish the craft performance
and accelerations experienced during cruise modes
with no passenger load or cargo load during the fol-
lowing conditions:
.1 normal operation conditions are those in which
the craft will safely cruise at any heading while
manually operated, auto-pilot assisted oper-
ated or operated with any automatic control
system in normal mode; and
.2 worst intended conditions, referred to in 1.4.57
of this Code, are those in which it shall be pos-
sible to maintain safe cruise without excep-
tional piloting skill. However, operations at all
headings relative to the wind and sea may not
be possible. For type of craft having a higher
performance standard in non-displacement
mode, the performance and accelerations shall
also be established at displacement mode dur-
ing operation in the worst intended condition.
3.2 Operation levels, as defined in 3.1, shall be
established and documented by full-scale tests in at
least two relevant sea conditions and in head, beam
and following seas. It shall be shown that the period
of every test (run) and the number of series are suffi-
cient for achieving reliable measurements. In every
sea state tested, the aggregate time in each direction
shall not be less than 15 min. Model tests and mathe-
matical simulations could be used to verify the per-
formance in the worst intended conditions.
Limits for normal operation condition shall be docu-
mented by measurements of craft speed, heading to the
wave and interpolation of measurements of maximum
horizontal accelerations in accordance with 2.4 of
annex 3. Measurement of wave height and period shall
be made to the maximum extent practicable.
Limits for worst intended condition shall be docu-
mented by measurements of craft speed, wave height
and period, heading to the wave and by root mean
square (RMS) values of horizontal accelerations in
accordance with 2.4 of annex 3 and of vertical accel-
erations close to the craft longitudinal centre of grav-
ity. RMS values could be used for extrapolation of
peak values. To obtain the expected peak values re-
lated to structural design load and safety levels (one
per 5-min exceedance), multiply the RMS values by
3.0 or
where:
C = 2 ln N
N is the number of successive amplitudes
within the relevant period.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
If not otherwise verified by model tests or by mathe-
matical calculations, it might be assumed a linear
relation between wave height and accelerations based
on measurements in the two sea conditions. The worst
intended conditions shall not exceed 150% of the more
severe of the two measured sea conditions. Limits for
worst intended condition shall be documented both
related to passenger safety in accordance with 2.4 of
annex 3 and related to the actual structural design
load of the craft.
3.3 The tests and verification process shall
document the limiting seas for safe operation of the
craft:
.1 in normal operation at 90 % of maximum speed
the accelerations shall not exceed safety level 1
in annex 3 with an average of one per 5-min
period. The craft operating manual shall in-
clude detailed description of the effects of
speed reduction or change of heading to the
waves in order to prevent exceedance;
.2 in the worst intended conditions, with reduced
speed as necessary, the accelerations shall not
exceed safety level 2 in annex 3 with an aver-
age of one per 5-min period, nor shall any
other craft characteristic motion as pitch, roll
and yaw exceed levels that could impede the
safety of passengers. In worst intended condi-
tions, with reduced speed as necessary, craft
shall be safely manoeuvrable and provide ade-
quate stability in order that the craft can con-
tinue safe operation to the nearest place of ref-
uge, provided caution is exercised in handling.
Passengers shall be required to be seated when
safety level 1 in annex 3 is exceeded; and
.3 within the actual structural design load for the
craft, with reduced speed and change of head-
ing, as necessary.
3.4 Turning and manoeuvrability
The craft shall be safely controllable and manoeuvra-
ble during:
.1 hull-borne operation;
.2 operation in non-displacement mode;
.3 take-off, landing;
.4 any intermediate or transition modes, as appli-
cable; and
.5 berthing operations, as applicable.
I - Part 3 Annex 9 Definitions, Requirements and Compliance Criteria related to
GL 2012 Operational and Safety Performance
4. Effects of Failures or Malfunction
4.1 General
The limits of safe operation, special handling proce-
dures and any operational restrictions shall be exam-
ined and developed as a result of full-scale trials con-
ducted by simulating possible equipment failures.
The failures to be examined shall be those leading to
major or more severe effects as determined from
evaluation of FMEA or similar analysis.
Failures to be examined shall be agreed between the
craft manufacturer and the Administration and each
single failure shall be examined in a progressive man-
ner.
4.2 Objects of tests
Examination of each failure shall result in:
.1 determining safe limits of craft operation at the
time of failure, beyond which the failure will
result in degradation beyond safety level 2;
.2 determining crew member's actions, if any, to
minimize or counter the effect of the failure;
and
.3 determining craft or machinery restrictions to
be observed to enable the craft to proceed to a
place of refuge with the failure present.
4.3 Failures to be examined
Equipment failures shall include, but not be limited to,
the following:
.1 total loss of propulsion power;
.2 total loss of lift power (for ACV and SES);
Chapter 1
Page 9–3
.3 total failure of control of one propulsion sys-
tem;
.4 involuntary application of full propulsion
thrust (positive or negative) on one system;
.5 failure of control of one directional control
system;
.6 involuntary full deflection of one directional
control system;
.7 failure of control of trim control syste m;
.8 involuntary full deflection of one trim control
system element; and
.9 total loss of electrical power.
Failures shall be fully representative of service condi-
tions and shall be simulated as accurately as possible
in the most critical craft manoeuvre where the failure
will have maximum impact.
4.4 "Dead ship" test
In order to establish craft motions and direction of
laying to wind and waves, for the purposes of deter-
mining the conditions of a craft evacuation, the craft
shall be stopped and all main machinery shut down
for sufficient time that the craft's heading relative to
wind and waves has stabilized. This test shall be car-
ried out on an opportunity basis to establish patterns
of the design's "dead ship" behaviour under a variety
of wind and sea states.
I - Part 3 Annex 10 Criteria for Testing and Evaluation of Seats
GL 2012
Annex 10
Criteria for Testing and Evaluation of Seats
1. Purpose and Scope
The purpose of these criteria is to provide require-
ments for revenue and crew seats, seat anchorage
and seat accessories and their installation to mini-
mize occupant injury and/or disruption of
egress/ingress if the craft suffers a collision.
2. Static Seat Tests
2.1 The requirements of this section are appli-
cable to all crew and revenue seats .
2.2 All seats to which this paragraph applies,
along with their supports and deck attachments, shall
be designed to withstand at least the following static
forces applied in the direction of the craft:
.1 Forward direction: a force of 2,25 kN,
.2 After direction: a force of 1,5 kN,
.3 Transverse direction: a force of 1,5 kN,
.4 Vertically downward: a force of 2,25 kN, and
.5 Vertically upward: a force of 1,5 kN.
A seat shall comprise a frame, bottom and back.
Forces applied in the fore or aft direction of the seat
shall be applied horizontally to the seat back 350 mm
above the seat bottom. Forces applied in the trans-
verse seat direction shall be applied horizontally to
the seat bottom. Vertical upward forces shall be
evenly distributed to the corners of the seat bottom
frame. Vertical downward forces shall be uniformly
distributed over the seat bottom.
If a seating unit consists of more than one seating
position, these forces shall be applied at each seating
position concurrently during the tests.
2.3 When the forces are applied to a seat, con-
sideration shall be given to the direction in which the
seat is to face in the craft. For example, if the seat
faces sideways, the transverse craft force would be
applied fore and aft on the seat and the forward craft
force would be applied transversely on the seat.
2.4 Each seating unit to be tested shall be at-
tached to the support structure similar to the manner
in which it will be attached to the deck structure in
the craft. Although a rigid support structure can be
used for these tests, a support structure, having the
same strength and stiffness as the support structure in
the craft, is preferred.
Chapter 1
Page 10–1
2.5 The forces described in 2.2.1 to 2.2.3 shall
be applied to the seat through a cylindrical surface
having a radius of 80 mm and a width at least equal
to the width of the seat. The surface shall be equipped
with at least one force transducer able to measure the
forces applied.
2.6 The seat shall be considered acceptable if:
.1 under the influence of the forces referred to in
2.2.1 to 2.2.3, the permanent displacement
measured at the point of application of the
force is not more than 400 mm;
.2 no part of the seat, the seat mountings or the
accessories become completely detached dur-
ing the tests;
.3 the seat remains firmly held, even if one or
more of the anchorages is partly detached;
.4 all of the locking systems remain locked dur-
ing the entire test but the adjustment and lock-
ing systems need not be operational after the
tests; and
.5 rigid parts of the seat with which the occupant
may come into contact shall present a curved
surface with a radius of at least 5 mm.
2.7 The requirements of section 3 may be used
in lieu of the requirements of this section provided
that the accelerations used for the tests are at least
3g.
3. Dynamic Seat Tests
3.1 The requirements of this section are appli-
cable in addition to those in 2.1 for crew and revenue
seats in craft having a design collision load of 3g or
greater.
3.2 All seats for which this section applies, the
seat supporting structure, the attachment to the deck
structure, the lap belt, if installed, and shoulder har-
ness, if installed, shall be designed to withstand the
maximum acceleration force that can be imposed
upon them during a design collision. Consideration
shall be given to the orientation of the seat relative to
the acceleration force (i.e. whether the seat is for-
ward-, aft-, or side-facing).
3.3 The acceleration pulse to which the seat is
subjected shall be representative of the collision
time-history of the craft. If the collision time-history
is not known, or cannot be simulated, the accelera-
tion time-history envelope shown in the figure can be
used.
Chapter 1 Annex 10 Criteria for Testing and Evaluation of Seats
Page 10–2
3.4 In the test frame, each seat unit and its ac- 3.9
cessories (e.g., lap belts and shoulder harnesses) requirements of this section shall be considered ac-
shall be attached to the support structure similar to ceptable if:
the manner in which it will be attached in the craft.
The support structure can be a rigid surface; how- .1
ever, a support structure having the equivalent
strength and stiffness as the support structure in the
craft is preferred. Other seats and/or tables with
which an occupant may come in contact during a
collision shall be included in the test frame in an
orientation and with a method of attachment typical .2
of that in the craft.
g/gcoll
1.0
0.7
.3
10 20 70 80 90 150 Time [ms]
Figure – Acceleration time-history envelope .3.1
3.5 During the dynamic seat test, a fiftieth per-
centile anthropomorphic test dummy, suitable for the
test being conducted, shall be placed in the seat in an
upright seating position. If a typical seating unit is
composed of more than one occupant seat, a test
dummy shall be placed in each occupant seat in the
unit. The dummy, or dummies, shall be secured in the
seat unit in accordance with procedures of recog-
nized national standards1 and be secured using only
the lap belt and shoulder harness if they are installed.
Tray tables and other such devices shall be placed in
the position that would cause the greatest potential
for an occupant to become injured.
3.6 The test dummy shall be instrumented and .3.2
calibrated, in accordance with the requirements of a
recognized national standard, so as to permit, as a
minimum, calculation of the head injury criterion,
calculation of the thoracic trauma index, measure-
ment of force in the femur, and measurement of ex-
tension and flexion of the neck.
3.7 If more than one dummy is used in the tests,
the dummy located in the seat having the highest
potential for an occupant to be injured shall be the
one instrumented. The other dummy or dummies need
not be instrumented.
3.8 The tests shall be conducted and the instru-
mentation shall be sampled at a rate sufficient to
reliably show response of the dummy in accordance
with the requirements of a recognized national stan-
dard2. .3.3
–––––––––––––– .3.4
1 Refer to ECE 80 with addendum 79. Other national standards
may be acceptable. .3.5
2 Refer to the specifications of International Standard ISO 6487 -
Technique of measurement in impact tests (1987) or SAE J211 -
Instrumentation.
I - Part 3
GL 2012
The seat unit tested in accordance with the
the seat unit and tables installed in the seat
unit or area do not become dislodged from the
supporting deck structure and do not deform
in a manner that would cause the occupant to
become trapped or injured;
the lap belt, if installed, remains attached and
on the test dummy's pelvis during the impact.
The shoulder harness, if installed, remains at-
tached and in the immediate vicinity of the test
dummy's shoulder during the impact. After the
impact, the release mechanisms of any in-
stalled lap belt and shoulder harness shall be
operative;
the following acceptability criteria are met:
the head injury criterion (HIC), calculated in
accordance with the formula, does not exceed
500
2.5
⎡ 1 t2 ⎤
HCI = ( t2 - t1 ) ⎢ ∫ a ( t ) dt ⎥
⎢⎣ t2 -t1 t1 ⎥⎦
where:
tl and t2 are the beginning and ending times
(in seconds) of the interval in which the HIC
is a maximum. The term a(t) is the resultant
measured acceleration in the head of the
dummy in g;
the thoracic trauma index (TTI), calculated in
accordance with the formula, does not exceed
30g except for periods totalling less than 3 ms
g R + g LS
TTI =
2
or acceleration at the centre of gravity
where:
gR is the acceleration in g of either the upper
or lower rib;
gLS is the acceleration in g of the lower spine;
and
neck flexion does not exceed 88 Nm;
neck extension does not exceed 48 Nm;
in lieu of the requirements of subparagraphs
.3.3 and .3.4 above, a seatback or headrest of
at least 850 mm above the seat cushion is ac-
ceptable; and
I - Part 3 Annex 10 Criteria for Testing and Evaluation of Seats Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 10–3

.3.6 the force in the femur does not exceed 10 kN .4 loads on the upper torso harness straps do not
except that it cannot exceed 8 kN for periods exceed 7,8 kN or a total of 8,9 kN if dual
totalling more than 20 ms; and straps are used.
I - Part 3 Annex 11 Open Reversible Liferafts Craft
GL 2012
Annex 11
Open Reversible Liferafts Craft
1. General
1.1 All open reversible liferafts shall :
.1 be constructed with proper workmanship and
materials;
.2 not be damaged in stowage throughout the air
temperature range of -18 °C to +65 °C;
.3 be capable of operating throughout an air
temperature range of -18 °C to +65 °C and a
seawater temperature range of -1 °C to +30
°C;
.4 be rot-proof, corrosion-resistant and not be
unduly affected by seawater, oil or fungal at-
tack;
.5 be stable and maintain their shape when in-
flated and fully laden; and
.6 be fitted with retro-reflective material, where
it will assist in detection, and in accordance
with the recommendations adopted by the Or-
ganization. 1
2. Construction
2.1 The open reversible liferaft shall be so con-
structed that when it is dropped into the water in its
container from a height of 10 m, the liferaft and its
equipment will operate satisfactorily. If the open
reversible liferaft is to be stowed at a height of more
than 10 m above the waterline in the lightest seago-
ing condition, it shall be of a type which has been
satisfactorily drop-tested from at least that height.
2.2 The open reversible floating liferaft shall be
capable of withstanding repeated jumps on to it from
a height of at least 4.5 m.
2.3 The open reversible liferaft and its fittings
shall be so constructed as to enable it to be towed at
a speed of 3 knots in calm water when loaded with its
full complement of persons and equipment, with the
sea-anchor deployed.
2.4 The open reversible liferaft when fully in-
flated shall be capable of being boarded from the
water whichever way up it inflates.
––––––––––––––
1 Refer to the Recommendation on the Use and Fitting of Retro-
Reflective Materials on Life-Saving Appliances, adopted by the
Organization by resolution A.658(16).
Chapter 1
Page 11–1
2.5 The main buoyancy chamber shall be di-
vided into:
.1 not less than two separate compartments, each
inflated through a nonreturn inflation valve on
each compartment; and
.2 the buoyancy chambers shall be so arranged
that in the event of one of the compartments
being damaged or failing to inflate, the intact
compartment shall be able to support, with
positive freeboard over the open reversible lif-
eraft's entire periphery, the number of persons
which the liferaft is permitted to accommo-
date, each having a mass of 75 kg and seated
in their normal positions.
2.6 The floor of the open reversible liferaft shall
be waterproof.
2.7 The open reversible liferaft shall be inflated
with a non-toxic gas by an inflation system complying
with the requirements of paragraph 4.2.2 of the LSA
Code. Inflation shall be completed within the period
of one minute at an ambient temperature of between
18 °C and 20 °C and within a period of three minutes
at an ambient temperature of -18 °C After inflation
the open reversible liferaft shall maintain its form
when loaded with its full complement of persons and
equipment.
2.8 Each inflatable compartment shall be capa-
ble of withstanding a pressure equal to at least three
times the working pressure and shall be prevented
from reaching a pressure exceeding twice the work-
ing pressure either by means of relief valves or by a
limited gas supply. Means shall be provided for fit-
ting the topping-up pump or bellows.
2.9 The surface of the buoyancy tubes shall be of
non-slip material. At least 25 % of these tubes shall
be of a highly visible colour.
2.10 The number of persons which an open re-
versible liferaft shall be permitted to ccommodate
shall be equal to the lesser of:
.1 the greatest whole number obtained by divid-
ing by 0,096 the volume, measured in cubic
metres, of the main buoyancy tubes (which for
this purpose shall not include the thwarts, if
fitted) when inflated; or
.2 the greatest whole number obtained by divid-
ing by 0,372 the inner horizontal cross-
sectional area of the open reversible liferaft
Chapter 1 Annex 11 Open Reversible Liferafts Craft
Page 11–2
measured in square metres (which for this
purpose may include the thwart or thwarts, if
fitted) measured to the innermost edge of the
buoyancy tubes; or
.3 the number of persons having an average
mass of 75 kg, all wearing lifejackets, that can
be seated inboard of the buoyancy tubes with-
out interfering with the operation of any of the
liferaft's equipment.
3. Open Reversible Liferaft Fittings
3.1 Lifelines shall be securely becketed around
the inside and outside of the open reversible liferaft.
3.2 The open reversible liferaft shall be fitted
with an efficient painter of a length suitable for
automatic inflation on reaching the water. For open
reversible liferafts accommodating more than 30
persons an additional bowsing-in line shall be fitted.
3.3 The breaking strength of the painter system,
including its means of attachment to the open re-
versible liferaft, except the weak link required by
paragraph 4.1.6.2 of the LSA Code, shall be:
.1 7,5 kN for open reversible liferafts accommo-
dating up to 8 persons;
.2 10,0 kN for open reversible liferafts accom-
modating 9 to 30 persons; and
.3 15,0 kN for open reversible liferafts accom-
modating more than 30 persons.
3.4 The open reversible liferaft shall be fitted
with at least the following number of inflated ramps
to assist boarding from the sea whichever way up the
raft inflates:
.1 one boarding ramp for open reversible lif-
erafts accommodating up to 30 persons; or
.2 two boarding ramps for open reversible lif-
erafts accommodating more than 30 persons;
such boarding ramps shall be 180° apart.
3.5 The open reversible liferaft shall be fitted
with water pockets complying with the following
requirements:
.1 the cross-sectional area of the pockets shall be
in the shape of an isosceles triangle with the
base of the triangle attached to the buoyancy
tubes of the open reversible liferaft;
.2 the design shall be such that the pockets fill to
approximately 60 % of capacity within 15 s to
25 s of deployment;
.3 the pockets attached to each buoyancy tube
shall normally have aggregate capacity of be-
tween 125 l and 150 l for inflatable open re-
versible liferafts up to and including the 10-
person size;
I - Part 3
GL 2012
.4 the pockets to be fitted to each buoyancy tube
on liferafts certified to carry more than 10
persons shall have, as far as practicable, an
aggregate capacity of 12 N litres, where N is
the number of persons carried;
.5 each pocket on a buoyancy tube shall be at-
tached so that when the pocket is in the de-
ployed position it is attached along the full
length of its upper edges to, or close to, the
lowest part of the lower buoyancy tube; and
.6 the pockets shall be distributed symmetrically
round the circumference of the liferaft with
sufficient separation between each pocket to
enable air to escape readily.
3.6 At least one manually controlled lamp com-
plying with the requirements shall be fitted on the
upper and lower surfaces of the buoyancy tubes.
3.7 Suitable automatic drain arrangements shall
be provided on each side of the floor of the liferaft in
the following manner:
.1 one for open reversible liferafts accommodat-
ing up to 30 persons; or
.2 two for open reversible liferafts accommodat-
ing more than 30 persons.
3.8 The equipment of every open reversible
liferaft shall consist of:
.1 one buoyant rescue quoit, attached to not less
than 30 m of buoyant line with a breaking
strength of at least 1 kN;
.2 two safety knives of the non-folding type, hav-
ing a buoyant handle, shall be fitted attached
to open reversible liferaft by light lines. They
shall be stowed in pockets so that, irrespective
of the way in which the open reversible liferaft
inflates, one will be readily available on the
top surface of the upper buoyancy tube in a
suitable position to enable the painter to be
readily cut;
.3 one buoyant bailer;
.4 two sponges;
.5 one sea-anchor permanently attached to the
open reversible liferaft in such a way as to be
readily deployable when the open reversible
liferaft inflates. The position of the sea-anchor
shall be clearly marked on both buoyancy
tubes;
.6 two buoyant paddles;
.7 one first-aid outfit in a waterproof case capa-
ble of being closed tightly after use;
.8 one whistle or equivalent sound signal;
.9 two hand flares;
I - Part 3 Annex 11 Open Reversible Liferafts Craft Chapter 1
GL 2012 Page 11–3

.10 one waterproof electric torch suitable for .9 launching instructions.

Morse signalling together with one spare set
of batteries and one spare bulb in a water-
5. Markings on Open Reversible Inflatable
proof container;
Liferafts
.11 one repair outfit for repairing punctures in
The open reversible liferafts shall be marked with:
buoyancy compartments; and
.12 one topping-up pump or bellows. .1 maker's name or trademark;
.2 serial number;
3.9 The equipment specified in 3.8 is designated
an HSC Pack. .3 date of manufacture (month and year);
3.10 Where appropriate, the equipment shall be .4 name and place of service station where it was
stowed in a container which, if it is not an integral last serviced; and
part of, or permanently attached to, the open reversi-
ble liferaft, shall be stowed and secured to the open .5 number of persons it is permitted to accom-
reversible liferaft and be capable of floating in water modate on the top of each buoyancy tube, in
for at least 30 min without damage to its contents. characters not less than 100 mm in height and
Irrespective of whether the equipment container is an of a colour contrasting with that of the tube.
integral part of, or is permanently attached to, the
open reversible liferaft, the equipment shall be read- 6. Instructions and Information
ily accessible irrespective of which way up the open
reversible liferaft inflates. The line which secures the Instructions and information required for inclusion in
equipment container to the open reversible liferaft the craft's training manual and in the instructions for
shall have a breaking strength of 2 kN or a breaking on-board maintenance shall be in a form suitable for
strength of 3:1 based on the mass of the complete inclusion in such training manual and instructions
equipment pack, whichever is the greater. for on-board maintenance. Instructions and informa-
tion shall be in a clear and concise form and shall
4. Containers for Open Reversible Inflatable include, as appropriate, the following:
Liferafts .1 general description of the open reversible
liferaft and its equipment;
4.1 The open reversible liferafts shall be packed
in a container that is: .2 installation arrangements;
.1 so constructed as to withstand conditions
encountered at sea; .3 operational instructions, including use of
associated survival equipment; and
.2 of sufficient inherent buoyancy, when packed
with the liferaft and its equipment, to pull the .4 servicing requirements.
painter from within and to operate the infla-
tion mechanism shall the craft sink; and 7. Testing of Open Reversible Inflatable Lif-
erafts
.3 as far as practicable, watertight, except for
drain holes in the container bottom.
7.1 When testing open reversible liferafts in
4.2 The container shall be marked with: accordance with the recommendations of resolution
MSC.81(70), part 1:
.1 maker's name or trademark;
.1 tests No. 5.5, 5.12, 5.16, 5.17.2, 5.17.10,
.2 serial number; 5.17.11, 5.17.12, 5.18 and 5.20 may be omit-
ted;
.3 the number of persons it is permitted to carry;
.2 the part of test No. 5.8 regarding closing ar-
.4 non-SOLAS reversible;
rangement may be omitted,
.5 type of emergency pack enclosed;
.3 the temperature – 30 °C in test No. 5.17.3 and
.6 date when last serviced; 5.17.5 may be substituted with -18 °C; and
.7 length of painter; .4 the drop height of 18 m in test No. 5.1.2 may
be substituted with 10 m.
.8 maximum permitted height of stowage above
waterline (depending on drop-test height); Omittances and substitution, as described above,
and shall be reflected in the type approval certificate.
I - Part 3 Annex 12 Factors to be Considered in Determining Craft Operating Chapter 1
GL 2012 Limitations 1 Page 12–1

Annex 12

Factors to be Considered in Determining Craft Operating Limitations 1

1. Purpose and Scope quirements for stability and buoyancy in Sec-

The purpose of this annex is to identify the parame-
ters to which consideration should be given when
determining the worst intended conditions (defined in
1.4.61) and other operational limitations (defined in
1.4.41) for insertion into the Permit to Operate, in
order to facilitate consistent application of the Code.
2. Factors to be considered
As a minimum, the following factors shall be consid-
ered:
tion 2 and associated annexes.
.5 The safe seakeeping limitations (especially
significant wave height) considering the
known stability hazards listed in 2.1.5, the op-
erating conditions on the intended route (see
18.1.3.2) and the motions experienced during
operation defined in 3.3 of annex 9.
.6 The structural safety of the craft in critical
design conditions according to Section 3.

.1 The maximum distance from refuge implied by
1.3.4.
.2 The availability of rescue resources to comply
with 1.4.12.1 (category A craft only).
.3 Minimum air temperature (susceptibility to
icing), visibility and depth of water for safe
operation as addressed by 1.4.61.
.4 The significant wave height and maximum
mean wind speed used when applying the re-
.7 The safe deployment and operation of evacua-
tion systems and survival craft as required by
8.6.5.
.8 The safe handling limitations determined in
accordance with the sea trials required by
Section 17 and annexes 3 and 9, identifying
any limitations on weight and centre-of-
gravity position according to 17.3, and the ef-
fects of failures and malfunctions according to
17.4.

––––––––––––––
1 Refer to the guidelines to be developed by the Organization.